THE
//z t
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
BALTIMORE
i885— 1886
vv
I11<°t
INDEX TO JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS, Nos. 43-51.
OCTOBER, 1885 — SEPTEMBER, 1886.
( 1 Mailed reference is not ma<le to official announcements ami regulations, as these are given in their Anal form in the Annual Register.)
Academic Staff, 14, 15, 113, 114.
Acids, Antiseptic Action of, J. K. Duggan, 61.
\dams, 11. 15, 1-"); — Classes and lectures, 25, 51, 69, 113, 132, 133, 134; —
First "Tabular View" of Harvard College, 91.
Vdler, Cyrus, On Hebrew Words in Codex Sangallensis, etc., 63; — Classes,
129.
Admission to the University, 137-139.
Alien, F. I)., Greek and Latin Inscriptions from Palestine, 45.
Alligator, Physiology of Heart of, T. VV. Mills, 7.
American Chemical Journal, 14, 119, 140.
American Journal of Archaeology, 47.
American Journal of Mathematics, 14, 51, 72, 100, 140.
American Journal of Philology, 14, 132, 140;— Contents of Vol. VI, 45.
Ancient Languages: Programmes for 1886-87, 124, 12i; — Work of 1885-86,
128, 129.
Andrews, E. A., 99.
Anglo-Saxon : Classes in, 25, 69 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 126 ;— Work of
1885-86, 130.
Antilegomena Epistles, Reproduction in Phototype of Manuscript of, 41, 95.
Antiseptic Action of Acids, J. R. Duggan, 61.
Appointments, 33.
Arachnids, Embryology of, A. T. Bruce, 85.
Archaeological Research in America, Methods of, P. W. Putnam, 64, 89.
Archaeological Society, Proceedings, 64.
Archeology, American Journal of, 47.
Archaeology, Assyrian and Babylonian : Lectures, 32, 54, 56, 89, 90.
Arm-pitting among the Greeks, George L. Kittredge, 45.
Assyrian Archaeology, Lectures on, 32, 90 ; — Recent Discoveries in, 54.
Art, Lectures on, 28.
Attendance on Various Courses of Instruction, 21.
Babylonia. Recent Explorations in, W. H. Ward, 89; — also see Assyria.
Barcroft, D., Note on Partitions, 64.
Beaufort Harbor, Note on Eishes of, O. P. Jenkins, 11.
Bell, C. J., 51.
Bibliography to Lectures on Physical Training, 31 ; — to Lectures on Ger-
man Literature, 54; — to Lectures on Printed New Testament, 55; — to
Lectures on Assyrian Archaeology, 56.
Billings, J. S., 15.
Biology: Classes in, 23, 67 ; — Programmes for 1886-87, 120;— Work of
1885-86, 122; — Studies from the Biological Laboratory, 14, 123.
Bloomfield, M., 15; — Classes, 24, 68, 113, 125, 129; — Correlation of v and
m in the Veda, 93.
Bluntsclili, J. ('., ( )n the Manuscripts of, in the Library of the Johns Hop-
kins University, J. M. Vincent, 59.
Botany: Classes in, 121.
Bowen, B. L., < lasses, 25, 69, 132.
Brackett, J. R., 34.
Brackett, R. N., 51.
Bright, J. W., 15;— Classes, 25, 69, 114, 126, 130;— On the Silent t in
Modern English, 62.
Brooks, W. K., 15, 99;— Classes, 23, 67, 113, 121, 122;— On the Artificial
Propagation and Cultivation of Oysters in Floats, 10; — Notes on the
Stomatopoda, 10; — A Note on Inheritance, 11; — Stomatopoda of the
"Challenger" Collection, 83; — Origin of Metagenesis among the
Hydro-Medusae, 86 ; — [and Bruce, A. T.] Abstract of Researches on
Embryology of Lunulas Polyphemus, 2.
Browne, W. H., 15;— Classes, 25,"09, 114, 126, 130;— Archives of Maryland
(notice), 42.
Bruce, A. T., Origin of the Endoderm in Lepidoptera, !); — Observations on
the Embrvologv of Insects and Arachnids, 85, 99; — also see Brooks,
W. K.
Burton, R. E., Ode to the Johns Hopkins University, 111.
Calendar, 1, 79, 112, 136.
Callinectes hastatus, Chemical Composition, etc., of Blood of,W. H. Howell, 4.
Canada, Contributions to a History of the French Language of, 45; — Speech
Mixture in French, A. M. Elliott, 62.
Candidates for Matriculation, 19, 51.
Cardiac Rhythm of Fishes and Action of certain Drugs, etc., T. W. Mills, 8.
"Challenger" Collection, Stomatopoda of, W. K. Brooks, 83.
Chemistry : Classes in, 22, 66; — Lectures on Special Topics in, 51 ; — Work
of 1885-86, 119;— Programme for 1886-87, 118;— American Journal
of, 14, 119; — Introduction to Study of, Ira Reinsen (notice), 43.
Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory, 2-11, 88, 123.
Christie, F. A., Classes, 67, 128.
Christmas Recess, 33.
Cilia in Gasteropod Veligers, J. P. McMurrich, 5.
Circulars, Plan of, 14, 112.
Classes, Enumeration of, 22-26, 66-70; — see special subjects.
Classical Study, On the Present Aspect of, B. L. Gildersleeve, lo.'i.
Codex Sangallensis, On Hebrew Words in, Cyrus Adler, 63.
College Courses, General Statement as to, 139.
Commemoration Day, 33.
Composite Portraiture, J. Jastrow, 38.
Consultation Hours, 21.
Correspondence, 34, 37.
Councilman, W. T., 15;— Classes, 114, 123.
Craig, Thomas, 15;— Classes, 22, 66, 114, 115, 117.
Cucumaria sp , Chemical Composition, etc., of Blood of, W. II. Howell, 4.
Degrees of Students, 1876-86, 79.
Dialects of North Greece, H. W. Smyth, 94.
Donaldson, H. H., 15, 99;— Classes, 26, 70, 136;— On the Temperature
Sense, 37 ; — see also Hall, G. S.
Drawing, Classes in, 26, 70.
Duggan, J. R., 51 ; — On the Antiseptic Action of Acids, 61.
Duncan, Louis, 99, 117.
Dutch Village Communities on the Hudson River, Irving Elting (notice), 43.
Echinoderms, Presence of Haemoglobin in, W. H. Howell, 5.
Education, Classes in, 26, 70 ; — Lectures on, 51.
Educational Books and Pamphlets, 33.
Egge, A. E., Classes, 25, 69, 130.
Ei, Reduction to I in Homer, H. W. Smyth, 35.
Electricity and Magnetism, Special Course in, 117.
Elliott, A. M., 15, 51 ;— Classes, 25, 69, 114, 127, 131 ;— Contributions to a
History of the French Language in Canada, 45; — Speech Mixture in
French Canada, 62 ; — Modern Language Notes, 47.
Elocution : Classes in, 26, 70.
Elting, Irving, Dutch Village Communities, etc., (notice), 43.
Ely, R. T., 15, 51 ;— Classes, 26, 70, 114, 133, 135.
Embryology of Limulus Polyphemus, W. K. Brooks and A. T. Bruce, 2 ; —
of the Gasteropods, J. P. McMurrich, 85; — of Insects and Arachnids,
A. T. Bruce, 85.
Emerson, W. H., 51.
Emmott, George H., 33;— Classes, 114, 133, 136.
Endoderm, Origin of, in Lepidoptera, A. T. Bruce, 9.
English: Classes in, 25, 69 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 126; — Work of
1885-86, 130.
Enrolled Students, 1885-86, 20.
Enrolment, 1876-86, 79.
Enumeration of Classes : First half-year, 22-26 ; — Second half-year, 66-70.
Ethical Club, 26, 70.
Ethics, Classes in, 70;— Programme for 1886-87, 136;— Work of 1885-86, 136.
Examinations, Dates of, 100.
Farrar, F. W.. Address, 28.
Fellows, 1885-86, 16, 33.
Fellows by Courtesy, 16, 33, 51.
Fields, J. C, On forms reducible to the forms (a, 0, c), (a, Jo, c) and (o, b, a),
38.
Finanzpolitik im Nordamerikanischen Burgerkrieg, A. Yager (notice), 64.
Fishes, The Cardiac Rhvthm of, and Action of certain Drugs and Poisons,
T. W. Mills, 8;— Fishes of Beaufort Harbor, N. C, O. P. Jenkins, 11.
Fontaine, J. A., Classes, 25, 69, 132.
Franklin, F, 15;— Classes, 22, 06, 114, 115, 116, 117.
French: Classes in, 25, 69 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 127; — Work of
188-5-86, 131.
French Literature, Lectures on, 28, 54.
Frothingham, A. L., Jr., Lectures on Assyrian Archaeology, 32, 90 ; — Ifdi
of the Facade of San Paolo fuori-le-mura of Rome, 47 ; — Recent Changes
and Archaeological Discoveries in Rome, (14.
Gasteropods, Notes on Embryology of, J. P. McMurrich, 86.
Oasteropod Veligers, Existence of a Post-oral Band of Cilia in, J. P. McMur-
rich, 5.
Genitive Absolute and its Use especially in the Attic Orators, E. II. Spieker.
45.
Geographical Distribution of Students, 1876-86, 79.
Geology: Lectures on, 28; — Programme for 1886-87, 120; — Work of
L885-86, 120.
German: Classes in, 24, 68 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 125;— Work of
1885-86, 130.
German Literature, Public Lectures on, 64 J — Bibliography to Lectures. 54.
Gildersleeve, B. L., 15;— Classes, 23, 67, 113, 124, 128;^On the Present
Aspect of Classical Studv, 105; — also see American Journal of Philologv.
Oilman. D. C. 15, 51.
11
JOHNS HOPKINS
Goebel, J., 15, 114 ;— Classes, 24, 68, 130 ; — Lectures on German Literature,
54.
Graduate Courses, General Statement as to, 138.
Graduate Students, Roll of, 16, 33, 51.
Greek: Classes in, 23, 67 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 124;— Work of
1885-86, 128.
Greek Sculpture in the Museums of Athens, Kussell Sturgis, 64.
Gregory, Caspar Rene\ 33.
Haemoglobin in the Echinoderms, W. H. Howell, 5.
Haldeman, G. B., 99.
Hall, G. S., 15 ;— Classes, 26, 33, 70, 113, 122, 135, 136 ;— [and H. H. Donald-
son] Motor Sensations of the Skin, 36.
Hall, Isaac H., lectures on the Printed New Testament, 29, 55; — Repro
duction in Phototype of a Syriac Manuscript (Williams MS.), 41, 95.
Hammond, J., On theR. G. F. for the Quintie, 37.
Harris, J. Rendel, The Teaching of the Apostles and the Sibylline Books
(notice), 44.
Hartwell, E. M-, 15, 114; — Lectures on Physical Training, 31, 51.
Harvard College, First "Tabular View" of, H. B. Adams, 91.
Haupt, Paul, 15;— Classes, 24, 68, 113, 125, 129.
Hayes, C. W., 51.
Heart and Intestines in Motion, Instantaneous Photographs of, W. G.
Thompson, 60.
Hebrew Words in Codex Sangallensis, C. Adler, 63.
Hempl, G.. 15 ;— Classes, 24, 68, 130.
Herrick, F. H., 99.
Histology, Classes in, 23, 26, 67, 70.
Historical Statement, J. H. U., 79.
Historical and Political Science : Classes in 25, 69 ; — Studies in, 14, 40,
43;— Programme for 1886-87, 132 ;— Work of 1885-86, 134.
Historical and Political Science Association, Proceedings, 38, 56, 64, 96.
History, see Historical and Political Science.
History of Philosophy : Classes in, 26, 70 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 136 ; —
Work of 1885-86, 136.
Hobbs, W. H., 51.
Holcomb, W. P., Classes, 26, 70, 135.
Holmes, \V. H., Monoliths of San Juan Teotihuacan, Mexico, 47.
Homer, Reduction of « to t in, H. W. Smyth, 35.
Hopkins Hall Lectures, see Public Lectures.
Hopkins Scholars : for 1885-86, 20, 53; — Amended Regulations, 53.
Hours for Lectures and Recitations, 27, 71.
" House of Commons of J. H. U.," Constitution and By-Laws of, 48 ; Notices
of, 49.
Howell, W. H., 15;— Classes, 23, 67, 114, 122;— Observations on Chemical
Composition and Coagulation of Blood of Limulus Polyphemus, etc.,
4; — Presence of Haemoglobin in the Echinoderms, 5.
Huizinga, A. H., 129.
Hydro-Medusae, Origin of Metagenesis among, W. K. Brooks, 86.
Index to Names, 21.
Information for Applicants for Admission to the University, 137.
Inheritance, A Note on, W. K. Brooks, 11.
Inorganic Geology, Lectures on. 32.
Insects and Arachnids, Observations on the Embryology of, A T. Bruce, 85.
Instantaneous Photographs of the Heart and Intestines in Motion, W. G.
Thompson, 60.
Institutions in which Enrolled Students were Graduated, 21.
International Law: Classes, 26, 70; — Course for 1886-87, 133; — Work of
1885-86, 134.
Isaeus, Note on, E. H. Spieker, 61.
Italian : Classes in, 25, 69 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 127 ;— Work of 1885-86,
131.
Jameson, J. F., 15;— Classes, 26, 70, 114, 132, 133, 135 ;— Records of the
Virginia Company, 61.
Jastrow, J., Composite Portraiture, 38 ; — Also see Peirce, C. S.
Jenkins, O. P., Note on the Fishes of Beaufort Harbor, N. G, 11.
Kastle. J. II., 51.
Kimball, A. L, 15;— Classes, 22, 66, 114, 117, 118.
Kittredge, G. L, Arm-pitling among the Greeks, 45.
Kniger's Chronology of the so-called "Summary" of Thucydides, C. D.
Morris, 86.
Lanciani. R., Lectures on Roman Archeology, 99, 114.
Latin: Classes in, 23, 67 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 124;— Work of 1885-86,
128.
Laveran, Malarial " Germ " of, G. M. Sternberg, 95.
Law Code of the Kretan Gortyna, A. C. Merriam, 47.
Learned, M. D., 114; — Origin and Settlement of the Pennsylvania Ger-
mans, 93.
Lectures and Addresses, Reports of, 89-92, 101-112.
Lectures and Recitations, Hours for, 27, 71.
Lepidoptera, Origin of the Endoderm in, A. T. Bruce, 9.
Library, Recent Accessions to, 97.
Limulus Polyphemus, Metamorphosis of, H. L. Osborn, 2 ; — Abstract of
Researches on Embryology of, W. K. Brooks and A. T. Bruce, 2 ; —
Chemical Composition and Coagulation of Blood of, W. H. Howell, 4.
Logic : Class in, 26 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 136 ;— Work of 1885-86, 136.
Malarial "Germ" of Laveran, G. M. Sternberg, 95.
Marcou, P. B., Two Points in French Style, 46.
Marine Laboratory, 2-11, 88, 123.
Martin, H. N., 15;— Classes, 23, 67, 113, 122.
Maryland, Correction of Statements relating to, in Memoirs of F. D. Maurice,
34; — Archives of, edited by W. H. Browne, 42; — Great Seal of, 80.
Mathematical Society, Proceedings, 38, 56, 64, 96, 116.
Mathematics: Classes in, 22, 66 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 115;— Work of
1885-86, 115;— American Journal of, 14, 51, 58, 72.
Matriculates, 18.
Matriculation Examinations, 100.
Maurice, F., Letter from, 34. ,
Maurice, F. D., Correction of Statements relating to Maryland in Memoirs
of, 34.
McMurrich, J. P., 15, 99 ;— Classes, 23, 67 ;— On the Existence of a Post-oral
Band of Cilia in Gasteropod Veligers, 5 ; — Notes on Embryology of the
Gasteropods, 85.
Medical Science, On Some of the Humane Aspects of, W. H. Welch, 101.
Mendenhall, T. C, Letter, 52.
Merriam, A. C, Law Code of the Kretan Gortyna, 47.
Metagenesis among the Hydro Medusae, Origin of, W. K. Brooks, 86.
Metamorphosis of Limulus Polyphemus, H. L. Osborn, 2.
Methods of Archaeological Research, F. W. Putnam, 64.
Micro-Organisms in Disease, Lectures on, 54.
Microscope in Geology, Lectures, 28.
Mills, T. \V., Rhythm and Innervation of the Heart of the Sea-Turtle, 6;
— On the Physiology of the Heart of the Alligator, 7 ; — The Cardiac
Rhythm of Fishes and the Action of certain Drugs and Poisons, 8.
Mineralogy and Geology: Classes in, 23, 67; — Work of 1885-86, 120; —
Programme for 1886-87, 120.
Modern Languages: Programmes for 1886-87, 125-128;— Work of 1885-86,
130-132.
Modern Language Notes, 47.
Moore, J. L., Classes, 67, 68, 128.
Morphological Notes, 1-12, 83-88.
Morphology : Classes in, 23, 67 ; — Lectures on Selected Problems in, 99 ;
Programme for 1886-87, 121 ;— Work of 1885-86, 122.
Morris, C. D., 15;— Classes, 23, 26, 128, 135;— On Kruger's Chronology of
the so called "Summary" of Thucydides, 35; — Death of, 65; — Reso-
lutions on Death of, 65, 99; — List of Books and Papers written by, 96.
Morse, H. N., 15, 51 ;— t lasses, 22, 66, 114, 118, 119.
Motor Sensations of the Skin, G. Stanley Hall and H. H. Donaldson, 36.
Miiller Fritz, Letter, 12.
Naturalists' Field Club, 38, 56, 96, 122.
Nelson, J., 99.
Newcomb, Simon, 15;— Classes, 22, 66, 113, 115.
Newell, II., 16, 1 1 4 ;— Classes, 26, 70.
New Testament, Lectures on Printed, 29, 55 ; — Bibliography to Lectures,
55.
North Greece, Dialects of, IT. W. Smyth, 94.
Occupations of Students, 1876-86, 79.
Ode to the Johns Hopkins University, R. E. Burton, 111.
Officers and Students, Register of, 15-21, 33, 51.
Orndorff, W. R., 51.
Orr, II., 99.
Osborn, II. L, Metamorphosis of Limulus Polvphemns, 2.
Osteology, Class in, 23, 67 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 121.
Oysters, Artificial Propagation and Cultivation of, W. K. Brooks, 10.
Palmer, C. S., 51.
Partitions, Note on, D. Barcroft, 64.
Pathology: Lectures on, 32 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 123.
Peabody Institute Lectures, 28.
Pedagogics: Classes in, 26, 70; — Programme for 1886-87, 136; — Work of
1885-86, 136.
Peirce, C. S. and J. Jastrow, Small Differences of Sensation, 46.
Pennsylvania Germans, Origin and Settlement of, M. D. Learned, 93.
Periodicals, Additions to List of, 51.
Perkins, C. A., 15, 114;— Classes, 22, 66, 117, 118.
Petrography : Classes in, 23, 67.
Philology, American Journal of, 14; — see Ancient and Modern Languages.
Philological Association, Proceedings, 38, 56, 64, 96, 132; — Resolutions on
Death of Professor Morris, 99.
Philosophy, History of: Classes in, 26, 70 ;— Programme for 1886-87, 136;
Work of 1885-86, 136.
Photograph of the Normal Solar Spectrum, 39, 41, 95.
Physical Geography : Classes in, 70j— Programme for 1886-87, 133 ;— Work
of 1885-86, 135. .
Physical Laboratory, Laying the Corner-stone of, 99;— Plan of, 116.
Physical Laboratory in Modern Education, H. A. Rowland, 103.
Physical Training: Lectures on, 31 ;— Bibliography to leclures, 31.
Physios: Classes in, 22, 66 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 116; — Work of
1885-86, 118.
Physics at the Johns Hopkins University, 52.
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
111
Physiology: Classes in, 23, 67 ;— Programme for 188G-87, 121;— Work of
1886-86, 122.
Physiology of the Heart of the Alligator, T. W. Mills, 7.
Political Science and Political Economy: Classes in, 25, 26, 70 ; — Programme
for 1886-87, 132, 1315 ;— Work of 1885-86, 134, 135.
Politics, History of: Classes in, 25, 70 ; — see Historical and Political Science.
Portuguese: (.'hisses in, 25, 69; — see Modern Languages.
Preliminary -Medical Students, 20.
Proceedings of Societies, 38, 56, 64, 96.
Professors and Instructors, 15, 113.
Programmes for 1886-87, 113—136.
Psychology: Classes in, 26, 70; — Programme for 1886-87, 135; — Work of
1885-86, 136.
Psycho-Physics: Classes in, 26, 70.
Publications issued under Auspices of the University, 14, 58, 73, 95, 140.
Public Lectures, 28, 29-32, 51, 54-56; — Notice in regard to Admission of
the Public, 14, 58.
Putnam, F. W., Methods of Archaeological Research, 64, 89.
Rabillon, L., 15, 114; — Lectures on French Literature, 28, 54.
Recitations and Lectures, Hours for, 27, 71.
Records of Virginia Company, J. F. Jameson. 61.
Register of Officers and Students, 15-21 ; — Additions to, 33, 51.
Reinach, S., Inscribed base of an archaic Bronze Statue from Mt. Ptous, 47;
— Marble Statue of Artemis in the Museum at Constantinople, 47.
Remscn, Ira, 15, 51 ; — Classes, 22, 66, 113, 118, 119; — Introduction to the
Studv of Chemistry [notice), 43.
Renouf, E., 16, 51 ;— Classes, 22, 66, 114, 119.
Residence of Students, 20.
Review of Ten Years' Work of the University, J. C. Thomas, 107.
R. Ct. F. for Quintic, J. Hammond, 37.
Rhythm and Innervation of the Heart of the Sea-Turtle, T. W. Mills, 6.
Romance Languages: Classes in, 25, 69; — Programme for 1886-87, 127; —
Work of 1885-86, 131.
Roman Law, Programme, 133.
Rome, Archaeological Discoveries in, A. L. Frothingham, 64.
Rowland, EL A., 15;— Classes, 22, 66, 113, 117, 118;— Photograph of Solar
Spectrum, 39, 41, 95; — The Physical Laboratory in Modern Educa-
tion, 103.
Sanskrit and Comparative Grammar of Cognate Languages: Classes in, 24,
68; — Programme for 1886-87, 125; — Work of 1885-86, 125.
Scholarships, see Hopkins and University Scholarships.
Scientific Association, Proceedings, 38, 56, 64, 96.
Sea-Turtle, Rhythm and Innervation of the Heart of, T. W. Mills, 6.
Seal of Johns Hopkins University, 80; — of Maryland, 80.
Sensation, Small Differences of, C. S. Peiree and J. Jastrow, 46.
Shemitic Languages: Classes in, 24, 68; — Programme for 1886-87, 125; —
Work of 1885-86, 129.
Sibylline Books and Teaching of the Apostles, J. Rendel Harris (notice), 44.
Silent I in Modern English, J. W. Bright, 62.
Skin, Motor Sensations of, G. S. Hall and II. H. Donaldson, 36.
Slaughter, M., Classes, 24, 68.
Smyth, II. W., Classes, 23, 67, 128; — Reduction of ci to I in Homer, 35; —
Dialects of North Greece, 94.
Societies, see University Societies.
Solar Spectrum, Photograph of, 39, 41, 95.
Spanish: Class in, 25, 69; — see Modern Languages.
Special Students, Roll of, 20.
Speech Mixture in French Canada, A. M. Elliott, 62.
Spieker, 10. II., 15;— Classes, 23, (17, 68, 114, 124, 128, 133;— Genitive Abso-
lute and its Use especially in the Attic Orators, 45 ; — Note on Isaeus, 61.
Standing Announcements, 14, 58, 82.
Sternberg, G. M., Malarial " Germ " of Laveran, 95.
Stomatopoda, Notes on, W. K. Brooks, 10; — of the "Challenger" Collec-
tion, W. K. Brooks, 83.
Story, W. E., 15;— Classes, 22, 66, 114, 115, 117.
Strassburg, Earliest Municipal Code of, J. M. Vincent, 63.
Students, Roll of, 1885-86, 16-20, 33, 51 ;— Roll, 1876-86. 74-79.
Students' "House of Commons," Constitution and By-LawB of, 48; — Dis-
cussion of the Constitution of, 49.
Studies from the Biological Laboratory, 14, 123.
Studies in Historical and Political Science, 14, 40, 43.
Stnrgis, Russell, Greek Sculpture in the Museums of Athens, 64,
Summary of Students, 1876-86, 79.
Sylvester, J. J., 15.
Byriac Manuscript with the Antilegomena Epistles, Reproduction of, 41.
Syrian Antilegomena, Lectures on, 31; — See also Antilegomena Epistles.
Tabular Statements, 21, 79.
'leaching of the Apostles and the Sibylline Books (notice), J. R. Harris, 44.
Temperature Sense, II. H. Donaldson, 37.
Ten Years' Work of Johns Hopkins University, Review of, J. C. Thomas, 107.
Tenth Academic Year, Opening of, 28.
Tenth Anniversary of Johns Hopkins University, 100; — Addresses and
Ode, 101-112."
Thomas, J. O, Review of Ten Years' Work of the University, 107.
Thompson, W. G., Instantaneous Photographs of the Heart and Intestines
in Motion, 60.
Thomson, Sir William, Letter, 52.
Thucydides, Krtiger's Chronology of the so-called "Summary" of, C. D.
Morris, 35.
Todd, H. A., 15;— Classes, 25, 69, 114, 127, 131.
Uhler, P. R., 15.
Undergraduates, Roll of, 18, 19; — Examinations of, 100.
University Examinations of Undergraduates, 100.
University Scholars for 1885-86, 20, 33.
University Societies: Communications to, 34, 59, 93-95; — Proceedings, 38,
56, 64, 96.
Veda, Correlation of v and m in, M. Bloomfield, 93.
Vincent, J. M., On the Manuscripts of Prof. J. C. Bluntschli, 59; — Earliest
Municipal Code of Strassburg, 63.
Virginia Company, Records of, J. F. Jameson, (notice), 61.
Ward, W. H., Recent Discoveries in Assyria and Babylonia, 54, 89.
Warren, F. M., 114.
Warren, M., 15;— Classes, 23, 67, 114, 124, 128, 133.
Washington Scholarships, 53.
Wedmore, Frederick, Lectures, 28.
Welch, W. II., 15; — Lectures on Pathology, 32; — Lectures on Micro-
organisms in Disease, 54; — On Some of the Humane Aspects of
Medical Science, 101; — Programme, 113, 123.
Whitney, W. D., Sis and Sa Aorists (0th and 7th Aorist-forms) in San-
skrit, 45.
Williams, G. H., 15;— Classes, 23, 67, 114, 119, 1 20 ;— Lectures on Inorganic
Geology, 32.
Williams, Langdon, Letter, 49.
Williams Manuscript, Reproduction of, in Photograph, 41, 95.
Wilson, H. V., 99.
Wood, H., 15, 51 ;— Classes, 24, 68, 69, 114, 125, 126, 130.
Woodhull, J. F., 51.
Wood worth, C. L., 16, 114;— Classes, 26, 70.
Wright, J. II., Programme, 113, 124.
Yager, A., Finanzpolitik im Nordamerikanischen Burgerkrieg (notice), 64.
Zoology, Classes in, 67 ; — Programme for 1886-87, 121.
PUBLICATIONS OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVEHSITY.
I. American Journal of Mathematics. S. Nkwcomb, Editor, and T. Craig, Associ-
ate Edi I or. Quarterly. 4to. Volume IX in progress. &5 per volume.
II. American Chemical Journal. I. Ekmskn, Editor. Bi-monthly. 8vo. Volume
VIII in progress. $.1 per volume.
III. American Journal of Philology. B. I.. (Iilderslkkvk, Editor. Quarterly. 8vo.
Volume VII in progress. &1 per volume.
IV. Studies from the Biological Laboratory. (Including the Chesapeake Zoologi-
cal Laboratory). II. N. Martin, Editor, and W. K. Brooks, Associate Editor.
8vo. Volume III in progress. &» per volume.
V. Studies in Historical and Political Science. H. B. ADiMS, Editor. Monthly.
8vo. Volume IV in progress. $3 per volume.
VI. Johns Hopkins University Circulars. $1 per year.
VII. Annual Report.
VIII. Annual Register.
Communications in respect to publications may be sent to the Johns Hop-
kins University (Publication Agency), Baltimore, Maryland.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., No. 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 262 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 43.] BALTIMORE, OCTOBER, 1885. [Price, 10 Cents.
CALENDAR, 1885-86.
1885, Thursday, October I. Academic Year Began.
" Thursday, December 24 — Saturday, January 2. Christmas Recess.
1886, Monday, February 22. Commemoration Day.
" Friday, April 23— Monday, April 26. Spring Recess.
" Tuesday, June 15. Term of Instruction Closes.
CONTENTS. fagi
CHESAPEAKE ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY, EIGHTH SESSION.
Preliminary Reports of Work at the Marine Station of the Johns Hopkins University, Beaufort, N. C, May-September, 1885:
Metamorphosis of Limulus Polyphemus. By H. L. Osborn, ----....... 2
Abstract of Researches on the Embryology of Limulus polyphemus. By W. K. Brooks and A. T. Bruce, - - - - 2
On the Chemical Composition, etc. of the Blood of Limulus polyphemus, etc. By W. H. II owl I, ...... 4
The Presence of Haemoglobin in the Echinoderms. By W. H. Howell, ......... 5
On the Existence of a Post-oral Band of Cilia in Gasteropod Veligers. By J. P. McMurrich, ...... 5
The Rhythm and Innervation of the Heart of the Sea Turtle. By T. Wesley Mills, ....... 6
On the Physiology of the Heart of the Alligator. By T. Wesley Mills, - . . . . . - . ..7
The Cardiac Rhythm of Fishes, and the Action of Drugs, etc. By T. Wesley Mills, ....... 8
Origin of the Endoderni in Lepidoptera. By A. T. Bruce, ........... 9
On the Artificial Propagation and Cultivation of Oysters in Floats. By W. K. Brooks. .......10
Notes on the Stomatopoda. By W. K. Brooks, --.-........-10
Note on the Fishes of Beaufort Harbor, N. C. By 0. P. Jenkins, .......... \\
A Note on Inheritance. By W. K. Brooks. [With a Letter from Fritz M lillcr. j .......-H
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 202 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore. Subscription, $1.00 a year.
[Iisued, Ootober 21, 1885.]
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 43.
CHESAPEAKE ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY
IM^A-RHSTIE STATION" OIF TUB OTOHZSTS HO^KZIOSrS UITIVEESITY
EIGHTH SESSION", BKAUFOET, N. C, 1S85.
The marine laboratory of the university was opened at Beaufort, N. C,
on May 23, and it was occupied for research until September 15.
As the party was much too large for the house which was used in past
years, a second one, which was vacant for the summer, was rented and occu-
pied, but even with this additional space, several applicants were refused,
from lack of room.
The following is a list of the members of our party :
AV. K. Brooks, Ph. P., Associate Professor (if Morphology, J.H. U. — Director,
E. A. Andrews, Ph. B., Felloir, J. H. U.
A. T. Bruce, A. B., fellow by Courtesy, J. H. XT.
G. B. Ualdenian, A. B., Graduate. Stude.n-, ./. II. V.
J. C. Heiumeter, M. D., Graduate Student, J. H. V.
F. H. Herrick, A.B., Graduate Student, J. If. U.
W. II. Howell, Ph. D., Associate, J. ff. U.
O. P. Jenkins, A. B., Terre Haute, fnd.
T. W. Mills, M. D., Lecturer on Physiology, McGill University, Montreal.
J. P. McMurrich, I'h. P., fnstructor, J. H. U.
A. P. Morrell, Chapel Hill, O.
H. F. Hachtrieb, S. B., Prof, of Zoology, University of Minnesota.
The following^ abstracts indicate the scope and character of the work
which was carried on.
The Metamorphosis of Limulus polyphemus. By
Prof. Henry L. Osborn, Purdue University, La Fayette,
Indiana.
Explanatory note by W. K. Brooks. Prof. Osborn has kindly placed at my
disposal the notes and drawings which he made at the marine labor-
atory at Beaufort in 18S4 from the eggs of Limulus which he had
procured from the oviducts and had fertilized artificially. He made a
very careful study of the superficial changes in the egg, and the young
larva, and cut sections through the eggs at a very early stage of their
development, but as he did not study the later stages in the same way he
failed to understand his sections, and I have, therefore, made a few slight
changes in his notes, in order to bring them into harmony with the con-
clusions which have been reached by Mr. Bruce and myself in our study of
the same subject this summer. W. K. Brooks.
Soon after fertilization the yolk contracts and shrinks away from the
chorion, and a number of deep irregular fissures make their appearance
running in towards the centre and cutting up the yolk into masses which
resemble cleavage segments. The fissures are very irregular and present a
great variety of forms. Some of the eggs remain almost perfectly smooth
and round, while others become deeply furrowed, and nearly all of them
pass through the furrowed stage, although I did not observe any in which
there was a perfectly regular segmentation of the surface. The irregular-
ity of there changes would seem to indicate that they are pathological,
although they do not prevent the eggs from undergoing normal develop-
ment, to its completion.
In from one to three days after fertilization the egg exhibits a structure
which is the first indi ation of normal development. In surface view this
stru lure resembles a circular pit or depression with a dark centre, sur-
rounded by a circle of lighter odor. My sections at this stage show that
it is not a depression, but a protoplasmic cap, situated upon the surface of
the yolk. It stains deeply; but is pel fectly clear and transparent, and I
could find in it no nucleus or trace of a cellular structure. It soon dis-
appears and its relation to the future parts of the embryo was not
dl !• rinined.
The time at whrh this structure appears is very inconstant and there i.
also the greatest difference in the rate of development among the indivi-
dual ergs, and come are much more tardy in arriving at the various stages
and emerge from the shell a day or two later than the most rapidly devel-
oping ones.
During the night of the 26th (the eggs were fertilized July 23d) the pit
di appeared, and at 8 a.m. on the 27th a white mound was observed upon
the surface, at once recalling the primitive cumnlits of Claparede and Bal-
four. It is very constantly present, but I do not know its relation to the
future parts or to the pit which preceded it.
On July 28th, 11.30 a. m., a deep semicircular depression showed itself.
On the 29th, in the space between the two lips of the depression of the day
before, a pair of buds appears — the beginnings of the anterior pair of limbs.
On the following day two more pairs are added, and in front of the first
pair and behind the front lip of the fold, a most important structure is for
the first time seen, it is a slit elongated antero-posteriorly ; the definitive
mouth opening. It is distinctly in front of the first pair of limbs. It is
to be noted that the anal opening has not yet shown itself according to my
observations. The stomodeum and the three somites are now included in
an area which is plainly marked off from the rest of the egg and sur-
rounded by an oval elevation. On the following day, July 31, there had
appeared inside this rim the remaining pairs of cephalo thoracic appen-
dages. On the 31st a thickening along the middle ventral line marked out
the nervous system.
This lot of eggs was followed and the embryos all hatched in due course,
though the circumstances in which they were placed were very unfavorable.
Twenty healthy eggs were carried in a 4 oz. bottle inland and development
went on normally, and on August 16, 24 days after fertilization, the first
one of the lot hatched and the others all followed it, straggling along for
several days. Others left at Beaufort hatched in due time.
Observations of the surface from the time that the limbs are marked off
do not add anything to the facts described by Packard and Dohrn, except
that the statement of Packard that the compound eyes appear upon the
third segment is wrong. They appear very plainly upon the fourth somite
as stated by Dohrn.
Abstract of Researches on the Embryology of Limu-
lus polyphemus. By W. K. Brooks and A. T. Bruce.
Segmentation. At the end of the process of segmentation, sections show
that the entire yolk of the large and totally opaque egg consists of an uni-
form mass of large spherical yolk cells, each with its nucleus. They are of
uniform size from the centre to the surface, and are closely packed with
yolk globules and granules, but they are not flattened by mutual pressure,
since their outlines are nearly circular.
The changes which the egg undergoes in reaching this stage are very
peculiar, but its total opacity prevents superficial examination, and as there
are no external marks by which a series of eggs can be cut in the same
place, it is difficult to form a complete picture of the course of segmenta-
tion, although the process appears to be as follows: —
In a ripe, unfertilized egg the yolk consists of a homogeneous mass of
yolk globules and granules, covered at one point by a superficial aggrega-
tion or cap of protoplasm.
In sections of an egg twenty-four hours after fertilization, protoplasmic
processes or pseudopodia extend from the cap into the yolk, and surround-
ing and including the substance of the yolk, divide this up into a number
of yolh-balls, each of which consists of an investing sheath of protoplasm
with an inclosed sphere of yolk, but they contain no nuclei, nor were any
found at this stage in the protoplasmic cap.
On the third and fourth days after fertilization the yolk-balls are smaller
and more numerous, with sharper outlines, and one or two large, sharply-
defined oval nuclei were visible in the protoplasmic cap. On the fifth day
this begins to decrease in size, and ultimately disappears, while the yolk-balls
become more numerous, and a very small nucleus becomes visible in each of
them. The yolk is so opaque and so packed with granules that we were una-
ble to decide whether the nuclei are on the surface or in the interior of the
yolk-balls, and we learned nothing regarding the origin of the nuclei.
The Origin of the Blastoderm. After segmentation is completed the cells
nearest the surface become smaller than the central ones, probably as the
result of cell divi ion. These peripheral cells are at first rounded and filled
with yolk, like the central ones, but they soon become transparent, flatten
October, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
against each other and form a columns! epithelium, one cell thick, over
the whole surface of the egg, which is thus divided into a central yolk
made up of lain spherical cells filled with yolk, and a surface layer which
may, for convenience, he called s blastoderm, although it gives rise only to
the ectodermal sad mesodermal organs of the emhryo, while the yolk cells
give rise to the endodermal epithelium of the intestine and liver, and also,
in all probability, to part of the mesoderm.
As soon as the so-called blastoderm is formed it excretes from its outer
Burface the so-called protoderm or chitenous emhryonic cuticle, which is
marked by polygonal casts of the ends of the cells, from which it is soon
separated and thrown off.
Origin of the Mesoderm. An area of the blastoderm now becomes many
cells thick and forms the primitive cumulus noticed by Osborn. In sections
it bears a close resemblance to a corresponding part of the spider's egg, as
figured by Balfour. It is live or six cells thick at the centre, and gradually
thins out until, at the edges, it is only one cell thick. Our sectioas do not
enable us to decide whether it is formed by division of the blastoderm cells
or by the addition of new cells from the central yolk, and it may possibly
be derived in pact from each of these sources.
The ventral nervous system arises as two parallel thickenings of the ger-
minal area, separated from each other by a median ingrowth, which grows
into the surface of the yolk, where it spreads out on each side to form the
mesoderm, which appears to receive additions from the yolk cells. It soon
splits on each side to form a splanchnic layer on the surface of the yolk,
and a somatic layer which covers the nervous system and lines the surface
epithelium. As the apjiendages grow out the somatic layer and cavity ex-
tend into them, but soon become obliterated in all parts of the body by
the development of a network of mesodermal connective tissue corpuscles,
as shown at the anterior end of the body in the figure.
The yolk at first forms a continuous mass of cells which almost fill the
entire body of the embryo, but it soon becomes divided into yolk somites,
by the development of paired mesodermal processes or dissepiments which
grow upward from the ventral to the dorsal surface, from points just outside
the bases of the limbs. The division of the yolk into somites which is so
well shown in Packard's figures, is the effect of the growth of these pro-
, which give rise to the muscles of the limbs and ento-sternum, while
the latter is itself formed by a thickening of the splanchnic mesoderm on
the ventral surface of the yolk.
The Origin of the Digestive Trad. At the time when the first limb-buds
appear the oral invagination also appears, between and a little in front of
the first pair, although the mouth soon travels backwards, as shown in the
figure. The oral invagination grows upwards and forwards, as shown in the
figure, and its inner end bends back upon itself, and pushes in to the yolk.
It consists of an epithelial lining which soon becomes thrown into longitu-
dinal folds, or ridges, upon which a thick chitinous cuticle is developed;
and of an investing sheath of mesoderm, which is derived from the somatic
layer, and from the muscles of the oesophagus and stomach.
Our sections give the history of the endoderm with clearness which
leaves little to be desired, and Limulus is remarkable for the fact that there
are no endodermal structures whatever at the time of hatching. The
limbs, muscles, heart, nervous system and sense organs of the newly-
hatched Limulus are well developed, but so far as its endoderm is con-
cerned it is not a larva but an embryo, and it lives a free active life and
even undergoes one moult while its endoderm is in an embryonic condition.
The figure shows a median longitudinal section of an embryo just before
hatching. There is no anus or rectum, the oral invagination is well ad-
vanced, and has essentially its adult form, hut it ends blindly, and the
intestine is represented by a solid mass, k, of yolk cells, flattened by
pressure, and inclosed in a splanchnic layer of mesoderm, /, which is
several cells thick along the ventral middle line, where.it is to become the
en/o-sternum, but elsewhere it is only one cell thick.
As the figure shows, the intestinal region is sharply marked out in a
median longitudinal section, but this is not true of transverse sections, for
the yolk extends to the lateral edges of the carapace, when it is not inter-
rupted by the muscular dissepiments, and it is not until some time after
hatching that the lateral liver-lobes are cut off from the median intestine
proper, by the growth of muscles from the sides of the ento-sternum to the
dorsal surface.
In its origin the liver is part of the intestine, which is, morphologically
speaking, a great fiat pouch, reaching to the edges of the body, and imper-
fectly divided, by the growth of the mnmloS, into an sjdal intestine and two
lateral hepatic pouches, each of which is again divided Op into the liver
tubes in the same way.
At the time of hatching lx>th intestine and liver are solid and made up
of yolk cells, inside a sheath of mesoderm, At the stage shown in the
figure the yolk contains great numbers of nuclei, which are most abundant
mar the Surface, where they are much more numerous than the yolk cells.
A. few djjrt after hatching the cells themselves I taller and more
numerous, and arrange Minimal VSI la I single layer around a centra]
which is formed by the absorption of the yolk. At first these cells are
filled with yolk globules, like the yolk cells, which they letflmlils in every-
thing except size, but after the first moult the yolk sulistancc gradually
disappears, from in front backwards, and the cells become converted into
the ordinary epithelial lining of the intestine. The endodermal lining of
the liver tubes is formed in the same way, but more slowly.
The anal invagination does not make its appearance until after the intes-
tine is formed, and the rectum is very short.
The Nerjous System. The ventral nerve cord originates as a pair of par-
allel thickenings of the blastoderm, which become free from in front back-
wards, and become divided up into ganglia with longitudinal and transverse
commissures. The commissure between the ganglia of the first pair of
appendages is in front of the mouth, and there is a distinct pair of ganglia
for the seventh pair of appendages. The brain is formed, in part, from
the anterior ends of the nerve cords, and in part from two independent
ectodermal ingrowths.
The Eyes. Eay Lankester has recently shown that there is a fundamen-
tal difference in the structure of the lateral and the median eyes, inasmuch
as the sensory cells of the former lie in and are part of the surrounding
ectoderm, while the median eyes consist of a vitreous body formed from the
ordinary ectoderm cells, and inside this, a retina which is distinct from the
adjacent ectoderm. This structural difference corresponds to a fundamental
difference in the origin of the two kinds of eyes. The lateral eyes origi-
nate, very early in the life of the embryo, by specialization of the ectoderm
cells, while the sensory portion of the median eyes is invaginated from the
ectoderm of the ventral surface, on the middle line, between the divergent
optic lobes of the brain, as shown at h in the figure.
General Conclusions. — To the interesting question — what other embryonic
history most closely resembles that of Limulus, there can at present be
but one answer. So far as our present knowledge goes the embryonic
history of Limulus finds its closest parallel in the embryology of the
Arachnida.
In his paper on the development of spiders, Balfour gives the following
summary of the points of difference from the Crustacea. The mesol lj-t is
formed by a thickening of the median line of the ventral plate, while in
most Crustacea it is budded oil' from the walls of an invagination which
gives rise to the mesenteron. It becomes divided into somites, the lumen of
which is continued into the limbs.
There is generally in the Crustacea an invagination which gives ri-e to
the mesenteron, and the proctodaeum is usually found before or not later
than the stomodaeum, and both, especially the proctodaeum, are very long
and usually give rise to the greater part of the alimentary tract, while the
mesenteron is usually short. In the spider, as in the trachcata in genera]
the mesenteron is very long, and the proctodaeum is always short, and is
formed later than the stomodaeum.
In all these particulars Limulus agrees with the spider, and no one can
compare Balfour's figures of the spider's egg with our sections, without
noticing the striking resemblance in nearly every detail of Structure. He
failed to trace out the origin of the endoderm, but his figures and the de-
scription show that in this respect also there is, in all probability, the
closest agreement with Limulus.
We have shown that the liver and intestine are, as regards their orij in,
parts of a large pouch, imperfectly separated by the fissures formed by
mesodermal dissepiments, and that the endodermal epithelium of both is
formed from the yolk cells, and Balfour says of the spider, that it would
not he unwarrantable to conclude, from his observations, that the yolk com-
partments formed by the mcsoderinie septa are the hepatic cocoa, each of
which is enclosed in a layer of splanchnic mesoderm, while its endodermal
wall is derived from the yolk cells, and that there can he very little doubt
that the endoderm of the intestine owes its origin to cells derived from
the yolk.
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 43.
The figures which Balfour gives seems to leave little room to doubt this
conclusion, and we therefore have another point of most striking resem-
blance to Limulus.
Observations upon the Chemical Composition and
Coagulation of the Blood of Limulus polyphemus,
Callinectes hastatus, and Cucumaria sp. By W. H.
Howell.
The blood of Limulus polyphemus as it flows from the heart is at first of
a milky white color, but soon changes on exposure to the air to a dirty bluish
white. Almost immediately after escaping the blood begins to clot, though
the coagulation is never so complete as to cause it to set into a solid mass.
Sometimes the clot consists of isolated masses of fibrin which settle to the
bottom, at other times it forms a more or less continuous mass, which grad-
ually contracts forcing out the serum.
All efforts to prevent the coagulation by cooling with ice or saturation
with neutral salts were unsuccessful. The serum obtained after removing
the clot possesses a strong alkaline reaction and is of a deep blue color by
transmitted light, becoming opaque whitish blue by reflected light.
Specimens of this serum neutralized with 1 per cent, acetic acid and heated
in a double water bath, showed the presence of four distinct albumins, coag-
ulating, respectively, at 58°-60° C, 68°-70° C, 74°-75° C, and 78°-80° C.
The first three of these albumins are completely precipitated after being
heated for five or ten minutes, but the last albumin shows the very remark-
able peculiarity that the process of heating has to be repeated some fifteen
or twenty times before the albumin is completely removed. Each time that
the liquid is heated a well marked precipitate occurs, which docs not appear
to increase when the liquid is kept at 80° for even half an hour. The
filtrate from this precipitate is perfectly clear, and, when heated again to
80°, gives an exactly similar precipitate, care being taken to keep the liquid
neutral by the addition of a drop or two of 1 per cent, acetic acid after every
one or two precipitations.
Efforts made to separate these albumins were not successful. The serum
gives the following reactions with the neutral salts. Ammonium sulphate
or sodium sulphate added to saturation completely precipitates all the
albumins. Magnesium sulphate added to saturation gives a strong precip-
itate containing portions at least of all four albumins. The filtrate after this
saturation could never be obtained perfectly clear. If serum was heated to
75° C, to get rid of the first three albumins, and then saturated with MgS04,
a partial precipitation was still produced. Sodium chloride added to satu-
ration precipitates partially the albumins coagulating at 68° C. and 75° C.
The clear blue serum when exposed to the air gives a flocculent precipi-
tate containing portions of the albumins coagulating at 75° C. and 80° C.
Serum diluted ten times with water gives a precipitate containing the
albumins of 70° C. and 80° C. Passing CO, through the diluted serum does
not increase the precipitate, and if the precipitate formed by dilution is
filtered off, and the liquid then treated with CO» no further precipitation
results. Serum dialysed through parchment paper gave a precipitate con-
taining the albumins of 70° C. and 80° C. The water used for dialysis was
rain water collected in a cistern, since distilled water could not be obtained.
Neutralization of the serum with 1 per cent, acetic acid gave a small pre-
cipitate having a coagulating temperature of 80° C. When the serum was
made distinctly acid with the acetic acid, 1 per cent., very nearly all of the
albumin was precipitated in an insoluble form, the portion not precipitated
being converted to acid albumin.
From a consideration of these reactions, it is plain that the albumins of
limulus serum all bear a closer resemblance to paraglobulin, or, at least, to
the globulin family, than to any other known form of albumin. Their
precipitation by MgS04, dilution with water, dialysis, or simple exposure
to air are all reactions that place them among the globulins.
Investigation of the blue coloring matter of the serum tended to support
the view that it is a compound of copper with an albumin, similar, in a
general way, to the compound of albumin and iron in haemoglobin. The
color is associated chiefly with the albumin coagulating at 80° C. That
the copper of the serum is united with the albumin was shown by the fact,
that, when the albumins were precipitated by ammonium sulphate, no
copper could be detected in the filtrate, while the precipitate after incinera-
tion gave plain evidence of its presence. The respiratory value of this
compound is not very evident as far as the limulus is concerned. The
blood in the heart and arteries does not possess a blue color; the blue
serum does not change its color when treated with COs, and when hermeti-
cally sealed it disappears only after many hours. Examined with the
spectroscope it shows no definite absorption bands: though a large portion
of the blue end of the spectrum is cut off.
The coagulum of limulus blood is formed entirely from the union of
the corpuscles. Shreds of freshly formed fibrin show this very plainly,
and, when the process of coagulation is watched under the microscope,
beautiful fibrin networks are seen to form, starting from the corpuscles.
These networks are easily stained and resemble on a large scale the fibrin
network described, for man and other mammals, as originating from the
blood-discs. Details of this process must be left for a subsequent paper.
Chemical examination of the fibrin shows that it is practically identical
with typical mammalian fibrin, although formed directly from the sub-
stance of the corpuscles. Treated with 10 per cent. MgS(>4 or NaCI solu-
tion for many hours, at a temperature of 35°-40° C, it is only slightly dis-
solved. Treated with 1 per cent. HC1 it swells up but dissolves only to a
slight extent. Treated with 1 per cent. NaOH it is easily soluble, the
solution being percipitated when neutralized with 1 per cent, acetic acid.
The blood of the common edible crab of our coast, callinectes hastatus,
was submitted to a series of experiments similar to those given for the blood
of limulus. When shed, the blood coagulates with great rapidity, and this
could not be prevented by the action of cold or neutral salts. The clot
differs markedly from that of limulus blood in that it is much more firm,
the blood setting into a solid mass. The serum separated from the clot is
of a clear blue-green color that shows no opalescence by reflected light. It
has a strong alkaline reaction. When carefully neutralized with 1 per
cent, acetic acid and heated, the serum gives evidence of only two
albumins, one coagulating at about 55° C, the other at G8°-70° C. The
latter albumin shows the same peculiarity as that described for the albumin
of limulus blood coagulating at 80° C, requiring some twenty or more dif-
ferent heatings before it is completely removed. In some specimens a
minute quantity of the albumin required heating to 80° C.
Both albumins are completely precipitated by ammonium sulphate and
also by magnesium sulphate. The precipitation by the latter salt is pecu-
liar in that the filtrate from the precipitate first formed, at first clear, soon
deposits a new precipitate, and this is repeated a third time. Saturation
of the serum with sodium chloride throws down part of the albumin
coagulating at 70° C.
Simple dilution of the crab's serum does not cause a precipitate, unless
the serum is first neutralized. CCs when passed through the serum soon
decolorizes it, the color reappearing when shaken with air. If the serum
is first diluted a precipitate is formed by the 00*
The clot formed from the crab's blood is also made directly by the union
of the corpuscles. This is not so evident as in the limulus blood, but iu
October, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
specimens allowed to clot under the microscope, and then stained, the pro-
cee8 can be clearly teen. The corpuscle* Mad out long and very delicate
processes which form a close network binding the corpuscles together.
The fibrin of Crab's blood is much more soluble in solutions of neutral
salt than that of limulus blood. It is partially solulile in solution of com-
mon salt containing from two to ten per cent, of the salt. The solution of
the fibrin in 2 per cent. Nat 1 coagulates at71°-72°C. Hydrochloric add
1 per cent, swells up the fibrin but dissolves it only to a slight extent.
Caustic soda 1 per cent, readily dissolves the fibrin.
The liquid of the perivisceral cavity and water-vascular system of one
of our common holotlmrians possesses only one albumin, viz., the haemo-
globin contained in the red blood corpuscles, Specimens of the perivisceral
liquid allowed to stand in watch crystals give an imperfect COagulum, the
corpuscles settling to the bottom as a membranous-liUe sediment. The
supernatant liquid contains no albumin at all. The imperfect coagulation
is formed by the fusion of the amieboid white corpuscles or of thick
pgeudopodia which arise from them. The red corpuscles exhibit no ten-
demy to adhere to one another, though they become entrapped in the
masses of fused white corpuscles.
The study of the coagulation of the blood of these three invertebrates,
taken together with the work that has been done on other forms, seems to
indicate that amongst the invertebrates generally any coagulation that may
occur is caused by the direct union of corpuscular elements. The work of
the last few years upon the coagulation of mammalian blood shows that here
too the fibrin is apparently formed directly from one kind of corpuscle, the
so-called blood-discs. The striking resemblance in the method of union of
the corpuscles to form the clot, in mammalian blood and the blood of limu-
lus, for instance, and the close similarity in chemical properties of the fibrin
produced, suggest that the formation of fibrin in the two cases may result
from an essentially similar series of changes.
The Presence of Haemoglobin in the Echinoderms.
By W. H. Howell.
Haemoglobin has been found in the blood of certain species of several of
the divisions of the invertebrates, e. g., annelids, insects, molluscs, hut up
to the present time no sat isfaetory example of its presence among the Echino-
derms has been discovered. Foettinger described in one of the ophiurians,
ophiactes virens, certain red corpuscles contained in the water vascular sys-
tem which, upon examination with the micro-spectroscope, gave two absorp-
tion bands similar to those of oxy-haemoglobin ; from this he concluded
that the coloring matter of these corpuscles is haemoglobin. But other
pigments, turacin, for instance, are known to give very similar if not identical
bauds, so that this single observation can not be considered as demonstrating
the presence of haemoglobin.
During the summer's work at the marine laboratory, the writer's atten-
tion was directed by Mr. H. P. Nachtrieb to a bolothurian, whose peri-
visceral liquid is in some cases of a bright red color. Examination of this
liquid and of the contents of the water-vascular system showed that the
coloring matter has most of the properties of haemoglobin, though certain
differences in its chemical reactions have led me to believe that it is not
identical with the haemoglobin of vertebrate blood.
The water-vascular system and the body cavity contain, besides colorless
amoeboid corpuscles, a large number of oval, nucleated, bi-convex blood
discs of a pale red color. When a specimen of this water-vascular liquid
is caught in a watch crystal, these corpuscles soon settle to the bottom,
forming a meinbranous-like sediment. If the supernatant liquid is de-
canted, and the sediment treated with water anil then' filtered, a beautiful
blood-red solution is obtained. This solution when examined with the
spectroscope gives the two oxy-hacmogloMii bands; the wave length of the
middle of each band was determined, and was found to be identical with
that of the corresponding band of a solution of oxy-haemoglobin of human
blood of the same strength. Addition of Stokes' reducing solution causes
the two bands to disappear, and firings out the single band of reduced
haemoglobin. By shaking the solution with air the two oxy-haemoglobin
bands can again be obtained. The corpuscles when treated with glacial
acetic acid and suit give well marked haemin crystals, though these
crystals do not form so readily as with vertebrate blood. When incine-
rated and tested with ferrocyannide of potassium they give the reaction
for iron.
These properties are quite sufficient lo show that this Coloring matter is
a compound similar to ordinary haemoglobin, and justifv il> ri^ht to the
title of haemoglobin. In two respects, however, il differ! from the haemo-
globin of vertebrate blood. An aqueous solution when heated coagulates
at •">So-G0oC., giving a heavy brown pre, ipitatc, the filtrate from which is
perfectly free from albumin. BaetBOglobin solution from vertebrate blood,
on the other hand, coagulates between 70°-80° C. A solution of this hae-
moglobin is also precipitated by the addition of dilute, 1 per cent, acetic
acid, which is not true of vertebrate haemoglobin.
It appear! then that we have here a compound similar in strueture and
in some of its most essential properties to the haemoglobin of vertebrate
blood, but differing from it llightiy in the albuminous portion of tin- mole-
cule. It seems quite possible that similar differences may be found when
the haemoglobin of other invertebrates is more can-fully examined. All
efforts to obtain haemoglobin crystals were unsuccessful.
The respiratory value of this pigment cannot be doubted. It performs
its functions not only through the ambulacra] feet scattered over the surface
of the body, but also through the respiratory tree, the ramifications of which
are bathed in the perivisceral liquid. The respiration* of the animal w ben
undisturbed are very regular, consisting usually of three inspirations fol-
lowed by a single prolonged expiration, the whole respiratory act being
repeated from three to four times a minute. Efforts to increase the
respiratory rhythm by heating the sea water surrounding the animal were
not successful.
On the Existence of a Post-oral Band of Cilia in
Gasteropod Veligers. By J. Playfair MoMtjbbd n.
The question as to the phylogeny of the Mollusca is as yet undecided,
though recent researches indicate a relationship between this group and
that of the Annelida. The discovery of the peculiar forms Jfeomtma, Pro-
neomenia, and Clueloderma, gave a strong impulse to this idea on account of
their similarity in some respects to what obtains in the Polyplacophora, but
it is not safe to argue a direct descent from these forms, or even to imagine
that they come into the ancestral line at all. It is quite possible that they
and the Polyplacophora are offshoots from the direct stem, and probably we
must look more to the embryological history of the Qasteropods for light on
the subject. Attempts have been made, notably by Hat-chek (Studicn 0.
Entwickelungsyesch. d. Annclhhn, Wien, 1878), to trace a relationship between
the Polygordius larva of the Annelida and the Molluscan larva, and thus to
throw any relationship which may exist between the two groups back to a
very early period in their evolution.
If it can be shown that there is considerable similarity between the larva-
of the two groups, and if the differences which do exist can be explained as
adaptations to new conditions, the presumption as to the genetic relations
between the larvae will be greatly strengthened. As regards the arrange-
ment of the cilia, which is the only point to be dealt with in this note, we
have in the Polygordius larva a strong prjsoraj locomotive band, a more
delicate postoral nutritive band, and a still less apparent ciliated region
lying between these two bands and leading into the ciliated mouth. The
identity of the cilia of the velum of the Gasteropod larva with the first of
these, has been frequently noticed ; they form a strong pr.eoral baud, occa-
sionally double, and differing from the band of the Polygordius larva only
in the extent of its development, and in its incomplete closure in many
CBSes dorsally. This latter point of difference does not, however, hold
throughout; the former may be explained by the necessity for a more pow-
erful locomotive apparatus than is required for the Annelida, caused by the
presence of a shell, a structure which appeals very early in the life-history of
the Mollusca. A postoral band has never as yet been des riled for the 1'ro-
sobranehs. Several observers have called attention to the presence of a single
band of cilia behind the cilia of the velum, and have regarded it as nutritive
in function, and the object of this note is to call attention to the fact that
this band pas--.es acnes the ventral surface of the larva behind the mouth,
anil is, therefore, quite comparable to the p lateral band of the Trod] ;-bore.
My attention was first called to this fact in the larva of On team,
and I was afterwards able to confirm it in those of Fulgi
of Xtptunea, in two Prosobraueh Veligers as yet undetermined, and in the
6
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 43.
Opi-thobraneh Montagnia sp. ? In the undetermined Veligers the velum
was prodiHi.tl into tour long flattened arms, round the margins of which were
the strong lo -omoior eilia. On the under surface of the arms, running
parallel to and not very remote from the locomotor eilia, was the finer band
of nutritive cilia, the transparency of the arms and their size rendering it
verv apparent, and it could without much difficulty be traced across the ven-
tral surface of the body immediately behind the mouth. Dr. W. K. Brooks
informs me that he noticed the existence of this postoral band some time
ago, and was then inclined to attribute some phylogenetic importance to
it. but being occupied with other Investigations he did not follow up his
observations, an 1 refrained from publication. Haddon also has described
and figured it for certain Opisthobranchs, but does not seem to have
observed it in the Prosobranchs he studied. ■
The region between these two bands is occupied by numerous very fine
cilia, which, as in the Polygordius larva, are continuous with those lining
the mouth opening and the oesophagus. The arrangement of cilia which
is to be found in the typical Annelid larva is therefore almost exactly repro-
duced in the Gasteropod Veliger.
Arguing from ontogeny, a phylogenetic history of the Gasteropoda some-
what as follows may be constructed. They and the Annelida have had their
origin in a Trochophore. In the Gasteropoda this ancestor developed I
a univalve shell, represented by the larval shell so often replaced as devel-
opment proceeds by another more highly ornamented and more complicated
in structure. The development of this shell, by increasing the specific
gravity of the animal, rendered the simple preoral cilia of the Trochophore
insufficient for active locomotion, and the extent of the band was increased
by the region of the body on which it occurred being as it were pulled out
laterally, the characteristic velum being thus produced. Perhaps, too, in
the presence of the shell, a reason can be found for the absence of meta-
meric segmentation in the Gasteropods.
The Rhythm and Innervation of the Heart of the
Sea Turtle. By T. Wesley Mills, Lecturer on Physiology,
MoGill University, Montreal, Canada.
This investigation was undertaken partly as a continuation of previous
work on the sea turtle, a short account of which had already been published
in the Journal of Physiology, but chiefly as a continuation of my work on
Chelonian heart physiology in general. A paper of mine, on the terrapin's
heart, has recently appeared in Xos. 4 and 5, Vol. VI, of the journal referred
to ; but the whole of my work on the Chelonians is intended to furnish
a systematic comparison from a physiological point of view of several
of the genera and species of the Chelonians. It is thought no such sys-
tematic comparison has ever before been attempted for physiology, though
it is constantly being done in morphology.
The investigation on the terrapin was carried on in the Biological Lab-
oratory at Baltimore; those on the sea turtle, alligator and fish, at the
Marine Laboratory at Beaufort, N. C. Only a very brief account of this
work is furnished here, the papers in extenso having been sent for publica-
tion in the Journal of Physiology of Cambridge, England, in which also due
acknowledgment is made of my indebtedness to the authorities and teachers
of the Johns Hopkins University for facilitating these investigations.
In all of them the direct method of observation has been used and the
heart has been experimented upon mostly in situ. For electric stimulation
a Uu Bois induction coil, fed by one Danieil's cell has been used, except in
the case of one set of experiments on the alligator, in which a Bunsen's
cell was substituted.
In order to insure the specimens of the sea turtle used being in the best
possible condition, those not used at once'on being caught were kept on the
■hore in a "turtle pin," so arranged as to admit of free ingress and
of water. They were also fed on crabs, their natural diet. In all
imeni were employed, and of three species Clidonia Oaretta (Log-
gerhead), Clielonia imbricala (Hawksbill), Clidonia Midas (Green Turtle).
By way of comparison experiments have also been made on a limited num-
ber of specimens of the land tortoise (pyxis).
mpathetic System of Nerves in the Marine Turtles. It is very remark-
able that OheUmia Midas in its cervical and thoracic sympathetic should
very closely resemble the terrapin, but differ widely from 0. Oaretta and
Jmbricata. In the latter the sympathetic in the neck runs widely apart
from the vagus and almost equals it in size. Its superior and middle cervi-
cal ganglia are ill-defined cordiform swellings, while the lower cervical and
the first thoracic ganglia are fuse 1 together to form the Canglion cardiacum
batait. The latter is very large and gives oil' upwards many strong branches
to the Brachial plexus, and downward to the lungs, etc., and probably to the
heart.
From the middle cerv. gang, a strong branch passes to the heart along
the vagus. This is a cardiac accelerator. The corresponding branch in the
terrapin is much less defined and often wholly wanting.
Ohelonia Midas differs greatly from C. Oaretta and Imbricati, resembling-
very closely in its sympathetic system the terrapin. The sympathetic in
the neck is very much smaller than the vagus, its ganglia well marked and
it is often more or less united (though easily separable), with the vagus.
But a great difference is the absence of fusion of the lower cerv. gang, and
the first thoracic. These ganglia are in the terrapin often connected by an
Annulus Vieussenii.
Sympathetic Cardiac Accelerators. Stimulation of the branch from the
middle cervical ganglia referred to above leads in the sea turtle with
greater constancy than in the terrapin to acceleration of the rate, and espe-
cially augmentation of the force of the beat of the heart. Also stimula-
tion of the gang. card, basal, or the main chain between it and the first
associated metamere below leads to acceleration and augmentation. The
same laws apply to this as to vagus acceleration.
The Remits of the Stimulation of the Vagm. The vagus wdien stimulated
may arrest the auricle and ventricle in the manner described for the alliga-
tor. In no Chelonian thus far examined is the heart arrested by the vagus
through the reduction of the force of the beat to zero, as in the frog. As
in the terrapin unilateral vagus effects are comparatively common, i. e., a
strength of current sufficing to arrest one auricle, for example, when the
corresponding vagus is stimulated, has much less effect on its fellow.
Comparative Effect of each Vagus. A large number of experiments have
given results very closely resembling those obtained for the terrapin i. e., in
the great majority of instances the K. vagus has greater power, especially
in maintaining the heart in stand-still or continued stimulation, than the
left, but in both terrapin and sea turtle this difference appears to be less
than in the land tortoise. This difference in the vagi seems to extend to
other families of cold-blooded animals, and is to be explained not by a dif-
ference in the number of inhibitory fibres in each vagus, nor to inequality
in the distribution of them, but to the fact that the right pulsatile venous
area (Ii. sinus and veins), to which the Ii. vagus is mostly distributed, is the
chief or dominating part in the driving machinery of the heart, for arrest
of the heart is practically dependent on arrest of the sinus. In one case,
in the sea turtle prolonged alternate stimulation of the vagi gave perfect cardiac
inhibition for more than six hours. This is the longest case of heart stand-
still of this kind yet recorded for any animal.
Structure of the Chelonian Heart. Between the sinus and the conspicuous
auricle there is a part of the heart somewhat different in appearance, struc-
ture, and physiological qualities from either the sinus or auricle proper. A
similar structure is found in some fishes. Especially have my experiments
shown that the capacity for independent rhythm in this part is greater than
in the so-called " bulged " part (Gaskell), of the auricles, I have therefore
thought it well to name this part sinus extension ami consider it a separata
part of the heart. It is in reality more allied functionally to the sinus
than to the auricle proper.
Very frequently in the Chelonians and especially in the marine turtles,
stimulation of the vagus with a weak current suffices to arrest the auricles
proper; in that case the contraction wave of the sinus is conducted along tiie
sinus extension to the ventricle. The same occurs in the alligator and the fish.
Tlie Law of Inverse Proportion. My work on the various genera of Che-
lonians and the alligator have shown conclusively that whether the va us
or the sympathetic cause the cardiac acceleration and augmentation, one
law invarialily applies, viz : That the increase in the rale and force of the heart-
beat after stimulation of the vagm or accelerating sympathetic, is always in rrrscly
as the rate and force at the time of stimulation, i. e., the slower and weaker the
heart, the greater the increase. The vagus seems to be the most constant
and powerful cardiac augmentor known to us.
Faradisation oflhehcarl directly has given for the sea turtle results analagons
to those obtained in Other Chelonians and the fish, but in the sea turtle there
seems to be less effect, especially as regards dilation around the area stimulated.
October, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
The fact that arrest of the sinus by direct stimulation is not possible
when the heart nutrition has much suffered (and especially, therefore, its
nerves), and that the dilating effects are like those produced by vagus
stimulation, Ac., favors the view that the results of faradisation are not due
to direct stimulation of the heart muscle hut accomplished mediately
through its nerves. The light colored areas, which I have pointed out are
seen in all cases at the exact points of contact of the electrodes, are due to
direct effects on the muscle (contraction).
Spontaneous Rhythm. The order in which spontaneous R. most readily
arises and is best maintained is: sinus, S. extension, auricle, ventricle. A
large number of experiments on the ventricle expressly, of the sea turtle,
show that in the latter, as in all other Chelonians thus far examined, the
V. has in most cases a certain capacity for independent K., but that apart
from all forms of stimulation this R. is never very marked, though it
may last for hours. This seems to be greater in the land tortoises than in
other < hclonians.
The ventricle of the sea turtle is characterized by great sennit iveness as
compared with that of other Chelonians, hence its spontaneous R. may he
greatly increased by slight stimulation. Results, like those of Gaskell, ob-
tained by suspending the heart, attaching recording levers and feeding
it through its own system of vessels, without regard to the normal blood
pressure therein, must not he considered as those of pure spontaneous
rhythm, for such methods furnish stimulation. In my experiments the
heart was kept surrounded with nutriment and covered so as to provide a
"moist chamber," but it remained in situ. The V. was separated by liga-
ture in most cases, by section in a very few.
Js there a Depressor Nerve in the Chelonians f Blood pressure experiments
on the terrapin and the sea turtle have shown that no nerve with the char-
acters of a physiological depressor exists in this family. Certain fine
nerves in the neck of the sea turtle have on stimulation given results of a
peculiar and puzzling kind. They have been inconstant in action, some-
times giving rise to acceleration, sometimes to retardation of the cardiac
rhythm, or to both — now one, and now the other.
Slim idation of the Cerebral end of one Vagus, the medulla and other vagus
being intact, in all the Chelonians I have examined, has usually produced
cardiac arrest. In the sea turtle, in one case, this was followed by decided
after-acceleration, but the different genera of Chelonians and even different
spc. tee and individuals show variation in this respect, as also in the degree
to which the heart can be reflexly inhibited ; the terrapin and C. Midas
resembling each other most and giving the best marked results. In fact
this research has confirmed the truth of the law that with anatomical
resemblances are usually associated physiological ones.
Evolution of Function. The experiments on the sea turtle have shown
that where the cardiac nutrition suffers considerably, the L. auricle may
even be quiescent when the right is still beating well ; also that the ventri-
cle dies in a certain segmental order, the last part to get rigid being on its
right side; thus for some time before death an earlier condition (from a
developmental point of view) is established, viz: Reduction to sinus, one
auricle and a simplified ventricle. It is thus seen that the order of death
for the different parts of the heart indicates its history, the oldest parts have
greatest vitality. Further, the greater size and importance of the R. (part of
the) sinus, of the R. auricle, Ac, have also a relation to the order of acqui-
sition. In the only fishes having an L. auricle, the Dipnoi', this part is very
small anil insignificant as compared with the right.
Anomalous Results. Stimulation of the liver in certain cases in the sea
turtle, when reflex inhibition was being studied, has given results analo-
gous to those obtained in the alligator, and especially in the fish, i. e., the
effect has not been pure inhibition, but preliminary acceleration with or
without after-retardation. The subject is of great interest though very
puzzling in the present state of knowledge. It is furthtf considered in the
account of the investigation on the alligator.
On the Physiology of the Heart of the Alligator.
By T. Wesley Mills.
T)ie animals experimented upon belonged to the species Alligator Missis-
tfppiensis. The heart in the Crocodilia, witli its two auricles and paired
Ventricles, though showing much resemblance to lower forms and retaining
the pulsatile sinus renosus, both in its genera] appearance and in its action,
approximates sufficiently to that of the higher vertebrates to
superficial examination the he-art of a mammal or bird (with Mower
action). The blood, too, fa more highly Oxidised than in the Chelonians,
so that altogether the circulatory system shows physiological as well as
anatomical advance. With the exception of < hiskell's short paper on the
crocodile, !./..»/•««/ of Physiology, Vol. V., No. 1). nothing has been pub-
lished on the heart physiology of this group of animals.
The work of the present writer, while it confirms Haskell's conclusions
•I regards the cardiac accelerator, is wholly at variance with his views as
to the functions of the vagus. The vagus in the OrOtcd&id, at least in the
alligator, is not a pure cardial depressor, hut is on the contrary a powerful
cardiac- augmentor.
The residts of the stimulation of tin' vagus may he thus stated :
(1.) Stimulation of the vagus with a weak, interrupted current may
weaken the cardiac heat with or without arrest of the auricles; the latter
may be arrested and give rise to a brief stop of the ventricles.
(2.) With a stronger current the sinus may be so weakened as to lend to
arrest of the auricles and ventricles; or the sinus may he arrested wholly,
in which case the auricles and ventricles invariably cease to beat.
(3.) When the cardiac beat recommences it may be in the order, sinus,
sinus extension, ventricles; or, sinus, auricles, S. extension, ventricles, i. e.,
the auricles may remain quiescent as in the Chelonians and fishes when all
the rest of the heart is beating.
(4.) The rhythm after vagus stand-still may be (a) without acceleration,
or (b) accelerated.
The augmentation in the force of the beat is more marked than accele-
ration in the rate. Both rate and force follow, as in the Chelonians, the
law of inverse proportion.
Comparison of the Vagi and Residts of their Prolonged Alternate Stimula-
tion. The vagi in the alligator, as in the Chelonians, have not as a rule
equal power in causing and maintaining cardiac inhibition ; the right as in
the other cold blooded animals examined being more effective. Pro-
longed stimulation of the vagi alternately leads to corresponding length-
ened cardiac arrest.
Accessory Vagi. Certain small nerves are in the alligator given off from
the Glossopharyngeal shortly after its exit from the skull, proceed down-
wards, apart from the vagus, and pass beneath the trachea over the vessels
to the heart.
Stimulation of these nerves has led to similar results to those furnished
by stimulation of the vagus, i. <•., retardation of the rate, weakening of the
beat and after acceleration. Hence they have been called by me accessory
vagi. There seem to be nerves of somewhat similar function in the sea
turtle.
Peculiar Cardiac Inhibition followed by Acceleration. Special attention is
called to the following experiment which is believed to be unique in physi-
ology. In a small alligator with the whole brain destroyed for some time,
both vagi divided and dead throughout the greater part of their course
(stimulation not producing cardiac arrest), a sharp tap over the liver and
stomach with a dissecting forceps caused cardiac arrest of brief duration,
then slowed irregular rhythm followed by acceleration of a verv pro-
nounced kind (from 40 to 50 beats). Here then were the usual phenomena
of reflex vagus inhibition, as when the vagi and medulla are intact. This
experinn nt im.< repeated three times. It does not seem possible to explain this
unparalleled result by present theories. I conclude that the impulses
d through the sympathetic system of nerves and that probably Other
inhibitory fibres than those of the vagus were concerned, and that accele-
rating fibres were also involved. It is also possible to conceive that termi-
nations of the vagi were in some way reached by these impulses, but in
any case the results are new to physiology, the only published case at all
resembling it being Marshall Hall's experiment on the eel's stomach
mi /'////>., article "Heart.')
Cardiac Am/mentors. As described by Gaskell there is in the Crocodilia,
from the Ganglion of the eleventh metamere of the sympathetic chain, a
strong well-defined branch passing to the heart.
Stimulation of this nerve has given rise to (1) acceleration following the
law of inverse proportion, which seems applicable to all kinds of accelera-
tion. (2.) Decided augmentation of the force of the beat. This is more
marked than the acceleration in rate, and in fact may disguise the effects of
the nerve, for no actual acceleration of beat may follow.
8
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 43.
In all casts stimulation of a genuine cardiac augmentor causes increase in
tktvork done by the heart, hence these nerves should be called augmentors
rather than accelerators.
Application of the Rapidly Interrupted Current to the Heart itself. In addi-
tion to the white dots seen at the points of application of the electrodes
and the dilation and blue appearance following the use of a weak or mode-
rate current, another effect noticed in the alligator, on the use of a very
strong current deserves mention. From the part where the electrodes
touched the auricle a considerable area took on a pale, even whitish aspect
and seemed to diminish in size ; by gradually moving the electrodes along,
more and more of the auricle passed into the same condition. The part
involved was thrown out of action, as in the case of the dilated portion.
This condition seeiue.1 to be one of pronounced contraction, probably
tetanic, and contirms the view that the white dots seen in all cases just
where the electrodes touch are caused by contraction of the muscle fibres.
The Cardiac Rhythm of Fishes and the Action on
the same of certain Drugs and Poisons. By T. Wesley
Mills.
The object of the investigation was (1) to ascertain whether there were
considerable physiological differences in the hearts of different fishes, and
(2) to ascertain the laws regulating the rhythm of some one fish heart
specially suitable for investigation, and (3) to determine the action of cer-
tain drugs and poisons on the fish's heart ; these being, many of them, such
as have been studied in their influence on the heart of the frog.
In general it may be said that the hearts of fishes are so sensitive to
changes in normal conditions, and that most fishes are so easily killed, that
it is not possible to pursue prolonged investigations on their hearts in situ.
This remark applies especially to the Selachians whose hearts, from many
points of view are exceedingly interesting.
Batrachus 1'au (toadfish), is a fish of great vitality, resisting unfavorable
conditions admirably, and its heart has a corresponding vital resistance,
and being excellently suited for experimentation, this fish was the sub-
ject of a majority of the experiments of this investigation. Most of the
work was done on the heart in situ, but the isolated heart was also studied.
For the former experiments the fish was kept on its dorsal surface in a dish
of water, the latter reaching sufficiently high to cover the gills but not flow
over the exposed heart. The respirating centre was left intact. Under
these circumstances the heart may be maintained fairly normal for several
hours.
Considerable differences in physiological behavior have been found in
the hearts of fishes, some of which will be noticed under different head-
ings in this synopsis.
The Structure and Action of the Fish's Heart. In the Selachians, as exam-
ined by the present writer in the shark and skate, the heart consists of a
Conus arteriosus, in addition to the sinus, auricle and ventricle. This struc-
ture is pulsatile and seems to be the most sensitive part of the whole heart.
The corresponding Bulbus arteriosus of other fishes is highly elastic but
not pulsatile.
In observing such a heart as that of Batrachus during systole of the ven-
tricle, the longitadinal and transverse diameters of the latter are seen to be
shortened and the anteroposterior lengthened. It is seen that the apex
ascends and the bulbus descends.
In the Selachians the beat is more highly peristaltic than in the hearts
of other fishes, and in the former a reversal of the order of pulsation for
the ditierent parts is most easily originated and maintained.
In sonic lishes, as in the eel (McWilliam) and Batrachus, there is a part
of the heart intermediate between the sinus and the auricle proper, as to
appearance, structure, and functions; and, as it is in most respects physio-
logically like a corresponding part in the Chelonians, has been named by
me sinus extension in both fishes and Chelonians (" basal" wall, and "flat-
tened" portion of GaafeeU, " QiniilU Auricnlara" of McWilliam). This
part of the heart is often under peculiar circumstances in action when the
■aril le prop r if quiescent, and then serves to conduct the wave of contrac-
tion on from the sinm to the ventricle.
Inflwrnes Affecting the Natural Bliylhm of the Heart. Among these, in
addition to mechanical excitation inducing a reversed rhythm already
referred to, must be especially mentioned the condition of the blood supply-
ing the heart as to degree of oxidation. Blood poor in oxygen, with
greater readiness than in other cold-blooded animals, causes irregularity or
arrest of the heart in the fish.
Faradisation of the heart in the fish leads to results very closely allied to
those obtained in the Chelonians.
Rejlex Cardiac Inhibition. The ease with which the heart of the fish can
be reflexly inhibited by the stimulation of various parts of its body is one
of the most remarkable facts brought out by investigation on the heart
physiology of this animal.
The results are much the same whether mechanical or electrical stimula-
tion with the rapidly interrupted current be employed. The parts that
have been found most effective in Batrachus are the gills, the air bladder,
the abdominal viscera, the mucous lining of the mouth, the tentacular
appendages of the mouth, the pectoral fins, the anus and the tail.
The results may be either (1) decided arrest of the heart for several
seconds, followed by a slowed rhythm, or (2) brief arrest with slowed and
irregular rhythm or (3) the latter lasting from one to two minutes or
longer without any actual stop of the heart. In some cases the operative
procedure necessary to expose the heart is sufficient stimulus to keep the
heart long inhibited. The after results of inhibition are not uniform. In
some cases no acceleration seems to follow, but in others and the majority
there is decided acceleration of the rhythm.
Peculiar Results associated with Reflex Cardiac Inhibition. Stimulation of
several of the parts mentioned above, and especially of the anus and tail,
have given the following remarkable results:
(1.) At first an accelerated rhythm followed by a slowed rhythm, or
(2.) An accelerated rhythm followed by a slowed rhythm on increasing
the current, or
(3.) Only an accelerated rhythm.
This subject is further treated in the account of the turtle and alligator
above.
It should be noted that in the skate, stimulation along certain lines
on the ventral surface of the fish, apparently the course of mucous
glands and likely associated with special sensitive structures, has produced
remarkably good cardiac inhibition, and the results have been constant.
The mucous membrane of the mouth is also, in the skate, a part giving
decided results.
Independent Rhythm of Various Parts of the Heart. A large number of
experiments on both the isolated heart and the heart in situ have brought
out the following facts :
(1.) There is very great variety in the hearts of different fishes as to
capacity for independent rhythm; between such fishes as the skate, the
shark, and the toadfish (Batrachus) this difference is enormous.
(2.) In Batrachus every part of the heart is capable of good, indepen-
dent rhythm ; even the apex of the heart when isolated has shown such.
(3.) The order of the parts of the heart with greatest independent
rhythmic power is — sinus, sinus extension, auricle, ventricle.
(4.) The independent rhythm of the ventricle begins soon after its .sepa-
ration from the rest of the heart (by ligature), speedily reaches a maxi-
mum and gradually declines.
The Action of Certain Drugs ami Poisons on the Heart. Experiments have
been made on the heart in situ and the results confirmed on the isolated
heart. The agent was in each case applied in solution directly to the heart
itself. The results are below stated very briefly.
Pilocarpin and Atropin in one per cent, solution. (1) These agents are
antagonistic in action. (2) Pilocarpin is a cardiac depressant ; atropin an
excitant ; the former lowers cardiac excitability ; the latter most decidedly
heightens it; the former weakens the beat and tends to arrest the heart in
diastole, the latter calls into action the resources of the heart quickly and fully.
Sodium and Potassium Carbonate in five per cent, solution. These agents
are antagonistic in action. Sodium carbonate is a cardiac excitant, potas-
sium carbonate a depressant. The former tends to quicken the beats and
diminish diastole. A heart arrested in diastole by potassium carbonate
may be excited to action by sodium carbonate. Potassium carbonate must
be regarded as a cardiac poison.
Lactic Acid. (1) In five per cent, solution this is a rapid cardiac poison.
(2) In one per cent, solution its action is slower but it proves a decided de-
pressant and the heart arrested by lactic acid cannot be excited to action by
digitalis, sodium carbonate, &c.
October, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
Nice-tin in one per cent, solution. (1) Its first action was often to arrest
the heart in diastole. (2) This was sometimes followed by an irregular
slowed rhythm giving way to a more rapid hut weaker heart heat. But
the fish heart shows great power of resistance against the effect of nicotin
in weak solution and can, it would seem, recover almost wholly from the
effect of this poison. Nicotin tends strongly to produce incoordination of
the heat.
Chloroform (undiluted) acts as a decided cardiac depressant, tending to
arrest the heart in diastole. The heart can, however, recover fairly well
from a considerable quantity of this poison applied directly to it.
Acetate of Strychnia in one per cent, solution. This poison did not seem
to have the most pronounced action, but tended to strengthen the systole,
diminish diastole and arrest the heart in systole.
Veratria in rather less than one per cent, solution. The most distinct
action is on the diastole, which it retards. The heart in action has a
generally sluggish movement rather than a weakened one; the systole may
in fact be slightly improved. It also tends to cause arhythmic phenomena
— want of harmony in the sequence of the beats of different parts and of
different fibres in the same part, e.g., there may he two or more beats of
the auricle for one of the ventricle, &c, or one part of the ventricle may
be pulsating out of harmony with the rest.
Diyitnlin in somew hat less than one per cent, solution. This has more
than any other of the agents tested a constant, decided and well defined
action. (1) A short time elapses before its action is manifested; but when
this begins it quickly and steadily rises to a maximum. (2) It causes
diminished diastolic relaxation ; but especially characteristic is the effect
on the systole which is both more perfect and when complete more pro-
longed than usual. (3) The ventricle is always arrested in most pro-
nounced (tetanic?) systole and then always looks very small and pale. It is
inexci table.
The action of drugs on such sensitive hearts as those of the Selachians
was found correspondingly rapid. The action on the isolated heart was
also more rapid than in the heart m situ, as was to be expected.
In many cases the first effect of a drug was to arrest the auricle proper
leaving the sinus extension comparatively unaffected.
Origin of the Endoderm in Lepidoptera.
Bruce.
By A. T.
A tolerably complete series of sections of Thyridopteryx at different
stages of development, prepared at the biological laboratory of the Univer-
sity, has thrown considerable light on the embryology of the Lepidoptera.
In the earliest stages studied, the eggs were already segmented, consisting
of a superficial blastoderm of flattened roughly hexagonal cells enclosing a
segmented yolk. The central or yolk cells have large granular nuclei
scantily invested with protoplasm which, sending out long filaments, encloses
a number of yolk spherules, consequently each yolk cell is a centre of attrac-
tion to the spherules surrounding it. It is the adhesion of these spherules
to the peripheral filaments of the yolk cells which causes the segmentation
of the yolk (Figs. I and II). Adjacent yolk cells appear in some sections
to be united by filaments, while the superficial yolk cells are, at times, con-
nected with the blastoderm. Moreover the yolk cells are apparently con-
nected with the amnion covering the embryo, consequently the entire egg
may, perhaps, be regarded as a protoplasmic continuum. The embryo
with the amnion in all probability originated as a thickening of the blasto-
derm, which, sinking into the yolk, formed the floor of a pit or invagina-
tion. The walls of this invagination then grew together and united above
the floor. Consequently the embryo forming the floor of the invagination
and the amnion forming the walls of the same were constricted off from the
rest of the blastoderm and sinking deeper into the yolk came to lie near
the centre of the egg. I have observed the stages of this process in Mantis,
and in Thyridopteryx it is probably quite similar.
The embryo in the earliest stages examined was watch-glass shaped,
with its convexity covered by the amnion. The latter consists of flattened
branched cells with large nuclei. The embryo at this stage is a syncitium,
thickly studded with nuclei, frequently in process of division. Later, a
thickening extends along the major axis of the embryo on its concave side.
At the same time a shallow groove is formed along the major axis on the
Convex side of the embryo (Fig. I). At this time the embryo has increased
in length and become pear-shaped, the broad anterior end eompri-ing the
prooephalie lobes. ofetameric mtginunlalloii hat i«inn m
somites being separated by incisions of the ectoderm. The BUM Of
lying under the groov. eparated by Incisions from the outer layer.
The process of separation is commeneing in Fig. 1. The mass of eelll lliu-
separated extends laterally on each -iil«- ami ultimately firms a second layer
lying beneath the outer ectoderm. The groove from the thickened floor,
of which the inner layer is separated, may fairly be regarded as a blasto-
pore, and hits been described as such in the figures referred to. After the
inner layer has been formed it separates into two bands, The point win r.
the separation occurs is immediately beneath the blastopore. An ingrowth
of cells then occurs at the blastopore and extends between the two bands of
the inner layer. This ingrowth gi\. the clear migratory I
larger than the other cells of the embryo (Fig. II). At the same time the
ectoderm lying near the lips of the blastopore thickens. 1 1 then M j aratt -
into superficial and deeper portions. The latter gives rise to the ganglia of
the nervous system (n.t., Fig. II). The amnion then extends dorsally more
rapidly than the body walls until the folds of the opposite sides unite (1",
Fig. II). By the union of the amniotic folds of opposite sides the embryo
comes to lie free in a hollow sock of amnion. The dorsal wall of the embryo
is formed by the union of the inner limbs of the amniotic folds. A portion
of the inner germ layer then grows round and finally encloses the yolk taken
into the body cavity by the union of the amniotic folds.
The cells of the inner layer which surround the yolk from the epithelium
of the mid gut and consequently are to be regarded as endoderm cells.
The large yolk cells apparently take no part in the formation of the latter.
The fore and hind guts are formed as invaginations of the ectoderm before i In-
formation of the mid gut. The latter arises from the last abdominal somite,
the former, just behind the proeephalic lobes. The tracheae and limbs
arise in the customary manner. That portion of the inner layer lining,
the limbs, and body cavity is to be regarded as mesoderm. In late embry-
onic life most of the mesoderm appears to be converted into clear migratory
cells. The nervous system arises as independent ganglia. The sub-u-sopha-
geal ganglion is formed by the union of the two maxillary with a portion
of the mandibular ganglion. The last or tenth abdominal somite has a
small ganglion.
Concerning the origin of the endoderm there has been considerable
uncertainty. Balfour, speaking of the origin of the endoderm, jays: "The
origin of the hypoblast is still in dispute." Kowalevsky, as interpreted by
Balfour, described the origin of the endoderm from the inner layer. Tich-
omeroff, from observations on silk worms, inclines to the same opinion.
Dohrn, however, does not agree with Kowalevsky, while Balfour thinks that
the endoderm maybe formed from the central yolk cells. The ntrmerooa
sections in my possession leave little doubt that the endoderm is formed
from a portion of the inner layer which arises at the floor of the germinal
groove or blastopore. The embryo of Thyridopteryx may then be fairly
described as possessing a gastrula stage. Space docs not permit refei <
to literature.
Fid. I.
— - Amnion.
= Blastoderm.
= Blastopore.
ec = Ectoderm.
i. ;. = Inner layer.
Y s. = Yolk spherule.
Y. c. = Yolk cell.
am
bl.
bp
am. ~ Amnion.
bl. = Blastoderm.
bp. = Blastopore.
ec. = Ectoderm.
t. /. = Inner layer.
n.s. — Nerve Bj stem.
ir. — Tracheal invagination.
J* P. = l'ortion of inner layer vfairil
liTtns elhloilerm.
P1 mu Point where amnion- I
unite.
10
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 43.
On the Artificial Propagation and Cultivation of
Oysters in Floats. By W. K. Brooks.
"Witliout expressing any opinion as to the value of the process of "fatten-
ing" oysters by placing tUem for a few days in cars floating in fresh water,
I wish to point out that there is no similarity between this process and the
process of propagation which is here described.
My attention was first called to the value of floating cars in oyster culture
by Mr. William Armstrong, of Hampton, Virginia, who informed me, in
1884, that "seed" oysters, which he had placed in floating cars in the mouth
of Hampton creek, grew more rapidly, and were of a better shape and more
marketable than those which grew from seed planted on the bottom in the
usual way.
One of the results of my study, in 1879, of the development of the oyster
was the discovery that there is a period of several hours, immediately after
the embryo acquires its locomotor cilia, when it swims at the surface, and
this is the period when it is swept into contact with collectors. As soon as
the shell appears the larva is dragged down by its weight, and either settles
to the bottom and dies, or swims for a time near the bottom. The tendency
to swim at the surface is an adaptation for securing wide distribution by
means of the winds and currents which sweep the young oysters against
solid bodies which may serve for attachment, and the greatest danger to
which the oyster is exposed, at any part of its life, is that it may not, at
the swimming stage, find a clean hard surface for attachment.
As it is microscopic and only about half as thick as a sheet of thin paper,
it may be smothered by a deposit of sediment or mud so light as to be invisi-
ble, and most of the failures to get a good "set of spat" are due to the for-
mation of a coat of sediment upon the collectors before the young oysters
come into contact with them.
It occurred to me this summer that this danger could be entirely avoided
by the use of floating collectors, for little sediment can fall on a body which
is close to the surface of the water, and most of this will be swept away by
currents, which will, at the same time, sweep the swimming embryos down
into the collector, and thus insure an early, abundant and successful " set."
I accordingly constructed a floating car, made so as to permit the free
circulation of the water. This was filled with clean oyster shells and moored
in the channel in front of the laboratory at Beaufort, N. C, on July 4th.
As all the oysters in the vicinity were in very shallow water they were
nearly through spawning, and the conditions were therefore very unfavora-
ble; but notwithstanding this, I immediately secured a good "set" and the
young oysters grew with remarkable rapidity, on account of the abundant
supply of food and fresh water which gained ready access to all of them,
and the uniform temperature which was secured by the constant change of
water.
This method of oyster culture may be applied in many ways; of which
the most obvious is the production of seed oysters for planting.
The seed which is used for planting in Maryland and Virginia, as well as
in Delaware and further north, is now procured from the natural beds of our
waters, by tonging or dredging, and as the demand for oysters for this pur-
pose is certainty one of the elements which have led to the depletion of
our beds, there is a wide-spread feeling that the exportation of " seed"
should be prohibited.
By a small investment of capital in floating collectors any one on tide-
water could easily raise large quantities of much better, cleaner seed than
that which is now procured from the natural beds, and if the laws per-
mitted the sale and transportation of this seed witliout restriction at the
season when the demand exists, it could be sold at a profit for less than the
cost of tonging.
Northern planters conld also raise seed for themselves by constructing
floating collectors in the warm water of the sounds of Virginia and North
' ar.lina, where the length of the summer would permit several collections
to be made in one season. The oysters thus reared are large enough for
planting in five or six weeks, and in the latitude of Beaufort there is an
abundance of spat from the middle of April to the first of July, and it can
be collected until September.
The method may also be used by planters for collecting their own seed,
especially in regions remote from a natural supply. If there arc no oysters
near to furnish the eggs, a few spawning oysters may be placed among the
shells in the collector, after the French method, to supply the "set."
It can also be used for the direct production of marketable oysters
especially over muddy bottoms, and in regions where public sentiment does
not permit any private ownership of the bottom.
As food for the oyster is most abundant at the mouths of muddy creeks
where the bottom is too soft for oyster culture by planting or by shelling,
this method will have especial advantage in such places, for there will be
no danger of sanding or of smothering by mud at the surface, and there is
no limit to the number of oysters which can thus be grown on a given
area, for the free current of water will bring food to all of them.
The very rapid growth will more than compensate for the cost of the
floats, and Mr. Armstrong's experiment shows that, in addition to all these
advantages, the oysters are of a better shape, witli better shells, and more
marketable than those grown at the same place on the bottom.
Finally this method will do away with the necessity for a title to the
bottom, and will thus enable a few enterprising men to set the example of
oyster culture, and by the education of the community, to hasten the time
when wiser laws will render our natural advantages available for the
benefit of our people.
The most economical method of constructing floats must, of course, be
determined by practical experiments, but a float constructed by connecting
two old ship-masts together by string pieces, with a bottom of coarse gal-
vanized iron netting, would have sufficient buoyancy and enough resistance
to water to support a large quantity of submerged shells and oysters for
two or more seasons, and a coating of copper paint each year would protect
the timbers from worms.
The floats should be open at the ends to permit free circulation, and
they should be moored in such a way as to swing with the current.
Engagement in business projects is no part of the office of a university,
and I feel that the experiments of the past summer have brought the sub-
ject of oyster culture to a point where its further development should be left
to the people who are most interested.
Notes on the Stomatopoda. By W. K. Brooks.
Two species of Stomatopoda are common at Beaufort ; Squilla empusa,
and a Lysiosquilla which, so far as 1 am aware, has never been described.
The swimming larvae of both species are very abundant, but I have not suc-
ceeded in obtaining the eggs, nor was I able to keep the younger larvae alive
in confinement, as they all died in moulting, although the older larvae moulted
in aquaria. I was therefore compelled to rely upon general resemblances
and measurements in my attempts to trace the metamorphosis, although the
series were so complete that I believe my results are worthy of confidence.
The youngest Lysiosquilla larvae were in the same stage as Clans' larva.
This stage is followed by an Erichthus stage, which persists for a number of
moults, with little change except the increase in size and the gradual acqui-
sition of the appendages.
I have witnessed the change from the last form of this series into the
young Lysiosquilla, so it is now certain that the Erichthus type is the larva
of this genus, although it is of course possible that other genera may pass
through the same larval stages.
As secondary sexual characters are rare among the higher Crustacea, it
is interesting to note that the female Lysiosquilla is much larger than the
male, and of quite a different color. Fully grown males are from one and a
half to two inches in length, while the females are from three to four indies
long. The males are of a gray color and quite transparent, while the females
are more opaque and of a dark olive green color, nearly black.
The habits of our two species are quite different. Lysiosquilla lives in
pure sea sand on beaches which are directly exposed to the ocean swell, and
it is very abundant on Bird Shoal and on the sea beach at Fort Maeon. It
lives in a deep cylindrical vertical burrow, which goes down for several feet,
and it is almost impossible to procure the animals by digging. The males
and females inhabit different burrows, and they lie in wait for prey at the
top, which is arched over with sand, so that only the eyes of the animal are
exposed. When suitable prey comes within reach they dart out so quickly
that the eye can scarcely follow the motion, and seizing the prey in the large
claws, they instantly retreat to the bottom of the burrow, where the food is
stored away, and the animal returns to the mouth of the burrow to resume
its watch. They seldom venture more than three or four inches from the
October, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
11
burrow, and I have obtained only one specimen which was captured in the
water, although the trawl often brings op an abundant Ripply of the much
larger Squills empusa.
In constructing its burrow, Lysiosquilla brings op the sand from the bot-
tom by armfuls, which are carried between the large claws to the mouth of
the hole, to be deposited as far away as the animal can reaeli without leav-
ing its borrow.
The burrows are so deep that digging for the animals is almost useless,
and after many unsuccessful attempts to trap them, I found that it was easy
to catch them by holding a piece of fish or crab near the mouth of the burrow
as a bait, with one hand, while the other hand was held ready to cut off the
retreat into the barrow, by the use of a tin trowel. Their movements are
so very quick that many escaped entirely, while others were cut in two by
the trowel, although many were captured alive.
Squilla empusa lives in hard muddy bottom, in or on the sides of channels
where there is a rapid current, and it constructs a shallow U-shaped burrow,
open at both ends. The burrow is excavated by the current of water pro-
duced by the abdominal appendages, and I have never seen them carrying
Band out of the holes. They do not arch over the opening, and they are
often found swimming at a distance of many feet from the hole, probably
in pursuit of prey.
Squilla stridulates, by rubbing the serrated spine of the swimmeret across
the serrated ridge on the ventral surface of the telson. The noise which is
thus made under water can be clearly heard above the surface.
By
Note on the Fishes of Beaufort Harbor, N. C.
O. P. Jenkins.
In the Proceedings of the U. S. National Museum, 1878, is published a
list of the fishes of Beaufort Harbor, N. C, by Profs. Jordan and Gilbert.
This list includes both the fishes observed by I)rs. (ones and Yarrow, and
published by Dr. Yarrow in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Ae:id,-my
of Natural Sciences for 1877, and those added by the' work of Profs. Jor-
dan ami Gilbert. Daring the past summer while attending the session of
tin- .Marine Laboratory I made -a collection of the fishes of the harbor.
Among the number obtained the following twenty -pecies do not occur
in either of the lists referred to. Several of the number are here for the
first time recorded at a point on our coast so far north. The Babel of this
Collection have been placed in tin- Museum of the Indiana State I'nhersity.
Dr. .Ionian has had the kindness to examine the collection, and lias identi-
fied the species in this list.
1. Pristis pectinatus. Latham.'
2. Gambusia patruelis. Baird and Girard.
3. Conger eouger. Linnaeus.
4. Tylosurus hians. Cut. and Yal.
5. Hippocampus punctulatus. Quichenot,
6. Qnerimana gyrans. Jordan and Gilbert.
7. Meniuia menidia. Liniueus.
8. Elacate Canada. Linnaeus.
9. Chloroscombrus chrysurus. Linnieus.
10. Curaux lalus. Agassiz.
11. Curaux bartholomaei. Cuv. and Yal.
12. Noineus gronovii. Gmelin.
13. Serranus subligarius. Cope.
14. Mycteroperca mierolepis. Goode and Bean.
15. Gobius encaeomus. Jordan and Gilbert.
16. Gobiosoma bosci. Lacepede.
17. Paraliethys lethostigma. Jordan and Gilbert.
18. Etropus crossotus. Jordan and Gilbert.
19. Etropus mierostomus. Gill.
20. Citharicthys macrops. Dresel.
A NOTE ON INHERITANCE.— Including a letter from Fritz Miiller.
BIT -W. IC. BBOOKS.
In a recent article in the Jenaisehe Zcitschrift fiir Naturvtmenschaft. (Bd.
xviii, N. F. xi), Dr. Diising briefly discusses my view of the nature of
inheritance, as set forth in my book on "Heredity," and while he seems to
be greatly disposed to accept my views on the whole, he points out certain
difficulties which suggest themselves to him, and which seem to me to be
the result of a failure to completely catch my meaning, but as other writers
besides Dr. Diising have called my attention to the same points, I am forced
to believe that I have failed to express myself clearly.
Thus he says, p. 457 : " Indessen seheint es mir, als oh Brooks in der
Annahme, dass das Weibcben Qberhaupt gar nicht variire, zu weit gegangen
wiire. Wenn es auch nicht unmoglieh ist, so seheint es doch ausserordentlieh
unwahrscheinlieh zu sein, dass die Gesehlechtscharaeter des Weibchens, z.
B. die Milchdriisen der Siiugetiere, zuerst beim niannlichen Geschleeht
aufgetreten seien. Wenn die Weihchen gar nicht variirten, so hiitte auch
die weitere Ausbildung der Milchdriisen zuerst bei den Mannchen statt-
finden miissen, bei denen sie spater erst wieder reduciert worden waxen.
Weit einfacher ist es, bei der lusher allgemein giiltigen Ansicht zu bleihen,
dass das Weibcben ebenfalls variirt — allerdings in weit geringerem Masse,
als das Miinn lien.
"Der beste Bewels fiir die Yariahilitiit des weibliehen Gesehlechtes zeigt
sich bei der parthenogenetischen Fortpflanzung. Bei den Daphniden z. B.
baben die parthenogenetischen Weibcben neue Eigenscliaften erworben,
welche sie von den Gesehlechtsweiuchen unterscheiden ; sie sind z. B. nicht
mehr befruchtungsfahig. Diese Kigenschaft konnen sie erst spater erlangt
haU'.n, als sie bereits ungeschlechtlich producierte Jungfernweibehen warcn,
an einen niannlichen Ursprung kann nicht gedacht werden. Es ist dies
sin sicherea Beweis, dass auch die ungeschlechtlich producierten Weihchen
variiren.
"Obgleich Brook* in seinem Werke auf die Mogliehkeit eines miinn-
lichen Ureprunges der weibliehen Gfcachlechtscharactere bingewiesen hat,
(Heredity, p. 240), so seheint er doch seine Meinung sehon berichtigt zu
haben, da er in dem oben stehenden Aufsatze ( Ueber em neues Genctz der
Variation von W. K. Brooks, Jen. Zeit., xi. 452), unter 6 zugiebt. das- audi
das Weihchen variiren kann, wenn auch seine Variation im allgcmcincn
nicht so stark ist, als die des Miinnchens."
If it were true that I have found it necessary to make such an essential
change in my hypothesis less than two years after publication I should
assuredly feel guilty of hasty publication of crude thoughts, but I think
that a reference to the page of "Heredity" to which Dr. Diising alludes
will show that the statement in my own recent paper is not an amendment
or a correction in any sense, and that the possibility of female variation is
definitely set forth in the book on Heredity.
Page 240 opens with the following sentence: "We must recollect that
our hypothesis does not demand that the power to transmit variations
should be confined exclusively to males, but dimply that it should be more
uriirc in them than it is in the females" ; and on page 241 : " The remarkable
instinct which leads some species of cuckoos and crow-black birds to lay their
eggs in the nests of other species must have originated in females, and a
collection of all the eases which must be explained in the same way would
make a formidable list ; but the fact would still remain, that among animals
with separate sexes such modifications are very much more frequent than
female modifications, and this is all that our theory requires."
These expressions seemed to me, when I wrote them, as they still -eem to
me, to recognize the possibility of female variation with as much delinite-
ness as my statement on p. 435 of the Jenaisehe Zcitschrift, that " lane
Variation, welche zuerst in cinem Mannchen eracheint, hat viel mehr
Walirseheinliehkeit erblich zu werden als eine solehe, welche zucr-t in
einein Weil) -hen erscheint."
The view which I have sought to express is that the functions of the two
reproductive elements were originally alike, and that the ovum has gradu-
ally become specialized for transmitting the hereditary characteristic- of
the race, while the male element has gradually lost much of this power, and
12
jouxs nor kins university circulars,
has become specialised for the production of variations, while the ovum
has gra litiilly lost much of the power to excite variability. I do not assert,
however, that this specialization is complete, and that the male cell has no
power whatever to transmit hereditary characters, and the ovum no power
to transmit variability, but simply that the two elements have become --.
modified in their two divergent directions, and it seems to me that this fact
will furnish a solution for another of Diising's difficulties. On page 460 he
says: " Die Eigensehaften, wodurch rich die Menschen von einander unter-
seheiden, sind Variationen oder Eigensehaften, die erst kurz vorher |
enrorhen wurden. Dies* — es sind die, worauf man am meisten achtet — :
muss der Mann vererben, es muss also das Kind in seinen Eigenthumlieh-
keiten dem Vater gleichen — oder wenigstens durehschnittlich dem Vater
mehr, als der Mutter. Im allgemeinen ist dies schwer zu untersuchen,
aber es giebt doch Falle, die uns Aufschluss geben konnen. Ein Christ mit .
hellen Haaren nnd blauen Aiigen ist mit einer Jiidin verheiratet; aber die -
zwei Kinder tragen jiidisehen Typus. Wenn nun die Eigensehaften der
Juden nieht zu den GrandcharactereJi der Species gehoren, so geht hieraus
liervor. class im < iegensatze co der Theorie von Brooks auch neu erworbene .'
Eigenthiimlichkeiten von der Mutter vererbt werden konnen. Ist die Mutter
Negerin, der Vater ein Weisser, so werden stets Mulatten erzeugt. Wenn
also die Theorie von Bkooks richtig ist, so mussen auch die Eigensehaften,
welche den Js'eger vom Weissen, den Juden vom Christen unterseheiden,
zu den seit sehr langer Zeit erworbenen Eigensehaften gerechnet, als -
Grundeigenschaften einer besonderen Rasse angesehen werden und dalnr
von der Mutter vererbt werden konnen."
A third point which he brings forward involves the most interesting of
all the phenomena of heredity ; the latent transmission of characteristics,
or polymorphic heredity. lie says, page 459 : " Wenn die Mutter nur die
Character* der Species vererbt, so miissten bei der parthenogenetischen
Fortpflanzung immer nur dieselben Tiere wie die Mutter erzeugt werden.
Dies alier ist nieht der Fall. Im Ueberfluss werden immer nur Jungfern-
Weib, hen geboren d. h. solche, welche ohne Miinnchcn wieder Junge pro-
ducieren. Sohald aber Mangel eintritt, hort diese starke Vermehrung auf, •.
es werden nieht mehr Junpjfcrnweil)chen, sondern befruehtungsfahige
Weibchen und Miinnchen geboren, die also nieht die Eigensehaften der
Mutter bt«itzen. — Indessen fonnte man doch darauf hinweisen, dass es '
sich hier nieht um eine Variation und auch nieht tun das Auftreten von
neu erworbenen Eigensehaften handelt, sondern dass auch die Eigensehaften
dieser < ieschlechtsgcneration zu den Grundcharacteren der Species gehoren.'
Die Jungfernweibchen vererben nieht nur ihre eigenen Eigensehaften,
sondern auch die Tendenz unter I'mstiiadcn — niimlich im Falle eines
Mangels — Tiere mit den Eigensehaften der Gescblechtsgeneration zu -
producieren."
In chapter V, of "Heredity" I have discussed this and similar cases at
considerable length, and have tried to show that the explanation which
Dosing suggests is the true one. On page 112 I say: " Certain embryo bees,
when exposed to certain conditions, develop into sterile workers, but
when exposed to another set of conditions they become fertile females.
The differences between the workers and the queens are not confined to the
reproductive organs, but extend to the shape and size of the body, the"
general organization, and to the instincts of the animals. These differences
are not due to the direct action of the conditions to which the young are \
exposed, but are truly hereditary, as we see from the fact that the workers
of different species arc as distinct and as characteristic of their species as
the males or the fertile females. . . .
" In the case of the polymorphic hydroids an egg-embryo may give rise
by bod ling, to certain descendants' with fully developed digestive organs, •
but with no organs of locomotion or reproductive organs, to other descen-
dant- with organs of locomotion, but without digestive organs or reproduc-
tive organs, and to still others with reproductive organs but with no organs
of digestion or locomotion.
"All these forms are hereditary and are characteristic of the species, so
there is no escape from the conclusion that they are all present in some
form in the egg-embryo. . . .
>
[No. 43.
"The hypothesis that the egg-embryo inherits and transmits to each of
its descendants, those produced asexually as well as those produced sexually,
all the characteristics of the species, and that it also inherits and transmits
to each of them a tendency to suppress certain of these characteristics
under certain conditions seems to furnish a simple and satisfactory explana-
tion of all the facts. According to this view the feeding zooids of a poly-
morphic siphonophore are individuals which have inherited in full all the
characteristics of the race, but which do not attain to perfect development
in all respects. The swimming zooids are similar individuals, with other
characteristics suppressed, and so on."
If this is the true view it is plain that the variation of zooids formed by
budding, or that of animals which are borne parthenogenetically, does not
differ essentially from that of animals born from sexual union, except that
we must search for the origin of the tendency to vary in remote sexual
ancestors, instead of in the parents.
The fact that polymorphic members of a community do inherit all the
characteristics of the species, is shown, with remarkable clearness, in the
following interesting letter which I received a few days ago from Fritz
M idler:
Blumenatj, Santa Catharina, Brazil, July 28, 1885.
Hochgcehrlcr Heir :
Bei dem Interesse, welches die Frage der Vererbung fiir Sie hat, darf ieh
mir wohl erlauben, Sie auf eine eigenthiimliche VVeise der Vererbung auf-
merksam zu machen, die bei unseren Meliponen rich findet. Wie mir ein
jiingerer Freund (M. Sagemehl in Amsterdam) schreibt, kann nach dem
Baue des Kopfes und Thorax, auf den. ja auch Packard hesonderes Gewicht
legt, kaum ein Zweifel sein, dass diese stachellosen Honigbienen (Meli-
pona und Trigona) die nachsten Verwandten von Apis sind. Auch in ihrer
Fortpflanzung stimmen sie insofern nut Apis uberein, dass die fruchtbaren
Weibchen (Koniginnen) Kiirzere, die Miinnchen (Drohnen) liingere Zeit
zu ihrer Entwicklung bediirfen, als die unfruchtbarcn Weibchen (Arbeiter).
Man darf also wohl annehmen, dass auch bei ihnen, wie bei Apis und
anderen geselligen Hymenopteren die Weibchen (Konigin und Arbeiter)
aus befruchteten, die Miinnchen aus unbefruchteten Eiern rich entwiekeln.
Nun sind bei den vier hiesigen Melipona-arten, von denen ich alle drei
Formen ($, S unci 2) kenne, die fruchtbaren Weibchen einander so iihnlich,
dass die der drei grosseren Arten nur nach sorgfiiltigster Untersuchung,
die der vierten, weit kleineren, auch fast nur durch ihre geringere ( iriisse zu
unterseheiden sind. Die Miinnchen dagegen sind uberaus verschicden so-
wohl von ihren eigenen Weibchen, als unter rich. Soweit hat der Fall
nichts Ungewohnliches, denn Ahnliches komnit ja auch bei vielen anderen
Insecten vor. Aber, — and das ist das Merkwiirdige, — die unfructbaren
Weibchen oder Arbeiter gleichen nieht den fruchtbaren Weibchen, sondern
den Miinnchen; sie sind dicsen in Grease, in Faroe, kurz in Allem so
iihnlich, dass sie kaum durch die 12 gliedrigen (bei den S 13 gliedriges)
Fiihler, durch die ungespaltenen (bei den $ gespaltenen) Fussklauen und
durch die Sammelkorbchen der Ilinterschienen von ihnen rich unter-
schieden. —
Auch abgesehen von den Arbeitern, ist es bemerkens-
werth dass unter den Kindem der Konigin die ohne Zuthun
eincs Miinchens erzeugtcn, vaterlosen Sonne nieht der
Mutter, sondern dem Ufossvatcr, dagegen die aus der
Vereinigung mit eincm Miinnchen hervorgegangenen
fruchtbaren TSchter der Mutter gleichen.
Eine Beechreibung der vier Melipona-arten linden Sie
in " Kosmos," Bd. Ill, 1878, pag. 228.
Vielleicht konnen Sie den Fall fiir Ihre Theorie der
Vererbung verwerthen.
Mit hochtachungsvollem Grussc,
Ihr ergehener
Fritz M Bluer.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 44.] BALTIMORE, NOVEMBER, 1885. [Price, 10 Cents.
CALENDAR, 1885-86.
1885, Thursday, October I. Academic Year Began.
" Thursday, December 24 — Saturday, January 2. Christmas Recess.
1886, Monday, February 22. Commemoration Day.
" Friday, April 23— Monday, April 26. Spring Recess.
" Tuesday, June 15. Term of Instruction Closes.
CONTENTS. fag*
Standing Announcements, ................14
PRELIMINARY REGISTER OF OFFICERS AND STUDENTS :
Professors and Instructors, -.--.....-......15
Students: -.--...-.---..-... 16-20
Fellows by Courtesy, ---.----........15
Fellows, ..--.-.--..... ....16
Graduate Students, ------.....-..-.18
Matriculates, ----------..-...-18
Candidates for Matriculation, ------....-...-19
Preliminary Medical, -------.-.......20
Special Students, --------...-.....20
Holders of Scholarships, -------.........20
Summary, and Classification of Students, - - - - - - - - - - . . - -20, 21
Index to List of Names, -------.........21
Consultation Hours, -----------......21
ENUMERATION OF CLASSES: FIRST HALF-YEAR:
Mathematics, --------.........22
Physics, ---------.-.......22
Chemistry, ----.-.--.........22
Mineralogy, etc., .................23
Biology, ---.-..-..........23
Greek, 23
Latin, -------...........23
Shemitic Languages, ---.-.-...-....-.24
Sanskrit, etc., -.----...-...-,--24
German, --............-..-24
Romance Languages, ------.-----.---.25
English and Anglo-Saxon, --------.--..---25
History and Political Science, ..---....-.....25
Psychology and Pedagogics, ----.-....----.-26
Logic, ---.-...--..------26
Elocution, ---..-•-..-...-- ...-26
Drawing, ------.......-----26
HOURS FOR LECTURES AND RECITATIONS, 27
OPENING OF THE TENTH ACADEMIC YEAR, M
HOPKINS HALL LECTURES, 28
PEABODY INSTITUTE LECTURES, 28
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 262 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore. Subscription, $1.00 a year.
STANDING ANNOUNCEMENTS.
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
Opened for Instruction in 1876.
The Johns Hopkins University was founded
by the munificence of a citizen of Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins, who bequeathed the most of his
large estate for the establishment of a Univer-
sity and a Hospital. It was intended that these
institutions should cooperate in the promotion of
medical education. The Hospital buildings are
approaching completion.
The foundation of the University is a capital,
in land and stocks, estimated in value at more
than $3,000,000; the capital of the Hospital is
not less in amount.
The University was incorporated under the laws
of the State of Maryland, August 24, 1867.
Power to confer degrees was granted by the
Legislature in 1876.
Suitable buildings have been provided in Bal-
timore at the corner of Howard and Little Boss
Ste., and are furnished with the necessary appa-
ratus and books.
Academic Staff, 1885-6.
Daniel C. Gilmas, ll.d., President of the University.
J. J. Sylvester, f. r. s., d. c. l., Professor (Emeritus) oj
Mathematics.
Basil L. Gildersleevk, ph. d., ll. d., Professor of Greek,
G. Stanley Hall, ph. d., Professor of Psychology and Peda-
gogies.
Paul Haupt, ph.d., Professor of the Shemitic Languages.
H. Newell Martin, dr.sc., a.m., T.K.s.,Professorof Biol-
ogy and Director of the Biological Laboratory.
Charles D. Morris, a. m., Collegiate Professor of Latin and
Greek. -
Simon Newcomb, ll. d., Professor of Mathematics and As-
tronomy.
Ira Kemskn, m. d., ph. d.. Professor of Chemistry and Direc-
tor of the Chemical Laboratory.
Henry A. Rowland, ph. d., Professor of Physics and Direc-
tor of the Physical Laboratory.
William H. Welch, m.d.. Professor of Pathology.
John S. Billings, m. d., Lecturer on Hygiene.
Lkoncr Rabillon, bach. is lett., Lecturer on French Lit-
erature.
Herbert B. Adams, ph. d., Associate Professor of History.
Maurice Bloomfield, ph. d., Associate Professor of Sanskrit.
William K. Brooks, ph.d., Associate Professor of Morphol-
ogy and Director of the Chesapeake Zoological laboratory.
Thomas Craig, ph. d., Associate Professor of Applied Mathe-
matics,
A. Marshall Elliott, a. v., Associate Professor of Romance
Languages.
Harmon N. Morse, ph. n., Associate Professor of Chemistry
and Sub-Director of the Chemical Laboratoty.
Wi lli am E. Story, ph. d., Associate Professor of Mathematics.
MlNTON Wakrkn, ph. d., Associate Professor of Latin.
George H. Williams, ph. d., Associate Professor of Mine-
ralogy.
Henry Wood, ph.d., Atsociate Professor of German.
William Hand Browne, m. d., Librarian and Associate in
English.
William T. Councilman, m. d., Associate in Pathology.
Richard T. Ely, ph. d., Associate in Political Economy.
Fabian Franklin, ph. d., Associate in Mathematics.
Edward M. Hartwell, m.d., ph.d., Associate in Physical
Training and Director of the Gymnasium.
William H. Howell, ph. d., Associate in Biology.
J. Franklin Jameson, ph.d., Associate in History.
Am Fi i:k L. Kimball, ph. d., Associate in Physics.
Henry A. Todd, ph.d., Associate in Romance languages.
Philip R. Uhler, Associate in Natural History.
James W. Bright, ph. d., Instructor in English.
Henry II. Donaldson, ph. d., Instructor in Psyclwlogy.
Julius Gokbel, ph. d., Instructor in German.
George Hempl, a. b., Assistant in German.
J. P. Mc.Mi kkk ii, ih. D., Instructor in Osteology, etc.
Charles A. Perkins, ph. d., Assistant in Physics.
Edmund Kexoip, ph. d., Assistant in Chemistry.
Edward H. Spiekke, ph. d., Instructor in Latin and Greek.
Hugh Newell, Instructor in Drawing.
Charles L. Woodwoeth, Jr., Instructor in Elocution.
14
PLAN OF THE CIRCULARS.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are
published at convenient intervals during the
academic year for the purpose of communicating
intelligence to the various members of the Univer-
sity in respect to work which is here in progress,
as well as for the purpose of promulgating offi-
cial announcements from the governing and
teaching bodies. During the current academic
year, eight circulars will be issued in successive
months, to be followed at the close of the year by
an index.
Although these circulars are designed for the
members of the University, they have frequently
been called for by institutions and libraries at a
distance, and also by individuals who are inter-
ested in the literary and scientific activity of
this University. Subscriptions and exchanges
are therefore received.
TERMS OF SUBSCRIPTION.
For the current year, 1885-6, $1.
For the year 1884-5, (134 pp. in cloth covers),
$1.50. . , ,
For the year 1883-4, (140 pp. in cloth covers)
$1.50.
For the year 1882-3, (156 pp. in cloth covers), $3.
For the years 1 879-82,(250 pp. in cloth covers), $5.
Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the
Annual Begister and Beport of the University.
All subscriptions should be addressed to the
"Publication Agency of the Johns Hopkins
University."
Communications for the Circulars should be
sent in prior to the first day of the month in which
they are expected to appear.
PUBLIC LECTURES.
Notice in Eespeot to the Admission of the Public.
In answer to inquiries, and in correction of
some current misapprehensions, the following
statements are made in respect to the public
lectures given in the Johns Hopkins University.
These courses are academic lectures, designed
primarily for the members of the University, and
supplementary to the regular class-room work of
the students.
As the members of the University rarely re-
quire the entire room, the Trustees have taken
great pleasure in inviting other persons, not con-
nected with the University, to attend.
Ab these lectures are not intended for popular
entertainment, but for the instruction of students,
those persons first receive tickets, in most cases,
who are known to be especially interested in a
particular course, — ladies as well as gentlemen.
There is no general course ticket issued. Applica-
tions should state specifically the course for which
tickets are desired. Programmes and other cur-
rent information pertinent to university work may
be found in the University Circulars, sent to sub-
scribers, on the payment of one dollar per annum,
by the Publication Agency of the University.
The usage of giving personal notification has
been discontinued, and those therefore who are
interested in such announcements should hereafter
consult the Circulars.
It will save much delay if applications for
tickets and inquiries on these and other routine
matters are addressed not to individuals but to the
Johns Hopkins University, by postal card, and
answers will be promptly returned by mail. Per-
sonal applications consume time needlessly.
8^- The lectures begin at 5 o'clock punctually.
The doors of the hall are opened at fifteen minutes
before 5, and the lectures do not exceed an hour in
the delivery.
PUBLICATIONS ISSUED UNDER THE
AUSPICES OF THE UNIVERSITY.
I. American Journal of Mathematics.
The publication of this journal commenced in
1878, under the editorial direction of Professor
Sylvester, and is now conducted by Professor
Simon Newcomb as Editor, and Dr. T. Craig as
Associate Editor. Seven volumes of about 400
pages each have been issued, and the eighth is in
progress. It appears quarterly, in the quarto
form. Subscription $5 per year. Single numbers
$1.50.
II. American Chemical Journal.
This journal was commenced in 1879, with
Professor Bemsen as editor. Six volumes of
about 450 pages each have been issued, and the
seventh is in progress. It appears bi-monthly.
Subscription $3 per year. Single numbers 50 cts.
III, American Journal of Philology.
The publication of this journal commenced in
1880, under the editorial direction of Professor
(iildersleeve. Five volumes of about 570 pages
each have been issued, and the sixth is in pro-
gress. It appears four times yearly. Subscrip-
tion $3 per volume. Single numbers $1.00.
IV. Studies from the Biological
Laboratory.
[Including the Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory."]
The publication of these papers commenced in
1879, under the direction of Professor Martin,
with the assistance of Dr. W. K. Brooks. Two
volumes of about 500 pages, octavo, and 40 plates
each, have been issued, and the third is in progress.
Subscription $5 per volume.
V. Studies in Historical and Political
Science.
The publication of these papers was begun in
1882, under the editorial direction of Dr. II. B.
Adams. A first series of 470 pages and a second
of 630 pages are now completed and a third series
is in progress. Subscription $3 per volume.
The following publications are also issued by
the University.
The University Circulars. Subscription
$1 per year.
The Annual Beport presented by the Presi-
dent to the Board of Trustees reviewing the opera-
tions of the University during the past academic
year.
The Annual Begister giving the list of offi-
cers and students and stating the regulations of
the University. Published at the close of the
academic year.
The University Circulars, Annual Beport, and
Annual Begister will be sent by mail for one
dollar per annum.
Studies in Logic. By members of the Johns
Hopkins University. C. S. Peirce, Editor. (Bos-
ton: Little, Brown '& Co.) 1883. 123pp.,12o. $2.
The Development and Propagation of the
Oyster in Maryland. By W. K. Brooks. 1884.
193 pp., 4o. 13 plates and 3 maps. $5.
On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat.
By II. A. Bowland. 1880. 127 pp., 8o. $1.50.
New Testament Autographs. By J. Bendel
Harris. 1882. 54 pp., 8o. 4 plates. 50 cents.
Sir William Thomson's Lectures on Mo-
lecular Dynamics. Delivered at the Johns
Hopkins University in October, 1884. Bepro-
duced from stenographic notes by the papyro-
graph plate process. 370 pp., 4o. $5.00.
All communications in respect to publications
should be addressed to the " Publication Agency
of the Johns Hopkins University," Baltimore,
Maryland.
November, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
15
PRELIMINARY REGISTER OF OFFICERS AND STUDENTS.
PROFESSORS AND INSTRUCTORS.
Daniel C. Oilman, LL. d., President of the University.
81 Saratoga St.
A. B., Yale College. 1R'>2. and A. M., 1855; LL. D.. Harvard Univorsity and St. John's College, 1876;
Professor in Yale College, 1803-72 ; President of the University of California, 1872-75.
Basil L. Gildersleeve, Ph. D., LL. D., Professor of Greek. 253 St. Paul St.
A. Ii„ Princeton College, 1849, and A. M., 1852 ; Ph. D., University of Gbttingen, 1853; LL. D., Col-
lege of William and .Maiv, L869 ; Professor of Greek in the University of Virginia, 1856-76; Profes-
sor of Latin iii the Univorsity of Virginia, 1861-00; D. C. L., University of the South, 1884; Editor
of the American Journal of Philology.
G. Stanley Hall, Ph. D., Professor of Psychology and Pedagogics.
458 Eutaw Place.
A. Ii.. Williams College. 1867, and A. M., 1870; Ph. D„ Harvard University, 1878 ; formerly Lecturer
in Harvard and Williams Colleges.
Paul Haupt, Ph. D., Professor of the Shemitic Languages. The Brandon.
Ph. D., University ol Loipsic, 1878; Professor of Assyriology in the University of Gbttingen.
II. Newell Martin, Dr. Sc, A. M., U. D., Professor of Biology, and Director
of the Biological Laboratory. 221 St. Paul St.
M. B.. University of London, 1871, and Dr. 8c., 1872; A. B., University of Cambridge, 1874, and
A. M.. 1S77 ; late follow, and Leetnnr on Natural History in Christ College, Cambridge; Fellow
of University College, London; M. I). (Hon.), University of Georgia, 1881; Editor of Studies from
the Biological Laboratory.
Charles D. Morris, A. M., Collegiate Professor of Latin and Greek.
158 N. Howard St.
A. B., Lincoln College, Oxford, 1849, A. M., and Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford, 1852; Professor in
the University of New York, 1875-76.
Simon Newcomb, Ph. D., LL. D., Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy.
Washington.
B. S., Harvard University, 1858; LL. D., Columbian University, 1874, and Yale, 1875; Ph. D., Uni-
versity of Leyden, 1875; Superintendent of the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac. Wash-
ington ; Associate, Royal Astronomical Society, 1872 ; Corresponding Member, Institute of France,
1874; Foreign Member, Royal Society, London; Editor of the American Journal of Mathematics.
Ira Remsen, M. D., Ph. D., Professor of Chemistry, and Director of the Chemical
Laboratory. 9 W. Biddle St.
Colloge of the City of New York; M. D., College of Physicians and Surgeons, N. Y-, 1807; Ph. D.,
University of Gbttingen, 1879; Professor of Chemistry in Williams College, 1872-70, and previously
Assistant in Chemistry in the University of Tubingen ; Editor of the American Chemical Journal.
Henry A. Rowland, Ph. D., Professor of Physics, and Director of the Phys-
ical Laboratory. 14 Cathedral St.
C. E., Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, 1870; Assistant Professor in the same, 1872-75 ; Ph. D.,
Johns Hopkins University ^1880.
J. J. Sylvester, F. k. S., D. C. L., (Now Savilian Professor of Geometry in
the University of Oxford) Professor Emeritus of Mathematics.
A. M., University of Cambridge ; F. R. S., London and Edinburgh ; Corresponding Member, Institute
of France; afamber, Aatdemj "f Sciences in Berlin, Gottingen. Naples, Milan. St. Petersburg, etc. ;
LL. D., University of Dublin, University of Edinburgh; D. C. L., University of Oxford; Honorary
Fellow of St. John's College. Cambridge : lato Professor of Mathematics in the Royal Military
Aea'lemv, Woolwich ; Copley Medalist, Royal Society, London, 1880; Editor of the American Jour-
nal of Mathematics, 1878-84.
20 Cathedral St.
William H. Welch, M. D., Professor of Pathology.
A. B.. Yale College, 1870; M. D., College of Physicians and Surgeons (N. Y.), 1875; late Professor of
Pathological Anatomy and General Pathology in the Bellevue Hospital Medical College, N. Y.
John S. Billings, m. d., Lecturer on Municipal Hygiene. Washington.
A. B., Oxford College, (Ohio), 1857, and A. M., 1860: M. D . Univorsity of Cincinnati. I860; LL. D.,
University of Edinburgh, 1884; Surgeon, U. S. Army, and Librarian of the Surgeon-General's Office.
Leonce Rabillon, Bach. 4s Lett., Lecturer on French Literature.
69 Park Av.
Bach, es Lettres, Universite de Franco, 1832, and Licencie en Droit, 1836.
Herbert B. Adams, Ph. d.. Associate Professor of History. 41 Cathedral St.
A. B., Amherst College, 1872; Ph. D., University of Heidelberg, 1870; Fellow of the Johns Hopkins
University, 1876-78; Editor of the University Studies in Historical and Political Science.
Maurice Bloomfield, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Sanskrit.
86 W. Monument St.
A. M., Furman University, 1877; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1878-79, and Ph. D-, 1879.
William K. Brooks, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Morphology, and Director
of the Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory. 75 Mt. Royal Av.
A. B„ Williams College, 1870; Ph. D., Harvard University, 1-75.
Thomas Craig, Ph. l>., Associate Professor of Applied Mathematics.
12 First St.
C. E, Lafayette College, 1875; Fellow. Johns Hopkins University, 1876-79, and Ph. D., 1878; Asso-
ciate Editor of the Ancrioan Journal of .Mathematics.
A. Marshall Elliott, a. m.. Associate Professor of the Romance Language*.
241 N. Calvert St.
A. B., llavcrford College, 1860, and A. M., 1878; A. B.. Harvard University, 186S.
Harmon N. Morse, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Chemistry, and Sub-Director
of the Chemical Laboratory. 336 Madison A v.
A. B., Amherst College, 1873; Ph. D., University of Gottingen, 1875; Instructor in Chemistry at
Amherst College, 1875-76.
William E. Story, Ph. D, Associate Professor of Mathematics.
87 W. Preston St.
A. B.. Harvard Unlversitv, 1871 ; Ph. D., University of Leipsic, 1875; Tutor of Mathematics at Har-
vard University, 1875-76.
Minton Warren, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Latin. 84 W. Monument St.
A. B., Tufts College, 1870; Ph. D., University of Strassburg, 1879.
George H. Williams, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Mineralogy.
A. B., Amherst College, 1878; Ph. D., University of Heidelberg, 1863. 43 Cathedral St.
Henry Wood, Ph. D., Associate Professor of German.
A. B., Haverford College, 1869; Ph. D., University of Leipsic, 1879.
67 Oak St.
William Hand Browne, M. D., Librarian, and Associate in English.
M. D., University of Maryland, 1850. 2 Huntingdon Av.
William T. Councilman, m. d., Associate in Pathology.
M. D„ University of Maryland, 1878.
Pikesville.
The Alhion.
Richard T. Ely, Ph. D., Associate in Political Economy.
A. B„ Columbia College, 1876, and A. M., 1879; Fellow of Columbia College, 1876-79; Ph. D., Univer-
sity of Heidelberg, 1879.
Fabian Franklin, Ph. D., Associate in Mathematics. 258 Linden Av.
Ph. B., Columbian University, 1869; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1877-79, and Ph. D., 1880.
Edward M. Hartwell, M. D., Ph. D., Associate in Physical Training and
Director of the Gymnasium. 20 Cathedral St.
A. B., Amherst College, 1873, and A. M., 1876; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1879-81, and
Ph. D., 1881; M. D., Miami Medical College, 1882.
William H. Howell, Ph. D., Associate in Biology. 433 N. Mount St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1881, Fellow, 1882-84, and Ph. D., 1884.
J. Franklin Jameson, Ph. D., Associate in History. 54 McCulloh St.
A. B., Amherst College, 1879; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1881-82, and Ph. D., 1882.
Arthur L. Kimball, Ph. D., Associate in Physics. 80 Bolton St.
A. B., Princeton College, 1881 ; Fellow in Science, Princeton College, 1881-82; Fellow, Johns Hopkins
University. 1882-83, and Ph. D., 1884.
Charles A. Perkins, Ph. D., Associate in Physics. 105 W. Lanvale St.
A. B., Williams College, 1879 ; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1883-84, and Ph. D., 1884.
Henry A. Todd, Ph. D., Associate in Romance Languages.
209 N. Howard St,
A. B., Princeton College, 1876; Fellow and Tutor in Modern Languages in Princeton College, 1876-80;
Ph. D., Johns Hopkins University, 1885.
Philip R. Uhler, Associate in Natural History. 218 W. Hoffman St.
Librarian of the Penbody Institute, and President of the Maryland Academy of Sciences.
Edward H. Spieker, Ph. D., Instructor in Greek and Latin.
215 N. Fremont St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1879, Fellow, 1880-82, and Ph. D., 1882.
J. Playfair McMurrich, Ph.D., Instructor in Osteology and Mammalian
Anatomy. 181 Linden Av.
A. B., University of Toronto, 1879, and A. M., 1882 ; Ph. D., Johns Hopkins University, 1885.
James W. Bright, Ph. D., Instructor in English. 171 Linden Av.
A. B., Lafayette College. 1877 ; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1880-S2, and Ph. D., 1882; Instructor
in Anglo-Saxon and English Literature, Cornell University, 1885.
Henry H. Donaldson, Ph. D., Instructor in Psychology. 112 St. Paul St.
A. B., Yale College, 1879; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1881-83, Assistant in Biology, 1883-84,
and Ph. I)., 1885.
Julius Ooebel, Ph. 1>., Innlrurtor in German.
Ph. D-, University of Tubingen, 1881.
George Hempl, a. B., Instructor in German.
A. B., Univorsity of Michigan, 1879.
209 N. Howard St.
32 Robert St.
16
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 44.
Edmund Renouf, Ph. D., Assistant in Chemistry. 226 Druid Hill Av.
Ph. D.. U-uvwtuty of Freihurg, 1880.
Hugh Newell, Instructor in Drawing. 10 Mt. Royal Terrace.
(' ii aki.es L. Woodworth, Jk., Instructor in Elocution. 680 Madison Av.
inbartt College ; Boston University School of Oratory, 1876.
STUDENTS.
Fellows by Courtesy.
Charles J. Bell. Somerville, Mass. 82 Bolton St.
A. B., Binud College, 1876 ; Professor of Chemistry ih Pennsylvania Suite College, 1883-85.
Adam T. Bruce. New York City. 49 Cathedral St.
A. B., Princeton College, 1881 ; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1883-84. Biology.
James K. Duggan. Macon, Ga. 326 Madison Av.
A. B . Mercer University, 1877, and A. M., 1880; M. D., Jefferson Medical College, 1S7»;
Fellow, Johns Hopkins University. 1883-84, and Ph. D., 1884. Chemistry.
Alfred Emerson. Baltimore.
. D., Uni versi
Instructor in Classical Archaeology, 1884-85. Archasology.
Arthur L. Frothingham. Baltimore. 29 Cathedral St.
Ph. D., University of Leipsic, 1883; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1883-85. Archaeology.
Adolph Gerber. Germany. 213 W. Biddle St.
Ph. D., University of Munich, 1882. Teutonic Languages.
William S. Graves. Davidson College, N. C. (A)
A. M .. Washington and Lee University, 1869, and B. L., 1872 ; Professor of Greek and Ger-
man, Davidson College, N. C. Greek and Latin.
Washington, D. C.
Ph. D., University of Munich, 1S81 ; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1882-84, and
nfclni '
Elgin K. L. Gould.
Washington.
Washington, D. C.
A. B., Victoria University (Ontario), 1881 ; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1882-84;
Instructor, Washington (D. C.) High School. History.
Gubtav A. Liebig, Jr. Baltimore. 307 St. Paul Si.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1882 ; Fellow, 18S3-85, and Ph. D. 1885. Phytict.
Henry B. Nixon. Winfall, N. C. 283 Park Av.
University of North Carolina, 1878; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1884-85. Mathe-
matics.
William Noyes, Jr.
Maiden, Mass.
Bay View Asylum.
A. B., Harvard University, 1881, and M. D., 1885; Fellow, Johns Hopkins University, 1884-85.
Psychology.
Henry Orr. Clinton, N. Y. 97 Harlem Av.
A. B., Hamilton College, 1882; Student at the University of Jena, 1882-85. Biology.
Shosuki Sato. Sapporo, Japan. 4 McCulloh St.
8. B., Sapporo Agricultural College, Japan, 1880. History and Politics.
Herbert W. Smyth. Baltimore. 85 Cathedral St.
A. B., Harvard College, 1878; Ph. D., University of Gottingen, 1882; Instructor in Latin
and Sanskrit in Williams College, 1884-85. Greek.
Mase S. Southworth.
9 W. Biddle St.
Springfield, Mass.
Ph. D., University of Tubingen, 1873 ; Professor of Chemistry in Williams College, 1876-82.
Chemistry.
(15)
Fellows.
Cyrus Adler. Philadelphia. 352 Linden Av.
A. B., University of Pennsylvania, 1883. Shtmitic Languages.
Ethan A. Andrews. New York City. 48 McCulloh St.
Ph. B., Vale College, 1881. Biology.
David Barcroft. Berkeley, Cal. 134 N. Eutaw St.
Ph. B., University of California, 1882. Mathematics.
W. Shirley Bayley. Baltimore. 366 North Av. W.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1883. Geology and Petrography.
Louis Bell. New York City. 82 Bolton St.
A. B., Dartmouth College, 1884. Physics.
Frank A. Christie. Boston, Mass. 54 McCulloh St.
A. B., Amherst College, 1881. Greek.
Henry Crew. Wilmington, Ohio. 8 McCulloh St.
A. B., Princeton College, 1882. Physics.
Davis B. Dewey. Burlington, Vt. 181 Linden Av.
A. B., University of Vermont, 1879. History and Politics.
Albert E. Egge. Deeorah, Iowa. 8 McCulloh St.
A. B., Norwegian Luther College, 1879, and A. M-, 1884. Teutonic Languages.
William H. Emerson. Tunnel Hill, Ga. 202 Druid Hill Av.
V. 8. Naval Academy, 1880. Chemistry.
John C. Fields. Hamilton, Ont. 52 McCulloh St.
A. B-, University of Toronto, 1884. Mathematics.
Abel H. Huizinga. Zeeland, Mich. 367 Eutaw Place.
A. B., Hope College, 1880, and A. M., 1883. Shemitic Languages.
Joseph Jastrow. Philadelphia. 256 W. Lombard St.
A. B., University of Pennsylvania, 1882, and A. M., 1885. Psychology.
George T. Kemp. Baltimore. 55 N. Green St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1883. Biology.
Gonzalez Lodge. Baltimore. 319 McCulloh St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1883. Greek.
Charles S. Palmer. Chicopee, Mass. 207 Druid Hill Av.
A. B., Amherst College, 1879, and A. M., 1882. Chemistry.
Ernest M. Pease. Boulder, Colo. 352 N. Eutaw St.
A. B„ University of Colorado, 1882, and A. M., 1885. Latin.
Charles Whetham. Toronto, Ont. 231 W. Biddle St.
A. B., University of Toronto, 1884, and A. M., 1885. JJomance Langwtges.
(18)
Graduate Students.
425 E. Baltimore St.
238 Linden Av.
Alexander C Abbott. Baltimore.
M. D., University of Maryland, 1884. Biology.
Edgar P. Allen. Shanghai, China.
A. B., Emory College (Ga.), 1885. Shemitic Languages.
Albert C Applegarth. Baltimore. 632 W. Fayette St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1884. History and Politics.
William M. Arnolt. New Brunswick, N. J.
Stuttgart Gymnasium, 1878; B. D., Now Brunswick Theological Seminary, 1882. Greek.
Philip W. Ayres. Villa Ridge, 111. 79 McCulloh St.
Ph. B., Cornell University, 1884. History and Politics.
T. Alexis Berry. Baltimore. 247 Bolton St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1882. History and Politics.
John J. Blandin. Selma, Ala. The Albion.
U. S. Naval Academy, 1882. Physics and Chemistry.
Albert N. Bliss. East Calais, Vt. 198 Druid Hill Av.
A. B., University of Michigan, 1877, and A. M., 1884. History and. Politics.
George W. Botsford. Lincoln, Neb. 166 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., University of Nebraska, 1884. Greek and Latin.
Benjamin L. Bowen. Chili Station, N. Y. 142 Dolphin St.
A. B., University of Rochester, 1881. Komance Languages.
Jeffrey R. Brackett. Quiney, Mass. 22 Cathedral St.
A. B., Harvard University, 1883. History.
Richard N. Brackett. Charleston, S. C. 266 N. Howard St.
• A. B., Davidson College, 1883. Chemistry.
Charles C. Brill. Ilion, N. Y. 247 Linden Av.
A. B., Syracuse University, 1885. Chemistry, etc.
William H. Burnham. Dunbarton, N. H. 542 Druid Hill Av.
A. B., Harvard University, 1882. Psychology, etc.
Richard E. Burton. Hartford, Conn. 86 W. Monument St.
A. B., Trinity College, 1883. English.
George M. Campbell. Truro, N. S. 185 Linden Av.
A. B., Dalhousie University, 1882.* Mathematics.
John P. Campbell. Charlestown, W. Va. 352 If. Eutaw St.
A. B., Johus HopkinB University, 1885. Biology.
Walter B. Canfield. Baltimore. 43 Cathedral St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1884. Chemistry and Mineralogy.
Henry Chandi.ee. Baltimore. 181 Linden Av.
M. D., University of Maryland, 1882, and Hahnemann Medical College, Philadelphia, 1883.
Biology.
Henry L. Coar. W. Springfield, Mass. 330 N. Eutaw St.
Cologne Gymnasium, 1884. Geology.
George P. Coler. Athens, O. 168 N. Arlington Av.
A. B., Ohio University, 1882. History, etc.
John B. Crenshaw. Ashland, Va. 241 N. Eutaw St.
A. M., Randolph Macon College, 1881. Modern Ltmguagcs.
Melvin E. Crowell. Geneseo, N. Y. 255J W. Biddle St.
A. B., University of Rochester, 1879. Pedagogics, etc.
James Cummings. Topsfield, Mass. 281 Linden Av.
A. B., University of Tennessee, 1880, and A. M., 1884. English.
David T. Day. Baltimore. 266 N. Hoivard St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1881, Fellow, 1882-84, and Ph. D., 1884. Chemistry.
November, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
17
54 McCulloh St.
266 N. Howard St.
35 McOuUoh St.
Charles A. Doviu.kday. Montclair, K. J.
A. U., Amherst College, 1881. Gnil;.
Charles G. Duni.ap. Chillieotlie, O.
A. B., Ohio Wesleyan University, 188S. Btglish.
Henry I!. Edmiston. Columbia, Tenn.
University of Virginia. Rvmanrr Languages.
George W. Edmond. Portland, Me.
A. B., Johna Hopkins University, lsst. Biology.
Edward S. Elliott. Savannah, Ga. 262 W. Hoffman St.
A. B. and A.M., University of the South, 1884. Latin and Greek.
Herbert C. Elmer. Kushford, N. Y. 93 W. Preston St.
A. B., Cornell University, 1883. Latin and Greek.
John A. Fisher. Baltimore. 85 McCulloh St.
Ph. B., Illinois Wesleyan University, 1880. Philosophy and History.
JosEPn A. Fontaine. Bue, France. 137 N. Eutaw St.
College of Sion, Nancy, France, 1879. Sowumot Languages.
Andrew Fossum. Elon, Iowa. 180 W. B'uldle St.
A. B., Norwegian Luther College, 1882. Greek and History.
Oscar J. Frost. Argo, Colo. 202 Druid Hill Av.
B. M. E., Uuivorsity of Wisconsin, 1882, and M. E., 1885. Chemistry.
Henry 15. GARDNER. Providence, R. I. 49 Cathedral St.
A. B., Brown 1,'nh'ursity, 138 1. Bietary, etc.
Robert W. Gatewood. Norfolk, Va. 58 McCulloh St.
U. S. Naval Academy, 1884. Pwyifoj "<"/ Uatki /natics.
John Glenn, Jr. Baltimore. 343 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885.
George W. Gooch. Henderson, N. C. 120 N. Green St.
A. B., Yadkin College, 1881. Chtmittry.
Mark B. Grier. Due West, S. C. 64 McCulloh St.
A. B., Erskiue College, 1885. Greek and Hebrew.
Milton Haight. Pine Orchard, Ont. 52 McCulloh St.
A. B., University of Toronto, 1884. Mathematics and Physics.
George B. Haldeman. Cedarville, 111. 16 McCulloh St.
A. B., Beloit College, 18S3. Biology.
C. Willard Hays. Hanover, 0. 266 iV. Howard St.
A. B., Oberlin College, 1883. Chemistry.
William A. Hedrick. Georgetown, D. C. 84 Harlem Av.
A. M., Columbian University, 1884. Chemistry and Physics.
John C. Hemmeter. Baltimore. 204 German St.
M. D., University of Maryland, 1883. Biology and Chemistry.
George A. Hench. Carlisle, Pa. 266 N. Howard St.
A. B., Lafayette College, 1885. English.
Francis H. IIerrick. Tilton, N. H. 58 McCulloh St.
A. B., Dartmouth College, 1881. Biology.
Hiram F. IIixson. Ashland, Ohio. 130 N. Eutaw St.
Ph. B., Ashland College, 1881, and Ph. D„ 1883. Psychology.
William II. Hobbs. Auburn, Mass. 65 McCulloh St.
S. B., Worcester (Mass.) Free Institute, 1SS3. Chemistry and Physics.
William P. Holcomb. Newtown, Pa. 122 Cathedral St.
L. B., Swarthmore College, 1878, and M. L., 1881. History and Politics.
Jesse H. Holmes. Lincoln, Neb. 299 N. Mount St.
S. B., University of Nebraska, 1881. Chemistry and Physics.
Junius M. Horner. Oxford, N. C. 241 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885. Psychology.
Frank G. HtTBBABJD. Oswego, N. Y. 8 McCulloh St.
A. B., Williams Cllege, 1380. English.
George B. Hissey. Fast Orange, N. J. 16 McCulloh St.
A. B., Columbia College, 1884. Greek.
Joseph L. Jayne. Brandon, Miss.
U. S. Naval Academy, 1882. Physics ■ >„.; Ch, mi. try.
Oliver P. Jenkins. Terrc Haute, Ind.
A. B., Moore's Hill College, UN, and A. M., 1S72. Marine laboratory,
C. Edgeworth Jones. Augusta, Ga. 132 W. Madison St.
A. B., University of Georgia, 1885. Latin, t; ,■>.];. ate,
Joseph H. Kastle. Lexington, Kr. 330 N. Eutaw St.
8. B., Kentucky State College, 1881. Chemistry.
58 McCulloh St.
Beaufort, N. C.
174 Saratoga St.
397 Park Av.
14 North Av.
247 Linden Av.
1 McCulloh St.
410 N. Eden St.
Katzenstein. Baltimore.
University of Berlin. Teutonic Languages.
P. Otis Keii.holtz. Baltimore.
U. 8. Naval Academy, 1884. Physics.
Courtney Langdon. Bedford, Pa.
Harvard College. History (8cm.)
Marion I). Learned. Dover, Del.
A. B., Dickinson College, 1880, and A. M., 1883. Modern Languages.
Alvin F. I. inn. Springfield, O.
A. B., Wittenborg College (Ohio), 1884. Chemistry.
James A. Loane. ISaltimorc.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885.
Herbert W. Magoun. Bath, Me. 327 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., Iowa College, 1879, and A. M.. 1882. Greek.
John M. Mansfield. Mt. Pleasant, Iowa. 345 Penn. Av.
A. B., Iowa Wesleyan University, 1864, and Ph. D., 1869. Mathematics and Physics.
John E. Matzke. Ridott, 111. 134 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., Hope College, 1882. BViwimi Tsngmngot.
Thomas McCabe. New York City. 266 N. Howard St.
University of France ; University of Rome. Romance Languages.
James H. McIntosh. Newberry, S. C 333 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., Newberry College, 1884. Chemistry and Biology.
Felix T. McWhirter. Greencastle, Ind. 330 N. Eutaw St.
A. B., East Tennessee Wesleyan University, 1873, and A. M., 1884; Ph. D., De Pauw Uni-
versity, 1885. Chemistry and Physics.
Caspar O. Miller. Baltimore. 210 N. Howard Su
M. D., University of Virginia, 1880 ; M. D., University of New York, 1881. Biology.
C. W. Emit, Miller. Baltimore. 306 S. Sharp St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1882, and Fellow, 1883-85. Greek.
T. Wesley Mills. Montreal, Quebec. Beaufort, N. C.
A. B., University of Toronto, 1871, and A. M., 1872; M. D., McGill University, 1878, L. R„
C. P. (Eng.) ; Lecturer on Physiology in McGill University, Montreal. Marine Labora-
tory.
William M. Milroy. Northwood, O. 64 McCulloh St.
A. B., Geneva College, 1877 ; B. D., Yale College, 1882. Latin and Greek.
J. Leverett Moore. Orange, N. J.
A. B., Princeton College, 1881, and A. M., 1884. Latin.
A. D. Morrell. Chapel Hill, O.
Marine Laboratory.
Park Morrill. . St. Johnsbury, Vt. 47 Courtland St.
A. B., Amherst College, 1881 ; U. S. Signal Service. Physics.
C. W. Mossei.l. Lockport, N. Y. 224 Hanover St.
A. B., Lincoln University, 1871 ; B. D., Boston University, 1874. Bhemitic Languages.
Augustus T. Murray. New Bedford, Mass. 209 if. Howard St.
A. B., Havorford College, 1885. Latin ami giuuM,
Henry F. Nachtrieb. Minneapolis, Minn. Beaufort, N. C.
S. B., University of Minnesota, 1882 ; Professor of Zoology, University of Minnesota. Marine
Laboratory.
Julius Nelson. Waupaca, Wis. 134 N. Eutaw St.
8. B., University of Wisconsin, 1881, and M. S., 1884. Biology.
John C. C. Newton. Millersburg, Ky. 58 N. Broadway.
A. B., Kentucky Military Institute, 1874, and A. M., 1877. History and Philosophy.
George H. F. Nut-tall. San Francisco, Cal. Baltimore and North Sts.
M. D., University of California. Biology.
William R. Orndorff. Baltimore. 382 W. Lanvale St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1884. Chemistry and Mineralogy.
Inazo Ota. Tokio, Japan. 4 McCulloh St.
8. B., Sapporo Agricultural College, 1881. History ami Politics.
George T. W. Patrick. Lyons, Iowa. 62 Bolton St.
A. B., State University of Iowa, 1878; B. D., Yale College, 1885. Greek and Philosophy.
Joseph E. Peirson. Pittsfield, Mass. 8 McCulloh St.
A. B.. Williams Colloge, 1883. (hinu ami Latin.
C. Allen Perkins. Syracuse, N. Y. 173 N. Calvert St.
Jt'imta/'-r Languages.
William H. Perkins, Jr. Baltimore. 207 Fratd-liu St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1884. PoBtibal ImMM
David Pini.irsoN. Baltimore. 205 IF. Lombard St.
A. B., University of Cincinnati, 1883; Hebrew Union College (Cincinnati), 1883. Sh.mitic
Languages,
16 McCulloh St.
Beaufort, N. C.
Cameron Piggot. Baltimore.
M. D., University of Maryland, 1882. Chemistry.
90 N. Fulton St.
18
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 44.
B. JOHNSON POE.
A. B., Princeton College, 188*.
Bolling A. Pope, Jr.
8. B.. Tnlane Uuiversit y, 1S85.
Eli>riik)e C. Price.
Baltimore.
History and Politics.
New Orleans, La.
Biology and Chemistry.
Baltimore.
124 St. Paul St.
6 McOulloh St.
175 Linden Av.
M. IX. University of Maryland, 1874, and Hahnemann Medical College, Philadelphia, 1874.
Biology.
C. Byron Qutncy. Salina, Kansas. 65 McOulloh St.
B. L., University of Wisconsin, 1883. Psychology and Pedagogics.
B. James Ra m age. Newberry, S. C. (A)
A. B., Newberry College, 1880. History.
Franklin P. Ramsat. Troy, Ala. 215 Druid Hill Av.
A. B., Davidson College (N. C), 1S79, and A. M., 1885. Shemitic Languages.
Daniel B. Randall. Annapolis. 365 N. Charles St.
A. B , St. Johns College, 1883. History and Politics.
Wyatt W. Randall. Annapolis. 365 N. Charles St.
A. B.. St. John's College, 1884. Chemistry.
James S. Reeve. Appleton, Wis. 105 W. Lanvale St.
A. B., Lawrence University, (Wis.) 1885. Biology and Chemistry.
Jacob M. Rich. New York City. The Brexton.
E. M., Columbia College, 1883, and C E.. 1884. Physics and Chemistry.
Benjamin T. Roberts, Jr. North Chili, N. Y. 255 N. Carrollton Av.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885. Latin and Greek.
Moses R. Ryttenbero. Baltimore.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885. History.
Conway W. Sams. Baltimore.
LL. B., University of Maryland, 1884. Political Economy.
Edmund C. Sanford. Oakland, Cal.
A. B., University of California, 1883. Psychology and Politics.
Charles A. Schloegel.
Baltimore.
Languages.
Plainfield, N. J.
Greek and Latin.
Waukon. Iowa.
Henry S. Scribner.
A. B., Princeton College, 1881
Joseph S. Shefloe.
A. B., Norwegian Lather College, 1885. Latin and Greek.
Moses Slaughter. Brooklyn, Ind.
A. B., Indiana Asbnry University, 1883. Latin and Greek.
Robert N. Sloan. Baltimore.
A. B., Georgetown College, 1885. English and Politics.
A. Donaldson Smith. Philadelphia, Pa.
A. B., University of Pennsylvania, 1885, Chemistry and Biology.
Kirby W. Smith. Rutland, Vt.
A. B., University of Vermont, 1884. Latin, etc.
Albert H. Smyth. Philadelphia, Pa.
English.
Robert B. Steele. Lodi, Wis.
A. B., University of Wisconsin, 1883. Greek.
Hugo Stetner. Baltimore.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885. History.
Carlton B. Stetson. West Sumner, Me,
A. B., Colby University, 1881, and A. M., 1885. Greek and Latin.
James S. Trueman. St. John, N. B.
A. B., Dalhonsie College, 1882. Greek and Latin.
George M. Turner. Skaneateles, N. Y.
8. B., Amherst CoUege, 1885. Chemistry and Physics.
Edward B. Van Vleck. Middletown, Conn.
A. B., Wesleyan University, 1884. Mathematics and Physics.
Samuel Wallis. New Orleans, La.
A. B., Georgetown College, (D. C), 1884. Chemistry.
William F. Walz. Baltimore.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1884. Greek and Latin.
Amos G. Warner. Roca, Neb.
B. L., University of Nebraska, 1885. History and Politics,
Henry H. Wiegand. Baltimore.
A. B., Johns Hopkins University, 1885. Physics.
Arthur C. Wightman. Marion, S. C.
A. B., Wolford College, 1879. Biology.
John R. Wightman. Toronto, Ontario. 93 Preston St.
A. B., University of Toronto, 18J1, and A.. M., 1872. Romance Languages.
72 N. Front St.
619 N. GUmor St.
8 McOulloh St
169 S. Bond St.
80 Bolton St.
205 W. Biddle St.
352 N. Eutaw St.
43 W. Eager St.
86 W. Monument St.
123 W. Madison St.
124 W. Hoffman St.
62 Bolton St.
23 Hollins St.
198 Druid Hill Av.
185 Linden Av.
201 N. Howard St.
201 Park Av.
11 Cathedral St.
288 E. Madison St.
299 N. Mount St.
272 Madison Av.
130 N. Pine St.
Lucius E. Williams. Macon, Ga.
A. B., Mercer University, 1885. Chemistry and Physics.
Henry V. Wilson. Baltimore.
A. B., Johns Hopkins Univorsity, 1883. Biology.
John F. Woodhull.
A. B., Yale College, 1880.
Chicopee, Mass.
Chemistry and Physics.
TJXDERGKADUATES.
Matriculates.
Joseph S. Ames. Faribault, Minn.
Shattuck 8chool. Group II.
Edward C. Applegarth. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group III.
H. Harold Ballard. Baltimore.
Mr. G. G. Careys School. Group IV.
Richard H. Bayard. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group VI.
W. Lloyd Bevan. Baltimore.
Rev. W. Kirkus, Instructor. Group I.
J. William Black. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group VI.
William Bromwell. Port Deposit.
West Nottingham Academy. Group IV.
Hamilton M. Brown. Baltimore.
Prof. C. Maupin, Instructor. Group V.
Arthur L. Browne. Baltimore.
Mr. W. 8. Marston's School. Group IV.
Herbert M. Brune. Baltimore.
St. Paul's School. Group VI.
Thomas H. Buckler. Baltimore.
Harvard College. Group III.
Charles E. Coates, Jr. Baltimore.
Westtown School (Pa.). Group III.
William R. Cole. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group I.
Port Republic.
Baltimore.
Group I.
Baltimore.
Group IV.
Paul J. Dashiell.
St. John's College. Group IV.
William L. Devries.
Mr. H. W. Luckett, Instructor.
Alfred R. L. Dohme.
Friends' High School, 1883.
Albert A. Doub. Hagerstown.
Washington County High School. Group VI.
George P. Dreyer. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group III.
Edward Duffy, Jr. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group II.
Edwin Eareckson, Jr. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group II.
William S. Eichelberger. Woodberry.
Baltimore City College, 1883. Group II.
Harry English. Washington, D. C
Washington High School. Group V.
James C. Fifield. Kearney, Neb.
Phillips Academy (Andover). Group VI.
Abraham Flexner. Louisville, Ky.
Louisville High School. Group I.
Julius Friedenwald. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group ///.
William E. Gates. Philadelphia, Pa.
Mr. George Eastburn, Instructor. Group VII.
Raleigh C. Gildersleeve. Baltimore.
Mr. W. 8. Marston's School. Group I.
J. Elliott Gilpin. Baltimore.
Mr. G. O. Carey's School. Group III.
330 N. Eutaw St.
314 Linden Av.
Green and Saratoga Stx.
(128)
255 N. Carrollton Av.
632 W. Fayette St.
133 Division St.
41 Cathedral St.
Catonsville.
100 W. Lanvale St.
73 Charles St. Av.
44 North Av.
2 Huntingdon Av.
16 North Av.
135 N. Charles St.
118 Cathedral St.
18 Huntingdon Av.
266 N. Howard St.
72 Cathedral St.
27 Hollins St.
372 Lexington St.
168 S. Broadway.
430 Park Av.
High and Baltimore Sts.
193 Argyle Av.
84 Harlem Av.
182 N. Eutaw St.
23 Hollins St.
88 N. Eutaw St.
(A.)
253 St. Paul St.
162 N. Howard St.
November, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
19
Douglas H. Gordon. Baltimore.
Mr. II. W. Luckett, Instructor. Group VI.
William C. L. Gorton. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group II.
Jay C. Guggenheimer. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group VI.
J. Edward Harry. Pylesville.
Maryland Normal School. Group I.
Benjamin H. Hartogensis. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College, 1833. Group III.
James S. Hodges. Baltimore.
St. Paul's School, Concord, N. H. Group I.
Otto Hoffmann. New York City.
Dr. J. Sachs, Instructor. Group I.
Theodore Hough. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston'a School. Group I.
Percy M. Hughes.^ Washington, D. C.
Dickinson College. Group I.
Walter Jones. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group II.
William A. Jones. Tuscaloosa, Ala.
Mr. C. Maupin'a School. Group VI.
Arthur L. Lamb. Baltimore.
Mr. E. M. Lamb's School. Group III.
Allan McLane, Jr. Baltimore.
Mr. H. \V. Luckett, Instructor. Group I.
Robert M. McLane, Jr. Baltimore.
Mr. G. G. Carey's School. Group I.
John H. T. McPiierson. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group V.
Colyer Meriwether. Clark's Hill, S. C.
Yanderbilt University. Group VI.
W. Howard Miller. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group II.
John Pleasants. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston'a School. Group VI.
Robert W. Rogers. Philadelphia.
University of Pennsylvania. Group I.
Arthur J. Rowland. Baltimore.
University of Pennsylvania. Group I.
Charles E. Simon. Baltimore.
Dr. E. Deichmahn's School. Group III.
William F. Smith. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College, 18S3. Group ///.
Michael D. Stein. Oakland, Cal.
University of California. Group III.
Robert M. Tarleton. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group VII.
Robert T. Taylor. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group V.
Henry O. Thompson.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School.
Benjamin S. W. Tuska.
College of the City of New York. Group VI.
Edward L. White. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston'a School. Group II.
Bernard Wiesenfeld. Baltimore.
Harvard University. Group VI.
J. Whitridge Williams. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group III.
Langdon Williams. Boston, Mass.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group VI.
William K. Williams.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School.
Henry F. Wingert.
Washington County High School, (/roup II.
John R. Winslow. Baltimore.
Friends' School, Providence, R. I. Group ill.
Baltimore.
Group I.
New York City.
Boston, Mass.
Group VI.
Hagerstown.
27 Franklin St.
38 S. Ann St.
427 Madison Av.
333 N. Eutaw St.
10 Harrison St.
83 Saratoga St.
266 N. Howard St.
181 McCulloh St.
65 McUuUoh St.
281 Maryland Av.
The Albion.
187 McCulloh St.
37 Cathedral St.
37 Cathedral St.
The Albion.
266 N. Howard St.
141 E. Toumsend St.
66 Mt. Vernon PI.
263 N. Howard St.
162 N. Calhoun St.
201 Linden Av.
206 Mosher St.
115 W. Lanvale St.
89 W. Preston St.
225 Maryland Av.
78 W. Monument St.
40 Laurens St.
(A.)
Ill E. Baltimore St.
201 Madison Av.
77 Cathedral St.
77 Cathedral St.
4 McCulloh St.
23 McCulloh St.
Allan C. Woods. Baltimore.
Mr. O. O. Carey's School. Group VI.
Frederick G. Young. Beaver Dam, Wis.
Wisconsin Normal School. Group VI.
374 Eutaw PI.
87 W. Preston St.
(Candidates for Matriculation.')
New York City. 209 N. Howard St.
Paul Allen.
Harvard College. Group III.
Edward A. Bechtel. Colore.
West Nottingham Academy. Group I.
Walton Bolgiano. Waverly.
Dr. Deichmann's School. Group III.
C. Boyd. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston'a School. Group VI.
Charles P. Brigham. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group IV.
Charles H. Carey. Baltimore.
Mr. G. G. Carey's School. Group IV.
Francis M. Chisolm. Baltimore.
Mr. W. 8. Marston'a School, (/roup ///.
John B. Daish. Washington, D. C
Washington High School. Group VI.
Richard Dorsey. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group VI.
Rankin Duval. Baltimore.
Dr. Deichmann's School. Group VI.
Clarence H. Forrest. Annapolis.
St. John's College. Group VI.
Harry W. Hahn. Chicago, 111.
Chicago High School. Group VI.
William S. Hilles. Baltimore.
Private Instruction. Group VI.
John Henry Laessig. Baltimore.
Maryland College of Pharmacy. Group IV.
Charles D. Lanier. McDonogh.
McDonogh School. Group VI.
Albert H. Loeb. Chicago, 111.
Chicago High School. Group I.
John Macauley. Washington, D. C.
Washington High School. Group IV.
George N. Moore. Washington, D. C.
Washington High School. Group III.
Oliver H. Palmer. Washington, D. C.
Haileybury College, England. Group I.
Richard H. Pleasants. Baltimore.
Mr. H. W. Luckett, Instructor. Group VI.
Thomas N. Poullain. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Group VII.
Frank E. Reader. New Brighton, Pa.
Geneva College (Pa.). Group VI.
David E. Roberts. Baltimore.
Pennsylvania State College. Group IV.
Lessing Rosenthal. Chicago, 111.
Chicago High School. Group I.
Frank W. Taylor. McDonogh.
McDonogh School. Group II.
Horatio A. Warren. Collinsville, Conn.
Collinsville High School.
Robert W. H. Weech. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Group II.
John White, Jr. Poolesville.
Charlestown (W. Va.) Academy. Group IV.
William F. Willoughby. Alexandria, Va.
Washington High School. Group VI.
73 Charles St. Av.
Waverly.
103 S. Broadway.
McCulloh and Presstman Sis.
100 Charles St. Av.
55 Franklin St.
266 N. Howard St.
205 Franklin St.
178 Franklin St.
Myrtle Av. and George St
288 W. FayetU St.
281 N. CarroUton Av.
419 W. Fayette St.
McDonogh P. 0.
291 Lexington St.
207 W. BiddU St.
Washington, D. C.
87 W. Preston St.
40 Cathedral Si.
410 Eutaw PI.
213 Mulberry St.
7 Tome St.
291 Lexington St.
268 Mosher St.
49 E. Chase St.
398 Madison Av.
258 Linden Av.
266 N. Howard St.
20
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 44.
Westel W. Willouohby. Alexandria, Va.
Washington High School. Group VI.
Preliminary Medical.
L. Bradley Dorr. Buffalo, N. Y.
Baffalo (X.Y.) High School.
Thomas S. Fears. Summit, N. J.
Dr. J. Sachs, New York, Instructor.
Alfred Mann. Milwaukee, Wis.
Milwaukee High School.
Harry O1 Donovan.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School.
Joseph F. Shemwell.
Charlotte Hill School.
Aitdley H. Stow.
Baltimore City College.
Edward W. Willis.
Baltimore City College.
Baltimore.
Prince Frederick.
Baltimore.
Baltimore.
Special Students.
Charles A. Boston. Baltimore.
Law Department, University of Maryland. HUtory and I
Cornelius Bruyn. Kingston, N. Y.
Rutgers College. Language*.
Charles T. Child. Bichmond, Va.
Richmond CoUege. Physic*.
Thomas Cradock. Pikesville.
Dr. Deichmann's School. Physics, etc.
Richard H. Davis. Philadelphia, Pa.
Lehigh University. History and Politics:
Horace M. Engle. Marietta, Pa.
Lehigh University. Chemistry, etc.
Richard F. Exsey, Jr. St. Denis.
Baltimore City College. Mathematics and Physics.
William C Ferguson. Richmond, Ind.
Richmond High School. History and Politics.
Cornelius Ferris, Jr. Denver, Colo.
Denver High School. History, etc.
John L. Hall. Richmond, Va.
Randolph Macon College. Teutonic Languages.
William E. Hamilton, Jr. Shreveport, La.
Washington and Lee University. Chemistry.
Edward T. Helfenstein. Frederick.
Episcopal High School (Va.). Latin and Greek.
Raymond L. Henderson. Hancock.
Columbian University. Chemistry.
Albert B. Hoen, Waverly.
Loyola College. Chemistry.
Harry C. Jones. New London.
Western Maryland College. Chemistry and Physics.
John C. Mason. Baltimore.
St. Paal's School. Chemistry and Biology.
William R. Molinard. Baltimore.
Dr. Deichmann's School. Mathematics and Physics.
C. Keener Mount. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School. Chemistry.
James M. Patterson. Denver, Colo.
Arnstadt (Germany) Gymnasium. Bistory, etc.
William B. D. Penniman. Howard Co.
Baltimore City College. Chemistry.
Alexander Preston. Baltimore.
Mr. G. O. Carey's School. Latin, etc.
D. Meredith Reese. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. History an// Jjangunys.
William P. Beeves. Richmond, Ind.
Earlham CoUege. English and German.
266 N. Howard St.
(94)
241 N. Eutaw St.
132 W. Madison St.
52 McQulloh St.
115 IF. Monument St.
52 Conway St.
435 N. Mount St.
380 E. Baltimore St.
(7)
79 St. Paul St. Ex.
lilies.
333 N. Eutaw St.
8 McCulloh St.
PikcsviUe.
187 Madison Av.
35 MiOuUoh St.
106 W. Biddle St.
86 W. Monument St.
86 W. Monument St.
83 Green St.
330 N. Eutaw St.
382 Druid Hill Av.
611 N. Gilmor St.
Waverly.
266 N. Howard St.
169 St. Paul St.
236 IAnden Av.
169 Linden Av.
66 N. Paca St.
St. Denis P. O.
466 Eutaw Place.
427 Linden Av.
86 W. Monument St.
Williard G. Rouse. Belair.
Belair Acadomy. History and Politics.
Morris P. Stevens. Baltimore.
Baltimore City College. Mathematics and Physic*.
Iiivix J. Straus. Baltimore.
Mr. W. S. Marston's School.
Charles K. Swartz. Gettyshurg, Pa.
Pennsylvania College. Biology and Chemistry.
A— Abtctu.
243 N. Carrolllon Av.
254 Linden Av.
136 N. Calhoun St.
73 Edmondson Av.
(27)
HONORS.
Scholars on the Foundation.
university scholars.
(Appointed 1885).
J. P. Campbell,
J. M. Horner,
C. H. Howard,*
•lUsignvl, OUobtr, 1885.
Va.
J. A. Loane, .
Md
N.C.
W. R. Orndorff, .
H. V. WiUbn,
Md
Md.
Md
HONORARY HOPKINS SCHOLARS.
(Appointed 1S83.)
W. C. L. Gorton, .
W. F. Smith,
A. C. Woods,
(Appointed 1884.)
E. (J. Applegarth, .
T. Hough, .
(Appointed 1885).
H. H. Ballard,
H. M. Brown,
Md.
J. H. T. McPherson, .
Md
Md.
E. L. White, .
Md
Md.
(Appointed 1885.)
G. P. Dreyer,
Md.
. ' Md.
W. H. Miller,
Md
Va.
R. C. Gildersleeve,
Md
HOPKINS SCHOLARS.
A. L. Browne,
Md
Md.
W. L. Devries,
Md
Md.
0. E. Simon, .
Md
TABULAR STATEMENTS.
I. Academic Staff, 1885-86.
President and Professors,
Lecturers,
Associate Professors, .
Associates,
Instructors and Assistants,
II. Enrolled Students, 1885-86.
Graduate (including Fellows),
Matriculate,
Special, ....
11
2
10
10
10
43
161
94
34
HI. Summary, 1876-85.
Years.
Teachers.
Total
Enrolled
Students.
Graduate
Students,
including
Follows.
Matriculates,
Special,
Degrees Conferred.
Candidates. ! Prel. Med.
A. B.
Ph. D.
1870-77, .
1877-78 ...
1878-79,,,.
1879-80,,
1880-81 ,..,
1881-82,., ,
1882-83
1883-84
isx-l >„.
1885-80'.. .
29«
34
25
33
39
43
41
49
52
43
89
104
123
159
176
175
204
249
290
289
54
88
63
79
102
99
125
159
174
161
12
24
25
32
37
45
49
53
69
94
23
22
35
48
37
31
30
37
47
34
3
16
12
u
10
23
9
4
6
5
9
9
6
15
13
a In the first two years the number of non-resident lecturers was much larger than it haa been since.
b In 1885-S6, the numbers are given for October, 1SS5, at the opening of the academic year.
IV. Classification by .Residences of Students, 1885-86,
Maryland (Baltimore, 102)
New York,
Massachusetts,
Pennsylvania,
Ohio, .
District of Columbia,
Illinois,
New Jersey, .
ISoiith Carolina,
Virginia,
Georgia,
Indiana,
Iowa, .
Wisconsin, .
California,
Colorado,
Nebraska,
North Carolina,
Vermont,
Alabama,
124
20
14
1:1
Connecticut, .
Kentucky,
Lou istana,
Maine,
Minnesota,
New Hampshire,
Rhode Island,
Delaware,
Michigan,
Mississippi,
Tennesa e.
Wesl Virginia,
Kansas,
Canada,
Japan,
China, ,
France,
Germany,
November, 1885.]
UNIVEBSITY CIRC U LABS.
21
V. Attendance UP03 thk Various Courses of Instruction, 1885-86.
Matlieniitics, .... 47
Physics, .... 51
Chemistry, .... 89
Mineralogy, .... 47
Biology, .... 48
Greek, 40
Latin, ..... 71
Bhemitio Languages, . . 14
Sanskrit, etc., .... 31
Gorman, . . .
Romance Languages. .
English ami AnffJo-oaxon, .
History and Political Science,
Psychology and Pedagogies,
'■"Vi<-
Elocution, . , •
Drawing, . . ,
111
61
54
97
49
28
52
64
VI. List of Institutions in which the Students Enrolled
(1885-80) WERE Graduated.
Johns Hopkins University,
Harvard r ntveraii y.
I nivi rsity of Maryland, . .
Axnhersi ('allege,
Princeton Collese, .
l'ni> or^ily of Toronto,
T'. S. N;tv;d Academy,
University of Wisconsin, .
Tale Col ...
University of California, .
University of Nebraska,
Ian Luther i '<'llixre,
Univeisiiy of Pennsylvania,
Colnndiiu'Coile^'c, .
Cornell University, .
Dalhousle University (Nova Scotia),
1 Mri mouth College, . . .
Davidson * iollege, . . .
De I'auw University,
own < Iollege (D. C.)
Hope Co . .
rsity, . . " .
University at Munich, . ,
rry t Allege, . . .
University of Rochester, .
Sapporo Agric. College (Japan), .
St. John's College (.Md.), .
University of Virginia, . .
gity of Vermont,
Williams College,
Ashland College (Ohio),
Belolt College,
University of Peilin, ,
Boston University, . .
Brows University, .
University of Cincinnati, . ,
Olby University,
Columbian University (D. C),
University of Colorado,
Cologne (■ynniasinm,
Dickinson College, . . .
Emory College i ku),
Erskiue College (8. C.),
Geneva College,
23
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
University of Goltingen, . ■
University of Georgia, . .
Hamilton College, .
Baverford College, . . .
Illinois Wesley an University,
Iowa College, . . .
Iowa Wesleyan University,
Iowa State University,
Jefferson Medical College, .
Kentucky State College,
Kentucky Military institute,
Lafayette College, .
Lawrence University,
University of Lelpsic, . ,
McGill University, .
Lincoln University, . ,
University of Michigan, . .
University of Minnesota, .
[nd.),
University of North Carolina,
University of N. Y.,
New Brunswick Theological Seminary,
Oberlin College,
Ohio University.
Ohio Weeleyan University, .
College of Nancy (France),
Randolph Macon College, .
University of the South, . .
Stuttgart Gymnasium, . .
Swai thniore College, . .
Syracuse University, . .
University of Tennessee, .
East Tennessee Wesleyan University,
Trinity College (Conn.),
University of Tubingen, .
Tulane University, . . .
Victoria University (Canada),
Washington and Lee University,
Wesleyan University (Conn.),
\\ Itten berg College (Ohio),
Woffotd College (S. €.).
Worcester (Mass.) Free Institute,
Yadkin College (N.C.),
INDEX TO LISTS OF NAMES.
FACE.
Ahbott, A.C „. 16
Adams, II. li 15
Adler, C 16
Allen, E. P 16
Allen, P 19
Ames, J. 8 18
Andrews, E. A 16
Applegarth, A. ( 16
Appl. garth. E. C 18
Aruolt, \V. M 16
Ayres, P. w 10
Ballard, II. H 18
Barcro(l,D 16
Bayard, It. H 18
Bavley, W. S 16
Bechtel, E.A 19
Bell, C. J 16
Bell, L..... 16
Berry, T. A 16
Bevan, W. i, is
Billings J. S 15
Black, J. W 18
Blandin, .1. J 16
Bliss, A.N 16
Bloomfield, M is
Bolgiano, W 19
Boston, C. A 20
Boteford.G.W 16
Bowen, B. L 16
Boyd, J. C 19
Brackett, .1 K 16
Brackett, R. N 16
Brigham, C. P 19
Bright, J. W 15
Brill, <'. C 16
Brnniwcll, W 18
Brooks, \V. K 15
Brown, II. II 18
Browne, A. L 18
Browne. \v. H 15
Bruce, A. T k;
Brune, 11. M 18
Bruvn, (' 20
Buckler, 1 H 18
Burnham.W. II 16
Builou. B. E 16
PAGE.
Campbell, O. M 16
Campbell. J. P 16
Can field, W. B 16
Carey, C. II 19
Cbaodlee, II 16
Cliil.l, C. T 20
Chisolni, F. M 19
Christie, F. A 16
Coar, II. 1 16
Coatee, C. E 18
Cole, W. K 18
Coler.G P 16
Councilman, VV. T 15
Craduck, T 20
Craig. T 15
Crenshaw, J. B 16
Crew, H 16
Crowell, M. E 16
Cunimings, J 16
Daish, J. B 19
Dashiell, P.J 18
Havis, R. H 20
Day, L>. T 16
Devrles, W. L 18
I'ewey, D. R 16
Dobme.A. H. L 18
i'onaldson, H. H 15
iJorr, L. It 20
Doney, K 19
Douh, A. A 18
Doubleday, C. A 17
Dreyer,G. P 18
I'uliv, E 18
Duggan, J. It 16
Dunlap, ('. G 17
Duvall, R 19
Eareckson, E 18
Edmiaton, H. B 17
Edmoud, G. W 17
\. 1: 16
Eichelbergcr, W. S 18
Elliott, A. M 15
Elliott, )•:. s 17
Elmer, H. C 17
Ely, It. T 15
Emerson, A 16
PAGE.
Emerson, W. H 16
Engle, H. M 20
English, II 18
Ensev, It. F 20
Fearn.T. S 20
Ferguson, W. C 20
Ferris, C 20
Fields, J. C 16
Fihcld, J.C 18
Fisher, J. A 17
Flexner, A 18
Fontaine, J. A 17
Forrest, C. II 19
Fossum, A 17
Franklin, F 15
Friedenwald, J 18
Frost, O.J 17
Frothingham, A. L...„ 16
Gardner, H.B 17
Gates, \V. E 18
ood, R. \V 17
Gerber, A 16
Gflderalee've, B. L IS
Gildersleeve, R. 0 18
Oilman, 1) C 15
Gilpin, J. E 18
Glenn, .1 17
I, J IS
Gootfh.G. W 17
(iordon, l>. H 19
Gorton, W. C. L 19
Gould, E. R. L 16
Graves, w. s 16
Grier, M. I! 17
Guggenheimer, J. C 19
Halm, II. W 19
Haight, M 17
Haldeman, G. B 17
Haii.G. S II
Hall, J. L 20
Hamilton, \V. E 20
Harry, J. E 19
Bartogenats, it. H 19
Ilartwell, E M 15
Baupt, P IS
Haves, C. W 17
PAOE.
ek.W. A 17
II. Ifensteln, E. T 20
Hemmeter, J. ' 17
Hempl, Q IB
Hench, G. A 17
Henderson, R. L 20
Derrick, F. II 17
(Biles, W. s 19
Htxson, II. F 17
Hobbs, \v. 11 17
Hodges, J, S 19
Hoen, A, B 20
Hoffman, 0 19
Holconib, W. P 17
Holmes, J. II 17
Horner, .1. M 17
Bough, T 19
Howell, W. II 16
Hubbard. !•'. G 17
Baches, P. M 19
lluiziuga, A. H 16
Hussey, G. B ]7
Jameson, .1. F 15
Jastrow, J 16
Jayne, J. L 17
Jenkins, 0. P 17
Jones, C. E 17
II. (' 20
Jones, W 19
\V. A 19
Rustle, J. U 17
Katzenstein, L 17
Keillioltz, P. O 17
Kemp, G. T 16
Kimball, A. L 15
Laessig, J. H 19
Lamb. A. L 19
Langdon, C 17
Lanier, C. I) 19
Learned, M. D 17
Linn, A. F 17
Lieiig, G. A 16
I.o:uie, J. A 17
Lodge, G 16
Loeb, A. H 19
Maeauley, J 19
Magoun, II. \V 17
Mann, A 20
Mansfield. J. M 17
Martin, H.N 15
Mason, J. C 20
Matzke, J. E 17
McCabe, T 17
Mcintosh, J. II 17
McLane, A 19
McLane, R. M 19
Mc.Murrich. J. P 15
MoPherson, J. H. T 19
McWhirter, F. T 17
Meriwether, C 19
Miller, C. t) 17
Miller, ('. W. E 17
Miller, W. H 19
Mills, T. W 17
Milroy, W. M 17
rAGE.
Mollnard, W. R 20
Mo.,re, (I. N 19
Moore, .1. L 17
Morrell. A. i> 17
Morrlll, P 17
Morris, C li 15
Morse, H. N is
Mossell, 0. W 17
Mount, C.K 20
Murray, A. T 17
Naehtrleb, II. F 17
Nelson, .1 17
Neweomb.6 15
Newell, II 10
New Ion,. I. C.0 17
Nixon, II. B 16
Noyes, W 16
Nutlall, O. H. F 17
11 'H.iuovan, H 20
(>i -nil. ell', W. It 17
<>rr, II 16
Ota, 1 17
Palmer. C. 8 16
Palmer, 0. II Ill
Patrick, (J. T. \V 17
I n, J. M 20
Pease, E. M 16
11. .1. E 17
Penuinian, \V. It. I) at
Perkins, Charles A Ifi
Perkins. C. Allen 17
Perkins, \V. 11 17
PhiUpson, D 17
Piggut, C 18
Pleasants, J 19
nts, R. II 19
Poe, S. J 18
Pope, B. A 18
Poullain,!'. N 19
Preston, A 20
Price, E.C 18
Quincy, C. B 18
Rabillon, L 18
Ramage, It. J 18
Ramsay, F. P 18
Randall. D. li 18
Randall, W. W 18
Reader, F. E 19
Reese, J>. M 20
Reeve, J. S 18
Reeves, W. P 20
Remsen, 1 10
Renouf, E 16
1th b, 3. M 18
Roberts, R.T 18
Roberts, D. E 19
Rogers. R. W 19
Rosenthal, L 19
Bouse, W. G 20
Rowland, A. J 19
Rowland, II. A 15
Byttenberg, M. R 18
Sums, ( . \V 18
Sanibrd, E. C 18
Sato, S 16
PAGK.
Schloegcl, C. A 18
Keribner, ll.S 18
.1.8 18
8hemwell,,I. F 20
Simon, C. E 19
Slaughter, M „ 18
II. S 18
Smitb, A. I) 18
Smith, K. w „ 18
Smith, W. F 19
Mm 111, A. II 18
Suivlb, II. W _ 16
Southworth, M. S 16
Spieker, E. II 15
It. It 18
Stein, M. I) 19
Bteiner, 11 18
Stetson, C. It 18
Stevens, M. P 20
Story, YV. E 15
Stow, A. II 20
Straus, I. J 20
Swartz, ('. K 20
Sylvester, J. J 15
Turleton, It. N 19
Taylor, F. W „ 19
Taylor, It. T 19
Thompson, H. () 19
Todd, II. A 15
Trueman, J 8 18
Turner. Q. M _ 18
Tuska, It. 8. W 19
Ciller, P. R 15
Vim Vleek, E. B 18
Wallls.8 18
Walz, W. F 18
Warner, A. G 18
Warren, II. A 19
Warren. M 15
W, e« b, It. W. 11 19
Welch, Vf. II 15
Win tbam, C 16
White, E.L 19
White, J 19
d, li. 11 18
Wi.sellleld, B 19
Wlghtman, A. C 18
Wightman, J. R 18
Williams, G.H IS
Williams, J. W 19
Williams, L 19
Williams, L. E 18
Williams. W. K 19
Willis. E. W 20
WlUoughby, W. F 19
Wlllougbby, w. W 20
Wilson, 11. V 18
Wingt-rt, II. F 19
Win-low, J. R 19
Wo d, H 15
WoodhuD,J. F 18
Woods, A. C 19
Woodworth, C. 1 16
Young, F.G 19
CONSULTATION HOURS.
Students are requested to call at the hours named, unless there are exceptional reasons for
coming at some other time. Th" person named will usually be accessible for some minutes after
tiu: appointed hour. The appointments do not include Saturday.
GlI.MAN, D. C.
AllAMS. II. B.
BLOOJfFIfiXD, M.
Bright, .1. w.
Bbooks, W. K.
Bhowns, Wr. H.
Craiu, T.
Ely, R T.
El.LiOlT, A. M.
FltANKt.lN, F.
GlI.IIICK.sI.Kl.VE, B. L.
GOKBBL, J.
Hall, G. S.
Haktwkll, E. M.
II a u it, P.
Bun. G.
Howell, w. H.
J A MUX IN, J. F.
KlMUALL, A. U
Maktin, II. N.
McMuBBICH, J. P.
Morris, C. D.
M0B8B, H. N.
Nkwi OMB, S.
Nkwei.l, H.
Perkins, C. A.
Rk.mskn, I.
Rkhoup, E.
Rowland, ii. a.
SlMKKKK, E. H.
Story, W. E.
Todd, 11. A.
Warren, m.
Welch, w. ii.
Williams, G.H.
Wood, II.
WOODWOKTH, C. L.
Presidents Office.
■'li Library,
111 If. Monument St.
117 If. Monument St.
Biological Laboratory.
Library,
Room 17.
llluntsi'hli Library,
111 W. Monument St.
fioOM 18.
l.si Howard St.
209 -V. Ilonard St.
118 W. Monument St,
(il/.'llll'l.liltlll,
118 If. Monuments.
Ill IP. Monument S.
Biolo: <-ry.
Bluntsehli Library.
Room 5.
■il laboratory.
■ il Laboratory,
181 I'loo
Cluitiiiiil Laboratory,
Room 14.
Room 19.
Phytitsei Laboratory.
U Laborattrry.
Laboratory,
L'h 1,'sirul Laboratory.
181 llou-ardS.
IS. M. W.
117 II'. Monuments.
181 // sard 9.
Bioloijival Laboralory.
Chemical Laboratory,
1ST Howard St.
Hopkins Hall.
12-1 p. in.
9 a. m.
Mon. Tues. Frid., lp.m.
except Monday., 4 p. m.
10 a m,
9 a. m. to 5 p. m.
9 a. m.
11 a. m.
12 m.
IS in.
11 a. m.
12 m.
10 a. m.
12 m.
Tues. W. i'b., 5 p. m.
4 p. m.
•1 p. m.
LI m.
11 a. m.
2.80 p. m.
la m.
11 a. m.
11 a. m.
Tues. and Thurs., 10 a. in.
(except Wed.) 1 p. m. to .» p. m.
I a. in.
11 a. m.
10 a. m.
9 a. ni.
hi a. m,
Fri., 12 m. ; Tu., Th., 10.30 a. 111.
12 m.
12 m.
3 p. m.
9 a. m.
(exc. Wed.) 12 m.; Wed., 1 p. m.
'.1 a. m. to 12 in.
22
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 44.
ENUMERATION OF CLASSES, FIRST HALF-YEAR, 1885-86.
Mathematics. (47 Students).
Classes meet in Rooms 8, 14, and IS.
Practical and Theoretical Astronomy : Professor New-
comb. Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 9 a. ni. (9).
Barcroft. Campbell.G.M. Haiglit.
Bell, L. Fields. Hixson.
Blandin.
Nixon.
Van Vleck.
Mathematical Seminary: Professor Newcomb. Weekly, Wed-
nesday. (Not yet organized).
Matin mutual Seminary: Dr. Story. Weekly, Tuesday, 8
p. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haiglit. Nixon.
Introductory Course for Graduates: Dr. Story. Daily, 11
a. m. (7).
Ames.
Campbell, G. M.
Eichelberger.
Gorton.
Rich.
Van Vleck.
Wiegand.
Finite Differences and Interpolation: Dr. Story. Twice
weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 12 m. (5).
Ames. Campbell.G.M. Fields. Haiglit.
Barcroft.
Advanced Analytic Geometry: {Higher Plane Curves) : Dr.
Story. Three times weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday,
1p.m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Conic Sections : (Minor Course) : Dr. Story. Twice weekly, Tues-
day and Thursday, 1 p. m. (15).
Ballard. Dashiell. Miller, W. H. White.
Brigliam. Eareckson. Molinard. Wiegand.
Browne, A. L. Ensey. Roberts, D. E. Wiugert.
Coar. Jones, W. Taylor, F. W.
Hydrodynamics : (Lamb) : Dr. Craig. Three times weekly, Mon-
day, Wednesday, and Friday, 1 p. m. (4).
Blandin. Crew. Gatewood. Keilholtz.
Theory of Functions : (Hermite, Briot et Bouquet, Fuchs, Tannery,
etc.): Dr. Craig. Three times weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and
Friday, 10 a. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Differential Equations: (Forsyth): Major Course: Dr. Craig.
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 11 a. m. (8).
Child.
Crew.
Duffy.
English.
Jayne.
McPherson.
Weech.
Wingert.
Linear Differential Equations : (Fuchs) : Dr. Craig. Twice
weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 10 a. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Mathematical Seminary : Dr. Craig. Weekly. (Not yet organ-
ized).
Problems in Mechanics: Dr. Franklin. Twice weekly, Mon-
day and Friday, 5 p. m. (6).
Gatewood. Jayne.
Ames.
Barcroft.
Campbell, G. M
Child.
Theory of Equations : (Todhunter) : Dr. Franklin. Three times
weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 11 a. m. (6).
Duffy. Lacssig. Weech. Wingert.
English. McPherson.
Differential and Integral Calculus : Dr. Franklin. Three
times weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 1 p. m. (13).
Ballard.
Brigliam.
Browne, A. L.
Dashiell.
Eareckson.
Ensey.
Hoffmann.
Jones, W.
Miller, W. H.
Roberts, D. E.
Stevens.
Tavlc.r, F. W.
White.
Trigonometry: Dr. Franklin. Three times weekly, Monday,
Wednesday, and Friday, 4 p. m. (7).
Rosenthal.
Carey.
Hilles.
Locb.
Macauley.
Moore, G. N.
Reader.
Physios. (51 Students).
Classes meet in Rooms 3, 4, 7, and 8.
Thermodynamics: Professor Rowland. Daily, 10 a. m. (11).
Bell, L. Crew. Gorton. Mansfteld.
Blaudin. Eichelberger. Jayne. Morrill.
Child. Gatewood. Keilholtz.
Ma }or Course:
Child.
Dohme.
Emerson, W. H.
Ensey.
Dr. Kimball.
Hedrick.
Holmes.
Jayue.
Laessig.
Daily, 12 m
Nixon.
Randall, W. W.
Rich.
Stevens.
(15).
General Physics: Dr. Kimball. Daily, 10 a. m.
Bevan. Fearn. Hughes.
Bolgiano. Gilpin. Jones. H. C.
Cradock. Guggenheimer. Lanier.
Dorr. Harry. Macauley.
Duffy. Hodges. Ma n D.
Eareckson. Hough. McWhirter.
Laboratory Work:
Advanced Students : Professor Rowland. (9).
Ames. Child, Gatewood.
Bell, L. Crew. Jayne.
Blandin.
Turner.
Wiegand.
Wingert.
(23).
Meriwether.
Molinard.
Moore, G. N.
Simon.
Weech.
Keilholtz.
Morrill.
Class in General Physics: Dr. Kimball and Dr. Perkins. (27).
Allen, P. Fearn. Hughes. Molinard.
Bevan. Flexner. Jones, H. C. Moore, G. N.
Bolgiano. Gilpin. Lanier. Randall, W. W.
Cradock. Guggenheimer. Macauley. Simon.
Durr. Harry. Mann. Turner.
Duffy. Hodges. McWhirter. Weech.
Eareckson. Hough. Meriwether.
Chemistry. (89 Students).
Classes meet in the Chemical Laboratory.
Chemistry of the Carbon Compounds : Professor Remsen.
Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday, 9 a. m. (37).
Applegarth, E. C. Hartogensis. Mcintosh. Roberts, D. E.
Brackett, R. N. Hayes. McWhirter. Smith, W. F.
Buckler. Hedrick. Mount. Stein.
Canfield. Hemmeter. Palmer, C. S. Swartz.
Coar. Hobbs. Penniman. Turner.
Dohme. Holmes. Piggot. Wallis.
Friedenwald. Kemp. Pope. Williams, J. W.
Frost. Laessig. Randall, W. W. Winsiow.
Gooch. Linn. Rich. Woodhull.
Hamilton.
General Chemistry: Professor Kemsen. Lectures three timet
weekly, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 9 a. m. (48).
Allen, P. Duvall. Hartogensis. Palmer, C. S.
Ames. Eareckson. Henderson. Pope.
Boyd. Eichelberger. Jayne. Reese.
Brill. Engle. Jones, H. C. Keeve.
Bromwell. English. Keilholtz. Shemwell.
Chisolm. Fearn. Lamb. Simon.
Coates. Fitield. Mann. Smilh, A. D.
Crew. Forrest. Mason. Stevens.
Dashiell. Gilpin. McWhirter. Stow
Dorr. Gooch. Molinard. Strauss.
Doub. Gorton. Moore, G. N. Williams, L. E.
Dreyer. Hamilton. O'Donovan. Willis.
laboratory Methods and Theoretical Chemistry: Dr.
Morse. Twice weekly, Thursday and Friday, 9 a. m. (25).
Applegarth, E.C. Hedrick. Mount. Swartz.
Buckler. Hemmeter. Penniman. Turner.
Coar. Hobbs. Randall, W. W. Wallis.
Dohme. Holmes. Rich. Williams, J. W.
Friedenwald. Linn. Smith, W. F. Winsiow.
Frost. Mcintosh. Stein. Woodhull.
Hayes.
laboratory Work: Professor Remsen, Dr. Morse, and Dr.
Renotjf. (82).
Allen, P. Duggan. Hobbs. Pleasants, J,
Ames. Duvall. Hoen. Pope.
Applegarth, E.C. Eareckson. Holmes. Randall, W. W.
Bayley. Eichelberger. Jones, H. C. Reese.
Bell, C. J. Emerson, W. H. Kastle. Reeve.
Bell, L. Engle. Keilholtz. Shemwell.
Boyd. English, Kemp. Simon.
Brackett, R. N. Fearn. Lamb. Smith, A. D.
Brill. Fitield. Liebig. Smith, W. F.
Bromwell. Forrest. Linn. Stein.
Buckler. Friedenwald. Mann. Stevens.
Canfield. Frost. Mason. Stow.
Chisolm. Gilpin. Mcintosh. Strauss.
Coar. Gooch. Molinard. Turner.
Coates. Gorton. Moore, G.N. Wallis.
Crew. Hamilton. O'Donovan. Williams, J, W.
Dashiell. Ilai logeusis. Orndorff. Williams, L. E.
Dohme. Hayes. Palmer, C 8. Willis.
Dorr. Hedrick. I'eimiiuan. Winsiow.
Doub. Hemmeter. Piggot. Woodhull.
Dreyer. Henderson.
November, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
23
Mineralogy, Etc. Dr. Williams. (47 Students).
Mineralogy emd Petrography: (Advanced). Lectures three
times weekly, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 11 a. m. Saturday,
9 a. m.-12 in., Quiz and Practicum. (10).
Bayley. Coar. llrdrick. Orndorff.
Bracken, B. N. Emerson, W. H. Hobos. Palmer, €. S.
Canfk-ld. Hayes.
Mineralogy: (Elementary). Dr. Williams. Weekly, Monday,
9 a. m. (37).
Allen, P. Dorr. Gorton. Beeves.
Ames. Eareckson. Henderson. Beese.
Ilovd. Eiehclberger. Jones, II. C. Shemwell.
Broinwell. Engle. Keilholtz. Simon.
CMsolin. English. Lamb. Stevens.
Coates. I-euin. Mann. Stow.
Dashiell. Fifield. Mason. Strauss.
Doub. Forrest. Moore, G.N. Willis.
Hreyer. Gilpin. O'Donovan. Woods.
Duvall.
Laboratory Work : Dk. Williams. (4.)
Bayley. Coar. Hayes. Palmer, C. S.
Biology. (48 Students).
Classes meet in the Biological Laboratory.
General Dialog y: Professor Martin. Three times weekly, Mon-
day, Wednesday, and Friday, 10 a. m. (22).
Allen, P. Gooch. Beese. Stow.
Applegarth, E, C.
Hem meter.
Reeve.
Straus.
Coates.
Lamb.
Rich.
Swartz.
Donaldson,
is' ut tall.
Shemwell.
Williams, L. E
Dreyer.
O'Donovan.
Smith, A. D.
Willis.
Friedenwald.
Pope.
Animal 1'hysiology and Histology: Professor Martin.
Three times weekly, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday, 11 a. m. (13).
Buckler. Kastle. Price. Wightman.
Hartogensis. Mcintosh. Smith, W. F. Williams, J. W.
Henimeter. Nuttall. Stein. Winslow.
Herrick.
History of Morphology ; Dr. Brooks. Three time6 weekly,
Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 5 p. m. (7).
Andrews. Halileman. Nelson. Wilson.
Bruce. Herrick. Orr.
Advanced Morphology : (Laboratory Work) : Dr. Brooks. Daily.
(7).
Andrews. Haldeman. Nelson. Wilson.
Bruce. Herrick. Orr.
Physiology of Respiration: Dr. Howell. Weekly, Monday,
12 m. (8).
Campbell, J. P. Haldeman. Herrick. Nelson.
Donaldson. Hcmmcter. Kemp. Nuttall.
Osteology : Dr. McMurrich. Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday,
10 a. m. (18).
Allen, P. Gooch. Reeve. Straus.
Applegarth, E.C. Lamb. Shemwell. Swartz.
Coates. O'Donovan. Smith, A. D, Williams, L. E.
Dreyer. Pope. Stow. Willis.
Friedenwald. Beese.
Mammalian Anatomy : Dr. McMurrich. Twice weekly, Mon-
day and Friday, 11 a. m. (9).
Buckler. Mcintosh. Stein. Williams, J. W.
Hartogensis. Smith, W. F. Wightman. Winslow.
Kastle.
Laboratory Work : Professor Martin, Dr. Brooks, Dr. Howell,
and Dr. McMurrich. Daily, 9 a. m. to 5 p. m. (44).
Abbott. Friedenwald. Miller, O. C. Smith, W. F.
Allen, P. Gooch. Nelson. Stein.
Andrews. Haldeman. Nixon. Stow.
Applegarth, E. C. Hartogensis. Nuttall. Straus.
Bruce. Henimeter. O'Donovan. Swartz.
Buckler. Herrick. Orr. Wightman.
Campbell, J. P. Jastrow. Pope Williams, J. W.
Chandlee. Kastle. Reese. Williams, L. E.
Coates. Kemp. Reeve. Willis.
Dreyer. Lamb. Shemwell. Wilson.
Duggan. Mcintosh. Smith, A. D. Winslow.
Greek. (40 Students).
Classes meet in 181 N. Howard St.
Greek Seminary : (Plato): Professor Gildersleeve. Twice
weekly, Monday and Wednesday, 10 a. m. (23).
Botsford. Huizinga. Patrick. Smith, K. W.
Chri-iie. Hussey. Pease. Steele.
Doubleday. Lodge. Peirson. Stetson.
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. Ramsay. Trueman.
Elmer. Milroy. Scribner. Walz.
Fossum. Murray, A. T. Slaughter.
(J reek Syntax: (Ilypotactic Sentence in Greek) : Professor Gildeb-
slkevf.. Weekly, Thursday, 10 a. m. (26).
Botsford. Huizinga. Murray, A. T. Slaughter.
Christie. Hussey. Patrlek. Smith, K. W.
lloubleday. Lodge. IVa-r.
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. 1 Vinton. stetson.
Elmer. Milroy. Ramsay. 'Itieinan.
Fossum. Moore. J. L. Scribner. Walz.
Crier.
Practical Exercises : Professor Gildersleeve. Twice weekly,
Tuesday and Friday, 10 a. m. (22).
Botsford.
Huizinga.
Murray, A. T.
Patrick.
Smith, K.
Christie.
Hussey.
Steele.
Doubleday.
IXKlgC.
Peirson.
Btetaon.
Elliott, E.S.
Magoun*
Ramsay.
Trueman.
Elmer.
Milroy.
Scribner,
Walz.
Fossum.
Moore, J. L.
Demosthenes: De Corona: Professor Morris. Four times
weekly, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 12 m. (8).
Bruyn. Flexner. Hoffmann. Rogers.
Cole. Grier. McLane, R. M. Thompson.
Xenophon: Oeconomieus : Dr. Spieker. Four times weekly, Tues-
day, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 11 a. m. (9).
Bechtel. Gildersleeve, R. ft Loeb. Rosenthal.
Bruyn. Helfenslein. Palmer, O. H. Rowland, A. J.
Devries.
Prose Composition :
Class A: Professor Morris. Weekly, Monday, 12 m. (8).
Bruyn. Flexner. HoUYnann. Rogers.
Cole. Grier. McLane, R. M. Thompson.
Class B: Dr. Spieker. Weekly, Monday, 11 a. m. (9).
Bechtel. Gildersleeve, R. C. Loeb. Rosenthal.
Bruyn. Helfeustein. Palmer, O. H. Rowland, A. J.
Devries.
Greek Dialects and Inscriptions: Dr. Smyth. Weekly, Thurs-
day, 12 m. (12).
Botsford. Hussey. Milroy. Steele.
Christie. Lodge. Murray. A. T. Trueman.
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. Scribner. Walz.
Latin. (71 Students).
Stetson.
Trueman.
Walz.
Classes meet in 181 N. Howard St.
Seminary : (Livy and Tacitus) : Dr. Warren. Twice weekly, Tuesday
and Friday, 11 a. m. (24).
Botsford. Fontaine. Moore, J. L. Slaughter.
Bowen. Fossum. Murray, A. T. Smith, K. W".
Christie. Hussey. Pease. Steele.
Doubleday. Jones, C. E. Peirson. Stetson.
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. Scribner. Trueman.
Elmer. Milroy. Sbelloe, Walz.
Horn an Historians: Dr. Warren. Weekly, Monday, 11 a.m. (25).
Botsford. Fossum. Moore, J. L. Slaughter.
Bowen. Hussey. Murray, A. T. Smith, K. W.
Christie. Jones, C. E. Pease,
Doubleday. Lodge. Peirson. Stetson.
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. Scribner. Trueman.
Elmer. Milroy. Shettoe. Walz.
Fontaine.
Heading at Sight : Dr. Warren. Weekly, Thursday, 1 1 a. m. (15).
Botsford. Fossum. Scribner.
Christie. Hussey. Shettoe.
Elliott, E. S. Milroy. Smith, K. W.
Fontaine. Murray, A. T. Steele.
Via at tin and Terence: Dr. Warren. Three times weekly, Tues-
day, Thursday, and Friday, 10 a. m. (6).
Cole. McLane, R. M. Preston. Thompson.
Flexner. Mcl'herson.
Mending at Sight: Dr. Warren. Weekly, Wednesday, 10a. m. (6).
Cole. McLane, R. M. Preston. Thompson.
Flexner. McPhersou.
Cicero, De datura Deorum: Lucretius, Me. i, Hi: Professor
Morris. Three times weekly, Tuesday, Thursday, and Friday, 10
a. m. (3).
Bruyn. Hoffmann. Rogers.
Heading at Sight: Professor Morris. Weekly, Wednesday, 10
a. m. (3).
Bruyn. Hoffmann. Sogers.
Liry, bks. v andvi: Dr. Spieker. Four times weekly, Tuesday, Wed-
nesday, Thursday, ami Friday, 9 a. m. (21).
Bayard. Gildersleeve, R. C. Loeb. Rowland, A. J.
Bechtel
Gordou.
Palmer, O. H.
Tarleton.
Black.
Hahn.
l'oitllain.
Taylor, K. T.
Brown, H. M.
Helfeustein.
Reader.
WIlloucbbT.W F
1 'aisle
Hillcs.
Rosenthal.
Willuughbv.W.W
Devries.
24
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 44.
Prose Composition :
Class A: Dr. Warren. Weekly, Monday, 10 a. m. (6).
Cole. McLane, R. M. Preston. Thompson.
Flemer. McPherson.
Class B: Professor C. D. Morris. Weekly, Monday, 10 a. m. (3).
Bruyu. Hoffmann. Rogers.
Class C: Dr. Spieker. Weekly, Monday, 9 a. m. (12).
Bechtel. Gildersleeve, R. C. Palmer. Rowland, A. J.
Brown, A. M. Helfenstein. Poullain. Tarleton.
Devries. Loeb. Rosenthal. Taylor, R. T.
Su/iptementary Cta s.t : Mr. Slaughter. Three times weekly,
Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 4 p. m. (13).
Bolgiano. Dorr. Fearn. Reeves.
Lanier. Stow.
Chlsolm. DuvaU. Patterson. Taylor, F. W.
Cradock.
Boyd. Dorsey.
vail.
Shemitic Languages. Professor Haupt. (14 Students).
Classes meet in HI W. Monument St.
Elementary Hebrew: (Gesenius-MitcheWs Grammar; Genesis, ed.
Boer). Weekly, Thursday, 4 p.m. (1 2).
Adler. Cole. Milroy. Rogers.
Allen, E. P. Grier. Mossell. Schloegel.
Bevan. Huizinga. Ramsay. Walz.
Hebrew Exercises: {Historical Books). 'Weekly, Wednesday, 4 p.m. (7).
Adler. Huizinga. Ramsay. Schloegel.
Allen, E. P. Milroy. Rogers.
Biblical Aramaean: (Ezra). Weekly, Wednesday, 3 p. m. (4).
Adler. Huizinga. Ramsay. Schloegel.
Syriae for bef/i liners: \Noeldeke's Grammar, Nestle's Chrestomathy).
Weekly, Tuesday, 3-5 p. m. (4).
Adler. Huizinga. Ramsay. Schloegel.
Arabic: (Voyages of Sindbad). Weekly, Wednesday, 11 a. m. (4).
Adler. Huizinga. Philipson. Schloegel.
Eth lopte : (DUlmann's Chrestomathy). Weekly,Wednesday, 1 0 a. m. (4).
Adler. Huizinga. Philipson. Schloegel.
Assyrian: (Annals of Sennacherib). Weekly, Thursday, 11 a. m. (5).
Adler. Huizinga. Philipson. Schloegel.
Frothingham.
Smiiero- Akkadian: (Bilingual Hymns and Psalms). Weekly, Thurs-
day, 12 m. (5).
Adler. Huizinga. • Philipson. Schloegel.
Frothingham.
Babylonian: (Inscriptions of Nebuchadnezzar). Weekly, Thursday,
3 p. m. (5).
Adler. Huizinga. Philipson, Schloegel.
Frothingham.
Sanskrit and the comparative grammar of
the cognate languages. Dr. Bloomfield. (31 stu-
dents).
Classes meet in 111 W. Monument St.
Elementary Sanskrit '■: ( Whitney's Grammar and Lanman's Reader).
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Friday, 12 m. (12).
Ramsay. Smith, K. W.
Magoun. Patrick. Schloegel. Steele.
Moire, J. L. Pease. Scribner. Stetson.
Hempl. Murray, A. T.
' *ck.
Adraticed Sanskrit: (Selections from Classical Sanskrit: Rig-Veda).
Twice weekly, Wednesday 11 a. m., Friday 3 p. m. (8).
Christie.
Doubleday.
Fossum.
Husscy.
Lodge.
Milroy.
Stetson.
Walz.
Atharva-Veda and Kaucika-sutra. Weekly, Saturday, 11
a.m. (2). '
Smyth, H W. Spieker.
Com pa rat ire Philology : (Lectures: Whitney's Language and the
Study of Language). Weekly, Monday, 12 ra. (IS).
Bevan. Hough. Murray, A. T. Smilh, K. W.
Kowen. Hughes. Peirson. Steele
ti-xner. Lodge. Ramsay. Stetson.
Harry. Magoun. Scribner. Trueman.
Hodges. Moore, J. L.
Comparative Grammar of Greek: (Brugmann's Griechische
irudik). Weekly, Thursday, 3 p. m. (19).
Christie. Lodge. Patrick. Steele.
Doobteday, Magoun. i'eirson. Stetson.
Fossum. Milroy. l:.-u.i-ay. 'trueman.
]i.:/iri.a. Moore, J. L. Sciibn>:r. Wulz.
Hussey. Murray, A. T. Smith, K. \V.
Lectures on Indo-European Noun Composition. (14).
Christie. Lodne. Ramsey. Steele.
Doubleday. Magoun. Scribner. Stetson.
Fossum. Milroy. Smith, K. W. Walz.
Hussey. Patrick.
German, (in students).
Classes meet in 11 1 and 117 W. Monument St.
German Seminary : Dr. Wood. Twice weekly, Monday and
Friday, 10 a. m. (7).
Burton. Egge. Hubbard. Matzke.
Dunlap. Hempl. Learned.
Gothic: (Braune's Grammar; Bernhardt' s Kurzgefasste Gotische Gram-
matik)-: Dr. Wood. Twice weekly, Monday and Wednesday, 9 a. m.
(7).
Crenshaw. Hall, J. L. Smyth, A. H. Wightman, J. R,
Cummings. liench. Whetham.
Old Norse : (Brenner, Altnordisches Handbueh) : Dr. Wood. Twice
weekly, Tuesday and Friday, 9 a. m. (6).
Burton. Dunlap. Hubbard. - Learned.
Crenshaw. Egge.
Old Teutonic Life: (Lectures) : Dr. Wood. Weekly, Wednesday,
12 xu. (13).
Blight. Egge. Hubbard. Smyth, A. H.
Burton. Edmiston. Learned. Whetham.
Crenshaw. Hempl. Matzke. Wightman.
Dunlap.
{Major Course).
German Literature: (Lectures, with Kluge's Geschichte d. deutschen
Literatur) : Dr. Goebel. Weekly, Wednesday, 10 a. m. (12).
Allen, E. P. Cummings. Jones, C. E. Tuska.
Boyd. Edmiston. Shefloe. Wiesenfeld.
Crenshaw. Gorton. Smyth, A. H. Yutiug.
Middle High German: (Paul's Grammar; Weinhold's Reader) :
Dr. Wood. Weekly, Tuesday, 10 a. m. (5).
Allen, E. P. Dunlap. Edmiston. Smyth, A. II.
Crenshaw.
Selected Headings: (Masius'sLesebuch,iii) : Dr. Goebel. Weekly,
Tuesday, 10 a. m. (8).
Boyd. Ramsay. Roberts, B. T. Wiesenfeld.
Cummings. Sauford. Shefloe. Yoong.
Goetlie: Hermann und Dorothea : Dr. Goebel. Twice weekly, Monday
and Thursday, 10 a. m. (10).
Allen, E. P. Cummings. Roberts, B. T. Smyth, A. H.
Boyd. Edmiston. Shefloe, Wiesenfeld.
Crenshaw. Jones, C. E.
Prose Composition: Mr. Hempl. Weekly, Friday, 10 a. m. (12).
Allen, E. P. Cummings. Jones, C. E. Tuska.
Boyd. Edmiston. Roberts, B. T. Wiesenfeld.
Crenshaw. Gorton. Smyth, A. II. Young.
German Style and Syntax: Dr. Goebel. Second Monday in
each month, 3 p. m. (5).
Allen, E. P. Jones, C. E. Shefloo. Young.
Boyd.
(Minor Course).
Lessing : Minna von Barnhelm: Mr. Hempl. Weekly, Monday, 11
a. m. (32).
Allen, P. Dorsey. Jones, W. Pope.
Black. Duvall. Lamb. Preston.
Brigham. Knsey. Lanier. Reeves.
Browne, A. L. Ferguson, Meriwether. Swan/..
Carey. Ferris. Maeauley. Taylor, F. W.
Chisolm. Ilalm. Miller, W. II. White.
Daish. Hiighes. o'lfoiiovau. VVilloughby,W. F
Dashiell. Hall, J. L. Ota. Willoughby, W.W.
Goethe: Egmont: Dr. Goebel. Twice weekly, Monday and Thursday,
2 p. m. (5).
Crenshaw. Preston. Ramsay. Reeves.
Ferguson.
Historical Headings: Dr. Goebel. Twice weekly, Tuesday and
Friday, 11 a. m. (18).
Ayres. Daish, Meriwether. .Sauford.
Black. F'erris. Ota. Wiesenfeld.
Burnham. Halm. Ramsay. Willoughby,W. F.
Dorsey. Hughes. Randal'l, D. R. WUlonghby.W.W.
Duvall. Lanier.
Scientific Headings: Mr. Hempl. Twice weekly, Tuesday and
Friday, 1 1 a. m. (20).
Allen, P. Dashiell. Miller, W. H. Pope.
Brigham. Knsey. Maeauley. Reeee.
Browne, A. L. llixsutt. o'l >uiiovan. Swartz.
Cares'. Jones, VT. Patrick. Taylor, F. W.
Chisolm. Lamb. Peuniman. Wliite.
November, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
25
Oral Practice: Mr. Hempl. Weekly, Thursday, 11 a. m. (38).
Allen, P.
Duvall.
Lamb.
Preston.
Black,
Ensey.
Lanier.
Ramsay.
Brigham.
Ferguson.
.Macauley.
Mcrlwetner.
Beeves.
Browne, A. L.
Ferris.
Swartz.
Burn ham.
Hall, J. L.
Miller, W. H.
Taylor, F. W.
Carey.
Halm.
O'Donovan.
White.
Chi sol m.
Hench.
Penuiman.
Williams, W. K.
Daish.
Hixson.
Peirson.
Willoughby, W. F.
Dashicll.
Hughes.
Pope.
Willoughby.W.W.
Dorsey.
Jones, W.
Prose Composition: Mr.
Hempl. Weekly, Wednesday, 11 a. m.
(35).
Allen, P.
Ensey.
Macauley.
Meriwether.
Reeves.
Black.
Ferguson.
San ford.
Brigham.
Ferris.
Miller, W. H.
Stow.
Browne, A. L»
Hahn.
O'Donovan.
Taylor, F. W.
Carey.
Daish.
Hall J. L.
Hughes.
Penniman.
White.
Peirson.
Williams, W. K.
Dashiell.
Jones, \V.
Pope.
Willoughby, W.F.
Dorsey.
Duvall.
Lamb.
Preston.
Willoughby.W.W.
Lanier.
Dr.
Ramsay.
Goebel. Daily, 9
German Conversation :
a.m. (17).
Allen, E. P.
liV.xner.
Hubbard.
Smyth, A.H.
Burn ham.
Gardner.
Jones, C. E.
Wiegand.
Burton.
Hench,
Roberta, B. T.
Wlesenfeld.
Crenshaw.
Horner.
Sato.
Woods.
Edmiston.
Supplementary Classes
Section I: Mr. Hempl. Monday, Wednesday, and alternate Fridays,
o p. m. (11).
Bolgiano.
Cradock.
Gooch.
Moore, G. N.
Warren.
1 lilies.
Reader.
Williams, L. E.
Gilpin.
Jones, H. C
Shemwell.
Section II: Mr. Hempl. Daily,
3 p. m. (29).
Bayard.
Engle.
Jones, \V. A.
Rouse.
Blandin.
Grier.
Linn.
Rowland, A. J.
Brill.
Haight.
McCabe.
Taylor, R. T.
Brown, H. M.
Hodges.
McLane, R. M.
Tarleton.
Bruyn.
Hench.
McWhirter.
Thompson.
Campbell, G. M.
Herrick.
Milroy.
Trueman.
Cole.
Hixson.
Rogers.
Williams, W. K.
Elliott, E. S.
Romance Languages. (61 Students).
Classes meet in 111 and 117 W. Monument St.
Advanced Courses : (French Phonology; Romance Morphology). Mb.
Elliott. (Two classes). Monday, 10 and 11 a. m. (12).
Creuahaw. Gerber. Matzke. Reeves.
Cummings. Hench. McCabe. Whetham.
Edmiston. Learned. Perkins, C. A. Wightman, J. E.
Advanced Courses: (Romance Seminary; Old French Syntax; Ital-
ian Dialects) : Mil. Elliott. (Three classes). Wednesday, 10, 11 a.
m. ; Thursday, 10, 11 a. m. (7).
Bowen. Gerber. Perkins, C. A. Wightman, J.E.
Fontaine. Matzke. Whetham.
Advanced Courses: (Romance Studies in Europe; Langue a" OH
Dialects) : Mb. Elliott. (Two classes). Tuesday, 10, 11 a. m. (9).
Learned. McCabe. Whetham.
Matzke. Perkins, C. A. Wightman, J. E.
Edmiston.
Egge.
Gerber.
Italian: Db. Todd. Three times weekly, Monday, Tuesday, and
Wednesday, 9 a.m. (5).
Christie. Lodge. Shefloe. Warner.
Ediuiston.
Span isli : Db. Todd. Twice weekly, Thursday and Friday, 9 a. m. (9).
Edmiston. Gerber. McCabe. Whetham.
Egge. Laessig. Beeves. Wightman, J. K.
Eussuni.
Portitt/uese and Old Provencal:
Tuesday and Friday, 4 p. m. (4).
Matzke. McCabe. Whetham. Wightman, J. E.
Db. Todd and Mb. Fontaine. Daily,
Db. Todd. Twice weekly,
French: Major Course.
10 a. m. (10).
Edmiston.
Bowen.
Crenshaw.
Cummings.
English.
Hench.
Beeves.
Whetham.
Wightman, J. R.
French: Minor Course: Dr. Todd, Mb. Fontaine, Mb. Bowen.
Daily, 12 m. (16).
Brune. Dorsey. Friedenwald. Stein.
Chisolm. Dreyer. Guggenheimer. Warren.
Crenshaw. Edmiston. Harry. Weech.
Dashiell. Ferguson. Tuska. White.
French Pronunciation and Conversation: Mb. Fontaine.
Four times weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 3 p. m., Friday, 12 m., and
Saturday, 9 a. m. (25).
Kowen. Harry. Lodge.
Carey. Hoffmann. Macauley.
CbriatW. Hench. Matzke.
Crenshaw. Jones. C. E. Moore, Q.N,
Ediuiston. Laessig. Reeves.
Foamx*. Learned. Shefloe.
Gerber.
Stein.
Stevens.
Warren.
Whetham.
Wiegapd-
Wightman.
Siijtnlementary Class: Mr. Bowen. Three times weekly, Tues-
day, Thursday, and alternate Fridays, 5 p. m. (22).
Ballard.
Bolgiiino.
Brigham.
Carey.
Cradock.
Eareckson.
Ferris.
Flexner.
Gilpin.
Huh n.
Hixson.
liough.
Jonea, W.
Poullain.
I. Inn.
Sanford.
Macauley.
Moore, G. N.
Shefloe.
Shemwell.
O'Donovan.
Van Vl.ck.
The advanced students of the Romance Languages meet as an association
fortnightly.
Bowen. Egge. Learned. Reeves.
Crenshaw. Fontaine. Matzke. Wnethaam,
Cummings. Gerber. McCabe. Wightman, J. E,
Edmiston. Hench. Perkins, C. A.
Engli8h. (54 Students).
Classes meet in 111 and 117 W. Monument St,
Old English Texts: (Orosius): Db. Bright. Twice weekly, Tues-
day and Thursday, 4 p. m. (8).
Burton. Egge. Il.mpl.
Dunlap. Hail, J. L. 1 1. mi..
Historical English Grammar: Db. Bright.
Wednesday and Friday, 4 p. m. (10).
Hubbard.
Smyth, A. H.
Twice weekly,
Burton.
Cummings.
Dunlap.
Egge.
Hall, J. L.
Hempl.
Hench.
Hubbard.
Learned.
Smyth, A. H
Alternate Fridays, 8 p. m. (11).
Hench. Learned.
Hubbard. Smyth, A. H.
Katzenstein.
English Seminary : Db. Bright.
Burton. Egge.
Cummings. Hal], J. L.
Dunlap. Hempl.
(Major Course).
First English Literature: Dr. Beight. Weekly, Monday, 12 m.
(8).
Allen, E. P. Egge. Hench.
Cummings. Hall, J. L. Hubbard.
Smyth, A. H.
Wightman, J. B.
Early Enalish : (Morris: Specimens of Early English I). Mb. Egge.
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 12 m. (3).
Cummings. Hall, J. L. Shefloe.
Modem English Literature: Db. Bbowne. Weekly, Friday,
12 m. (2).
Brackett, J. E. Shefloe.
(Minor Course").
Anglo-Saxon: Db. Bbight.
Allen, E. P. Edmiston.
Burnhara. Hall, J. L.
Cummings. Hamilton.
Elements of Plionetics :
(7).
Allen, E. P. Dunlap.
*. Cummings. Hencb.
Elizabethan and Eighteenth Century Literature : Db.
Bbowne. Three times weekly, Tuesday, Thursday, and Friday, 11
a. m. (4).
Hamilton. Poullain. Shefloe. Tarleton.
English Literature: (P. H. E. Course): Db. Browne. Twice
weekly, Wednesday and Thursday, 12 m. In College Hall. (35).
Weekly, Wednesday, 11 a, m. (12)
Poullain.
Shefloe.
Smyth, A. H.
Tarleton.
Whetham.
Wightman, J. E.
Dr. Bright. Weekly, Monday, 11 a. m.
Hubbard.
Poullain.
Tarleton.
Ballard.
Devries,
Bechtel.
Dorr.
Black.
Duvall.
Bovd.
Fearn.
Brigham.
1-Vrris.
Brown, H.
M.
Forrest.
Browne, A
L.
Gildersleeve
Carey.
Hahn.
Daish.
Hilles.
Jones, W.
Lanier.
Loeb.
Macauley.
Mann.
Miller, W. H.
Moore, G. N.
Patterson.
Poullain.
Reader.
Rosenthal
Simon.
Tarleton.
Taylor, F. W.
Taylor. R. T.
Willoughby, W.F.
Willoughby.W.W.
History and Political Science. (97 students).
Classes meet in the rooms of the Bluntschli Library.
Seminar if of History and Polities: Dr. Adams.
Friday, 8 p. m. (21).
Egge.
Fisher.
Gardner.
Holcomb.
Jones, (.'. E.
Weekly
Applegarth, A. C.
Avres.
B]'iss.
Brackett, J. R.
Davis.
Dewey.
Katzenstein.
Langdoii.
Newton.
Ota.
Randall, D. R.
Sanford.
Sato.
Sloan.
Warner.
Williams, L.
History of Politics: Dr. Adams.
Thursday, H a.m. (23).
Applegarth, A. C.
Twice weekly, Wednesday and
Ay res.
Berry.
Boston.
Brackett, J. R.
Dewey.
Eisner*
Gardner.
Holcomb.
Jours, C. E.
Katzenstein.
Moore, J. L.
Newton.
Ota.
Pleasants, R. H.
Poe.
Randall, D. R.
Sams.
Sato.
SU-iner.
\V;mier.
Williams, L.
26
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 44.
Church History: Dr. Adams. Twice weekly, 1
Jonday and Tues-
day, 11 a. m. (18).
Ayres. Flfleld. Jones, W. A.
■■, Forrest. Mansfield.
Rouse.
Tuska.
Brune. Gordon. Patterson.
Warner.
Davis. Guggenheimer. Roberts, B. T.
Devries. Uofflnann.
Young.
International Law: Db. Adams. Twice weekly, Monday and
Tuesday, 12 m. (14).
Avres. Doub. Ota.
Williams, W. K.
Bavard. Fifield. Pleasants, R. H.
Woods.
Bliss. Jones, C. E. Williams, L.
Young.
Davis. Meriwether.
Ante-classical History: (P. H. E. Course): Dr
Adams. Weekly,
Friday, 12 m. (42).
Allen, E. P. Chisolm. Jones, C. E.
Reader.
Allen, P. Daish. Jones, W.
Rosenthal.
Ballard. Devries, Lanier.
Simon.
BechteL Dorr. Loeb.
Swartz.
lil.ck. Duvall. Macauley.
Tarleton.
Bolgiano. Ensey. Mann.
Taylor, F. W.
B..vd. * Fearn. Miller, W. H.
Brigham. Forrest. Moore, G. N.
Taylor, R. T.
Warner.
Brown, H. M. Gildersleeve. Patterson.
Willougbby, W.F.
Browne, A. L. Halm. Poullain.
Willougbby, W.W.
Carey. llilles.
Studies in Administration : Dr. Ely. Weekly, Friday, 10a.m. (14).
Applegarth, A. C. Ferguson. Randall, D. K.
Sato.
Ayres. Gardner. Sams.
Steiner.
Burnham. Bolcomb. Sanford.
Warner.
Dewey. Ota.
Advanced Political Economy : Dr. Ely. Twice weekly, Wed-
nesday and Thursday, 10 a. m. (16).
Applegarth, A. C. Dewey. Katzensteln.
Sanford.
Ayres. Ferguson. Ota.
Berry. Gardner. Randall, D.R.
Sato.
Steiner.
Burnham. Holcomb. Sams.
Warner.
Elements of Political Economy: (Minor Course): Dr. Ely.
Daily, 1 p. m. (16).
Bliss. Gordon. McLane, A.
Rouse.
Brune. Guggenheimer. Mcl'herson.
Sloan.
Davis. Horner. Preston.
Tuska.
Dorsey. Jones, W. A. Roberts, B.T.
Willis.
English and French History: Dr. Jameson. Three times
weekly, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 11 a. m. (12).
Bliss. Fifield. Guggenheimer. Roberts, B. T.
Brune. Forrest. Joues, W. Rouse.
Davis. Gordon. Patterson. Tuska.
English Constitution: Dr. Jameson. Three times weekly, Wed-
nesday, Thursday, and Friday, 12 m.
Boston.
Davis.
Applegarth, A. C.
Bavard.
Bevan.
Us*
Doub.
Fifield.
(15).
Meriwether.
Pleasants, R. H.
Poe.
Williams, L.
Williams, W. K.
Woods.
Young.
Greek and Roman Hi-story : (P. H. E. Course) : Dr. Jameson.
Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday, 12 m. (34).
Ballard.
BecbteL
Black.
Bolgiano.
Boyd.
Brigham.
Bromwell.
Brown, H. M.
Browne, A. L.
Carey.
Cradock.
Daish.
Dorr.
Duvall.
Fearn.
Ferris.
Forrest.
Gildersleeve.
Hahn.
Hilles.
Jones, W.
Lanier.
Loeb.
Miller, W. H.
Patterson.
Poullain.
Reader.
Rosenthal.
Simon.
Tarleton.
Taylor, F. W.
Taylor, R. T.
Wnionghby,W. F.
Willoughby.W.W.
Professor Morris. Weekly, Mon-
Bilies.
Reader.
Herodotus (in Translation):
day, 9 a. m. (10).
Applegarth, A. C. Daish.
Bayard. Gordon.
Black. Hahn.
General European History : (P. H. E. Course) i
Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday, 12 m. (6).
Allen, P. Macauley. O'Donovan.
Devries. Mann.
Willoughhy.W. F.
Willoughby.W.W.
Mr. Holcomb.
Moore, G. N.
Psychology and Pedagogics.
Students).
Professor Hall. (49
Weekly, Monday, 12 m., 113 W. Monu-
History of Philosophy.
ment St. (26).
Adler. Fields.
Botsford. Fisher.
Burnham. Gardner.
Burton. Hixson.
Christie. Homer.
Crowell. Buseey.
Elliott, E. 8. Jastrow.
Psychology. Weekly, Wednesday, 12 m., Biological Laboratory. (16).
Mansfield.
Milroy.
Newton.
Nixon.
Nuttall.
Patrick.
Pease.
Quincy.
Sanford.
Slaughter.
Wal/..
Wiesenfeld.
Adler.
Bruce.
Burnham.
Crowell.
Donaldson.
Height.
Hemmeter.
HUsou.
Horner.
Jastrow.
Mansfield.
Nelson.
Nixon.
Noyes.
Quincy.
Sauford.
Education. Weekly, Friday, 12 m., Biological Laboratory. (36).
Adler.
Fields.
Bell, L.
Bliss.
Fisher.
Boteford.
Gardner.
Bo wen.
Haight.
Burnham.
Hayes.
Campbell, G. M.
Hemmeter,
Christie.
Hixson.
Crowell.
Holcomb.
Horner.
Nelson.
Hubbard.
Palmer, C. S.
Hussey.
Quincy.
Jastrow.
Sauford.
Katzenstein.
Slaughter.
Kemp.
Whetham.
Mansfield.
Wiesenfeld.
Milroy.
Wightman, J
McWhirter.
WoodkuIL
Histology of Sense Organs: Dr. Donaldson. Weekly (hours
will be announced later.) (5).
Bruce. Jastrow. Nuttall. Sanford.
Crowell.
Introductory to Psychology [Biology] : Dr. Donaldson.
Weekly, Tuesday, 12 m. (6).
Burnham. Hixson. Mansfield. Sanford.
Crowell. Jastrow.
The following students are engaged in psycho-physical experiments.
Donaldson. Jastrow. Nixon. Quincy.
Haight. Nelson.
The Ethical Club meets at 113 Monument St., Wednesday, 8 p. m.
Burnham. Fisher. Mansfield. Quincy.
Crowell. Hixson. Patrick. Sanford.
Seminary [psycho-physics] meets weekly, Monday, 8 p. m. (6).
Donaldson. Hartwell. Noyes. Quincy.
Hemmeter. Jastrow.
(8).
Log
*ic. (L. E. P. Course). Professor Morris.
Daily, 1p.m. (28).
Applegarth, E. C
English.
Hughes.
Williams, J. W.
Bevan.
Flexner.
Laessig.
Williams, L.
Buckler.
Gorton.
Meriwether.
Williams, W.
Coates.
Harry.
Pleasants, R.
H, Wingert.
Dohme.
Hartogensis.
Smith, W. F.
Winslow.
Duffy.
Hodges.
Stein.
Woods.
Eichelberger.
Hough.
Weech.
Young.
mention.
(52 Students).
R. Woodworth. Daily, 9 a. m
to 12.30 p. m.
Ames.
Carey.
Helfenstein,
Palmer, 0. H.
Ayres.
Daish.
Hixson.
Reader.
Ballard.
Dashiell.
Hodges.
Reeves.
Bechtel.
Devries.
Hoffmann.
Shemwell,
Bevan.
Dreyer,
Jones, C. E.
Stow.
Black.
Duvall.
Jones, W.
Tarleton.
Boyd.
Brigham.
Fearn.
Macauley.
Thompson.
Flexner,
McLane, R. M. Weech.
Bromwell.
Forrest.
MePherson.
White.
Browne, A. L,
Gildersleeve,
Meriwether.
Williams.
Buckler.
Gilpin.
Miller, W. H
Willoughby, W. F
Brune.
Gordon.
Moore, G. N.
Willoughby.W.W.
Burnham.
Grier.
O'Donovan.
Young.
Drawing. Mr. Neweix. (64 Students).
Free-Hand Drawing, Daily (except Wednesday), 1 p. m. (60).
Ballard.
Black.
Bolgiano.
Boyd.
Brigham.
Bromwell.
Browne, A.
Brune.
Buckler.
Carey.
Chisolm.
Dashiell.
Dorr.
Dreyer.
Duffy.
Ferris.
Flexner.
Forrest.
Friedenwald.
Gildersleeve.
Glenn.
Gordon.
Guggenheimer.
Harry.
Hodges.
Hoffmann.
Hough.
Hughes,
Jones, W.
Macauley.
Mechanical Drawing* (7).
Class I. Saturday, at 2 p.m.
Laessig. Ensey.
Class II. Saturday, at 2 p. m.
Dohme. Macauley.
Glenn.
Perspective Drawing. (45).
Class L Saturdays at 1 p. m.
McMurrich.
McPherson.
Mann.
Meriwether.
Miller, \V. H.
Moore, G. N.
O'Donovan.
Palmer, O. H.
Randall. D.R.
Reader.
Reeves.
Roberts, B. T.
Roberts, D, E.
Rowland, A. J.
Shemwell.
Reese.
Simon.
Stein.
Stow.
Taylor, F. W.
Taylor, R. T.
Thompson.
Weech.
White.
Wiegand.
Wightman
Wilson.
Williams.
Wingert.
Winslow.
Young.
Wiegand.
A.G
Brigham.
Dasniell.
Duffy.
Ensey.
Class II.
Black.
Bolgiano.
Bromwell,
Flexner.
Hoffmann.
Laessig.
Mann.
Reeves.
Simon.
Stein.
Weech.
Williams.
Thursday, at 1 p. m.
Carey.
Duffy.
Fifield.
Friedenwald.
Moore, G. N.
Palmer, O. H.
Reader.
Rowland, A. J.
Weech.
Class III
Thursday, at 3 p. m.
Ballard.
Brigham.
Browne.
Brune.
Ferris.
Flexner.
Forn'st.
Guggenheimer.
Harry.
Hodges.
Hough.
Hughes.
Jones, W.
Miller, W. H.
Taylor, F. W.
Taylor, R. T.
Wiegand.
White.
Wightman, A. C
Wingert.
Young.
November, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
27
H
<
a
o
d
9
b
2
-1
>
0
A
—
a
i
■S2
I 2
d s
« o
■* *
© ®
6. &
■? ?
& S
a a
IS
O 4>
b _■?
o o H
•c 5
;.2S
M§ati
a *o
ill
o •*> a
5 a. 2
£2S
8cS
A caJS
coo-
ISlp
,2,tH
»•§ o 3
llll
afacfa
S->
£ . w C
«s .;
C-2&S
B Safe
•O 3" —
<fag
O C'2 S
% 8 c s
£how
o
a~
a
- 4
E "*"
p.Qr
*co 5 2 o
, c o •■ ..
if&ii
1 o o ~ —
' B o E M
o^a o a
new
!*
I 1-,
5 f|
5 a 3.3
3 8 t, =
a a S3
3- 5
.2
2t-< o->
a oj wtc z: ,
"-} B C rtUn
"! ~ ".£•
I*
o£?3
— •ol.3> £3
.2 "fl
s-gf
2gfa
- E o
SfaO
■=70"CSa
c c c k— »"
WW^coO^&h
« ¥ Q w W>
■-"=_■ w «i '£
r- cs = ~ c i-
- a
<8
So2
too
i ;
is
PhO
"8 S
1.2 S
-fas
n — Jf
.• i
I IS
3^ -S3.
" ea
is.
i « » a; a *
*-. S- ,.T
SSb CO
3 ^
S- 3
o
o
■a o^-t?
CM *
o^
a «"?
S BJ
^ 0;J
n.^."^ rt.P
III
H3K
^2-^^S-
wo •
o
► i y*
CM
■
H C'
>•! £ S i S o g
R 3
o o*
§a
Sis
II
II
5C -
3~g
2° .mo*
= !•■•>! " 3™
S .2 — 3°
- .2 w£.
«-' 3 S ;r-5
1 j: •- "^ — <5
— ' O t»."H 1*
■S3 cs £•«
«»• = ■-» a
ojj
V&
6 1
s a
B
=•5? S
5 a 4$
a •- o rt
= o 3 a
■ - - - ._
ga-
■■3~S
s . .
>2J
*3 3
;j "i :t
a a a
1 iJ 5
to S s
2 •• c^
I
o o
-.2 S
■L
- So.
o 2- jS_-
? .Si8
jilliil
k. - : aj^ E E («
e)
•c
»
a
o
■
M
3
a
H
o
H
s
i-
»
bo
o
u
-a
5
c
i
—
o
a
o
E
b
i
fr«. II
II 11 II
It e^_
£ CO
o >; .23
a r S3
O a
c.2
0*0
^•- o a
5 a £^3" -,
S'S O ^ O^^eT
3 sSSo'o-g
o bci- 3 o i . .
CO«C •;-. O +j +-
» o-g 1 g g 5 g
— - ■- ~ --, — r* zi
In CS O H tf fa h-! i-l
r:^:— o
5.3.
o *£,
Ss
o a
..•3
94
O &K
C p rt
S*g
£ = c O
^3fa
a t-2
w<;o
a - 3*^ h
g .2: Wf^ 5 . o
a • s ■si
jS-a .Oo
S-t^o
5 £'S'E,5=
! i 3
5 03 d
5^ 3. •—■ fO
«wa
wo .
a .2 .5 a _ B
<Kai»5w|
SS .«■
.a u *** u
£'■*■ "■ ■■ k
SwSc5
a o o«
■a =oa
e=_-^o
•go «=M
a
Eq
2*
II
S3
C-a
•S 3
~s
fa .
■ a
k3
s
3
w a
O — s
o c. 5s— v
B ■ S S&s
I
S
c c
5 a
= .2
oS 3
ag
33<So
a s;
C5U
^ U --'3'
I-7i O
a L' so
So o =
q
3B«
cs o 5
W 4>C-
«2 •
■- " — <r
p?S o
s. 2 « — ' a
j . Jir .
s
at "g * a, f> 5 <g
i i tS *" — 4> S
— o
B5
to"*
Ofa
ca
S 3
O 3
b
COJ5
O 3
Si
a' •e ~
iS!8
"o*o^
P . ©.a
i«2
fa>
■a v cq »^
a
- u
--
.a-sS.2,
fill
■:SS *£>
fa a Cfi fa
a"
i
— T3
O 0
f|
C-
o c
£
H
^-*
^^
^^
a~S
CB
a-s o
|
7.6as
z
a£
fa a
o
-.2*
S
*
£* j!
> 3
a os
&-co
o. „-
Us
pa
fa it
2 £
o a
2S
62
afa
Sa
a-g
2 a
= 3'
~^og'«1
IIS i
a 2^ 2 a-
8 = g S 3 3
«o»s S a
a o « a o k
a a £ «;
sl-g
»-' ''■ Kg i
0 tc^ 3 C
-laS.5
• • a>'B *
o <a
sfe
ice
g'5.
I^
o2 =
fa |"~
£.=.1
o 3 3
aSS|w
s.2 p<_.
. c t- a 4> *
. E s S S &>
I 4«j3 O t-j3
x-.
I
«a
£3
*— '13 0)
5"E
— -i
\ Ufa
> <JM
; c o
• cu at
i 4*
03 — O
S^-nfa-a
w«3
0i
is' fa "fa 2
-•S-2.Sfa,2,
w E ^ — i> *
O - 1 — *^
Hi ill
a »- s 3 o —
_-m a* s.
OS
•: .. EM
_ .:l-3c2"
°.g x^lS^ti
•§= 2-3_-„-o'S
^Sjflurt- txa
SS £■-£ a c o2
faW Srj^faJO
fa
go
•9
i'7
3
■
0.0
ga =■3 g
S| a| a
9> 1- O^* V
CSO O O
51
- o
si
a^~
55 .
B
it
*. a
5^
e-
So
1
-
Si
m »
©
i
V.
S a
J
-
&.C5
Ol
CO
^*
lO
38
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
[No. 44.
OPENING OF THE TENTH ACADEMIC YEAR.
Address by the Venerable F. W. Farrar, D. D., F. R. S.,
Archdeacon of Westminster.
The tenth academic year of the Johns Hopkins University was opened
by an assembly of the officers and students, and their friends, in the large
auditorium of the Academy of Music, at noon, on Thursday, October 1.
This departure from the usual meeting in Hopkins Hall was occasioned by
the great desire of the citizens of Baltimore to hear the distinguished
speaker who had consented to give the opening address.
The Trustees and Faculty assembled in the President's office, at half-past
eleven and escorted the speaker, — who was accompanied by the Venerable
Archdeacon Vesey, of Huntingdon, — to the Academy. Prayer was there"
offered by Rev. Dr. Hodges, Rector of St. Paul's Church. A brief intro--
ductory address was made by Dr. Oilman, President of the University.
Archdeacon Farrar was then presented to the audience and delivered an
address of an hour in length, in which he considered The Idea of a Liberal
Education in the circumstances of our times. His address was clear, forcible,
and admirable in thought, language, and delivery, and was listened to with
great delight by the large and cultivated assembly. It was reported in
several of the newspapers,— especially in The Independent, New York, Octo-
ber 15, 1885, but as it is probable that an authorized copy of the speech
will be published by the speaker, at an early day, no full report will here be
attempted. The concluding passage, as given in The Independent, was as
follows:
"I must conclude; but, before I do so, one word on the true aim of
education. Whether our education be in the sciences or languages, or
perhaps in both, we must set steadily before us that which is the one aim
and object we desire to obtain. There are some that wish to know only
that they may know, which is base curiosity ; and some wish to know only
to be known, which is base vanity ; and some wish to know only that they
may sell their knowledge, which is eovetousness. But there are some who
wish to know that they may be edified, and some that they may edify ; and
that is heavenly prudence. In other words, the object of education is neither
for amusement, nor fame, nor for profit ; but it is that one may learn to see
and know God here and to glorify him in Heaven hereafter.
" Our education is desired that, in the language of a Harrow prayer that
Archdeacon Vesey and I well remember, ' we may become profitable mem-
bers of the Church and commonwealth, and hereafter partakers of the
immortal glories of the resurrection.' Education is not a couch upon which
to rest, nor a costume in which to promenade. Whatever removes us from
the power of our senses, whatever brings the past and distant and future
into due prominence, is the principle that elevates us in the scale of man-
hood ; and, therefore, that is the true and only object of education. Try
to be a man.
" Your late President, General Garfield — a man for whose memory I
cannot fail to feel the deepest respect and regard — when only a boy, was
asked what he was going to be. He made the answer : ' First of all, I shall
try to be a man ; and if I do not succeed in that, I am quite sure I will not
succeed in anything else.' You all remember, in Scott's ' Rob Roy,' where,
in reply to the question, ' Who are you ? ' Rob Roy replied : ' I am a man.'
'A man, that is very brief.' ' It serves one who has no other answer to give.'
"Our system of education should be to produce men. Behind the clerk,
the scholar, the merchant, there should tower the man. There is nothing
more fatal than to throw life away in the effort to gain the means of living.
Professor Huxley said : ' That man has had a liberal education whose body
has been so trained in its youth that it is a servant of the mind, whose mind
is stored with great essential truths, whose intellect is like gold, who is full
of force and fire, and whose passions have been trained to be the servant of
a tender conscience, who has learned to love all beauty, to hate all falseness,
and respect others as himself.' I accept that definition of a liberal educa-
tion as a very fine one ; but I would add again, the only true object, as your
President has already told us, is an education in righteousness, and in the
great essential truths in one or the other of the great forms of religion.
" We live by admiration, hope, and love; there are parts to train that
are neither of the mind nor of the body ; there are spirits to train. We
have bodies, it has been said, but we are spirits; and education is, in its
highest and truest function, the education of the spirit ; that alone can ft aci
us, after all, the only end of life, which is always that we shall be faithful
to the best we know — faithful to God, faithful to our country, faithful to
our fellow-men, and faithful to ourselves. Our education will never be
perfect, unless, like the Ancient Temples, it is lighted at the top.
" It is only a religious education, after all, which can give us true happi-
ness, and real and permanent success.
" ' Take thou no thought for aught save truth and right j
Content, if such thy fate, to die obscure,
Youth fails, and honor ; fame may not endure,
And loftier souls soon weary of delight.
Keep innocent! Be all a true man ought 1
Let neither pleasures tempt nor pain appall !
Who hath this, he has all in his having naught ;
Who hath it not, hath nothing, having all.' "
HOPKINS HALL LECTURES AT 5 P. M.
(The regulations in respect to the admission of the public to these lectures
are given on page 14 of this Circular.)
M. Rabillon, Lecturer on French Literature, will give two series of
lectures (in French) on Early French Literature. The literature of the Middle
Ages up to the Renaissance will be considered in the first series of lectures :
October 17. — A glimpse of the history of the Middle Ages.
October 24. — Constitution of the Nationality of France ; Commencement
of a French literature.
October 31. — -Introduction to the Chanson de Roland (xi century).
November 7. — Text of the Chanson, with comments.
November 16. — The Troubadours ; Bertram de Born ; Richard Cceur de
Lion (xn century).
November 21. — Villehardouin as a prose writer (xm century).
November 28. — Roman de la Rose (xm century).
December 5. — The historian Joinville ; St. Louis ; The Crusades (xiii
and xiv centuries).
December 12. — Froissard's Chronicles (xiv century).
December 19. — Commynes' history of Louis XI (xv century).
Frederick Wedmore, Esq., of London, will lecture on Friday, Novem-
ber 13, On Modern Life in Art, and on Saturday, November 14, On Meryon
and the Revival of Etching.
Edward M. Hartwell, Ph. D., Associate in Physical Training and
Director of the Gymnasium, will give six lectures on Physical Training,
beginning Friday, January 8, and continuing on successive Fridays till
February 12.
George H. Williams, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Mineralogy, will
give three lectures on The Use of the Microscope in Oeology, on Wednesday,
January 13, 20, and 27.
Lectures will also be given on dates to be announced later by : —
Rev. W. Hayes Ward, D. D., of New York, Director of the Wolfe
Expedition to Assyria;
Professor Isaac H. Hall, Ph. D., of the Metropolitan Museum of Art
in New York.
PEABODY INSTITUTE LECTURES.
The following courses of lectures are announced by the authorities of the
Peabody Institute — to be given on Tuesday and Thursday evenings, at eight
o'clock, as follows :
1. Mr. Wm. Bradford, of New York. Six illustrated lectures, Nov.
3-19. Arctic Explorations and Life in the Arctic Regions.
2. Mr. Frederick A. Ober, of Boston. Six illustrated lectures, Nov.
24-Dec. 10. Mexico, Ancient and Modern.
3. Prof. F. W. Putnam, of Harvard University. Two illustrated lec-
tures, Dec. 15-17. The " Mound Builders" in Ohio:
4. Mr. Russell Sturgis, of New York. Four illustrated lectures, Jan.
5-14. Decorative Art.
5. Rev. Francis Tiffany, of Massachusetts. Two lectures. Capri and
Tiberius ; St. Francis of Assisi.
6. Rev. C. W. Wendte, of Newport, R. I. Four lectures, Jan. 28-Feb. 4.
The Great Composers — Handel, Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven.
7. Prof. A. M. Elliott, of Johns Hopkins University. Two lectures,
Feb. 9-11. Camoens and the Lnsiads.
8. Mr. George M. Towle, of Boston. Four lectures, Feb. 16-25. The
Heroes of Invention.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 45.]
BALTIMORE, DECEMBER, 1885.
[Price, 10 Cents.
1885, Thursday, October I.
" Thursday, December 24— Saturday, January 2.
1886, Monday, February 22.
" Friday, April 23— Monday, April 26.
" Tuesday, June 15.
CALENDAR, 1885-86.
Academic Year Began.
Christmas Recess.
Commemoration Day.
Spring Recess.
Term of Instruction Closes.
HOPKINS HALL LECTURES AT 5 P. M.
THE NEW TESTAMENT :-
BIBLIOGRAPHICAL, BIOGRAPHICAL, AND
TEXTUAL STUDIES.
Professor Isaac H. Hall, Ph. D., of the Metropolitan
Museum of Art in New York, will give eighteen lectures on The
New Testament as Transmitted by Printing, to be followed by two
lectures on The Syrian Antilegomena, beginning Monday, January
4, 1886, and continuing on successive Tuesdays, Thursdays, and
Mondays, till February 16.
These lectures will be addressed not alone to students of the
Bible and those who read Greek, but to the general educated
public as well ; especially to those interested in tracing the trans-
mission of ancient documents from manuscript sources through
the vicissitudes of type, and in testing the fidelity with which
they are preserved to our times.
The last two lectures of the course deal with subjects partly
identical with, and partly akin to, the others ; presenting also
some phases of transmission when manuscripts are lost or scanty.
As far as practicable, the lectures will be illustrated by speci-
mens or facsimiles. The following synopsis presents an approxi-
mate outline of the subjects to be treated : —
I.
Introduction.
(Monday, January 4).
The general subject of printed New Testament texts. Reasons for its
general and special interest, both by itself, and connected with other branches
of research.
Specimen phenomena of to-day, showing need of wariness in details:
Oxford University Press, and its editions of 1885, 1870, and earlier ; Pseudo-
Beza of 1559 and 'GO, and its misuse with the English Bible and underlying
texts; Pseudo-Leusden of 1675, and that of 1824-80. Gerbelius and
Luther's German N. T. Early Greek printing, and its late application to
the N. T. Prejudice against the Greek. Booksellers' rivalry and tricks,
and complaints thereof by early editors.
Bibliographic hints by N. T. editors, as Mill, Bengel, Wetstein, Greisbach,
Scholz, Tregelles, Tischendorf. Bibliographers and bibliographies, special
and general. Collectors and collections. Historic New Testaments in
America.
II.
The Complutensian Polyglott (1514-1517), and the work of
Erasmus (1466-1536).
(Tuesday, January 5).
Stunica and his co-editors. Library of Alcala (Coraplutum). Means of
printing. MSS. employed, and wrong stories about them. Description of
Complutensian Polyglott ; its cost, issue, distribution, and copies in America.
Erasmus and his work. Froben the publisher. The various editions and
their characteristics. Noteworthy readings. History of the insertion of 1
John v. 7. MSS. and other helps used. Recovery of his (the Reuchlin)
MS. of the Apocalypse, by Delitzsch ; and Tregelles's re-examination.
Apocalypse of Erasmus's 4th ed. Means of classifying texts, and their
general characteristics.
(Bibliography and literature. List of test-readings of Complutensian and
Erasmian editions, arranged for use with subsequent editors).
III.
Complutensian and Erasmian Descendants
(1519, and later).
(Thursday, January 7).
The Aldines, and the first printed Septuagint. Antonio de Nicolinis de
Sabio. Gerbelius, and the dubious claim of its parentage of Luther's ( formal)
Bible. The Basic printers and editors: Wolf. Cephalaeus (Fabr. Capita) —
Koepftel). Bebelius (Wisendanger). Osiander. Mclanchthon's edition.
Yalder, Plater, Brylinger, Ac. 1'roschaucr of Zurich, Curio of Hamburg,
Honter of Cracow, Guillard of Paris (Koigny, Bogard, Toussaint), Dupuis
and Fezandat.
Complutensian reproduction by Grata. Compluto-Erasmian of Van Ess.
Colinacus (Simon de Colines) of Paris, his press and work, and MSS.
used.
(Bibliography, literature, and test lists of readings).
IV.
Robert Stephen (Estienne) (1503-1559), and his Descendants.
(Monday, January 11 J.
His life and Work. His MSS. His Paris editions: O Mirifica, Editio
Regia. Concordance to Vulgate, and history of verse-division. Geneva
edition, the first N. T. divided into verses. Old criticisms thereon. Prev6t
30
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 45.
(Hanltin, Birkmann). Wechel of Frankfort. Dulei of Venice. Oporinns
anil Brylinger of Risle. Bill of London. Boeder of Strassburg. London
Polyglott. Jo. Crispin of Geneva. Yogel of Leipzig. Selfisch editions.
Rihel. Wolder's great polyglott Scrivener. Influence of this text to-day.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
Erasmo-Stephanic and Conipluto-Stephanic
Descendants (1552, and later).
(Tuesday, January 12).
General sketch of Erasmo-Stephanic editions, with notice of chief editors
and printers ; mostly in Germany. Chemnitz-Lyser, at Frankfurt and
Geneva. Jo. de Tournes, and Boussin, of Lyons. " Editio Barbirii," the
I'm udo Beza of 1559 and '60, and its singular history and products.
Compluto-Stephanic editions. Antwerp Polyglott, and Plantin, with his
griming office. Paris Polyglott. Rapheleng. Guy le Fevre de la Boderie.
am. Crispin. Kirthner (and Arias Montanus). Other editors and printers.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
VI.
Theodore Beza (de Beze) (1519-1605), and his Descendants.
(Thursday, January 14).
Beza's life and work. Latin X. T. and Annotations. His own editions and
their all-important influence on later editors and publishers. Helps and
MSS. First use of Syriac version (Tremellius). Mistakes about his works
made by later editors. Real author of so-called textus receptus. Influence
of his work on Continental and English translations.
Henry Stephen (Henri Estienne). His printing, collating, and editing.
London edition of Vautrollerius. — Paul Stephen. De Harsy. The great
English and Continental families. — Stephano-Beza descendants ; Vignon of
Geneva, Hafenreff'er of Tubingen. Erasmus Schmidt. Gergani and Nice-
phorus. Wittenberg and Frankfurt printers and editors. Bleau of Am-
sterdam.— Stephano-Plantin ; Elias Hutter and his singular work. Jo. de
Tournes.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
VII.
The Elzevirs (1583-1680) and their Followers.
(Monday, January 18).
Their beautiful printing, and great work. Not the originators of the
textus receptus, but onlv of its name. Their genuine editions of the N. T., and
others of like text. H. Laurens of Amsterdam, Jannon of Sedan, Watts of
London (Brit, and For. Bib. Soc.). Moscow edition. — Spread and influence of
Elzevir texts on the Continent and in England. Veneration of the text,
and mistakes about its character.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
VIII.
The Elzevir Descendants (1633, and later).
(Tuesday, January 19).
The immense English and Continental families, with special notices of
individuals. Whittaker (Elzevir). Jansson. Paris "Mazarin" of 1642.
II. Laurens, &<■. Joh. Leusden, and his work at Utrecht ; and the immense
number of his descendants. Pseudo-Leusdens. Wetstein. Sketch of sub-
sequent followers in Europe and America. Difficulty of classifying English
editions. Printer and Publisher versus scholarly editing.
Curcellaeus (Steph. de Courcelles), and his followers. Fell (Oxford) and
his followers. Von Mastricht (G. D. T. M. D.), and his followers.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
IX.
The Stephanie-Elzevir and Elzevir-Plantin
Descendants (1633, and later).
(Thursday, January 21).
English amateur editors, and publishers: Buck, Daniel, Field, Tonson
and Watts, Pickering, Ac Cyril Lucar. Boeder. Coceeius. Pritius.
Teubner, &c. Mill, and his epoch-making work. Krister, Bowyer, Basker-
ville. Birch, of Copenhagen. Clarendon Press. Bagster. Perkins. Hardy,
&c: Turin and Padua editions. P. Wilson (and Pseudo-Leusden). Elze-
vir-Plantin : ( 'ramoisy of Paris. Longmans, etc., of London.
(Bibliography, and lists of test readings; list of test readings as between
Stephen and Beza Elzevir).
X.
Critical Attempts before Griesbach (1709-1780).
(Monday, January 2.5).
Nic. Toinard of Paris. Edward Wells of England, and his opponents.
Richard Bentley. Mace. Bengd, and his descendants. Koppe of Got-
tinL'cn, and h'iH hdpers. Stephan. J. J. Wetstein, and his herculean
lalKirs. Bowver. llarwood. Alter.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
XI.
Griesbach (1745-1812), his Opponents and Descendants.
(Tuesday, January 26).
J. J. Griesbach, his life, work, and editions of the Gr. N. T. David
Schulz. Cambridge (American) ed. Kneeland. Bagster. B. Wilson.
Tafel. Matthaei. Pharmakides.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
XII.
Griesbach-Elzevir Descendants (1788-1840).
(Thursday, January 28).
Joseph White and his work. " Origenistic " N. T. Aitton of Zwollen.
Glasgow and London printers. "Scholastic" Paris editions: Delalain,
Didot (Brosset), Darolles, Fix, Lefranc, &c. Gaillard. Valpy. Whit-
taker. Patrick. Gehringer. Lacheze.
Knapp. Tittmann. Kaeuffer. Halm. E. Bobinson. Vater. Watts, &c.
(Bibliography, literature, and lists of test readings).
XIII.
Minor Critical Editors "since Griesbach (1788-1840).
(Monday, February 1).
Paulus, Fritzsche, Bleeck, Rodiger, H. A. W. Meyer, Scholz, English
Hexapla, Bagster, Green, Bloomfield.
(Bibliography, and lists of test readings).
XIV.
Lachmann (1793-1851) and his Followers.
(Tuesday, February 2).
Karl Lachmann and his critical work. New path in editing, and its
defects. His smaller N. T. Larger N. T., made with Buttmann's assist-
ance. Buttmann, Bornemann, Loch, Riickert, Schott, Rilliet, Friedlieb.
(Tregelles's Apocalypse).
(Literature, and lists of test readings).
XV.
Historic editions of the New Testament, down to this point :
(Thursday, February 4).
1. The main line of transmitted text ;
2. Remarkable editions ; generally in chronological sequence, but modi-
fied to compass likenesses ;
3. Published Uncial MSS., and collations; and their stimulus and help ;
with remarks on other critical accumulations, and the general waking up
to the need of using ancient sources.
XVI.
Tischendorf (1815-1874) ; his Life, Work, and Editions.
(Monday, February 8).
Tischendorf's researches, journeys, and results.
Abbot and Gregory. Von Gebhardt.
(Literature, and lists of test readings).
XVII.
Tregelles (1813-1875), and the Editors of Recent Mixed Texts.
(Tuesday, February 9).
Theile. Muralt and his severe critics. Beithmayr. Anger. Words-
worth. Alford. Halm's later recension. Biggenbach and Stockrneyer.
Perowne's editors.
Tregelles; his life, travels, collations. His Apocalypse. His literary
works. Accumulations of critical material. His N. T.
(Literature, and lists of test readings).
XVIII.
Westcott and Hort (with a sketch of the past and present
circulation of texts).
(Thursday, February 11).
Their "confidential" texts. Character and value of their work. Their
theories and text. Their literary labors. Effect of their work on the Eng-
lish Bevision and Bevisers.
Circulation of the N. T. in different periods, as to kinds and numbers,
with kindred data and conclusions of moment. Effect of recent critical
labors on modern views of the N. T. text, on important new translations and
revisions, and on arclueological work in other directions. Obstructionists,
and their influence on other branches of research. Present prospects.
(Literature, and lists of test readings).
[The two lectures on The Syrian Antilegomeiia will be supple-
mentary to those above mentioned].
December, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
31
XIX.
The Syriac Apocalypse.
(Monday, February 10),
Absence from Syriac versions of the N. T. Its absence from printed edi-
tions of the N. T., with sketch of history of Syriac printing. Extant MSS.
Etlitio princeps of De Dieu. De Dieu's literary lal>ors. His " Critica sacra."
The Leiden MS. Later editors, and their treatment of the text. Use as a
critical aid in determining the original text. Its origin, age, peculiarities,
and value. Question of its (idelity. Question of recension. How a text is
preserved in a single MS. Hutter's version. The Pericope de Adultera, and
other Syriac biblical rarities.
XX.
The Antilegomena Epistles (2 Peter, 2 and 3 John, and Jude).
(Tuesday, February 16).
Absence from the Old Syriac N. T. Ancient patristic testimony. Tes-
timony of later Syrian writers. Thomas of Heraelea (Harkel), and the
Harklensian version. The common version ; its wrong names, and its real
origin. Its place in Syriac literature. Its MS. transmission. Extant MSS.
Hutter's version. Editio princeps of Pococke, and the Bodleian MS. Ques-
tions about the Ussher MS. Subsequent editors. Its merits as a text.
Question of fidelity. Question of recension. The Williams MS. Use of
Syriac study for biblical, historical and archaeological research in other
languages and directions. (Greek literature ; Byzantine history ; Phoeni-
cian and Assyrian).
(Literature and bibliography).
Cards of admission will be sent to clergymen, theological students, and
others specially interested in the subjects treated in the course on appli-
cation by postal card addressed to the '' Johns Hopkins University."
PHYSICAL TRAINING.
Dr. E. M. Hartwell, Associate in Physical Training, and
Director of the Gymnasium, will give a course of six lectures on
Physical Training, beginning on Friday, January 8, 1886, and
continuing on successive Fridays, at 5 o'clock, until February 12.
The aim of these lectures will be to show that it is both desirable and
practicable to make Physical Training an integral and coordinate part of
the elementary and higher education of American youth of both sexes. In
order to determine the means conducive to such an end : some of the causes
and results of brain-forcing will be noted ; the educational value of athletic
sports, gymnastics, and military drill will be considered; and the principal
experiments, ancient and modern, in combining bodily with mental training
will be described and discussed.
The following scheme will suggest approximately the order to be followed
in the lectures : —
I.
Introduction.
(Friday, January 8).
Main features of the principal theories concerning Health and Training.
Nature and limits of Mental and Physical Training, according to the mod-
ern doctrine of the Interdependence of Mind and Body. Characteristics of
Athletic, Gymnastic, Military and Technical Training. Peculiarities and
educational value of Greek, German, and English Athletic Sports.
II.
American Sports.
([•'riday, January 15).
Athletic Sports in America, their inherited and acquired traits. Eevival
in Athletics since 1800. College Athletics: their rise, extent, and cost;
their tendency to become professional ; and the need and means of regu-
lating them. Athletics versus Gymnastics.
III.
Foreign Gymnastics.
(Friday, January 22).
Greek Gymnastics, their aims, methods, and influence. Bodily exercise
in the education of mediaeval scholastics and noblemen. German Gymnas-
tics in school, army, and among the Turners. The Dresden "Turn Fest,"
of 1885. School Gymnastics in Prussia, and what they teach.
IV.
American Gymnastics.
(Friday, January 29).
Gymnastics in the United Slates, their German origin, retarded growth,
and 'present condition. Doctrines and methods of Dr. Winship, and Dio
Lewis. The Sargent System. College Gymnastics. Gymnastics in Baltimore.
American and foreign gymnasiums. The gymnasium <ti the future.
Military and Medical Gymnastics.
(Friday, February 5).
Military Drill as a means to Physical Training, in comparison with Ath-
letics and Gymnastics. Military Drill in American educational schemes
and experiments. The Military and Naval Academies of the United States,
and their system of instruction. The training of Prussian cadets. Gym-
nastics for girls. Medical Gymnastics : what they are, and what they promise
to become.
VI.
Reforms in Physical Training.
(Friday, February 12).
Shortcomings of our system of elementary, higher, and professional edu-
cation as regards instruction in Personal Hygiene. The place and limits of
Physical Training in an American reformed system of education. Obstacles
to an immediate or general reform in this direction. The needs and itossi-
bilities of Baltimore, as regards Athletics and Gymnastics, general and
medical.
Seats will be reserved for members of the University who enter their
names at the office in pursuance of the regulations. The remainder of the
hall will be open to the public without tickets.
Bibliography for Lectures on Physical Training.
The letters H. and P. indicate that the books to whose titles tbey are appended are
accessible in the Johns Hopkins University and Peabody Institute Libraries respectively.
Quick. Educational Reformers. London, 1868. H. P.
Rousseau. Emile. (Translation). Boston, 1885.
Krafll-Ebing. Ueber Gesunde und Kranke Nerven. Tubingen, 1885. H.
Kingsley. Health and Education. (American edition). New York. H. P.
Brigham. Influence of Mental Cultivation upon Health. (Reprinted in London, 1874,
from American edition of 1833). H.
Hasse. Die UberbOrdung unserer Jugend auf den Hoheren Lehranstalten. Braun-
schweig, 1880. H.
Herttl. Overpressure in Schools. London, 1885.
Qrasberger. Erziehung und Unterricht im Klassischen Alterthum. WQrzburg, 1864-1881,
8 vols. H. P.
Ghihl and Koner. The Life of the Greeks and Romans. London, 1875. P.
Mahaffy. Old Greek Education. London, 1881. P. H.
Waldslein. The Influence of Athletic Games upon Greek Art, in "Essays on the Art of
Pheidias." New York, 1885. H.
Mercurialis. De Arte Gymnastica. Amsterdam, 1672. H.
Schaible. The Systematic Training of the Body. London, 1878. H.
Struct. Spirts and Pastimes of the People of England. London, 1833. P.
Furnivall. Education in Early England. London, 1867. P.
Wiese. German Letters on English Education. LondoD, 1877. P.
Slarkey. England under Henry VIII. (Early English Text Society's, Extra Series, xn).
London, 1871. H. P.
Queene Elizabethes Achademy. (Early English Text Society's, Extra Series, vm). Lon-
don, 1869. H. P.
Barnard. English Pedagogy and Schools. Philadelphia, 1862. P.
Miillinger. The University of Cambridge from the Earliest Times to 1535. Cambridge
(Eng.), 1873. H. P.
Mullinger. The University of Cambridge from 1535 to the Accession of Charles I. Cam-
bridge (Eng ), 1884. H.
Walker. Manly Exercises. London, 1860. H. P.
Morgan. University Oars. London, 1873. P.
Brendicke. Grundriss zur Geschichte der Leib^subungen. Kothen, 1882. H.
Jlirth. Das gesammte Turnwesen. Leipzig, 1865. H.
(rulstmdhs. Spiele zur Uebung und Eiholung des Korpers und Geistes. Schnepfenthal,
1796. H.
John. Deutsche Turnkunst. Berlin, 1847. P.
Jahn. A Treatise on Gymnasticks. Translated by Beck. Northampton, Mass., 1828. H.
Euler. Friedrich Ludwig Jahn, scin I.eben und Wirken. Stuttgart, 1881. H.
Spies*. Turnbuch filr Schulen. Basel, 1880. H.
Rarenstein. Volksturnbuch, im Sinne von Jahn, Eiselen und Spiess. Frankfurt a. M.,
1876. II.
Puritz. Code-Book of Gymnastic Exercises. Hanover and London, 1883. H.
Rusk. Essays : Literary, Moral, and Philosophical. Philadelphia, 1806. H.
Lewis, Dio. The New Gymnastics. Boston, 1869. H.
Wood. Physical Exercises. New York, 1875. 1'.
Blaikie. How to Get Strong. New York, 1879. H. P.
Walson. Elocution, Calisthenics, and Gymnastics. New York, 1882. P.
Oswald. Physical Education. New York, 1883. H. P.
Hartwell. Physical Training in American Schools and Colleges. Government Printing
Office, Washington. (In press1.
Hitchcock. Twenty Years Experience in the Department of Physical Education and
Hygiene in Amherst College. Amherst, Mass., 1881. H.
Development of Physical Culture in the Uniied States. Barnard's American Journal of
Education, Vol. xv.
32
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 45.
Military Systems and Education. New York, 1872. H. P. (See also Am.
Journal of Education. Vol. XXX, 1863). 11. P.
The School and Army in Germany and France. New York, 1872. H. P.
Klass. Die Weibliche Turukunst. 1375. H.
GmM. Schule und Ueer. Berlin, lSSi H.
The Harrard Book. Cambridge, 1875. 2 vols. H. P.
The Princeton Book. Boston, 1379. H. P. a
The Yale Book. 2 Tola. H.
Yale College: A Sketch of its History. New York, 1879. P.
Schrtbtr. Aerztliche Zimmergymuastik. l'Jtc Auflage. Leipzig, 1884. H.
Vtumm. Die Sehwedische Ileilgyuinastik. Hamburg, 1881. H.
Heiperr. Die Lungen-tiymuasiik. Berlin, 1885.
Htiligmthai. Die Anstalt fOr Mechanische Heilgymnastik in Baden-Baden. Baden-
Baden, 1884. H.
Haasum, Ling's Swedish Gymnastics. London, Paris, and Boston, 1885. H.
Baginsky. Handbuch der Schulhygiene. Stuttgart, 1883. H.
School and Industrial Hygiene. Philadelphia, 1880. H.
INORGANIC CEOLOCY.
Dr. George H. Williams, Associate Professor of Mineralogy,
will give three lectures on The Present Aspect of Inorganic Geology,
on Wednesdays, January 13, 20, 27.
I.
Internal (Hypogene) Forces.
(Wednesday, January 13).
The vital energy of our earth stored as heat in its interior and the mani-
festations of this energy at its surface. Ideas relating to the condition of
the earth's interior ; elevation and subsidence of large areas of the crust ;
mountain-making ; earthquakes ; volcanic phenomena.
II.
The Microscope in Geology.
(Wednesday, January 20).
The universal, though invisible, chemical changes which are constantly
in progress in the rocks of the earth's crust and the use of the microscope in
studying them.
III.
External (Epigene) Forces.
(Wednesday, January 27).
The devastating effects of the earth's atmosphere, tending to neutralize
the results of internal activity and to reduce the surface to one common level.
Seats will be reserved for members of the University who enter their
names at the office in pursuance of the regulations. The remainder of the
hall will be open to the public without tickets.
ASSYRIAN ARCHyEOLOCY.
Dr. A. L. Frothingham, Jr., Fellow by Courtesy, will give
five lectures on Babylonian and Assyrian Archaeology, beginning
Thursday, February 25, and continuing on successive Mondays and
Thursdays till March 11.
I.
Introductory.
(Thursday, February 25).
(Diagram of the country — ancient and modern).
(1) The state of knowledge about the history, language and art of Baby-
lonia and Assyria before this century.
(2) The first discoveries in Persian Cuneiform, at the beginning of the
century, by Grotefend, Lassen, Rawlinson and others, and the gradual
decipherment of the second and third columns of the famous trilingual
inscription of Behistun — the Median and the Assyrian.
(3) Close connection between archaxjlogical and linguistic discoveries:
excavations of Botta, Layard, Place, George Smith, Oppert, Bassam and De
Larzec.
(4) Chief results of these discoveries as regards the reconstruction of the
history of the East before the Persian rule. Sketch of the gradual expan-
sion of early Babylonian civilization, of the various states of Northern and
Southern Babylonia, and of the rise of Assyria.
II.
Present State of the Science.
(Monday, March 1).
Philology. Theories and discoveries of scholars in England, France and
Germany during the last ten years; (Schrader, Delitzsch, Haupt, Hommel,
Lenormant, Oppert, Halevy, Guyard, Sayce, Pinchez, etc.).
Ethnography. What were the races of Babylonia ? Was the non-Shemitic
population Turanian or Cushite ? Which race worshipped natural forces,
and employed magic? Which race developed an elaborate mythology?
How did the religion of the Assyrians differ from this latter ?
Literature. The various branches cultivated by the non-Shemites and the
Shemites. The earliest hymns and incantations. Religious and historical
writings. Preservation by the Assyrians of the ancient literature. Libraries
in Babylonian cities and Assyrian palaces. Great importance of literary
sources for a knowledge of the history and character of Assyrian art.
Importance of Assyrian for the study of the Old Testament. Historical
data found in Assyrian annals relating to the Hebrews.
How far a dependence on Assyrian for the philology and history of the
Old Testament ought to be carried.
III.
Archaeology and Art : — Babylonia.
(Thursday, March 4).
The great art-centres and their historical relation : Erech, Ur, Sippar,
Nippur, Babilu, Borsippa, Kutha, Larsa, Zirpurla, etc. Their great tem-
ples, sculpture and decoration. Characteristics of this art : was it in part
Shemitic? Ideal and technique. Metal-work especially bronze: enamel-
ling: cylinders. Correspondence of types of Egyptian sculpture of early
dynasties with some Babylonian sculpture, especially that of the recent dis-
coveries at Tell-Loh.
IV.
Archaeology and Art : — Assyria.
(Monday, March 8).
Distinctive marks of Babylonian and Assyrian art. Secular character of
the latter. The great cities of El-Assur, Calah and Nineveh ; their
palaces and temples. The Assyrian palace : its construction and plan ; its
sculptural and pictorial decoration. The vault, the arch, the column, the
capital. Historical sculptures and enamelled bricks. Religious sculpture :
the good and evil demons ; the bulls and lions, guardians of the palace.
Bronze work. Industrial arts.
Babylonia and Assyria in their foreign relations.
(Thursday, March 11).
Early relations between Egypt and Babylonia ; did any exist before the
xvm dynasty? The Mt. Sinai peninsula and the quarry-marks on the
Tell-Loh sculptures.
Relations with Elam ; — with Syria and the Hittites ; — with Phoenicia and
Cyprus; — with North Arabia; — with Persia.
The reciprocal influence of Babylonian and Assyrian art and the artistic
development of the peoples of these countries.
The influence of Babylon and Assyrian art on Hellenic art through Phoe-
nicia and Asia Minor, and on early Italic art through the Phoenicians.
LECTURES ON PATHOLOGY.
To Physicians and Advanced Students of Biology.
Dr. William H. Welch, Professor of Pathology, will give
nine lectures to physicians and students of Biology on Micro-or-
ganisms in Disease, beginning Wednesday, February 3, and con-
tinuing on successive Wednesdays till March 31.
HOPKINS HALL LECTURES.
NOTICE TO MEMBERS OF THE UNIVERSITY.
Seats will be reserved in the front of the hall for such members
of the university as give notice of their intention of attending any
of these courses of lectures. Such notice must be given in writing
before five p. m. of the day preceding the beginning of the course.
The seats will be reserved until five minutes before five o'clock
(by the clock in the hall), after which time they will be thrown
open to the public. The entrance to the reserved seats will be
by the anteroom on the south of the hall.
Schedule of Dates of Public Lectures.
Mondays (January 4-February 15), Dr. I. H. Hall.
" (March 1, 8), Dr. A. L. Frothingham, Jr.
Tuesdays (January 6-February 16), Dr. I. H. Hall.
Wednesdays (January 13-27), Dr. G. H. Williams.
" (February 3-March 81), Professor W. H. Welch.
Thursdays (January 7-February 11), Dr. I. H. Hall.
" (February 25-March 11), Dr. A. L. Frotuingham, Jr.
Fridays (January 8-February 12), Dr. E. M. Hartwbll.
Saturdays (as hereafter announced), M. Rabillon.
December, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
33
ANNOUNCEMENTS, ETC.
COMMEMORATION DAY.
At a meeting of the Trustees of the University, December 7,
1885, it was
Resolved, that the Tenth Anniversary of the Johns Hopkins
University be observed with appropriate ceremonies on the 22d
of February next; and that an invitation be extended to all who
have taken degrees in this institution to be present on that occa-
sion and receive their diplomas.
RECENT APPOINTMENTS.
Dr. Caspar Rene Gregory, Privat-docent in the University of
Leipsic, has accepted the position of Associate Professor of New Tes-
tament Greek and Palaeography in the Johns Hopkins University.
Dr. Gregory is a native of Philadelphia (where his father is Vice-
President of Girard College), and he received his academic train-
ing in the University of Pennsylvania, and his theological training
in part at the Seminary of the Reformed Presbyterian Church
at Philadelphia and in part at the Presbyterian Seminary at
Princeton. Since 1873 he has been engaged abroad in biblical
studies and researches. In 1876, he received the degree of Doctor
of Philosophy in Leipsic, and in 1884 he received the distinction,
almost if not quite unprecedented among Americans, of being made
a Privat-docent in that university. After the death of Tischendorf
he was selected to complete and publish the prolegomena for the
eighth edition of Tischendorf 's Greek Testament, of which the first
volume has already appeared. He has published a translation in
four volumes of Luthardt upon the writings of St. John, and a
sketch of Tischendorf 's life, in the Bibliotheca Sacra for 1876.
Dr. Gregory has recently made a brief visit to this university,
— but his instructions will not begin at present, as the investi-
gations upon which he is engaged respecting the manuscripts of
the New Testament require prolonged journeys to the libraries and
archives of foreign lands. The lectures in his department will be
given during the current year by Prof. Isaac H. Hall, Ph. D., of
New York.
George Henry Emmott, Esq., of Manchester (England), has
accepted the position of Associate Professor of Logic and Ethics,
and Lecturer on Roman Law in the Johns Hopkins University.
He received the degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Laws
in the University of Cambridge (Eng.) in 1879, — taking first class
Honors in Law and History and having previously been a Founda-
tion Scholar of Trinity Hall. He was called to the English bar
in 1879 and was made an associate and afterwards a lecturer on
Roman law and in Jurisprudence at Owens College (Victoria
University), Manchester. He was subsequently made a Reader
and Lecturer in English Law to the Birmingham Law Society.
He received his Master's degree at Cambridge in 1882. He will
assume his position in Baltimore at the beginning of the next
academic year.
The Christmas Recess will begin at the close of Wednesday,
December 23, and the classes and lectures will be resumed on
Monday morning, January 4, 1886.
At a meeting of the Board of Trustees of the Johns Hopkins
University held Nov. 2, 1885, the following resolution was adopted :
" Resolved, that it is the sense of this Board that students can
only be admitted to the Hopkins Scholarships in the University
when actual residents of the States from which they arc appointed."
In consequence of some misunderstanding, special attention is
called to the following regulation passed June 2, 1885, by the
Board of University Studies :
Voted, That all students who are following undergraduate
courses of instruction will be required to attend such examina-
tions in these courses as may be appointed by the instructors.
Attest, M. Warren, Secretary.
December 5, 1885.
AUDITIONS TO THE REGISTER OF STUDENTS.
(8M pp 16, etc., XfK ■ ul,ir No. 44).
I'KI.r.oUS 11V Col'ltTKsV.
William M. Arnolt. New Brunswick, N. J. (A)
Stuttgart Oymouium, 1878; B. ».. New Brunswick Theulugical Seminar/, 1882. Greek.
C. W. Kmii. Miller. Baltimore. 306 8. Sharp St.
A. B., Johns Hopkins Cnlveralt] -, 1882, and Fellow, 1883-85. Greek.
Fellows (Recent Nominations).
William II. BtJBNHAM. Duiihartnn, N. II. 542 Druid Hill Av.
A. B., Harvard University, 1882. I'hilv*
Marion D. Learned. Dover, Dei 247 Linden Av.
A. B„ Dickinson College, 1880, and A. it.. I r., ,,.,,, ,,,,,,.
George T. W. Patrick. Lyons, Iowa. 62 Bolton St.
A. B., State University or Iowa, 1878; B. D., Yale College, 1885. ITMlMinjiilty.
I'xiveissity Scholars ( A ]i|k tinted Dee. 1G, 1885).
Richard E. Burton. Hurt ford, Conn. 86 W. Monument St.
A. B., Trinity College, 1883. English.
Melvin E. Cboweix. Geneaeo, N. Y. 265] W. Biddle St.
A. B., University of Rochester, 1879. PftUMOpAgt.
Charles G. Dunlap. ( liillii othe, O. 266 JV. Howard St.
A. B., Ohio Wesleyan University, 1883. En.jl, ,1,.
Edward S. Elliott. Savannah, Ga. 262 W. Hoffman St.
A. B. and A. M-, University of the South, 1884. Latin.
Milton Haioht. Pine Orchard, Ont. 52 McCvlloh St.
A. B., University of Toronto, 1884. MlsflumaUot.
C. Willard Hayes. Hanover, O. 2C6 JV. Howard St.
A. B., Oberiin College, 1883. Chemistry.
George B. Hussey. East Orange, N. J. 16 McCulloh St.
A. B., Columbia College, 1884. Greek.
Joseph H. Kastle. Lexington, Ky. 330 JV. Eutaw St.
S. B., Kentucky State College, 1884. Chemistry.
John E. Matzke. Eidott, 111. 134 JV. Eutaw St.
A. B., Hope College, 1882. Romance. Languages.
John R. Wightman. Toronto, Ont. 93 W. Preston St.
A. B., University of Toronto, 1871, and A. M., 1872. Romance Language*.
Graduate Students.
Lucius G. Carpenter. Agricultural Coll., Mich. 327 JV. Eutaw St.
B. S., Michigan Agricultural College, 1879, and M. S., 1883. Mathematics.
O. Edward Janney. Baltimore. 242 JV. Eutaw St.
M. D., University of Maryland, 1881, and Hahnemann Medical College, Philadelphia, 1882.
Chemistry.
Elias J. McEwan. Agricultural Coll., Mich. 201 W. Hoffman St.
A. B., Kalamazoo College, 1875, and A. M., 1877. English and Philosophy.
Yuzero Motor A. Sanda, Japan. 1 McCulloh St.
Doshisha Kioto, Japan, 1884. Philosuphy.
Jens A. Ness. Red Wing, Minn. 205 W. Biddle St.
A. B., Norwegian Luther College, 1884. Greek and Latin.
Thomas K. Worthington. Baltimore. (A)
A. B., Haverford College, 1883. History and Politics.
EDUCATIONAL BOOKS AND PAMPHLETS.
This University has provided a room for educational books and
pamphlets, where it is prepared to receive and arrange, for the inspection
and use of special students and others most interested, sucli literature of
the classes specified below (which is not always readily purchasable in the
market) as publishers and heads of public institutions may desire to commit
to the permanent keeping of this institution.
DESIDKRATA.
I. Current school reports, whether of town, county, city, or state.
II. 1 iterature pertaining to the care and education of the deaf, blind,
feeble minded, and other defectives.
III. Printed matter pertaining to public or private charity and alms-
giving- . . ...
IV. Reports and histories of reformatory institutions, especially those
for the detention of criminal classes of both sexes, old and young.
V. Reports of hospitals, asylums, sanitariums, public or private, where
nervous or mental diseases are treated.
VI. All text-books for schools or colleges, from kindergarten to univer-
sity, together with charts, illustrative apparatus, and school supplies of all
kinds, as well as general works on educational topics.
VII. Catalogues, reports, and histories of college! and professional
schools, including law, medicine, theology, and of technological institutions.
VIII. Current numbers and files of edu -ational journals and periodicals.
IX. Articles or addresses by individuals bearing upon the above subjects,
and proceedings of societies and associations.
G. STANLEY HALL,
B.u.timokk, Md., November, 1885. Professor of Psychology and Pedagogics.
All packages should be addressed to
The Johns Hopkins University (Education), Baltimore, Md.
34
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 45.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES
Including Communications to the University Societies, Correspondence, etc
Correction of Statements relating to Maryland in
the Memoirs of F. D. Maurice. With a letter from Col.
F. Maurice to Mr. J. R. Brackett.
[Communicated to the Historical and Political Science Association of the Johns Hop-
kina UniTersity, Norember 13, 1885].
In the very interesting memoirs of the late Frederick Denison Maurice,
by his son Colonel Frederick Maurice, there is a passage which refers to
the State of Maryland iu the following words:
"A short time before the breaking out of the Civil War in America, the
State of Maryland, fired by the passionate pro-slavery spirit which the
excitement connected with the approaching struggle engendered in some of
the Southern States, passed a law, the practical effects of which was to
enslave the whole free black population of the State. It happened that at
the moment a considerable portion of my father's property was invested in
the State funds. He was so horrified at the iniquity of the decree that he
immediately had the money sold out, thereby, as it turned out, on very un
business-like principles, saving the whole of it from absolute loss." (Vol.
ii., chapt. 11.)
These statements are based upon erroneous impressions, and are so
injurious to the good name of the State of Maryland as to require correction.
The attention of the historical students in this university was called to
the matter by Dr. C. J. Stille, lately Provost of the University of Pennsyl-
vania, in a letter addressed to President Gilman. At the request of Dr.
Adams, Mr. J. K. Brackett, a graduate student, who was engaged in the
preparation of a thesis upon Slavery as an Institution, looked up the facts
and communicated them to the author of the Biography. The substance
of the matter was afterwards communicated by Mr. Brackett to the Nation,
(X. Y., Sept. 3, 1885) in the following words:
"Two notable efforts were made in Maryland for legislation to restrict the
liberty of the free blacks. In 1842, a slaveholders' convention, held at
Annapolis, recommended new and more severe legislation ; but the bill
introduced in the Assembly called forth opposition from all parts of the
State, and was defeated. In 1860 the Committee on Colored Population in
the Assembly advised a new policy toward the free blacks. Of the many
suggestions of this Committee, one bill was passed, providing for compulsory
servitude of the free blacks of eleven counties, Baltimore City, which had
a quarter of the free black population of the State, not being included.
But the act was first to be accepted by a majority of voters in these counties
at the Presidential election of that year. The result was that in ten
counties it was rejected, in most of them by overwhelming majorities, while
in the eleventh county, though accepted, it was never enforced. A careful
study shows that these attempts at unwonted severity on the free blacks
were discouraged by the people of Maryland.
"As to the financial history of Maryland, that State never repudiated its
debt. About 1840, there was a large debt, owing to the system of internal
improvements, and for a time the interest was not paid; but reform
measures were taken, and by 1848 the State credit was well reestablished.
The crisis of the Civil War was also safely passed, the yearly reports of the
Comptroller assuring the credit and resources of the State."
Colonel Maurice was in the Soudan, with the forces of Lord Wolseley,
when Mr. Brackett's letter reached him. He did not have a copy of the
memoir with him, but, nevertheless, with great courtesy and frankness
made the following reply which reveals some of the characteristics of his
father's life, and at the same time shows how the erroneous statements
crept into a memoir which is remarkable for its conscientious accuracy.
LETC'ER OF COL. F. MAURICE.
"Abou Fatmkii, Hanxkct Cataract on Nile, Soudan, May 7th, 1885.
" My dear Sir: My address will, I hope, be my apology for the long delay
which has attended my answer to your letter of February 20th. I fear
your letter cannot have been at once forwarded to me as I have only
received it in the last week. You will un lcrstand also that here, away as
I am from all means of reference even to my own book, my answer to you
must be a much lamer one than I should have wished it to have been. I
fear that 1 must have done in this instance (what I very rarely did in
writing my book) simply took a story as I had it from my father himself
without verifying the details, which only indirectly concerned me as a
biographer.
" The circumstances under which my father spoke to me of the incident
were these. The money in question had belonged to my mother and, as it
was in part to come to me after his death, he was giving a kind of account
of his stewardship of it. The facts of which I am sure are these:
" 1. That, at the moment when my father decided to sell out, the credit of
Maryland not only stood especially high, but that there was every prospect
of the value of the property rising in the market.
" 2. That the thing which decided him to sell out was some act, either
passed by the Maryland Legislature, or receiving so much popular support
as to leave a very strong impression that it would pass ; which act appeared
to my father to be of such a character that as he expressly phrased it to me
'it would have had the effect of practically enslaving the whole of the free
black population of the State.'
"Of more than that I am not sure. I know that he spoke to me of what
no doubt is the transaction you refer to, viz : that the State had voted a
special sum of money, obtained by a special taxation, in order to defray the
money due to creditors. He spoke of it as an exceptionally honorable act
on the part of the State and I had every intention so to refer to it. You do
not quote my words about this part of the matter so that I do not know
how far I may have used expressions which implied more than this. I
may perhaps have spoken of Maryland as among the repudiating States.
No doubt the impression was, from what you tell me, a wrong one but I
only used it in order to enhance the credit of the subsequent act of honor-
able payment and my whole purpose was to convey the impression of the
exceptional position of credit in which the Maryland funds stood at the
moment when my father decided to sell out. 1 tried to ascertain the exact
date when he did sell out but, when I was at work on the subject, I failed
to doNthis, and, without that datum to go on, I found it almost impossible in
England to get at this precise act of the Legislature which had excited my
father's wrath. Whether that wrath was justified or not by the act in
question I have no means of judging. If I were in London I would try to
find somewhere if there be in London any complete file of the Maryland
Acts. Of course it is possible that you and my lather might have taken
different views of the character of the Act.
" I told the story because it was excessively characteristic of my father.
The regulation of his monetary affairs in this way, on what seemed to
him great principles of right and wrong. His passionate hatred of slavery
in all its forms. And again there was something very characteristic of
him in the satisfaction with which he recorded the worldly success of his
act. Maryland may have weathered the storm during the civil war, but
you must be aware that if any one could, from the skies, have given a hint
to any speculative or other holder of Maryland bonds that the civil war
was coming, the investor would have been very grateful for the hint, and
would have promptly sold out. Now my father looked upon any act of,
what seemed to him, iniquity, as perpetrated by a State, as a warning from
the Highest Heaven, that evil must follow in its train. His whole reading
of the old Jewish prophets turned on his belief that they were Statesmen of
the most practical character, precisely because they read aright these signs
of the coming time for good or evil. The interest of this story to me lay
in his application of just this sort of vaticination to a practical problem of
statesmanship. He may have exaggerated the character of t he Act that
was passed ; or may have supposed that it would certainly become law,
when in fact it was vetoed, either by the Governor of the State, or in some
other way; but of the character of the transaction on his part and of its
monetary success I am sure. I am very sorry that in describing it, I should
have said anything to wound the feelings of any who hold the honor of
Maryland dear, but I am afraid that, in writing it, it had never occurred to
me that the matter was now of much importance as regards the State of
Maryland ; and it was of very great interest as a piece of biography. The
real truth is that it was one of several subjects that I should have liked to
December, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
35
thresh out more thoroughly in detail ; bat I was, for nearly ten years, living
in an atmosphere of constant condemnation from all those whose opinion I
most rained became 0< the pains I insisted upon giving to the booh and the
delay which that necessarily occasioned, I believed myself to be speaking
of well-ascertained public farts. I did not see my way to getting at the
facts though 1 had made several efforts to do so and therefore I just told
the story as I had every reason to believe correctly, and can only say I am
very much obliged to you for thinking the matter of sufficient importance
to write to me about it. I fear that under my circumstances out here it will
be impossible for me to take any immediate steps in the matter. I will
gladly explain it on my return to England in a note to any future edition,
and I can only now say that this letter is entirely at your service for any
use you may like to make of it. In any case I should be obliged by your
showing it to Mr. Brooks and Mr. Oilman, to whom I am also writing.
" Yours very truly,
"F. Maurice."
To Mr. J. K. Brackett.
On Kriiger's Chronology of the so-called " Sum-
mary " of Thucydides. By C. D. Morris.
[Abstract of a paper read at a meeting of the University Philological Association, Nov-
ember 6, 1885].
There is not any substantial disagreement among the modern historians,
who have treated of the period covered by Thucyd., bk. i, cc. 89-117, as to the
dates or the order of the events recorded in those chapters. But K.W. Kriiger,
in his Historisch-philologische Studien, departed very considerably from the
chronological arrangement adopted by previous writers. He has not indeed
succeeded in securing the adhesion of such authors as Grote, E. Curtius, C.
Peter, M. Duncker, &C ; and it would seem therefore at first sight that his
innovations might be neglected at this late day. But Classen, in his edition
of Thucydides, professes to have been convinced by Kriiger's arguments, and
has therefore placed the dates at the top of his pages in accordance with
Kriiger's scheme. As Classen's book has deservedly a wide circulation and
great authority, it seemed worth while to examine the grounds on which
divergencies so considerable from the current system were maintained. It
was the object of this paper to state the results of such an examination.
At first the basis on which the accepted chronology rests was set forth ;
and it was shown that for the dates of the cardinal points in the 6eries of
events the evidence was unusually exact and authoritative. The several
arguments adduced by Kriiger in opposition to this system were then stated
one by one ; and, when they were thus singly exposed to the light, their
extreme tenuity became apparent. It was pointed out also that they are
very far from affording each other mutual support ; and that occasionally it
is promised that one tottering argument shall by and by receive the support
it so much needs from another which is to be established hereafter ; and
that when the turn of the latter comes and an independent basis ought to
be provided for it, it is itself left as poorly off as its predecessor, and gains
a colorable consistency only on the assumption that the other has already
been established on sufficient evidence. After all else has been done, it
remains indispensable to alter the text of our authorities; and accordingly,
Kriiger changes the numerical symbol for 40 into that for 48, on no other
ground than that the change is necessary to bring the figures into harmony
with the dates he has selected as the true ones. In another place, also, he
alters tenth into fourth solely because the former number, if allowed to stand,
will prove that one of his assumptions is incorrect.
Kriiger's motive in introducing these arbitrary changes into the chron-
ology appears to have been the laudable one of bringing the story of I'au-
sanias into the necessary contact with that of Themistocles, since Thucydides
represents the fate of the latter to have been a result of the fall of Patisanias.
It was shown in conclusion that this result can be gained without difficulty
and without any tampering with the statements of our authorities, if only we
do not, to meet our own views of likelihood, arbitrarily curtail the duration
of the several stages in the downward career of Pausanias, or represent the
flight of Themistocles to Asia as following instantly on the death of Pau-
sanias ; and it was pointed out that there is not a syllable in the narrative
of Thucydides which forbids us to give so much extension to the story at the
several points indicated as will suffice to leave these events in complete
accord with the chronology generally accepted.
The Reduction of £< to I in Homer. By H. W. Smyth.
[Abstract of a paper read at a meeting of the University Philological Association, Nov-
ember 6, 1885].
Epigraphic testimony proves that the monophthongization of the genuine
and spurious diphthong became general in <i recce, with the exception of
Bosotia and Attica, in the third century B. C. ; in Bceoti* on the introduc-
tion of the Ionic alphabet and in Attica not before the second century B. C,
though a few isolated cases date from an earlier |>eriod. ci was the original
representative of Z, but after 50 A. D. it was used sporadically and after 1.50
A. D. with increasing frequency for I. A sketch of the history of itaekm
shows, that in the first centuries after Christ (from which period dates our
text of Homer) the distinction between ei and Z had become a crux ortho-
graphical, and that at the time of Aristarchus the question was fraught with
great difficulty. Up to the present time the hypothesis has prevailed that
even in Homer this monophthongization is attested by examples, which
have been collected chiefly by G. Meyer. The object of this paper was to
submit to a detailed examination all possible instances of this reduction;
and the result of a thorough examination of the whole subject justifies the
assertion, that with some few limitations, the entire theory of Meyer, Cur-
tius and others, so far as it relates to Homer, rests upon an unstable founda-
tion. Meyer's method does violence to the chronology of the forms under
discussion, inasmuch as he assumes that in a given form a Homeric Z is
younger than an itacistic u. His citation of epigraphic forms is therefore
indefensible. A statistic account of the MSS. of Homer with reference to
their tendency to itacism makes the fact evident, that our authority for the
genuineness of Homeric forms dates from a period posterior to Aristarchus,
who may himself not have preserved pre-Euclidean forms. Osthoff's theory
of I. E. vocalization, whereby e. g. Greek i's were developed in the proeth-
nic state of the I. E. language from ei, oi, at, ie, io, ia before consonants in a
syllable not bearing the chief accent, allows to Greek no individual activity.
Instances of Z in Homer having ei as a parallel in later literary and epi-
graphic monuments, are classed by him under the above law. No importance
is thus paid to the possibility of itacistic influence.
This hypothesis is the less worthy of acceptation since he assumes that no
proethnic root with a long vowel can have arisen from the reduction of a
dissyllabic root. Constant reference to good MS. authority and the aid of
a new explanation of many forms prove that special Greek laws are suffi-
cient to account for the majority of cases.
A complete list of the material found in the literature of the fifth century
and in inscriptions shows that in the -ei, -i adverbs from vowel stems -ei was
the recognized ending ; a fortiori is it therefore necessary to read /leraoroixei,
etc., in Homer, the MSS. often having -ei. In the case of -ri it is probable
that the reduction has taken place, a transferring of the short vowel from
the consonant-stems not being probable. Hartel's assumption that the
dative-locative Z of 16 forms (all under the ictus) was derived from M is
incorrect. A discussion of other possible explanations makes it probable
that to the influence of the ictus the length of the vowel is to be ascribed.
The analogy of Vedie vaktari and a very few similar forms is insufficient to
account for i in Greek. In about a dozen cases of -ii (circa CO in -lr/) the
reduction from W?/»is possible.
An examination of all the substantival and verbal formations claimed as
examples of the monophthongization follows. With the exception of Z'ii'u
(Hesiod ehhc), which has a proethnic Z, and perhaps of k^ltvc, each case is
shown to admit of an explanation destructive to the validity of the theory
of Meyer. So e. g.
kiuv, littvov, 'O.adov, 'Mc, Ueloc, iroTunjc, atnuc, >)uiv, 'itct), vt/ltri/c, bpitoc, ou&t
aifiu, riu rivUj (jidiu <pdivo, xpi", '"", "(Vfu nivouat, iriofttu.
Xifaa should be xelXta in Ionic from the analogy of parallel dialectical
forms. The variable orthography on old inscriptions may account for the
seeming ancient itacism. The Z of ploya is obscure, if the grammarians are
correct in their assumption of vowel-length.
36
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 45.
Motor Sensations of the Skin. By G. Stanley Hall
and H. H. Donaldson.
[Abstracted from Mind, London, No. XL].
Our first problem in undertaking the following lines of research, which
have now been carried on almost continuously for eighteen months, and
which so far as we know are mainly new, was to devise a suitable apparatus.
This consisted of wheel work running an endless band. To the band was
fastened a car which carried the writing point. This point could be made
to travel in a given direction with known rate, pressure, etc., the movement
being perfectly uniform. Under conditions thus known it was allowed to
travel over the skin on various parts of the body, and the resulting sensa-
tion noted. Variations could be made in the direction in which the point
travelled, in the rate, the size of the point, the weight with which it pressed
on the skin, and in the part of the body used. All the general rules
guiding such investigations were observed.
I. Error in Judgment of Direction of Motion on the Skin. In making these
observations the part of the body on which the experiments were to be
made — namely, the back, more commonly the leg, or much the most
frequently the fore-arm — was placed on the support in a fixed position
under the car, the eyes of the percipient being closed. The operator set the
apparatus in motion and also a metronome, and, after the advertisement
"ready," dropped the weight gently and noiselessly into the cup, which
thereby pressed the button upon the arm. As soon as the percipient had
determined whether the motion was up or down the limb, or (more generi-
cally) to or from the head, he said plus for up and minus for down. The
time and judgment were recorded by the operator, and subsequent trials in
the same way and over the same dermal tract, sometimes to the number of
twenty or thirty in a sitting, were made till signs of fatigue began to
appear. The following table gives the gross results of many observations.
TABLE I.
Persons.
No. of Ob-
servations.
No. of
Errors.
Errors,
in per ct.
+ J-
-J +
Ratio of last
two columns.
H. H. D
W. N
J. V. D
G. S. H
2057
1000
774
515
264
144
434
166
6
68
11
6
21
16
0-7
13
4
6
73
78
0
29
0
2
361
88
6
34
11
4
1 :4-6
1:1-1
1:1-4
1:2
C. D
H. T
Total-
4754
691
14+
182
504 .
1 : 2-7+
The headings of the fifth and sixth columns mean respectively number of
times when motion up the limb was judged to be motion down it, and vice
versd. In this table no account of rates of motion, of weights or of the
surfaces of skin tested is taken. For each of these conditions, so far as they
were explored in our research, as well as for all in the aggregate, the
following law appears. We are more likely, when in doubt, to judge
motion on the surface of the limbs to be up rather than down their axis.
The question next taken up was :
II. Time-relations of Judgments of Motion on the Skin. The following table
is based on the same observations as table I., the only difference being that
a number of series available for direction and not for time are excluded,
and a few new ones added.
TABLE II.
V
<—
•
1
1
d
"3 ■/.
If
■
1
1
if
'- 5
fi
»o
•<«
II. H. D
1956
7-8
W. X
988
744
4-09
2-6
J.V. D
G. S. II
416
3-8
C. D
263
144
1-80
4-42
H. T
oi
55
© O
I
'• M
<•=.
. 3
> ~ 9
5 <$.B
6-1
44
24
3-9
1-54
4-36
9-4
3-9
2-7
3-7
2-1
4-44
O
•o%
*t
B
V
it
h
8+1
KS.
&ȣ
&tt»
r. - f.
rt Uj -ri
E = S
2 = S
CRfl
E; =
V &G3
► s i
> ~ -
!-■= "
F'5 ~
<82
<, £ 5
■<•=.+
<A\
7-0
10-3
11-0
6-6
3-3
7-5
7-4
7-9
2-5
5
5
0
3-4
6-8
7-5
5-8
1-72
4
4
0
4-37
5-5
6
4-5
* All the above times are in seconds.
a wrong judgment is much greater than — sometimes more than twice as
great as — the time needed for a correct judgment ; (3) that of the two errors
it takes longer to judge minus to be j)lus movement than the reverse.
III. Effect of varying the Rate of Movement or the Distance which must be
traversed before the Judgment is made. We now began to fix our variables.
The following table is accordingly made on one person H. II. D., with a
constant weight of 15 grammes, with a circular metallic point 2 millimetres
in diameter, and on a definite part of the volar surface of the right arm so
arranged that the point traverses the same tract in moving up or down and
in successive sittings.
TABLE III.
»3
ic
$
Is
■a
13
*&9
§1
• £§■§
o,JS
«■-?$
O | J
oj-^3
JL-o 1
183
B zr
s 3
Ho
Distanc
ems. be
was ma
£ s a
ae§)
- ~"3
feg&
Distanc
before s
ment w
made.
ill
mil
Distanc
before a
ment w
made.
•012
37
•5172
20
•381
4
•733
•034
55
•7888
18
•690
7
•707
•035
65
•5635
19
•427
13
•731
•044
34
•8492
12
•871
10
•836
•046
88
•6624
29
•587
27
■903
•050
11
■6050
4
•675
3
•650
•078
95
•7254
24
•577
30
■657
•086
87
•5782
33
•559
29
•498
•178
40
•5696
14
•569
13
•480
•200
271
8
•640
9
•300
•200
50
19
•680
11
•920
•200
50
23
•560
10
•580
•200
46
•7600
22
•660
8
1-060
•200
18
5
•880
5
1-080
•200
26
13
•820
11
1-340
•200
26
12
•500
6
•800
•200
26
11
•400
11
■500
•850
43
•4760
14
•425
14
•586
1-500
30
•5100
10
•570
6
■885
From this table it appears (1) that a judgment of motion down the limb
takes more time than that of an upward movement ; (2) that the time for
The most obvious result from this table is that while the discriminative
sensibility for compass-points on this part of the arm, measured longitudi-
nally, could rarely be brought below 25 mms., even in single observations,
motion is recognized and its direction discriminated at an average distance
of between 6 and 7 mms. The next result is that, while the rate of motion
increases more than one-hundred-and-twenty-fold and the time of judgment
varies in proportion, the distance traversed at these great differences of rate
remains relatively uniform. We may therefore assert the existence of
smaller motor "sensory circles" (under the conditions of this table) inside
Weber's discriminative circles, with a longitudinal diameter about only Jth
as great, and with a transverse diameter yet to be reported on.
IV. Reproductions of the rate at which the point was moving over the
skin and also of the distance which it moved were made with the other
hand on a suitable apparatus. The results were: (1) that plus movements
seem, as judged from the record, larger than equal minus movements; (2)
that short distances are relatively longer in reproduction than long
distances.
V. The motor sensibility of different parts of the body was tested with
the general result of finding it dull or acute where such a state was to be
expected.
The temperature sense was excluded in later experiments by the use of
cork points, as it was found that with metal points it materially aided in
the judgment of direction. The hairs on the skin were also attended to
with great care, but so far as observations went they were apparently of
little importance in influencing the judgments in this investigation.
Incidentally, the great complexity and diversity of dermal sensations has
been often and in many ways apparent. If a point be allowed to move over
ten or twelve inches of dermal surface and if the weight is light, it is found
that at certain spots the impression of contact is lost, and again the rate
seems to change as if there were acceleration-points. If instead of weights
we substitute a metallic point of a square millimetre in area, joined to the
secondary coil of a sledge inductorium, holding the other electrode in the
form of a wet sponge in the hand, the experiences of its journey down the
arm are manifold and vivid. For a time tickling is quite unpleasantly
dominant, at other places the point seems to scratch, at others the thrilling
quivering sensation familiar in electric stimulation seems dominant, while
at others sharp sudden cutting pains and at still others no sensation save
that of a moving point are felt. The nature of these sensations varies
December, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
37
greatly with the strength of the stimulus, and very soon the arm in the
vicinity of such application is so fatigued as to be quite worthless for
experimentation for a long time. It is moreover extremely hard to sharply
differentiate and identify sensations that seem to be so impacted and run
together, and which language has never before been called upon to disentangle.
In conclusion, it would seem that "local signs" are quite heterogeneous,
and that, in the strong tendency we have to move the touching dermal
surface over objects in contact with it, we are seeking not merely to
multiply but to diversify our sensuous data for judging the nature of the
impressions and to fill up the dermal " blind spots " between which impres-
sions are sifted in to us. The astonishing development which dermatology
seems now undergoing is no less striking from the psychological than from
a pathological or anatomical standpoint. The effect of disturbed dermal
functions in affecting psycho-sensory sanity ; the fact of the genetic origin
of senses and central nervous system from the external embryological layer;
the function of specialised dermal sensations in presiding over the exercise
of the sexual activities; and the relation of what the old psychology roughly
called Touch in giving us the primary qualities of matter — all indicate the
skin as not only the primeval and most reliable source of our knowledge of
the external world, or the archaeological field of psychology, but as a just
opening experimental domain of great breadth, where work seems now
possible that may compare in both quality and quantity with that accom-
plished in physiological optics, and which may shed new light on some of
the most fundamental problems of psychical action and unfolding.
On the Temperature Sense. By Henry Herbert Don-
aldson.
[Abstracted from Mind, London, No. xxxix, with additions by the author].
An account of this investigation has already been given in a preliminary
notice in the Circular, No. 39, May, 1885.
The substance of the account was as follows. It was found that the
sensations of heat and cold were excited at definite spots on the surface
of the body. That a spot to which the adequate stimulus was applied
reacted by causing the sensation of either heat or cold alone, and that
it was not possible to get both sensations from the same spot. These
spots were mapped for several portions of the body, and their general dis-
tribution, extent, and the relative intensity of their reaction, &c, determined.
They were tested by electrical stimulation, by applying hot and cold points
to the skin and also by radiant heat from a platinum point. A cursory
histological examination of bits of skin failed to show any characteristic
nervous mechanism at these sensitive spots. The bearing of the results was
indicated as twofold, namely, as bringing one group of skin sensations under
the law of the specific energy of nerves and as indicating a factor which
must be more carefully taken into account in experimenting on the skin.
The article in Mind was not published until after an important paper by
Goldscheider (Monatshefte f. prakt. Dermatol., Bd. ur, Nos. 7, 9, 10, 1884 ; Bd.
IV, No. 1, 1885) had been received. This led me to repeat some of the experi-
ments of that author. Besides the results already recorded by others, he
calls attention to the often observed fact that the tactile and thermal sensi-
bilities in different parts of the body do not vary uniformly, and he points
out that the discriminative sensibility when measured on two thermal spots
is, as a rule, much finer than when measured in the ordinary way, and that
this discrimination is finer the more intense the stimulus. In certain parts,
as, for instance, those in which it is finest, discrimination for tactile-sensa-
tions surpasses that for temperature-sensations.
These sensations of temperature can be roused by mechanical and elec-
trical stimulation as well as thermal. In both cases the cold-spots are more
easily discriminated than the heat-spots.
By sending a strong electrical current through the arm and parts of the
hand and thus stimulating certain nerve-trunks, Goldscheider is able to get
peripheral sensations of temperature ; here, too, the sensations of cold tend
to predominate. He finds these spots insensitive to pain or contact. A
needle may be plunged into them, or excessive temperatures applied with-
out causing any feelings of discomfort.
Finally he reaches the conclusion that the temperature nerves often radiate
from centres and these centres often coincide with the hair follicles. Regard-
ing the reactions of the temperature spots I was able to confirm the observa-
tions made by Goldscheider as above given, except that I could not feel cer-
tain that pressure sensations were entirely wanting at the temperature spots.
One independent contribution was also made to the subject.
Dr. M. Warfield called my attention to the fait that in a certain operation
on the eye by Dr. Russell Murdoch, cocaine having been used, the patient
recognized the presence of the knife on the eye by a sensation of cold. By
the courtesy of Dr. Murdoch, I was enabled to examine the eyes of several
patients. When the eye in these cases was completely insensible to pain,
and felt no contact whatever, cold and warm bodies were readily distin-
guished. This observation I have been able to repeat on my own eye. By
means of 5 per ct. solution of muriate of cocaine the eye was rendered com-
pletely insensitive to pain or contact, but still readily felt heat and cold.
Dr. J. N. Mackenzie examined the throats of several patients after apply-
ing cocaine and found results analogous to those obtained in the eye.
In these cases we have the temperature-sensations completely isolated
from the other dermal sensations in a way which is now capable of easy
repetition, and important as furnishing another argument for the inde-
pendence of the thermal apparatus.
In this connection it may be mentioned that, contrary to the explicit
statement of Weber, I find the oesophagus, through its entire length, sensi-
tive to temperature, both in myself and in a number of others. Some indi-
viduals do not distinguish clearly the temperature of a body in the oesophagus,
but I have not found them as numerous as those that do. The tests were
made with cold and hot water, at a temperature of 4° C. and about 50° C.
From all this, it follows that the end-organs for the sensation of heat and
cold will have to be made out not only in the skin proper but also in the
conjunctiva and lining membrane of the oesophagus as well.
On the R. G. F. for the Quintic.
[Extract from a letter by Mb. J. Hammond to Dr. Craig],
Buckhurst Hill, Essex, October 3, 1885.
I send you herewith the MS. of a paper "On the Cubi-quadric System,"
which is intended to illustrate a remark, in my paper on Perpetuants, &c,
to the effect that my methods would apply with equal facility either to a
single binary quantic or to systems of binary quantics.
While working at the Cubi-quadric, the thought flashed upon me — "What
if the negative terms of the R. G. F. for the Quintic could be built up with
c and « only." On a trial, which occupied perhaps five minutes, I found
that the following form of R. G. F. could be obtained :
(1 + d -f h + j + m + hj)(l — en)
+ (e + k + o + dj + s + j« +jlc + t +jm +jo + v +js +jt + w)(l — e)
+ (f+i + l+n + p + r)(l-u)
R. G. F. for the
Sextic.
1 — CDW
+ E(l — CD W)
+ F{1 — DW)
+ 0(1 - W)
+ H(l-C)
■+M1 — DW)
+ K(l — CW)
+m-w)
+ M{\ — DW)
+ N(1-D)
+ 0(1— W)
+ K\\ — CDW)
+ Q(1-D>
+ W-W)
+ S(l-D)
+ T(\ — W)
+ EK{\ — C)
+ c«(l — CD)
+ EM(l — D)
+ EN(1 — D)
+ V(\-D)
+ E\l — C)
+ X(1-D)
+ ESa — D)
+ EV(\ — D)
+ E'M(l — D)
+ Y(l-D)
+ EXII — D)
+ Z(\-D)
(1
-a)(l-A)(l-c)(l-<,)(l-9)(l-u)
This differs from the R. G. F. in Prof. Cay-ley's tenth
memoir on Quantics, only in the 26 negative terms of
the numerator which have much simpler expressions
than his. It is also to be observed that those negative
terms of the numerator, 12 in number (viz. dcu, hen,
jcu, men, hjcu, djc, j*c, jkc, jmc, joe, jse, and jtc), which
are not binary combinations of the letters, exactly corres-
pond to the 12 reducible syzygies included in Prof.
Cayley's list, but excluded from my Syzygy Tables.
As I did not know this form of R. G. F. when I gave
names to the 167 irreducible syzygies, some few of the
names in my tables will be inappropriate to it.
I also found, but with much more trouble, the R.
G. F. for the Sextic, given on the other side. Obtain-
ing that for the Quintic must be considered either as
an inspiration or a peculiarly happy guess, I have
tried others but have been unable to obtain in any
other case anything as simple, except the R. G. F. of
the Cubi-quadric. The form (IV) of numerator of the
R. G. F. of the Cubi-quadric in my paper seems to
indicate the proper form of R. G. F. for single binary
quantics higher than the Sextic. . . .
J. Hammond.
P. S. — I now intend to resume work on the Quintic.
(l-A)(l-BKl-C){l-D)(l-I)(l-P)(l-W)
38
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 45.
On forms reducible to the forms («, o, c), (a, Jo, c), and
(a, 6, a). By J. C. Fields.
[Abstract of a paper read before tbe University Mathematical Society, Wednesday,
October 21st].
I. Suppose (a, 6, c) to be a form reducible to the first of above forms,
and ' the determinant of substitution which reduces it to such form.
I v P I
The conditions to which (a, 6, c) is subject are then :
1. a?.fi + b(>.p + /tv) -\- cvp s= 0,
2. Xp — pv = 1, . • . a, p prime to p, v.
We may write (1) in forms
p(aX + 6v) -1- p(b'A + cv) = 0,
A(a^ + 6p) + v(6p + cp) = 0,
from which : —
ak -\- bv = apt b%-\- cv = — ap,
ap + bp = yv, 6/* + c/) = — yK
where a, y are integers.
Solving from any three of these last four equations for a : p : v : p, we get,
a p v — p
a(A + ay) ~ 6(A + ay) ~ ¥ ~ a(A + ay) '
where Az= ac — b* .• . A -\- ay = 0.
And with this last condition we may show that only two of conditions (3)
are independent, say : —
dX + bv = ap, Va -\- cv — — afi.
Our complete conditions are :
v dA -|- bv = ap, M. + cv = — a/i,
Ap — pv = 1, A + ay = 0.
3.
Eliminating p and p from these equations we get,
(aX + bv)* + Av* = aa, A + ay — 0,
oa -)- iv©a, 6X -\- cvQa.
The last of these conditions can be shown to follow from the first and third ;
omitting, therefore, this last condition, substituting ap for aA -)- bv in first
of conditions and dividing through by a, our final conditions are :
I. ap* — yv* = a, II. aA -|- bvQa, m. A + ay = 0.
Being, therefore, given any form (a, 6, c), to find whether it is reducible
to form (a, o, c), we divide A into its different pairs of factors (a, ■ — y), solve
I integrally for (v, p) and find whether value of A derived therefrom satisfies
II. If we can find such values for v, p, then (a, 6, c) can be reduced to a
form (a', o, c').
II. The conditions that (a, 6, c) be reducible to a form (a', 6', a') are :
aA* ~\- 26Av + cv" = nps + 26/ip -J- cpa, Ap — /<v = 1,
In these conditions, putting
A — p. — a', A + fi — p', v — p=v', v + p = p',
our conditions become
aX'p' + 6(A'p' + p'v') + cv'p' — 0, A'p' — /t'v' = 2,
which are similar to those in case I, and can be reduced by the same process
to the conditions ap'* — yv'* = 2a, aV -\- bv'Qa, with the additional precau-
tion a> — p'©2, v' — p'©2.
III. The conditions that (a, 6, c) be reducible to a form (a', \a',c) are:
a/.* + 2oAv + cv* = 2aAp -f 26(Ap + pv) + 2evp, Ap — pv = 1,
which, on making the substitutions,
A = — a', A — 2p = p', v = — v', v — 2p = p',
reduce to :
aA'p' + 6(AV + p-'v') + cv'p' — 0, A'p' — p'v' = 2,
which are the same conditions as in case II, and give precisely the same
final conditions.
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Scientific Association.
jfovcmber 4.— Sixty-sixth regular meeting. Professor Martin in the chair. Fifty-eight
members present.
Tbe following officers were elected: President, Professor Remsen; Vice-President, Pro-
fessor Rowland j Secretary, Dr. Howell.
Papers read :
Motor Sensations of the Skin, by H. H. Donaldson. (See p. 36).
Concerning the Space Relations of Atoms in Molecules, by L Rkmsen.
Recent Composite Portraiture, by J. Jastrow.
The applications of Composite Photography fall under two heads. (1) Given a series
of representations of the same object to find a single representation which shall
combine the advantages and neglect the individual disadvantages of each of the
scenes. (2) To elicit a type: t. e. a pictorial average. A good example of (1) is the
recently issued volume of Mr. Walter Rogers Furness, in which he combines the
most reliable portraits of Shake-peare and presents us with a newer and probably
a truer portrait than any of the originals. Mr. Taylor, a Philadelphia photographer,
has applied the same method for obtaining an authentic Washington (Journal of the
JVanJt/in Institute* October, 1885). He has also obtained a composite portrait or the
officers of the American Association (Science, August 28, 1885) which conies under
the second head. There was exhibited a composite of ten criminals ; a compositeof
ten New England Female College graduates, and Mr. Galton's recent Jewish types
(Anthropological Institute (London), August, 1885, and Science, October 9). Atten-
tion was also directed to Mr. Galton's composites in the Journal of the Institute of
Great Britain, 1879, and in Guys Hospital Reports, 1879. The apparatus for com-
bining photographs optically described in Science, August 28, whs shown.
Preservation of Marine Animals, by W. K. Brooks.
December 2.— Sixty-seventh regular meeting. Professor Remsen in the chair. Forty-
eight members present.
Papers read :
Demonstration of some Recent Psycho-physical Apparatus, by G. S. Hall.
A new Method of Demonstrating Geometrical Theorems, by W. E. Story.
On tbe Liquefaction of Gases, by H. Crew.
Philological Association.
November 6.— Sixty-fourth meeting. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair. Forty-two
members present.
Papers read :
On KrQger's Chronology of the Pentecontae"tia of Thucydides, by C. D. Morris. (Ab-
stract on p. 35L
On the Reduction of et to i in Homer, by H.W. Smyth. (Abstract on p. 35).
December 4.— Sixty-fifth meeting. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair. Fifty-one mem-
bers present.
Papers read :
French Speech -mixture in Canada, External Influences, by A. M. Elliott.
Votes on lsaeus. by E. H. Spikkkr
On Silent / in Modern English, by J. W. Briuht.
Historical and Political Science Association.
October Meetings. — Dr. H. B. Adams in the chair.
Papers read :
The Study of Historv at Harvard College, 1636-1849, by H. B. Adams.
Socialism and the Labor Question, by E. W. Bemis.
November Meetings.— Vt. H. B. Adams In the chair.
The Civil Service of Baltimore, by D. R. Dewky.
Correction of Statement-* relating to Maryland in the Memoirs of F. D. Maurice, by
J. R. Brackett. (Seep. 84).
The Founder of McDouogh Institute, by William Allan.
History of the MS. Records of the Virginia Company, by J. F. Jameson.
Mathematical Society.
October 21.— Professor Newcomb in the chair. Ten members present.
Papers read :
On the Sum of the Squares of the Binomial Coefficients, by F. Franklin.
On Forms Reducible to (a, o, c), (a, %at c)> an(* («> b, a), by J. C. Fields. (Abstract on
p. 38).
November 18. — Professor Newcomb in the chair. Seven members present.
Paper read :
On the Parametric Representation of any Point on a Conic through Five given Points,
by W. E. Story.
Baltimore Naturalists' Field Club.
October 15.— Twenty-three members present. The following officers were elected :
Dr. G. H. Williams, President ; F. H. Herrick, Secretary ; G. L. Smith. Chairman of
the Botanical Section ; Dr. J. P. McMurrich, Chairman of Zoological Section; W.
S. Bayley, Chairman of the Geological Section.
A resolution was adopted to petition the Board of Park Commissioners for permission
to label the trees in Druid Hill and Patterson Parks with both scientific and com-
mon names.
Mr. Basil Sollers mentioned a rare form of Oxalis "Violacea which he found in
bloom August 25, and again in great abundance September 20, near Ellicott Mills. Mr.
Sollers stated that he had spent considerable time during the summer in identifying
the plants in the vicinity of Baltimore, near Monrovia, Frederick Co., on Kent
Island, and at Glyndon. He had identified 440 species and prepared specimens of
many of these for the herbarium of the Field Club.
November 25.
It was decided to continue the monthly meetings of the Club during the winter, when
popular talks on subjects of general scientific interest will be given by different
members.
Dr. McMukrich made some remarks upon the advisability of a thorough study of
the Invertebrate fauna of the vicinity of Baltimore, and reported the results of
some surface collecting on the Patapsco near Curtis' Creek. The forms obtained
were a Ctenophore (Mnemiopsis), a Discomedusa, probably Aurelia aurita, large
quantities of the Cladocerau Evadne, and a Calanid Copepod which exhibited very
markedly coloration produced by sexual selection.
Mr. F. II. Herrick gave tiie results of some observations made (November 14-21) on
the Vitality of Plants as exhibited by their persistence in producing flowers. Within
the time mentioned 40 species of plauts were found in flower. Of these, 18 belong
to the order Compositae, and 20 or one-half are weeds introduced from Europe. The
latter are the freshest at this period of the year and produce flowers and fruit in
greatest abundance. Of the non-introduced plants, single specimens were commonly
found, and those small or withering. Leaving the latter out of consideration, the
late flowering of the introduced plants is readily explained. Many of them are
perennial in tbe milder climate ot Europe; and consequently when brought to this
country strive to produce flowers and fruit the year round. Stellaria media, the
common Chick weed, is a type of this class, and is virtually in flower the whole year.
Tbe buds and flowers expand as soon as the ice melts from around them in spring.
This plant was dug from beneath two feet of snow in midwinter in Vermont, and
after being placed in water a few hours, its flowers were fully expanded. This ex-
filains its phenomenally early appearance in spring. The Dispersion of Seeds was
llustrated by the pods of Cassia nictitans and the "button balls" of Platan us occi-
dentals. The latter tree produces on the average 1000 seeds to each ball, and there-
fore in some cases many millions of seeds, yet it is far from common in this and
other localities. The oak which produces relatively so much less seed is the pre-
vailing tree in this region. The Sycamore belongs to an ancient type, being found
among the fossils of the Laramie group. The conditions for its abundant growth
are apparently less favorable than formerly.
Dr. B. W. Barton spoke of the bursting of the pods of the Wistaria, comparing the
sound produced to a pistol report.
December, 1885.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
39
PHOTOGRAPH OF THE NORMAL SOLAR SPECTRUM
HADE BY
PROFESSOR H. A.. ROWLA.ND.
This photographic map of the Solar Spectrum is now complete from wave Length :!(I80. to 5790. and the portion above 3680.
to the extremity of the ultra violet, wave length about 3100., is nearly ready. Negatives have also been prepared down to
and including JJ and it is possible they may be prepared for publication.
These photographs have been made with one of Professor Rowland's concave gratings of 21} ft. radius of curvature and
6 in. diameter, mounted BO as to preserve the focus constant and give a normal spectrum of the same scale for any given spectrum.
A scale of wave lengths has been added so that the whole makes a map of the spectrum, down to wave length 5700., more
exact and giving greater detail than any other map now in existence. The error in the wave length at no part exceeds
EUffijff of the whole, and is generally caused by a slight displacement of the scale which is easily corrected. The uave lengths
of more than 200 lines in the spectrum have been accurately determined to about 55555^ part and these can serve as standards
to correct any small error of the scale. It is to be noted that the photograph of the spectrum can have none of the local
irregularities of wave length which occur in all engraved maps and which amount to more than 3^955 part in all BO far
published. This often so distorts a group of lines as, in conjunction with the imperfect intensities, to render them almost
unrecognizable.
The definition of the spectrum is more than equal in every part, down at least to wave length 5325., to any map so far
published. The 1474 line is widely double as also b3 and bt while E is given so nearly double as to be recognized as such by
all persons familiar with spectrum observation. Above the green the superiority increases very quickly so that at H we have
120 lines between H and K while the original negatives show 150 lines. The photographs show more at this point than the
excellent map of Lockyer of this region. Above H to wave length 3200. the number of lines in excess of all published maps
is so great as to make all comparison useless. However, above H the determination of the wave length is more uncertain
than in the visible parts and must remain so until a special investigation can be made.
The plates all contain two strips of the spectrum except No. 2 which contains three. They are three feet long and one
foot wide.
Plate No. 1. Wave length 3710. to 4135.
2. " " 3100. to 3730.
3. " " 3680. to 4135.
4. " " 4075. to 4530.
5. " " 4480. to 4935.
6. " " 4875. to 5325.
7. " " 5210. to 5790.
Scale 4 times Angstrom.
it 9 it it
it o tt It
li O it it
a q tt a
tt o tt it
These can now all be furnished to order except No. 2, the negative of which is being made.
The prints are made on heavy albumen paper carefully washed to prevent fading. The price has been put as low as possible.
Price List.
The plates will be delivered in Baltimore or New York (or will be sent by express or mail, securely packed, at the charge
and risk of the purchaser), at the following net prices : —
The set of seven plates, unmounted, $10 ; mounted on cloth, $14. — Single plates, $2 each ; mounted on cloth, $2.50.
No plate will be given away or sent in exchange.
Remittances may be made by draft, or money order; international money orders should be made payable to Nicholas Murray.
All subscriptions and orders should be sent and remittances made to the
Publication Agency of the Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
Orders may be transmitted through Messrs. Triibner & Co., 57 Ludgate Hill, London; Mayer & Miiller, 38 Franzosische
Strasse, Berlin ; and A. Hermann, 8 rue de la Sorbonne, Paris.
CO NTENTS.
Hopkins Hall lectures:— 29-32
The New Testament : Textual Studies, etc. By I. H. Hall, 29
The Syrian Antilegomena. By I. II. Hall, - - - - 31
Physical Training. By E. M. Hahtwell, - 31
Inorganic Geology. By G. H. Williams, - 32
Assyrian Archaeology. By A. L. Frothingham, Jr., - - 32
Micro-organisms in Disease. By W. H. Welch, ... 32
Announcements, etc. :— - ....... 33
Commemoration Day, -------. 33
Recent Appointments, ----.... 33
Christmas Recess, --------- 33
Additions to the Register of Students, ----- 33
Other Announcements, -------- 33
PAGE
Scientific Notes:— 34-38
Correction of Statements in the Memoirs of F. D. Maurice, with
a Letter from F. Maurice to J. R. Buackett, - - - 34
On Kriiger's Chronology of the so-called "Summary" ofThucy-
dides. By C. D. Morris, 35
The Reduction of ei to I in Homer. By H. YV. Smyth, - - 00
Motor Sensations of the Skin. By G. Stanley Hall and
II. II. Donaldson, .------. 36
On the Temperature Sense. By II. H. Donaldson, - - 37
On the It. G. F. for the Quintic. By J. Hammond, - - 37
On Forms Reducible to the Forms (a, 0, c), etc. By J. C. Fields, 38
Proceedings of University Societies, 38
Rowland's Photograph of Normal Solar Spectrum:
Announcement of Publication, 39
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., 18 B Wett Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. -''■- " '
Baltimore Street, Baltimore. Subscription, $1.00 a year.
40
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
fNo. 46.
Johns Hopkins University Studies in Historical and Political Science.
HKRBKRT B. A.DA.M8, Editor.
SERIES OF 1886.
The Fourth Series of the Johns Hopkins University Studies
in Historical and Political Science (beginning in January, 1886)
will be chiefly devoted to American City Government, State
Constitutional History, and Agrarian topics.
STATE AND MUNICIPAL GOVERNMENT. -S^ripton Price $3.00.
I. Dutch Village Communities on the Hudson River. By Irving
Elting, A. B. (Harvard). Price 50 cents.
II. Rhode Island Town Governments. By William E. Foster,
A. M. (Brown University). — The Narragansett Planters. By
Edward Channing, Ph. D. and Instructor in History, Harvard
University.
Pennsylvania Boroughs. By William P. Holcomb, M. L. (Swarthruore
College) ; Assistant in History, J. H. U.
The Puritan Colony at Annapolis, Maryland. By Daniel R. Ran-
dall, A. B. (St. John's College).
The Land System of the New England Colonies. By Melville
BBUBJHHr, A. M. (Williams College).
Land Grants to Settlers in the United States. By Shosuki Sato,
B. S. (Sapporo) ; Fellow by Courtesy, J. H. U.
Introduction to the Constitutional and Political History of the
individual States. By J. F. Jameson, Ph. D. and Associate in
History, J. H. U.
The Constitutional Development of the State of New York. By
S. N. Dexter North.
City Government of Baltimore. By John C. Rose, B. L. (University
of Maryland, School of Law).
City Government of Chicago. By F. H. Hodder, Ph. M. (University
of Mich.); Instructor in History, Cornell University.
City Government of San Francisco. By Bernard Moses, Ph. D.;
Professor of History and Politics, University of California.
City Government of St. Louis. By Marshall S. Snow, A. M. (Har-
vard), Professor of History, Washington University.
City Government of Philadelphia. By Edwin P. Allinson, A. B.
(Haverford).
City Government of New Orleans. By Hon. W. W. Howe.
City Government of New York. By Simon Sterne and J. F. Jame-
\, Ph. D., As.-o.iate in History, J. H. U.
The Influence of the War of 1812 upon the Consolidation of
the American Union. By Nicholas Murray Butler, Ph. D.
and Fellow of Columbia College.
CONTENTS OF FIRST SERIES.— 1883.
LOCAL INSTITUTIONS.-Oa/o/ 7Y»*
The papers marked with a star can no longer be supplied separately ;
the others can still be had at the prices named. This Series, in book form,
is now out of print. If a new edition is published the bound volume will
be sold at $4.
I. An Introduction to American Institutional History. By Edward
A. I'UEE.MAN.*
II. The Germanic Origin of New England Towns. Read before
the Harvard Historical Society, May 9, 1881. By H. B. Adams*
III. Local Government in Illinois. First published in the Fort-
nigbtlv Review. By Albert Shaw. — Local Government in
Pennsylvania. I'.y K. K. L. ( rOl 'Li>. Price 30 cents.
IV. Saxon Tithingmen in America. By H. B. Adams. Price 50 cents.
V. Local Government in Michigan, and the Northwest. By E. W.
Bkmis. Price 25 cents.
VI. Parish Institutions of Maryland. By Edward Ingle. Price
■10 rents.
VII. Old Maryland Manors. By John Johnson. Price 30 cents.
VIII. Norman Constables in America. By H. B. Adams. Price
50 cents.
IX-X. Village Communities of Cape Ann and Salem. By H. B.
Adams.*
XI. The Genesis of a New England State (Connecticut.) By
Alexander Johnson. Price 30 cents.
XII. Local Government and Free Schools in South Carolina.
By B. J. Ramage. Price 40 cents.
CONTENTS OF SECOND SERIES.-1884.
INSTITUTIONS AND ECONOMICS.-.^** $4.00.
MI. Methods of Historical Study. By H. B. Adams, pp. 137.*
III. The Past and the Present of Political Economy. By Richard
T. Ely, pp. 64*
IV. Samuel Adams, The Man of the Town Meeting. By James K.
Hosmer, pp. 00. Price 35 cents.
V-VI. Taxation in the United States. By Henry Carter Adams,
pp. 79.*
VII. Institutional Beginnings in a Western State. By Jesse
Macy, pp. 38. Price 25 cents.
VIII-IX. Indian Money as a Factor in New England Civilization.
By William B. Weeden, pp. 51. Price 50 cents.
X. Town and County Government in the English Colonies of
North America. By Edward Channing, pp. 57.*
XI. Rudimentary Society among Boys. By John Johnson, pp. 56.
Price 50 cents.
XII. Land Laws of Mining Districts. By Charles Howard Shinn,
pp. 69. Price 50 cents.
CONTENTS OF THIRD SERIES.— 1885.
MARYLAND, VIRGINIA, AND WASHINCTON.-iVta: $3.50.
I. Maryland's Influence upon Land Cessions to the United States.
With minor papers on George Washington's Interest in Western
Lands, the Potomac Company, and a National University. By
Herbert B. Adams, pp. 102. Price 75 cents.
II-III. Virginia Local Institutions: — The Land System; Hun-
dred; Parish; County; Town. By Edward Ingle, pp. 127.
Price 75 cents.
IV. Recent American Socialism. By Richard T. Ely, pp. 74.
Price 75 cents.
V-VI-VII. Maryland Local Institutions: — The Land System;
Hundred; County; Town. By Lewis W. Wiliielm, pp. 130.
Price $1.00.
VIII. The Influence of the Proprietors in founding the State of
New Jersey. By Austin Scott, pp. 26. Price 25 cents.
IX-X. American Constitutions; The Relations of the Three
Departments as Adjusted by a Century. By Horace Davis,
pp. 70. Price 50 cents.
XI-XII. The City of Washington. By John Addison Porter,
pp. 56. Price 50 cents.
PRICE LIST.
Vol. IV, (the New Series) vriil be furnished in monthly parts upon receipt of
subscription price, $3; or, the bound volume will be sent at the end of 1886 for
$3.50.
The Fourth Series will comprise about 600 pages, and will be devoted to
American Municipal Government, Stale Constitutional History, and Agrarian
topics.
A limited number of Studies will be sold separately, although at somewhat
higher rates than to subscribers for the entire Series.
Vol. I (the First Series) of the University Studies, 470 pp., is now out of print.
If sufficient demand arises it will be reprinted and bound in cloth during the
coming year, 1886, and sold at $4.00.
Vol. II, 629 pp., bound in cloth, is now advanced in price to $4.00.
Vol. Ill, 595 pp., bound in cloth, can still be had at the original price, $3.50.
Studies designated by a star can no longer be supplied, except in connection
with the bound volumes.
All communications relating to subscriptions, exchanges, etc.,
should be addressed to the Publication- Agency of the Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 46.]
BALTIMORE, JANUARY, 1886.
[Price, 10 Cents.
RECENT PUBLICATIONS.
Photograph of the Normal Solar Spectrum. Made
by Professor H. A. Rowland. (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
University, 1886).
[From a letter to Science, New York, December 18, 1885].
The photographic map of the spectrum, upon which Professor Rowland
has expended so much hard work during the past three years, is nearly
ready for publication. The map is issued in a series of seven plates, cover-
ing the region from wave-length 3100 to 5790. Each plate is three feet
long and one foot wide, and contains two strips of the spectrum, except
plate No. 2, which contains three. Most of the plates are on a scale three
times that of Angstrom's map, and in definition are more than equal to any
map yet published, at least to wave-length 5325. The 1474 line is widely
double, as also are b3 and b4, while E may be recognized as double by the
expert. In the region of the II line these photographs show even more
than Lockyer's map of that region. Negatives have also been prepared
down to and including the B group, and they may be made ready for
publication, one of which shows eleven lines between the I) lines. A
scale of wave-lengths is printed on each plate, and in no case does the
error due to displacement of the scale amount to one part in fifty thousand.
The wave-lengths of over 200 lines have been determined to within one
part in five hundred thousand, and these serve as reference lines to cor-
rect any small error in the adjustment of the scale. The great value
of such a map lies not only in the fact that it gives greater detail and
is more exact than any other map in existence, but that it actually repre-
sents the real appearance of the spectrum in giving the relative intensities
and shading of groups of lines so that they are readily recognizable. The
photographs were taken with a concave grating six inches in diameter, and
having a radius of curvature of 21J feet, and the photographs were taken
when the plate was placed directly opposite the grating; both the sensitive
plate and grating being perpendicular to a line joining their centres, and
placed at a distance apart equal to the radius of curvature of the grating,
the slit being on the circumference of the circle, whose diameter is the
distance between the grating and plate. With this arrangement, the spec-
trum is photographed normal for wave-lengths without the intervention of
any telescopes or lens systems ; and a suitable scale of equal parts applied
to such a photograph at once gives relative wave-lengths.
Few persons have any idea of the perseverance and patience required to
bring such a task to a successful issue. More than a year was devoted to
preliminary experiments designed to discover the best mode of preparing
the plates for the particular regions to be photographed. Hundreds of
preparations were tested to find their influence on the sensitized plate, and
the whole literature of photography was ransacked, and every method tested
to the utmost, before the work of taking the negatives could begin.
The prices of the plates have been fixed as follows:
For the set of seven plates unmounted, $10; mounted on cloth, $12.
Single plates, $2 each ; mounted on cloth, $2.25. A prospectus will be sent
on application. (See p. 39 of Circular 45).
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriac Manuscript
(Williams MS.) with the Antilegomena Epistles. Edited
by Isaac H. Hall. (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins University, 1886).
[From an article by I. H. Hall in the Journal of the Society of Biblical Literature and
Exegesis for 1885, with additions].
In September last (1884) I announced in The Independent the discovery
of a manuscript of the Acts and Epistles, among which occur also the
Epistles that were antilegomena among the Syrians; namely the Second
Epistle of Peter, the Second and Third Epistles of John, and the Epistle of
Jude, in the version usually printed with our Peshitto New Testaments. It
is well known that the printed copies of these Epistles in that version all
rest upon one manuscript only, in the Bodleian Library at Oxford, England,
from which they were first published by Edward Pococke (Leyden, Elzevirs)
in 1G30. That edition, with various editorial conjectures, is the parent of
all the printed texts. In a former article in the Journal of the Society of
Biblical Exegesis and Literature I have already expressed my opinion that
they actually belong to the Philoxenian version.
By hunting over the catalogues of manuscripts in the European libraries,
I found that the Pococke MS., though the only one practically known to the
critics, is not absolutely the only other known MS. copy containing that
version of these epistles. All that are known at present are about six or
seven in number, and are of values greatly varying; some being copies of
others, and one being nothing more than a copy of the printed text of the
Paris Polyglott. But this one found by me is the second one likely to be
available to the critics.
The manuscript was obtained some fifteen years ago by the late Rev.
William Frederic Williams, then missionary to Mardin, by whom it was
sent to his brother, Robert S. Williams, Esq , of Utica, New York, who is
its present owner. Mr. Williams kindly placed the MS. at my service for
examination and study ; when I discovered the nature of its contents. Just
where the MS. was obtained it is now impossible to say, as Mr. Williams'
missionary work kept him on continual journeys. It was obtained from an
aged priest, who probably parted with it only because he was unable to read it.
The MS. is written on cotton paper, charta damaxcena, in a rather western
Syrian hand, in two columns to the page, and regularly twenty-five lines
to the column. One leaf, the first, is now gone; but it originally contained
150 leaves (of its proper matter), and two leaves more for a poem at the
end. The size of the leaf is 10J by 7< inches; of the columns, 8J by 5
inches. The quires are quiniones in the first part of the book, but in the
latter part they are quaterniones, except the last, which is a ternio. While
most of the manuscript is written on paper of double thickness, some por-
tions are written on paper of single thickness, which, probably from the
glazing, has a darker color than the rest, and allows the ink to show through.
But all is of the same age, as appears by many proofs. A later hand has
numbered the folios, in Syriac numerals. The MS. appears to be in its
original binding (except a new back), leather, with a llap ; the board within
the leather being composed of older Syriac MSS.
42
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46.
The contents of the MS. are as follows : Tables to find the movable feasts,
and also of the church-lessons from the -\cts and Epistles; then the Acts
and Catholic Epistles, and the Pauline Epistles, in the usual order, ending
with Hebrews. At the end of the Epistles is a colophon which says that it
was finished at noon on Thursday, the fourth of the sultry month Tanimuz,
in the year of the Greeks 1782; which answers to our July 4th, 1471;
which day indeed fell on a Thursday. After the colophon follows a poem
of 128 lines, all ending with the same syllable (but hardly rhyming accord-
ing to our ideas), consisting of a hymn to the Trinity, and a narrative of the
construction of the manuscript. The scribe conceals his own name, but
shows himself to be a stranger in the land where it was written. The poem
is worth quoting at length for its matter. * * * *
From various internal reasons I have been inclined to suppose that the
scribe was one of the St. Thomas, or Malabar Syriac Christians, on a visit
to his western brethren ; one of a set like those later comers, who wrote the
Leiden Apocalypse and a few other MSS. extant in Europe. The poem at
the end calls the writer a layman, and uses the far-eastern term "Sahib" to
characterize one of his friends and tells who furnished the
paper, and who paid for the writing. The prayer . . . includes other ben-
efactors; among them his two grandmothers and his mother, who brought
him up and paid the expenses of his education ; besides a number of others
whom he specifies by name as having helped him in his place of exile, and
been "diligent to establish his living without impediment." Another part
of the poem, unfortunately mutilated in a very interesting spot, speaks of
the compilation of the matter of the book. ...
However, an Arabic note at the end of the tables at the beginning of the
MSS. forces us to modify the conclusion naturally drawn from this poem,
and to consider the present manuscript not the original work therein
referred to, but a contemporaneous copy thereof. The Arabic note states that
one Daud esh-Shami il-Homsi (David the Syrian of Horns, or Hamath) had
found this excellent work, owned by Suleiman (the name spelled Selimun
in the Syriac poem), at the city of El-Keifa ; and finding it so much better
than any MS. of the Acts and Catholic Epistles he ever saw (and he had
seen many), as well as containing seven Catholic Epistles, which he had
never seen before, and all divided into their chapters and sections, provided
with lessons, notes, etc., and its most accurately supplied vowels and points,
had brought it to Husn Keifa, and obtained a copy for his own use, made
by Suleiman's own hand. Husn Keifa, as the Arabic geographers give it,
was a fortress overlooking the Tigris, either quite up in Armenia, or on the
borders of Armenia and Mesopotamia (the doubt is not as to the site, but
within which country that site was included). It is now known by the
Kftrds of the region as Hus Keif. Husn Keifa is doubtless, therefore, the
home both of that original which was compiled and written by the unknown
scribe, and of this its copy, which was made as appears above, with proper
care and under good auspices. Dafld il-Homsi would not be called
"il-Homsi" at home, in Horns; and that fact goes against the supposition
of the MS. having been brought westward by him. But where Mr. Wil-
liams found the MS. is no nearer discovery than before. Two Arabic mar-
ginal notes show that this copy was examined by Hassan, one of the patrons
of the original compiler and unknown scribe. The fly-leaves of the MS.
contain numerous scrawls in Syriac, Carshun, and Arabic, which give a few
owners' names ; but I have not yet made out any complete history of its
possessors. A few of the scrawls are in Nestorian script.
Besides the scribe's general introduction and colophon, there is a preface
to the Acts, to the Catholic Epistles as a whole, and to each of the Pauline
Epistles. The preface to the Acts is avowedly (and the others are actually)
taken from the " Treasure of Mysteries of Mafrianus," i. e. of Gregory Bar
Hebraeus. The Syrian chapters, or sections, are marked in the text by the
single or double diamond of dots (except when they coincide with a church-
lesson), and are numbered in the margin. The church lesson notes are
written in red in the body of the text, and also numbered in the margin.
In both these series of numberings the Acts and Catholic Epistle3 are
treated as one book, and the Pauline Epistles as another. The Syrian
chapters are the same as the very ancient ones, with one remarkable excep-
tion, caused by the introduction of the four antilegomena. In the ancient
and ordinary division the Acts and Catholic Epistles have 32 sections or
chapters; section 31 beginning at 1 John, ii. 7; and section 32 at iii. 21.
But in this MS. section 31 begins at 2 Peter, i. 13; section 32 at 2 Peter, iii.
8 ; section 33 at 1 John, ii. 21 ; section 34 at 1 John, iv. 2 ; and section 35
(the last) at 3 John, 1. The antilegomena thus add three sections. The
church-lesson titles and numbers within these books show also that the
antilegomena were read in church, by those who used the system here given.
It may be added for the sake of those who wish to know the space occupied
by these Epistles in the MS., that 2 Peter begins on fol. 57, 6, col. 2, at the
middle, and ends at fol. 60, b, col. 2, near the top ; 2 John begins at fol. 64,
b, col. 1, one-third of the way down ; 3 John begins at fol. 65, a, col. 1, one-
fourth of the way down ; Jude at fol 65, b, one-third of the way down, and
ends at fol. 66, 6, one-third of the way down the page, its writing on this
last page not running in columns, but carrying the lines across the page.
The titles and subscriptions to these Epistles are generally quite simple ;
that of 2 John being merely : " End. Verses forty." . . .
With regard to the text of these epistles, it is far better than that of the
Pococke Epistles, or of the (rather poor) manuscript which he used. Almost
all the places where Pococke saw error and had to emend, or to suggest
emendation, conjecturally, are right in this MS. Sometimes, however, it
agrees with the Bodleian MS. against the editorial conjectures. The care-
less, but easily made error of "in the world" for "among the people," for
instance, 2 Peter, ii. 1, which ought never to have been suffered to get into
the printed editions, but which is in all of them, is not in this MS.
Throughout the MS., however, the writing is voweled with great fullness
and great care. The points qushshoyo and ruchocho, which show the hard or
soft sounds of the begadkepat letters are supplied in red. And the text gen-
erally is excellent among Syriac texts. (Of course all but the antilegomena
are of the Peshitto version). The margins are abundantly supplied with
linguistic and grammatical notes, written some in Syriac and some in
Arabic. The ulterior source of these notes I have not yet ascertained ; some
of them are wholly from Gregory Bar Hebraeus ; some in part from him and
in part not. These notes treat of a great variety of matters ; generally of
vowels and points, but sometimes of differences in pronunciation between
the Eastern and Western Syrians; sometimes justifying the scribe's correc-
tion of a former matter, and so on. A note at Philippians, i. 15, last word,
justifies the adoption of the participle instead of the imperfect tense, in
accordance with antiquity and accuracy, though against most of our printed
copies.
On the whole, this MS. is very valuable for its texts and its notes ; not
only as a carefully edited copy of the ancient text, but as a linguistic and
grammatical treatise. Its place is high among manuscripts, although the
date of its writing is not so very remote. It is easy to see, from Pococke's
edition, that this MS. is every way superior to the Bodleian as a copy of the
antilegomena epistles. But the special points of the sort can hardly b«
treated of till the collation of the MS. is completed. . . .
Seventeen pages of the MS. have been reproduced by the phototype pro-
cess and an introduction and brief notes have been added by the Editor.
The price has been fixed at three dollars. A prospectus will be sent on
application.
Archives of Maryland. (Proceedings of the Council of
Maryland, 1636-1667.) William Hand Browne, Editor. (Bal-
timore, Maryland Historical Society, 1885).
This volume, a quarto of nearly 600 pages, is a continuation of the pub-
lication of the earliest archives of the State, provided for by the General
Assembly, and carried on under the direction of the Maryland Historical
Society, the custodian of the original documents. It contains the proceed-
ings of the Council of the Province during the first thirty years of its exist-
ence, and thus runs parallel with the first volume of Assembly Proceedings.
The Provincial Council, as the preface explains, was a body charged with
very varied duties. It was, with the Governor at its head, the executive
body of the Province; it was the representative of the Proprietary utd
guardian of his rights ; it sat as the Upper House of the Legislature, and
had a limited legislative power of its own ; it was the Provincial Court
and Court of Appeal. Hence the records are quite miscellaneous in char-
acter ; but in this volume only those are included which properly belong to
its executive duties ; and which will be found not only valuable material
for history, but interesting in themselves.
A copy of the Charter of Maryland, taken from the Patent Rolls in the
Public Record Office, London, is prefixed to the volume ; as also copies of
original documents preserved in London, which throw light upon the early
history of the Province.
January, 188G.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
43
An Introduction to the Study of Chemistry. Ameri-
can Science Series ; Briefer Course. By Ira Reuses. (New
York, Henry Holt & Co., 1886).
{Extract from the Preface).
In preparing this book, I have endeavored to keep in mind the fact that
it 19 intended for those who are beginning the study of chemistry. Instead
of presenting a large number of facts and thus overburdening the student's
mind, I have presented a smaller number than is usual in elementary courses
in chemistry ; but I have been careful to select for treatment, su.'h substances
and such phenomena as seem to me best suited to give an insight into the
nature of chemical action. Usually the mind is not allowed to dwell for
any length of time upon any one thing and thus to become really acquainted
with it, but is hurried on and is soon bewildered in the effort to comprehend
what is presented. I cannot but believe that it is much better to dwell
longer on a few subjects, provided these subjects are properly selected.
The charge is frequently made that our elementary text-books on chem-
istry are not scientific ■ ; that is to say, that not enough stress is laid upon the
relations which exist between the phenomena considered, — the treatment
is not systematic. The student is taught a little about oxygen, a little about
hydrogen, a little about nitrogen, etc. ; and then a little about potassium, a
little about calcium, etc. ; and he is left simply to wonder whether there is
any connection between the numerous facts offered for study. It must be
acknowledged that there are serious difficulties in the way of a purely scien-
tific treatment of chemistry, but I think that it is quite possible to treat the
subject more scientifically than is customary, and thus to make it easier of
comprehension to the student. I have made an effort in this direction in
the book here offered to the public.
In teaching chemistry, two mistakes are commonly made. The first is
that of presenting the profoundest theories of the science before the student
is prepared for them. Hence they make little impression upon his mind,
and he only learns to repeat words about them, without having any real
comprehension of them.
The other mistake is that of giving directions for experiments without
making it clear to the student why they are performed or what they teach.
The result is that he sees little or no connection between the subjects treated
in the text-book and the things which he works with in the laboratory.
Now, the first object of a course in science should be to develop a scientific
habit of thought. This cannot be done by mere study of the theories of a
science, nor by haphazard experimenting. It can only be reached by sys-
tematic study of the phenomena, and by recognizing the connection between
these phenomena and the theories. At the outset the best plan is to study
phenomena scientifically, and afterwards speculations may be introduced to
some extent ; though, in my opinion, it is better to keep these decidedly
subordinate in an elementary course.
At this day it is almost superfluous to emphasize the great importance of
laboratory work as a part of a course in chemistry. College authorities and
school boards are beginning to recognize the necessity of this kind of work
for the purpose of securing satisfactory results. A laboratory can be fitted
up at slight cost in which all the experiments described in this book could
be performed. It is not necessary to wait until a complete laboratory is pro-
vided. The accommodations needed are simple, and there can hardly be
a college or school which could not with a little effort secure the few con-
veniences. Should there, however, be such a place the teacher can at least
perform the experiments described. And this he had better do with not
more than ten or a dozen students around him. By constantly questioning
them, and getting one or another to help him, or to do the work, fairly sat-
isfactory results can be attained.
If the students work in the laboratory it is of prime importance that they
should not be left to shift for themselves. They will surely acquire bad
habits of work, and will generally fail to understand what they are doing.
A thorough system of questioning and cross-questioning is necessary in order
that the work shall be successful. A badly constructed piece of apparatus
should not be allowed, and cleanliness should be insisted upon from the
beginning. The instructor should be as watchful in the laboratory as in
the recitation-room, and should be as exacting in regard to the experimental
work as the teacher of languages is in regard to the words of a lesson. A
badly performed experiment should be considered as objectionable as a bad
recitation or a badly written exercise. When teachers of chemistry acquire
this feeling, and work in this spirit, the educational value of laboratory
courses will be greater than it frequently is now. The average playing with
test-tubes and precipitates is of questionable benefit. As it has been digni-
fied by the undeserved name of scientific training, and put forward in place
of the real thing, many thinking men have been led to question the value
of scientific training, and to adhere to the old drill in grammatical forms
and mathematical problems. I do not wonder at thi^, but I should be
greatly surprised to find this state of mind continuing after really good
laboratory courses are provided. A slovenly laboratory course in chemistry
is a poor substitute for a well-conducted course in mathematics or languages.
It behooves those who are convinced of the great advantages to be derived
from laboratory courses to see to it that these courses are conscientiously
conducted. . . .
Dutch Village Communities on the Hudson River.
By Irving Elting. (Johns Hopkins University Studies in
Historical and Political Science: Fourth Series, No. 1, pp. 68.
January, 1886).
No two rivers have been oftener compared than the Rhine and the Hud-
son ; indeed, the Hudson has been frequently termed the " Rhine of America."
Between these rivers there exists, unnoticed by the traveler and unnoted,
for the most part, even by the historian, a bond of union formed by the
institutional relationship of the village-communities which have had their
existence, with similar customs, similar laws, and similar forms of govern-
ment on the banks of each stream.
Turning to the old world one finds that, notwithstanding the encroach-
ments of the feudal system, the earlier, freer, community-life, with the
customs of common land-tenure and of government by freemen met in
general assembly, survived in some of the more secluded portions of the
country, — notably in the forest regions of the lower Palatinate cast of the
Rhine, and in those northern provinces of the Netherlands, — Friesland,
Groningen, and Drenthe, — whose free peoples Rome never conquered and
whose right of self-government no haughty baron ever suppressed.
From Holland and the German Palatinate, where the feudal system had
never gained the foothold which it had secured in France, and even in
more distant England, came the first settlers who were to lay the foundations
of New York state. A short sighted policy on the part of the Statesr
General of Holland led to the granting (under the charter of "Freedoms
and Exemptions," as it was called) of a monopoly, in both land and trade
to the West India Company, and to the establishment, in true feudal
fashion, of " seignorial fiefs," or manors, on the banks of the Hudson. The
beginnings of governmental life in New Netherland were, therefore, unfor-
tunate for the growth of free institutions. All the more noteworthy and
commendable is the persistent and successful struggle of the "sturdy and
independent yoeman" of Holland in fighting his way towards free repre-
sentative government, in the face of the difficulties which beset him.
The details of this struggle for popular rights in and about New Amster-
dam, show that the Dutch brought to the new country a rich heritage in
their love of liberty, which unfavorable conditions could not crush out.
More liberal charters were granted by the States-General, and as early as
1041 came the recognition of the people's voice in affairs of government, by
the election, in popular Assembly, of "Twelve Select Men," — all emigrants
from Holland. The step towards freedom gained at this time was never
lost; the representatives of the people repeatedly demanded, for New
Amsterdam and the neighboring settlements, the municipal privileges to
which the Dutch were accustomed, and in 1646 the inhabitants of the
village of Breuckelen (now Brooklyn) were given the right of electing two
schepens, or magistrates, with full judicial powers as in the Fatherland.
Those who opposed the magistrates in the discharge of their duties were to
be deprived of all share in the common lands adjoining the village.
Thus, side by side with the growth of free institutions in early New York,
is to be found a common land-tenure, accompanied by many of the customs
of the Germanic village community. Everywhere existed the ancient
pound and the distinction between meadow-land, woodland, and the
"bouweries," or "home-lots." What is now City Hall Park in New York,
bounded by Broadway, Nassau, Ann, and Chambers streets, was, as late as
1686, perhaps much later, known as the village commons, where the droves
of cattle were sent morning and evening to pasture.
44
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46,
These village rights of common land-tenure were accompanied in New
Amsterdam by rights of common participation in the deliberative assembly
of the people, as was the case in the forests of Germany centuries before.
But the principle of popular representation was not fully recognized in the
province, until the danger of English conquest induced the Governor and
las Council to call the assembly of 1664, for which two deputies were
elected by plurality votes of tlfe inhabitants of the various towns. Even
such a popular assembly as this, however, was not able to resist the tide of
events which, in September, 1664, swept New Netherland from the hands
of the Dutch and placed it under English rule.
This change in government had little effect upon the character of the
population, or upon their village customs; the Dutch element predomi-
nated to such an extent that the English language did not supplant Dutch
as the language of the people until about the beginning of the present cen-
tury, and the records in the offices of the Clerks of Ulster, Orange, and
Dutchess counties, show that the common lands held by the various com-
munities were not, in most instances, divided into individual holdings until
about the same time.
Soon after the English took permanent possession of the country, two
village communities— the adjoining towns of Hurley and New Paltz,
respectively Dutch and Huguenot in their origin — arose on the west side of
the Hudson river, not quite a hundred miles from its mouth. Both of these
villages present features peculiarly interesting to the student of institutional
history.
The nurley Commons, granted by royal patent to a number of Dutch
settlers in 1709, existed for a century, under conditions which forbade any
sale of a share in the land to one not an inhabitant of the town. When, in
1806, the towns-people petitioned the Legislature of the state for a division
of these common lands, the partition was made, in true Teutonic fashion,
according to the needs of the inhabitants, — a definite share being given to
each person "as shall have supported a family and resided within the said
corporation the term of two years next before making such partition and
who shall during that time have followed some trade or occupation," though
he had never before been a freeholder of Hurley. Even if this does not
show a " periodic partition," it gives evidence of that distinctive feature of
ancient communal land-holding, — the use of a portion of the common domain
for "distribution among new families."
The town of New Paltz, lying just south of Hurley was, in 1677, granted
by patent covering some 36,000 acres, to twelve proprietors, — all of them
Huguenots. The patentees are said to have been called the " Twelve Men,"
or "Duzine," and to have had both legislative and judicial powers in town
afTairs. Three years before the death of the surviving patentee,— Abraham,
son of Louis Du Bois, — the twenty-four proprietors of the New Paltz
entered into an agreement, dated April 21, 1728, which established the local
government of the " Twelve Men " by popular election, and authorized
them to fix titles " according to the severall Divisions and partitions that
have been made between them [the patentees] by Parole without deed, and
the other parts thereof yet remaining in Common and undivided . . .within
the bounds of the aforesaid Pattent." The "Twelve Men," under their
authority conferred in the agreement of 1728, to lay out the land to be
divided "in Twelve equal shares and Divisions soe that the one is not of
more vallue than the other," had the lots set off regularly, from time to
time, of the same size and shape, adjacent and numbered from one to twelve
in each Division, — the north and south Divisions together constituting one
long strip (or Tier) of similar lots, running, for the most part, north and
south, parallel to the Wallkill. Almost all deeds of New Paltz property,
executed after the signing of the agreement of 1728 and before the general
partition of the lands by the state Legislature at the beginning of the
present century, contain some reference to this method of division.
About a hundred years after the granting of the patent, fifty-two proprie-
tors of the New Paltz, for the common defence of their territory, entered
into an agreement, dated April 30, 1774, — a fact which shows both the
persistence of their village community customs and the extent to which the
sub-division of the common property had been carried.
Even after an act of the Legislature incorporated the township under the
state government, the inhabitants of New Paltz met yearly in popular
assembly to choose their "Twelve Men." There remains record of the
election of these officers as late as the year 1824, and one of their number,
Daniel DuBois, lived until 1852. Thus he, as the survivor, has the
unique distinction of perpetuating in his own person, beyond the middle of
the nineteenth century, an institution older than the Christian era.
The settlement of New Paltz, entirely Huguenot at first, received the
Dutch element (destined to play an important part in the town's history)
in the person of Koeloff Elting by his marriage with Sara DuBois in 1703;
and it is a significant fact in the history of local institutions, that these two
stocks of the early New Paltz settlers came respectively from the German
Palatinate and the province of Drenthe in Holland, where to-day in the
clearings of the Odcnwald and on the marshy peat-fields of Drenthe, are
to be found almost perfect types of the primitive Germanic mark.
From the banks of the Bhine the germs of free local institutions, borne
on the tide of western emigration, found here, along the Hudson, a more
fruitful soil than New England aflbrded for the growth of those forms of
municipal, state, and national government, which have made the United States
the leading republic among the nations. Thus in a new, and historically
important, sense may the Hudson river be called the "Bhine of America."
The patent which included the present site of Yonkers was granted to
Van eler Donck, and had no connection with Bensselaerswyek closer than
that arising from the fact that the patentee had been the Sehout Fiscal of
the Van Bensselaer manor.
Many old Dutch words survive in local expressions found to-day among
people who have lost knowledge of the original meanings. In a portion
of the paper, reference is made to the fact that what is now so familiarly
known as the Bowery in New York City, is so called because it was the
"bouwerie" or home-lol of Gov. Stuyvesant.
One who examines the records of the counties where the early settlers
were Dutch will be struck with the frequency, in deeds executed before, and
for many years after, 1700, of the word "vly" or "fly," used apparently in
each instance to describe a low-lying piece of ground.
The word "kill" survives in the Wallkill at New Paltz, the Fallkill at
Pougbkeepsie, the Fishkill farther south, the Catskill farther north, and in
numerous other small tributaries of the Hudson.
If the descendants of the Dutch knew the tongue of their ancestors who
called every creek of importance a "kill," we should not hear, as we often
do along the Hudson, such a tautological expression as "Fallkill creek."
The Teaching of the Apostles and the Sibylline
Books. By J. Rendel Haueis. (Cambridge, Eng. : Wallis,
1885. 2s.).
(From the American Journal of Philology, No. 23, October, 188.5).
Professor J. Bendel Harris, one of the most esteemed collaborators of
this Journal, has published a special treatise on the Teaching of the Apostles
and the Sibylline Books (Cambridge, Eng.: H. W. Wallis, 1885), in which
he has undertaken to show among some of the Sibyllists a very close
acquaintance with the " Teaching of the Apostles." Of course critics might
turn this round and saj; that the coincidences show a very close acquaint-
ance of the author of the Teaching with the Sibylline Books, but this is
met by attacking the date assigned to the Second Book, in which more than
sixty per cent, of the coincidences occur. This reopens the question of the
date of the Pseudo-Phokylides, a large part of whose poem has been inserted
in the text of the Second Book. Bernays made the superior limit in time
of the JTolti/ia vov6ctik6v from which the Sibyllist borrowed, to be the circu-
lation of the LXX translation of the Scriptures, while the inferior limit
is furnished by the absence of all traces of the N. T. and of Christianity,
say the time of Nero. This statement of Bernays that there is no trace of
the early Christian fuSaonaXia. in Ps. Phokylides is met by Professor Harris
with a strong negative. Ps. Phokylides " can only by extremely rough criti-
cism be divested of sentiments which are either Christian or differ very
slightly therefrom; and the whole tenor of the writing is exactly what can
be explained by the first century." Professor Harris's pamphlet is full of
interest to the student of that remarkable document, the Aidaxv, the admir-
able edition of which by M. Sabaticr (Paris, Fischbaeher, 1885) has been
waiting so long on the table of this Journal for an adequate review that a
review is hardly needed, as its distinguishing features have already found
hearty commendation among those who are best qualified to judge. It is to
M. Sabaticr that we must turn when we wish to understand the connexion
between the Aidaxri and the synagogue.
January, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
45
American Journal of Philology. Edited by Pbofbuo*
Gii.dkiwleeve. Vol. VI, No. 2. Whole No. 22. (Baltimore,
1885).
Article I. — Contributions to a History of the French Language of Canada.
By A. M. Elliott.
In tliis number the writer first gives an account of the ample materials
for the history, political and personal, of Canada, and especially of the
inestimable church registers, "which enable the student of language to dis-
entangle the threads of dialectical influence by tracing the settlers to their
original homes, whether in Northern or Southern France.
The linguistic problem is a complicated one, and is more closely connected
with the historic growth of the people than is usually the case where the
original population is drawn from the same general territory. Hence the
necessity of this preliminary, historical article, in which the story of Canada
is told in outline, from the first expedition under Jacques Cartier, in 1534,
down to the Act of Confederation in 1867. Especial stress is laid on the
deep religious sentiment that animated the founders of the French colony
in Canada, a sentiment that survives in the extraordinary faith of the
people to-day. The first conquest of Canada by the English, in 1629, gave
a check to immigration, and the great majority of those who had settled in
New France returned to their native country, but after the restoration of
Canada to France, in 1633, the current again set in from the mother
country and continued to flow Uninterruptedly until another break came by
foreign occupation in 1760. Immigration then ceased, but the increase of
population has been phenomenal. During the last century and a quarter
the growth has been more than thirty-fold, and the French people of Canada
now number about two millions. Up to the surrender of Quebec the speech
had been pure French, for the Indian dialers had little influence on the
French language of Canada, and we only have to distinguish between the
strong Northern French element with Southern French modifications.
Henceforward we have to take into account the influence of English, intro-
duced and supported as it was by special authority. ' But this influence is
felt chiefly in the maritime districts, where the British principally settled,
and the French language is everywhere aggressive. The French popula-
tion now occupies seven-eighths of Lower Canada, and the French language
has thrust out the English among people of English or Scotch stock.
Another important feature is the seigniorial tenure that prevailed for
above two centuries and a half throughout Lower Canada. This feudal
institution proved to bo a remarkable system for the creation of a peasant
proprietary, and there is abundant evidence that the relation of the seigneur
to his people was much more intimate in the early settlement of Canada
than in the mother country. Indeed, the effects of association with persons
of the best culture have remained in the manners of the habitant up to this
day. The seigneurs departed, but the priest remained, and the French
nationality of Canada has grouped itself about the clergy. The working
line laid down for the exploration of the French language of Canada meas-
ured one hundred and eighty miles. In this wide territory a surprising
uniformity of speech was found, and the causes of this homogeneousness are
to be sought in the social and political influences, in the antagonisms of
religion to race, which have done much to weld together the otherwise dis-
cordant elements of this population. (Compare Circular No. 35, p. 20).
Article II. — Arm-pitting among the Greeks. By George Lyman Kitt-
BEDOE.
An ancient Greek, if he murdered a man, sometimes mutilated his victim
in a peculiar way known as /laoxal-iCeiv or arm-pitting. The extremities of
the hands were cut off-, strung together, and fastened under the arm-pits of
the corpse by a band or girdle round the neck. There are two main theo-
ries as to the purpose. According to the former the iiaaxa'Ai^etv was a part
of the a<f>oo!uoic. The cut off extremities were the airapx'l of the victim, a
sin-offering to the infernal gods to expiate the murder.
According to the latter the mutilation of the body was supposed to effect
a corresponding mutilation of the soul, so that the shade, deprived of its
limbs, would be powerless to take vengeance on the criminal. It is the
latter view that Mr. Kittredge advocates, formed on the basis of a close
examination of the loci classic!, and next by a long array of evidence from
the history of culture.
Article III. — Pharsalia, Pharsalus, Palaepharsalus. By B. Peerin.
The conclusion reached by the writer may be stated in his own words : " I
consider it certain that both camps were on the right of the Enipeus, some-
where near the main route between Pharsalus and Larissa, and that the
bailie was fought at the base of the hills on whose slo|«! Pompcy's ramp
was pitched, near Palaepharsalus. I consider it probable that Palaephar-
salus was on the hills north of the Knipcus and west of the main road north
and south, that Pompey's line of battle extended east and west, parallel
with the Enipeus, and covered on the right by a small stream running from
the hills into the main river. This also makes Goler's position for Caesar's
camp the more probable one."
Article IV. — Greek and IxUin Inscriptions from Palestine. By Frederic
D. Al.I.EN.
Sixty-six inscriptions copied by Rev. Dr. Merrill in the years 1875-77 in
the course of journeys undertaken under the auspices of the American Pal-
estine Exploration Society. The most interesting of them has been pub-
lished already, American Journal of Philology, III, p. 206. According to
Professor Allen No. 5, together with No. 17, fixes the era of Gerasa, pro-
visionally at least, in the spring of 44 A. D.
The Reviews and Book Notices relate to Zimmer's Keltische Studien (J. M.
Hart) ; Cook's Sievers' Old English Grammar (James W. Bright) ; Abbott's
Evangeliorum Versio Antehieronymiana (J. Resdel Harris); Uhlig's Dio-
nysii Thracis Ars Grammalka (B. I. Wheeler); Gatschct's Migration
Legend of the Creek Indians, and Brinton's The Lendpe and their Legends (C.
H. Toy) ; Robinson Ellis' Anecdota Oxoniensia, and XII Facsimiles, and
Breal and Bailly's Dictionnaire Etymologique Latin (Minton Warren) ; and
John's Gregorii Palamae Prosopopoeia (A. S. G.)
Reports are made of Neue Jahrbiicher fur Philologie und Paedagogik, Rhein-
isches Museum, Revue de Philologie, Archiv fur Lateinische Leiikographie und
Grammatik, and Germania.
Under Brief Mention are found notices of Merriam's Herodotus, Hubner's
Exempla Scripturae Epigraphicae, Wilkins's Epistles of Horace, Keller and
Haussner's Horace, VerralCs Studies in Horace, and Holden's Plutarch's
Gracchi.
Recent Publications. Books Received.
Vol. VI. No. 3. Whole No. 23. (Baltimore, 1885).
Article I. — The Sis and Sa Aorisls (6th and 7th Aorist-forms) in Sanskrit.
By W. D. Whitney.
These sis and sa forms of sigmatic aorist are quite exceptional in their
occurrence as compared with the other two, the s-aorist and the »'«-aorist.
In the whole body of Sanskrit literature, there are found to occur 145
s-aorist stems, (of which 99 appear only in the older language, 9 only in the
later, 37 in both), and 174 »s-aorist stems (123 in the older language, 16 in
the later, 21 in both) ; of the other two classes, less than a score each.
After giving the details Professor Whitney conies to the conclusion that the
si's-aorist and the sa aorist are both sporadic in their character, sa in just
the same degree as wis.
" The analogy of adikmm and idet^a, which has given such satisfaction to
beginners in comparative philology, and seemed to explain so much, has a
deal of fallacy about it. The true analogue of ddiksam would be Idil-ov."
The true factors in Sanskrit with widen we have to work in studying the
genesis of the sigmatic aorist, are the 8-aorist and the w-aorist, and these
alone. " In respect to the sibilant, and to its occurrence with or without a
preceding t . . . this aorist-formation agrees with the s-future and with the
desiderative. Until good evidence to the contrary can be shown, these three
must be regarded as related formations, and no explanation can be accepted
as satisfactory for one of them which does not apply also to the others."
Article II. — Remarks on Vol. II of Kock's Comicorum Atlicorum Fragmenta.
By Robinson Ellis.
Notes on some fifty fragments to most of which emendations are proposed.
Article III. — Vowel length in Old English. By Albert S. Cook.
A continuation of the article Vowel-length in King Alfred's Orosius, pub-
lished in the American Journal of Philology, Vol. V, pp. 318-324. Several
corrections of the previous article are given.
Article IV. — On the so-called Genitive Absolute and its Use especially in the
Attic Orators. By Edward H. Spieker.
According to Dr. Spieker the most plausible view of the genitive absolute
construction is that which is advocated by Holzweissig in his Syntax and
which refers it to the use of the genitive in expressions of time, as in vvkt6c,
a use which dates far back in I. E. languages, being found in Vedic Sanskrit
as well as in the earliest Greek. By the use of a participle with such a geni-
46
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46.
tive and the gradual emphasis of the participial element, the construction
could have been easily and naturally evolved.
After an elaborate discussion of the views of Classen who starts from the
genitive participle without a noun, the writer follows the history of the
construction in Homer, Hesiod, the lyric poets, and the drama. In Homer,
the statistics of Classen are accepted. The others are only touched on, not
exhaustively treated. In the domain of Attic prose, oratorical usage is pre-
sented with great fulness in accordance with the title of the paper. The
orators show marked differences in the use of this construction, both as to
frequency and as to manner. The early orators, Antiphon and Andokides,
use it in a simple, easy way ; no ease of uc or of av, no relative or interro-
gative pronoun as subject, etc. In Lykurgos we find the same state of
things; there are but few exceptions to it in Lysias and Isaios. To these
the use in Isokrates, Demosthenes, Aeschines, and Deinarchos presents a
striking contrast. The paper, which is too full of detail to admit a satis-
factory abstract, ends with a brief comparison between the Greek genitive
absolute and the Latin ablative absolute, and emphasises the freedom and
variety of the Greek use as one of the many evidences of what this gifted
nation could make out of the linguistic material it possessed.
Article V. — Two Points in French Style. By P. B. Marcou.
The two points are the gradual shortening of the French sentence and the
shifting position of adjective and substantive. As to the latter peculiarity
("predestination e'ternelle," " ^ternelle predestination") we learn that on
the one hand there is a strong tendency to use preposition less and less,
while on the other hand it is used less frequently for euphony and more
frequently to excite the fancy. A liberty which was formerly made use of
for euphony alone, has been taken advantage of for a much higher purpose,
and we have here an instance of how the persistent cultivation of style is
tending to make the language a more and more delicate instrument.
Mr. Nicholas Murray Butler has presented in a Note the statistics
of The Postpositive et in Proptrtius.
In the Reviews and Book Notices are discussed Wagner's Marlowe's Tambur-
laine (James W. Bright), Sweet's First Middle English Primer, Skeat's Tale
of Gamelyn, Jahresbericht uber die Erscheinungen aufdem Gebiele der German-
isehen Philologie (J. M. Garnett), Beia"s Cicero's Academica, Abraham's
Studio. Plautina (M. Warren), SlengeVs Theatre cV Alexandre Hardy (A. M.
Elliott).
The Reports relate to Mnemosyne, Anglia, Rheinisches Museum, Neue Jahr-
bueherfur Philologie und Paedagogik, Romania, and Hermes.
In Brief Mention a short account is given of Iwan Midler's Handbuch der
klassisehen AUertumswissenschaft, C. E. Schmidts Parallel-Homer, Dionysios
Thereianos' Qi?-o?MyiKal 'YirorvTruoeic, Baebler's Beitr'age za einer Geschichle der
laleinischen Grammatik im Mittelalter, Weslcolt and Hort's Small New Testament
(school ed.), Holzweissig' s Lateinisclte Schulgrammatik, Furneaux's Tacitus'
Annals, SchenkVs Bibliotheca Scriptorum Graecorum et Romanorum, J. Rendel
Harris's Teaching of the Apostles and the Sibylline Books, Sabatier's ktdaxfl,
Flagg's Seven against Thebes.
Recent Publications. Books Received.
By C. 8. Peirce and
Small Differences of Sensation.
J. Jabtrow.
[Abstract from the Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences, Vol. III].
The physiological psychologists assume that two nerve excitations alike
in quality will only produce distinguishable sensations provided they differ
in intensity by an amount greater than a fixed ratio (the Unterschiedsschwelle).
Another theory, does not admit an Unterschiedsschwelle, but claims that the
multiplication of observations will indefinitely reduce the error of their
mean. If there be a least perceptible difference, then when two excitations
differing by less than this are presented to us, we ought to answer which is
the greater, wrong as often as right in the long run. Whereas, if the theory
of least squares is correct, we not only ought to answer right oftencr than
wrong, but we ought to do so in a predictible ratio of cases.
We have experimented with the pressure sense, observing the proportion
of errors among judgments as to which is the greater of two slightly differ-
ent pressures. From the probability, thus ascertained, of committing an
error of a given magnitude, the probable error of a judgment can be calcu-
lated according to the mathematical theory of errors. If, now, we find that
when the ratio of the two pressures is smaller than a certain ratio, the
erroneous judgments number one-half of the whole, while the mathematical
theory requires them to be sensibly fewer, then this theory is plainly dis-
proved, and the maximum ratio at which this phenomenon is observed the
to called Unterschiedsschwelle. If, on the other hand, the values obtained for
the probable error are the same for errors varying from three times to one-
fourth of the probable error, then the theory of the method of least squares
is shown to hold good within those limits, and the presumption will be that
it extends still further. The mathematical the 07 has the advantage of
yielding conceptions of greater definiteness than that of the physiologists,
and will thus tend to improve methods of observation. Moreover, it affords
a ready method for determining the sensibility or fineness of perception, for,
knowing the number of errors in a certain number of experiments, and
accepting the conclusions o" this paper, the calculated ratio to the total
excitation of that variation of excitation, in judging which we should err
one time out of four, measures the sensibility.
Throughout our observations we roted the degree of confidence with
which the observer gave his judgment upon a scale of four degrees, as
follows: 0 denoted absence of any preference for one answer over its oppo-
site; 3 denoted as strong a confidence as one would have about such sensa-
tions; while between the two, 1 and 2 naturally found their places.
The apparatus used was an adaptation of a " Fairbanks " 2>ost-ofhee scale,
with various accessory appliance! which had as their object the avoidance
of delay and fatigue, as well as of any jar or inequality in the operation of
applying and removing the variable pressure. Each experiment consisted
of three operations, in the first and third of which the same pressure was
brought upon the finger of the subject, while in the second a slightly smaller
or slightly greater pressure was substituted. The object of this double
change was to avoid the well-known difference of sensation excited by an
increase and decrease of pressure.
Ratios of pressures. [Subject: Mr. Peirce. J
1.000
i.iai
1.015
Average number of er-
Calculated from proba-
ble error = 0.051....
Average confidence.
10.4
10.7
19.3
17.2
21.6
21.0
0.7
0.7
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
Comparing in the accompanying tables the average number of errors in
a set of fifty with the theoretical value of this average as calculated by the
method of least squares, we see that the correspondence between the real
and the theoretical numbers is close.
The experiments in which Mr. Jastrow was the subject were much more
extensive, and cannot all be grouped in one table, because the probable
error is on the decrease throughout. They can be conveniently grouped in
four tables, two of which are given below :
Ratios of pressures. [Subject: Mr. Jastrow.]
1.060
1.030
1.015
Average number of er-
rors in set of 50
Calculated from proba-
ble error — 0.050
Average confidence.
11.0
10.4
13.8
17.0
20.8
21.0
0.85
0.9
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
Ratios of pressures. [Subject: Mr. Jastrow.]
1.020
1.010
17.7
18.3
1.005
Average number of er-
Calculated from proba-
ble error — 0.020
Average confidence.
12.8
12.5
20.7
21.fi
0.12
0.12
0.07
0.06
0.00
0.03
The tables show that the numbers of errors follow, as far as we can con-
veniently trace them, the numbers assigned by the probability curve, and
therefore destroy all presumption in favor of an Unterschiedssclacelle.
The evidence of our experiments seems clearly to be that this sen-
sation has no Schwelle, and vanishes only when the difference to which it
refers vanishes. The general fact gives new reason for believing that we
gather what is passing in one another's minds in large measure from sensa-
tions so faint that we are not fairly aware of having them, and can give no
account of how we reach our conclusions about such matters.
January, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
47
American Journal of Archaeology. Vol. I, No. 4. (Bal-
timore, A. L. Fkotiiingiiam, Jk., Ph. D., Managing Editor,
1885).
/. — Marble. Statue of Artemis in the Museum at Constantinople. By Salo-
mon Reinach (with one plate).
This is one of the most remarkable pieces in the Tchinly-Kiosk Museum,
and represents the goddess with her right arm resting on a pilaster, her
left hand on her hip, and the right leg crossed over the left. The writer
considers it a Greco-Koman copy of an original of the time, if not hy the
hand, of l'raxiteles.
II.— Law Code of the Kretan Gortyna. By A. C. Merriam.
This inscription, which lias been recently discovered by Dr. Halbherr, is
the most important document yet found for a knowledge of Greek law. It
relates entirely to the jus privatum : the condition of slaves; family regula-
tions; the disposition of property; etc. During the last few months mono-
graphs upon it have appeared in Germany, France and Italy. The present
article gives the first half of a critical text, a translation, and a full com-
ment. The second half will be given in the next number.
Ill — Mosaic of the Facade of San Paolo fuori4e-mura of Borne. By A. L.
Frothingham, Jr.
This mosaic which, after the fire of 1823, was taken down, divided, and
placed in the interior of the church, is shown not to be the work of Pietro
C'avallini, but to have been executed a century before his time, under Popes
Innocent III and Gregory IX. Cavallini's work was merely restoration.
IV. — Inscribed base of an archaic bronze statue from Ml. Pious. By SALO-
MON Reinach (with one plate).
This boustrophedon inscription reads TIM AS I4>IA0§ M AN E9EKE-
TOTTOAONITOITTTOIEIHOTTPAOrrEION. The first part is,
clearlv, " Timasiphilos has dedicated me to the Ptoian Appollon": the
end is an enigma, which M. Breal proposes to read 6<ppa b<pei?.uv "en sa
quality de debiteur."
V. — The Monoliths of San Juan Teolihuacan, Mexico. By W. H. Holmes
(with six figures).
The writer shows that a single monolith has " been made to do duty as an
altar, a pillar, a ' fainting-stone,' a sacrificial stone, and a god of the Aztecs,
taking in literature three separate uncorrelated guises at one and the same
time." A second monolith of less importance, hitherto inedited, is also
illustrated.
VI. — The Revival of Sculpture in Europe in the thirteenth century (n). By
A. L. Frothingham, Jr. (with one plate).
In Italy Niccola's influence on contemporary artists was short-lived ; and
Giovanni, the founder of the Pisan type, borrowed largely from Northern
Gothic, which exercised a strong influence on the entire school. A com-
parison with French sculpture, on the score of invention, drapery, etc.,
the study of the nude and of the antique, points in general to the superi-
ority of the latter as well as to its priority in the Revival.
Notes, by M. Reinach, on Sterrett's " Inscriptions of Assos ; " and hy W.
M. Ramsay, on his own "Notes and Inscriptions from Asia Minor."
Revue de la Numwnatique Grecque el Romaine, by Ernest Babelon. An
exhaustive and comprehensive review of the articles and monographs
recently published on Numismatics in reviews and periodicals.
Correspondence. — Congres Archeologique de France a Montbrison, by X.
(an account of the excursions made by the Congress in the Forez). Exca-
vations in Malta, by John Worthington.
Reviews and Notices of Booh. — E. Miintz's Donatella, and Fortnum's
Christian Gems, by C. C. Perkins. E. Molinier's Diclionnaire des Emailleurs,
and Caruana's Ilypogeum Tal-Liebru, by A. L. Frothingham, Jr.
Archreoloi/ical News. — Africa (Egypt, Tunisia) ; Asia (Cambodia, Hindu-
stan, Arabia, Palestine, Phoenicia, Armenia, Persia, Asia-Minor); Europe
(Greece, Italy, Malta, France, Spain, Switzerland, Belgium, Germany,
Austria Hungary, Turkey, Roumania, Russia, Norway, Great Britain);
America (United States).
Summaries of Periodicals. — Antiqvarisk Tidskrift — Archiiologisehe Zeitung
— Bulletin Monumental — Bullettino della Commis. Archeologica Comunale
di Roma — 'Eiin/ieplc 'Apxaiotoywn — Gazette Archeologique — Manadsblad —
Mittheilungen d. Deutschen ArchiLol. Inst. — Revue Archeologique — Revne
de T Art Chretien— L'Art.
Archtzoloyic.al Com/rases.— Congress of the French Archaeological Society
— Congress of Belgian Societies at Antwerp.
Programme of Volume II, 1886.
During 1880 contributions from England, France, Germany, Greece, Italy,
Sweden, Malta, and India are expected, in the form of articles, correspond-
ence, or notes. Special attention will be given la the part devoted to archte-
ologlcal news and to the summaries of periodicals.
The Second volume will include the following articles : Prof. Merriam
will complete his learned study on the Kretan Laws, and will publish sum;
almost unique painted Egyptian steles owned in New York ; J. T. Clarke,
the explorer of Assos, will illustrate a proto-ionic capital found in theTroad,
important for the origin of the Ionic order, and will contribute other papers
illustrating the work of the late expedition to Assos; Prof. Ramsay will
continue his Notes and Inscriptions from Asia Minor ; Dr. Ch. Waldstein
will write on differences in the style of Skopas and Praxiteles, and on the
Etruscan sarcophagi at Boston, one of which is of unique importance; he
will also explain the plan on which the collection of casts from antique
sculpture in the Museum at Cambridge, England, has been formed, etc. ;
J. Menant, the noted Assyriologist, will illustrate some of the most im-
portant of the Babylonian and Assyrian cylinders in American collections,
especially at the Metropolitan Museum, N. Y. ; Dr. W. EL Ward is to
publish some antiquities studied or purchased by him during his journey
through Babylonia; S. Reinach will contribute one or more papers illus-
trating some of the antique sculpture at the Museum of Constantinople ; Dr.
A. Emerson will write on the Athena Parthenos; E. Babelon is to give
a full account, in the several issues, of the recent discoveries at Susa, in
Arabia, in Phoenicia, and in Assyria, as well as a review of recent books on
Numismatics ; F. Trawinski's contribution will give an account of the
numerous archaeological societies in France ; Dr. Frothingham will con-
tinue his Notes on Christian mosaics, and will publish some inedited docu-
ments; and other papers on Christian archaeology will be contributed by
L. Duchesne, O. Marucchi, and E. Molinier. Scandinavian antiquities
will be treated by the authoritative pen of Prof. Hans Hildebrand, of
Stockholm. Other original papers and correspondence are expected from
the distinguished German archaeologists, Fr. von Reber, Th. Schreiber,
and W. Helbig. The latest discoveries and investigations in India will be
reported on by Mr. Robert Sewell, those in Rome by Prof. (). Maruc-
chi, and those in Greece will probably be described by Prof. Allen.
Several contributions are expected from investigators in the field of Ameri-
can Archaeology, notably from W. H. Holmes and V. Mindeleff of Wash-
ington, and from F. W. Putnam and Lucien Carr of Cambridge.
Modern Language Notes.
The first of a series of " Modern Language Notes" issued by A. M.
Elliott, Managing Editor, and II. A. Todd, J. W. Bright, and J. Goebel,
Associate Editors, has recently been printed in Baltimore.
The following statements are reprinted from the announcement of publi-
cation by the Editors :
These "Notes" (issued as the private enterprise of the editors) are
" intended to satisfy, as far as may be and in a modest way, the want felt
among the professors and teachers of modern languages for some special
organ of communication, by giving succinct original articles, by furnishing
short reviews of the chief American and foreign new publications, by calling
attention briefly to the meetings of literary and learned societies, by notic-
ing topics of personal interest, such as the work of individual scholars,
changes in the personnel of our colleges, current papers or articles by modern
language instructors, newly announced courses of study, etc. These 'Notes'
will be especially adapted to the use of teachers and will contain, therefore,
in addition to the above, short discussions of pedagogical questions, partic-
ularly of such as bear upon the academic study of the languages in question.
"By modern languages arc here meant primarily the English, ( ierman and
Romance idioms, in their earlier as well as later phases, though the treat-
ment of other forms of living speech will not be excluded.
" The desire of the editors is to give to this little periodical as scientific a
character as may be possible, considering the present status of modern lan-
guage study in America. The volume will consist of a series of eight num-
bers, beginning with January and continuing monthly through the year,
with a vacation interval from July to October inclusive. Each number of
the present volume will contain at least twenty-four columns of printed
matter. The price to subscribers is one dollar per annum. Price per num-
ber, twelve cents. Subscriptions may be sent to the managing editor."
48
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46.
THE STUDENTS' "HOUSE OF COMMONS
OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS.
Constitution.
Article I. — Name.
The name of this society shall be " The Hopkins House of Commons."
Article II. — Object.
The object of this society shall be the promotion of the art of debate.
Article III. — Membership.
Section 1. All students in regular attendance on the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, who are not members of any other similar organization in that
institution, shall be eligible as regular members of this society, when nomi-
nated by the Executive Ministry.
Section 2. The duties and privileges of regular membership in this
society, once assumed, can be renounced only by resignation, under the
conditions, and in accordance with the rules hereinafter set forth ; or by
the final termination of the member's connection with the Johns Hopkins
University as a student.
Section 3. For the election of regular members of this society a vote of
the majority of the members present at any regular meeting shall be
required.
Section 4. A willful absence from four successive meetings of the society
shall be considered equivalent to an accepted resignation, and shall exclude
a member from all privileges as such. Excuses for absence may be offered
to the Executive Ministry, who shall be constituted judges of their validity.
Section 5. Honorary members of the House, with the privilege of debating,
may be elected by a two-thirds vote of the members present at any regular
meeting of the House, on the nomination of the Executive Ministry.
Article IV. — Outline of Government.
Section 1. The executive government of this society shall be vested in an
Executive Ministry, a Speaker, and a Sergeant-at-Arms.
Section 2. The Executive Ministry shall consist of a Prime Minister, a
Secretary for Foreign Affairs, and a Home Secretary. The Prime Minister
shall be appointed by the Speaker, in accordance with rules hereinafter set
forth, the Secretary for Foreign Affairs and the Home Secretary by the
Prime Minister.
Section 3. The Speaker shall be elected by a majority of votes cast by
ballot of the members present at the first regular meetings in October and
February, and shall hold office until his successor shall have been installed.
Section 4. The Sergeant-at-Arms shall be appointed by the Speaker to
serve during his term of office.
Section 5. The Speaker shall also appoint a Clerk to serve during his
term of office.
Article V. — Duties of Officers.
Section 1. It shall be the duty of the Executive Ministry to propose bills
for discussion by the House, to direct the order of proceedings in the House,
and to act as its executive committee in carrying out all business not
entrusted to any other committee.
Section 2. It shall be the duty of the Prime Minister to appoint the Sec-
retary for Foreign Affairs and the Home Secretary, to act as chairman of
the Ministry, and to draft for presentation to the House all questions
decided upon by them.
Section 3. It shall be the duty of the Secretary for Foreign Affairs to con-
duct the correspondence of the House, and to act as its representative or
agent in all dealings with outside bodies or individuals.
Section 4. It shall be the duty of the Home Secretary to see that the
rooms of the society are prepared for its use, and to supervise the Clerk of
the House in the keeping of the minutes and records of the society, and in
preparing the business docket.
Section 5. The speaker shall preside over all meetings of the society ; shall
construe and enforce the constitution and by-laws of the society, and the
rules of practice, subject always to an appeal to the House; shall appoint
the Prime Minister, Sergeant-at-Arms, the Clerk, all special committees
ordered by the House, and irtl officers pro tempore ; and shall perform all
other duties usually pertaining to presiding officers.
Section 6. It shall be the duty of the Sergeant-at-Arms to act as the min-
isterial agent of the Speaker in enforcing order.
Section 7. The Clerk shall keep a full and exact record of the proceedings
of the society, and an alphabetical roll of the members of the society ; shall
carefully preserve all its records, and all documents that may be entrusted
to his keeping; shall transcribe, in a book kept for that purpose, all addi-
tions and amendments to the constitution and by-laws of the society; and
shall keep and announce in order a full business docket. He shall be in
everything subject to the supervising authority of the Home Secretary.
It shall be the duty of the Clerk to post on one of the University bulletin
boards, three days previous to every regular meeting of the House, a notice
stating the heading of the next two bills on the docket.
All persons, on being elected members of the Hopkins House of Com-
mons, shall be informed of the fact within forty-eight hours, by the Clerk
in writing. If the initiation does not take place within three -weeks such
election shall be declared null and void.
Article VI. — Regular Business.
Section 1. It shall be the duty of the Executive Ministry and the privi-
lege of any member to propose questions for discussion by the House.
Section 2. Every question must be introduced in the form of a written
bill, and must pass through the regular course of three readings and consid-
eration, either by a special committee, or the committee of the whole.
Section 3. No bill shall pass through more than two readings at the same
meeting of the House.
Section 4. Bills proposed shall be put upon the docket by the Clerk in the
order of their presentation, which shall be the order of their consideration,
unless otherwise ordered by a vote of two-thirds of those present at any
regular meeting of the House.
Section 5. Bills may be introduced by private members only by leave of
the Executive Ministry after at least one week's notice given of the inten-
tion to introduce a bill, and of the character of the measure to be proposed.
Similar notice must be given by the Ministry of the introduction of bills to
be proposed by themselves.
Section 6. The Home Secretary shall keep the Ministry advised of the state
of the docket; the Ministry shall see that the discussion of pending bills is
facilitated ; and shall refuse leave to introduce a bill only when its introduc-
tion would inconveniently crowd the docket, unless the bill proposed be of
a sort which they think out of keeping with the purposes of the society.
Section 7. All motions concerning the appointment of special committees,
or expressing the opinions of the House as to the course of the Ministry, or
as to any other matter not proper for the form of a bill, must be submitted
in writing, and signed by the mover.
Article VII. — Responsibility of the Ministry.
Section 1. The Executive Ministry shall be responsible to the House for
their opinion on all bills concerning political questions, and upon all propo-
sitions affecting the business of the society, or the amendment of the consti-
tution. If, at any time in a vote upon such questions, they shall be left in
a minority, they shall be expected to place their resignations in the hands
of the Speaker, before the next regular meeting of the society.
Section 2. It shall be the duty of the speaker to accept such resignations,
and to appoint a new Prime Minister from the majority represented in such
a vote ; and the Prime Minister so appointed shall choose his colleagues from
the majority which he represents.
Section 3. The House may at any time pass a direct vote of want of confi-
dence in the Ministry, under the form of a resolution ; and upon the passage
of such a resolution the Ministry shall resign and be replaced as directed
in sections 1 and 2 of this article.
Article VIII. — Resignation of Membership.
Section 1. Whenever any member wishes to resign, he shall signify his
desire in writing to the Executive Ministry, stating fully his reasons, and
upon obtaining their acquiescence, may withdraw.
January, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
49
Section 2. The Ministry shall be responsible to the House for the exercise
of this, as for the exercise of all their other prerogatives.
Article IX. — Collection and Expenditure of Moneys.
Section 1. The Prime Minister shall have control of all the moneys con-
tributed by the House.
Section 2. At the beginning of his term of office the Prime Minister shall,
under the title of Budget, submit to the House in writing an estimate of the
expenses of the House for the ensuing three months.
Section 3. The Budget shall be considered by the House in a committee
of the whole under the title of '' The House Committee on Appropriations,"
and the Budget, when accepted by the House, shall afterwards be cast by
the Prime Minister into the shape of resolutions, which shall, for their
adoption, pass through the regular course of three readings and a committee
of the whole.
Section 4. If the Budget be rejected, or any appropriation contained
therein be refused by a vote of the House, the Ministry shall resign, and
such vote shall be considered as a direct vote of want of confidence.
Section 5. After the Budget has been accepted by the House, the Prime
Minister shall submit to the House in writing a plan for raising the moneys
appropriated by the Budget.
Section 6. The plan of the Prime Minister for raising the moneys appro-
priated by the Budget shall be considered by the House in a committee of
the whole under the title of " The House Committee of Ways and Means ; "
and the plans sanctioned by this committee shall afterwards be cast by the
Prime Minister into the shape of resolutions, which shall for their adoption
pass through the regular course of three readings, and a committee of the
whole.
Section 7. At the expiration of his term of office, and at the expiration of
the Speaker's term, each Prime Minister shall submit to the Speaker a
written statement' of the expenditures of the House for his term of office,
and of the then condition of the finances of the House.
Section 8. At the expiration of his term of office the Speaker shall submit
to the House a written statement of the expenditures of the House during
his term of office, and of the then condition of the finances of the House;
such statement to be compiled from the statements of the Prime Minister.
Section 9. At any time at the written request of two-thirds of the members
of the House, the Speaker shall be authorized to require from the Prime
Minister such a statement, which he shall submit to the House.
Article X. — Changes in Constitution and By-Laws.
Section 1. All motions and resolutions affecting the constitution or by-laws
of this society shall be submitted in writing and pass through three read-
ings and a committee of the whole; and not more than two readings shall
be taken at one sitting of the House.
Section 2. A unanimous vote of the members present at a regular meeting
of the society shall be necessary to amend this constitution; but a vote of
two-thirds of the members present at any regular meeting shall be sufficient
to amend the by-laws.
Section 3. Two-thirds of the members present at any regidar meeting of
the society may, by a single vote, suspend for that sitting any provision of
the by-laws.
By-Laws.
Article I. — Meetings.
Section 1. The House shall meet every Monday evening during the session of the Uni-
versity at eight o'clock p. ni., with power of adjournment for any period by a two-thirds
vote.
Section 2. The Speaker shall call special meetings of the House at the request of the
Executive Ministry or of ten members of the Society.
Section 3. If, after having been properly requested to do so, the Speaker fail to call a
meeting of the House, the Executive Ministry or a quorum of members may convene it,
after having given twenty-four hours' notice of the time and object ot the meeting. Notice
posted upon two of the University bulletin boards shall be sufficient if signed by the mem-
bers of the Ministry, or by a quorum of the members of the Society.
Article II. — Quorum.
One-third of the members of the Society shall constitute a quorum for the transaction
of business.
Article III. — Order of Business.
1. Roll-Call.
2. Reading, correction, and adoption of minutes of the last meeting.
3. Installation of officers.
4. Nomination, election, and initiation of new members.
5. Election of officers.
t>. Regular order of docket business.
7. Motions and resolutions.
8. Notice by the Ministry of the introduction of measures.
9. Notice by private members, after leave asked and obtained of the Ministry, of Intro-
duction of bills.
10. Notice of election of officers.
11. Adjournment.
Article IV.— Miscellaneous Business.
Section 1. The Sneaker shall give notice of every election of officers at least one week
before it is to take place.
Section 2. To adjourn before the regular order of business has been completed shall
require a vote of two-thirds of the members present. The motion to adjourn shall be
debatable.
Section 3. At the request of live members a rising vote shall be taken j at the request
of ten members the vote shall be taken by Yeas and Nays.
Hon 4. The rules of parliamentary practice, as set forth in Roberts' " Rules of Order,"
shall govern the proceedings of this society in so far as they are not inconsistent with any
provision of its constitution or by-laws.
Article V. — Fbrm of Initiation.
The Speaker shall request the newly elected member (or members) to come forward and
sign the constitution, and shall then address him (or them) in the following words:
"Sir, (or Sirs),— You have voluntarily become a member (or members) of this society,
and I have therefore, in its name, to lay you under the most solemn injunctions to obey
and uphold its constitution ; to observe all propriety as a member and a gentleman (or as
members and gentlemen) j and to advance by a strict adherence to duty the object of its
organization."
Article VI.— Speaker's Decisions.
Section 1. The House may at auy time, by a majority vote, require within one week a
written decision from its Speaker on any point with reference to the government of the
House, or on the interpretation of its constitution. Said decisions when presented to the
House by the Speaker shall lie over for one week, when the House shall adopt, amend, or
reject the same, as it sees tit.
Section 2. In case the House adopts the same as a whole, or with amendments, said
decision as adopted shall be recorded in a book kept for that purpose, and the decisions
thus recorded shall be signed by the Speaker and the Clerk.
RECENT DISCUSSION OF THE SOCIETY'S CONSTITUTION.
(From a letter by Mb. Lakgdon Williams in The A'alion, N. Y., No. 1065, November 26,
1885).
. . . The literary societies of our colleges are chiefly of two sorts — either
devoted to the reading of essays and other similar literary productions
written by the students, or else devoted to formal debates on subjects of
small general interest. Societies of both these sorts have been tried at the
Johns Hopkins University, all commencing most promisingly, but invariably
dying a natural death within a few months. Interest flagged after the first
few meetings, while the students had too much to do to spend time in pre-
paring essays or reading up for fixed topics of debate.
Last year, however, at the suggestion of one of the Fellows in History, a
new departure was made. At a mass-meeting the students decided to
establish a deliberative assembly, resembling, as much as possible, the
English House of Commons. The proposer of the scheme prepared the
draft of a constitution, on the model of one he had seen working at another
college, which was adopted, with some few alterations, by the students.
The "Hopkins House of Commons " was incorporated. The officers were
to be as follows: (1) a speaker elected twice a year, who was to have all the
duties of the same officer in the English House of Commons, and, beodee,
the executive power of appointing the prime minister; (2) a prime minister,
who was always to belong to the majority of the house ; (3) a foreign secre-
tary and (4) a home secretary, who were to assist the prime minister in
deliberation and debate — the two secretaries being appointed by the prime
minister. The speaker was also to appoint a sergeant-at-arms for the
preservation of order, and a clerk to note the proceedings.
With this working machinery, bills are introduced and put through all
the readings and forms of a deliberative assembly, and adopted or rejected
according to the disposition of the house. The Opposition lunches are, as
a rule, almost as full as the ministerial seats, causing the rivalry to be very
active and the interest unflagging. Meetings are held every Monday
evening at eight o'clock, and the house seldom adjourns before eleven.
The attendance is very large, often reaching twenty-five or thirty, while an
excellent rule, that four successive absences shall be equivalent to a i
nation, insures constant, consecutive attendance. The second year lias
opened with a membership almost doubled, which is not confined to under-
graduate students alone, for the roll contains the names of a number of
graduate students.
50
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46.
... In closing, I will add the names of some of the bills which have been
introduced and debated: Bill 3, on the Nicaragua Canal; Bill 4, Local
Option ; Bill 5, Increase of U. S. Navy ; Bill 10, to admit ex-Presidents
to the Senate. . . .
(From i letter by "J. H. U., '83" in The Nation, N. Y. No. 1066, Dec. 3, 1885).
... In times past great difficulty has been experienced in getting the students
together for this and kindred purposes, mainly from the fact that they are
scattered throughout the city, and do not find conventional debates sufficiently
alluring to entice them from their homes. In addition, the various courses
of study prescribed by the University leave but little time to read up the
many abstruse questions submitted for discussion. For the same reasons it
has been found almost impossible to place secret societies on a firm basis,
the social attractions of the outer world rendering such organizations super-
fluous. Under these circumstances, the establishment of * mimic Lower
House, where all the forms and ceremonials are gone through with, and
embryo Gladstones and Parnells "move the previous question," was a very
happy thought.
But would it not have been better to model it on our own House of
Representatives — a body assuredly in no wise inferior to the British House
of Commons in dignity, ability, or influence? Apart from an interest in
home institutions thus fostered, it would familiarize our future statesmen
with the forms of procedure practised in Congress, and prove of incalculable
benefit to them in after life. -The Johns Hopkins University has never,
hitherto, been accused of Anglomania. It is preeminently sui generis — a
little Germanic in its predilections, if you like, but liberal and catholic
withal. This broadness, however, should not be carried to the extent of
developing Parliamentarians at the expense of Congressmen ; for although
the matter discussed may as your correspondent says, make " good citizens
and intelligent voters," the manner of consideration is not in consonance
with American institutions.
(From an editorial article in The Evening Post, N. Y., December 3, 18S5).
... It is objected by a correspondent whose letter we print elsewhere that
American students should take as their model the Senate or House of Rep-
resentatives, and he would be right but for one thing. The rules of the
Home of Representatives are nearly all made with the view of confining
the preparation an I discussion of bills to the committee rooms, and shorten-
ing or preventing debate on them in the House. Debates in that House
accordingly are now rare and excite little attention, and above all want the
personal element which nearly every great debate in the House of Commons
possesses. The Ministry being the author of all or nearly all legislation,
the defeat of a bill means not simply its rejection, but the expulsion of its
authors from power. In other words, the debate has a dramatic denoue-
ment which increases enormously the interest and excitement of the dis-
cussion. In our House of Representatives as well as in the Senate, on the
other hand, nobody in particular being responsible for legislation, nobody
Buffers or gains in emolument or credit by its failure or success. The effect
of this on the character of our Congressional oratory everybody knows. The
speeches are mostly essays, carefully written out beforehand, listened to by
nobody, and really intended for the Congressional Record.
The great objection to the old debating societies was that they cultivated
facility in speaking without doing much for knowledge or thoughtfulness.
The subjects selected were usually subjects for an essay rather than a speech
— that is, were often far beyond the scope of contemporary interest, and, at
all events, rarely afforded an opportunity to the contending orators of bring-
ing their jitpqto to an issue. Whether Charles I suffered justly, or whether
Washington or Cromwell was the greater man, or what are the relative
merits of direct and indirect taxation, are subjects which might be debated
for a month, without any other result than showing that a great deal could
be said, and well said, on both sides.
In such a Parliament as that started in Baltimore, however, one side has
to begin by that best of all tests of a man's comprehension of a political
question, the framing of a bill to carry out his views. Of all known methods
of making a hole in a windbag, of revealing to a man, as well as to his
neighbor*, how much he knows, or does not know, of what he is talking
about, and how much and what kind of consideration he has given his sub-
ject, the best is to ask him to embody his desires in a law which will be
constitutional, which will not conflict with previous legislation, which the
courts can interpret, which can be easily executed, which will not derange
trade or industry, and which will produce in practice all the results ex-
1'nUil of it, and no others.
There can be no better exercise, therefore, for any one, young or old, who
wants to get at the bottom of a political or economical question, to test
thoroughly his own acquaintance with it, and the practical value of his own
ideas about it, than preparing a bill dealing with it, and then defending and
explaining it before people who do not agree with him. And there can,
on the other hand, be no better preparation for the work of drafting bills
one's self than criticising bills drafted by other people, in their presence, and
after hearing them. And this sort of training is every day becoming more
and more important because of the growing demand for the interference of
the State in matters which fifty, or even twenty-five years ago, were gene-
rally considered wholly outside its jurisdiction. It is now constantly asked
to meddle with currency, with railroads, with labor, and tariff, in ways
which the last generation never thought of. Most of the advocates of this
interference think they have settled the matter when they show that it
would be humane or Christian for the State to interfere. But they rarely
or never touch the greatest question of all, in what manner the State
should interfere, and what would be the results near and remote of its
interference. Now, if they could be seized, and organized in small com-
mittees or cabinets, and compelled to produce bills carrying out their views,
and to show before critical opponents how the bill would work in a given
connmity, what a flood of light would often be let in on their own minds,
and how much vain speech we should be spared. . . .
In England this sort of exercise is not confined to young men in colleges.
Within the last few years, we are informed, 150 of these Parliaments have
been organized in London and other cities, all on the model of the House
of Commons, which men of all ages and pursuits join for the purpose of par-
ticipating in a thorough sifting of questions of the day in which they are
interested, and which have not yet made their way into Parliament, and
finding out what they do not know about them. . . .
(From a letter by "A Member of the Hopkins House of Commons," in The Nation,
N. Y., No. 1007, Dec. 10, 1885).
. . . Your correspondent (J. H.U., 1883) having admitted the superiority
of a mimic constitutional assembly over the stereotyped literary society,
suggests as a model the House of Representatives, in preference to the
British House of Commons. In vindication of our choice, I deem it only
necessary to point out two cardinal instances in the methods of procedure
practiced by the two bodies, wherein that of the British House of Commons
is better adapted to meet the requirements of a debating society than that
of the lower house of Congress.
First, it presents absolutely no check to debate, and although your cor-
respondent distinctly asserts that "it was a very happy thought" to estab-
lish a mimic House, where "embryo Gladstones and Parnells move the
previous question," I would respectfully inform him that the underlying
virtue of the constitution of the House of Commons, at least in so far as it
concerns the case in question, is that it positively prevents "embryo" (or
in fact real) Gladstones and Parnells from moving the " previous question."
When, however, we compare with this the opportunity afforded for debate
by the rules of (he House of Representatives, we are at once opposed by an
intricate system of committee legislation, . . . which has become so oppres-
sive that, to quote a correspondent in a recent edition of the New York
Herald, it has "crippled and disabled the House, and very greatly dimin-
ished its influence." It must therefore be evident, that to modify the rules
of the House of Representatives by abolishing the various committees and
the use of the " previous question " until they should conform to our needs,
the identity would so far be lost that we should hope in vain to secure the
object desired by " J. EL U. '83 " — " to familiarize our future statesmen with
the forms of procedure practiced in Congress."
Secondly, our Constitution offers continual incentive for debate, for
scarcely had our "House" been organized when there at once rose a party
line which has been constantly growing better defined ; and inasmuch as on
the defeat of a Ministry a new one must be appointed from the ranks of the
Opposition, the one side is always striving to retain the honors and the
other to win them. In a mimic House of Representatives, the only honor
would be the Speakership, in which, at best, a change could only be made
by election, every two or three months, while in our " House of Commons,"
the honors may be won at any moment by an opposition made willing and
anxious to debate by the prospect of " assuming the toils of office." . . .
January, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
51
CURRENT NOTES
ADDITIONS TO THE REGISTER OF STUDENTS.
(See University Circular No. 4-1, pp. 14, etc., and No. 45, p. 33).
Fellows by Courtesy.
George B. Brewer. Baltimore. Bay View Asylum.
M I).. Harvard University, I8H5. ltyAotogm\
Elias J. MacEwan. Agricultural Coll., Mich. 201 W. Huffman St.
A. B-. Kalamazoo College. 1875. and A. .M. 1877; Professor in Michigan Agricultural
College. KngHtM <u«l PAilMnpAy.
John Phelps Tayi.ok. Andovcr, Mass. 258 Linden Av.
A. B., Yale College, 1862, and A. M., 1867 ; Professor in Andover Theological Seminary.
SPumitie Lamguagtt.
Graduate Students.
William A. Blair. High Point, N. C. 120 N. Greene St.
A. B., Ilaverford College, 1881 ; A. B„ Harvard College, 1882. ritilomjilnj.
Alfred H. Bucherer. Ehrenfeld, Germany. . 330 N. Eutaw St.
Cologne Gymnasium, 1883. Chtntintry.
Gilbert R. Hammond. Yellow Springs, O. 11 Franklin St.
A. B., Union Christian College, 1876, and A. M., 1.^79 ; I'rofessor of Latin, Antioch College.
Latin.
C. Richmond Harding. Graham, N. C. 87 N. Charles St.
A. B., Davidson College, 1880. (,'"./,.
Clifton F. Hodge. Janesville, Wis. 91 McOulloh St.
A. B., Rinon College, 1882. Biolugy.
Edward A. Schneider. Baltimore. 226 Druid Hill Av.
Ph. D., University of Freiburg, 18SI. Okmntttry.
Charles L. Smith. Raleigh, N. C 120 N. Greene St.
8. B., Wake Forest Collcgo, 1881. JKttory iu4 PoJttte.
John it. Vincent. Elyria, O. 35 McCulloh St.
A. B., Oberlin College, 1-83. Ilittory and FsJMef.
Candidates for Matriculation.
Richard C Duncan. Elyria, O. 24 McOulloh St.
Lehigh University. Group II.
(18834ft Total number now enrolled, 177 Graduate, and 129 Undergraduate Students -■ 306).
ADDITIONS TO THE LIST OF PERIODICALS IN CIRCULAR 42.
The following list give- the litlcsof the periodicals added to the catalogue of those taken
by the Library of the University since the publication of the general list in Circular No.
■1'J. September, 18S5. The total number of periodicals regularly received by the Library
exceed 750.
American Law Review. St. Ix>uis, Mo.
Antiquarischc Tidskrift for Sverige. Stockholm.
Archivio Vencto. Venice.
Athens: Ecole Francaise d'Aroheologie: Bulletin.
Bibliographisch. Anzeiger f. Roman. Sprachen u. Litteraturen. Lcipsic.
Botanical Gazette. Indianapolis.
Brooklyn: Long Island Historical Society : Publications.
Brookville, Ind. : Society of Natural Science: Publications.
Brussels: Societe Royale Malacologique de Belgique.
Bulletin Astronomique. Paris.
Bulletin de Correspondance Ilellenique. Athens.
Bulletino di Archeologia e Storia Dalmata. Spalato.
Casopis. Prague.
Christian Register. Boston.
Church Review. New York.
Correspondenz-Blatt d. Deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Anthropologie, etc. Munich.
Dorpat, Russia : Naturforsch. Gesellschaft : Publications.
Emden : Gesellschaft f. Bildende Kunst, etc. : Jahrbuch.
EipTi/iepir 'Apxaio'Aorjiiii]. Athens.
Erlangen : Physikal.-Medicinische Societiit : Publications.
Glasgow: Observatory of University: Publications.
Innsbruck : Institut f. Oesterr. Geschichtsforschung : Mittheilungen.
Journal of American Medical Association. Chicago.
Kasan: Physico-Mathematical Society: Publications.
Latine et Graoce. New Brunswick, N. J.
Lincoln, Neb.: Nebraska State Historical Society: Publications.
London : Royal Historical Society : Publications.
Modena : Societe' des Naturalistes : Publications.
Munich: Deutsche Gesell. f. Anthropologie, etc.: Publications.
Neuphilologische Studien. Paderborn.
New England Magazine. Boston.
New Princeton Review. New York.
Nouvelles Soirees Canadlennes. Ottawa.
Nuovo Cimento. Pisa.
Observatory. London.
Occident. San Francisco.
Paris : Socitite' de Linguistique : MCmoires.
Paris: SociCte" d'Economie Sociale: Bulletin.
Prague: Czech Mathematical Society : Publications.
Revista pentru Istorie Archeologie si Filologie. Bucharest, Roumania.
Revue d'Assyriologie et d'Archeologie Orientale. Paris.
Revue de l'Extreme Orient. Paris.
Revue d'Ethnographie. Paris.
Revue de la Legislation des Mines. Paris.
Revue du Monde Latin. Paris.
Revue Numismatique. Paris.
Rhode Island Historical Magazine. Newport.
Riga: Naturforsch. Verein: Publications.
Sedalia, Mo. : Natural History Society : Publications.
Singapore: Straits Branch of Royal Asiatic Society : Publications.
Stockholm: K. V. Historisch. and Antiquitets Akademie: Publications.
Toronto: Canadian Institute: Publications.
Venice : R. Dep. Veneto s. g. Studi di Storia Patria : Publications.
Wal ford's Antiquarian. London.
Worcester, Mass. : Society of Antiquity : Publications.
LECTURES ON EDUCATIONAL TOPICS
In Hopkins Hall, Saturdays, at 9.30 a. m.
(Preliminary Announcement).
The third annual course of Educational Lectures by various
members of the Faculty began on Saturday, January 9, 1886.
By special request, Dr. Isaac H. Hall repeated, on that date, the sub-
stance of his lecture " on the reproduction of manuscript by typography,"' —
a lecture which was introductory to his public course now in progress.
The regular course will be given as follows :
January 16. D. C. Gilman: The Obstacles and the Aids to Success in
an Intellectual Life, which will be met by young Americans.
January 23. A.M.Elliott: The Realgymnasium Question.
January 30. 11. Wood : The Romantic Ideal in Education.
February 6. H. B. Adams: History in American Universities.
February 13.
February 20. R. T. Ely : The Educational Value of Trades' Unions.
E. M. Hartwell: The Health of Students: how secured
Feb.
ruary 1 1 .
and promoted.
Lectures will also be given by Professors Hall, Haupt, and Remsen.
LECTURES ON SPECIAL TOPICS IN CHEMISTRY.
The annual course of lectures on special topics in Chemistry
will be given in Lecture Room B of the Chemical Laboratory,
on successive Fridays, at 10 a. m., as follows :
February 5, 12. Ira Remsen : Baeyer's Investigations on the Phthaleins.
February 19. W. H. Emerson: Investigations on the Oxidation of
Ketones.
February 26. J. H. Kastle: On Thiophene and its Derivatives.
March 5. C. W. Hayes: Fittig's Investigations on the Aromatic Hydro-
carbons.
March 1 2. C. S. Palmer : The Earlier History of the Chemistry of Indigo.
March 19. J. R. Duggan : On Hydroxylamine.
March 2d. J. F. Woodhull: On Nitrification.
April 2. W. R. Orndorff : On Kosaniline.
April 9. E. Renouf : On the Hydrazines.
April 16. R. N. Brackett : Meyer's Investigations on the Nitro-
paraffins.
April 23. C. J. Bell: Syntheses by means of Aluminium Chloride.
April 30. W. H. Hobbs: On the Specific Gravity of Chlorine, Bromine,
and Iodine at High Temperatures.
May 7, 14. H. N. Morse: The History of Phosphorus.
No. 2 of Volume 8 of the American Journal of Mathematics is now
in press. It contains the following papers :
On the Linear Differential /•.'</>'«'"»' " '"'«' Fnmlmnrntal Integrals are the Suc-
cessive Derivatives of the Same Function (concluded). By Thomas Crak;.
On Ferpetuants, u-ith Application to the Theory of Finite Qualities. By J.
Hammond.
A'ote on Space Divisions. By E. EL Moore, Jr. and C. N. Little.
A'o/e on a Roulette. By A. V. Lane.
The Cubi-Quadric System. By J. Hammond.
On the Singularities of Curves of Double Curvature. By Henry B. Fine.
On a Linear Differential Equation of the Second Order. By Thomas Craig.
52
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46.
PHTSICS AT THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
(From a letter in Seiner, New York, December 18, 18S5).
The large and well-appointed laboratories recently erected by the trustees
of the Johns Hopkins University for the chemical and biological depart-
ments have by contrast made the more evident the needs of the physical
department, which has been obliged to occupy temporarily parts of four
different buildings. The trustees, recognizing this need, are now erecting
a building for a physical laboratory. The new laboratory is to be a hand-
some building of red brick, trimmed with brown sandstone, and will occupy
a fine site about a bio -k from the other university buildings, on the corner
of a quiet little street midway between the more important streets, which
carry the bulk of the traffic of that region. It will therefore be as free
from disturbance from the earth vibrations as could be expected in a city.
The building will be 115 feet long by 70 feet broad, and will have four
stories besides the basement. In the centre of the building, and below the
basement, are several vaults for instruments requiring to be used at a constant
temperature, also a fire-proof vault for storage. In these vaults will be
placed Professor Rowland's dividing-engine, by which the diffraction grat-
ings are ruled, and the Rogers-Bond comparator, which has recently become
the property of the university. In the basement will be rooms for the
mechanical workshop, for furnaces, and for piers for instruments requiring
great stability. The first floor will include the main lecture-room, which
will accommodate 150 persons, and rooms for investigations by advanced
students in heat and electricity. The second floor will contain mathematical
lecture-rooms, studies for instructors, and a room for the mathematical and
physical library of the university.
The elementary laboratory will be on the third floor, which will also
have rooms for more advanced work. The fourth floor will contain rooms
for special work in light.
There will be a tower on the south-east corner of the building, which will
have two rooms above the fourth floor. The upper of these will be pro-
vided with telescope and dome, and will be a convenient observatory when
great steadiness in the instruments is not required. There will be power
in the building for driving the machinery in the workshop and for running
the dynamo-machines. A large section of the building is to be made entirely
free from iron. The sash-wei-hts will be of lead, and the gas-pipes of brass.
Brackets will be attached to the walls, on which galvanometers and cathe-
tometers may be placed. In order to avoid the inconvenience of having
piers go up through the lower rooms, and yet to secure steadiness, beams
have been introduced into the floors, which reach from one wall to the other
between the regular floor-beams, and do not touch the floor at any point.
If, now, a table is made to rest on two of these beams, by making holes in
the floor over them to admit the legs of a table, it is entirely undisturbed
by any one walking over the floor, except by such motion as is transmitted
to the walls. There will also be a small vertical shaft in the wall of the
tower, running from top to bottom, in which a mercurial manometer may
be set up.
The vaults for constant temperature have been built with double walls,
■o that a current of air may be drawn between them whenever desirable
to prevent dampness. It is expected that the laboratory will be ready by
October next.
The photographic map of the spectrum upon which Professor Rowland
has expended so much hard work during the past three years is nearly
ready for publication. . . . (See page 41 of this Circular).
The Rogers-Bond comparator, which has been already referred to as hav-
ing been purchased by the university lately, is one of two instruments that
were constructed in 1881 by Pratt & Whitney of Hartford, Conn. The
general plan and requirements were made out by Prof. W. A. Rogers of
Cambridge, and the drawings and details were worked out by Mr. George
M. Bond, then a student at Stevens Institute. The comparator was designed
for making exact comparisons of standards of length. The other similar
comparator is owned by the Pratt & Whitney manufacturing company, and
is used by them in testing and constructing their standard guages.
The instrument consists essentially of two microscope carriages, which
glide on two parallel cylindrical steel ways between stops, which may be
clamped at any point. A carriage entirely independent of the ways on
which the microscopes slide, supports the two bars to be compared, and is
provided with means of accurate and rapid adjustment, by which the bars
may be successively brought into position under the microscopes, and the
lengths compared by the micrometers attached to the microscopes ; or one
microscope only need be used, and slid first against the stop at one end, and
then against that at the other end. The instrument also affords great facility
in determining fractions of a given length with any desired degree of pre-
cision. The instrument is one requiring the utmost skill in its construction,
and it cost several thousand dollars to make it. A full account of this
remarkable instrument is given in the Proceedings of the American Acad-
emy of Arts and Sciences for 1882-83. K.
SIR WILLIAM THOMSON TO THE COEFFICIENTS.
(From a letter in Science, New York, January 1, 1886).
I know of no easier way to reach those for whom the enclosed message was
especially intended than through the columns of Science. At the same time,
I believe it will be read with great interest by many who were not of the
somewhat limited number referred to. To such a brief explanation may
be due : —
At the close of the course of lectures by Sir William Thomson, at Balti-
more, in October, 18S4, it was determined by those who, through the cour-
tesy of the Johns Hopkins University, had enjoyed the privilege of listening
to the course, to present Sir William with a memento of the occasion which
had been, to them, of such unusual interest. Under the circumstances,
nothing could have been more fitting for this purpose than one of Professor
Rowland's large concave gratings, which was accordingly agreed upon.
Several months were required for the manufacture and examination of a
grating which was entirely satisfactory to Professor Rowland ; but early
in the past summer it was completed, and transmitted to Sir William
Thomson through the kindness of the secretary of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion. Professor George Forbes of London was present during the course of
lectures, and Lord Rayleigh attended a number of them. In the equations
of motion developed in the work there appeared twenty-one coefficients,
agreeing in number nearly, if not exactly, with the number of persons in
regular attendance upon the lectures. This relation was quickly noticed
by some one, and was made the basis of some humorous verses composed by
the genial and witty Forbes, which were read at a reception given to the
class by President Oilman, and were afterward published. Their title was
" The lament of the twenty-one coefficients in parting from each other and
from their much esteemed molecule."
The first stanza began : —
"An seolotropic molecule was looking at the view,
Surrounded' by his coefficients, twenty-one or two;"
and the whole will always possess much interest to those who were present.
With this explanation, I justify the title which I have given to the follow-
ing selections from a letter recently received from Sir William Thomson.
T. C. M.
Washington, D. C, December 28.
Sib William Thomson's Letter.
I wrote to Professor Rowland, acknowledging the receipt of the grating;
but I ought before now to have thanked all the other coefficients for their
kindness in giving it to me. I should feel greatly obliged if you would
transmit to those of the coefficients who are in America my heartiest thanks
for their great kindness, and say to them that the grating will be a permanent
memorial to me of the happy three weeks of 1884, when we were together
in Baltimore. . . . After the British Association meeting at Aberdeen, I
was delighted to be able to show the grating to some of our English appre-
ciators, — including one of the coefficients, George Forbes, and Lord Ray-
leigh, whom we may consider as, at all events, a partial coefficient; and
Professor Fitzgerald of Trinity College, Dublin ; Oliver Lodge of Liver-
pool; Glazebrooke of Cambridge; and Captain Creak of the compass
department of our admiralty, — who came to stay with us at Netherhall,
our country house, for a few days, on their way south. We had no sun-
light to work with, but we got the double sodium light in the first and
second spectrums from a salted spirit-lamp flame exceedingly well, and we
were all delighted with the result. I had never myself seen anything like
it before.
William Thomson.
The University, Glasgow, December 5.
January, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
53
HOPKINS SCHOLARSHIPS.
SPECIAL ATTENTION IS CALLED TO THE FOLLOWING REGULATIONS.
Regulations amended by the Board of Trustees, January 4, 1886.
In the will of the founder of the University, his Trustees are
requested to " establish, from time to time, such number of free
scholarships in the said University as may be judicious, and to
distribute the said scholarships among such candidates from the
States of Maryland, Virginia, and North Carolina, as may be
most deserving of choice, because of their character and intel-
lectual promise, and to educate the young men so chosen free
of charge."
In accordance with this request, the Trustees have established
thirty-eight such scholarships, of which twenty (yielding free tui-
tion) are designated as ordinary Hopkins Scholarships and eighteen
(yielding free tuition and an annual stipend of $250) are desig-
nated as Honorary Hopkins Scholarships. Holders of scholar-
ships are not free from laboratory fees.
Of the eighteen Honorary Hopkins Scholarships six are open
to students from Maryland, six to students from Virginia, and six
to students from North Carolina. The ordinary Hopkins Schol-
arships are open to students from any of those States. Students
can be recognized as candidates only when actual residents of the
States from which they desire to be appointed, during at least the
year next preceding their enrolment in the university. If the
appointing Board is not sure as to the legal residence of any
candidate, the point in question shall be determined by the Exec-
utive Committee of the Board of Trustees.
These scholarships are all bestowed for conspicuous merit, are
open only to matriculated undergraduate students from the speci-
fied States, and are tenable for the year subsequent to the
appointment, — the holders being re-eligible.
Successful candidates who are disposed, for the benefit of others
or for any other reason, to waive the remission of tuition fees or
the other pecuniary emolument, may do so, and still have their
names retained on the honor list. The scholarships may be for-
feited because of prolonged absence, defective scholarship, or
unworthy conduct.
Scholarships made vacant by resignation, by forfeiture, or by
the non-appearance of worthy candidates at the regular times of
selection may be bestowed by the appointing board, at their dis-
cretion, upon other candidates who are found worthy, provided
that the principles of this foundation are not departed from.
In ease the holder of an honorary scholarship gives it up
for any reason, during the course of a session, such part of the
Stipend will lie paid to him as seems equitable to the Executive
Committee of the Board of Trustees. The minor regulations in
respect to the method of selection are to be prescribed by the
Board of Collegiate Advisers.
Rfgulations amended by the Board of Collegiate Advisers,
December 12, 1885.
I.
Honorary Hopkins Scholarships.
The Honorary Hopkins Scholarships will be awarded at
the end of each academic year on the basis of the records of the
year's work just completed. The three students from each of the
States above named who have the best records in the regular work
of the first year, and the three from each of the States above
named who have the best records in the regular work of the
second year, will receive the appointment, provided that number
of candidates be found worthy.
II.
Hopkins Scholarships.
At the beginning of each academic year, after the matricu-
lation examinations are over, there will be held a special
examination of candidates for ten ordinary Hopkins Scholarships.
Students from the States above named who have just completed
their matriculation examinations will be eligible.
In addition, five ordinary Hopkins Scholarships will be given
at the end of each academic year to those students from the
States above named, whose records in the regular work of the first
year show that they stand next in order to those who have received
the Honorary Hopkins Scholarships ; and five ordinary Hopkins
Scholarships will likewise be awarded to those whose work, as
shown by the records, has been best in the second year courses.
Summary.
By the foregoing arrangements it is apparent that ten scholar-
ships are open to students from the favored States at the beginning
of the college course ; fourteen (of which nine are Honorary) at
the close of the first year ; and fourteen again (of which nine are
Honorary) at the close of the second year, tenable in all cases for
the year subsequent to the appointment.
WASHINGTON SCHOLARSHIPS.
The Trustees offer two scholarships, yielding free tuition, to
residents of the District of Columbia. These, like the Hopkins
Scholarships, are awarded for merit, do not carry exemption from
laboratory fees, and are tenable for one year, the holders being
eligible for re-appointment.
At a meeting of the Board of Collegiate Advisers, December 5, 1885, it
was voted "that the five vacant ordinary Hopkins Scholarships be given to
fully-matriculated students from the States of Maryland, Virginia, and
North Carolina : — two to the students with the best records who have com-
pleted six out of the nine subjects in one of the regular groups; and three
to the students with the best records who have completed three out of the
nine subjects in one of the regular groups."
The Board subsequently voted that no one should be appointed to an
ordinary Hopkins Scholarship, the average of whose marks is less than
"good." Upon a scrutiny of the marks the following persons were found
worthy and upon them the scholarships are accordingly bestowed:
W. S. Eichelberger, of Baltimore,
J. E. Harry, of Baltimore,
who have completed the work of the first and second years; — and
B. M. McLane, of Baltimore,
J. W. Williams, of Baltimore,
who have completed the work of the first year. r
H. B. ADAMS, Secretary pro tern., Board of Collegiate Advisers.
December 24, 1885
Host
{Appointed* 1883).
W. C. L. Gorton,
W. V. Smith,. .
A. C. Woods, . .
(Appointed, 1884).
E. C. Applcgarth,
T. Hough, . . .
>rary Hopkins
. Maryland.
. Maryland.
. Maryland.
. Maryland.
Virginia,
n, Maryland.
. Maryland.
Hopkins Scho
. Maryland.
. Maryland.
. Maryland.
. Maryland.
Scholars, 1885-86.
(Appointed, 1885).
G. P. Dreyer, . . .
R. C. Gildersleeve, .
W. 11. Miller, . .
W. F. Willoughbv, .
W. W. Willoughbv,
Maryland.
Maryland.
Maryland.
Virginia.
Virginia.
J. H. T. McPherso
E. L. White, . .
(Appointed, 1885).
H. H. Ballard, .
H. M. Brown,
A. L. Browne, .
W. L. Devries, .
LABS, 1885-86.
W. S. Eichelberger,
J. E. Harry, . . .
R. M. McLane, Jr.,
C. E. Simon, . . .
J. W. WiUiams, .
Maryland.
Maryland.
Maryland.
Maryland.
Maryland.
64
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 46.
HOPKINS HALL LECTURES AT 5 P. M.
MICRO-ORGANISMS IN DISEASE.
Dr. William H. Welch, Professor of Pathology, will give
nine lectures to Physicians and to students of Biology on Micro-
organisms in Disease, beginning Wednesday, February 3, and con-
tinuing on successive Wednesdays, at 5 o'clock, until March 31.
The lectures will be illustrated by cultures and microscopic
slides of pathogenic organisms.
The subjects to be considered in the lectures are :
The history of our knowledge concerning the relations of micro-organisms
to fermentation and putrefaction and to disease.
The classification and biology of bacteria in general.
The methods of demonstration and of cultivation of bacteria.
General characters of infectious diseases. What is necessary in order to
prove the causation of a given disease by a specific organism ?
Modes of infection. Bacteria in air, ground, water, and food.
Bacteria in healthy human beings.
Micro-organisms in special diseases, such as tuberculosis, splenic fever,
cholera, typhoid fever, leprosy, relapsing fever, erysipelas, pneumonia, sup-
purations, malaria, etc.
Diagnosis of diseases by recognition of micro-organisms.
Theories as to action of bacteria in disease. Ptomaines.
Doctrine of immunity. Attenuation of virus. Preventive inoculation.
Disinfectants. Bearings of the germ-doctrine of disease on sanitation and
on the prophylaxis and treatment of disease.
GERMAN LITERATURE.
Dr. Julius Goebel, Instructor in German, will give a course
of twelve lectures {in German) on the German Literature of the 18th
century, beginning Tuesday, February 23, and continuing on suc-
cessive Fridays and Tuesdays till April 2.
I.
Introduction.
(Tuesday, February 23).
The art of poetry. — Volks-and Kunstpoesie. — Short sketch of the develop-
ment of German literature before Klopstock. — Different methods of treating
the history of literature.
II.
Klopstock.
(Friday, February 26).
His life and development. — The first three cantos of the " Messias." —
Impression upon his contemporaries. — Illustration by a short specimen.
Criticism of the work.
III.
Klopstock.
(Tuesday, March 2).
His " Oden." The new ideas contained in them. Specimens. Criticism.
Influence upon Goethe.
IV.
Lessing.
(Friday, March 5).
Life and development. Criticism before Lessing. Lessing as a critic.
Literaturbriefe. Laokoon. Hamb. Dramaturgie. Theological quarrels.
V.
Lessing.
(Tuesday, March 9).
Leasing as a poet. Early dramas. Lyric poetry. His dramatic master-
works. Lessing's position in the mental "history of Germany.
VI.
Herder.
(Friday, March 12).
His life and development. Hamann. Kant. Kevolutionizing ideas.
Volkslied, Homer, Shakespeare, the Bible. Influence upon the younger
generation. Sturm- und Drangperiode.
VII.
Goethe.
(Tuesday, March 16).
His youth. Early poems. His poetic development as illustrated by
them. Genieperiode. Goetz. Werther.
VIII.
Goethe.
(Friday, March 19).
Goethe in Weimar. Frau von Stein. Lyric poems. Iphigenie. Tasso.
Journey to Italy.
IX.
Schiller.
(Tuesday, March 23).
His youth. Early dramas and lyric poems. Study of Kant's philosophy.
X.
Goethe and Schiller.
(Friday, March 26).
Schiller's great dramas. His ethical and aesthetic principles as embodied
in his poems. Mutual influence of Goethe and Schiller.
XI.
Goethe and Schiller.
(Tuesday, April 2).
Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Hermann und Dorothea, Balladen. Corres-
pondence with Schiller.
XII.
Goethe's Faust.
(Friday, April 5).
General Bibliography to the Lectures on German
Literature.
Schmidt, Julian. Geschichte der deutschen Literatur seit Lessing's Tod. Leipzig, 1866.
H. P.
Hettner, H. Geschichte der deutschen Literatur ini 18 Jahrhundert. Braunschweig,
1872. H. P.
Biedetmann, K. Deutschland im 18 Jahrhundert. Leipzig, 1880.
Stravss. Kleine Schriften. Berlin, 1866. P.
Danzel. Lessing, aein Leben und seine Werke. II. P.
Schmidt, Erich. Lessing. 1886.
IIaym,R. Herder, 1880-86. H. P.
Rieger, M. Klinger in der Sturm- und Drangperiode. Darmstadt, lc81.
Bernays, M. Der junge Goethe. Leipzig, 1876. P.
Grimm, II. Goethe's Leben. H. P.
Scholl, A. Goethe in den Hauptziigen seines Lebens. Berlin, 1882.
IIelincrt H. Die romantische Schule. Braunschweig, 1850.
Humbo/d, W. v. Goethe's Herm. und Dorothea. Braunschweig. 1882. H. P.
Haym, R. Die romantische Schule. Berlin, 1870.
&U(heyt W. Leben Sclileiermachers. Berlin, 1870.
Vischer, Fr. Goethe's Faust. Stuttgart, 1875. 11. P.
Cariire. Die Poesie. Leipzig, 1884.
RECENT DISCOVERIES IN ASSYRIA.
Dr. William Hayes Ward, of New York, Director of the
Wolfe Expedition to Assyria, will give two lectures on Recent
Discoveries in Assyria, on Thursday, February 18, and Friday,
February 19, 1886.
FRENCH LITERATURE.
M. Kabillon, Lecturer on French Literature, will give a
course of seventeen lectures (in French) on French Literature,
beginning Saturday, January 9, 1886, and continuing on suc-
cessive Saturdays to May 8.
January, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
55
PROFESSOR ISAAC H. HALL'S LECTURES ON THE HISTORY
OF THE PRINTED NEW TESTAMENT.
(Mondays, Tuesdays, and Thursdays, January 4-February io).
(See detailed programme on p. 29 of Circular 45.)
Outline Bibliography for Students.
(For a guide only; and to be enlarged and supplemented, in use, from the information
and references given iu the works enumerated).
(In General; to be consulted for the whole course).
(1). Prolegomena to Mill's Gr. N. T., Oxford, 1707; or Kiister's Mill, Amsterdam and
Rotterdam, 1710, Leipzig, 1723, 174G.
(2). Prolegomena to J. J.-Wetstein's Gr. N. T., Amsterdam, 1751 ; or Semler's edition,
1764.
(;i). Prolegomena to Teschendorf 'a Gr. N. Tests, of 1840, 1842, crit. maj. 1859, (Gregory
and Abbot) 1884. (All Leipzig).
(4). Westcott and Hort's Gr. N. T. 1881 (Cambridge), vol. ii; N. Y. edition, Introduc-
tion to vol. i, and vol. ii, 1881, '82.
(5). Tregelles' Home's Introduction to the Holy Scriptures, vol. iv, London, 1866, and
subsequent editions. Also Tregelles' Account of the Printed Text of the N. T., London,
1854: also his Apocalvpse, 1844.
(6). Reinhard, (J. B.), De N. T. Primis Editoribus, Wittenberg, 1717.
(7). Scrivener's Plain Introduction to K. T. Criticism, 3d ed., Cambridge, 1883.
(8). Reuss, (Ed.), History of the Sacred Scriptures of the N. T., translated by E. L.
Houghton, Boston, 1884. (The most valuable for bibliographical references).
(9). Schaff, (Philip), Companion to the Gr. T.. 2d ed., N. Y., 1885.
(10). Reuss, (Ed.*, Bibliotheca N. T., Gr., Strassburg, 1872. (Most important work in
the series).
(11). Hall, (I. H.). American Gr. Tests., Philadelphia, 1883.
(12). Articles in Smith's Bible Dictionary, American edition (of the highest impor-
tance for its references); Herzog and Plitt's, Meyer's, Schaff 's, and other encyclopedias;
Riehm's and other dictionaries, to be consulted under the proper word or subject, are
usually of great value; but not to be relied on without verifying the references. The
same is true of the Dictionaries of Biography and of Literature (especially of National
Literature) ; of which the best are in French, Dutch, Latin, and German. Articles in the
periodicals, old and new, are frequently the only existing sources; and by all means to
be looked up when referred to in works mentioned in this Outline.
(13). Masch, (A. Th.), Le Long's Bibliotheca Sacra, Halle, 1788.
(14). Le Long, (Jac.), Bibliotheca Sacra, Paris, 1723.
(15). Baunigarten, (Jac:.), Nachriehten von Merkwurdigen Buchcrn, and Nachrlehten
von einer Hallischen Bibliothek. Halle, 1748-1758.
(16). Knoch, (G. L. O.), Bibliotheca Biblica, Ac, 1752 ; and Nachr. v. d. Bibelsammlung
zu Braunschweig, 1749.
(17). Lorck, (Josias), Bibelgeschichte, 1779, '83.
(18). Goeze, (Job. Melchior), Verzeichniss meiner Bibelsammlung, 1777.
(19). Adler, (J. G. C), Bibliotheca Biblica, Ac. Lorckiana, 1787.
(2U). Bibliotheca Sussexiaua, T. J. Pettigrew, 1827, 1839.
(21). Catalogues of the public and larger libraries ; the great bibliographies of Brunet,
Lowndes, Clark (Bibliographical Diet.), Darling, and Dibdin; with smaller works like
Harwood's Classics, are of general, but less special importance here.
The older works not mentioned are in general either superseded or sufficiently referred
to in the above.
For Lists of Test Readings throughout, Reuss' Bibliotheca is at present sufficient,
though not now covering the entire field.
I. Introduction.
(Monday, January 4).
See particularly Introduction to (10), and vol. ii of (8). For Early Greek printing, the
great works on Incunabula by Panzer and Ham. Works like MahalFy's History of Greek
Literature arc useful for superficial purposes. The information is scattered, and to be
picked up in special works on local matters. For other matters not above included,
Erasmus's Epistles, in his Whole Works, Leiden, 1701-6.
II. The Complutensian Polvglott (1514-1517), and the work
of Erasmus (1466-1536).
(Tuesday, January 5).
For Complut., (10) above; W. E. Tentzel, De Bibliis Polyglot!, WIttenb., 1686; Hot-
tinger, Bibliothecar. Quadrip.; H. van der Hardt, Memoria Xiinenii, Helmst., 1717;
Stuss, De Natalitiis Librorum, Gottingen, 1742; S. Seemiller, De Bibliis Complut., In-
olst., 1785 ; Hefele, Der Card. Ximines, Leipzig, 1871 ; Tregelles. Account of the Printed
Text, Ac., London, 1854, and (9). For Erasmus, (1), i2), (5), (6), {8), (9), (10): and
the Biographies of Muller, 1828 ; Drummond, 1873 ; Gilly, 1879 ; and article by Staheiin in
Herzog's Encyklop. : also Erasmus's Epistles, Autobiography, and prefaces to his various
works , Delitzsch's Handschriftlicbe i unde, 1861, '62.
III. Complutensian and Erasmian Descendants (1519, and later).
(Thursday, January 7).
Reuss, Masch, Knoch, Mill, and Goeze, Baumgarten, Lorck, above ; Birch, Praefatio ad
Evv. ; and the Introductions to the N. T. of Hug and Eichhorn. Also, for the Aldines ;
Brunet, Dibdin; A. Renouard, Annales Ac. des Aides, Ac, Paris, 1834; Didot's Aide
Manuce, 1873. ForGerbel; P. A.Boyesen, De Codd. Gr. Lutheri, 1723; T. Eckhard, on
the same, 1723; J. G. Palm, De Codd. Lutheri, Hamb., 1735; J. F. Eckhard, An Cod.
QerbeL usus sit Luth., Isen., 1762. A book on same subject by Aug. Liebrich, Strassb.,
1857. For Colinaeus, Reuss especially, also Mill, and the introductory matter to Beza's
Uir^r Gr. Tests. ; Griesbaeh's Symbolae Criticae( and the Introductions to N. T. gene-
rally. For Van Ess, the periodical literature cited by Reuss. For the Basle printers,
the best material is scattered.
IV. Robert Stephen (Estienne) (1503-1559), and his Descendants.
(Monday, January 11).
Mattaire, Hist. Stephanorum, London, 1709; A. A. Renouard, Annales de l'lmpri-
merie des Estienne, Paris, 1837 ; Reuss's art. in Herzog Encyclop. ; and Knoch and
Lorck, above.
For the division into verses, article by I. H. Hall in Schaff's Encyclopaedia, and
authorities there cited.
The London Polyglot t is its own best authority (most others copy, merely) ; but see
Schaff's Companion, and authorities cited in its foot-notes.
V. Erasmo-Stephanic and Compluto-Stephanic Descendants
(1552, and later).
(Tuesday, January 12).
The bibliographies, above, are best. But see Int. to Schaff's Eng. Bible Revision, N.
Y., 1873; I. H. Hall's Amer. Gr. Tests.; Thayer's Abbot's Corrections to Scrivener's In-
trod., Boston, Houghton, 1885. Herzog's and Schaff's Cyclopiedd. of great value in the
special articles.
8
For Plantln and the Antwerp Polyglott, see Max. Roooes, Ctar. Plantln, Ac., Antwerp,
1882, and Cat. of Musec Plantln, by the same; Backer and Ruelcns, Annales de 1'ImprV-
nx-rie i'lantinlenne, Brussels, 1865; Degeorge, La MaUon Plantln, Brussels, 1878; An-
nales typogr. Plantin, Bulletin iu Bibliophile Beige, 1856.
For the Paris Polyglott. \a: Long, Discourses historiques stir les princlp. ed. des Bibles
Polyglottes, Paris, 1713 ; Hoefer, Nour. Biog. Generate ; Kltto's Cyclopaedia,
VI. Theodore Beza (de Besze) (1519-1605), and his Descendants.
(Thursday, January 14).
The works of La Faye, Geneva, 1606; 8chlosser, lleidelb., 1809; Bautn, Leipzig, 1843,
1851: Heppe, Elbert, 1861. Also, Herzog's and Schaff's Cyclops.; I. 11. Hall's Amor.
Gr. Tests., and authorities there cited; and especially Reuss. Also, Dibdin, Masch, Ac.,
for old mistakes. Also, Ezra Abbot in Introd. to Schaff's Revision of the English
Version.
VII. The Elzevirs (1583-1680) and their Followers.
(Monday, January 18).
Brunet. Alphonse Wlllems, Les Elzevier, Ac, Brux. and Par , 1880, and author, cited.
Herzog's and Schaff's Cyclopp. The scattered literature is immense.
VIII. The Elzevir Descendants (1663, and later).
(Tuesday, January 19).
Chiefly scattered in the bibliographies and the biographical dictionaries. Histories of
English printing, and the better bibliographies of the English itible, to be consulted with
profit. Also, R. Simon, Hist. Crit. N. T. ; and especially Dibdin and Lowndes. Reuss, A
Baumgarten, above; Rosenmuller, Bibl. Lit.; Hall, Amer. Gr. Tests.
IX. The Stephanie-Elzevir and Elzevir-Plantin Descendants
(1633, and later).
(Thursday, January 21).
Prolegomena to Mill's, Bengel's, and Wetstein's Gr. N. Tests. The older and newer
bibliographies useful; not so the Introdd. to N. T. Lowndes. Ad ler's accounts of Ilia
journeys and those of his fellows, in his various works pub. at Copenhagen, about 17S3.
Also, Whitby, Exanien, 1710; Bode's Pseud.-Crit. Millio-Bengel., Halle, 1767.
X. Critical Attempts before Griesbach (1709-1780).
(Monday, January 25).
Reuss, especially, and author, by him cited, but, if possible, the original N. Tests, and
their Prolegg. For Wells, Mace, and Harwood, though important, opposition has made
books very rare. But see Leon. Twells,Crit. Exam, of the Late N.T.. 17:<2 ; I.ili'nthal, Eng.
Bibl.; Baumgarten, Goeze, Masch, Biblloth. Sussex. ; Marsh's Michaelis, and Gregory's
Eng. Prolegg. For Bentley, Jebb's life, and auth. there cited ; also, especially, Gregory's
Prolegg. to Tischend., and Wordsworth's ed. of the St. Germain Lat. MS. liurk's Ben-
fel'8 Leben and Werken, Stuttgardt, 1831 ; YVachter's Bengel's Lebensabriss, 1865. Also,
ierzog and Schaff, Encyclopp., Hagenbach's J. J. Wetstein. Ac, in lilgen's Zeitschr. I.
d. hist. Theologie, and authorities cited by Reuss. For Bowyer, Ernesti, Blblioth. theol j
Brit. Magazine, II., A Encyclop. Britannica.
XI. Griesbach (1745-1812), his Opponents and Descendants.
(Tuesday, January 26).
Griesbach's own works ; Prolegg. to N. Tests., Symbol. Crit., and Meletemata. A
TJeber Griesb.'s Verdienste, Breslau, 1812. Reuss, above, but also his art. in Herzog;
W. and Hort's Gr.T., vol. ii ; Schaff's Companion, For others than Griesb., authorities
cited in Keuss' Hist. N. T. Also, the various N. T. Introductions.
XII. Griesbach-Elzevir Descendants (1788-1840).
(Thursday, January 28).
Literature all scattered. Best key in Reuss, the bibliographies, the library catalogues,
and periodical literature ; the last, American as well as foreign.
XIII. Minor Critical Editors since Griesbach (1788-1840).
(Monday, February 1).
Reuss is best in general. See also Gregory's Prolegg , Schaff's Companion ; articles in
Herzog's Encyclop ; Scholz's Biblisch-Kritische Reise, and Curae Crit. in Hist, Textus
Evv. ; Tretrelles's pre latory matter to Eng. Hexapla (in its early editions only); accounts
in translations of Meyer's Commentaries; Bloomfield, Crit. Annotations to N. T. Also,
recent Introdd. to N. T.; Schaff's Companion, and authorities therein cited.
XIV. Lachmann (1793-1851), and his Followers.
(Tuesday, February 2).
Studien u. Kritiken, (Heidelberg) 1830, p. 817 ff. Biography of Lachmann by Herz,
Berlin, 1851 ; also Jacob Grimm's Hede aut' Lachmann, in his Auswahl aus den Kl"in-
eren Schriften, Berlin, 1871 : article by Von Gebhardt in Herzog's Encyclop. ; Tregelles,
account of Printed Text of N.T.; Ezra Abbot, in Schaff's Encyclop. ; Schaff's Companion ;
Scrivener's Introd.. and the later Introdd. generally. Ezra Abbot's review of Buttmann
in Bib. Sac, Oct., 1858. But Bee Reuss's Hist. N. T.
XV. Historic editions of the New Testament, down to this point.
(Thursday, February 4).
Knowledge mostly special ; and to be gathered from collections only. See. however.
Reuss's Bibliotheca; Schaff's Companion; Gregory's Prolegomena; Mitchell's Critical
Handbook ; and the Introductions to N. T.
XVI. Tischendorf (1815-1874) ; his Life, Work, and Editions.
(Monday, February 8).
Reuss ; Prolegomena to various editions of Tischendorf 's Gr. N. Tests. ; Tischendorf,
Ausdexn Heiligen Lande, Reise in den Orient, Die Sinaibibel, Notitia Cod. Sin.; Pro-
legg. to8voed. of his Sin. N. T.; Anecdota Inedita; Collectio Nova ; the Prolegg. to Ins
Cod. Ephrem, Cod. Claromontan, and other works. Volbeding, Tisch. i. s. 25 jahiig.
" in Herzog's hn-
i a
Prolegg. to Tisch. H.T.; Am Sarge uud Grabe Tischendorf's, containing funeral ad-
dresses, Ac. The literature is very voluminous. Thayer's article iu Unitarian Review,
and life Ac. of Ezra Abbot, 1884; and volume " Ezra Abbot" pub. by Harvard Divinity
Sch. authorities.
XVII. Tregelles (1813-1875), and the Editors of Recent Mixed Texts.
(Tuesday, February 9).
For Muralt, see especially the Prolegomena to Tischendorf's Gr. N". T., ed. Li]
Mmuada, 1842. For Alford, biography by his widow. For editors before Tragellra,
— 'Be-USB, S.:h:itr, Herzog, and the N. T. editions themselves. For Tregelles, espe-
cially his Apocalypse, boh Gr. aud the later English, his account of Printed N. T. Text ;
Schaff's Companion; Gregory's Prolegg.; Art. Bibcltcxt, iu Herzog's and Schaff's En-
cyclopp. ; Hort, in Jour. I'hilol.. March, 185.8, and in his Gr. N. T. ; Abbot, in Behalf's
Encyclop. ; and the later Introdd. to N. T. ; Prolegg. (by Hort aud Streane) to Tregelles's
Gr. k T.
V-UV1. IJUIIICIU, ^- UU> VIBIViuuiimuj «•■•** u-»«.v» ■• wasiaii .......... 1 I ^ . J. ,„ „_
schriftst. Wirksaiuk. ; Gregory in Bib. Sac, Jan., 1876; Von Gebhardt, i
cyclop. ; Ezra Abbot in Unitarian Review, March. 1875; Schaff's Coiupaui<>n ; <
56
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
[No. 46.
XVIII. Westeott and Hort (with sketch of the past and present
circulation of texts).
(Thursday, February II).
W. and Hort's Gr. T. itself; Reuss; Von Gebhardt's Tischend. Or. N. T. Prolegg. and
collations; Gregory's Prolegg.; Behalf's Companion (esp. its Key. Ene. N.T. literature),
and Introd to his ed of W. and H. ; I. H. Hall, Amer. Gr. Tests. Also, Burgou's Last
Twelve Verses of St. Mark, and Revisiou Revised.
XIX. The Syriac Apocalypse.
(Monday, February 15).
Eiehhorn's and Hug's Introdd. to N. T. ; less useful are the other Introdd., except
Tregelles, in toI. iv of Home's Introd. Rosen and Forshall's and Wright's i at. of Syr.
MSS. in MriU Mus. ; Zotenberg, of those in Bib. Nat. at Paris; J. S. Assemani, Biblioth.
Orkkntalis; Storr's Reportoriuni ; L>e Dieu's Apoc.. 1627 and Critica Sacra; I. H. Hall,
The Syr. Apoc., in Jour. Soc. Bibl. Exegesis, 1H83-4; Tregelles's arts. Syriac Versions,
Ac , in Smith's Bib. Diet. ; Schatt's Companion to Gr. T. Also, special works referred
to in K. Nestle's Bibliography, in his Porta Ling. Syr.
XX. The Antilegomena Epistles (2 Peter, 2 and 3 John, and Jude).
(Tuesday, February 16).
Same authorities as above. Also, arts, by I. H. Hall in Jour. Soc. Bibl. Exeg. and Lit.,
1883-1885; and Proceedings Amer. Or. Soc., lK.si>-sr>; White's ed. Philoxenfan (really
Uarklenslan) N.T., Oxford ; Pococke's Syriac Epistles. 1630 ; Bernstein's Gospel of John ;
Adler, l»e Vera*. Syr., and works cited by Nestle, in his " Porta." Also arts, by Nestle,
Koldecke, Ac., running through the whole series of Z. 1>. M.G. Recent publications have
so often been for private distribution only that they are very difficult of access, though
very valuable. The extinct Journal of Sacred Literature is full of pertinent matter.
The Abbfi Martin's Introd. to N. T. is very rich, but full of flightiness, and very rare in
America. The Grammars of Noldecke, Duval, and Nestle (short) have much pertinent
matter. Also art. on Syr. Bible Text by Nestle, in Herzog's Encycl., last ed.
DR. FROTHIXGHAM'S LECTURES OX ASSYRIAN
ARCHEOLOGY.
(Mondays and Thursdays, February 25— March 11).
(See detailed programme on p. 32 of Circular 45).
Outline Bibliography foe Students.
The following is a list of books in the Johns Hopkins (H), Peabody (P),
and Mercantile (M) libraries, drawn up for the use of those who intend to
follow Dr. Frothingham's lectures on Babylonian and Assyrian Archccology.
The works have been selected not with reference to the needs of specialists,
but for those who have made no special studies in this field ; and they are
arranged in the order of their publication, so as to show the gradual devel-
opment of the study.
The archaeological works which are of particular value are marked with
a *; the philogical with a f.
Lassen, Chr. I>ie Altpersischen Keilinscriften von Persepolis. Bonn, 1836. H.
Bawiinso*, II. The Persian Cuneiform Inscription at Behistun. London, 1840. P.
Botta, P. E. Lettres stir sesdecouvertes a" Khorsabad. Paris, 1847. II. P.
Layard, A. H. Nineveh and its remains. (Istexped.). London, 1848. P. M.
The Monuments of Nineveh. London, 1849-53, P.f
Discoveries in the ruins of Nineveh and Babylon. (2d exped.). London, 1853. P.
Opperf, J. Expedition Scicntifique en M&opotamie, executfie de 1851 a 1854, par MM.
Fresnel, Thomas et Oppert. Paris, 1859-62. P.*
JMhiant, J. Les Eeritures Cun6i formes. KxposGdes travaux, ete, Paris, 1864, H.
Place, V. Ninive et 1'Assyrie, avec des Essais de Restau ration par F. Thomas, 3 vols. fol.
Paris, 1866-69. P.*
Oppert, J. Momoiri! sur les rapports de 1'Egypte et de 1'Assyrie dans l'Antiquitfi, Paris,
1869. P.
Rawlinson, G. The five great Monarchies of the Ancient Eastern World. London, 1873
H. M.
Records of the Past, being English translations of the Assyrian and Egyptian Monuments.
12 vols. London, 1873-78. P.f
Lenormani. La Magie chez les Chald€ens. Paris, 1874. II.
Smith, G. Assyrian discoveries, an Account of Explorations, 1873-74. London, 1875. P.
M.
Masptro, J. Histoire Ancienne des peuples de l'Orient. Paris, 1875. H,
Jfalevy. Recherches critiques sur 1'origine de la Civilisation Babylonienne. Paris,
1876. H-t
Smith, G. The Chaldaean account of Genesis. Loudon, 1876. P. M. German Transl.
by Delitzsch. H.f
Sayce, A. II. Lectures upon the Assyrian Language. London, 1877. P.f
Schrader, E. Keilinscriften und Geschichtsforschung. Giessen, 1878. H,
Sayce, A. II. Babylonian Literature. London, 1878. P. H,
Menant,.!. Bihliotheque du Palais de Ninive. Paris, 1880. H. P.
Birch, S. The Bronze Ornaments of the Palace Gates of Balawat (Shalmaneser II., B. C.
859-825). London, 1880. H*
Eischer&nii Wiedemann. UeberBabylonische "Talismane" (Cylinders). Stuttgart, 1881. H.
Delitzsch. Wo lag das Paradies? Line biblisch-Assyriologische Studie. Leipzig, 1881. f
Kdu/en. Assyrien und Babylonien nach den neuesten Entdeckungen. 2d ed. Freiburg,
1882. (3rd ed., 1885). H.
Hovimel. Semitiseher Volker und Sprachen. 18S2. H,
Ilaupf, P. Die Akkadische Sprache. Berlin, lS83.f
Delitzsch, F. The Hebrew language, viewed in the light of Assyrian Research. London,
1883. P.
Assyrian Antiquities, British Museum. Guide to the Kouyundjik Gallery. London,
1883. H.
Minant. Recherches sur la Glyptique Orientale. I. Cylindres de la Chaldee. Paris,
1883. H.*
Schrader. Vie Keilinscriften und das Alte Testament. Giessen, 1883. II. P.f
Perrot (G.) and Chipiez (Ch.). A History of Art in Chaldx-a and Assyria. Eugl. transL
London and New York. 1884. 2 vols. H. P.*
Wright, Wm. The Empire of the Hittites. With decipherment of Hittite Inscriptions
by Prof. Sayce. Loudon, 1884. H.
Sayce, A. H. The Ancient Empires of the East. New York, 1884. P.*
Sarzec, E. de. Decouveites en Chaldee. Paris, 1884. H.*
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Scientific Association.
January 6. — Sixty-eighth regular meeting. Professor Remsen in the chair. Fifty-
eight members present.
Papers read:
Recent Speculations on the Origin of Death, by W. K. Brooks.
ecological Trip to l^ake Superior, by G. H. Williams.
Theory of Antiseptic Actiou, by J. R. Duooan.
Philological Association.
January 8. — Sixty-sixth meeting. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair. Thirty-eight
members present.
Papers read :
The Old-Indian Sibilants: I. Preliminary remarks on the correlation of m and v in the
Vedas; 2. Introduction to the study oi the sibilants and the influence of sibilants
upon one another ; by M. K loom field and E. II. Spikkek.
On the Hebrew Words in the Codex Sangallensis 1*12, by C. Adler.
Historical and Political Science Association.
December meetings. — Dr. H. B. Adams in the chair.
Papers read:
introduction to a Study of the Public Domain of the United States, by S. Sato.
Rural Institutions of \orkahire, England, by L. Williams.
Bismarck's Economic and Social Policy, by L. Katzenstein.
The Pope's Encyclical Letter, by H. B. Adams.
Religion and Politics in Italy, by W. C. Langdox.
Mathematical Society.
December 16, 1885. — Professor Newcomb in the chair. Seven members present.
Paper read :
l'rooi of the Theorem: The Deficiency of every Unicursal Curve IsO, by W.E. Story.
Profess* j k Newcomb made some remarks on Complex Anharmouic Ratio.
Baltimore Naturalists* Field Club.
December l*i — Mr. *i. U Smith reported the results reached by the committee on the
question of labelling the Park trees. Last fall this idea commended itself to the
Club and several members of the botanical section were appointed to examine its
feasibility. To make the public acquainted with the names of the native and intro-
duced trees of which there is such a large collection in Druid Hill Park, is a motive
which all will readily appreciate. And after considering the proposition, the Park
Commissioner* decided to appropriate one hundred dollars for this purpose. This
turn, although inadequate to do the work as completely as might be wished, will
yet enable the flub to name about 500 of the most important and conspicuous trees
on tin- principal thoroughfares in the Park. It is intended to give in each case the
scientific and popular names on the label, and to make the latter distinct but small
enough so as not to disfigure the tree.
I k. J. C Hkmmetek read a popular paper on Fungi.
Dr. G. II. Williams gave au account of the Geology of the State and its relation to
tii at of the country at large.
CONTENTS.
Taok
Recent Publications : —
Rowland's Photograph of Normal Solar Spectrum, 41
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriac MS., 41
Archives of Maryland, ------ --42
Remsen's Introduction to the Study of Chemistry, 43
Elting's Dutch Village Communities on Hudson River, - - 43
Harris's Teaching of the Twelve Apostles, etc., - 44
American Journal of Philology, ------ 45
Peirce and Justrow on Small Differences of Sensation, - - 46
American Journal of Archaeology, ------ 47
Modern Language Notes, --------47
Students' « House of Commons " : —
Constitution and By-laws, --------48
Recent Discussion of its Constitution, .... 49
Current Notes: —
Additions to the Register of Students, ----- 51
Additions to the List of Periodicals, ------ 51
Lectures on Educational Topics, ------ 51
Special Lectures on Chemistry, - - -- - - - 51
A letter on the Study of Physics at Johns Hopkins University, - 52
Sir William Thomson to his Coefficients, ------ 52
Hopkins Scholarships, 53
Hopkins Hall Lectures, 54-56
Micro-Organisms in Disease. By W, H. Welch, 54
German Literature. By J. Goebel, ----- 54
Recent Discoveries in Assyria. By W. IL Ward, 54
French Literature. By L. Rabillon, ----- 54
New Testament : Textual Studies (bibliography). By I. IT. Hall, 55
Archaeology (bibliography). By A. L. Fkothingham, Jk., 56
Proceedings of Societies, 56
The Johns Hopkint University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., 182 W. Baltimore Street, Baltimore, from whom single copies may
be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, 262 W. Baltimore Street, Baltimore. Subscription, $1.00 a year.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 47.] BALTIMORE, MARCH, 3886. [Price, 10 Cents.
CONTENTS. pao.
STANDING ANNOUNCEMENTS, 58
REPORTS OF RECENT COMMUNICATIONS TO THE UNIVERSITY SOCIETIES :
On the Manuscripts of Professor J. C. Bluntschli. By J. M. Vincent, ..........59
Instantaneous Photographs of the Heart, etc. By W. G. Thompson, ..........60
The Records of the Virginia Company. By J. F. Jameson, ...........61
Note on Isaeus. By E. H. Spieker, - -61
On the Antiseptic Action of Acids. By J. R. Duggan, ............61
Speech Mixture in French Canada. By A. M. Elliott, ............62
On Silent Tin Modern English. By J. W. Bright, ...., 62
The Earliest Municipal Code of Strassburg. By J. M. Vincent, ...........63
On Hebrew Words in the Codex Sangallensis 912. By Cyrus Adler, ..........63
Note on Partitions. By D. Barcroft, ..............64
Die Finanzpolitik im Nordamerikanischen Burgerkrieg. By A. Yager, .........64
PROCEEDINGS OF UNIVERSITY SOCIETIES, 64
DEATH OF PROFESSOR MORRIS, 66
Resolutions of Respect, .--.-......-...-66
ENUMERATION OF CLASSES: SECOND HALF YEAR:
Mathematics, ...--..«..... ....66
Physics, .---..-...........66
Chemistry, -------.-.....--.-66
Mineralogy and Petrography, ...............67
Biology, . .... ^ ------------- 67
Greek, ..................67
Latin, ..................67
Shemitic Languages, ................68
Sanskrit, etc., ..-----..........68
German, .-..-........-.•..68
Romance Languages, -- ----.......---69
English, 69
History and Political Science, ...--.--...---.69
Psychology and Pedagogics, ----.---•----■ ---70
Ethics, 70
Drawing, .....--.---.------
Elocution, ------------------ 70
HOURS FOR LECTURES AND RECITATIONS, 71
AMERICAN JOURNAL OF MATHEMATICS, 72
STANDING ANNOUNCEMENTS.
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
Opened (or Instruction in 1876.
The Johns Hopkins University was founded
by the munificence of a citizen of Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins, who bequeathed the most of his
large estate for the establishment of a Univer-
sity and a Hospital. It was intended that these
institutions should cooperate in the promotion of
medical education. The Hospital buildings are
approaching completion.
The foundation of the University is a capital,
in land and stocks, estimated in value at more
than $3,000,000; the capital of the Hospital is
not less in amount.
The University was incorporated under the laws
of the State of Maryland, August 24, 1867.
Power to confer degrees was granted by the
Legislature in 1876.
Suitable buildings have been provided in Bal-
timore at the corner of Howard and Little Ross
Sts., and are furnished with the necessary appa-
ratus and books.
Academic Staff, 1886.
Daniel C. Oilman, ll. d.. President of the University.
J. J. Sylvester, f. r. s., d. c l., Professor (Emeritus) of
Mathematics.
Basil L. Gildebsleevk, ph. d., ll. d., Professor of Greek.
G. Stanley Hall, ph. d., Professor of Psychology and Peda-
gogies.
Paul Haupt, ph. d., Professor of the Shemitic Languages.
H. Newell Martin, dr. sc„ a. m., f. r. s., Professor of Biol-
ogy and Director of the Biological Laboratory.
Simon Nkwcomb, ll. o., Professor of Mathematics and As-
tronomy.
Ira Kemskn, m. d., ph. d., Professor of Chemistry and Direc-
tor of the Chemical Laboratory.
Henry A. Rowland, ph. d., Professor of Physics and Direc-
tor of the Physical Laboratory.
William H. Welch, m. d . Professor of Pathology.
John S. Billings, m. d., Lecturer on Hygiene.
Leonck Rabillon, bach, es Lett., Lecturer on Drench Lit-
erature.
Herbert B Adams, ph. d., Associate Professor of History.
Maurice Bloomfield, ph. d., Associate Professor of Sanskrit.
William K. Bhooks, pii.d., Associate Professor of Morphol-
ogy and Director of the Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory.
Thomas Craio, ph. d., Associate Professor of Applied Mathe-
matics.
A. Marshall Elliott, a. m., Associate Professor of Romance
Languages.
Harmon N. Morse, ph. d., Associate Professor of Chemistry
at'd Sub-Director of the Chemical Laborato?y.
William E. Story, pii.d., Associate Professor of Mathematics.
Minton Warren, ph. d., Associate Profesior of Latin.
Georok H. Williams, ph. d., Associate Professor of Mine-
ralogy.
Henry Wood, ph.d.. Associate Professor of German.
William Hand Browne, m. d., Librarian and Associate in
English.
William T. Councilman, m. d., Associate in Pathology.
Richard T. Ely, ph. d., Associate in Political Economy.
Fabian Franelin, ph. d., Associate in Mathematics.
Edward M. Hartwei.l, m.d., ph.d., Associate in Physical
Training and Director of the Gymnasium.
William H. Howell, ph. d., Associate in Biology.
J. Franklin Jameson, ph.d., Associate in History.
Arthur I.. Kimball, ph. d., Associate in Physics.
Henry A. Todd, ph. d., Associate in Romance Languages.
Philip K. Uiii.kk, Associate in Natural History.
James W. Bright, ph. d., Instructor in English.
Henry II. Donaldson, ph. d., Instructor in Psychology.
Julius Goebel, ph. d., Instructor in German.
George IIempl. a. b., Assistant in German.
J. P. McMurricii, ph. l>.. Instructor in Osteology, etc.
Charles A. Perkins, ph. d., Assistant in Physics.
Edmund Renouf, ph. d., Assistant in Chemistry.
EinvAKD H. Spiekeb, ph. d., Instructor in Latin and Greek.
Hugh Newell, Instructor in Drawing.
Charles L. Woodwobth, Jr., Instructor in Elocution.
68
PLAN OF THE CIRCULARS.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are
published at convenient intervals during the
academic year for the purpose of communicating
intelligence to the various members of the Univer-
sity in respect to work which is here in progress,
as well as for the purpose of promulgating offi-
cial announcements from the governing and
teaching bodies. During the current academic
year, eight circulars will be issued in successive
months, to be followed at the close of the year by
an index.
Although these circulars are designed for the
members of the University, they have frequently
been called for by institutions and libraries at a
distance, and also by individuals who are inter-
ested in the literary and scientific activity of
this University. Subscriptions and exchanges
are therefore received.
TERMS OF SUBSCRIPTION.
For the current year, 1885-6, $1.
For the year 1884-5, (134 pp. in cloth covers),
$1.50.
For the year 1883-4, (140 pp. in cloth covers)
$1.50.
For the year 1882-3, (156 pp. in cloth covers}, $3.
For the years 1879-82,(250 pp. in cloth covers), $5.
Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the
Annual Register and Report of the University.
All subscriptions should be addressed to the
" Publication Agency of the Johns Hopkins
University."
Communications for the Circulars should be
sent in prior to the first day of the month in which
they are expected to appear.
PUBLIC LECTURES.
Notice in Bespect to the Admission of the Public.
In answer to inquiries, and in correction of
some current misapprehensions, the following
statements are made in respect to the public
lectures given in the Johns Hopkins University.
These courses are academic lectures, designed
primarily for the members of the University, and
supplementary to the regular class-room work of
the students.
• As the members of the University rarely re-
quire the entire room, the Trustees have taken
great pleasure in inviting other persons, not con-
nected with the University, to attend.
As these lectures are not intended for popular
entertainment, but for the instruction of students,
those persons first receive tickets, in most cases,
who are known to be especially interested in a
particular course, — ladies as well as gentlemen.
There is no general course ticket issued. Applica-
tions should state specifically the course for which
tickets are desired. Programmes and other cur-
rent information pertinent to university work may
be found in the University Circulars, sent to sub-
scribers, on the payment of one dollar per annum,
by the Publication Agency of the University.
The usage of giving personal notification has
been discontinued, and those therefore who are
interested in such announcements should hereafter
consult the Circulars.
It will save much delay if applications for
tickets and inquiries on these and other routine
matters are addressed not to individuals but to the
Johns Hopkins University, by postal card, and
answers will be promptly returned by mail. Per-
sonal applications consume time needlessly.
8®" The lectures begin at 5 o'clock punctually.
The doors of the hall are opened at fifteen minutes
before 5, and the lectures do not exceed an hour in
the delivery.
PUBLICATIONS ISSUED UNDER THE
AUSPICES OF THE UNIVERSITY.
I. American Journal of Mathematics.
The publication of this journal commenced in
1878, under the editorial direction of Professor
Sylvester, and is now conducted by Professor
Simon Newcomb as Editor, and Dr. T. Craig as
Associate Editor. Seven volumes of about 400
pages each have been issued, and the eighth is in
progress. It appears quarterly, in the quarto
form. Subscription $5 per year. Single numbeis
$1.50.
II. American Chemical Journal.
This journal was commenced in 1879, with
Professor Remsen as editor. Six volumes of
about 450 pages each have been issued, and the
seventh is in progress. It appears bi monthly.
Subscription $3 per year. Single numbers 50 cts.
III. American Journal of Philology.
The publication of this journal commenced in
1880, under the editorial direction of Professor
Gildersleeve. Five volumes of about 570 pages
each have been issued, and the sixth is in pro-
gress. It appears four times yearly. Subscrip-
tion $3 per volume. Single numbers $1.00.
IV. Studies from the Biological
Laboratory.
[Including the Chcsaprake Zoological Laboratory.']
The publication of these papers commenced in
1879, under the direction of Professor Martin,
with the assistance of Dr. W. K. Brooks. Two
volumes of about 500 pages, octavo, and 40 plates
each, have been issued, and the third is in progress.
Subscription $5 per volume.
V. Studies in Historical and Political
Science.
The publication of these papers was begun in
1882, under the editorial direction of Dr. H. B.
Adams. A first series of 470 pages, a second of
630 and a third of 595 pa<;es are now completed
and a fourth series is in progress. Subscription $3
per volume.
The University Circulars. $1 per year.
The Annual Report presented by the Presi-
dent to the Board of Trustees reviewing the opera-
tions of the University during the academic year.
The Annual Register giving the list of offi-
cers and students and stating the regulations of
the University. Published at the close of the
academic year.
The University Circulars, Annual Report, and
Annual Register will be sent by mail for one
dollar per annum.
Rowland's Photograph of the Normal
Solar Spectrum. Set of seven plates, unmounted,
$10; mounted, $12. Single plates, unmounted, $2;
mounted, $2.25. 1886.
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriac
MS. with the Antilegomena Epistles. I. H.
Hall, Editor. Only 250 numbered copies have
been issued. $3. 1886.
Studies in Logic. By members of the Johns
Hopkins University. C. S. Peirce, Editor. (Bos-
ton : Little, Brown & Co.) 1883. 123 pp., 12o. $2.
The Development and Propagation of the
Oyster in Maryland. By W. K. Brooks. 1884.
193 pp., 4o. 13 plates and 3 maps. $5.
On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat.
By H. A. Rowland. 1880. 127 pp., 8o. $1.50.
New Testament Autographs. By J. Rendel
Harris. 1882. 54 pp., 8o. 4 plates. 50 cents.
Sir WlLlXAM Thomson's Lectures on Mo-
lecular Dynamics. 1884. 370 pp., 4o. $5.00.
All communications in respect to publications
should be addressed to the "Publication Agency
of the Johns Hopkins University," Baltimore,
Maryland.
March, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
59
REPORTS OF RECENT COMMUNICATIONS TO THE UNIVERSITY SOCIETIES.
On the Manuscripts of Professor J. C. Bluntschli, of
Heidelberg, in the Library of the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity. By J. M. Vincent.
[Communicated to the University Seminary of History and Politics, January 22, 1886].
It is always a pleasure to trace the intellectual history of persons of note,
and the interest increases when the subject of study has been a man of
world-wide reputation and influence. But the attractions of biography and
personal anecdote are doubly intensified when the unfolding of genius can
be followed in the papers and autographic accumulations of a long and
active career. Character and peculiarities are there recorded, willingly or
unwillingly, under hand and seal of the man himself.
Revelations such as these, of the inward life of Johann Caspar Bluntschli
await the student who acquaints himself with that collection of manuscripts
Which forms the nucleus of the Johns Hopkins Historical Library. The
collection contains little of a strictly private or personal nature, but to the
direction and extent of the public intellectual activity of the man there is
many a characteristic testimonial.
The earliest reminiscences of Bluntschli's school work are three papers
which date from 1825, his last year in the Gymnasium at Zurich, and con-
sist of notes on various books of Horace, on the Eunuch of Terence and on
Cicero pro Archia et pro MarceUo. They cover some forty pages of the
unglazed and unruled paper of the period and are written in the fine neat
hand which characterized his writings to the end of his days. He says
in his autobiography that his education, according to the fashion of the time,
was strictly linguistic, and the statement is borne out by the name signed
to these notes upon Horace, "C. Bluntschli, stud, philol.," by which title
every gymnasial scholar was then known. Another interesting fact might
be noted in connection with this signature. He says that his Christian
names never pleased him. Johann Caspar, or Hans Caspar, as it was famili-
arly called, had evidently been too frequent a designation in his family.
He was only partially reconciled to it from the fact that one of the three
wise men of the East was said to have been called Caspar, and it is plain to
be seen by what name he was known to his playmates and student friends,
for, from the beginning of these papers to the end of his university career,
when he could use the title of Doctor, his mark of ownership was simply
"C. Bluntschli."
One other paper may well be mentioned before passing on to his profes-
sional studies. He relates that after he had been a year or so engaged in
the strict methods of thinking which the Zurich Law School demanded, he
became convinced that he was not what he once imagined he was, a poet.
It is perhaps to be regretted that we have no specimens of his own work in
this line, but we have an indication of his youthful tastes in a brief collec-
tion of the fancies of others, entitled, " Witty, Satirical, and Humorous
Thoughts in Metrical Language. Epigrams," and dating back to 1823.
They consist of selections from Von Logau, Herder, Goethe and others,
and are copied with unusual care upon nine small pages, which might
easily be carried in the pocket and furnish food for reflection, or material
for quotations.
The lectures at the Political Institute, as the training school for lawyers
and statesmen was called, were in fact but a continuation of his previous
studies, it being but a natural step from Latin literature to Roman law.
The favorite teacher in this department was the young Dr. Keller, disciple
and afterward successor of Savigny. Under him in 1826-27 Bluntschli
studied the History and Institutions of the Civil Law, Pandects, Institutes
of (iaius, and Latin Classics, especially Cicero, upon all of which subjects
copious notes testify to his interest and industry. A specimen of the stu-
dent's own composition in this field remains in an essay "On the different
meanings of the expression, jug civile, among the Komans," bearing date of
June, 1827. In after life he looked back with pleasure to his introduction
at this time to the Constitutional Law of Switzerland, under the patriotic
leadership of Professor J. F. Meyer. These lectures are also preserved, and
doubtless gave him thus early the impulse to study his own country.
The removal to Berlin in the autumn of 1827 was but another step for-
ward in his Koman studies. Introduced by Dr. Keller, he attended with
special zeal the lectures of Savigny and worked in his private library.
Souvenirs of this period are bound volumes of Savigny's Pandects and Insti-
tutions, Philipp's German Constitutional History, RudorfFs Common Liw
of Inheritance, Bockh's Grecian Antiquities, Klenze's Koman Law, beside
numerous loose manuscript comments on Latin authors and other subjects.
Bluntschli was from the beginning inclined toward the newer school of
Koman lawyers, of whom Savigny was the chief. On coming in closer con-
tact with them in Berlin he became confirmed in their views, and, as one
testimony of allegiance to that party, adopted the Latin handwriting. We
can see for ourselves the change in chirograph)- in passing from the second
to the third volume of Savigny's Pandects. Up to this point everything
is written in the old fashioned German script, but from the summer of
1882 on, with some slight hesitations, he uses the characters which we
employ.
In October of that year, he joined the University of Bonn, attracted
thither by the fame of Niebuhr and Hasse. With the former he entered
into the newly awakened study of Roman History and preserved a thick
volume of lectures as the result. In the summer this great investigator of
the ancients turned his attention to the French Revolution. Upon this
subject also we have a book of Bluntschli's notes, so that the library possesses
both a printed and a written volume which state that the lectures were
given in 1829.
Under Hasse, Bluntschli's studies took more of a Germanic turn.
Many pages of notes on German Private Rights, Law of Inheritance,
and similar lectures doubtless laid the foundation of subjects upon which
the student himself lectured in after years. He took his degree of Doctor
Juris at Bonn in 1829, submitting as a thesis a paper which was the pro-
duct of his work in Savigny's library and which had already been awarded
a gold medal by the Berlin faculty. The subject was the " Development of
Succession contrary to the last will in Roman Law." We have no MS. of
this essay, but, in place of it, an interleaved copy of the printed edition of
1829, " mein erstlings Buch," containing numerous annotations in the hand-
writing of the author.
After a residence of a few months in Paris, the young doctor returned to
Zurich, connected himself with the courts and was soon given a position as
secretary to one of the judicial commissions. Now began his practical
acquaintance with the laws of his native country and soon after, his activity
as a poli tician. The excitement of the Revolut ion of 1 830 brough t the literary
ability of the rising lawyer into play and numerous productions appeared
before the public. Of his books none of that date remain in MS., but another
most interesting document is preserved, which has both a personal and an
historical interest. It contains the minutes of the Committee on Revision
of the Constitution of Zurich, of which committee Bluntschli was made sec-
retary. To the student of Swiss History this will afford glimpses of the
conflicting interests which strove for mastery in the change from the old
ways to the new.
With the foundation of the University of Zurich in the spring of 1833,
began our author's career as Professor of Law. At first he lectured on
Roman Law. Thick bunches of MSS. on the History and Institutions, on the
Pandects, on Family Law, and on interpretation of passages, bear witness
to the extent of his labors. They indicate also, in their form, the change
from the student to the lecturer. The narrow margins of the copyist give
place to the habit, universal among German professors, of writing upon but
half the page, leaving the balance for additions.
Gradually, however, Bluntschli's studies led him away from the ancient,
into, what seemed to him more vital, Teutonic institutions. Especially
attractive lo him was the historic development of the laws of Zurich. This
subject had hitherto been only superficially treated, and the young professor
plunged into the unknown mass of material with the enthusiasm of fresh
discovery. Archives were ransacked and ancient books re-opened. As a
result a great quantity of notes have come down to us, in the way of extracts
from convent records, charters, and community law books, and informa-
tion on Swiss customs from all sources. Out of these researches grew his
lectures on Zurich Law of Private Rights, which bear the date, " Winter-
semester, 18||." Other lectures on the law of Inheritance probably trace
their origin to the same fountain, as likewise several papers on Sources of
Zurich Law, City Law of Inheritance, and Marital Guardianship, the large
gray foolscap form of which indicates their destiny as magazine articles.
60
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 47.
Out of these lectures and studies grew his Legal History of Zurich,
published in two volumes 1838-9. A part of a first draft of this work has
been preserved in MS. Many corrections and additions indicate the care
with which the book was prepared, and the printed introduction is worded
still differently from the MS. copy of the same passage. The Library has
also a first edition richly annotated on the margins by the writer himself.
To possess this book alone might well be the pride of any admirer of
Bluntschli.
Researches into Teutonic institutions in general also found a place in
this period. A course of lectures on German Private Law dates from 1838,
and others on the legal history of Germany probably began about the same
time. Lectures on Commercial Law were read first during the winter of
1838-9, and bear half a dozen dates of repetition down to 1854.
In 1839 an article in the Halle' schen Jahrbucher "on the new historical
school of German jurisprudence" attracted wide attention from lawyers and
scholars. This essay lies before us in MS. Bluntschli refers to it in after
life as the germ of his " Modern State." It is curious to note the difficulty
he had in selecting a title. No less than five different attempts have been
variously amended at the head of the first page.
Of studies in the Philosophy of Law there are traces extending over a
long period. A small MS. of 1829 contains notes on the lectures of Tiigge
at Bonn. Later we find Bluntschli's own lectures, in which a part of the
paper is old and the ink dim, while interspersed are additions and notes in
modern freshness. A collection of notes on the " Conception of Law " was
doubtless the groundwork of a public address in Munich in 1858, and an
article on the " Doctrine of Legal Personality" was perhaps a part of the war
with the old school of Roman lawyers.
Among our author's academical lectures, those on the " Constitutions of
Switzerland and North America" seem to evince the latest completion,
although there are pages of the MS. which might have been written early
in his life. They bear no date, but may be safely assigned to the Heidel-
berg period, and will stand as the ripe judgment of a great statesman upon
our institutions.
Besides numerous interesting reminders of Bluntschli in the way of
remarks and slips of comment, scattered through the books of his library,
among which an annotated copy of his "AUgemeines Staatsrecht" will
attract especial attention, there remains one other class of MSS. to be
mentioned. These are the Legal Opinions, of which a large number are
preserved, dating from all points along his career. First as Counsel for the
city of Zurich, his advice was sought by his fellow-citizens and by neigh-
boring communities ; then, after laying down his official position, cases were
referred to him from an ever increasing circle of acquaintance. Some of
these opinions bring up questions of great interest in the history of institu-
tions. For instance, his decision was asked in a contest between the villages
Biilach and Bachenbiilach over the boundaries of their common lands, a
case which might have come into court, when the Alamanni first divided
the soil. A similar dispute came to him from Aegeri, when he had been
many years away from the country. Another early paper is a petition
which he drew up for citizens of Rumlang protesting against the mal-admin-
istration of the common woodlands ; in another, a question of damages
involves the relation of Canton Thurgau to the Confederation, and of both
to the Duchy of Baden. Many opinions were on private cases involving
large amounts, as that of the Rothschilds against a Swiss railway, or
Lenglet against the Roumanian Railroad on which opinions had already
been sought from numerous professors in Paris and Vienna. It is interest-
ing to note how large a majority of these cases came from Switzerland, and
that perhaps the greater number were submitted after he had made his
home in Germany. In fact, the last decision upon which a date has been
identified, was on a question sent up from his native city. An unfortunate
tailor of Ziirich was found drowned with his adopted daughter in the river
Sihl. From a letter left it appeared that both had sought together this
watery relief from care. The question arose as to who should inherit
the man's property, the blood relations, or the father of the adopted child.
Bluntschli decided in favor of the former and signed the opinion. " Heidel-
berg, 20 Febr. 1881," eight months and a day before the close of his life.
■Whatever judgment may be passed upon the value of these manuscripts,
whether they contain unpublished matter new to science, or, whether they
have been or shall be superseded, they will always remain, for the Histori-
cal department of this University, rare memorials of scholarly progress and
success, and the means of personal acquaintance with an iaspiring mind.
Instantaneous Photographs of the Heart and Intes-
tines in Motion. By William Gilman Thompson, M. D., of
New York.
[Abstract of a paper read before the University Scientific Association, February 3, 1886].
I have recently succeeded in applying the process of instantaneous pho-
tography to the study of the moving heart and intestines in situ. These
movements are so complicated and differ so widely under varying chemical,
thermic, mechanical and other stimuli, that it is of great value to have a
series of photographs of normal movements to keep for comparison with
results obtained by artificial stimulation or inhibition. The apparatus
which I have employed consists of a Blair Tourograph camera, with a
Voigtliinder lens, If inches in diameter, and a simple drop-shutter which
could be adapted to give an exposure of from Js to & second. Since the
photographs were necessarily taken indoors in the months of December and
January, and in an ordinary room without sky-light, direct sunlight illu-
mination of the object was the only available light which proved satisfac-
tory with the kind of lens at command. The majority of the views of the
heart were taken with an exposure of less than T'5 second. This is quite
rapid enough for a pulse rate not exceeding 120 or thereabout, for there is
always a brief pause at the completion of both systole and diastole. If the
exposure were less than %\ second enough light was not obtained. In some
of the photographs of the intestines, the peristaltic movement here being
usually much slower than in the heart, an exposure of £ second to 1 second
was employed for the sake of greater detail. The plates used were the
Stanley Gelatine, and the developer was pyrogallic acid. The animals
experimented with were frogs, pigeons, rabbits, kittens and the calf.
The anaesthetized animal was nailed upon an upright board, placed in
full sunlight and the chest was rapidly opened, so as to expose the heart to
the greatest advantage with the least possible hemorrhage. It was found
advisable to slip a little disc of white celluloid behind the heart, so as to
give a strongly reflecting background to throw the heart into relief from
surrounding tissues which are of much the same color. The celluloid does
not at all interfere with the cardiac movements, it does not become sticky
with moisture, and it is kept clean from blood by the spray of warm salt
and water which is directed upon the heart to keep it from drying. A
photograph was then taken of full normal diastole and another of full nor-
mal systole, as nearly as they could be judged by the eye. Intermediate
views of different degrees of contraction were also taken. Some drug, such
as aconite, chloral, glonoin (1 per cent.), digitaline, was then injected hypo-
dermatically or painted upon the beating heart, and a second series of views
was taken of the altered systole and diastole thereby produced.
I also took a number of photographs of transverse sections of ventricles in
diastole and in the strong systole obtained by heating the same heart.
These are particularly instructive in showing the anatomical relations of
the walls, papillary muscles, etc., and the uniform shape of the periphery
of the narrowing ventricular cavity in its different stages of contraction.
Other photographs which I have taken illustrate the movements of the
heart which may take place after its rapid excision from the body, and also
the fact that the right ventricle under certain conditions may keep on pul-
sating after the left has ceased.
The process of photographing the intestinal peristalsis was very similar
to that employed for the heart, and the intestines were stimulated to move-
ment by mechanical irritation, by applying drugs to the mesentery, etc.
My efforts to photograph the contractions of the bladder and the movements
of the diaphragm as seen from the abdominal cavity have been less success-
ful, for I have done the work entirely alone. With proper assistance, mus-
cular contractions of every sort could be easily permanently recorded by
photography, and in experiments upon the heart artificial respiration should
be maintained, while tracings of the pulse, blood pressure, etc., should be
simultaneously recorded. Although the experiments which I have thus
far been able to make with the action of drugs, are not in all cases of special
scientific value, I have certainly demonstrated that it is possible and easy
to photograph the complicated movements of the heart and intestines. The
negatives (or positive glass slides easily made from them) can be enlarged
with a stereopticon for class-room demonstration, and very many facts in
regard to physiology and the therapeutic action of drugs can be most accu-
rately and graphically recorded, and the photographs when studied at
leisure reveal many interesting details which are easily overlooked at the
time of operation. Moreover, it seems possible that with better apparatus
March, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
61
than the very limited facilities at my command afford, something of value
may be added to our knowledge of the real nature of rhythmical peristaltic
movement, at present so poorly understood. It is with the hope of stimu-
lating such research, ta 1 also of illustrating and enlivening a great deal in
Materia Medica that is perplexing for students, that I have undertaken this
pioneer work in the instantaneous photography of the heart in motion, and
of intestinal peristalsis.
The Records of the Virginia Company. By J. F.
Jameson.
[Abstract of a paper read before the University Historical and Political Science Asso-
ciation, November 20, 1885].
Two manuscript copies of these records are in existence, and writers upon
the subject have, in nearly every instance, confounded the two. It was the
object of this account to reconstruct the true history of both, and to correct
the errors made in regard to them by previous writers.
The original records of the Company are not known to be now extant.
But during the last year of its existence copies of its records for the last
five years, 1619-1024, were made. There are two accounts of the way in
which these copies came to be made; one written about 1654 by John
Ferrar, and printed in Dr. Peckard's life of Nicholas Ferrar, the other
given in an anonymous and rare pamphlet by Arthur Woodnoth, published
in 1961. Both describe the copies as having been made secretly, in appre-
hension of a seizure of the Company's papers by the King, and as having
been subsequently given to the Earl of Southampton, its Treasurer, as fur-
nishing means whereby he might defend his acts and those of his associates
in case of prosecution. But while the latter declares the copies to have
been made by the care of Sir John Danvers, at the instance of Secretary
Collingwood, the former attributes this to the forethought of the Deputy
Treasurer, Nicholas Ferrar. They are said to have passed from the custody
of the Earl of Southampton to that of Sir R. Killigrew and then to that of
Sir E. Sackville. But at the death of the Earl of Southampton's son, in
1667, they were bought by Dr. Win. Byrd, of Virginia, and became a part
of the library at Westover. They were used by Stith, who has left a
description of them. From the Westover library they passed into the pos-
session of Thomas Jefferson, in a way which he has described in a letter
written in 1823. Between that date and 1830 they became a part of the
Library of Congress, in which they still remain. The proofs of their iden-
titv, not only with the copy used by Stith, but also with that made by the
members of the Company in 1623 and 1624, were described.
An account was then given of the history of the other manuscript, also in
two volumes possessed at one time by John Randolph of Roanoke and
afterward by the late Conway Robinson, Esq., and some conjectures were
expressed as to the time and circumstances in which it was copied from the
first. Some description of the third volume accompanying this set, and of
an additional volume in the Library of Congress, was given. The conclu-
sion of the account consisted of an exposition, too detailed to be here
summarized, of the errors made in their references to these two manuscripts
by the writers mentioning them, Burk, Hening, Howison, J. W. Thornton
in the Historical Magazine, Campbell, Win. Green in the Southern Literary
Messenger, and Neill in his Virginia Company; especially of the curious
ways in which the one manuscript has been confounded with the other, and
of the difficulties which this lias interposed iu the way of the reconstruction
of their true history.
Note on Isaeus. By E. H. Spieker.
[Abstract of a paper read before thj University Philological Association, December 4,
1885].
In this paper a number of peculiarities of syntax in the"s|>eeches of Isaeus
as found in the MSS. were considered, especially the omission of av where
the ordinary prose use requires its presence, and vice rersa its use, where it
would not ordinarily be found. The speeches of Isaeus were not studied at
any period to such an extent or so carefully as those of the great orators,
and so it is natural that errors of writing should not only have crept in
but also been allowed to remain. Most of the cases can be readily explained
as examples of ordinary errors in writing, and in most of the editions the
necessary corrections have been made. The supposition that these mistakes
really represent the language use of Isaeus, as is contended by Roder, is
manifestly wrong.
On the Antiseptic Action of Acids. By J. R. Dugciav.
[Abstract of a paper read before the University Scientlno Association, January 6, 18S6J.
Although a great number of determinations of the antiseptic power of
various substances have been made, they are applicable only to certain
conditions; and do not hold good when these are changed from those under
which the experiments were made. With a view towards studying the
influence of the substances usually present in culture-fluids in increasing
or retarding the antiseptic action of acids, the author has investigated the
action of acids on cane sugar or starch, and on diastase. It was found that
in general, the action of an acid in retarding the conversion of starch by
diastase was proportional to the rate at which it inverted cane sugar, which,
as Ostwald has shown, is a measure of its affinity. A few acids, however,
act much more powerfully on diastase than on sugar, but this is due to
a secondary action which may consist in reduction or oxidation, as with
sulphurous or chromic acids; or there may be, especially in the case of
acids from metallic oxides, a specific action similar to that shown by the
salts of the corresponding metals. The neutral salts of acids that act in
proportion to their affinity have very little influence on the conversion of
starch by diastase when they are present in equivalent amounts, showing
that the retarding influence of these acids is due simply to their acid proper-
ties; and therefore anything that tends to neutralize such an acid produces
a corresponding diminution in its action on diastase. This may be accom-
plished, not only by the addition of a base, but by proteid matter or by
neutral salts. Chittenden has recently shown that an excess of proteid
matter prevents the retarding influence of acids on diastase, and may even
cause an increase in the amount of starch converted. The author has also
found that the presence of neutral salts affects the action of acids on
diastase in the same manner that Spohr has shown them to influence the
inversion of sugar. It is probable also that a change of tem|>erature causes
the same variation in the action of neutral salts in either case.
As bacteria cannot be cultivated except in the presence of these sub-
stances that interfere with acid action, it has not been possible to conduct a
series of perfectly parallel experiments on the antiseptic action of acids,
but such as have been made, and our general knowledge on this subject
indicate that the majority of acids prevent the development of organisms
simply by their acid properties, and that the remainder of the molecule has
no effect, except of course, as it affects the affinity of the acid. It does not
follow from this that acids act in ordinary culture-fluids exactly in the
order of their affinities, since the salts and proteid matter present probably
do not influence all acids to the same extent. Thus the solubility of the
acid added would perhaps determine the extent to which it would replace
the combined acids in the solution. This, and similar questions, cannot be
decided until our knowledge of the reactions that take place between bodies
in solution is more definite. In general, however, the antiseptic action of
acids seems to be proportional to their affinity. For example, the coefficient
of affinity of ineta and para oxybenzoic acids is very low as compared to their
isomer, salicylic; and the author has formerly shown (.4m«r. C'hem. Jour.
Vol. VII, No. 1.) that the proportion of these acids required to prevent
the development of Bacillus sabtilis is in the same order. In fact, all
organic acids that are used as antiseptics, such as benzoic, phenylacetic,
oxyphenylsulphonic, etc., possess a high coefficient of affinity ; so that there
is no reason to suppose that these acids act as "protoplasmic poisons,"
except as this may be said of all acids;— their greater action being due
simply to their greater acidity, and perhaps to the fact that they are not
neutralized to the same extent by the proteid matter and salts in the
solution.
Since the affinity of an acid may be increased by the introduction of cer-
tain groups, it appears probable that before very long it will be possible to
form some ilea of the antiseptic value of an acid from its chemical consti-
tution. For example, the experiments of Ostwald show that the groups
(Cells), (S<V )II), and (OH) all seem to increase the affinity of acids when
introduced into the molecule. The combination of these three groups is
oxyphenylsnlphonic acid which has of late come into considerable use as
an antiseptic under the name of aseptol.
Similar experiments are being made on the influence of the alcohols on
diastatic action. This is found to follow in the order of their physiological
action ; and may be used, it is hoped, to some extent, as a measure of the
same.
62
■JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 47.
Speech Mixture in French Canada: External Influ-
ences. By A. M. Elliott.
[Abstract of * paper read at a meeting of the University Philological Association,
December i, 1885 J.
Following up the genera] preliminary article on the French language in
Canada, (see American Journal of Philology, Vol. VI., p. 135 et seq.), the
writer points out here the special external influences, — political, religious
and social, — that have been at work since the earliest settlements in New-
France to produce the mingling of dialect varieties such as is found to-day
with the French Canadians. It was necessary to consider these agencies
before going on to the purely linguistic problems that grow out of a mix-
ture of speech elements essentially different on the one hand, as in the case
of the Indian and French or the English and French, or on the other hand,
of varieties of language that have a natural relation within a definite
circle of allied linguistic products as in the case of Langue d'Oi'l and
Langue d'Oc dialects or, more intimate still, of the Langue d'Oi'l species
with one another. Could we stop at the broad lines of demarcation, as
indicated in the preliminary article referred to above, could we take into
account the few linguistic varieties only that constituted the original
speech compound, we should find it no very difficult task to trace the inter-
lacing threads of these language forms and to note their reciprocal influ-
ences in the production of existing types, but the problem here is con-
ditioned by incomparably greater difficulties. The individual dialects that
were brought to these shores by the earliest settlers serve simply as so many
definite points d'appui, as so many trusty landmarks in the labyrinth of a
linguistic mixture that was the natural outgrowth of constant and promis-
cuous immigration for more than one hundred and fifty years. It is
fortunate for the investigator that he has these fixed points in the field of
his observation ; otherwise much of his searching would be in vain and
much of what he might think to be real discovery would be only conjecture
with reference to the great mass of his many colored and perplexing
material. We find at work in Canada all those agencies which produce
speech mixture among languages where the types are more distinctive and
where the relations of these types have settled into that special mould that
marks the separation of language from dialect. Of course, the more
intimate the relation between any two forms of speech, the more easy is
the passage of the one to the other, provided they both belong to the same
general stock and it is in this position, as we shall see when we come to
particular speech varieties, which the set of dialects of the Province of
Quebec holds with reference to those of the Maritime Provinces, that is,
instead of being distinctly individual languages, they must be regarded as
different phases of one general speech, but possessing at the same time
characteristics sufficiently marked to individualize them and cause them to
represent, for all working purposes, two distinct forms of language. We
shall consider, therefore, this subject of speech mixture under the various
headings that mark the natural mingling of linguistic forms such as the
influence of the purely external circumstances of life and the influence of
divergent linguistic products upon one another. It may easily happen in
certain cases, that the second part of this problem is contained in or con-
ditioned by the first; in truth, precisely here in Canada, we shall note how
it is that peculiar circumstances of life have especially contributed to certain
developments of speech that could never have existed had it not been for
their concurrence at a given time in the political, social and religious
experiences of the people. In fact, nowhere else, perhaps, have these car-
dinal functions of organic growth in civilized society acted more powerfully
toward the production of a composite language. It is here, if anywhere,
that we must carefully consider the reflex of the feudal system in language-
making; it is here that the social and religious life, bound together into an
indissoluble whole, have left their indelible stamp upon the speech from
the humblest peasant who left France to act the part of pioneer of French
civilization on the American Continent down to his peaceable, hard-work-
ing, frugal, self-sacrificing descendant of to-day, the habitant, who no longer
rejoices in the patois of his ancestor but who has risen, without effort and
mwaspectingly, to a higher plane in the scale of linguistic development.
The mere circumstance itself of bringing together emigrants for the New
World from several of the Chief Departments of France, in an age where
the means of communication among the different linguistic centres were
slow and laborious, and when, consequently, the varieties of idiom were
much more marked than we now have them, — this condition of things
alone was sufficient to produce important changes in the language of inhabi-
tants who, before this, had never come into any social relation with one
^another and where necessary contact and more or less intimate association
after they had planted foot on American soil, afforded an opportunity to
take the initial steps in that levelling of grammar forms and inter-
mixture of phonetic elements which are found to-day in the French
language of Canada.
One feature, moreover, of this mixed society must be borne in mind, as it
will help to explain how the process of social amalgamation was carried
forward with so universal success, namely, the superior character of the
earliest settlers, the " rank and file " of whom were chosen from the more
thrifty, prosperous class of the common folk, and thus were established
favorable conditions for the immediate growth of a form of language more
homogeneous than that which existed in the mother country, where the
social elements were more diverse and consequently less congenial. And
that not only a strong tendency to uniformity of speech actually did develop
among these colonists, but also that the results of it were surprising, is mani-
fest from the testimony of sundry writers previous to the conquest in 1760.
In truth, some of them go so far as to maintain that better French was
spoken on the banks of the St. Lawrence than in France itself, and account,
in part, for this extraordinary state of things by the less mixed character
of society and the large proportion of educated persons who had joined the
expeditions to the American Continent. There was, also, no difficulty for
the peasant in Canada to acquire a liberal means of subsistence after the
Colony had once taken foothold there ; his social status was greatly improved
by his constant and intimate relations to those of his own class and his
language bettered by the friendly and democratic conditions in which he
lived with his lord.
The seigneurial tenure carried with it certain rights that must also be
carefully noted, if we would understand this source of external influence on
the language. Many privileges, the requirement of military service, etc.,
that the ruling class had enjoyed in France and which had grown to be
obnoxious to the folk through improper extension and actual abuses, were
lopped off when the feudal system was transferred to America, where, united
with religion, it formed the dual basis of society. Through feudal custom,
moreover, there were certain points of commercial interest in which the
two classes of Canadian society, seigneurs and the peasants, were brought
into friendly contact. The "droit de banality" the obligation to keep their
seigneuries cleared and occupied or have them revert to the crown at the
expiration of one year, served to break up any tendency to exclusiveness on
the part of the lord, and often gave the habitant a chance to place himself
on an equality with him so far as this world's goods are concerned. But all
of these social conditions and peculiar political relations put together must
have been of little moment in reforming and ameliorating the various
speech varieties of the Canadian folk compared with influences brought to
bear upon them by the clergy, by the members, male and female, of those
numerous church establishments, of the various corporations organized by
private munificence, devoted to the instruction of the young and to the
spreading and strengthening of the Catholic faith. Here the priest has
such a grasp upon the confidence of the common people that his spiritual
authority is unquestioned and his dicta seldom go unheeded. He is not a
mere figure-head behind which society moves in devious routes and is
shielded in its malpractices by the emblem of sanctimonious power, but a
living presence whose force is always felt to be the most important, the
most extensive and the most potent social factor in every community. To
have so universal a hold on the sympathies of any people, these representa-
tives of the church must have proved themselves not only worthy of their
calling by their devotion, self-sacrifice and godly life, but they must neces-
sarily have controlled the early education of their people. And this brings
us to the last and most cogent force of a purely external nature that helped
to abrade the dialect irregularities and reduce to a homogeneous state, the
structure, forms and sounds of the Canadian language.
On Silent t in Modern English. By J. W. Bright.
[Abstract of a paper read before the University Philological Association, December 4,
1885].
An explanation for the disappearance of t from the pronunciation of such
words as often, soften, hasten, castle, etc., was found in the physiological charac-
ter of these particular t's and in the nature of their environments. This com-
munication was published in full in Modern Language Notes, vol. I, pp. 2-3.
March, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
63
The Earliest Municipal Code of Strassburg. By J. M.
Vincent. >
[Abstract of a paper read before the Seminary of History and Politics, February 5, 1886].
The laws which Strassburg received in its first code were the earliest
known among the cities of Germany, as a body of written statutes. They
date from sometime after A. D. 1050, but retain the monarchical spirit of
a much earlier period. The city was under almost complete control of the
Bishop. He appointed the chief ofHcials, depending on no one for approval
except the famUia ecclesiae, and that only in the choice of the highest, the
Advocate.
The Advocate was the chief representative of the Bishop in the adminis-
tration of justice. As ecclesiastics were not allowed to judge over life and
death, this official received in his stead the investiture of the sword from
the king, and was the person through whom the power to judge of minor
offences was passed on to the inferior officers. The Advocate's court was
held in the Bishop's palace, and his perquisites were one-third the fines and
compositions taken for breaches of peace in all the courts. His deputy
executed the sentences of death or mutilation.
Second in importance stood the Causidicus, or Prefect, who was appointed
by the Bishop with no restrictions, except the general rule, that no one
except the Advocate could be appointed outside the familiu ecclesiae. The
Prefect was sole judge over larceny and minor breaches of the peace, and
his jurisdiction extended over the whole population of the city and all who
came in from the diocese, except ecclesiastics. He appointed the jailer and
constables. At this time the whole police force consisted of this jailer and
two bailiffs.
Next below the Prefect was the Burggraf, whose duties would now mostly
belong to one branch of the police department, or the board of public works.
He was responsible to no one except the Bishop, and received the authority
to hold court from the Advocate. He appointed the masters of the Guilds,
and kept general oversight of their management. He was inspector of
buildings, streets, and part of the bridges, had charge of the walls and
the moat and could inflict heavy fines for damages to the same. The erec-
tion of flour mills depended on the consent of the populace and the license
of the Burggraf.
The Thelonearius, or Eevenue Collector, was appointed by the Bishop
also. Except certain tolls paid to the Burggraf and certain tithes directly
made over to the Bishop he had all the taxes to collect. He inspected wet
and dry measures. Scales and weights must come from the mint. Almost
every transaction of business amounting to five solidi had to pay a tax.
The ratio was one penny to every five solidi, or one pennyweight of silver
out of every three ounces. There were numerous exemptions, however, in
favor of ecclesiastics and their dependents.
The above officials held all that now would be strictly called municipal
offices. There were other minor magistrates, but they were no more admin-
istrative than are justices of the peace. But the Bishop, like many other
princes, had the right to coin money, and appointed a Master of the Mint.
This officer had, in addition to the management of coinage, jurisdiction
over counterfeiters throughout the diocese. The Bishop had the right to
determine when currency should be called in and new issues made, with no
restrictions, except that six weeks' notice must be given at intervals of a
fortnight.
No mention is made of a city council or board of aldermen. The Bishops
would be slow to divide their authority as long as the law expressly stated
that no one should judge over the city except the Emperor, the Bishop and
those whom the latter appointed. The citizens obtained the privilege of
a council only after long struggles against vehement opposition of the
Bishops.
The services required of the citizens by the Bishop were laid down in
extended detail, especially for artisans. It is difficult to say upon what
they are based. In determining this it should be remembered in the first
place that dues and taxes in that time were most frequently paid in service,
or in kind, and do not necessarily imply serfdom, although there doubtless
were classes who3e personal freedom was limited. Second, the Bishop stood
in three relations to the people, (a) Ecclesiastical head of a diocese, (b)
a Landlord over great estates upon which services were rendered as rent,
(c) Governor of the city, for which he was entitled to support in pro-
tecting and governing. It may be that these distinctions were not very
clear in the minds of the citizens, but tbey perhaps account for the multi-
plicity of. dues which on the outside look almost like slavery. Whether
it was an imposition to be compelled to work, even when paid for it, as some
crafts were, depends on the pay and on the solvency of the paymaster, of
which matters the law gives no hint. But we know that the citizens became
very anxious to have a voice of their own in the government of the city, and
gradually obtained it.
On Hebrew Words in the Codex Sangallensis 912.
By Cyrus Adler.
[Abstract of a paper read before the University Philological Association, January 8,
1886 J.
In the introduction to his paper on Latin Glossaries, with especial refer-
ence to the Codex Sangallensis 912 (printed Vol. XV. of the Transaction*
of the American Philological Association, pp. 124-228), Dr. Minton "Warren
remarks (p. 126) : "Most of the words are Latin. Not a few Hebrew words
and proper names, however, occur, due to ecclesiastical sources." The
latter part of this remark induced a study of the Hebrew words and names.
Such collections may be valuable, as they certainly are interesting for ety-
mology and pronunciation of both Hebrew and Latin (see for instance,
Die Aussprache des Hebriiischen bei Hieronymus von Carl Siegfried in the
Zeitschrift fur die Altlestamenlliche Wissenschaft, 1884, pp. 34-83). There are
about 60 Hebrew words and names, some of which are common enough, as
for instance, adonai-dominus = 'jiN, etc.
Some others are not so evident ; thus adorn = porlicum. This is Hebrew
xhw ; written also dSn , a porch especially of the temple (cf. IK. 6 : 3, 7 : 6 j
Joel, II : 17 ; II Chr.15 : 8 ; nirv dSik). Jerome transcribes these words in
the same way (cf. Siegfried, p. 36).
A, 226. Alma: virgo sancta, Hebreum est; aalma: virgo. The note on
these words is as follows: "'Neubauer says aalma is a mere repetition of
the previous Hebrew word. The double o he thinks is introduced on
account of the guttural sound of the a' (Ellis)." It seems much more
likely however that the glosses are transposed ; that aalma is for rroSpn,
with the article, and should be explained by virgo sancta, while alma is
for noSy and means virgo. The transcription of the article preceding an
initial guttural by aa is not uncommon. Thus Jerome renders D-mn by
aadam and ajnn by aagab (see p. 36 of Siegfried's article).
B, 22. BabilKxmfusio. This of course follows the punning etymology in
Genesis XI : 9. Bab-Ui means "gate of God."
B, 47. Bartholomew : filius sco pendentes aquas corrected in note to filius
suspendentis aquas. This curious etymology was obtained by dividing the
name up as follows: <d Sn "\a.
D, 11. Dabir-oraculum. This is of course to?, one of the most sacred
parts of the temple. Jerome gives the same transcription.
E, 14. Efleta: adaperire. This word must be referred to Mark, 7: 34:
"And looking up to heaven he sighed and saith unto him, t^imJd; that is,
be opened." Jerome gives ephpkctha and refers to this passage. Kautzsch
(Grammatik des Bibliseh-Aramaischen, Leipzig, 1884) (p. 10), explains
this as an Ethpe'el form ; i. e. for nnsn^.
H, 96. Hiersolima : visio pacis. This etymology presupposes the derivation
of the first part of oStfw from the stem nun. The name Jerusalem occurs
in Assyrian as Ur-sa-li-im-mu, and the «r may be the Akkadian word for
city, found also in Ur Kasdim.
N, 10. Nablum : quod graece spalateriu. This is probably the Hebrew
*M, a musical instrument frequently mentioned in the Psalm*.
R, 13. llama: excelsa. This is a correct etymology of the Palestinian
city, nm.
S, 233. Sion : specula. This gloss furnishes a very good etymology for the
name Zion. It evidently is the word jvj, found in plural in Jer. 31 : 21,
meaning mark. Jerome transcribes the form in Jeremiah Siamm, and it is
accordingly not impossible that this word and the name Zion are identical
—so that we may infer either that ]vs is an incorrect vocalization, or else
the difference in the vowel is to be explained as the result of dialectical
influence.
64
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 47.
Note on Partitions. By D. Barceoft.
[Abstract of a paper read ai a meeting of the University Mathematical Society, Jan-
nary *>. 1886]-
If we represent by (w: i,j) the partitions of w into j parts, none greater
than i. then,
(w:i,i) = (w-i:t-l,i)-T-(»:i,j-l). (1)
In particular when t =; w,
(» : v,j) = (w—j:vs — l,j) + (to : w, j — 1)
which may be written
(»)/= (»-i);+Hj-l,
and, since (w : i, j) = (to : j, t"), we have also
(»)j = (w — t); + («>)•'— l.
From (1), by making j = «r — i, we get
(«: t, u' — £ — 1) = (to: t, to — It) — (0: i — 1, to),
which, by repeated application of (1), gives
(to : i, to — k — 1) = (to : t, to) — 2& (A** — 1, to — k).
o
If*5|
I
(w:i,v-k— 1) = (to) i-2* (*),_,. (2)
o
If £ is greater than - , say k = - -f- a, then, to being even,
(»:i, 5 -a- l)=(w)<-2* (*)<-! + « [(0)i-2+(l)i-2] + (a-l)
•* o
[(2)(_2+ (3)^-2] ■
where a 5^±_4; similarly,
o
+ (2 a — 2)i_2+(2a-l)i_2 (3)
: + «
(» + l:t,-_«):=(l,+ l)i._2*(i)i_1 + a(0).-2+(<i-l)
[(l)i_2H-(2)i_2] + (o-2)°[(3)<-2+(4)i_2] + ...(2a-3)«_s
+ (2U-2)i_2, (4)
. ... _to + 8
in which a < — - — .
b
Formulas (2), (3), (4), enable us to determine, in mast cases (to : i,j) from
a table giving (to),-. The terms, other than those of the form (w)i, can also
be tabulated, thus making the calculation still easier. Thus, if we write
2i)i=&.i,a[(0). + (l)i] + (a-l)[(2)i+(3)i] + &c.= X,.-
a°nda(0)(+(a_l)[(l),+ (2).] + (a-2)[(3)<+(4)i]+&c.=^.,i
formulas (2), (3) and (4) become
(to : », to — k — 1) = (to); — Sie, i - 1
(w ■ h 5
i)-(«.)<-^ + a,<_1 + ^0i,._i
2 2
(v, + l..i,^-a)=(w + l)i-$l+ai_l + A>ai._i
Sk, i, Aa, i A' a can be calculated from the formulas
Sk + i,i-Sk,i-\- (£ + l)i
Aol + 1, i=Aa, i-(- Sja-f 1,«
A' a + 1, i = A'a, i + <S'2a, i
What has been said regarding the calculation of (to : i,j) applies word for
word to A (w.i,j), for we have
A(to : i, j) = A(w — j :i — 1 , j) + A(to : i, j — 1)
and
A(w); = A(to — i)i + A(w)(_i;
the meaning of A(to : i, j) being (i» : i, j) — (to — 1 : i,j)
and that of A (w)i, (u>)< — (to — \)i.
Examples.
(25 : 8 , 7) = (25 : 7, 8) = (25)7 — Sia, 6 + A't, 5 = 860 — 634 + 46 = 272.
(24 : 8, 7) = (24 : 7, 8) = (24)7 — -Sis, 6 + A3, s = 733 — 498 + 28 — 263.
A(25:8,7)=A(25:7,8)=A(25)r — ASi6,6 + A^/4, 5=: 127 — 136 + 18 = 9.
Formulas (3) and (4) include the rule given by Mr. G. S. Ely in Univer-
sity Circular, No. 15, May, 1882.
Die Finanzpolitik im Nordamerikanischen Biirger-
krieg. By Dr. Arthur Yager. (An essay published in the
Zeitschrift fur die gesamrnte Staatswissenschaft. Tubingen, 1886).
This paper, written by Dr. Arthur Yager while a student at the Johns
Hopkins University, presents a condensed but careful account of the finan-
cial policy of the United States government during the late Civil War. It
is based on an extensive study of original documents.
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Scientific Association.
February 3.— Sixty-ninth regular meeting. Professor Bemsen in the chair. Forty
member* present.
Papers read :
Instantaneous Photographs of the Heart in Motion and of Intestinal Peristalsis, by
W. U.Thompson. {Abstract onp. 60).
On the distribution of Lines in the Spectra of various Substances, by II. A. Rowland.
March 3. — Seventieth regular meeting. Pi •feasor Remsen in the chair. Thirty mem-
« bet s present.
Papers read:
Malarial Germ of Lavaran, by G. M. Stf.rnbkrg.
The New Element of the Blood, and lis Relation (o Coagulation, by G. T. Kemp.
The Manufacture of Aluminium, by W. It. Okndorkf.
rhilolot/iral Amttociatiim,
February 5.— Sixty-seventh regular meeting. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair.
Thirty-one membeis present.
Papers read ;
On the Partit iple in Pindar, by C. W. E. Mim.kr.
On UUnJ as Adverb in Old Saxon and related forms, and on the Relation of the forms
Groruon and Gorudn in Old Saxon, by II . Wood.
March 5.— Sixty-eighth regular meetiug. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair. Thirty-
five members present.
Paper read :
The Origin and Settlement of the Pennsylvania Germans, by M. D. Learned.
Ifi*t»r ir<il and Political Sctence Axmociation.
January meetings.— Dr. H. B. Adams in the chair.
Papers read :
The Presidential Office, by R. D. Mussey.
The Organisation of the Public Domain of the United States, by S. Sato.
The It.tiut.vhli Manuscripts, by J. M. Vincent. (Abstract onp. 59).
Introduction to a Study of Laud Grants for Roads and Canals, by A. N. Bliss.
Institutional Lessons of the newly discovered Cretan Code, by Herbert Smyth.
Febrwiry meetings. — Dr. II. B. Adams in the chair.
The Earliest Municipal Code of Si ra-smt rg. by J. M. Vincent. {Abstract onp. 63).
The Mudy of History at Columbia College, 1774-1865, by H. B. Adams.
Germs of the American Constitution, by A. N. Bliss.
Mathematical Society,
January 20.— Professor Newconib in the chair. Eleven members present.
Papers read :
Note on Partitions, by D. Barcroft. (Abstract onp. 64).
New Proof of Theorem, " Every Equation has a Root," by J. C. Fields,
February 23. — Dr. Story in the chair, Nine members present.
Papers read :
A Note on Unicursal Curves, by W. E. Story.
A Proof of Elliptic Function Addition Theorem, by J. C. Fields.
Archa^oloffiral Society,
December 16.— Seventh general meeting. President Gilman in the chair. Forty-eight
members present.
The Methods of Archaeological Research, by Professor F. W. Putnam, of the
Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass.
Attention was drawn to the want of scientific method in archaeological investigations
maoe in our country and to the advantages of the thorough system uf excavation
practised by Profo—Off Putnam himself in bis work in the Ohio Valley, the results
of which were exhibited in detail.
The Importance of the Gortyna Code for Greek law, by H. W. Smyth.
This is the longest document we possess for the study of Gieek law, as well as the
earliest, as it probably dates back to time of Solon (see Professor Merriam's paper
in American Journal of Arcfueoloyy, October, ISiio).
January 13.— Eighth general meetiug. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair. About one
hundred and tin y persons present.
The Greek sculpture in the Museums of Athens, by Russell Sturgis of New York.
Athens is one general museum of sculpture, much of which is but little known. The
most important works were illustrated by slides, especially the sepulchral monu-
ments of the IV century B. C, many of them probably executed by ihe followers of
the Pheidian School.
Recent Changes and Archteological Discoveries in Rome, by A. L. Frothinmiiah, Jr.
The building of the new quarters has brought to light, especially during the last two
years, works of art of most unusual interest, front the archaic necropolis at least
contemporary with the usual date for the foundation of Rome, to numerous works
of the early Etnpiie — mausoleums, bronze statues, rostra, atrium of the vestals,
etc.
The French Expedition to Susa and recent Archaeological Discoveries in Persia, by
M. K. Babelon of Paris.
Abstract of a paper sent for publication to the American Journal of Archaeology.
March, 1886.]
TJNIVEBSITY CIRCULARS.
65
DEATH OF PROFESSOR CHARLES D. MORRIS.
OBITUARY NOTICE.
Professor Charles D'Urban Morris, Collegiate Profes-
sor of Latin and Greek in the Johns Hopkins University,
died at his residence in Baltimore, February 7, 1886, after
an illness of nearly ten days.
He was a son of Rear- Admiral Henry Gage Morris, of the
British Navy, who came of a Yorkshire family, was born in
New York in 1770, and married in 1807, a daughter of the
Rev. F. Open, a clergyman of the English church in the
county of Cork. Professor Morris, who was one of a family
of ten children, was born in Charmouth, Dorset, England,
February 17, 1827. He received his collegiate training in
the University of Oxford. As a student of Lincoln College
he was admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Arts in 1849.
His name appears in the first class of those who received
honors in Uteris humanioribus. Three years later he became a
Master of Arts and a Fellow of Oriel College. He came to
this country in 1853, and was for a time Rector of Trinity
School in the city of New York, and subsequently master of
a private school for boys at Lake Mohegan, near Peekskill.
He was then made a Professor in the University of the City
of New York, and from that position he was called in 1876
to the chair in the Johns Hopkins University, which he held
until his death.
He was the author of a Latin Grammar and Reader, and
of an Attic Greek Grammar, in which some original views of
the proper methods of teaching the elements of the Latin and
Greek languages were carefully unfolded ; and he wrote a
number of articles on philological topics, most of them con-
tributed to the American Journal of Philology and to the
American Philological Association. At the time of his death,
he was nearly ready to publish an edition of the first book of
Thucydides, with notes, the final sheets of which will be
carried through the press by his associates.
His powers however were chiefly devoted to the work of
instruction and he never appeared to greater advantage than
when surrounded by his pupils in the class room or in his par-
lor, or when he took part in the admission of undergraduate
students and in the presentation of candidates for the bacca-
laureate degree. His enthusiasm, his sympathy, his honesty
and his Christian faith were apparent under all circumstances;
and there was a personal charm in that mixture of confidence
and diffidence which he so often manifested, — confidence in
the domain with which he was familiar, diffidence with respect
to duties which he was not accustomed to perform. The Uni-
versity will long lament his death.
The body of Mr. Morris was buried in St. Paul's church-
yard (corner of Fremont and German sts.) on Wednesday,
February 10. The funeral services, conducted by Rev. Dr.
J. S. B. Hodges, the Rector, were held in St. Paul's church.
The officers and students of the University accompanied the
family as mourners from the dwelling house to the church.
Resolutions op Respect.
On the day of the funeral the officers and students of the
Johns Hopkins University assembled in Hopkins Hall, and
after a few introductory words from President Gilman, the
following resolutions were presented by Professor Gildersleeve,
in a brief address, and after additional remarks by Professor
Warren, by Messrs. R. W. Rogers, and Allan C. Woods,— two
of Mr. Morris's recent pupils, — were unanimously adopted.
Resolved, That we as members of the Johns Hopkins
University herewith give public expression to our respect for
the memory of the late Professor Morris and to our sorrow
for the loss of one who occupied so important a position in
our academic body as scholar, teacher, and man.
As a scholar, to the best characteristics of the English
school in which he was trained, to refined taste, sound sense,
exemplary accuracy, Mr. Morris united the most cordial sym-
pathy with the new philological life of our day, the most
eager receptivity of fresh truth from every source, so that his
work never lost the glow of recent acquisition, never lacked
the balance of thoughtful criticism.^
As a teacher, he carried into the class-room the strength
and the warmth of thorough conviction. Enthusiastic devo-
tion to his subject, confidence in his methods, an ardent desire
to impress and to impart, gave him a hold on his pupils that
is given to few, and his instruction will ever be memorable
to those who had the privilege of his inspiration and guidance.
As a man, Mr. Morris bore through life the stamp of a
high and noble nature. Impetuous and frank, he was open
alike in praise and blame. No man more scornful of the
mean, none more generous in his appreciation of the good,
and his influence and his example made for all that is best
and truest. Loving as he did the society of young men, and
sympathizing as few sympathize with their struggles and their
aspirations, he was not content with the good he could do in
casual intercourse, but delighted to gather about him under
his own roof the members of the university, who in their turn
honored and loved him as a father, as an elder brother. In
the discharge of all his duties Mr. Morris was under the
dominion of a strong religious sense. He lived as seeing Him
who is invisible and under His eye gave himself with single-
ness of heart to the work which had been appointed him and
continued faithful in it even to the end.
Resolved, That the foregoing resolution be communicated
to his widow and to the members of his family in England
and that the Trustees of the University be requested to enter
the same upon their records.
The Matriculate Society of the University, and the Hop-
kins "House of Commons" held special meetings, previous
to the funeral of Professor Morris, and adopted resolutions
which expressed the sorrow which they felt at his death, their
great respect for his scholarship and character, and their attach-
ment to him as a teacher and friend.
66
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 47.
ENUMERATION OF CLASSES, SECOND HALF-YEAR, 1885-86.
Mathemati.CS. (49 Students).
Classes meet in Rooms S, 14, and 18.
Practical and Theoretical Astronomy : Professor Newcomb.
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 9 a. in. (7).
Barvroft.
Bell, L.
Campbell, G. M.
Fields.
Haight.
Nixou.
Van Vleck.
Mathematical Seminary; Astronomy: Professor Newcomb.
Weekly, Wednesday, 3 p. m. (5).
Campbell, G. M. Fields.
Barcroft.
Bell, L.
Van Vleck.
Dr. Story. Weekly, Thursday, 5
Mathematical Seminary:
p. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Introductory Course for Graduates : Dr. Story. Daily, 11
a. m. (6).
Awes. Eichelberger. Rich. Van Vleck.
Campbell, G. M. Gorton.
Theory of Probabilities : Dr. Story. Twice weekly, Tuesday and
Thursday, 12 m. (5).
Ames. Campbell, G, M. Fields. Haight.
Barvrofl.
Advanced Analytic Geometry : Dr. Story. Three times weekly,
Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 1 p. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight.
Conic Sections: {Minor Course): Dr. Story.
day and Thursday, 1 p. m. (15).
Ballard. Eareckson. Molinard.
Brigham. Eusey.
Browne, A. L. Jones, W.
t>ashielL Miller, W. H.
Mathematical Seminary : Dr.Craig. Weekly, Monday, 9 a.m. (4).
Barcroft, Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Elasticity : (Lami) : Dr. Craig. Three times weekly, Monday,
Wednesday, and Friday, 1 p. m. (4).
Blandin. ' Crew. Keilholtz. Van Vleck.
Differential Equations : (Boole) : Major Course : Dr. Craig.
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 11 a. m. (9).
Blaodin. Dully. Jayne. McPherson.
English. Keilholtx.
Nixon.
Twice weekly, Tues-
Motora.
Roberts, D. E.
Taylor, F. W.
White.
Wiegand.
Wingert.
Child.
Crew.
Weech.
Linear Differential Equations: (Fuchs): Dr. Craig. Twice
weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 10 a. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Elliptic and Abelian Functions : (Cayley, Clebsch, and Gordan) :
Dr. Craig. Three times weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday,
10 a. m. (4).
Barcroft. Fields. Haight. Nixon.
Problems in Mechanics: Dr. Franklin. Twice weekly, Mon-
day and Friday, 5 p. m. (4).
Ames. Barcroft. Child. Jayne.
Solid Analytic Geometry: (Todhunter): Dr. Franklin. Three
times weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 11 a. m. (5).
Duffy. Laessig. McPherson. Weech.
English.
Differential and Integral Calculus: Dr. Franklin. Three
times weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 1 p. m. (14).
Ballard. Eareckson. Miller, W. H. Stevens.
Brigham. Eusey. Motors. Taylor, F. W.
Browne. A. Li lioiliuann. Roberta, D. E. White.
Dashiell.
lioiliuann.
Jones, W.
Analytic Geometry (Elementary) i: Dr. Franklin. Three times
weekly, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 4 p. m. (10).
Carey.
Halm.
HlUca.
Jones, H. C.
Loeb.
Moore, G. W.
Reader.
Rosenthal.
Warren.
Physics.
(52 Students).
Classes meet in Rooms 3, 4, 7, and 8.
Matliematical Theory of light: Professor Kowland. Daily
10 a.m. (10).
Bell, L Crew. Jayne. Mansfield.
Blaudin. Eichelberger. KeilholU. Morrill.
Child. Gorton.
Ma,for Course: Dr. Kimball. Daily, 12 m. (15).
Child. Hobos. Nixon.
Dohme. Holmes. Randall, W. W.
Emerson, W. H. Jayne. Rich.
Hedrick. Laessig. Scott.
Stevens.
Wiegand.
Wingert.
General Physics: Dr. Kimball. Daily, 10 a. m.
(22).
Bevan. Fearn. Hughes.
Bolgiano. Gilpin. Jones, H. C.
Cradock. Guggenheimer. Lanier.
1 -orr. liar i ■ y . Macauley.
Duffy. Hodges. Mann.
Eareckson. Hough.
Meriwether.
Molinard.
Moore, G. N.
Simon.
Weech.
Laboratory Work:
Advanced Students: Professor Rowland. (8).
Ames. Blandin. Crew.
Bell, L. Child. Jayue.
Keilholtr.
Morrill.
Major Course: Dr. Kimball. (14).
Dohme. Holmes. Scott.
Emerson, W. H. LaesMg. Stevens.
Hedrick. Kandall, W. W. Wiegand.
Hobbs. Kich.
Williams, L. E.
Wingert.
Wood hull.
Class in General Physics : Dr. Kimball and Dr. Perkins. (24).
Allen, P. Eareckson. Hodges. Mann.
Bevan. Fearn. Hough. Meriwether.
Bolgiano. Flexner. Hughes. Molinard.
Cradock. Glpin. Jones, H. C. Moore, G. N.
Dorr. Guggenheimer. Lanier. Simon.
Duffy. Harry. Macauley. Weech.
Chemistry. (88 students).
Classes meet in the Chemical Laboratory.
Chemistry of the Carbon Compounds: Professor Remsen.
Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday, 9 a. m. (37).
Applegarth, E. C.
Brackett, R. N.
Bucherer.
Buckler,
Can held.
Coar.
Dohme.
Friedenwald.
Gooch.
Hamilton.
Hart ogen sis.
Hayes.
Hedrick.
Hemmeter,
Hobbs.
Holmes.
Kemp.
Laessig.
Linn.
Mcintosh.
Mindeleff.
Mount.
Palmer, C. S.
Pen ni man.
Piggot.
Pope.
Randall. W. W.
Rich.
Roberts, D. E.
Smith, W. F.
Stein.
Swartz,
Turner.
Wallis.
Williams, J. W.
Winslow.
Woodhull.
General Cltemistry : Professor Remsen. Lectures three times
weekly, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 9 a. m. (48).
Allen, P.
Ames.
Boyd.
Brill.
Brum well.
Bucherer.
Chisolm.
Coates.
Crew.
Dashiell.
Dorr.
Doub.
Dreyer.
Eareckson.
Eiehelberger.
Engle.
English.
Fearn.
Fi field.
Forrest.
Gieske.
Gilpin.
Gooch.
Gorton.
Hamilton.
Hartogensis.
Henderson.
Hodge.
Jayne.
Jones, H. C.
Keilholtz.
Lamb.
Mann.
Masun,
Molinard.
Moore, G. N.
O' Donovan.
Palmer, C. S.
Pope.
Reese.
Reeve.
S hem well.
Simon.
Stevens.
Stow.
Strauss.
Williams, L. E.
Willis.
Laboratory Methods and Theoretical Chemistry: Dr.
Morse. Twice weekly, Thursday and Friday, 9 a. m. (25).
Hedrick. Mount. 8wnrtz.
Hemmeter. Penniman. Turner,
Hobbs. Randall, W. W. Wallis.
Holmes. Rich. Williams, J. W.
Linn. Smith, W. F. Winslow.
Mcintosh. Stein. Woodhull.
Applegarth, E. C.
Buckler.
Coar.
Dohme.
Friedenwald.
Hartogensis.
Hayes.
Laboratory Work: Professor Remsen, Dr. Morse, and Dr.
Renouf. (82).
Allen, P.
Ames.
Applegarth, E.C.
Bay ley.
Bell, C. J.
Beil. L.
Boyd.
Brackett, R. N.
Brill.
Bromwell.
Bucherer.
Buckler.
Can field.
Chisolm.
Coar.
Coates.
Crew.
Dashiell.
Dohme.
Doit.
Doub.
Dreyer.
Duggan.
Eareckson.
Eichelberger.
Emerson, W, H.
Engle.
English.
Fearn.
Fi field.
Forrest.
Friedenwald.
Gieske.
Gilpin.
Gooch.
Gorton.
Hamilton.
Hartogensis.
Hay i s.
Hedrick.
Hemmeter.
Henderson.
Hobbs.
Hodge.
Hoen.
Holmes.
Jones, H. C.
Kastle.
Keilholtz.
Kemp.
Lamb.
Linn.
Mann.
Mason.
Mcintosh.
Mindeleff.
Molinard.
Moore, G. N.
O'Donovan.
Orndorfl".
Palmer, C. S.
Penniman.
Piggot.
Pope.
Randall, W. W.
Reese.
Reeve.
Schneider.
Sh em well.
Simon.
Smith, W. F.
Stein.
Stevens.
Stow.
Strauss.
Turner.
Wallis.
Williams, J. W.
Williams, L.E.
Willis.
Winslow.
Woodhull.
March, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
67
Mineralogy and Petrography. Dr. Williams. (56 Students).
Mineralogy : (Advanced). Lectures three times weekly, Wednesday,
Thursday, and Friday, 11 a.m. Saturday,' 9 a. m.-12 m., Quiz and
Practieum. (23).
Bayley. Hamilton. Lawson. Randal], W. W.
Brackett, R. N. Hayes. Liebig. Rich.
Brill. llcdnck. I. inn. Turner.
Coar. Hoen. Nason. Williams, L. E.
Dohrue. Hobb". Orndorff. Woodhull.
Engle. 1 ! ■ .1 1 1 1 . . Peuniman.
Mineralogy: (Elementary). Dr. Williams. Weekly, Monday, 9
a. m. (32).
Allen, P. Doub. Gilpin. Reese.
Ames. Dreyer. Gorton. Sbemwell.
Boyd. Eareekson. Henderson. Simon.
Brmnwell. Eiehelberger. Jones, H. C Stevens.
Chisolm. English. Lamb. Stow.
Coates. Fearn. Mann. Strauss.
Dashiell. Fifield. Moore, G. N; Willis.
Dorr. Forrest. O'Donovan. Woods.
Laboratory Work: Dr. Williams. (8).
Bayley. Hayes. Lawson.
Coar.
HoObs.
Nason.
Orndorff.
Palmer, C. S.
Biology. (48 Students).
Classes meet in the Biological Laboratory.
General Biology : Professor Martin. Three times weekly, Mon-
day, Wednesday, and Friday, 10 a. m. (20).
Applegarth, E. C.
Hemineter.
Pope.
Smith, j
Cones.
Hodge.
Reese.
Stow.
Drever.
Lamb.
Reeve.
Straus.
Fiiedenwald.
Nuttall.
Rich.
Swart z.
Gooch,
O'Douovan.
She m well.
Willis.
Animal Physiology and Histology : Professor Martin.
Three times weekly, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday, 11 a. m. (14).
Buckler. Kastle. Price. Wightman, A. C.
Hartngensis. Kemp. Smith, W. F. Williams, J. W.
Hemineter. Mclntosb. Stein. Winslow.
Herrick. Nuttall.
Laboratory Work: Professor Martin, Dr. Brooks, Dr. Howell,
and Dr. McMurrich. Daily, 9 a. m. to 5 p. m. (44).
Abbott. Friedenwald. Mcintosh. Smith, W. F.
Andrews. Gooch. Miller, C. O. Stein.
A pplegarth, E. C. Haldeman. Nelson. Sternberg.
Bruce. Hartogensis. Nuttall. Stow.
Buckler. Hemineter. O'Douovan. Straus.
Campbell, J. P. Herrick. Orr. Swartz.
Chandlee. Hodge. Pope. Wightman, A. C.
Coales. Jastrow. Reese. Williams, J. W.
Donaldson, F. Kastle. Reeve. Willis.
Dreyer. Kemp. Sbemwell. Wilson.
Duggan. Lamb. Smith, A. D. Winslow.
History of Morphology : Dr. Brooks. Three times weekly,
Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 9 a. m. (10).
Andrews. Hemineter. McMurrich. Orr.
Bruce. Herrick. Nelson. Wilson.
Haldeman. Kemp.
General Zoology : Dr. Brooks. Twice weekly, Monday and Fri-
day, 11 a. m. to 1 p. m. (13).
Andrews. Kasllc. Nuttall. Wightman, A. C.
Buckler. Mclntosb. Smith, W. F. Williams, J. W.
Hartogensis. Nelson. Stein. Winslow.
Hemineter.
Physiology of Respiration: Dr. Howell. Weekly, Monday,
12 m. (8).
Campbell, J. P. Haldeman. Herrick. Nelson.
Donaldson. Hemineter. Kemp. Nuttall.
Osteology : Dr. McMurrich. Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday,
10 a.m. (17).
Applcgarth, E. C. Hodge. Reese. Stow.
Coates. Lamb. Reeve. Straus.
Dreyer. O'Douovan. Sbemwell. Swartz.
Friedenwald. Pope. Smith, A. D. Willis.
Gooch.
Greek. (40 Students).
Classes meet in 181 N. Howard St.
Greek Seminary: (Plato): Professor Gildersleeve. Twice
weekly, Monday and Wednesday, 10 a. m. (22).
Christie. Huizinga. Patrick. Smith, K. W.
I 'oubleday. Hussey. Peirson. Steele.
Elliott, b. 8. lxxlge. Ramsay. Steisoii.
Elmer. Ifagoas. Scribner. Trueman
Milroy. Slaughter. Walz.
Fessum.
Harding.
Murray, A. T.
Greek Syntax: (ITimotactic Sentence in Greek) : Professor Gilder-
sleeve. Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 10 a.m. (25).
Christie. Hui/.lnga. Murray, A. T. Slaughter.
Doubleday. Hussey. Patrick. Smith, K. W.
Elliott, E. S. Lodge. Pelrson. Steele.
Elmer. Magoun. Ramsay. Stetson.
Foasum. Milroy. Scribner. Trueman.
Grir. Moore, J. L. Shedoe. Wall.
Harding. *
Greek Philosophic Literature: (Lectures and Readings): Pro-
cessor Gildersleeve. Weekly, Friday, 10 a. m. (22).
Christ ie. Hussey. Patrick. Smith, K. W.
Doubleday. Lodge. Peirson. Steele.
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. Ramsay. Stetson.
Elmer. Milroy. Scribner. Trueman.
Fossuin. Moore, J. L. Slaughter. Wall.
Huizinga. Murray, A. T.
Sophocles: Antigone: Mr. Christie. Four times weekly, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 12 m. 19).
Bruyn. Grier. Me Lane, R. M. Rogers.
Cole. Hoffmann. Ness. Thompson.
Flexner.
Homer: Iliad ix,xi: Euripides: Alcestis: Dr. Spieker. Four
times weekly, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, arid Friday, 1 1 a. in. (8).
Bechiel. Gildersleeve, R. C. Loeb. Palmer, O. H.
Devries. Helfeustein. Nets. Rosenthal.
Prose Composition:
Class A : Mr. Christie. Weekly, Monday, 12 m. (9).
Bruyn. Grier. McLane, R. M. Rogers.
Hoffmann. Ness. Thompson.
Cole.
Flexner.
Class B: Dr. Spieker. Weekly, Monday, 11 a.m. (7).
BechteL Gildersleeve, R. C. Loeb. RoeenthaL •
Devries. Helfenstein. Palmer, O. H.
Greek Dialects and Inscriptions: Dr Smyth. Weekly, Thurs-
day, 12 m. (8).
Elliott, E. S. Magoun. Scribner. Trueman.
Hussey. Murray, A. T. Steele. Wall.
Latin. (70 Students).
Classes meet in 181 N. Howard St.
Seminary : (Livy and Tacitus) : Dr. Warren. Twice weekly, Tues-
day and Friday, 11 a. m. (25).
Bowen. Hammond. Moore, J. L. Slaughter.
Christie. Harding. Murray, A. T. Smith, K. W.
Doubleday. Hussey. Ness. Steele.
Elliott, E. S. Jones, C. E. Peirson. Stetson.
Elmer. Magoun. Scribner. Trueman.
Fontaine. Milroy. Shefloe. Walz.
Fossum.
Latin Grammar : (Lectures) : Dr. Warren. Weekly, Thursday,
11 a. m. (22).
Christie. Hammond. Magoun. Slaughter.
Doubleday. Harding. Milroy. Smith, K. W.
Elliott, E. S. Harry. Murray, A. T. Steele.
Elmer. Hodges. Scribner. Stetson.
Flexner. Hough. Shefloe. Trueman.
Fossum. Hussey.
Practical Exercises: Dr. Warren. Weekly, Monday, 11 a.m.
(18).
Elliott, E. S. Hussey. Ness. Smith, K. W;
Elmer. Magoun. Peirson. Steele.
Fontaine. Milroy. Scribner. Trueman.
Fossum. Moore, J. L. Shefloe. Walz.
Harding. Murray, A. T.
Pliny and Juvenal : Dr. Warren. Three times weekly, Tuesday,
Thursday, and Friday, 10 a. m. (6).
Cole. McLane, R. M. Preston. Thompson.
Flexner. McPherson.
Reading at Sight : Dr. Warren. Weekly, Wednesday, 10 a. m. «(6).
Cole. McLane, R. M. Preston. Thompson.
Flexner. McPherson.
Tacitus: Mr. Moore. Four times weekly, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, and Friday, 10 a. ra. (12).
Bayard. Daish. Hilles. Rogers.
Black. Gordon. Hoffmann. Wilioughby, W. F.
Bruyn. Hahn. Reader. Wllloughby.W.W.
Horace: Select Odes, Satires, and Epistles: Dr. Spieker. Four times
weekly, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 9 a. m. (11).
Bechtel. Gildersleeve, R. C. Palmer, O. H. Tarleton.
Brown, H. M. Helfenstein. Poullain. Taylor, R. T.
Devries. Loeb. Rosenthal.
Prose Composition :
Class A : Dr. Warren. Weekly, Monday, 10 a. m. (6).
Cole. McLane, R. M. Preston. Thompson.
Flexner. McPherson.
€8
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 47.
Class B: Mr. Moore. Weekly, Monday, 10 a. m. (3).
Bruyn. Hoffmann. Rogers.
Class C: Dr. Spiekeu. 'Weekly, Monday, 9 a. m. (11).
Beehtel. Gildersleeve, R. C. Palmer, 0. H. Tarleton.
Bruwn, H. M. Helfenstein. Poullain. Taylor, R. T.
Devries. Loeb. Rosenthal.
Supplementary Class: Mr. Slaughter. Three times weekly,
Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, 4 p. m. (12).
Bolgiauo. Cradock. DuvaU. Patterson.
Boyd. Dorr. Fearn. Reeves.
Cuuolm. Dorsey. Lanier. blow.
Shemitic Languages. Professor Hatjft. (15 Students).
Classes meet in 111 W. Monument St.
Elementary Hebrew: {Gesenius-Mitchell's Grammar; Genesis, ed.
Bacr). Three times weeklv, Tuesday, 1 p. m., Thursday and Friday,
4 p.m. (11).
Adler. Grier. Mossell. Schloegel.
Allen, E. P. Huizinga. Ramsay. Walz.
Cole. Milroy. Rogers.
Hebrew Exercises: {Historical Books). Weekly, Wednesday, 4
p.m. (11).
Adler. Grier. Mossell. Schloegel.
Allen, E. P. Huizinga, Ramsay. Walz.
Cole. Milroy. Rogers.
Biblical Aramaean: {Critical Interpretation of the Book of Ezra).
Weekly, Wednesday, 3 p. m. (4).
Adler. Huizinga. Ramsay. Schloegel.
Syria c : {Extracts from Bar Ebhrdyd's Chronicles in Boediger's Chres-
tomathy). Weekly, Tuesday, 3 p. m. (4).
Adler. Huizinga. Ramsay. Schloegel.
Arabic: {Extracts from Arabic geographers and select suras of the Coran).
Weekly, Tuesday, 11 a. m. (5).
Adler. Huizinga. Philipson. Schloegel.
Arnolt.
Ethiopic: (DUlmann's Chrestomalhy). Weekly, Tuesday, 12 m. (5).
Adler. Huizinga. Philipson. Schloegel.
Arnolt.
Assyrian : (Nimrod Epic). Weekly, Thursday, 11 a. m. (7).
Adler. Frothingham. Philipson. Taylor.
Arnolt. Huizinga. Schloegel.
Sumero- Akkadian : {Bilingual Hymns and Psalms). Weekly, Thurs-
day, 12 m. (7).
Adler Frothingham. Philipson. Taylor.
Arnolt. Huizinga. Scboegel.
Babylonian : {Inscriptions of Nebuchadnezzar, Neriglissar, Nabonidus,
tic.). Weekly, Thursday, 3 p. m. (7).
Adler. Froihingham. Philipson. Taylor.
Arnolt. Huizinga. Schloegel.
Sanskrit and the comparative grammar of
the cognate languages. Dr. Bloomfield. (30 Stu-
dents).
Classes meet in 111 W. Monument St.
ElemenUiry Sanskrit : ( Whitney's Grammar and Lanman's Beader).
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Friday, 12 m. (9).
Elmer. Murray, A. T. Scribner. Steele.
Wagon n. Ramsay. Smith, K . W. Stetson.
Moore, J. L.
Advanced Sanskrit: {Selections from Classkal Sanskrit: Big-Veda).
Twice weekly, Wednesday 11a. m., Friday 3 p. m. (8).
Christie. Fmsutn. J»dge. Stetson.
Doiibleday. Huasoy. Milroy. Walz.
Atharva-Veda and Kaucika-sutra. Weekly, Saturday, 11
a.m. (2). '
r-ruyth, H. W. Spieker.
Comparative Philologg : {Lectures: Whitney's Language and the
Study of Language). Weekly, Monday, 12 m. (19).
Sevan. Hodge*. Moore, J. L. Smith, K. W.
Dunlap. II'Migh. Murray, A. T. Steele.
Hlmii, K. 8. Hughes. I'eirson. Stetson.
Elezner. l^due. Ramsay. Trueman.
Harry. Magoun. Scribner.
Comparative Grammar of Greek: {Brugmann's Griechischc
Grammutik). Weekly, Thursday, 3 p. m. (21).
Christie. Mazoun. Ness. Smith, K. W.
Doubleday. Miller, C. W. E. Peirson. Steele.
Elliott, E. 8. Milroy, Ramsay. Stetson.
FoHKiin. Moort", J. L. Scribner. Trueman.
Buaeey. Murray, A. T. Slaughter. Walz.
Lodge.
German. (96 students).
Classes meet at 111 and 117 W. Monument St.
German Seminary: {Lubben's Mittelniederdeutsche Chrestomathie ;
Lauremberg's Niederdeutsche Scherzgedichte) : Dr. Wood. Friday, 10
a. m. to 12 m. (12).
Burton. Egge. Hubbard. Smyth, A. H.
Cummings. Hall, J. L. Learned. Whelhatn.
Dunlap. Hench. Matzke. Wiglitman, J. R,
Old Norse : {Brenner's Handbuch ; Mbbius's Analecta Norroena) : Dr.
Wood. Weekly, Thursday, 9 a. m. (5).
Burton. Egge. Hubbard. Learned.
Crenshaw.
Middle High German : {Parzival ed. Lachmann) : Dit. Wood.
Weekly, Tuesday, 9 a. m. (12).
Allen, E. P.
Burton.
Crenshaw.
Cummings.
Dunlap.
Egge.
Hubbard.
Learned.
Matzke.
Smyth, A. H.
Whet ham.
Wigbtman, J. It.
Smyth, A. H.
Whet ham.
Wightrnan, J. R,
Old Teutonic Life: {Lectures): Dr. Wood. Weekly, Wednesday,
12 m. (13).
Bright. Egge. Hubbard.
Burton. Edmiston. Le;irned.
Crenshaw. Hempl. Matzke.
Dunlap.
Dr. Wood's class in Beowulf is given under English.
(Major Course).
German Literature: {Lectures, uith Klvge's Geschicht: d. deutsehen
Literatur): Dr. Goebel. Weekly, Wednesday, 10 a. m. (7).
Allen, E. P. Jones, C. E. Smyth, A. H. Young.
Boyd. Shetloe. Wiesenfeld.
Selected Headings: {Masius's Lesebuch, Hi) : Dr. Goebel. Weekly,
Tuesday, 10 a. m. (7).
Boyd. Jones, C. E. Shefloe. Young.
Cummings. Roberts, B. T. Wiesenfeld.
Goethe: Faust: Dr. Goebel. Twice weekly, Monday and Thursday,
10 a. m. (15).
Allen, E. P. Campbell, G. M. Jones, C. E. Smyth, A. H.
Boyd. Crenshaw. Loeb. Wiesenfeld.
Burnham. Egge. Roberts, B. T. Young.
Burton. Hall, J. L. Shefloe.
Prose Composition: Mr. Hempl. Weekly, Friday, 10 a. m. (9).
Allen, E. P. Cummings. Hall, J. L. Roberts, B. T.
Boyd. Edmiaton. Jones, C. E. Young.
Crenshaw.
German Style and Syntax : Dr. Goebel. Second Thursday in
each month, 2 p. m. (4).
Boyd. Crenshaw. Edtniston. Shefloe.
(Minor Course).
Lessing : Minna von Barnhelm : Mr. Hempl.
First Section: Weekly, Monday, 11 a. m. (28).
Allen, P. Dahhiell. Hughes. O'Donovan.
Black. Dorsey. Jones, W. Preston.
Bngham. DuvaU. Lamb. Reeves.
Browne, A. L. Ensey. Lanier. Taylor, F. W.
Carey. Ferguson. Maeaulev. White.
Chisolm. Halm Meriwether. Willmighhy, W. F.
Daish. Hall, J. L. Miller, W. II. Will..ugliby,\V.W.
Second Section: Twice weekly, Tuesday and Wednesday, 3 p. m. (23).
Bavard. Kngle. Jones, W. A. Rogers.
Beehtel. Grier. Lawson. Smith, C. U
Blandin. Haight. McCahe. Taylor, R. T.
Brown, H. M. Hench. McLane, R. M. Thompson.
Bruyn. Hixsun. Meriwether. Williams, W. K.
Cole. Hodges. Milroy.
Goethe: Egmont: Dr. Goebel. Twice weekly, Monday and Friday,
2 p.m. (8).
Burnham. Hench. McC'ane. Reeves.
Ferguson. Grier. Meriwether. Rogers.
Historical Readings: Dr. Goebel. Twice weekly, Tuesday and
Friday, 11 a. m. (13).
Allen, P. Duvall. Hughes. Snnford.
Black. Fenis. Lanier.
Daish. Hahu. Patrick.
Dorsey.
Scientific Headings: Mr. Hempl.
First Section: Twice weekly, Tuesday and Friday, 11 a. m. (17).
Brigham. Ensev. Macaitley. rope.
Browne, A. L. Hixson. Miller. \V. H. Reese.
Carey. Jones, W. O'honovan. Taylor, F. W.
Chisolm. Lamb. Penuiiuan. White.
Dashiell.
Second Section: Twice weekly, Thursday and Friday, 3 p. m. (17).
Bayard. Campbell, G. M. Hcrriek. McLane^R^M.
Willoughhv.W.F.
Willoughby.W.W.
Beehlel.
Blandin.
Brown, II. M.
Bruyn.
Cole
Engle.
Haight.
Hodges.
Jones, W. A.
Lawson.
Taylor. R. T.
Thompson.
Williams, W. K.
March, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
69
Oral Practice:
Allen, P.
Black.
Brigham.
Browne, A. L.
Burnliam.
Carry.
Chisolm.
Kaish.
Dashiell.
Prose Composition: Mr. Hempl.
First Section : Weekly, Wednesday, 11 a.m. (35).
Mr. Hempl. 1
rVeekly, Thursda)
,11a.m. (33).
DuXMT.
Hughes.
Peirson.
Duvall.
Jones, \V.
Pope.
Knst-v.
Lamb.
Preston.
Ferguson.
Lanier.
Reeves.
Hahn.
Macauley.
Taylor, F. W.
Hall, J. I*
Miller, W. H.
While.
Hench.
0' Donovan.
Willoughby.W.F
llixsun.
IViunni.iiL.
Willoughby.W.W
Allen, P.
Black.
Brighaui.
Browne, A. L.
Burn ham.
Carey.
Crenshaw.
Dalsb.
Dashiell.
Dorst-y.
Duvall.
Ensey.
Ferguson,
Fen is.
Hahn.
Hall, J. L.
Hughes.
Jones. W.
Second Section : Weekly, Monday, 3 p. m.
Bayard.
Bfchtel.
Blandin.
Brown, H.
Campbell.
Cole.
Engle.
Grier.
Haight.
Hench.
Hixson.
Lamb.
Ramsay.
Lanier.
Reeves.
Mnruuley.
Sanford.
Miller. W.H.
Stow.
0' Donovan.
Taylor, F. W.
Patrick.
Wliite.
Penniman.
Willnughby.W
V
Peirson.
Willoughby.W.
W.
Preston.
). m. (21).
Hodges.
Meriwether.
Jones, W. A.
Rogers.
Lawson.
Taylor, R. T.
McCabe.
Thompson.
McLane, R. M.
Williams, W
K
German Conversation: Dr. Goebel. Daily, 9 a. m. (12).
Allen, E. P. Kdiniston. Jones, C. E. Shefloe.
Burnham. Flexner. Murray, A. T. Woods.
Crenshaw. Gardner. Patrick. Young.
Supplementary Class: Mr.
alternate Fridays, 5 p. m. (12).
Gooch.
Henderson.
Hempl. Tuesday, Thursday, and
Bol^iano.
Duncan.
Gilpin.
Hilles.
Hoen.
Jones, H. C.
Reader.
Sherawell.
Warren.
Williams, L. E.
Romance Languages. (50 Students).
Classes meet in 111 and 117 W. Monument St.
Advanced Courses: (French Phonology; Aucassin et Nkolite;
Romance Morphology) : Mr. Elliott. (Two classes). Monday, 10
and 11 a. m. (9).
Crenshaw. Learned. McCabe. Whetham.
Edmiston. Matzke. Reeves. Wightman, J. R.
Gerber.
Advanced Courses: (Romance Seminary ; Old French Syntax ; Italian
Dialects): Mr. Elliott. (Three classes;. Wednesday, 10, 11a. m. ;
Thursday, 10, 11 a. m. (G).
Bowen. Gerber. Whetham. Wightman, J. R.
Fontaine. Matzke.
Advanced Courses: (Romance Studies in Europe ; Langue d? Oil Dia-
lects) : Mr. Elliott. (Two classes). Tuesday, 10, 11 a. m. (8).
Edmiston. Gerber. Matzke. Whetham.
Egge. Learned. McCabe. Wightman, J. R.
Italian : Dr. Todd. Three times weekly, Monday, Tuesday, and Wed-
nesday, 9 a. m. (6).
Edmiston. Learned. Smyth, H. W. Warner.
Gerber. McCabe.
Spanish : Dr. Todd. Twice weekly, Thursday and Friday, 9 a. m. (8).
Edmiston. Gerl>er. McCabe. Whetham.
Fossum. Laessig. Reeves. Wightman, J. R.
Portuguese and Old Provencal: Dr. Todd. Twice weekly,
Tuesday and Friday, 4 p. m. (4).
Whetham. Wightman, J. R.
Dr. Todd and Mr. Fontaine. Daily,
Matzke.
McCabe.
French :
Major
Course
10 a. in.
(11).
Bowen.
Edmiston.
Crenshaw
English.
Gumming*
.
Hench.
French ;
Minor
Course
Daily, 12
m. (10
.
Brutie.
Dorsey.
('hisi)lm.
I>reyer.
Crenshaw
Duncan.
Dashiell.
Edmiston.
Laessig.
McCabe.
Reeves.
Whetham.
Wightman, J. R.
Dr. Todd, Mr. Fontaine, Mr. Bowen.
Ferguson.
Friedeuwald.
Guggcnheimer.
Harry.
Stein.
Warren.
Weeeh.
White.
French Composition: Major: Mr. Fontaine. Weekly, Mon-
day, 10 a. m. (7).
Bowen. Edmiston.
Crenshaw. English.
French Composition: Minor
day, 12 m. (17).
Rromwell.
Brune.
(his-ilrii.
Dashiell.
Dorsey.
Hench.
Laessig.
Mr. Fontaine.
Reeves.
Weekly, Tues-
Dreyer.
Duncan.
Ferguson.
Friedeuwald.
Gnggcnheinier.
Hairy.
Bodges.
Hough.
Stein.
Warren.
Weech.
White.
French Pronunciation and Conversation: Mr. Fontaine.
Three times weekly, Tuesday and Friday, 3 p. in. ; Saturday, 9 a.m. (16).
Bowen. Fossum. Laeaslg. Whetham.
Crenshaw. Gerber. I « m m-d. Wiegsod.
Duncan. Hofluiann. Matzke. Wightman, J. R.
Edmiston. Jones, C. E. McCabe.
Supplementary Class: Mr. Bowen. Three times weekly, Mon-
day, Wednesday, and alternate Fridays, 5 p.m. (12).
Ballard. Carey. Gilpin. Banford.
Bolgiano. Ferris. Hahn. Shefloe.
Brigham. Flexner. Macauley. Van Vleck.
English.
(57 Students).
Classes meet in 111 and 117 W. Monument St.
Old English Texts: (Aelfric and Wul/stan): Dr. Bright. Once
weekly, Monday, 4 p. m. (8).
Bnrton. Egge. Hempl. Hubbard.
Dunlap. Hall, J. !.. Hench. Smyth, A. II.
Middle English Texts: (Ancren Riwle and Octavian): Dk. Bright.
Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thursday, 4 p. m. (8).
Burton. Kgge. Hempl. Hubbard.
Dunlap. Hall, J. L. Hench. Smyth, A. H.
Beowulf: Dr. Wood. Twice weekly, Monday and Wednesday, 9
a. m. (13).
Allen, E. P. Egge. Hench. Smyth, A. H.
Burton.
Cu minings.
Dunlap.
Fossum.
Hall, J. L.
Hench.
Hubbard.
Learned.
Whetham.
Wightman, J. It.
Historical English Grammar: (Middle English period): Da.
Bright. Twice weekly, Wednesday and Friday, 4 p.m. (10).
Burton. Esge.
Cummings. Hall, J. L.
Dunlap. Hempl.
English Seminary: Dr. Bright.
Burton. Egge. .
Cummings. Hall, J. L.
Duulap. llempl.
Hench.
Hubbard.
Learned.
Smyth, A. H.
Alternate Fridays, 8 p. m. (11).
Hench. Learned.
Hubbard. Smyth, A. H.
Katzcnstein.
(Major Course).
First English Literature, (with twelve lectures on the Middle English
period) : Dr. Bright. Weekly, Monday, 12 m. (8).
Allen, E. P. Egge. Hench. Smyth, A. H.
Cummings. Hall, J. L. Hubbard. Wightman, J. B.
Early English : (MoitIs: Specimens of Early English I. ; The Tale of
Gamelyn, by Skeat) : Mr. Egge. Twice weekly, Tuesday and Thurs-
day, 12 m. (4).
Cummings. Hall, J. L. MacEwan. Shefloe.
Modern English Literature: Dr. Browne. Weekly, Friday,
12 m. (2).
Brackett, J. R. Shefloe.
(Minor Course).
Anglo-Saxon : Dr. Bright. Twice weekly, Monday and Wednes-
day, 11 a. m. (Two classes). (9). (1).
Allen, E. P. Hall, J. L. Smyth, A. H.
Cummings. Shefloe. Tarleton.
Edmiston.
Fourteenth Century Literature:
Tuesday and Thursday, 11 a. m. (3).
Hamilton. Poullain. Tarleton.
Eighteenth Century Literature: Dr. Browne. Weekly, Fri-
day, 11a. m. (3).
Brackett, J. K. Hubbard. Tarleton.
English Literature: (P. H. E. Course): Dr. Browne.
weekly, Wednesday and Thursday, 12 m. (37).
Whetham.
Wightman, J. B,
Dr. Browne. Twice weekly,
Twice
Allen, P.
Devries.
Ballard.
Dorr.
Bechtel.
Duvall.
Black.
Fearn.
Boyd.
Brigham.
Ferria.
Forrest.
Brown, H.
M.
Gildersleeve
Browne, A
L.
Hahn.
Carey.
Hilles.
Daish.
Jones, W.
Lanier.
Loeb.
Macauley.
Maun.
Miller, W. H.
Moore, G. N.
Patterson.
Poullain.
Reader.
Rosenthal.
Simon.
Sloan.
Tarleton.
Taylor, F. W.
Tavlor, R. T.
Wi'lloughby,W. F.
Willuughby.W.W.
History and Political Science, (94 Students).
Classes meet in the Historical rooms.
Seminary of History ami Politics: Dr. Adams.
weekly, Friday, 8-10 p. m. (20)
Applegarth, A. C.
Two hours
Avres.
Bliss.
Brackett, J. R.
l>ewey.
Egge.
Fisher.
Gardner.
Holcomb.
Katzemstein.
Newton.
Ota.
Randall, D. R.
Roberts, B. T.
Sanford,
Sato.
Smith, C L.
Vincent.
W« rner.
Williams, L,
70
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 47.
History of Politics : Dr. Adams. Twice weekly, "Wednesday and
Psychology
, Weekly, Wednesday, 12 m., Biological Laboratory. (17).
Thursday, 11 a. m. (19).
Adler.
Coler, G. P.
Hixson.
Nelson.
Appleg&rth, A. C. Egge. Moore, J. L. Randall, D. R,
A f rm > isher. Newton. Sato.
Boston. Ganlner. Ota. Smith, C. L.
Blair.
Bruce.
Burnham.
Coler, C. S.
Crowell.
Haight.
Heuimeter.
Jastrow.
Mansfield.
Motora.
Nixon.
Nuttall.
Sanford.
Brackett, J. R. Holoomb. Pleasants, R. H. Warner.
Dewey. Jones, C, E. Poe.
Education*
Weekly, Friday, 12
m., Biological Laboratory. (38).
Renaissance: Dr. Adams. Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday,
11 a.m. (10).
Adler.
Bell, L,
Crowell.
Egge.
Hubbard.
H ussey.
Nelson.
Nuttall.
Blair.
Fields.
Jastrow.
Painter, C. S.
Bevan. Forrest. Jones W. A. Smith, C. L.
Bliss.
Fisher.
Katzenstein.
Sanford.
Bliss. Gordon. Patterson. Tuska.
Bo wen.
Gardner.
Kemp.
Slaughter.
Brune. * Guggenheimer. Roberts, B. T. Wiesenfeld.
Burnham.
Haight.
Mansfield.
Whetham.
Fifield. Hoffmann. Rouse. Young.
Campbell, G. M. Hayes.
Milr-iy.
V\ ies.'nfeld.
International Law; Dr. Adams, Twice weekly, Monday and
Christie.
Coler, ('. S.
Hemmeter.
Hixson.
Motora,
McWhirter.
Wight man, J. R.
Woodhull.
Tuesday, 12 m. (15).
Coler, G. P.
Holcomb.
Ayres, Doub. Ota. Williams, W. K.
Bayard. rifield. Pleasants, R, H. Woods.
Bliss. Jones, C. E. Warner. Young.
Histology of Sense Organs :
February), Wednesday, 2-5 p. m.
Dr. Donaldson.
(6).
Weekly (during
Davis. Meriwether. Williams, L.
Burnham.
Jastrow,
Nuttall.
Sanford.
Studies in Administration: Dr. Ely. "Weekly, Friday, 10
a.m. (14).
Apple garth, A. C. Ferguson. Randall, I >. R. Sato.
Ayres. Gardner. Sams. Smith, C. L.
Crowell. Nelson.
The following students are engaged
n psycho-physical experiments.
Jastrow. Motora. Nixon. Nuttall.
The Ethical Club meets at 113 Monument St., Wednesday, 8 p. m.
Buruham. Holcomb. Sanford, Warner.
Blair,
Coler, G. P.
Hixson.
Pat rick.
Dewey. Ota.
Burnham.
Crowell.
Mansfield.
Sanford.
Advanced Political Economy: Dr. Ely. Three times weekly,
Coler, C. S.
Fisher.
Motora.
Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday, 10 a. m. (18).
Seminary [psycho-physics] meets wc
ekly, Monday, 8 p.
m. (4).
Applegarth, A. C Coler, G. P. Katzenstein. Sanford.
Hem meter.
Jastrow.
Motora,
Nuttall.
Ayres. Dewey. Ota. Sato.
Berry. Ferguson. Randall, D. R. Smith, C. L.
Blair. Gardner. Sams. Warner.
Burnham. Holcomb.
Ethics. (L.
E. P. Course) : Professor Hall. Daily, 1 p. m. (29).
Elements of Political Economy: (Minor Course): Dr. Ely.
Applegarth, E
Bevan.
C. English.
Flexner.
fin :ln -.
Laessig.
Williams, J. W.
"Williams, L.
Daily, 1 p. id. (10).
Buckler.
Gorton.
Meriwether.
Williams, W. K.
Bliss. Gordon. McPherson. Sloan.
Coates.
Harry.
Fleasuiits, R. H.
Winyert.
Brune. Guggenheimer. Preston. Smith, C. L.
Bonnie.
Hartogensis.
Smith, VV. F.
Wiuslow.
Davis. Jones, W. A. Roberts, B. T. Tuska.
Doub.
Hodges.
Stein.
Woods.
Dorsey. McLane, A. Rouse. Willis.
Dutty.
Hough.
Weech.
Young.
English and French History: Dr. Jameson. Three times
Eicbelberger.
Drawing.
weekly, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, 11 a.m. (14).
Bliss. Forrest. Meriwether. Rouse.
Mr. Newell. (63 Students).
Brune. Gordon. Patterson. Tuska.
Davis. Guggenheimer. Roberts, B. T. Wiesenfeld.
Free-Hand Drawing. Daily (except Wednesday), 1 p. m. (57).
Fifield. Jones, W. A.
Ballard.
Flexner.
Joues, II. C.
Simon.
ThueydUles (in Translation) : Dr. Jameson. "Weekly, Monday, 9
Black.
Bolgiano.
Forrest.
Friedenwald,
Jones. W. A.
Jones, VV.
Stein.
Stow.
a. m. (10).
Brighani.
Gildersleeve.
Macauley.
Straus.
Applegarth, A. C. Daish. Hilles. W i Hough by, W. F.
Bromwell.
Glenn.
McMurrich.
Taylor, F. W.
Bayard. Gordon. Reader. Willoughby, W.W.
Black. Hahn.
Browne, A. L.
Brune.
Gordon.
Gorton.
McPherson.
Maun.
Taylor, K. T.
Weech.
American Constitution; Dr. Jameson. Three times weekly,
Buckler.
Carey.
Guggenheimer.
Harry.
Menwelher.
Miller, VV. H.
White.
Wiegand.
Wednesday and Thursday, 12 m., Friday, 2 p. m. (16).
Applegarth, A. C Boston. Meriwether. Williams, L.
Bayard. Davis. Pleasants, R. H. Williams, W. K.
Bevan. Doub. • Poe. Woods.
BlUs. Fifield. Rouse. Young.
Chisolm.
Dash i ell.
Dorr.
Dreyer.
Dutty.
Hodge.
Hodges.
Hotlmann.
Hough.
Hughes.
Moore, G. N,
Penniman.
Header.
Beeves.
ShemwelL
Williams, J. W.
Wingert
Winslow.
Woods.
Young.
Physical and Historical Geography; (P. H. E. Course) : Dr.
Jameson. Weekly, Friday, 12 m. (&*).
Allen, P. Cradock. Hilles. Reader.
Mechanical Drawing. Saturday, at 2 p. m. (7]
Class I. Laessig. Ensey.
•
Ballard. Daish. Jones, W. Rosenthal.
Class II.
Dohme.
Hodges.
Wiegand.
RechteL Devries. Lanier. Simon.
Glenn.
Taylor, F. W.
Black. Dorr. Loeb. Swartz.
Bolgiano. Duvall. Macauley. Tarleton.
Perspective
Drawing* (44).
Bovd Fearn. Manu. Taylor, F. W.
Bngham. Ferris. Miller, W. H. Taylor, R. T.
Brown, H. M. Forrest. Moore. G. N. Willoughby, W. F.
Br.wne, A. L. Gildersleeve. Patterson. Willoughby.W.W.
Carey. Hahn. Foullain.
Class I. Saturdays, at 1 p. m.
Brighani. Ensey.
Buckler. Flexnor.
Dashiell. Holi'mann.
Dorr. Jones. \V. A.
Macauley.
Mcl'herson.
Meriwether.
Reeves.
Stein.
Weech.
Williams, J. W.
Winslow.
Oreeh and Homein History: (P. H, E. Course); Dr. Jameson-
Duffy.
Laessig.
Simon.
Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday, 12 m. (34).
Clans II. Thursday, at 1 p. m.
Ballard. Carey. Hahn. Reader.
Black.
Carey.
Fifield.
Reader.
BechteL Cradock. Hilles. Rosenthal.
Bolgiano.
Dutty.
Friedenwald.
Weech.
Black. Daish. Jones, W. Simon.
Bromwell.
Bolgiano. Dorr. I^anier. Tarleton.
Bovd. Duvall. Loeb. Taylor, F. W.
Class III Thursday, at 3 p. m.
Bngham. Fearn. Miller, W. H. Taylor, R. T.
Ballard.
Forrest.
Hughes.
White.
Bromwell. Ferris. Patterson. Willoughby, W. F.
Brighum.
Guggenheimer.
Jones, W.
Wiegand.
Brown. H. M. Forrest. Poullain. Willoughby.W.W.
Browne, A. L.
Harry.
Miller, W. H.
Wigiitman, A. C.
Browne. A. I* Glld'-rxleeve.
Brune.
Hodge*
Plea>atits, It. II.
Wingert.
General European History: (P. H. E. Course) : Mr. Holcomb.
Flexner.
Hough.
Taylor, F, W,
Young.
Twice weekly, Monday and Tuesday, 12 m. (6).
Allen. P. Macauley. O'Donovan. Moore, G. N.
Devries. Mann.
Elocution.
Mr. Woodworth.
Daily, 9 a. m. to 12.30 p. m. (56
Students).
Ames.
Carey.
Helfenstein.
renniman.
Ayres.
Cummings.
Hixson.
Pleasants, R. H.
Psychology and Pedagogics. Professor Hall. (45
Ballard.
Beehtel.
Daish.
Dashiell.
Hodges.
Hottm inn.
Reader.
Reeves.
Student*).
Bevan.
Devries.
Jones C. E,
Shemwell.
History of Philosophy. Weekly, Monday, 12 m., 113 W. Monu-
Black.
Blair.
Dreyer.
Duvall.
Jones, W.
Muciiuley.
Stow.
Tarleton.
ment St. (22).
Boyd.
Fearn.
McLiuie, R. M.
Thompson.
A<ll»r. Fields. Mansfield. Nuttall.
Bngham.
Flexner.
Mcl'herson.
Weech.
Blair. Fisher. Milroy. Patrick.
Bromwell.
Forrest.
Meriwether,
White.
Burnham. Gardner. Motora. Sanford.
Browne, A. L.
Gildersleeve.
Miller, W. H.
Williams, J. W.
Burton. Hixson. Newton. Walz.
Buckler.
Gilpin.
Moore, G. N.
Willoughbv.W.F.
ChrMie. Huasey. Nixon. Wiesenfeld.
Brune.
Gordon.
O'Donovan.
Willoughby, W.W.
Crowell. Jastrow.
Buruham.
Grier.
Palmer, O. H.
Young.
m
March, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
71
D a
2
.2
1
4)
j
3
fi-
ll
til
•■•Sa
es > ©
S3*:
*
1
fc
z
-j
K
3
■
i=
"S
-
e
^
a
■J
-
1 5
M -
£■■: to
U *- 3 — s
~ ^ Tr-
ig .M ;; "a
a 413
2 -" = 11
8
g
H 2
e 5
.2 *
11
£.5
p £
CB —
BO
52
>
~ £
111
33%
01 3) 1- .3 v 1. ^ -3
2* sw
"" S 3 -
;n c 3 ~
1 52
o - «- . E
K ,» «« ■ "? 2
w
H
p*'
o> <c — ■•
2
S3
5 £■•£.
$£*»
J ^ ,J =. qB 'J W
$ 3
"I si-- *Ji
41 "B-s p. a
3fii
■B v3 3-3
II
a o>
1 = _
53
^3 *T3
s-3 >.=
I«2
?Oft
- £.
» . — *-• t- — &
23 -i'J-g.«
? I La MS
\'^Ui ot ■= - js ^
If ..J t~xT. ■
SiI£Si'S
S|3l8gi:s3e
(J
53.
Hit
2.5 % 3
•I
2
,d
£'2
£2 ~?1*
2 . j Hi
BJ
Ob
0 =
c8 -
II
u 1 C-:
5-; >u:
S £ « •-» S
ij C! 33— q
. 3 s '
r^j"
a 2
o 5-
3 S!
is* a^--;
5.3- '
C— 3
1. S = _• ~ -a
c>
r" ^: to
■■o»- c S1
glffl-2'S
^^3 ^
1515
— 3 Is ^
= x £ 3
0) 0.0 £
t. c33
bljbo
a 3
_-
4S -
6. -J
W-.E
•J
i
La
C =! u
si-
_£3
S a a -p
"■S-3 iS
4 —
ss . —
~ J2 -S
■ *
2 E
SS ft
= 0.
SJ
<g«
£9
SS^J
j a
en o
■ |j
O =s
41 O — « a.
S = = ft3
3 "2 •S'3 <o.3
2 BtJ Sjo .5
31
..b
B.3
«c5
„ g,g|2
•c 112s I
a sis .-
. W«B S >
u . -'"T3
S S?5<l
£| S3
£2 «
«- ..'8
t^f=-3 M..
•d'-.2.5 3
©■s
2"g a "'I
O S
■ V
is
- -3
g a
£emZ
3 X
L s
.■g i
£3
i5 ±
0,2 <
S3=-
r?2
... 01
E b'S
S 0 < a- w
?, B 1
I
£
I
a
3 s.
- DO
01 A
Is
a®
s
I
•a
C-B
•S 3
•2.2
*bo/3
B ~"
H .
is
>•
<
p
M ^
i
5Ji
I <
0.2
"•d
= ;'•
-g
o
c
1
I
p
H to
3 £
.S-a
_T3
C 3
.2 *
S. SS
= .2
uS w^ ^
&>.£
1
^-.2
U a
«3S X-
IAS 8
b.3
E3
o o*
Is
-ft
* z
fci-g
'3 o
Oic
^3C~.£ES.
.3 . = ■-
a ;C5-0*H
~i
3x1
W.3
" 'B
-3;i3t;~'^-.
= 3. 5 2 = 523
"rirs-ttaa--
Sj3._o>B^3B
OS
£ =■
If
|«! I
cr 3 sj
1 1 M A
i s||3a
— — Ph 3 35
■■£ 2 °: §
?• - 3 -j fc. ^j
-2 3
ML
fcl " fl fcl " ji
0 « S ° a ^
.. c *• ..o o
_, « - _ o
« Hh84 3
t-o^^a1- S3ri3>- *
gE
B
oj • •
si
E-3
3b
^
u
— »
_
a-^*
1
CfZ
S5
Dl
be
Ziv
e
Si *
S
&.UQ
ft
e
a B.
= 1
£3
IS
.52;
ssw
4
if
•g
■
(25
*5H
tc.u «
s — 3;
i 'a
= 22
£
■
s 2
M— -
frOlf
IS s|
mi
I-Sf -^E
5 g ss -__.!»
= -o=3S
5.3--.2S £
0 -5 B £ m S3 <?HIS
5 2 3 i
= E 3
31 s
3 I
fa J B S
38 3 ^
: = s * s
:'.£-53S3
: 3 5 —
3'JC3«0
_ l> aj 3
c 2 v> —
o£23h
3 = C 3
tu — 3 »
- - - -
^. ^: _: —
* — '« « l. g
■- .2
— 4> U IJ ^
b« ~5
3 ™ .^ « T3
t, - *j W --
4> « CS 1-3
O-^OcS
B0«
J3 >.
E c
o o>
PS o
■g*
Si
5l
-s|
*— *
d .0
/; ©
— 3 ai*
.-a
B
« ■:
►3tS
•2 3
23
£b_-«
<-*.iS3
1
o
a
a ^ ^^
fi*g .SF3
e3.«5
_ - ^
J- Si- J)
* 6.5 J;
B 3 oJ3 i_X — "«
^ ^. ^ »
•: ..=z
o o~* .
0) ti ' — to
sa-a
S3 -
s s>
O ft
=z
S3~
= - a
0) C B
oft k
2 aJ** |P3
t- 2>. j
«4i i
2 = 2 S
CJft a
fi
5
Oi
iN
<M
00
K)
72 JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS. [No. 47.
AMERICAN JOURNAL OF MATHEMATICS.
Published under the Auspices of the Johns Hopkins University.
The American Journal of Mathematics, founded under the auspices of the Johns Hopkins University, in 1878, was con-
ducted by Professor Sylvester during the period of his connection with the University. It is now under the direction of Simon
Newcomb (Foreign Member of the Royal Society, and Corresponding Member of the Institute of France), Professor of
Astronomy and Mathematics in the Johns Hopkins University and Director of the U. S. Nautical Almanac, as Editor, and of
Thomas Craig, Ph. D., Associate Professor of Applied Mathematics, as Associate Editor.
The Journal has published, since its commencement in 1878, original communications from eminent mathematicians residing
in England, France, Germany, Italy, Denmark, the Dominion of Canada, and this country, as shown in the subjoined list:
European Contributors. — Arthur Cayley, W. K. Clifford, M. W. Crofton, FaA de Bruno, A. Frankland,
A. de Gasparis, J. C. Glashan, J. Hammond, C. Hermite, A. B. Kempe, R. Lipschitz, J. Loudon, E. Lucas, P. A.
MacMahon, T. Muir, J. Petersen, H. Poincare, S. Roberts, G. Weichold, G. P. Young.
American Contributors. — B. Alvokd, M. Baker, W. H. Burr, A. B. Chace, T. Craig, T. S. E. Dixon, H. T.
Eddy, E. A. Engler, F. Franklin, F. T. Freeland, J. W. Gibbs, E. H. Hall, G. B. Halsted, G. W. Hill, M. L.
Holman, E. W. Hyde, W. W. Johnson, O. H. Kendall, C. Ladd, J. W. Mallet, E. McClintock, O. H. Mitchell,
S. Newcomb, C. S. Peirce, A. W. Phillips, H. A. Rowland, O. Stone, W. E. Story, W. I. Stringham, J. J. Sylves-
ter, A. W. Whitcom.
The subjects treated have been of a very varied character, including Professor Sylvester's papers on the Chemico-Algebraic
Theory, with Clifford's, Frankland's and Mallet's remarks on the same, Tables of Invariants computed at the expense of the
British Association, Hill's researches on the Lunar Theory, Newcomb's remarks on 4-dimensional Geometry, papers by Story
and Stringham on Non-Euclidean and Hyperspatial Geometry, Professor Cayley's great memoir on the Abelian and Theta
Functions, Hermite on the Theory of Functions, Peirce on the Algebra of Logic and the Ghosts of Diffraction Spectra, Rowland
on "Vortex Fluid Motion, Story on Elasticity, Craig on Theta Functions, Franklin on Cubic Curves, Hall on Electro-Magnetic
Action, MacMahon on Symmetric Functions, Sylvester on Universal Algebra, and numerous others of no less value and
originality.
Seven volumes of about 400 pages each have been issued, and the eighth is in progress. It appears quarterly in the quarto
form.
Volume I has become very rare and can only be procured with extreme difficulty. If there should be a sufficient demand
it will be reprinted. A limited number of copies of volumes II, III, IV, V, VI, and VII, are offered for sale at $20.00 for
the six volumes, to libraries, colleges, and other public institutions which will subscribe for Volume VIII, and agree to continue
their subscription. Single volumes will not be sold at that rate.
The subscription price of the Journal is $5 a volume; single number $1.50. Drafts, checks, and postal money orders
should be made payable to the American Journal of Mathematics.
Subscriptions will be received and single copies sold by Messrs. B. Westermann & Co., D. Van Nostrand, and E. Steiger &
Co., New York ; Cupples, Upham & Co., Boston ; A. C. McClurg & Co., Chicago ; and Cushings & Bailey, Baltimore ; —
Also in Europe by Messrs. Triibner & Co., London ; Mayer & Muller, Berlin ; Gauthier-Villars, and A. Hermann,
Paris ; Ulrico Hoepli, Turin ; and Karl J. Triibner, Strassburg.
Communications in regard to subscriptions and exchanges should be addressed to the
Publication Agency of the Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Md.
The John* Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 262 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore. Subscription, $1.00 a year.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 48.]
BALTIMORE, APRIL, 1886.
[Peice, 10 Cents.
PUBLICATIONS ISSUED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE UNIVERSITY.
I. American Journal of Mathematics.
The publication of this journal commenced in 1878, under the
editorial direction of Professor Sylvester. It is now conducted
by Professor Simon Newcomb, as Editor, and Dr. T. Craig, as
Associate Editor. Seven volumes of about 400 pages each have
been issued and the eighth is in progress. It appears quarterly,
in the quarto form. Subscription $5 per year. Single numbers
81.50.
II. American Chemical Journal.
This journal was commenced in 1879, with Professor Remsen
as Editor. Seven volumes of about 450 pages each have been
issued, and the eighth is in progress. It appears bi-monthly. Sub-
scription $3 per year. Single numbers 50 cents.
III. American Journal of Philology.
The publication of this journal commenced in 1880, under the
editorial direction of Professor Gildersleeve. Six volumes of
about 570 pages each have been issued, and the seventh is in pro-
fress. It appears four times yearly. Subscription $3 per volume,
ingle numbers $1.00.
IV. Studies from the Biological Laboratory.
(Including the Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory.)
The publication of these papers commenced in 1879, under the
direction of Professor Martin, with the assistance of Dr. W. K.
Brooks. Two volumes of about 500 pages octavo, and 40 plates
each, have been issued, and the third is in progress. Subscription
$5 per volume.
V. Studies in Historical and Political Science.
The publication of these papers was begun in 1882, under the
editorial direction of Dr. H. B. Adams. A first series of 470
pages, a second of 630 pages and a third series of 595 pages are
now completed, and a fourth series is in progress. Subscription
83 per volume.
VI. Johns Hopkins University Circulars.
The University Circulars are published at convenient intervals
during the academic year for the purpose of communicating intel-
ligence to the various members of the University in respect to
work which is here in progress, as well as for the purpose of pro-
mulgating official announcements from the governing and teach-
ing bodies. Although these circulars are designed for the members
of the University, they have frequently been called for by insti-
tutions and libraries at a distance, and also by individuals who
are interested in the literary and scientific activity of this Univer-
sity. Subscriptions and exchanges are therefore received.
The publication of the Circulars began in December, 1879, and
forty-eight numbers have since been issued. Subscription $1 per
year. Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the Annual
Register and the Annual Report of the University.
VII. Annual Report.
Presented by the President to the Board of Trustees, reviewing
the operations of the University during the past academic year.
VIII. Annual Register.
Giving the list of the officers and students, and containing detailed
statements as to the regulations and work of the University.
Announcements of proposed lectures, courses of instruction,
etc., appear in the University Circulars, or are separately issued
as Programmes from time to time.
During the year 1885-86, in addition to the enrrent journals
named above, there have been issued by the University :
Photograph of the Normal Solar Spectrum. Made by Professor
H. A. Rowland. 1886. Set of seven plates unmounted 810,
mounted $12 ; single plates unmounted $2, mounted $2.25.
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriae 3fS. with the Antilegomena
Epistles. (Including seventeen phototype pages, each on a separate
leaf, besides additional pages containing descriptive and explana-
tory matter.) Edited by Dr. I. H. Hall. 250 copies. 1886. 83.
Communications in respect to exchanges and remit-
tances may be sent to the Johns Hopkins University (Pub-
lication Agency,) Baltimore, Maryland.
74
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 48.
LIST OF STUDENTS IN THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY
DURING ITS FIRST TEN YEARS, 1876-86.
CORRECTED TO MARCH 31, 1886.
ABBREVIATIONS.
A — Associate.
A Prof. = Associate Professor.
As't = Assistant.
As't Prof. = Assistant Professor.
Bait. C. C. — Baltimore City College.
C — Candidate for Matriculation.
CZL = Cluaapeake Zoological Laboratory.
F = Fellow.
F by C = Fellow by Courtesy.
G = Graduate Student.
G S = Graduate or University Scholar.
HS= Hopkins Scholar.
H H S = Honorary Hopkins Scholar.
Instr. = Instructor.
Lect. = Lecturer.
M — Matriculated Student.
P M = Student in course Preliminary to
Medicine.
S = Special Undergraduate Student.
WS= Washington Scholar.
Bait. C. C. 1876 (Graduate of Baltimore City College, 1876) A. B. 80, Ph. D. 83 (Bachelor of Arts, and Doctor of Philosophy, Johns Hopkins University, 1880 and 1883) M 77-80
(Matriculated Student J. H. U., 1877-80) G S 80-81 (Graduate Scholar J. H. U, 1880-81) F 81-83 (Fellow J. H. U., 1881-83).
Where no place or station is named the Johns Hopkins University may be understood. The present residence is, in most cases, given after the name ; in cases where this is not
known, the residence at the time of the student's connection with the University is stated. The residence, as recorded in the current Register, is given in the case of students
now connected with the University. Deaths are indicated by an asterisk •. The names of a few persons who were appointed to Fellowships but did not hold that position,
are included in the list.
Abbott, Alexander Crever (Bait. C. C, M. D.
Univ. Md. 84), G 85-6, Physician, Balti-
more.
Abel, John J. (Ph. B. Mich. 83), G 83-4, Stu-
dent in Leipsic, Germany.
Aber, William Martin (A. B. Yale 78), G 84-5,
Waterbury, Conn.
Adams, Frank Dawson (B. S. McGill Univ.
78), G 83-4, Lithologist, Geol. Survey of
Canada, Ottawa.
Adams, Henry Carter (A. B. Iowa Coll. 74,
A. M. Iowa 77, Ph. D. 78), F 76-8. Instr.
Pol. Econ. 79-81, Lect. Pol. Econ. Univ. of
Mich. 80-. Lect. and A. Prof. Pol. Econ.
Cornell, 79-, Ithaca, N.Y.
Adams, Herbert Baxter (A B. Amh. 72,Ph.D.
Heidelb. 76), Sec. Am. Hist. Assoc., Corr.
Memb. Mass. Hist. Soc., F 76-8, A 78-83,
A Prof, of Hist. 83-, Ed. Univ. Studies in
Hist, and Pol. Sci., Baltimore.
Adams, Joseph Henry (A. B. Amh. 70), G 79-
80, Instr. Adelphi Acad., Brooklyn, N. Y.
Adkins, Franklin Bache (Berkeley Div.
Sch . ), S 79-80, Clergyman of P. E. Church,
Wicomico, Md.
Adkins, William Hughlett (A. B. 82, LL. B.
Univ. Md. 83), C 79-80, M 80-2, G 82, Att'y
at Law. Baltimore.
Adler, Cyrus (A. B. Univ. Pa. 83), G 83-4, G
8 84-6, F 85-6, Philadelphia.
Alden, Edmund Kimball (A. B. Amh. 80), G
83-4, Century Co., N. Y.
Alexander, William John (A. B. Lond. 76,
Ph. D. 82). G 79-80, G 8 80-1 , F 81-3, Prof.
of Eng. lit. Dalhousie Coll. Halifax, N. 8.
Allen, Edgar Pierce (A. B. Emory Coll. Ga.
85), G 85-6, Shanghai, China.
Allen, Paul, C 85-6. New York City.
Allinson, Francis Greenleaf (A. B. Haverf.
76 and Harv. 77. Ph.D. 80% F 77-80, As't
Prof.Lat in and Greek, Haverf. 80-2, Clas-
sical Instructor, Baltimore.
Ames, Howard K. (M. D. Univ. Md. 74), G
77-8, As't Surg. U. S. N.
Ames, Joseph Sweetman, M 83-6, Faribault,
Minn.
Ammen, Samuel Z. (A. M. Wash. & Lee 59),
G 76-7, As't Ed. "Sun," Baltimore.
Anderson, Newton Mitchell, S 79-80, Instr.
O. State Univ. Columbus.
Anderson, Thomas, S 82-3, Louisville, Ky.
Anderson, Willis Austin (A. H. Kalamazoo
82), G 82-3, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Andrews, Ethan Allen ( Ph. B. Yale 81), G
6 83-4, F 84-6, New York City.
Angell, Frank (B.8. Univ. Vt. 78), G 82-3,
instr. Wish. (D. C ) High Sch.
Applegartb, Aloert Clayton (Bait. C. C, A.
B. 84), C 81-4, M 84, G 84-6, Haltimore.
Applegarth, Edward Carey (Bait. C. C. 84),
Si Mid H H 8 84-6, Baltimore.
Armiger.John 1'., 884-5, Huntingtown,Md.
Armstrong, Joseph L. (Hand. Macon), G
80-1, Prof.of English, Central Coll., Fay-
ette, Mo.
Arnold, Jacob Dennis (A.B. Georgetown
73, M. D. Wash. Univ. Bait. 76), G 78-9,
Physician, San Francisco, Cal.
Arnolt, William Muss (Stuttgart Gym. 78,
New Brunswick Theol. 8em. 82), G 82-3,
F 83-S, F by C 85-6, Minister, Presb.
Church, Jarrettsville, Md.
Arthur, George (M.D. Univ. Md.73),G 80-1,
Passed As't Surgeon, U. 8. N., New York
City.
Arthur, Joseph Charles (S.B. Iowa Agric.
72), G 78-9, Charles City, Iowa.
Arthur, William Henry (M.D. Univ. Md. 76),
G 77-8, As't Surgeon U. S. A.
Arts, Charles Walter (A .B. 84), C 79-80, 82-3,
M 83-4, Student of Law, Columbia Coll.
New York.
Atkinson, Isaac Edmondson (M.D. Univ.
Md. 65), G 76-7, Physician, Baltimore.
Atkinson. Thomas (B. Litt. Univ. Va. 80,
A. M. Va. 81), G 81-2, Clergyman, P. E.
Church, Baltimore.
Ayres, Brown (S. B. Stevens Inst. 78),G78-9,
F 79-80, Prof. Physics, Univ. La. 80-4,
Prof. Physics, Tulane Univ. New Orleans,
Ayres, Philip Wheelock (Ph. B. Cornell 84),
G 85-6, Villa Ridge, 111.
Baden, William Wilson (A.B. 81, LL.B.
Univ. Md. 83), C 78-80, M 80-1, Att'y at
Law, Baltimore.
Baker, Frank Marion, C 76-7, Bait. Co., Md.
Baker, William Sebastian Graff, Jr., S 82-S,
Baltimore.
Ballard, Henry Harold, M and H S 85-6,
Baltimore.
Barcroft, David (Ph.B. Cal. 82), G S 84-5, F
85-6, Berkley, Cal.
Barker, William R., P M 78-9, Mechanics-
ville, Md.
Barnes, Edward (B.S. Worcester Free Inst.
791, G 81-3, Prof. Math. Rose Polytech.
Inst. Ind 83-4, • Feb. 1, 1885.
Barnett, Samuel, Jr. (C. L. and A. M. Univ.
Ga.), G 80-1, Washington, Ga.
Barton, Boiling W. (M. D Univ. Md. 65), G
76-7 and 83-4, Instr. Botany 85-6, Physi-
cian, Baltimore.
Bateson, William (B. A.Camb. Univ. 83),C ZL
82, 84, F St. John's Coll., Cambridge, Eng.
Bayard, Richard Howard, M 83-6, Baltimore.
Bayley, William Shirley (Bait. C. C. 79, A.B.
83), 8 80-1, M 81-3, G 83-4, G S 84-5, F
85-6, Baltimore.
Beadenkopf, Thomas Milton (Bait. C. C. 71,
A. B. 80, B. D. Ysle 85), C 76-7, M 77-80 G
80-3. Student of Theology ,Yale College.
Bechtel, Edward Ambrose, C 85-6, CoTora,
Md.
Becker, Louis, S 78-9, Baltimore.
Beckwith, Exum Green (A.B. Wake Forest
82) G 84-5, Wake Forest, N. C.
Beer, Robert Carl (Ph.D. Bonn), G 76-7,
Teacher of Languages, Baltimore.
Bell, Charles John (A.M. Harvard 76). G
81-2, F 82, F by C 85-6, Prof. Chem. Pa.
State Coll. 82-5, Somerville, Mass.
Bell. Louis (A. B. Dart. 84), G 84-5, F 85-6,
New York City.
Bemis, Edward Webster(A.B. Amh 80,Ph.D.
85) G 80-5, G 8 83-4, Instr. Pol. Econ. Am-
herst Coll., Mass.
Berry, Thomas Alexis (A. B. 82), C 79-80, M
8o-2, G 83-6, Student of Law, Univ. Md.
Baltimore.
Berry, William James (A. B. Cornell 76), G
77-8, Forestville, N. Y.
Bevan, Wilson Lloyd S 82-6, M 85-6, Bal-
timore.
Bevier, LouisfA. B. Rutgers 78, Ph. D. 81) G
78-9, F 79-81, Am. Sch. at Athens, Instr.
French, Rutgers Coll., New Brunswick,
N.J.
Beyer, Henry Gustav (M. D. Bellevue 76,
M. R. C. S. Eng.), G 82-4, 85-6, Passed As't
Surg. U. 8. N., U. 8. Nat'l Museum,
Washington.
Binlon, Samuel A., (M. D. Univ. Md. 86), 8
84-6, Baltimore.
Birckhead.Lennox, C 76-7, M 77-8, Toledo, O.
Birney, Herman Hoffman, PM 84-5, Wash-
ington, D. C.
Bissing, Gustav (Bait. C. C, A, B. 82, Ph. D.
85). S 78-82, M 82, G S 82-3, F 83-4, F by C
84-5, As't Examiner U. S. Patent Office.
Black, CharlesH. (U.S.N. Acad. 65). G 84-6,
Lieut. Commander, U. S. N., Baltimore.
Black, James William (Bait. C. C. 85), C and
M 85-6, Baltimore.
Blair, William Allen (A. B. Haverf. 81 and
Harv. 82), G 85-6, High Point, N. C.
Bland, John C, Memb. Am. S. C. E., G
79-83, Civil Engineer, Philadelphia.
Blandin, John Joseph (U. S. N. Acad. 82),
Ensign U. S. N., G 84-6, Selma. Ala.
Bliss, Albert Nelson (A. B. Mich. 77), G 85-6,
East Calais, Vt.
Bloomfield, Maurice (A.M. Furman 77, Ph.D.
79), F 78-9, A 81-3, A Prof. Sansk. 83-,
Baltimore.
Bolgiano, Walton, C 85-6, Waverly, Md.
Bond, Allen Kerr (A. B. 80, M. D. Univ. Md.
82). C 76-7, M 77-80, G 84-5, Physician,
Baltimore.
Bond, Beverly W., S 77-8, 80-1, Minister M.
E. Church, Rockville, Md.
Bonsai, Leigh (A. B. Harv. 84), G 84-5, Stu-
dent of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Booker, William David (M. D. Univ. Va.67),
G 76-7, Physician, Baltimore.
Boston, Charles Anderson (Bait. C. C), M
80-1, S 85-6, Student of Law, Univ. Md.,
Baltimore.
Boston, John Guy (Bait. C. C), C 82-3, Stu-
dent of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Boteler, William C. (M. D. Univ. Md. 78), G
77-8, Physician and Ed. Mo. Valley Med.
Jour., St. Joseph, Mo.
Bothne, Gisle Cnristian Johnson (A. B.
Norw. Luther. 78 and Northwest. Univ.
Wis. 79), G 79-80, 83-4. Prof. Greek and
Latin, Norw. Luth. Coll. Decorah, Iowa.
Botsford, George Washington (A. B. Univ.
Neb. 84), G 84-6, Prof. Greek and Latin,
St. Charles Coll., St. Charles, Mo.
Boucsein, Gustav Fried rich (Bait. C. C. 76),
883-% Physician, Baltimore.
Bowdoin, Henry Johns (A.B. 81, LL.B.
Univ. Md. 83), C 78-9, M 79-81, G 81-2,
Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Bowen, Benjamin Lester (A. B. Roch. 81), G
83-6, Chili Station, N. Y.
Boyd, Charles Wesley (A. B. Wesleyan 73),
G 78-9, Frederick, Md.
Boyd, Jesse Cookinan, C 86-6, Baltimore.
Boyd. William Sims, Jr. (B. S Davids. 82),
G 82-4, Student of Med. Univ. Md., Bal-
timore.
Boyle, Samuel Gill, S 80-1, Att'y at Law,
Danville, Ky.
Brace, De Witt Bristol (A. B. Bost. Univ. 81),
G 81-3 Prof. Physics, Univ. Mich.
Brack, Charles Edward, Jr., S 84-5, Balti-
more.
Brackett, Jeffrey Richardson (A.B. Harv.
83), G 84-6, Quincy, Mass.
Brackett, Richard Newman (A.B. Davids.
83), G 83-6, Charleston, S. C.
Brauham, Joseph Henry (M.D. Phys. and
Surg. Bait. 79), G 81-2, Physician, Balti-
more.
Brantly, William Theophilus (A.B. Mercer
71, LL. B. Univ. Md. 74), G 77-8, Att'y at
Law, Baltimore.
Brewer, George Emerson (A. B. Ham. 81,
A. M. Ham. 85, M. D. Univ. Buffalo 84
and Harv. 85), F by C 85-6, Physician,
Bay View Asylum (Insane Dept.), Balti-
more.
Brice, Paul McDonald (A.B. Erskine 83), G
83-4, Winnsboro, S. C.
Brigham, Charles Pliny, C 85-6, Baltimore.
Bright, James Wilson ( A . B. Lafay. 77, Ph. D.
82), G 79-80, F 80-2, As't 82-3, F by C 84-5,
Instr. Cornell 85, Instr. 85-6, Baltimore.
Brill, Charles Comstock (A. B. Syracuse 85),
G 85-6, Ilion. N. Y.
Brinton, Daniel Lord (LL.B. Univ. Md. 83),
S 79-82, Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Bristol, George Prentice (A. B. Ham. 76), G
79-80, As't Prof. Greek, Ham. Coll. Clin-
ton, N. Y.
Bromwell, William, C 84-5, M 85-6, Port
Deposit, Md.
Brooks, William Keith (A.B. Wms. 70, Ph.D.
Harv. 75), F 76, A 76-83, A. Prof, of Mor-
phol. 83-, Director C Z L, Baltimore.
Broun, Philip Hopkins (Univ. Va. 76), G 77-
82, Middleburg, Va.
Brown, Hamilton McFarland, M and H 8
85-6, Baltimore.
Brown, John Wilson, Jr. (A. B. 81), M 78-81,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Brown, Thomas R. (M. D. Univ. Md. 66), G
76-7, « 1879.
Browne, Arthur Lee, M and HS 85-6, Bal-
timore.
Bruce, Adam Todd (A. B. Princ. 81), F 88-4,
G 84-5, F by C 85-6, C Z L 84, 85, New
York City.
Bruce, James Douglas (A.M. Univ. Va. 88),
G 83-4, Instr. in Chem. Univ. Va.
Bruere, Abel Taylor, P M 79-80, New Egypt,
N. J.
Brune, Herbert Maxwell, C 84-5, M 85-6,
Baltimore.
Bruno. Thomas Barton (A.B. St. John's 75,
A. M. St. John's 78, M. D. Univ. Md. 77),
G 76-7, Physician, Baltimore.
Bruyn, Cornelius, S 84-6, Kingston, N. Y.
Bucnerer, Alfred Henry (Cologne Gym. 83),
G 85-6, Ehrenfeld, Germany.
Buckler, Thomas Hepburn, 8 82-3, M 83-6,
Baltimore.
Bugg, Quinn Thompson (A.B. Wash, and
Lee 83), G 84-5, Teacher, Tulane High
Sch., New Orleans, La.
Burgess, Edward Sanford (A. B. Ham. 79),
G 8 80-1, F 81-2, Instr. Botany 84-5, Instr.
High School, Washington, D. C.
Burney, William (S.B. Davids. 75, Ph.D.
Heidelb. 79), F 79-80, Prof. Chem. S. C.
Agric. Coll., Columbia.
Burnham, William Henry (A.B. Harv. 82),
G and F 85-6, Dunbarton, N. H.
Burt, Benjamin Chapman (A. B. Mich. 75,
A. M. Mich. 79). G 79-80, F 80-1, As't
Prof. Eng. and Rhet. Univ. Mich., Ann
Arbor.
Burton, Richard Eugene (A.B. Trinity 83),
G 83-6, Hartford, Conn.
Cajori, Florian (B. S. Wis. 83), G 83-5, As't
Prof, Math. Tulane High School, New
Orleans, La.
Caldwell, Howard Walter (Ph. B. Neb. 80),
G 82-3, Instr. Hist. Univ. Neb., Lincoln.
Caldwell, John Williamson, (A. B. Charles-
ton. 61, M. D. Va. Med. Coll. 64), G 84-5,
Prof. Geol. and Mineral., Tulane Univ.
New Orleans, La.
Cammack, Ira Insco (B. S. Earlham 84), G
84-5, Dcming, Iud.
April, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
75
Campliell, George Murray (A.B. Dalhousic
89, G 8( 6, Truro, N. S.
Gun,, lull, . J< thnGrej (A.B. Wins. 80),G 80-1,
Mendon, 111.
Campbell, John Pendleton (A.B. 85),C81-2,
M 82-5, l i S 85-6, < 'hurlcstown, W. Va.
Canlirld, Waller Hliss (A.B. 84), C 80-1, M
61-4, 11 S4-6, Baltimore.
Caiiflcld, William Buckingham, Jr. (A.B.
Prim-. 77, M. 1>. Univ. Md. 80), G 78-9,
Physician, Baltimore.
Carey, Charles Hamilton, C 85-6, Baltimore.
Carer, George Gibson, Jr. (A. B. 84). C 81-2,
M 82-4, Student of Law, Unir. Md., Bal-
timore.
Carpenter, Louis George (B. S. Mich. Ag.
Coll. 79, M. 8. Mich. Ag. 83), G 85-6, As't
in Math. Michigan Agric. Coll.
Carpenter, William Howard (Ph.D. Freib.
81), F by C 81-3, Instr. Scand. Lang.
Columbia Coll., New York.
Carroll, John Howell, C 82-3, Student of
Law, Baltimore.
Carter, John Merriken, Jr. (Bait. C. C), S
84-5, Mt. Washington. Md.
Caspari, William, Jr. (Md. Coll. Pharm. 81),
8 81-2, Baltimore.
Cattell, James McKeen (A.B. Lafay. 80, Ph.D.
Leipsic 85), F 82-3, Student of Philosophy
in Germany,
Chandlee, Henry (M. D. Unir. Md. 82 and
Hahnenian Med. Coll., Phila. 83), G 85-6,
Physician, Baltimore.
Cheek, Frank Jacobs (A. B. Centre, Ky. 76),
G 80-1, Student of Theology, Princeton,
N.J.
Cheek, Samuel Robertson, (A. B. Centre,
Ky. 75), G 79-81, Prof. Latin and Engl.
Centre Coll., Danville, Ky.
Chenault, James P., C 76-7, Shelby City,
Ky.
Chenault, Robert Desher, C 76-7, Shelby
City. Ky.
Child, Charles Tripler (Richmond Coll.), G
85-6, Richmond, Va.
Chilton, Edwin Bailey, S 83-4, New York.
Chisolm, Francis Miles, C 85-6, Baltimore.
Christie, Frank Albert (A. B. Amh. 81), G
84-5, F 85-6, Boston, Mass.
Clark, Byron, S 80-1, Physician, Washing-
ton, Pa,
Clark, Ed ward Huntington (A. B. Wms. 78),
G 78* West Salem, Wis.
Clark, Thomas Hazen (S. B. Wore. Free
Inst. 80), G 84-5, Shirley Village, Mass.
Clark, Xenos Young (S. B. Boston Unir.
78), G S 80-1, Amherst. Mass.
Clarke, Samuel Fessenden (Ph. B. Yale 78,
l'ii. D. 79), F 76-9, As't 79-81, Prof. Natu-
ral History, Williams College, Mass.
Clarkson, Walter Bernard (Halt. C. C. 76, A
B. 82). C 76-7. M 77-8, Principal Duval
High Sch., Jacksonville, Fia. 80-3, Jack-
sonville, Fla.
Claxton, Philander Priestly (A.B. Univ.
Tenu. 82), G 84-5, Shelbyville, Tenn.
Coale, Robert Dorsey (C E. Pa. Mil. Acad.
75, Ph. D. 811, S 76-80, F 80-1, As't 81-3,
Lect I lein. Unir. Md. 83-4, Prof. ( hem.
and Toxicology, Univ. Md. Baltimore.
Coar, Henrv Livingston (Cologne Gym. 84),
G 84-6, "W. Springfield, Mass.
Coates, Charles Edward, Jr., M 84-6, Balti-
more.
Cobb, Jesse Teris (A.B. Central, Ky. 79), G
83-5, Teacher, Henderson, Ky.
Cole. Alfred Dodge (A. B. Brown 84), G 84-5,
Prof. Chem. and Physics, Denison Unir.,
Granville, O.
Cole, Thomas Lafavette, S 81-3, Clergyman
P. E. Church, Rhiuecliff, N. Y.
Colo, William Roswell, C 84-5, M 85-6, Bal-
timore.
Coleman, Robert James (A.B. Central Coll.
Mo. 76), 1 1 79-80, Buena Vista, Colo.
Coler, Cecil Seymour (A. B. Ohio Univ. 83), G
85-6, Athens, O.
Coler, George Perry (A.B. Ohio Univ. 82),
G S4-6, Instr. B. & O. Manual Training
Sch., Baltimore.
Colin, Theodore Frederick (Univ. St. Pe-
tersb.), 1 i 84-5, St. Petersburg, Russia.
Collins, Arthur T., S 81-4, Sanitary Engi-
neer, Bristol, Pa.
Collins, Joseph Victor (Ph.B. Wooster 79),
G 80-1, 82-3, Wooster, O.
Colton, Buel Preston (A. B. Amh. 74), CZ L
81, G 81-3, Normal, 111.
Comstock.W illiam James (Ph. B. Yale 79), F
81-2, Student of Chem., Munich, Ger-
many.
Cone, Charles Morris (S. B. Dartm. 75), G
78-80, Hartford, vt.
Conn, Herbert William (A. B. Boston Univ.
81, A. M. Host. 82, Ph. D. 84), G 81-3,
As't 83-4, C Z L 82, 83, 84, Prof. Zool.
Weeleyan Univ., lVfiddletown, Conn.
Conrerse. Josiah Holmes, S 76-83, Librarian,
Bur Library, Baltimore.
Cooke, Charles Albert (Bait. C. C), S 80-1,
Baltimore.
Cooke, Frederick Hale (A. B. Wilis. 80), G
MM, Bock Bottom, Mass.
Core, John, Jr., S 79-80, Baltimore.
Councilman, William Thomas (M. D. Unir.
Md. 78), St udout of Mid. at V icrma, 80-82,
G 78-80, F by C 82-4, A in Pathol. 84-,
•Baltimore.
Cradock, Thomas, Jr., S 85-6, Pikesrllle, Md.
Craig, Thomas (C. E. Lafay. 75, Ph. 1>. 78),
U. S. C. & G. Surrey, 79-81, F 76-9, As't
79-80, A 80-3, A Prof, of Math. 83-, Assoc.
ICd. Am. Jour. Math., Baltimore.
Crenshaw, John Bascom (A. M. Rand. Ma-
con 81), G 85-6, Ashland, Va
Crew, Henry (A. B. Princ. 82), F 84-6, Wil-
mington, O.
Crisp, William Benton, (LL. B. Columbia
84), S 79-82, Atty. at Law, Haiti re.
Cromwell, William Kennedy (A. B. 81), C
80-1, M 81-4, Student of Law, Harvard.
Crosby, Philip Baxter, C 84-5, Catousvlllc,
Md.
Crowe, Alfred Dean (A. B. Genera 74), G
80-1, 82-3, Minister Presbyterian Church,
Baltimore.
Crowell, Melrin Elliott (A. B. Roch. 79), G S
85-6, Geneseo, N. Y.
Crum, Charles William Remsberg (A.B. 84),
M 82-4, Instr.Math.Mercersburg Coll. Pa.
Crutchfield, Eugene Lee, C 80-1, 82-4, Stu-
dent of Med., Baltimore
Cumming, William (Bait. C. C), C 78-80, M
82-3, Baltimore.
Cummings, James (A. B. Unir. Tenn. 80,
A. M. Tenn. 84), G 85-6, Knoxrille, Tenn.
Cuykendall, Eugene Fitch (S. B. Syracuse
76, S. M. Syracuse 79), G 80-1, Cazenovia,
N. Y.
Daish, John Broughton, C, M and W S 85-6,
Washington, D.C.
Daniels, Archibald Lamont (A. B. Mich. 76,
D. Sc. Princ. 86), F 83-4, Instr. Prince-
ton 84-5, Instr. Chicago Manual Train-
ing Sch. 85, Prof. Math. Unir. Vt.
Burlington.
Dashiell, Paul Joseph, S 84-5, M 85-6, Port
Republic, Md.
Daris, Ellery William (S. B. Wis. 79, Ph.D.
84) G 80-1, GS 81-2, F 82-4, Prof. Math,
and Mil. Tactics, Fla. Ag.Coll. Lake City.
Davie, Henry Bryant, S 84-5, Baltimore.
Davis, John Franklin (A. B. Haverf. 75),
G 76-7, Westminster, N. C.
Davis, Richard Harding, S 85-6, Phila-
delphia.
Dawson, Joseph Hill S S3-4, Baltimore.
Day, David Talbot (A. B. 81, Ph. D. 84), S
77-81, M 81, G 81-2, 84-6, F 82-4, Baltimore.
Day. William Catheart (Bait. C. C, A. B. 80,
Ph. D. 83), M 77-80, G S 80-1, F 81-3, Prof.
St. John's Coll. 83-4, Prof. Chem. and
Phys. Univ. Nashville, Tenn.
Delia Torre, Frank (Unir. Va.), G 79-80,
Reisterstown, Md.
Derby, Samuel Carroll (A. B. Harr. 66, A.M.
lhirv. 77), Prof. Latin, Antioch Coll., F
by C 80-1, Prof. Latin and Hist. Ohio
State Unir. 81-, Columbus.
I terries, William Levering, M and II S 85-6,
Baltimore.
Dewey, Davis Rich (A. B. Vt. 79), G 83-4, G
S 84-5. F 85-6, Burlington, Vt.
Dewey. John (A. B. Vt. 79, Ph. D. 84), G 82-3,
F 83-4, Instr. Philosophy, Univ. Mich.,
Ann Arbor.
De Witt, William Russell, S 82-3, C 83-4,
B. & O. Engineer Corps.
Dickson, John (M. D. Univ. Md. 52), G 76-7,
Phvsician, Baltimore.
Dickson, John Ross (Bait. C. C), S 78-9, Bal-
timore.
Dinsmore, Thomas H , Jr. (A.B. Highland
Univ. Kans. 76, A.M. High]. 79, Ph.D.
Highl. 83), G 83-4, Instr. High School,
York Pa.
Dixon, Thomas, Jr. (A M. Wake Forest 83),
<i 88-1, M.inb. H. of Rep. N. C, Raleigh.
Dohme, Alfred Robert Louis, C 83-4, M 84-6,
Baltimore.
Dolley, Charles Sumner (M D. Unir. Pa 82),
G8S-4, As't Prof. Nat. Hist., Swarlhmore
Coll. Pa. and Instr. Biol. Unir. Pa.
Donaldson, Frank, Jr. (A. B. Harr. 79, M. D.
Unir. Md. 83), G 79-83, 85-6, G S 83, Phy-
sician, Baltimore.
Donaldson. Henry Herbert (A.B. Yale 79,
Ph. D. 85) F 81-3, As't Biol. 83-4, F by C
84-5, Instr. in Psychology 85-6, Baltimore.
Donaldson, William Wiuciicster, P M 83-4,
Baltimore.
Dorr, Lucius Bradley. P M 85-6, Buffalo.N.Y.
Dorsey, Daniel Banks, (Bait. C. C), S 81-3,
Baltimore.
Dorsey, Richard, (Bait. C. C), C 84-6, Balti-
more.
Dosh, Frank Bowman, C 78-9, M 79-81, Nat'l
Med. Coll. Wash. 81-C, * Oct. 1882.
Doub, Albert Alrin, S 83-4, M 84-6, Bearer
Creek, Md.
PouUedav, Charles Albert (A.B. Amh. 81),
G 84-6,'Montclair, N. J.
Douglas, Charles Henry James (A.B. Brown
79), G 80-1, Milwaukee, Wis.
Downs, Howard Fletcher (Bait. C.C. 76), C
and M 76-7, M 79-80, Minister M. E.
Church, Calverton, Md.
Drain. John L., S 83-4, Baltimore.
Drey, Sylvan (LL.B. Univ. Md. 82), C 79-
80, Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Dreyer, George Pete, (Halt. C.C. 84), P M
84-5. M and II 11 S S5-C, Baltimore.
Dull'r, Edward, Jr. (Bait. C. C), C 84-45, M
85-6, Baltimore,
Dully, Henry (Bait. C. C), M 80-2, Att'y at
Law, Baltimore,
Duggan, James Reynolds (A. B. Mercer 77,
A. M. Mercer 80, M. D. Jell'. Med. Coll.
79, Ph.D. 84), G 81-2, G 8 82-3, F 83-4,
F by C 84-6, Macon, (.a.
Dulany. Henry Rozier(Uuir. Va.78).G 78-9,
Instr. in Math. Ball. i9-80, Uppervill,-, V:i.
Duncan, Louis ( U.S. N. Acad. 80, Ph. D.85),
G 82-4. F by C 84-5, Ensign U. S. N., A
(elect) in Physics.
Duncan, Richard Coolidge,C8»-0,Elyria,O.
Duiilap, Charles Graham (A.B. Ohio Wesl.
83), G 83-5, G S 85-6, Chillicothe. O.
Durfee, William Pitt (A. B. Mich. 76, Ph. D.
83), G 80-1, F 81-3, F by C 83-4, Prof.
Math. Hobart Coll., Geneva, N. Y.
Duvall, Rankin, C 85-6, Baltimore.
Eareckson, Edwin, Jr., C and M 84-6, Balti-
more.
Earle, Tilghman Goldsborough, P M 80-1,
Easton, Md.
Easter, Daniel If., S 84-5, Baltimore.
Ebeling, Hermann Louis (A. B. 82), C 79-80,
M 80-2, G 81-2, Instr. Germ.-Am. Gym.,
Bloomfield, N.J.
Edniiston, Harvey Brown (Univ. Va.), G
85-6, Columbia, Tenn.
Edmond, George Wishart (A. B. 84), 8 83-4,
G 84-6, Portland, Me.
Egge, Albert (A. B. Norw. Luther 79, A. M.
Norw. L. 84), G 82-4, G S 84-5, F 85-6,
Decorah, Iowa.
Eichell,erger, William Snyder (Bait C. C.
83), C S3-4, M 84-6, H S 85-0, Woodberry,
Md.
Ellingcr, Julian Orlopp (U. S. N. Acad. 83),
G 83-4, Student Mass. Inst. Tech. 84-5,
Baltimore.
Elliott, Edward Stiles (A. B. and A. M. Unir.
South. 84), G S 85-6, Sarannah, Ga.
Elmer, Herbert Childs (A. B. Cornell, 83),
G 83-4, 85-6, Rushford, N. Y.
Ely, George Stetson (A. B. Amh. 78, Ph. D.
83), F 81-3, Prof. Math. Buchtel Coll.
83-4, As't Examiner U. S. Patent Office,
Washington.
Ely, John Slade (Ph. B. Yale 81), G 82-3,
Student, Coll. Phys. & Surg. N. Y.
Emerson, Alfred (Ph. D. Munich 81), F 82-4,
Instr. Class. Archaeol. 84-5. Baltimore.
Emerson, William Henry (U. S. N. Acad.
80), G 83-5, F 85-6, Tunnel Hill, Ga.
Engle, Horace Musser, S 85-6, Marietta, Pa.
English, Harry, C 83-4, M 84-6, Washington,
D.C.
Ensey, Richard Fahnestock, Jr. (Bait. C.C),
S 81-6, Baltimore.
Erans, Robert Graham, S 80-1, Farmer,
Danville. Ky.
Evenson, Gustar Adolph (A. B. Norw.
Luth. 80), G 82-3, « 0(1. 10, 1885.
Ewing, Samuel Thomas (A. B, Wash. Coll.
Md. 71), G 76-7, Queen Anne's Co., Md.
Fadeley, George Beauregard, C 83-4, Balti-
more.
Faerber, Julius Isaac (Unir. Dorpat), G 82-5,
Dorpat, Russia.
Fablherg, Constantino (Ph.D. Leipsic 73),
F 78-80, Chemist, Philadelphia.
Fay, Edward Allen (A. B. Univ. Mich. 62,
A. M. Mich. 65, Ph. D. 81). G 77-81,
Prof. Latin and Hist. Nat'l Deal Mule
Coll., Washington, D. C.
Fearn. Thomas Spear, P M 85-6, Summit,
N.J.
Fels, Maurice (A.B. 83, LL. B. Univ. Pa. 86),
C 80-1, M Sl-3, Att'y at Law, Philadel-
phia, Pa.
Ferguson, William Clements, S 84-6, Rich-
mond, Ind
Ferris, Cornelius, Jr., S 84-6, Denver, Colo.
Field, Burr Kellogg (Ph.B. Yale 77), G 77-8,
Mt. Washington, Md.
Fields, John t harles (A.B. Toronto 84), G
and F 84-6, Hamilton, Ont.
Fifleld, James Clark, C 83-4, M 84 6, Kearney,
Neb.
Fifleld, Lehbeus Bailey (A. B. Amh. 53,
A.M. Amh. 711, i ; s2-:i, Baltimore.
Fink, James A., s ,s:;-i, Baltimore.
Fiuley.John Park (B. S.Mich. Ag. Coll. 73,
M.'s. Mich. Ag. 81), F by C 82-3, Lieut.
U. S. Signal Corps, Washington, D. C.
Fisher, John Alonzo (Ph.B. III. Wcsl. Kill,
G 83-6, Clergyman R. E. Church, Balti-
more.
Fitzgerald, Delano S. (M. D. Univ. France
80), G 80- 1 , Physician, Baltimore.
Fleming, William Scott (A.B. Davids. 781,
G 80-1, G S 81-2, F 82-:;, Prof. Greek and
German, Davidsou ('oil. 83-5, Wetunipka,
Ala.
Fletcher, Lawrence Bunting (A.B. Columbia
77, A. M. Columbia 80, Ph. D. 81), Fel-
low of Columbia Coll. 77-80, G 78-9, P
by C 79-80, F80-I, Instr. in Physics, Wee-
leyan Unir. 82-3, Marlborough, N. Y.
Flexuer, Abraham, C 81 5, M 85-6, Louis-
ville, Ky.
Fontaine, Joseph Auguste (Coll. of Nancy,
France. 791, 1 .
Forrest, Clarence Henry, C 85-6, Baltimore.
Fo-snui, Andrew (A. B. Norw. Luth. 82), G
83-6, Elon, Iowa.
Fowler, Harold North (A.B. Harr. 80), G
80-1. Amer. School at Athens 83-4, Iustr.
in Greek, Harrard College.
Franco, Joseph Chalmers (Bait. C.C. 79,
I.I,. II. Iniv.Md s:ins so-i, Att'y at Law,
Baltimore*
Franklin, Fabian (Ph. B Columbian 69,
Ph. D. 80), <i 76-7, F 77-9, As't 79-82, A.
Math. 82-, Baltimore.
Frederick, Henry A lfrcd,883-4,Douglass,Pa.
Freeman. Spencer Hedden (A. B. Uoch. 78,
A. M. Roch. 78), G 79-80, F 80-1 Prof.
Physics and Astron. Adelbert College,
82-6. * February 3, 1886.
Frick. diaries, (Bait. C. C), P M 80-1, C 81-2,
Baltimore.
Friedenwald, Harry (Bait. C.C, A. B. 84,
M. !>., Phys. and Surg. Bait. KC), M 81-4,
As't Physician, City Hospital, Baltimore.
Friedenwald, Julius (Bait. C C), C 84-6, M
85-6, Baltimore.
Friese, Philip Henry (Bait. C. C. 72), S 83-4,
Tutor, Bait. City College.
Frost. Oscar James (B. M. E. Wis. 82, M. E.
Wis. 85), G 85-6, Chemist, Argo, Colo.
Frothingham, Arthur Lincoln, Jr. (Ph. D.
Leipsic 83), F 82-5, F by C 85-6, Baltimore.
Gale, Harry Edwin (A. B. Md. Ag. Coll. 81,
M. D. Unir. Md. 84), G 81-2, Physician,
Baltimore.
Gantt, Henry (M. D. Unir. Md.), 8 78-9,
Baltimore,
Gantt, Henry Laurence (A. B. so, M. E.
Stevens Inst. 84), C 78-9, M 79-80, G S 80,
Mechanical Engineer, Baltimore.
Gardner, Henry Brayton (A.B. Brown 84),
G 84-6. Providence, R. I.
Gardner, William, Jr. (A. B. 111. Coll. 84), G
84-5, Greencastle, Iowa.
Garman, Harrison, S 81-2, C Z L 83, Nor-
mal, 111.
Garner. Samuel (A. B. St. John's 71, Ph. D.
81), G 76-81, Prof. Mod. Lang. Indiana
Univ. Bloomington.
Garthe, Louis (Halt. C C. 80, A.B. 82), M
80-2. G 82-3, Baltimore.
Gates. William Epley, S 82-4, M 84-6, Phila-
delphia, Pa.
Gatewood, Robert Woodland (U. S. N.Acad.
84), G 84-6, Norfolk, Va.
Gavin, Frank Denton (M.D. Univ. Md. 74),
G 76-7, 78-80, Physician, Baltimore.
Gephart, George Frederick (Balt.CC, LL.B.
Univ. Md. 82), S 78-81, Att'y at Law, Bal-
timore.
Gerber, Adolph (Ph.D. Munich 82), F by C
83-6, Prof, (elect) Mod. Lang. Earlham
Coll. Richmond, Ind
Gerke, Walter Duncan. S 79-81, Baltimore.
Gieske, Gustar Edward, S 85-6, Catousville,
Md.
Giffin, Charles M. (B. L. Cincin. 71, A. M.
Wesl.75), G 77-9, Clergyman M.P.church.
Gilbert. Philip C, C 82-4, * Sept. 1884.
Gildersleeve, Raleigh Colston, M and II IIS
85-6, Baltimore.
Giles, Arthur Henry (A. B. Syracuse 78), G
81-2, Manlius, N. Y.
Gillespie, John Hamilton (A.B. Rutgers 82,
New Brunsw. Theol. Scm.), G 82-3, Pas-
tor, Dutch Ref. Church, New Hurley,
N. V.
Oilman, Benjamin Ives (A.B. Wms. 72, A.M.
Wms. 80), G 79-81, F 81-2, F by C 82-3,
New York Citv.
Gilpin, Joseph Elliott, C 84-5, M 85-6, Bal-
timore.
Gittings. David Sterrett (A. B. 83), C 78-80,
M 80-3. Student of Law, Baltimore.
Gjellum, Erik Simon (A.B. Norw. Luth. 79,
LL.B. Iowa Univ. 82), G 79-81, Att'y at
Law, Albert Lea, Minn.
Glenn, John. Jr (A.B. 85), M 80, 81-5, G 85-6,
Student of La w, Uuiv. Md., Baltimore.
Glenn. John Mark (A. M. Wash, and Lee
79, LL.B. l'niv. Md. S2), G 79-.S0, Att'y at
Law, Baltimore,
Glenn, William Lindsay (A. B. 84), M 80-4,
G S 84-5, Student of Law, Univ. Md., Bal-
timore.
Goldsborough, Brice Worthington (M. D.
Univ. Va. sin, -i 7940, G 80-1. Baltimore.
Gooch. George Willis (A.B. Yadkin 81), G
85-6, Henderson, N. C
Goodman, Edgar (Halt. C C 75, A. B. 80,
LL.B. Univ. Md. 81), C 77-8, M 78-80, G
80-5, Att'v at Law, Baltimore.
Goodnow, Ilenrr Root (A B. Amh. 78), G
80-2, F 82-3, F by C 83-4, Instr. Hill Sch.
Pottstown, Pa., 1884-5, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Gordon, Basil Brown, M 80-4, Baltimore.
Gordon, Douglas Huntley, C 84-5, M 85-6,
Baltimore.
76
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 48.
Gore, Joshua Walker (C. E. Univ. Va. 75),
F T6-S, Prof. Nat. Sci. S. W. Bapt. Univ.
78-81, As't Prof. Math. Univ. Va. 81-2,
Prof. Nat. Philos. and Engin. Univ. N. C.
Chapel Hill.
Gorton, William Ourns Lawrence (Bait, G C.
&I1, M and II 11 S 83-6, Baltimore.
Gould, Elgin Ralston Lovell (A. B. Victoria,
OnL81),GSl-2, F 82-4, F by C 84-6, Iustr.
High School, Washington, D. C.
Grammer, Carl Eckhardt (Balu C.C, A. B.
80, B. D. Va. Theol. Seto. 84), 0 76-7, M
77-80. G 80, Student of Law, Univ.Md.80-1,
Clergyman, P. E. Church, Hancock, Md.
Gratuuier, Frederick Louis, S 84-5, Studeut
LehighUniv. Pa.
Grape, Jacob, Jr. (Bait. C. C. 78), 8 83-S,
Teacher, Baltimore.
Graves, William Samuel (A. M. Wash. A Lee
69, K L. Wash. « Lee 72). G 83-5, F by
C 85-6, Prof. Greek and German, David-
son College, N. C.
Gregg, Maurice, S 81-3, Student of Law, Bal-
timore.
Grier, Mark Brown (A. B. Erskiue 85), G
85-6. Due West, S. C.
Gross, Alfred Hermann (A.B. Toronto, 82),
G 84-5, Student of Law, Chicago, 111.
Guard, William John, M 81-3, Baltimore.
Guggeuheimer, Jay Caesar, M 84-6, I1HS
84-5, Baltimore.
Hahn, Harry Wolf, S84-5, C 85-6,Chicago.Hl.
Haight, Milton (A. B. Toronto 84), G S 85-6,
Pine Orchard, Ont.
Haldeman, George Bowman (A. B. Beloit
83), G 83-6, C Z L 85, Cedarville, 111.
Hall, Clayton Coleman, G 82-5, Balti-
more
Hall, Edwin Herbert (A. B. Bowdoin 75,
Ph. D. 81), G 77-8, F 78-80. As't Physics,
80-1, Instr. Phvsics, Harvard Univ.
Hall, John Leslie," S 85-6. Richmond, Va.
Hall, Lvman Beecher (A.B. Amh. 73, Ph. D.
Gott" 75), G 76-7, F 77-9, As't Chem. 79-80,
Prof. Chemistry and Phys., Haverford
Coll, Pa.
Halsted, George Bruce (A. B. Princ 75,
A M. Princ. 78, Ph.D 79), Fellow of Princ.
75-6, F 76-8, Tutor and lnstr. Math. Princ
78-84, Prof. Math. Univ. Texas, Austin.
Hamilton, William Everard, Jr., S 85-6,
Shreveport, La.
Hammond, Gilbert Romine (A. B. Union
Chris. Coll. 76, A. M. Union Chris. 79),
G 85-6, Prof. Latin, Antioch Coll. Yellow
Springs, O.
Hammond, Kensey Johns (A. B. Hanip. Sid.
78, B. D. Va. Theol. Sem. 82), G 78-9,
Clergyman P. E. Church, W. Va.
Hamner, James Garland (A. B. Marietta
81 ), G 81-2, Union Theol. Sein. 82-5, Par-
kersburg, W. Va,
Banna. Albert Armstrong (M. D. Univ. Md
75), G 83-5, Physician, Baltimore.
Hanser, Otto Franz Theodore (Concordia
78), G 81-2, Minister German Lutheran
Cburcb, New York City.
Harding, Caleb Richmond (A. B.Davids. 80,
A. M. Davids. 85), Prof. Greek, llainp.
Sidney, 83-5, G 80-1, 82-3, 85-6, Graham,
N.C.
Harding, Edward Coles (A. M. Univ. Va.
76), V 78-9, Student of Law, Univ. Va.
76-7, Classical Instr. Bait. 77-8 and N. Y.
City 80-1, Prof. Greek, Univ. La. 79-80,
Baltimore.
Harlan, William Beatty (A. B. 83, LL. B.
Univ. Md. 85), C 79-81, S 81-2, M 82-3,
Att'y at Law, Ik-lair, Md.
Harrison, Graeme (A B. Princ. 81, A. M.
Princ. 84, LL. B. Univ. Md. 84), G 81-2,
84-5, Baltimore.
Harrison, William G. (M. D. Bellevue 64),
G 76-7, Physi.ian, Baltimore.
Harry, Joseph Edward, M 83-6, H S 85-6.
Prlesville, Md.
Hart, Edward (S. B. Lafay. 74, Ph. D. 79),
F 76-8, Prof. Analyt. Chem. Lafayette
Coll. Easton. Pa.
Hartogensis, Benjamin Henry (Bait. C. C.
83), M 83-6, Baltimore.
Hartwell, Edward Mussey (A. B Amh. 73,
A. M. Amh. 76, Ph. D. 81, M. D. Miami
Med. Coll. 82). Instr. Boston Latin Sch.
74-7, G 78-9, F 79-81, Physician, Cincin-
nati 82-3, instr. 83-4. and A. Physical
Training 84-, Baltimore.
Hathawav, Arthur Stafford (8. B. Corn. 79),
G 79-82, F 82-4. F by C 84-5, Instr. Math.
Cornell Univ. Ithaca, N. Y.
Haworth, Erasmus (S. B. Kans. Univ. 81),
G 81-2, Prof. Chem. Penn Coll. Oska-
loosa, la.
Hay. Jease. C 77-9. Baltimore.
Hayes, Charles Willard (A.B. Oberlin 831,
G 84-fl.G 8 85-6, Hanover, O.
Haynes, El wood (B.8. Wore. Free Inst. 81),
G 84-5, Instr. Normal School, Portland,
Ind.
Hedrick, William Adam (A. M. Columbian
84), G 84-6, Georgetown, D. C.
Helfenstein, Edward Trail, 8 85J5, Freder-
ick, Md.
Hemmeter, John Cohn (Bait. C. C, M. D.
Univ. Md. S3), G 84-6, CZ L85, Baltimore.
Hemphill, Charles Robert (S. C. Univ. 69,
Va. Univ. 71,8. Presb. Theol. Sem., A. M.
Davids. 78), F 78-9, Prof. S. W. Presb.
Univ. 79-82, A. Prof. Southern Theol.
Sem. 82-5. Clergyman, Presb. Church,
Louisville, Ky.
H.-neh, George Allison (A.B. Lafay. 85), G
85-6, Carlisle, Pa.
Henderson, Raymond Lee, S 85-6, Hancock,
Md.
Hering, Daniel Webster (Ph. B. Yale 72, C.E.
Yale 78), R. R. Engineer 73-4, 78-80, F
76-8, Prof. Math. W. Md. Coll. 80-4, West.
Univ. of Pa. 84-5, Prof. Physics, Univ.
Citv of New York.
Herrick, Francis Hobart (A.B. Dartm. 81),
G 84-6. C Z L 85, Tilton, N. H.
Hilles, William Sadler, C 85-6, Baltimore,
liillver, Homer Wiuthrop (S. B. Wis. 82,
Pb.D. 85). G 82-3, G S 83-4, F 84-5, As't
Chem. Univ. of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
Hinkley, John (A. B. 84), M 81-4, Student of
Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Hitchcock, George Gale (A. B. Neb. Univ.
83), G 84-5, Instr. Nat. Sci. and Math.
Pierre Univ. liakota.
Hixson, Hiram Franklin (Ph. B. Ashland
81. Ph. D. Ashland 83), Pres't Ashland
Coll. 83-5. G 85-6, Ashland, 0.
Hobbs, William Herbert (B. S. Wore. Free
Inst. 83), G 81-6, Auburn, Mass.
Hobson, Benjamin Lewis (A. B. Central
Univ. Ky 77, A. M. Central 80), G 81-2,
Lexington, Mo.
Hodge, Clifton Fremont (A.B. Ripon 82),
G85-6. Ripon, Wis.
Hodges, James Shaler, C 83-4, M 84-6, Bal-
timore.
Hodges, Sebastian, C 79-S0, Baltimore.
Hocn, Albert Bartholomew, S 85-6, Waverly,
Md.
Hoffmann, Otto, C 84-5, M 85-6, New York
City.
Holcomb, William Penn (B. L. Swarthmore
78. M. L. Swarth. 81), G 83-6, Prof, (elect)
Hist. & Pol. Science.Swarthniore Coll.,Pa.
Holmes, Jesse Herman (S. B. Neb. Univ. 84),
G 85-6, Lincoln, Neb.
Holstad, Andrew (A. B. Norw. Luth. 81),
G 81-3, San Francisco, Cal.
Horner, Junius Moore (A. B. 85), M and
H H S 83-5, GS 85-6, Teacher, Oxford,N.C.
Hough. Theodore, M 83-6, H H S 84-6, Bal-
timore.
Howard, Curtis Clark (s. B. State Univ. O.
78), G 79-80, Physician, Columbus, O.
Howard, Charles Howard (A.B. 84), M 82-4,
G 84-5, G S 85, Student of Law, Univ.
Md., Baltimore.
Howe, Charles Sumner (B.S. Mass. Ag. Coll.
78), G 82-3, Prof. Math. Buchtel Coll.,
Akron, O.
Howell, Eel win Clarence (A. B. Harv. 83), G
83-4, Teacher of Math., Baltimore.
Howell, William Henry (Bait C. C, A. B. 81.
Ph. 1). 84), M 79-81. G S 81-2, F 82-4, As't
84-5, C Z L 85, A in Biology 85-6, Balti-
more.
Hubbard, Frank Gaylord (A.B. Wms. 80),
G 81-6, Oswego, N. Y.
Hudgins, Maxwell S. (C.E. Wash, and Lee
76). G 76-7, Instr. Cooper Inst. N. Y.
Huggins, Liudley Murray, C 81-3, Balti-
more.
Hughes, John Samuel (Bait C. C), S 83-4,
Student of Law. Baltimore.
Hughes, Percy Meredith, C 84-5, M and W S
85-6, Washington. D. C.
Huizinga, Abel Henry (A. B. Hope 80,
A. M. Hope 83, New Brunswick Theol.
Sem.), G 83-4, F 81-6, Zeeland, Mich.
Hussey, George Benjamin (A. B. Columbia
84), G 81-5, G S 85-6, East Orange, N. J.
Hussey.George Fredericks 79-80,Baltimore.
Hyslop, John Thomas Benjamin (M. D.
Univ. Md. 85), P M 81-2, Physician,
Pungoteague, Va.
lies, Malvern Wells (Ph. B. Columbia 75,
Ph. D. Columbia 77), F 76-8, Chemist,
Leadville, Colo.
Ingle, Edward (Halt. C. C, A. B. 82), M 79-
82, G 82-4, Baltimore.
Irby.John Robin McDaniel(S.B. Univ. Va.
75, Pb. D. Gott. 78), Miller Scholar, Univ.
Va. 73-5, F 79-80, * March 25, 1880.
Jackson, Walter Beattie, C 84-5, Marion.Va.
Jacques, William White (S. B. Mass. Inst.
T. eh. 76, Ph.D. 79). F 76-9, Electrician,
Boston, Mass. 78-86, Instr Telegraph Eng.
Mass. Inst. Tech., Boston.
Jagemann. Hans Carl Gunther (Naumburg
Gvm. 76, Ph.D. 84), G 81-2, G 8 82-3, F
83' 4, I'rof Mod. Lang. Earlham Coll.,
Richmond, Ind., 84-6, Prof, (elect) Ger-
man. Univ. Ind., Bloomington.
James, Walter Belknap (A.B. Yale 79), G
79-80, Baltimore.
Jameson, John Franklin (A.B. Amh. 79,
Ph. I). 82), G S 80-1, F 81-2, As't 82-3, A.
in History 83-, Baltimore.
Janiieson.Alexander Fridge (A.B. 80), C 76-7,
M 77-80, G 80-1, Teacher, Lawrcneeville,
N.J.
Janney, Oliver Edward (M. D. Univ. Md. 81
and Hahnemann Med. Coll. Phila. 82), G
85-6, Physician, Baltimore.
Jarvis, Edmund Allen (A. B. 80), C 76-7, M
77-80, G 80, » October 15, 1880.
Jarvis, William C. (M. D. Univ. Md. 76), G
76-7, Baltimore.
Jastrow, Joseph (A. B. Univ. Pa. 82, A. M.
Pa. 85), G 82-4, G S and F 84-6, Phila-
delphia.
Jay, John G. (M.D. Univ. Md. 71), G 76-7,
Physician, Baltimore.
Jayne, Horace Fort (A. B. Univ. Pa. 79,
M. D. Pa. 82), G 83-4, Prof. Vert. Morphol.
Univ. Pa., Philadelphia.
Jayne, Joseph Lee (U. S. N. Acad. 82), En-
sign U. S N.,G 85-6, Brandon, Miss.
Jefferson, Howard S., S 84-5, Baltimore.
Jenkins, Felix S. (M. D. Univ. Md. 82), C 78-
80, Physician. Baltimore.
Jenkins Oliver Peebles (A.B. Moore's Hill
Coll. 69, A. M. Moore's Hill, 72), G 82-3,
CHS), 85, Prof. Nat. Sci. Normal Sch.,
Terre Haute, Ind.
Johnson, John (A. B. 81), C 79-80, M 80-1, G
81-5, Instr. McDonogh Sch. Md.
Johnson, Oakley A. (U.S. Rutgers 81), G 81-2,
Princ. High Sch. Westfield, N. J., 84-6,
Sing Sing. N. Y.
Johnson, Robert Wilkinson (A. B. Princ.
76, M. D. Univ. Pa. 79), G 76-7, 82-3, Phy-
sician, Baltimore.
Johnston, Christopher, Jr. (A. M. Univ. Va.
79, II. D. Univ. Md. 80). G 82-3, Physi-
cian, Baltimore.
Johnston, Robert Clapham, M 82-4, Balti-
more.
Jones, Charles Edgeworth (A. B. and Ph. B.
Univ. Ga. 85), G 85-6, Augusta, Ga.
Jones, Charles Haiupson (B. Med. and M.
Surg. Edinburgh 83), S 77-9, Physician,
Baltimore.
Jones, Harry Cleary, S 85-6,New London.Md.
Jones, John Carleton (A.B. Westminster
Coll. Mo. 79), G 82-3. Fulton, Mo.
Jones, Joseph J. C. (Bait. C. C), C 80-1, Bal-
timore.
Jones, Walter (Bait. C. C. 84), C 84-5, M 85-6,
Baltimore.
Jones, William Augustine, C 84-5, M 85-6,
Tuscaloosa, Ala.
Joyce, John Jay (A. B. Univ. Pa. 71, A. M.
Univ. Pa. 74), G 77-8, Clergyman P. E.
Church, Georgetown, D. C.
Kaessmann, Frederick D. J., C 84-5 Balti-
more.
Kaiser, Alois, S 77-9, Rabbi, Baltimore.
Kastle, Joseph Hoeing (S. B. Ky. State Coll.
84), G 84-5, G S 85-6, Lexington, Ky.
Katzenstein, Louis (Univ. Berlin), G 85-6,
Baltimore.
Keeler, James Edward (A. B. 81), S 78-81,
M 81, As't Allegheny Astron. Observ.
82-6, As't Lick Observ. Cal.
Keerl, E. Fraser, M 82, Student Univ. of
Oxford, England.
Keilholtz, Pierre Otis (U. S. N. Acad. 84), G
84-6, Baltimore.
Keiser, Edward Harrison, (S. B. Swarth.
80, M. 8. Swarth. 81, Ph. D. 84), G 81-2, F
82-4, As't 84-5, A Prof. Chemistry, Bryn
Mawr Coll., Pa.
Kemp, George Theophilus (Balt.C. C, A.B.
83), M 81-3, G 83-1, G S 84-5, F 85-6, Bal-
timore.
Kennard, John Hanson, Jr. (Univ. La. 83),
G 83-4, New Orleans, La.
Keyser, Newberry Allen Smith (M. D. Univ.
Md. 83), P M 79-81, Physician, Balti-
more.
Keyser, Roland S. (A. B. Syracuse 72, A. M.
Svracuse 75), G77-8, Havana, N.Y.
Kimball, Arthur Lalande (A. B. Princeton
81, Ph. D. 84), F 82-3, F by C 83-4, A
Physics, 84-, Baltimore.
Kimball, Richard Fuller (A. B. 82, LL. B
Univ. Md.84),C 78-80, M 8U-2,Atty. at Law,
Baltimore.
Kinnicutt, Leonard P. (S. B. Mass. Inst.
Tech, 75), G 78-9, Instr. Chem. Harv.
81-3, As't Prof. Chem. Worcester Free
Inst., Worcester, Mass.
Knight, Herbert, P M 84-5,' Lancaster, Pa.
Knight, Lewis W. (M. D. Univ. Md. GG), G
77-8, Phvsician, Baltimore.
Koyl, Charles Herschel (A. B. Victoria,
Ont 77), G 79-80, G S 80-1, F 81-3, Instr.
High School, Washington, D. C.
Kuhara, Mitsurn, (S. B. Tokio 79, Ph. D. 81),
F 79-81, F by C 81-2, Lect. Organic Chem.
Univ. Tokio, Japan.
Ladd, Christine [now Mrs. F. Franklin]
(A. B. Vassar 69), G 78-82, Baltimore.
Laessig, John Henry, Jr., S 82-4, C 84-6, Bal-
timore.
Lamb, Arthur Lincoln, C 83-4, M 84-6, Bal-
timore.
Lambert, Marcus Bachman, (A.B. Lafay.
82), G84-5, Kiegelsville, Pa.
Langdon, Courtney (Harvard), G 85-6,
Teacher, Baltimore.
Lanier, Charles Day, C 85-6, McDonogh, Md.
Laninati, Charles Rockwell (A.B.Yale 71.
Ph. D. Yale 73), F 76-7, A 77-80, Prof.
Sanskrit, Harvard Univ.
Lauer, Martin (Bait. C. C. 75), 8 76-7, Bal-
timore.
Lawrie, Andrew Davis (A.B. Amh. 73, Ph.D.
Gott. 76), G 76-7, Boston, Mass.
Lawson, Andrew Cooper (A.B.Toronto 83,
A. M. Toronto 85), G 85-6, Geol. Survey
of Canada, Ottawa.
Learned, Marion Dexter (A. B. Dickinson
80, A.M. Dickins. 83),G 84-5, F 85^6, Dover,
Del.
Lee, Frederic Schiller, (A. B. St. Lawr. Univ.
78, A. M. St. Lawr. 80. Ph. D. 85), G 81-8,
C Z L 83, G 8 83-4, F 84-5, Student of
Biology, Leipsic, Germany.
Lee, William (Si. D. Univ. Md. 64), G 76-7,
Physician, Baltimore.
Leftwich, Thomas James, C 79-82, Atty. at
Law, Minneapolis, Minn.
Lehmann, Ferdinand Fried rich Carl (LL.D.
Gott. 83), G83-4, Hamburg, Germany.
Leonard, Benjamin F. I'M. 1>. Univ. Md. 76),
G 77-80, Physician, Baltimore.
Lerch, Charles Henry (A. B. Lafay. 82), G
84-5, Teacher, Easton, Pa.
Lester, Samuel T., S 76-7, Teacher, Balti-
more.
Le Van Bender, John, S 80-1, Physician,
Penn Yan, N.Y.
Levermore, Charles Herbert (A. B.Yale 79),
G 83-4, F 84-5, Teacher, New Haven,
Conn.
Lewis, Henry Carvill (A. M. Univ. Pa.), F
by C 84-5, Prof. Mineral. Phila. Acad,
Nat. Sci., Prof. Geol. Haverford Col-
lege, Pa.
Lewis, John Shackelford (M. D. Phys. and
Surg. Bait. 79). G 79-80, Physician, Balti-
more.
Lewis, Thomas Hamilton (A. B. West. Md.
75, A. M. West. Md. 78), G 77-9, Minister
M. E. Church, Prest. West. Md. College,
Westminster, Md.
Lichty, William Henry (B.L. Neb. Univ.
84), G 84-5, Tecumseh, Neb.
Liebig, Gustav Adolph, Jr. (A.B. 82, Ph D.
85) M 79-82, G S 82-3, F 83-5, F by C 85-6,
Baltimore.
Liebig, Rudolph Aloysius, M 81-3, Balti-
more.
Linn, Alvin Frank (A. B. Wittenberg, 84),
G 85-6, Springfield, O.
Linthicum, Stewart Brian (A. B. SO, LL. B.
Univ. Md. 82), M 77-80, G 80-3, Att'y at
Law, Portland, Oregon.
Loane, James Albert (Bait. C. C. 82, A. B.
85). M 82-5, G S 85, Baltimore.
Lockwood, William F. (M. D. Univ. Va. 75),
G 80-1, Physician, Baltimore.
Lodge, Gonzalez (Bait. C. C. 81, A.B. 83), M
81-3, G S 83-5, F 85-6, Baltimore.
Loeb, Albert Henry, C 85-6, Chicago, 111.
Lord, John Deering, Jr. (A.B. 84), M 81-4,
Student of Law, Columbia College, New
York.
Lord, Jere Williams (A. B. 84), P M 81-4,
M 84, Student of Med. Univ. of Pa, Phila-
delphia.
Loudon, William James (A. B.Toronto 80),
G 81-2, Toronto, Ontario.
Love, James Lee (Ph. B. Univ. N. C. 84), G
84-5, As't Prof. Math. Univ. of N. G,
Chapel Hill.
Lowe, John Hanson (Bait. G G, A. B. 80,
LL. B. Univ. Md. 82), M 77-80, G 81-2,
Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Lowndes, Charles N. T., P M 84-5, Student
of Med. Univ. Md. Baltimore.
Lowry, William Scott (S. C. Theol. Sem.),
G 84-5, Smithville, Va.
Lupton, Silas Lucien.C 76-7, Winchester, Va.
Lyons, William Patrick (A. B. 84), Student
of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Macallura, Archibald Byron (A. B. Toronto
80), G 83-4, London, Ontario.
Macauley, John, C 85-6, Washington, D. G
MacCliutock, Charles Thomas (A. B. Ky.
Weal. 81), G 81-2, 83-5, Instr. Hamilton
Coll. Ky. 82-3, Teacher, Irvine, Ky.
MacClintock, John (A. B. Ky. Wesl. 82), 8
81-2, G 82-3, Millersburg, Ky.
MacClintock, William Darnell (A. B. Ky.
Wesl. 78), GS 80-2, Teacher, Paris, Ky.
82-3, Union Theol. Sera. New York City.
MacEwan. Elias John (A. B. Kalamazoo 75,
A. M. Kal. 77), F by C 85-6, Prof. English,
Michigan Agric. Coll.
MacCu'ldiii-k, Daniel J. (Woodstock Coll.),
G 84-5, Woodstock, Md.
Mackenzie, John Noland (M. D. Univ. Va. 76
and Univ. N. Y. 77), G 82-3, Physician,
Baltimore.
Mager, Wilhelm (Wiesbaden ),G 77-S0,Chera-
ist, Baltimore.
Magoun, Herbert William (A. B. Iowa 79,
A. M. Iowa 82) G 85-6, Bath, Me.
Mahon. ( irmsby Lyman ( Halt. C. C), C 79-82,
Baltimore,
April, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
77
Mahon, Robert Wright (('. E. Lehigh 78,
I'll. II. 82), G 77-82, Tutor in < ln-ui.
Lafay. 82-3, Chemist, Camden, N. J.
Maim, Alfred, P M and C 80-6, Milwaukee,
Wis.
Manstield, John Melvin (A. B. Inwa Wesl.
04, Ph. 1>. la. \V. 69), G 84-6, Mt. Pleas-
ant, la.
Marburg, Theodore, C and M 80-1, Balti-
more.
Marlmry, William L. (LL.B. Univ. Md. 82),
S 78-9, Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Maris, George Peterkin, S 78-9, Baltimore.
Marks, Arthur Handly, 8 84-5, Winchester,
Tenn.
Marquand, Allan (A. B. Princ. 74, Ph. D. 80),
Union Theol. Sem. N. Y. 77, F 77-80, F
by C 80-1, Lect. on Logic and Tutor in
Latin, Princeton, 81-3, Prof. History of
Ait, Princeton.
Marston.William Staples( A. B. Harv.74,C. E.
Ilarv. 77), G 79-80, Principal, University
School for Boys, Baltimore.
Mason, John Campbell, 8 84-0, Baltimore.
Matz, Franklin Peirce (A.M. Ursinus, Pa,
78 ),G80-l,Teacher, King's Mountain, N.C.
Matzke, John Ernst (A. B. Hope 82), G 84-5,
G S 85-6, Kidott, 111.
Mauck, Joseph William (A. B. Hillsdale 75),
G 79-80 Prof. Hillsdale Coll., Mich.
Mc('abe,Tliomas(Univ. France, Univ.Rome),
G 85-6, Baltimore.
McCay, Albert Harvey (Bait. C. C), S 82-3,
Baltimore.
McCormick, Thomas P. (M. D. Univ. Md.
77), G 77-8, Physician, Baltimore.
McCreary, George Washington (Bait. C. C.
74, A. B. 791, C 76-7, M 77-9, Baltimore.
McCulloch. Joseph Flavins (A.B. Adrian
83), G 84-5, Pleasant Garden. N. C.
McDaniel, Charles Thomas (Bait. C. C. 81),
S 81-3, .Student, Crozer Theol. Sem. Up-
land, Pa.
Mel aniel, William Roberts ( A . B. West . M .1 .
80), G 83-5, Prof. -Math. West. Md. Coll.,
Westminster, Md.
McDowell, Whitford Loane (Bait. C.C. 79),
S 79-80, Minister M. E. Church, Luther-
ville, Md.
Mcllwame, Clement Read (A. B. Hamp. Sid.
78, LL.B. Univ. Md. 8:)), G 79-81, Balti-
more.
Mcintosh. James Higgins (A.B. Newberry
84), G 84-6, Newberry, S. C.
McLane, Allan, Jr. (A. B. 86), M 82-6,
Student of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
McLane, Uobert Milligau, C 77-8, San Fran-
cisco, Cal. * 1878.
McLane, Robert Milligan, Jr., M 84-6, H S
85-6, Baltimore.
McLean, Frank P. (Ph. C. Cal. 75), G 76-7,
Physician, Washington, D. C.
McMahon, Robert Fulton (A. B. Princ. 84),
G 84-5, Cambridge, O.
McPhersou, John Hanson Thomas (Bait. C.
C 84), M and H H S 84-6, Baltimore.
McVVbirter, Felix T. (A.B.,E. Tenn. Wesl.
73, A. M., K.Tenn. W.84, Ph. I). De Pauw
85), G 85-6, Greencastle, Ind.
Means, Ilavid McGregor (A. B. Yale OS), F
76-7, Prof. Polil. and Ment. Sci. Middle-
bury Coll. 77-80, Att'y at Law, New York
City.
Meriwether, Colycr, S 84-5, M 85-6, Clark's
Hill. S. C.
Merryman, Charles Gorsuch (Bait. C. C. 82),
S 82-3, Louisville, Ky.
Metzler, George Frederick (A. B. Albert,
Out. 80, A. M. Albert 83), G 84-5, Odessa,
Out.
Michael, J. Edwin (A. B. Princ. 71, A. M.
Princ. 74, M. I). Univ. Md. 73), G 80-1,
Physician, Baltimore.
Middleton, Henry (A. B. Charleston 73), G
76-7, Summerville, S. C.
Miller, Caspar Otto (M. D. Univ. Va. 80 and
Univ. N. Y. 81), G 85-6, Physician, Balti-
more.
Miller, Charles William Emil (Bait. C.C. 80,
A. B. 82, Ph II. 86), M 80-2, G S 82-3, F
83-5, F by C 85-6, Baltimore.
Miller, Daniel (Bait. C. C. 67), S 77-8, Balti-
more.
Miller, Edgar George, Jr. ( A. B. 84), Student
of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Miller, John Hearsh (A.B. Erskiue 80), G
80-1, Prof. Math. Erskine Coll., Due West,
5. C.
Miller, Joseph Sylvester (M. D. Phys. and
Surg. Halt. 80), G 83-4, Physician, York,
Pa.
Miller, William Howard (Bait. C.C. 85), M
and IIHS 85-6, Baltimore.
Mills, Thomas Weslev (A. B. Toronto 71,
A M.Toronto72,M.D. McGill 7S,L.R.C.P.
Eng.), G 81-2, F by C 82-6, C Z L 83-5,
Lect. Physiol. McGill Univ. 84-, Mon-
treal, Quebec.
Milroy, William Fnrsvth (M. D. Phys. and
Surg. Bait. 81), S 80-1, Physician, York,
N. Y.
Milrov, William Mcf'racken (A.B. Geneva
77, B. II. Yale 82). fi 84-6, Northwood, O.
Mindeleff, Charles, S 84-6, Washington, D. C.
Mitchell, Oscar Howard (A. B. Marietta 75
A. It Marietta 78, Ph. D. 82), G 7*-9, F
79-82, Prof. Math Marietta Coll., Ohio.
Milsukuri, Kakichi (Ph. B. Yale 79, I'll. D.
58), 1; 79-80, F 80-1, CZ L79, 80, Prof.
Zoologv, Univ. of Tokio, Japan.
Moale. William Armistead, Jr. (M. D. Univ.
Md.79), O 78-81, Physician, Bait.
Molinard, William Robinson, S 86-6, Balti-
more.
Montgomery, Henry (A. B. Toronto 76, A. M.
Toronto 77, B. S. Victoria, Ont. 80), G
M-2, Prof. Nat. Sel. Univ. of North Da-
kota, Grand Forks.
Moore, George Neville, C 85-6, Washington,
D.C.
Moore, John Leverett (A. B. Princ. 81, A. M.
Princ. 84), Tutor in Latin, Princeton
82-5, G. 85-6, Orange, N. J.
Moore, William Sadler (A. B. Davids. 77), G
79-80, Prof. Math. Adger Coll. Walhalla,
S.C.
Morgan. Gerard Emory (Bait. C. C. 73, A.B.
Uiekins. 76), G 76-8, Adj. Prof. Bait. City
Coll. Baltimore.
Morgan, Leigh Clinton (Bait. C. C. 75, A. B.
80), C 77-8, M 78-80, Clergyman P. E.
Church, Whitostone, Long Island.
Morison, Robert B. (M. D.-Univ. Md. 74), G
76-7, Phvsieian, Baltimore.
Morrill, A. D., C Z L SB, Chapel Hill, O
Morrill, Park (A.B. Amh. 81), U. S. Signal
C01 ps, G 82-6, St. Johnsbtiry, Vt.
Morris, Charles Newton (A. B. Yale 82), G
84-5, West Hartford, Conn.
Morris, Henry Hey ward, C 84,* Oct. 28, 1884.
Morrison, James William, Jr., S 82-3, Staun-
ton, Va.
Morse, Harmon Northrop (A.B. Amh. 73,
Ph. D.Gfltt. 75), Instr. Chem. Amh. 75-6,
F 76, A 76-83, A Prof, of Chem. 83-, Bal-
timore.
Moseley, William Edward (M. D. Harv. 74),
G 76-7, Physician, Baltimore.
Mossell, Charles Wesley (A.B. Lincoln 71,
B. D. Boston Univ. 74), G 85-6, Lockport,
N.Y.
Motora, Y'uzcro (Kioto, Japan 84), G 85-6,
Sanda, Japan.
Mount, Christian Keener, S 84-6, Baltimore.
Mumper, William Norris (A. B. Dickins. 79),
G 81-2, 84-5, Prof. Md. Agric. Coll., College
Station.
Murray, Augustus Taber (A.B. Haverf. 85),
G 85-6, New Bedford, Mass.
Murray, Daniel Maynadier (LL.B. Univ.Md.
83), C 79-81, S 81-3, Att'y at Law, Bait.
Murray, John Scott, Jr. (A. M. F"urman 78),
G 82-3, Student of Lang., Germany.
Mussey, William Lindsly, S 82-3, Cincin-
nati, O.
Nachtrieh, Henry Francis (B. S. Minn. 82),
G 82-4, F 84-5, C Z L 83, 84, 85, As't
Prof. Biol. Univ. of Minn. Minneapolis.
Naeseth, Christen Andreas (A. B. Norw.
Luth. 74, A. M. Norw. l.uth. 83), G 84-5,
Prof. Norw. Luth. Coll., Decorah, Iowa.
Nason, Frank Lewis (A. B. Amh 82), G 85-6,
Itistr. Renss. t'olytech. Inst., Troy, N.Y.
Neale, Leonard Ernest (M. D. Univ. Md. 81),
S 78-9, Physician, Baltimore.
Nelson, Edward William, S 76-7, Chicago,
III.
Nelson, Julius (B.S. Univ. Wis. 81), G 83-6,
C Z L 84, Waupaca, Wis.
Nelson, Keating Simons (A. B. St. John's
74, A. M. Univ. Va. 78), G 81-2, Culpeper,
Va.
Ness, Jens Anderson (A.B.Norw. Luth. 84),
G 85-6, Red Wing, .Minn.
Newson, Henry Byron (S. B. Ohio Wes. 83),
G 83-4, Instr. Central Tenn. Coll. Nash-
ville, Tenu.
Newton, John C.Calhoun (A. B. Kv. Mil.
Inst. 74, A. M. Ky. M. Inst. 77), G 84-6.
Millersburg, Ky.
Nicholls, Charles Wilbur, S 78-80, Student,
Gen'l Theol. Sem. New York.
Nichols, Edward Leamington (S. B. Cornell
75. Ph. D. Gott. 79), F 79-80, F by C80-1,
Prof. Phys. and Chem. Central Univ. Ky.
81-3, Prof. Phys. and Asiron. Univ. Kan-
sas Lawrence.
Nicholson, James Carmich (Bait. C. C. 75, A.
B. Dickins. 77), G 79-80, Minister M. E.
Church, Great Falls, Md.
Nicolasseii, George Frederick (Bait. C. C. 74,
A. B. Univ. Va. 74), A.M. Va. 80, Ph. D.
82), F 79-81, As't Greek and Latin 81-2,
Prof. Anc. Lang. S. W. Presbyterian
Univ., Clarksville, Tenn.
Nixon, Henry Barber (Univ. N. C. 78), G
82-4, F 81-5, F by C 85-6, Winfall, N. C.
Norman, Seaton Fisher, P M 78-9,Physician,
Baltimore.
Norton. Edwin Clarence (A. B. Amh. 79),
G 80-1, Prof. Greek, Yankton College,
Dakota.
Norwood. Chalmers Colin (A.B. Davids. 78),
G 78-81, G S 81-2, Prof. Math. Md. Agric.
Coll., College Station.
Moves, William, Jr. (A.B. Harv. 81, M. D.
Harv. 85), F 84-5, F by C 85-6, Physician
Bay View Asylum, Bait. 85, Ass't Phy-
sician, BloomingdaJe Asylum, N. Y.
Noyes, William Albert (A. B.ands. P.. Iowa,
70, Ph. D. 82;, G 80-1, G S 81-2, Instr.
Chem, Univ. Minn. 82-3, Prof. Chem.
Univ. Tenn., Knoxville.
Nuttall, George Henry Falkiner (M. I)
Univ. Cal. 84), G 85-6,San Francisco, Cal.
O'Connor, Bernard Francis (B. es L. Univ.
France 74, Ph. D. 83), G 79-80, F 80-2, F
by C 82-3, Instr. French, Columbia Col-
lege, New York City.
O'Conor, J. F. X. (A. B. St. Fr. Xav., N. Y.
82,) S. J., G 84-5, Woodstock Coll.. Md.
O'l'onovan, Charles, Jr. (A. B. Geo'town 78,
M. 11. Univ.Md. 81), G 78-9, Physician,
Baltimore.
O'Douovan, Harry, P M 84-6, Baltimore.
Orndortr, William Ridgely (Bait. C. C. 81,
A. B. 84), S 81-2, M 82-4, G 84-6, G S 85-6,
Baltimore.
Orr, Henry (A.B. Ham. 82, Ph. D. Jena 85),
F by C 85-6, Clinton, N. Y.
Osborn, Henry Leslie (A. B. Wesl. 78, Ph.D.
84), F 81-2, F by C 82-4, C Z L 82, 83,
S4, Prof. Zool. Purdue Univ. Lafayette,
Ind.
Osborne. William Henry (A. M. Wake For-
est 83), G 83-4, Editor " New Era," Shelby,
N.C.
Ota, Inazo (S. B. Sapporo 81),G 84-6,Tokio,
Japan.
Ott, Isaac (M. D. Univ. Pa. 69. A. M. Lafay.
77). V 78-9, Lect. Exp. Physiol., Univ. Pa.
76-7, Assoc. Ed. Jour, of Nervous and
Mental Diseases, Physician, Easton, Pa.
Ould, Remus, S 78-80, Baltimore.
Outen, Joseph Tomlinson (A. B. Ohio Wesl.
66, A. M. Ohio Wesl. 70), G 83-6, Millers-
burg, Ky.
Page, James (Bait. C. C, A. B. 82), 51 79-82,
G 82-4, Mass. Inst. Tech. 84-5, Baltimore.
Page, Walter Hines (Rand. Macon 76), F
76-8, Lect. N. C. Normal Coll. 78, Prof.
Louisville High Sch. 78-9, Journalist,
Raleigh, N. C.
Painter, Charles, C 76-7, * Dec. 1877.
Palmer, Albert Gallatin (A. B. 82, Ph. D.
85), C 79-80, M 80-2, G 82-3, G S 83-4, F
84-5, As't in Chem. Swarthmore Coll. Pa.
Palmer, Chase (A. B. 79, Ph.D. 82), C 76-7,
M 77-9 G S 79-80, F 80-2, As't in Chem.
Mass. Inst, of Tech. 82-3, Prof. Chem.
State Normal School, Salem, Mass.
Palmer, Charles Skeele (A. B. Amh. 79,
A. M. Amh. 82), G 81-5, F 85-6, Chicopee,
Mass.
Palmar. Nelson (A. B. 80), M 77-80, G 80-1,
Baltimore.
Palmer, Oliver Hungerford, C 85-6, Wash-
ington, D. C.
Parrisli, Nicholas Morgan, S 76-8, 81-2,
Teacher, Baltimore.
Patriek, George Thomas White (A. B. Iowa
Univ. 78, B. D. Yale 85), G and F 85-6,
Lyons, Iowa.
Patten, John Owen, S 82-3. Bath, Me.
Patterson, James McDonald, S 85-6, Denver,
Colo.
Patterson, James Wilson (A.B. Princ. 63),
G 80-1, Baltimore.
Pease, Ernest Mondell (A. B. Univ. Colo. 82,
A M. Colo. 85), G 82-3, G S 83-4, F 81-6,
Instr. Latin, Smith College, Northamp-
ton, Mass.
Peed, Mansfield Theodore (A. M. Rand.
Macon 78), G 83-5, Teacher, Baltimore.
Peirson, Joseph Edward (A.B. Wms. 83), G
85-6, Pittsfield, Mass.
Penniman, George Dobbin (Bait. C.C, A.B,
84), C 81-3, M 83-4, Student of Law, Univ.
Md , Baltimore.
Penniman, William Bose Dobbin (Bait.
C. C), S 83-6, St. Denis, Md.
Pennington, Clapham (M. D. Univ. Md. 82),
S 77-80, G 82 3, Pbysician, Baltimore.
Pennington, John I. (M.D. Univ. Md. 69),
G 76-7, Physician, Baltimore.
Pennington, Stirling, C 76-7, Baltimore.
Pcrki us, Charles Albert (A.B. Wms. 79, Ph.D.
84), G S 81-3, F 83-4, As't in Physics 84-,
Baltimore.
Perkins, Charles Allen, G 84-6, Syracuse,
N. Y.
Perkins, William Henry, Jr. (A.B. 84), M
81-4, G 84-6, Student of Law, Univ. Md.,
Baltimore.
Perry, Herbert Mills (A.B. Harv. 80), F80-2,
Instr. Math. Casc.idilla Sell., Ithaca, N.Y.
Peterson, Frank Hance ( A. B. West. Md. 78),
G 78-9, Lavender, Md.
Peterson, James Bates, S 80-1, S. Abington,
Mass.
Pettigrew, Thomas (A.B. 80), M 77-80, Civil
Engineer, Parkersburg, W. Va.
Philipson, I 'avid (A.B. Cincin. 83, Hebrew
Union Coll. S3), G 83-6, Rabbi, Baltimore.
Pickle, James Marion (A.M. Furman 76),
G 80-1, Prof. Chem. Fla. Agric. Coll.,
Lake City.
Piggot, Cameron (M.D.Univ. Md. 82), G 82-6,
Baltimore.
Piatt, Walter Brewster (Ph. B.Yale 74, M.D.
Harv. 79, F. R. C. 8. Eng.),G 81-2, Physi-
cian, Baltimore.
Pleasants, John (A.B. 80), M 82-«, Balti-
more.
Pleasants, Richard Hall, Jr., C 83-5, M 85-6,
Baltimore.
Poe, Samuel Johnson (A.B.Princ.84),G 88-6,
student of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Pointer, Peter Porter (M. E. Stevens 74), F
76, * June, 1876.
Pope, Boiling Anthony, Jr. (S.B.Tulane 83),
G 85-6, New Orleans, La.
Poullain, Thomas Noel, C 8S-6, Baltimore.
Powell Nathan (S.B. Hanover 84), G 84-5,
Madison, Ind.
Pratt, Robert James (C.E. Rensi. Polvt. Inst.
83), G 83-4, Electrician, Troy, N. V.
Pratt, WaldoSelden (A.B. Wms. 7s),G 78-9,
F 79-80, As't Director, Metr. Sins. Art,
N. Y. 80-2, A. Prof. Ecclesiastical Music,
etc., Hartford Theol. Sem. Conn.
Prentiss, Robert Woodworth (S. B. Rutg. 78,
M. S. Rutg. 81), G 78-9, F 79-81, F by C
81-2, 84-5. U. S. Nautical Almanac Office,
Washington, D.C.
Prescott, Philip Maxwell, 8 78-82, Wauke-
gan, III.
Preston, Alexander, S 84-6, Baltimore.
Preston, Erasmus Darwin (B.C. E. Corn. 75,
C. E. Corn. 80) F 76-8, Instr. Cornell
75-6, U. S. C. and G. Survey, Nat'l Obser-
vatory, Cordoba, Argentine Republic.
Price, Eldridge C. (M.D. Univ. Md. and
Hahnemann Med. Coll. Phila,74), G 86-6,
Physician, Baltimore.
Price, Harry Wilbur (Bait. C. C. 83, A. B.
86), C 83-4, M 84-5, Student of Law, Wash-
ington, D. C.
Price, Herbert Lee (Bait. C. C), P M 79-83,
Asheville, N. C.
Pritcheft, John Edward (A. B. Pritchett
Inst. Mo. 73), G 78-9, Glasgow, Mo.
Pund, Frederick, C 78-83, Baltimore.
Quincy, Charles Byron (B. L. Wis. 83), G
85-6, Salina, Kau.
Ramage, Bartow Bee (A, B. Newberry 80
and Harv. 84), G 80-1, Teacher, Brook-
lyn (N. Y ) Latin School.
Ramage, Burr James (A. B. Newberrv 80,
Ph. D. 86), G 80-2, 84-6, G S 82-4, Student
of Law, Columbia College, N. Y.
Ramsav, Franklin Peirce (A. B. Davidson
79, A. M. Davids. 85), G 85-6, Minister
Presb. Church, Troy, Ala.
Ranisburg, John II., S 83-4, Frederick, Md.
Randall, Daniel Richard (A.B. St. John's
83), G 83-6 Annapolis, Md.
Randall, Thomas Henry, (Mass Inst. Tech.
84), S 81-2, Architect, Brookline, Mass.
Randall, Wyatt William (A. B. St. John's
84), G 85-6, Annapolis. Md.
Randolph, Robert Lee (M. D Univ. Md. 84),
P M 81-2, Richmond, Va.
Read, Miles S. (Crozer Theol. Sem.), G 80-1,
Minister, Baptist Church, Baltimore.
Reader, Frank Eugene, C 86-6, New Brigh-
ton, Pa.
Reese, Charles Lee (Bait. C. C, Ph. D.
Heideib 86). C80-1, Student in Germany.
Reese, David Meredith (Bait. C. C), S 81-6,
Baltimore.
Reese, Robert Miller (A. B. 82), C 79-80, M
80-2, As't, Pratt Library, Baltimore.
Reeve, James Spofford (A. B. Lawr. Univ.
Wis. 85), G 85-6, Appleton, Wis.
Reeves, William Peters, S 84-6, Richmond,
Ind
Reid, Harry Fielding (A.B. 80, Ph. D. 85), C
77-8, M 78-80, G S 80-1, G 81-2, F 82, As't in
Physics 82-4, Student in Cambri'i g
Rice, Henry Joseph (S. B. Corn. 76. M. S.
Corn. 80, Sc. D. Syracuse 81), F 76-8,
C Z L 79, 81, As't U. S. Fish Commission
79, Prof. Mich. Mil Acad. 80-2, Prof. Nat.
Sci. Brooklyn N. Y. High Sch. 82-5, » Dec.
13, 1885.
Rich, Alexander Miller (A. B. Hobart 85),
S 82-3, Teacher, Reisterstown, Md.
Rich, Edson Prosper (B. L. Neb. Univ. 83),
G 83-4, Student of Law, Lincoln, Neb.
Rich, Jacob Monroe (M. E. Columbia 83,
C. E. Columb. 84), G 85-6, New York City.
Richardson, Edwin George (A. B. 81, West
Phila. Theol. Sem. 82), C 76-7. M 77-9,
Clergyman P. E. Church, Milwaukee,
Wis.
Riddick, Elbert T. (Bait. C. C), P M 83 4,
Baltimore.
Rieman. Perlee Lowe (A. B. Princ. 83), G
83-4, Baltimore
Riggs, I.awrason (A. B. Princ. 83), G 83-4,
Student of Law, Univ. Md., Baltimore.
Riggs. Robert Baird (A. B. Beloit 76, Ph. D.
Gott. 83), G 84-5, U. S. Nat'l Museum,
Washington, D.C.
Rivers, Edmund Christopher (A. B. Wash.
Coll. Md. 76, M. D. Univ. Md. 79) G 79-80,
Phvsieian, Denver, Colo.
Robb,' John Alexander, Jr. (Bait. C. C,
M. 1'. Univ. Md. 80), S 77-8, Physician,
Baltimore.
78
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No 48.
Roberts, Benjamin Titus, Jr. (A. B. 85), S
M S5, G 85-6, North Chili, N. Y.
Roberts, David Ellsworth, S S8-4, C S4-6,
Baltimore.
Robertson, Forrest Lee (A B. Ky. Wesl. 82),
ti ^--o, Paris, Ky.
Robinson, Adoniram Judson (Bait. C C. "9,
A. R 81, LL.R Univ. Md. 85), C
80-1, G $2-5, Tutor, Bait. City Coll., Balti-
more.
Robinson, Carrel Hall, M 80-1, * July 25,
Robinson, Lewis Bayard (Bait. C. C), C 81-2,
Baltimore-
Roe, William Edgar (A. B. Wms. 78), G 78 9,
Cornwall, N. Y.
Rogers, James R. (M. D. Wash. Univ. Bait.),
G 76-7, Baltimore.
Rogers, Robert William, M 81-6, Philadel-
phia, Pa.
Rolando, Henry (Bait. C.C., A.B. 81, M.D.
Univ. Md. S3), C 77-8, M 78-81, Physi-
cian, Presbyt. Uosp. N. Y. 81-5, Student
in Germany.
Rosenthal, Leasing, C S5-6, Chicago, 111.
Rotch, Francis, C 81-2, Eau Claire, Wis.
Rouse, Williard Gouldsmith, 8 81-6, Belair,
Md.
Rowland, Arthur John, C 84-6, Baltimore.
Hoyce, Josiah (A.B. Univ. Cal. 75, Ph.D.
78), F 76-8, Instr. and As't Prof. English
Lit. Univ. Cal. 78-2, Instr. and As't Prof.
Philos. Harvard University.
Russell, Thomas, G 82-3, U. S. Signal Ser-
vice, Washington, D. C.
Rytteuberg, Moses Roth (Bait. C.C. 82, A. B.
85), C 82-4, M 84-5, G 85-6, Baltimore.
Sale, Lee (A. B. 81, LL. B. Wash. Univ. 85),
M 7 •.'-» I. G SI, instr. Louisville High Sell.
81-3, Att'y at Law, St. Louis, Mo.
Sale, Samuel (Ph.D Heidelb. 78), G 81-2,
Rabbi, Chicago, III.
Salzniann, Tobias, S 7S-9. Baltimore.
Sams, tonwav Whittle (LL.B. Univ. Md.
84), G S4-6,' Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Sanderson, William Raymond, S 79-80,
Arlington, Md.
Sanford, Edmund Clark (A. B. Univ. Cal.
■ v^-S, Oakland, Cal.
Sanger, Edward B., G 83-4, Student in Ger-
many.
Sato, Shosuki (S. B. Sapporo 80). G 83-1, F
by C 84-6, Sapporo, Japan.
Savage, Alexander Duncan (B. Litt. Univ.
Va. 70, A. M. Yale 77), F 76-9, As't.
Director Metr. Museum of Art, N. Y.
79-81, New York City.
Scaife, Walter Bell (LL. B. Univ. Mich. 80),
G 82-5, U. 8. Legation, Vienna, Austria.
Schaefer, Julius (Bait. C. C) S 84-5, Balti-
more.
Schaeffer, Edward M. (M.D. Univ. Md. 80),
G 83-5, Physician, Baltimore.
Scheib, Edward E. (Ph. D. Leipaic75), G 76-7,
Teacher, Baltimore.
Schimper, Andreas Franz Wilhelm (Ph.D.
Strassb. 78), F 80-1, Privat-docent, Univ.
of Bonn, Prussia.
Schloegel, Charles A.. G 85-6, Minister Lu-
theran Church, Baltimore.
Schneider, Edward Adolph (Ph.D. Freib.
84), G 85-6, Baltimore.
Schorr, Henry Greenfield (West Phila.
Theol. Sem. 82), S 79-80, Clergyman P. E.
church, Washington, D. C.
Schubart, I/mis H. (B. S. N. Y. City Coll.
82), G 82-5, Student of Chem. in Gei many.
Schuennann, William Henry (C. E. Univ.
Cincin. 81), G 82-3, Cincinnati, 0.
Scott, Charles Felton (A. B. Ohio State Univ.
85), G 85-6, Columbus O.
Scott, Robert P., S 82-3. Baltimore.
Scriboer, Henry Sayre (A. B. Princ. 81), G
85-6, Plaintield, N. J.
Scudder^ Jared Waterbury (A. B. Rutgers,
83). G 84-5, Teach<r. Albany, N. Y.
Sedgwick, William Thompson (Ph. B. Yale
77, Ph. D. 81), Ysle Med. Sch. 77-8. Instr.
Yale 78-9, F 79-80, As't 80-1, A in Bio-
logy 81-3, As't Prof. Biology, Mass Inst.
Tech. Boston.
Seelye, William James (A. B. Amh. 79% G
80-1, Instructor, Lawrenceville School,
N. J.
Bewail. Henry (S. B. Wesl. 76. Ph. D. 79), G
1 7»-9, A In Biology, 80-2, Prof.
Physiology, L'niv Mich. Ann Arbor.
Sewalf, William Dunning <B. S. Wore. Free
Inst. 82), G 82-3, Bath, Me.
Sharp, George Matthews (LL. B. Yale 75). G
7, ■*, Attv. at Law, Baltimore.
Shaw, Allien (A. B. Iowa 79, A. M. Iowa
H, 1'h. D. 84). G 81-2. 0 9 s:-4, Editor
"Tribune," Minneapolis, Minn.
Shearer, Thomas l-aidlaw (M. B. and M. of
Surg., Edinb. 82), S 77-8, Physician, Bal-
timore.
Shefloe. Joseph Samuel (A. B. Norw. Luth.
85), G 85-4, Waukon, Iowa.
Sherowell, Joseph Freeland, P M 84-6,
Princ; Frederick, Md.
Shinn, Charles Howard (A.B. 84), 8 82-4,
San Francisco, Cal.
Shippen, Charles Carroll (A.B. Harv.77,M.D.
I 'niv. Md. 73), G 77-8, 80-1, Physician,
Baltimore.
Short, Henry Alford (A. B. Columbia 80,
Ph. D. 85), F Columbia 80-3, F by C 80-5,
As't in Latin, Columbia Coll., New York.
Sieber, John (Halt. C. C, A. B. German-
Wallace Coll. O. 81), G 81-3, Student,
Drew Theol. Seni., Madison, N. J.
Sihier. Christian (Concordia 66, M. D. Univ.
Mich. 71, Ph. D. 81). F 77-9, C Z L 78,79,
As't Biol. 79-S0, Physician, Cleveland,
O.
Sihier, Ernest Gottlieb (Concordia 69, Ph.D.
78), F 76-9, Classical Instructor, New
York City.
Simon, Charles Edmund, M and H S 85-6,
Baltimore.
Simpson, Shadrach (A.B. Trinity, N. C. 73,
A. M. Trinity 75), G 83-5, Prof. Chem.
West Md. Coll., Westminster, Md.
Slack, Henry Richmond, Jr. (Ph.G. Md.
Coll. Pharmacy 85),S 83-5, La Gra nge, Ga.
Slaughter, Moses (A. B. Ind. Asbury 83), G
S3-4, G S 84-5, F 85-6, Brooklyn, Ind.
Sloan, Robert Neal (A. B. Georgetown 85),
G 85-6, Baltimore.
Smedes, Evert Bancker (A. B. Univ. N. C.
83), G 83-4, Raleigh, N. C.
Smith, Arthur Donaldson (A. B. Univ. Pa.
85), G 85-6, Philadelphia, Pa.
Smith, Augustine Jacqueline, S 78-9, Cler-
gyman P. E. Church, Calverton, Md.
Smith, Anthony M., S 77-8, Baltimore.
Smith, Charles Lee (S. B. Wake Forest 84),
G 85-6, Raleigh, N. C.
Smith, George La Tour (C. E. Corn. 74), G
76-7, 83-1, Teacher, State formal Sch.
Baltimore.
Smith, Kirby Williams. (A. B. Univ. Yt.
84), G 85-6, Rutland, Vt.
Smith, Nathan Ryno, P M 82-3, Student of
Mod. Univ. Md. Baltimore.
Smith, Theobald (Ph. B. Corn. 81), G 81-2,
Albany, N.Y.
Smith, William Flood (Bait. C. C. 83), M and
H H S 83-6, Baltimore.
Smyth. Albert Henry (A.B. Phila Central
High Sch. 82), G 85-6, Philadelphia, Pa.
Smyth, Herbert Weir (A.B. Harv. 78, Ph.D.
Gott. 84), Instr. Wms. Coll. 83-5, F by C
85-6, Baltimore.
Southworth, Mase Shepard (Ph.D. Tubin-
gen 73), Prof. Chem. Wms. Coll. 76-82, F
by C 80-1, 85-6, Springfield, Mass.
Spieker, Edward Henry (Bait. C. C. 77. A. B.
79. Ph. D. 82), M 77-9, G S 79-80, F 80-2,
Instr. Greek and Latin, 82-, Baltimore.
Sprigg, Alldin M., C 76-7, M 77-8, Cumber-
land, Md.
Stabler, Augustus (M. D. Howard Univ. 83),
C 76-8, Physician German Hosp. Phila.
83-1, Brighton, Md.
Stamps, Preston (Ph.B. Univ. N.C. 83), G
N-4, Milton, N.C.
Stebbins, Frank Edward (A.B. Amh. 80), G
80-1, Springfield. Mass.
Steel, William Black (A. B Lafay. 79, A.M.
Lafay. 82), G 83-4, Port Deposit, Md.
Steele, Robert Benson (A. B. Univ. Wis. 83),
G 85-6, Lodi, Wis.
Steele, Samuel Tagart, S 83-4, Baltimore.
Steiguer, George E. de (A. B. Ohio Univ.
84;, G 84-5, Athens. O.
Stein, Michael Daniel, S 83-5, M 85-6, Oak-
land, Cal.
Steiner, Hugo (Bait. C. C, A. B. 85), M 82-5,
G 85-6, Baltimore.
Stephenson, Wiley Roy, C and M 76-7,
Stephenson's Depot, Va.
Sternberg. ( leorge M. (M. D. Phys. and Surg.
N. Y. 60), Surgeon U. S. A., F by C 80-1,
84^, Baltimore.
Stetson, Carlton Beecher (A. B. Colby 81,
A. M. Colby 85), G 85-6, West Sumner, Me.
Steuart, Arthur (Ball. C. C, LL.B. Univ.
Md. 80), S 76-8, Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Stevens, Lewis Tebbetts (Bait. C. C, A. B.
82), M 79-82, G S.82-3, F 83-4, Student,
Harvard Med. Sch. Boston, Mass. .
Stevens, Morris Putnam (Bait. C.C.),S 84-6,
Baltimore.
Sti.kney. Charles Dickinson, Jr., S 81-2,
New Bedford, Ma-s.
Stokes, George Clement, Jr. (A. B. 84), M
81-4, G 84-5, Student of Law, Univ. Md.,
Govanstown, Md.
Stokes, Henry Newlin (S. B. Haverf. 78,
Ph. D. 84), G 78-80, G 8 80-81, F 81-3, F
by C 83-4, Student of Cbem. in Munich,
Germany.
Stoller, James (A. B. Union 84), G 84-5,
Johnstown. N. Y.
Stout, James Edloe (Univ. Va. 69), G 82-4,
Louisa Co. Va.
Stow, Audley Hart (Bait. C. C), P M 83-6,
Baltimore.
Btrattc-n, William Edgar (Bait. C. C, A. B.
83), P M 80-2, M 82-3, Student, Harv.
Med. Sch. Boston, Mass.
Straus. Irvin .1., 1' M 84-5, S 85-6, Baltimore.
Strlcklen.Wiltz Ravmond (Bait. C. C.76, A.B.
80),C 76-7, M 77-80. Minister M.E. Church,
Baltimore.
Stringham, Washington Irving (A. B, Harv.
77, Ph. D. 80), G 77-8, F 78-80, Parker F
of Harv. 80-2, Prof. Math. Univ. Cal.
Berkeley.
Strobel, William, S 76-8, Minister Lutheran
Church, Baltimore.
Sudduth, Hugh Thomas (A.M. Muskingum
81). G 82-3, Prof. Rhetoric and Eng. Lit.
Ohio Univ., Athens, O.
Sutro, Alfred Emil, C 79-S0, Baltimore.
Swann, Edward, S 82-3, Student of Law,
Columbia Coll., N. Y.
Swartz, Charles Kephart, S 84-6, Gettys-
burg, Pa.
Sweet, Wright I. (C. E. Union 80), G 82-3,
1 'can's Corners, N. Y.
Swift, Morrison Isaac (A.B. Wins. 79, Ph.D.
85), G 79-80, F 80-2, F by C 82-3, 84-5,
Instr. Philos. Hobart Coll. 82-4, Student
in Berlin, Germany.
Szold, Benjamin, S 76-7, Rabbi, Baltimore.
Taber, Henry (Ph. B. Yale 82), G 82-5, New
York City.
Talmage, James Edward, S 83-4, Teacher,
Provo City, Utah.
Tarleton, Robert Melvin, M 85-6, Baltimore.
Tatlock, Seymour Whitman, S 83-4, Uoosick
Falls, N. Y.
Taylor, Amzi Dodd, S 80-1, Newark, N. J.
Taylor, Frederick Manville (A.B. North-
western, 111.76, A.M. N.W.79),G 84-5, Prof.
History, Albion College, Albion, Mich.
Taylor, Frank Wilhelm, C 85-6, Baltimore.
Taylor, John Phelps (A. B. Yale 62, A. M.
Yale 67), F by C 85-6, Prof. Andover
Theol. Sem., Andover, Mass.
Taylor, Percy Hayes, S 80-3, Student, Har-
vard Coll. Cambridge, Mass.
Taylor, Robert Tunstall, M 85-6, Baltimore.
Taylor, William Dana (B. E. Ala. Agrlc. 81),
G 84-5, Auburn, Ala.
Thach, Charles Coleman (B. E. Ala. Agric.
77), G 80-1, Teacher, Sherman, Texas.
Thayer, William Cleveland (A. B. Columbia
76), G S 81-2, F by C 83-4, Prof. Math.
Hobart Coll. 82-3, Teacher, Jacksonville,
Fla.
Thomas, Bond Valentine (A. B. Haverf. 83),
G83-4, Baltimore.
Thomas, Henry Mifflin (M. D. Univ. Md. 85),
P M 79-84, Physician, Baltimore.
Thomas, Richard Henry (M.D. Univ. Md.
75), G 76-7, 79-80, Physician, Baltimore.
Thomas, William Jones (A. B. 84), C 76-7, M
77-80, S 82-1, Prof. Math. West. Md. Coll.
84-5, *March 9, 1885.
Thompson, Henry Oliver, M 84-6, Baltimore.
Tidball, Charles Martin, S 80-1. Minister,
Presbyterian Church, Greensboro, N. C.
Tidball. William Jared (A.B. Davids. 78), G
79-81, Greensboro, N. C.
Tiernan, Charles B., S 77-8, Att'y at Law,
Baltimore.
Tiffany, Herbert Thorndyke (A. B. 82, LL.B.
Univ. Md. 85), M 79-82, G 82-3, Att'y at
Law, Baltimore.
Tolman, Albert Harris (A.B. Wms. 77), G
82-3, G S 83-4, F 84, Prof. Rhetoric and
English Lit. Rhnon Coll., Ripon, Wis.
Torrison, Isaac Berthinius (A. B. Norw.
Luther 79, Concordia Theol. Sem. 83), G
79-80, Minister, Lutheran Church, Mani-
towoc, Wis.
Trail, Henry (A. B. Harv. 84), G 84-5.
Frederick. Md.
Treadwell, William Hearle (Ph. D. Heidelb.
8o), G 80-1, Instr. in French Yale 82-3,
Minneapolis, Minn.
Trimble, Isaac Ridgway, Jr. (M. D. Univ.
Md. 81), P M 79-82, Physician, Longwood,
Md.
Trower, Thomas Ly ttleton, Jr., C 81-5, *July,
1885.
Trueman, James Starr (A.B. Dalhousie 82),
(, 85-6, St. John, New Brunswick.
Turner, George Mortimer (S. B. Amh. 85),
G 85-6, Skaneateles, N. Y.
Tuska, Benjamin Simon William, C 84-5, M
85-6, New York City.
Tuttle, Albert Henry (B. 8. Pa. State Coll.
68), F by C 82-3, C Z L 83, Prof. Zoology,
Ohio State Univ. Columbus.
Tyler, Joseph Henry (A. B. Brown 77), G
77-9, Baltimore.
Tyson, Isaac, Jr., S 84-5, Baltimore.
Tyson, James W., Jr., S 84-5, Baltimore.
Uhlor, John R. (M. D. Univ. Md. 61), G 76-7,
Physician, Baltimore.
Van Meter, William Kendrlck, (A.B.Ham.
85), S 84-5, New York City.
Van Velzer, Charles Ambrose (S. B. Corn.
76), F 78-81, As't Prof. Math. Univ. Wis.
Madison.
Van Vleek, Edward Burr (A. B. Wesl. 84),
G 85-6, Middletown, Conn.
Van Vleck, Frank (M. E. Stevens Inst. 84),
G 84-5, Instr. Graphics and Kinematics,
Cornell Univ. Ithaca, N. Y.
Van Vorat, Frederick Boyd (A.B. Princ. 75),
F, Princ. 75-6, F 76-7, Att'y at Law, New
York City.
Veblen, Andrew Anderson (A.B. Carletou
77, A. M. Carleton 80), G 81-3, As't Prof.
Math. State Univ., Iowa City, Iowa.
Veblen, Thorstein Bunde (A. B. Carleton SO),
G 81-2, Northfield, Minn.
Veneziani, Carlo (Ph. D. Heidelb. 83), G 84-5,
Teacher, Boston, Mass.
Vincent, John Martin (A. B. Oberlin 83),
G 85-6, Elyria, O.
Voorhees, Herman (C. E. Renss. Polyt. Inst.
73), G 78-9, F 79, *October 14, 1879.
Waller, Charles De Vane (A. B. Erskine 83).
( ; B8-4, Selma, Ala.
Wallis, Samuel (A. B. Georgetown, 84),
G 84-6, New Orleans, La.
W7altemejer, John Tassey, P M 83-4, Atchi-
son, Kan.
Walz, William Ferdinand (Bait. C. C. 81,
A. B. 84), S 81-4, M 81, G 84-6. Baltimore.
Warfleld, Mactier (A. B. 81, M. D. Univ. Md,
84). C 70-7, M 77-81, G 81-2, Physician,
Baltimore.
Warner, Amos Griswold (B. L. Univ. Neb,
85), G 85-6, Roca, Neb.
Warner, Anthony Kimniel (Bait. C. C, M.
D. Univ. Md. 85), S 83-4, Physician, Balti-
more.
WTarner, Clarence Duane (B. S. Mass. Agrio.
81), G 83-4. Granby, Mass.
Warren, Frederick Morris (A. B. Amh. 80),
G 83-4, Durham. Me.
Warren, Henry Clarke (A. B. Harv. 79), G
79-84. Boston, Miss.
Warren, Horatio Alanson, C 85-6, Collins-
ville, Conn.
Watson, Edward Lionel (Bait. C. C. 79), S
79-80, Minister M. E. Church, Baltimore.
Webb, William Rollins (A. M. Trinity 78), G
82-3, Clergyman P. E. Church, Baltimore,
Webster, Albert Lowry (Ph.B. Y'ale 79),
Topographer U. S. Geol. Surv. 80-3, F by
C 83-4, Sanitary Engineer, West New
Brighton, Stateu Island.
Weech, Robert William Henrv (Bait. C.C.),
C84-6, Baltimore.
Weidner, Revere F. (A. B. Muhlenberg 69,
A.M. Muhlb. 72), G 77-8, Minister Luth-
eran Church, Phillipsburg, N. J.
Wells, Benjamin Willis (A. B. Harv. 77,
Ph. D. Harv. 80), F 81, Instr. in English,
Friends' School, Providence. R. I.
Wheeler, Arthur Wilson (A. B. Amh. 79),
G 79-80, F 80-1, 'Jan. 6, 1881.
Wheeler, John Henry (A. B. Harv. 71. A.M.
Harv. 75, Ph. D. Bonn 79), F 76-7, F
and Tutor in Latin, Harvard 77-81, Prof.
Latin, Bowdoin 81-2, Prof. Greek, Univ.
Va.
Whetham, Charles (A. B. Toronto 84, A. M.
Toronto 85), F 85-6, Dundas.Ont.
Whicher, George Meason (A. B. Iowa 82), G
84-5, Prof. Greek, Hastings Coll., Hast-
ings, Neb.
White, Edward Lucas, M and H H S 84-6, ■
Baltimore.
White, John, Jr., S 84-5, C 85-6, Poolesville,
Md.
Whitelock. George (LL.B. Univ. Md.), S 76-8,
Att'y at Law, Baltimore.
Whiting, Guy Fairfax (M.D. Univ. Md.78),
G 79-81, Physician, Baltimore.
Whitman. Charles Otis (A. B. Bowd. 68,
A. M. Bowd. 71, Ph. D. Leips. 78), F 79,
Prof. Zool. Univ. Tokio 79-81, As't in Zool.
Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, Mass.
Whitman, Frank Perkins (A. B. Brown 74),
G 79-80, Prof, of Physics, Renss. Polytech.
Inst., Troy. N. Y'.
Whitney, MiltOD, Jr., S 79-80, Waterbury,
Md. '
Whitridge, James Barney, S 78-9, Baltimore.
Wiegand, Henry Hazlehurst (Bait. C. C, A.
B. 85), S 80-5, M 85, G 85-6, Baltimore.
Wiesenfeld, Bernard (Bait. C. C. 74), M 84-6,
Baltimore.
Wiggins, Benjamin Lawton (A. B. Univ. of
South 80, A. M. Univ. of South 82). F by
C 82-4, Prof. Anc. Lang., Univ. of the
South, Sewanee, Tenn.
Wightman, Arthur Clarence (A. B. Wof-
ford 79), G 84-6, Marion, S. C.
Wightman, John Roaf (A. B. Toronto 71,
A. M. Toronto 72), G S 85-6, Toronto, Ont.
Willuirn, B. R., S 78-9, Clergyman Meth.
Church, Baltimore.
Wilcox, Alexander Martin (A. B. Yale 77,
I'h. D. Yale 80), Amer. School of Archae-
ology, Athens 82-4, F by C 84-5, Prof.
Greek, Univ. of Kansas, Lawrence.
Wilhelm, Lewis Webb (Bait. ('. ('. 71, A.B.
80, Ph. D. 84), C 76-7, M 77-80, G 80-1, G S
81-3, F 88-4, F by C 84-5, Baltimore.
Wilkens, Frederick Henry (A. B. 81), M 82-4,
Student in Berlin, Germany.
Williams, Frederick Rodgers (A. B. Princ.
82, LL. B. Univ. Md. 85), G 82-3, Att'y
at Law, Belair, Md.
Williams, George Huntington (A.B. Amh.
78, I'h. I). Heidelb. 82), F by C 82-3, A
83-5, A Prof. Mineralogy 85-, Baltimore.
Williams, Henry Winslow (A.B. 83, LL.B.
Univ. Md. 85), C 81-2, M 82-3, Att'y at
Law, Baltimore.
April, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
79
Williams, John Whltridge (Bait. C. C), M
84-6, Baltimore.
William*, Laugdon, C 8:1-4, M 84-6, Boston,
Mass.
Williams, Lucius Elijah (A. B. Mercer 85),
G 85-6, Macon, Ga.
Williams, Nathan Winslow (Bait. C. C,
LL.B. Columbia 83), S 79-80, Att'y at Law,
Baltimore.
Williams, William Holme (A. B. Wis. 76), G
82-3, F by C 83-4, As't Prof, of Greek,
Univ. of Wisconsin, Madison.
Williams, William Klapp, C 88-), M 84-6,
Boston, Mass.
Willis, Edward William (Bait. C.C. 84), P M
84-6, Baltimore.
Willoughby, William Franklin, C and M
85-6, II II S 85-6, Alexandria, Va.
Willoughby, Westel Woodbury, C and M
85-6, II II S 85-6. Alexandria, Va.
Wilson, Edmund Beecher (Ph. B. Yale 78,
Ph. D. 81), As't in Zool. Yale 77-9, F 79-
81, C Z L 79, 80, 81, 82, As't 81-2, Lect.
Wins. Coll. 83-4, Student at Dohrn's Lab.
Naples 84-5, A Prof, of Biology, Bryn
Mawr Coll., Bryn Mawr, Pa.
Wilson, Henry Merryman, Jr. (M. D. Univ.
Md. 82), C 79-80, Physician, Baltimore.
Wilson, Henry Van Peters (Bait. C. C, A. B.
83), M 80-3, C Z L 83, G 83-4, G S 85-6,
Baltimore.
Wilson, Woodrow (A. B. Princ. 79, A. M.
Princ. 82), G 83-4. F 84-5, A in History,
Bryn Mawr Coll., Bryn Mawr, Pa.
Wiltshire, James G. (II. D. Univ. Md. 69),
G 76-9, Physician, Baltimore.
Wingert, Henry Firey, C 83-4, M 84-6,
Hagerstown, Md.
Winslow, John Randolph, P M 83-4, C 84-5,
M 85-6, Baltimore.
Witzenbacher, William John (A. B. 83), C
81-2, M 82-3, Instr. McDonogh School,
McDonogh, Md.
Wood, Augustus (A. B. Brown 78), G 82-3,
New Bedford, Mass.
Wood, Julian (Ph. B. Univ. N. C. 84), G 84-6,
Edenton, N. C.
Wood, Peter Bryson (M. D. Nat'l Med. Coll.
83), P M 78-80, Physician, Baltimore.
Woodhull, John Francis (A. B. Yale 80), G
85-6, Inst. Nat. Sci., State Norm. Sch.,
New Paltz N. Y.
Woods, Allan Chase, M and H H S 83-6,
Baltimore.
Woods, Hiram, Jr. (A. B. Princ. 79, M. D.
Univ. Md. 82), G 79-80, Physician, Balti-
more.
Woodward, Eichard H., S 84-5, Saluda, Va.
Worthington, Daniel Dulany (A. B. Md.
Agric, M.D. Univ. Md. 75), G 76-7,
* November, 1882.
Worthington, James Cheston pf.D. Univ.
Md.), G 80-1, Physician, U. S. Marine
Hosp. Service.
Worthington, Thomas Kimber ( A.B. Haverf.
83), G 83-6, Baltimore.
Wright, Charles Baker (A. B. Buchtel 80),
G 82-4, G S 84-5, F 85, Prof. English Lit.
and Rhetoric, Univ. Yt., Middlebury.
Wright, James Paul (B. D. Drew Theol. 71),
( . 77-8, M i n istcr M. E. Church, Baltimore.
Wylle, Douglas Miller (Halt. C.C), S 83-4,
Baltimore.
Wylie, Hamilton Boyd (M.D. Phys. and
Surg. Bait. 77 and Bellevue, N. Y. 78), G
78-9, 80»1, Physician, Baltimore.
Yager, Arthur (A. B. Georgetown, Ky. 79,
Ph. D. 84), G 82-3, G S 83-4, Prof. His-
tory, Georgetown Coll., Ky.
Yonce, Glosbrenner Victor (A.B. Roanoke
77, A. M.. Roanoke 82), G 82-5, Teacher,
Lutherville, Md.
Young, Abram Van Epps (Ph. B. Mich. 75),
As% Univ. Mich. 75-7, G 77-8. 80-1, F 78-
80, As't in Chcm. Harvard 84-5, Prof.
Chemistry, Northwestern Univ., Evans-
ton, 111.
Young, Frederick George, C 84-5, M 85-6,
Beaver Dam, Wis.
Zweizig, John Henry (A.B. Muhlenberg
82), G 82-5, Reading, Pa.
SUMMARY OF THE FOREGOING
LIST OF NAMES.
Total number enrolled 923
Deceased 19
Living 904
Fellows by Courtesy 52
Fellows 138
Graduate Students i 615
Matriculates and Candidates for Ma-
triculation 225
Preliminary Medical Students 29
Special Students 161
Degrees.
Graduates of the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity :
Bachelors of Arts 90
Doctors of Philosophy 69
Of the Graduate Students there have
been admitted to degrees elsewhere,
Bachelors of Arts 297
Bachelors of Science 53
Bachelors of Philosophy 27
Bachelors of Laws 31
Bachelors of Literature 9
Bachelors of Divinity 7
Bachelors of Engineering 2
Masters of Arts 86
Masters of Science 5
Masters of Literature. 1
Doctors of Philosophy 36
Doctors of Medicine 95
Doctors of Science 2
Civil Engineers 16
Mining Engineers 6
Occupations.
Physicians 80
Attorneys 34
.Ministers 88
Journalists S
Teachers :
in Colleges and Universities 136
in High Schools and Aca-
demies 15
in other schools 25
176
Engaged in scientific pursuits, but
not teaching 20
Students elsewhere 55
Now enrolled as students of this
institution 314
Geographical Distribution
of Students.
The students enrolled above have come
from the following States and countries :
Maryland (Baltimore 330) 419
New York 69
Massachusetts 46
Pennsylvania 38
Ohio 31
Virginia. 26
North Carolina 24
New Jersey 19
Kentucky 18
District of Columbia 15
Iowa 15
Illinois 14
Wisconsin 14
South Carolina 14
Connecticut 11
Indiana 11
Nebraska 10
California 10
Mhhigan 9
Georgia 8
Alabama 8
Louisiana 7
Maine 7
Vermont 6
Minnesota 6
Tennessee 5
Missouri „ 4
New Hampshire 4
Kansas 3
Colorado 8
Florida 2
Rhode Island 2
U. S. Navy (State not given) 2
U. S. Army (State not given)
West Virginia
Delaware
Utah.
Dakota
Canada
Germany
Japan
Russia
France
Italy
England
China
Cuba
Switzerland
India
Nova Scotia
New Brunswick..
.... 14
»
... 5
3
2
2
Enrolment, 1876-1886.
Years.
Teachers.
Total
Enrolled
Students.
Graduate
Students,
including
Fellows.
Matricu-
lates.
Special
Students.
Degrees Conferred.
A.B.
Ph.D.
1876-77..
1877-78..
1878-79..
1879-80..
1880-81..
1881-82..
1882-83..
1883-84..
1884-85..
1885-86..
29'
34 '
25
33
39
43
41
49
52
49
89
104
123
159
176
175
204
249
290
314
54
58
63
79
102
99
125
159
174
184
12
24
25
32
37
45
49
53
69
96
23
22
35
48
37
31
30
37
47
34
3
16
12
15
10
23
9
4
6
5 '
9
9
6
15
13
1 In the first two years the number of non-resident lecturers was much larger than it has been since.
HISTORICAL STATEMENT.
The Johns Hopkins University was founded by the munificence of
a citizen of Baltimore, Johns Hopkins, who bequeathed the most of his
large estate for the establishment of a University and a Hospital. The
foundation of the University is a capital, in land and stocks, estimated in
value at more than $3,000,000; the capital of the Hospital is not less in
amount.
Incorporation of the Johns Hopkins University.
Organization of the Board of Trustees.
Death of the Founder [born May 19, 1794].
First Business Meeting of Trustees.
Election of a President of the University.
Inauguration of the President.
Instruction of Students began.
Celebration of the Tenth Anniversary.
1867, August 24.
1870, June 13.
1873, December 24.
1874, February 6.
1874, December 30.
1876, February 22.
1876, October 3.
1886, April 26.
CALENDAR, 1886-87.
The first Examinations for Admission and Matriculation begin Wednesday,
June 9, 1886, and continue through the week.
The ceremony of conferring Degrees is appointed for Monday, June 14,
1886, at 6 p. m.
The present academic year closes Tuesday, June 15, 1886.
The eleventh academic year begins on Friday, October 1, 1886, and con-
tinues till June 15, 1887.
The autumn Examinations for Admission will begin Friday, October 1, at
9 a. m.
There will be a Christmas Recess, beginning on Friday, December 24, and
ending on Monday, January 3; — also a Spring Recess, beginning on
Friday, April 8.
80
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
[No. 48.
SEAL
OF THE
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
By the formal action of the Board of Trustees, Dec. 7, 1885,
an official seal (of which the ahove diagram is a fac-simile) was
adopted, and at a subsequent meeting, April 5, 1886, the following
regulations were prescribed by the same authority, with respect
to the guardianship of the seal and its use.
Resolved, That the fac-simile of the seal may be printed upon
the official reports and registers and other papers proceeding from
the Trustees, upon the journals which receive financial support
frem the University, upon literary and scientific publications
proceeding from the University which have received the appro-
bation of the Academic Council, and upon a book plate to be
inserted in books belonging to the University library ; and that
the use of the fac-simile without the authority of the Trustees
be forbidden.
In the preparation of the design the authorities were particularly
indebted to Stephen Tucker, Esq., of London, Somerset Herald,
who revised and arranged the suggestions transmitted to him from
Baltimore by Clayton C. Hall, Esq., to whom the University also
owes its grateful acknowledgments, for many kind services.
In the design for the seal symbols of learning have been placed
in combination with the well-known Arms of Maryland. The
arms of the State are those of Lord Baltimore's family which
became a part of the Great Seal of Maryland at an early period
in the history of the colony.
The emblems adopted to symbolize the University are open
books and a terrestrial globe — indicative of literary and scientific
studies. These have been placed upon an azure background and
occupy the upper portion of the shield, above the name of the
State. There is thus presented (in the words of the Somerset
Herald,) " an heraldic picture of a University situated in the State
founded by Lord Baltimore."
The motto of the University Veritas Vos Libeeabit (which
has been in use since its organization) is taken from the Gospel
of St. John viii. 32. The shield is hung from a bough of oak.
The legend upon the border gives the corporate name and place
of the foundation, and the date when instructions were begun, viz. :
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, 1876.
GREAT SEAL OF MARYLAND.
The following account of the Great Seal of Maryland has been
prepared by the librarian of the University, Dr. Win. Hand
Browne, editor of the Maryland Archives.
The design of the present Great Seal of Maryland was devised
by Cecilius, the first Proprietary, in 1649, to replace an earlier
seal which had disappeared in what is called " Ingle's rebellion "
in 1644. The differences from the first seal were probably intro-
duced as a safeguard against a fraudulent use of the latter, in
case it happened to be in bad hands. The commission which
accompanied the new seal, contains a minute description of the
devices on both sides.
On one side this seal bore the effigy of Baltimore himself in
full armor, on horseback, surrounded by the legend — " Caecilius
absolutus dominus Terr.£; Marine et Avaloni;e Baro de
Baltimore." This part of the seal was personal, and liable,
of course, to change with each Proprietary.
On the other side it bore the Calvert arms, heraldically
described as " paly of six, or and sable, a bend dexter counter-
changed," quartered with the Crossland arms, which Baltimore
derived from his grandmother, Alicia Crossland, and which are
blazoned, " quarterly, argent and gules, a cross flory counter-
changed."
On the shield was placed a Palatine's cap, or coronet, signifying
the Palatinate jurisdiction of the Proprietary, and above this
a helmet bearing the Calvert crest, a ducal crown with two half
bannerets, one gold, the other black.
The Calvert supporters were two leopards ; but for the Mary-
land seal Baltimore adopted a farmer and fisherman as emblems
of the chief industries of the Province. On a scroll beneath was
the motto of the family, "Fatti maschij parole femine;"
and around the whole ran a legend taken from the fifth Psalm :
"SCUTO BONiE VOLUNTATIS TU^ CORONASTI NOS."
All this part of the seal was dynastic, representing the Pro-
prietary government ; and when the State took the government
into her own hands, she retained the beautiful and significant
historical symbol as the emblem of her sovereignty.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., No. 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 262 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore. Subscription, $1.00 a year.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 49.] BALTIMORE, MAY, 1886. [Price, 10 Cents.
CONTENTS. page
STANDING ANNOUNCEMENTS, 82
MORPHOLOGICAL NOTES:
The Stomatopoda of the "Challenger" Collection. By W. K. Brooks, .........83
Observations on the Embryology of Insects and Arachnids. By A. T. Bruce, ........85
Notes on the Embryology of the Gasteropods. By J. P. McMurrich, .........85
The Origin of Metagenesis among the Hydra-Medusae. By W. K. Brooks, .........86
Session of Marine Laboratory for 1886: Announcement, ............88
REPORTS OF RECENT LECTURES AND ADDRESSES :
On the Methods of Archaeological Research in America. By F. W. Putnam, ........89
On Recent Explorations in Babylonia. By W. Hayes Ward, ...........89
Babylonian and Assyrian Archaeology. By A. L. Frothingham, Jr., .........90
The First "Tabular View" of Harvard College. By H. B. Adams, 91
REPORTS OF RECENT COMMUNICATIONS TO THE UNITERSITY SOCIETIES :
The Correlation of v and m in the Veda. By M. Bloomfield, ..........93
The Origin and Settlement of the Pennsylvania Germans. By M. D. Learned, ........93
The Dialects of North Greece. By H. W. Smyth, 94
The Malarial "Germ" of Laveran. By G. M. Sternberg1, ...........95
PUBLICATION AGENCY: NOTICE AS TO RECENT PUBLICATIONS:
Photograph of Normal Solar Spectrum, .-........-.--95
Phototypes of the Syrian Antilegomena Epistles, ....... .-.--95
LIST OF BOOKS AND PAPERS WRITTEN BY PROFESSOR C. D. MORRIS, 96
PROCEEDINGS OF UNIVERSITY SOCIETIES :
Scientific Association, ---.......------96
Philogical Association, - - ...'. . . . . - - - - - - - 96
Historical and Political Science Association, .......-.-.-.96
Mathematical Society, -.-......-.-.--.96
Baltimore Naturalists' Field Club, ---.--.----.---96
RECENT ACCESSIONS TO THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY, 97
CURRENT INFORMATION:
The New Physical Laboratory, ...........--■•99
Death of Professor Morris: Resolutions of the Philological Association, .........99
Recent Appointments, ................99
Lectures on Morphology, ...... ....-.-.•■99
Tenth Anniversary, -.......----••••* 100
Dates of Examinations, ................ 100
STANDING ANNOUNCEMENTS.
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
Opened for Instruction in 1876.
The Johns Hopkins University was founded
by the munificence of a citizen of Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins, who bequeathed the most of his
large estate for the establishment of a Univer-
sity and a Hospital. It was intended that these
institutions should cooperate in the promotion of
medical education. The Hospital buildings are
approaching completion.
The foundation of the University is a capital,
in land and stocks, estimated in value at more
than $3,000, 000; the capital of the Hospital is
not less in amount.
The University was incorporated under the laws
of the State of Maryland, August 24, 1867.
Power to confer degrees was granted by the
Legislature in 1876.
Suitable buildings have been provided in Bal-
timore at the corner of Howard and Little Ross
Sts^ and are furnished with the necessary appa-
ratus and books.
Academic Staff.
Daniel C. Oilman, ll. d., President of the University.
J. J. Sylvester, F. R. &., D. c L., Professor (Emeritus) of
Mathematics.
Basil L. Gildersleeve, ph. d., ll. d., Professor of Greek.
G. Stanley Hall, ph. d., Professor of Psychology and Peda-
gogies.
Paul Haupt, ph. d., Professor of the Shemitic Languages.
H. Newell Martin, db. sci, A. M., f.b. s., Professor of Biol-
ogy and Director of the Biological Laboratory.
Simon Nkwcomb, ll. d., Professor of Mathematics and As-
tronomy.
Iea Remsen, m . D.,*PH. D.. Professor of Chemistry and Direc-
tor of ts\e Chemical Laboratory.
Henry A. Rowland, PH.D., Professor of Physics and Direc-
tor of the Physical Laboratory.
William H. Welch, m. d., Professor of Pathology.
John S. Billings, m. d., Lecturer on Hygiene.
Lbonce Rabillon, bach, rs lett., Lecturer on French Lit-
erature.
Herbert B. Adams, ph. d., Associate Professor of History.
Maurice Bloomfield, ph. d., Associate Professor of Sanskrit.
William K. Brooks, ph. d.,- Associate Professor of Morphol-
ogy and Director of the Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory.
Thomas Craig, ph. d., Associate Professor of Applied Mathe-
matics.'
A. Mabshall Elliott, a. m., Associate Professor of Romance
Languages.
George Henby Emmott, a.m., Associate Professor (elect) of
Logic and Ethics, and Lecturer on Roman Law.
Caspar Rene Gbegory.ph. d., Associate Professor of New
Testament Greek, and Palaeography.
Harmon N. Morse, ph. p., Associate Professor of Chemistry
and Sub-Director of the Chemical Laboratory.
William E. Story, ph. d., Associate Professor of Mathematics.
Minton Warren, ph. d.. Associate Professor of Latin.
George H. Williams, ph. d., Associate Professor of Mine-
ralogy. . ...
Henry Wood, PH.D., Associate Professor of German.
William Hand Browne, m. d., Librarian and Associate in
English.
William T. Councilman, m. d., Associate in Pathology.
Henry H. .Donaldson, ph. p., Associate in Psychology.
Louis Duncan, ph. d., Associate (elect) in Electricity.
Richard T. Ely, ph. d., Associate in Political Economy.
Fabian Franklin, ph. d., Associate in Mathematics.
Edward M. II art well, m.d., ph.d.. Associate in Physical
Training and Director of the Gymnasium.
William H. Howell, ph. d., Associate in Biology.
J. Franklin Jameson, ph.d,, Associate in History.
Arthur I.. Kimball, ph. d., Associate in Physics.
Henry A. Todd, ph.d., Associate in Romance Languages.
Philip R. Uhler, Associate in Natural History,
James W. Bright, ph. d., Instructor in English.
Julius Goebel, ph. d., Instructor in German.
George Hempl, a. b., Assistant in German.
J. P. McMl-bbich, eh. d.. Instructor in. Osteology, etc.
Charles A. Perkins, ph. dv Assistant in Physics.
Edmund Renolf, ph. d.. Assistant in Chemistry.
Edward H. Spif.kkr, ph. d.; Instructor in Latin and Greek.
Hugh Newell, Instructor in Drawing.
Charles L. Woodworth, Jr., Instructor in Ehculion.
82
PLAN OF THE CIRCULARS.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are
published at convenient intervals during the
academic year for the purpose of communicating
intelligence to the various members of the Univer-
sity in respect to work which is here in progress,
as well as for the purpose of promulgating offi-
cial announcements from the governing and
teaching bodies. During the current academic
year, eight circulars will be issued in successive
months, to be followed at the close of the year by
an index.
Although these circulars are designed for the
members of the University, they have frequently
been called for by institutions and libraries at a
distance, and also by individuals who are inter-
ested in the literary and scientific activity of
this University. Subscriptions and exchanges
are therefore received.
TERMS OF SUBSCRIPTION.
For the current year, 1885-6, $1.
For the year 1884-5, (134 pp. in cloth covers),
$1.50.
For the year 1883-4, (140 pp. in cloth covers),
$1.50.
For the year 1882-3, (156 pp. in cloth covers), $3.
Forthe years 1879-82,(250pp. in cloth covers), $5.
Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the
Annual Register and Report of the University.
All subscriptions should be addressed to the
" Publication Agency of the Johns Hopkins
University."
Communications for the Circulars should be
sent in prior to the first day of the month in which
they are expected to appear.
PUBLIC LECTURES.
Notice in Respect to the Admission of the Public.
In answer to inquiries, and in correction of
some current misapprehensions, the following
statements are made in respect to the public
lectures given in the Johns Hopkins University.
These courses are academic lectures, designed
primarily for the members of the University, and
supplementary to the regular class-room work of
the students.
As the members of the University rarely re-
quire the entire room, the Trustees have taken
great pleasure in inviting other persons, not con-
nected with the University, to attend.
As these lectures are not intended for popular
entertainment, but for the instruction of students,
those persons first receive tickets, in most cases,
who are known to be especially interested in a
particular course, — ladies as well as gentlemen.
There is no general course ticket issued. Applica-
tions should state specifically the course for which
tickets are desired. Programmes and other cur-
rent information pertinent to university work may
be found in the University Circulars, sent to sub-
scribers, on the payment of one dollar per annum,
by the Publication Agency of the University.
. The usage of giving personal notification has
been discontinued, and those therefore who are
interested in such announcements should hereafter
consult the Circulars.
It will save much delay if applications for
tickets and inquiries on these and other routine
matters are addressed not to individuals but to the
Johns Hopkins University, by postal card, and
answers will be promptly returned by mail. Per-
sonal applications consume time needlessly.
BQfThe lectures begin at 5 o'clock punctually.
The doors of the hall are opened at fifteen minutes
before 5, and the lectures do not exceed an hour in
the delivery.
PUBLICATIONS ISSUED UNDER THE
AUSPICES OF THE UNIVERSITY.
I. American Journal of Mathematics.
The publication of this journal commenced in
1878, under the editorial direction of Professor
Sylvester, and is now conducted by Professor
Simon Newcomb as Editor, and Dr. T. Craig as
Associate Editor. Seven volumes of about 400
pages each have been issued, and the eighth is in
progress. It appears quarterly, in the quarto
form. Subscription $5 per year. Single numbeis
$1.50.
II. American Chemical Journal.
This journal was commenced in 1879, with
Professor Remsen as editor. Seven volumes of
about 450 pages each have been issued, and the
eighth is in progress. It appears bi-monthly.
Subscription $3 per year. Single numbers 50 cts.
III. American Journal of Philology.
The publication of this journal commenced in
1880, under the editorial direction of Professor
Gildersleeve. Six volumes of about 570 pages
each have been issued, and the seventh is in pro-
gress. It appears four times yearly. Subscrip-
tion $3 per volume. Single numbers $1.00.
IV. Studies from the Biological
Laboratory.
[Including the C/iesapeake Zoological Laboratory.']
The publication of these papers commenced in
1879, under the direction of Professor Martin,
with the assistance of Dr. W. K. Brooks. Two
volumes of about 500 pages, octavo, and 40 plates
each, have been issued, and the third is in progress.
Subscription $5 per volume.
V. Studies In Historical and Political
Science.
The publication of these papers was begun in
1882, under the editorial direction of Dr. H. B.
Adams. A first series of 470 pages, a second of
630, and a third of 595 pages are now completed
and a fourth series is in progress. Subscription $3
per volume.
The University Circulars. $1 per year.
The Annual Report presented by the Presi-
dent to the Board of Trustees reviewing the opera-
tions of the University during the academic year.
The Annual Register giving the list of offi-
cers and students and stating the regulations of
the University. Published at the close of the
academic year.
The University Circulars, Annual Report, and
Annual Register will be sent by mail for one
dollar per annum.
Rowland's Photograph of the Normal
Solar Spectrum. Set of seven plates, unmounted,
$10; mounted, $12. Single plates, unmounted, $2;
mounted, $2.25. 1886.
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriac
MS. with the Antilegomena Epistles. I. H.
Hall, Editor. Only 250 numbered copies have
been issued. $3. 1886.
Studies in Logic. By members of the Johns
Hopkins University. C. S. Peirce, Editor. (Bos-
ton : Little, Brown & Co.) 1883. 123 pp., 12o. $2.
The Development and Propagation of the
Oyster in Maryland. By W. K. Brooks. 1884.
193 pp., 4o. 1 3 plates and 3 maps. $5.
On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat.
By H. A. Rowland. 1880. 127 pp., 8o. $1.50.
New Testament Autographs, liy J. Rendel
Harris. 1882. 54 pp., 8o. 4 plates. 50 cents.
Sir William Thomson's Lectures on Mo-
lecular Dynamics. 1884. 370 pp., 4o. $5.00.
All communications in respect to publications
should be addressed to the " Publication Agency
of the Johns Hopkins University," Baltimore,
Maryland.
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
83
MORPHOLOGICAL NOTES.
The Stomatopoda of the "Challenger" Collection.
By W. K. Brooks.
The "Challenger" collection of Stomatopoda was placed in my hands in
March, 1883, with the understanding that my report upon it was to be
prepared within two years; but sickness and the pressure of other work
compelled me to ask for a longer time, and the report, with sixteen quarto
plates, containing about one hundred and twenty original drawings, has
just appeared in the " Zoology of the Voyage of II. M. S. Challenger,"
under the title, " Report on the Stomatopoda collected by H. M. S. Chal-
lenger during the years 1873-76." 130 pp. 4to.
The collection of adults is a small one, consisting of only fifteen species,
but eight of them are new, and two of the others have been very inade-
quately described from single specimens. The importance of the collec-
tion must not, however, be estimated by its size, for it throws light upon
many interesting problems, and furnishes the material for a more exhaus-
tive discussion of the phylogenetic relationship and natural classification
of the various genera and species than has been possible hitherto.
The collection of pelagic Stomatopod larvae is very rich, and it has
yielded the material for tracing the history of several of the larval types,
and also for establishing, in every genus except two, the connection between
the adults and their proper larvae.
The beautiful, transparent, glass-like pelagic larvae of the Stomatopoda
are familiar to all naturalists who have had an opportunity to study pelagic
life, and none of the animals which are captured at the surface in the tow-
net surpass them in interest to the student, or in beauty and grace. Their
perfect transparency, which allows their complicated structure to be studied
in the living animal, their great size and rapacity, the graceful beauty of
their constant and rapid movements, and the character of the problems
which they present for solution, combine to fascinate the naturalist ; but
they are, unfortunately, as difficult to study as they are interesting, and
notwithstanding their great abundance and variety, only two or three of
them have been traced to their adult forms.
As no one has succeeded in rearing them from the egg, and as they do
not thrive in confinement, the only way to trace the life history of the
Stomatopoda is by the comparison of the series of larvae which are col-
lected in mid-ocean, and this is attended with peculiar difficulties, for the
larval forms which have been described are more numerous than the known
species of adults, and many of them unquestionably belong to species the
adult stages of which have never been discovered.
The larval life is long, for the larvae grow very slowly, and as they are
as independent and as much exposed to changes in their environment and
to the struggle for existence as the adults, they have undergone secondary
modifications which have no reference to the life of the adult, and are
therefore unrepresented in the adult organism. The larvae actually differ
from each other more than the adults do, thus reversing the general rule
that larvae are less specialized and therefore exhibit clearer evidences of
genetic relationship than mature animals. The problem which they pre-
sent is similar to, but more difficult than that presented by the Hydro-
Medusae, for young medusae can be reared from hydroids in aquaria, and
it is not difficult to rear young hydroids from the eggs of medusae, but the
life history of the Stomatopoda must be traced from the internal and indi-
rect evidence furnished by comparison. The larvae may be arranged in
genera and species, but unfortunately their generic and specific character-
istics are quite different from those upon which the adult genera and species
have been based. Like the adults, they are very widely distributed, and
a gap in the series from the North Atlantic may be filled by a specimen
from Australia or the Sandwich Islands ; while the collection from a single
locality often contains representatives of widely separated species. As they
undergo great changes during their growth and metamorphosis, it is not
easy to select from the rich gatherings brought home by collectors the suc-
cessive stages in the history of a single species, and the attempt to unravel
the tangled thread of the larval history of the Stomatopoda is attended with
very exceptional difficulties. The first step in this direction is to trace the
history of each larval type or genus, by the selection and comparison of
those larvae which are sufficiently alike to indicate that they may possibly
belong in the same series. After a series of larvae has thus been selected
on account of general resemblances, careful measurements of each one,
when reduced to thousandths of the total length, or to some other standard,
and compared with each other, usually give pretty decisive evidence as to
their relationship.
The length of a series of Coronis larvae from the Challenger collection
were found to be as follows, and if the length of No. 1 be multipled by f of
itself, and this by { and so on, we obtain the series given in the second line,
No. 1.
No. 2.
No. 3.
No. 4.
4.16 mm.
4.16
S.29 mm.
8.20
6.49 mm.
6.50
S.13
10.21mm.
10.16
thus showing that these larvae belong to the same species, or to species
which are very closely related, and that stages 1, 2, and 3 are consecutive,
while there is a missing stage between 3 and 4.
After the metamorphosis of each larval type has thus been traced, by
general comparisons, verified by measurements; the next step is to refer
each larval type to its proper adult genus. If comparative anatomy enables
us to trace, from the study of adults, their natural or genealogical classifi-
cation, it must be possible to do the same thing with larvae, and if the
classifications which are thus established are truly natural, that is genea-
logical, there must be a discernible relation between the one derived from
the larvae and the one derived from the adults, for each larva is only an
immature adult, and the genetic history of each adult must be the same as
that of a specific larva, namely its own larva.
In most cases no such comparative classification is necessary, for we are
usually able to trace the young to its adult form, and to use the whole life-
history as a basis for classification; in most cases, too, even if it were
necessary, it would be extremely difficult, on account of the embryonic or
generalized character of young animals, and the absence of conspicuous
specific differences, but it fortunately happens that in the Stomatopoda,
where we are compelled to resort to this or some other indirect method of
discovering what larva pertains to what adult, it is much more practicable
than usual, owing to the high specialization and great diversity of the
larvae, which may therefore be treated exactly as if they were adults.
From the comparative study of the larvae, I have obtained the classifica-
tion which is given in the following diagram.
Mima. Lysioerichthus with short spines.
Lysioerichthxu with long spines.
Erichlhalima. Pseuderichthnu. Gontrichihut.
Unknown ErichthoidirwMYe larva.
The provisional genus Gonerichthus including those Erichthi in which
the carapace is deep, but not folded inwards ventrally, the hind body
convex, the primary spines of the telson long, few or no secondary spines
between the sub-median and intermediate primary spines, the outer spine
of the basal prolongation of the uropod much longer than the inner, and
no marginal spines on the edge of the long slender dactylus ; the provisional
generic name Pseuderichthus including these Erichthi in which the carapace
is deep and slightly infolded, the hind body convex, the dactylus of the
raptorial claw sometimes armed, the sub-median spines of the telson long
with movable spines at their tips, and one or two secondary spinules between
the sub-median and intermediate ; the provisional genus Erichthalima has
the carapace deep, its lateral edges infolded and serrated, the hind body
flat, the telson wider than long, numerous secondary spines on the telson,
and the dactylus armed with several teeth ; the provisional genus Lysio-
84
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
erichthns includes Erichthi which have the carapace very deep, much
infolded, and in the younger larvae serrated, the hind body flat and wide,
the telson wider than long, from one to four secondary spines between the
sub-median and intermediate, and traces of more than six spines on the
dactylus; and the provisional genus Alima has a shallow flat carapace,
with serrated edges, the hind body flat and wide, the telson longer than
wide (except in Alimeriehthus), there are numerous secondary spinules
between the sub-median and intermediate, and the dactyli have traces of
marginal spines which are never more than six in number.
My attempt to trace the phylogenetic classification of the adults brought
me face to face with a serious difficulty, as I soon found that the character-
istics which have been selected for diagnosis are by no means the ones
which are most significant and of most scientific importance. In most of
the published descriptions little attention is given to points which are not
regarded as diagnostic, and while most of the genera are natural ones the
points which are of the greatest value in tracing the relation between the
larvae and the adults are entirely ignored in most of the published descrip-
tions. My own studies of the Challenger specimens and of the systematic
literature have led me to retain most of the accepted genera, but to give
them new diagnoses, and my view of the natural classification of the adults
is given in the accompanying analytical key, and phylogenetic system.
Analytical Key, orvnio the more prominent Diagnostic Charac-
teristics of each Genus.
L Sixth abdominal somite fused with telson ; rostrum with acute median
and antero-lateral spines.
a. Dactylus of raptorial claw dilated at the base and unarmed ; hind
body narrow and thick ; marginal spines of telson crowded towards
posterior edge.
Carapace elongated, costated.
Hind nody costated. Telson
longer than wide.
Dactyle usually with no more
than six spines. Telson with
more than four secondary spines
between intermediate and sub-
median. Inner spine of uropod
Genus
LysiosquUla.
Genus Protosquilla n. g.
II. Sixth abdominal somite distinct; rostrum without antero-lateral
spines.
a. Hind body narrow and thick.
1. Dactylus of raptorial claw dilated at base, and unarmed ; primary
marginal spines of telson very large, with one or two secondary
spines on each side between the submedian and the intermediate.
Genus Gonodactylu$.
2. Dactylus of raptorial claw not dilated at base, usually armed with
marginal spines ; submedian spines of telson tipped with movable
spinules; from one to three secondary spines between the sub-
median and the intermediate.
Genus Pseudosquilla.
b. Hind body depressed and wide.
1. Dactylus of raptorial claw dilated at the base and armed with
marginal spines.
Genus Coronida n. g.
2. Dactylus of raptorial claw not dilated at the base, but usually
armed with marginal spines.
(1) Primary marginal spines of telson small, with no more than
four secondary spines between the submedian and the inter-
mediate ; outer spine of basal prolongation of uropod usually
longer than the inner ; dactylus of raptorial claw with not less
than six marginal spines.
Genus Jjy&iosquMa including Coronis.
(2) Primary marginal spines of telson large, with more than
four secondary spines between the intermediate and the sub-
median ; inner spine of basal prolongation of uropod longer
than outer ; dactylus of raptorial claw usually with no more
than six marginal spines.
Genus Squilla including Chloridela.
Dactyle with more than six
spines. Hind body smooth. Car-
apace smooth and fiat. Telson
wider than long. No more than
four secondary spines between
intermediate and submedian.
Outer spine of uropod usually
longest.
■ LysiosquUla (Coronis) excavalrix.
Dactyle armed.
Dactyle dilated at
base. Eyes small, sub-
cylindrical. Anten-
nary scales and uro-
pods small. Carapace
small and flat. Ros-
trum with an acute
median spine.
Genus
Pseudosquilla.
/— ' ,
Hind body convex
and curved. Cara-
eice short and flat.
yes small, subcylin-
drical.
Hind body convex.
Primary marginal
spines of telson very
large. Secondary
marginal spines be-
tween submedian and
intermediate, few or
none.
Genus
Goiiodactylus
Dactyle dilated and
unarmed. Hind body
convex and curved.
Carapace short and
fiat. Rostrum usually
acute. Aniuialssniall.
Genus Protosquilla.
Rostrum with acute antero-
lateral spines. Sixth abdominal
somite fused with telson.
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
85
A comparison of this phylogeny derived from the study of the adults with
the one given above, derived from the study of the larvae, will show their
close resemblance. Faxon has reared a Squilla empusa from an Alima. I
have reared Lysiosquilla (Coronis) excavatrix n. ap. from a long-spined
Lysioerichthus ; the Challenger collections enable me to trace Lysiosquilla
maculata to a short-spined Lysioerichthus ; Claus has obtained a very com-
plete series of larvae connecting Pseuderichthus with Pseudosquilla, and
the Challenger collections give a very complete series connecting Gon-
erichthus with Gonodactylus, and the indirect evidence is very strong to
show that all the Alimae are young Squillae, all the Lysioerichthi young
Lysiosquillae, all the Pseuderichthi young Pseudosquillae, and all the
Gonerichthi young Gonodactyli, and Erichthalima very probably a young
Coronida.
Observations on the Embryology of Insects and
Arachnids. By A. T. Bruce.
[Abstract of a thesis presented for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, May, 1886].
The work of which a short abstract is here given comprises observations
extending over a period of nearly two years.
A more detailed and illustrated account now in course of preparation will,
it is hoped, show that if these observations have not brought to light any-
thing absolutely new they have at least thrown additional light on several
important questions in insect embryology.
With insect eggs the opacity of which renders them unsuitable for
superficial observation the sectional method leads to the best results. This
method was followed in these investigations.
The important points to be determined in insect embryology are the
segmentation of the egg' and the formation of the blastoderm, the origin of
the embryo and embryonic membranes, the formation of the germinal layers,
metameric segmentation and all connected with it including number of
appendages, nerve ganglia and etc.
The embryology of Arachnids or at least of spiders shows many points of
resemblance to the embryology of insects. The first trace of the spider
embryo, the so called primitive cumulus, is not unlike the early embryo
of the orthoptera. In the head region of the advanced spider embryo
are folds which very closely resemble the amniotic folds of the insect
embryo.
The insects studied included representatives from the Lepidoptera,
Coleoptera and Orthoptera, while a few incomplete observations were made
in the embryology of the Neuroptera and on the maturation of the ovum
in Musca.
The eggs of the spiders studied probably belonged to several species.
The embryology of Thyridopteryx ephemeraeformis or the common bag
worm was carefully studied. Owing to abundance of material its develop-
ment was followed from the early stages of segmentation to the advanced
embryonic stage.
The segmentation of the egg of Thyridopteryx corresponds to that of the
lepidopterous insects described by Bobretzky. It can hardly be called a
centroleeithal segmentation inasmuch as in the earliest stages cells are found
not at the surface surrounding a central yolk mass, but lie in the yolk whence
they migrate to the surface to form the blastoderm.
In Thyridopteryx, it appears that some of the primitive embryonic cells
never reach the surface but remain as yolk cells, round each of which, in
the later stages of embryonic development, an aggregate of yolk spherules
occurs and thus are formed the yolk balls or segments.
In the grasshopper, however, there is a stage in which aH the undifferen-
tiated cells are apparently at the surface, while the yolk is arranged in pyr-
amids corresponding to the yolk pyramids of Artocus.
In Meloe, the species of beetle studied, probably a corresponding stage
occurs in which all the cells are at the surface, though there are no yolk
pyramids ; consequently, in the grasshopper and in Meloe the yolk cells
probably arise by delamination from the cells investing the yolk.
The embryo of Thyridopteryx and of other insects studied arises as a
thickening on the surface of the egg not unlike the primitive cumulus of
spiders.
The amniotic folds arise as folds of blastoderm on all sides of the embryo
and finally meet and unite over the median line of the ventral plate, con-
sequently the embryo (described as the ventral plate at this stage) comes to
lie in the yolk covered by the inner amniotic fold or true amnion, while
the outer fold or serosa remains continuous with the blastoderm. The
embryonic membranes of Mantis and Meloe arise in a quite similar manner.
Brandt has described a different mode of origin for the embryonic mem-
branes of the Neuroptera and Hemiptera.
After the formation of the membranes in Thyridopteryx, but synchro-
nously with the same in Mantis and Meloe, an ingrowth occurs in the
middle line of the embryo which is partly a delamination and partly an
invagination. By this ingrowth is formed the inner germ layer which in
Thyridopteryx certainly corresponds to both mesoderm and endoderm.
The yolk cells do not appear to take any part in the formation of the endo-
derm in Thyridopteryx. Tichomiroff, from his studies in the Lepidoptera,
comes to a similar conclusion in regard to the yolk cells.
The yolk cells of the grasshopper also appear to take no part in the
formation of the endoderm.
The amnion in Thyridopteryx grows dorsally more rapidly than the body
walls and its opposite folds unite dorsally before the body walls can grow
together. Consequently the amnion in this insect forms part of the dorsal
surface of the body, while for a time the entire embryo is enclosed as in a
sack by the outer fold of the true amnion which does not take part in the
closure of the dorsal surface.
No dorsal organ corresponding to that described by Brandt for the
Neuroptera was observed in Thyridopteryx or in the other insects studied.
The amnion of the grasshopper does not apparently form any considerable
portion of the dorsal wall of the body.
The nervous system arises in all insects studied as two ectodermic strings
lying on each side of the blastopore, as the median line where the inner
layer arises may be called. It subsequently divides into a number of
ganglia corresponding to the somites of the body. The supraoesophagcal
ganglion, as good longitudinal sections of the Thyridopteryx embryo show,
consists of two portions, — a posterior portion which innervates the paired
labum, and an anterior portion which supplies the antennae with nerves.
The circumoesophageal commisure is formed by a portion of the posterior
division of the supraoesophageal ganglion and a portion of the mandibular
division of the suboesophageal ganglion. The supraoesophageal ganglion
of Thyridopteryx has its halves united by a double commisure, one por-
tion crossing above and the other below the oesophagus. When the ner-
vous system has been separated from the superficial ectoderm a median
ingrowth of ectoderm occurs in Thyridopteryx between the nerve cords.
The cells comprising this ingrowth elongate and lie close to the nerve
cords.
At this stage it appears as if this median ingrowth were uniting the cords
and forming a commisure as Hatscheck claimed for the Lepidoptera studied
by him. This, however, does not prove to be the case. In a subsequent
stage the elongated epithelial cells undergo division and give rise to migra-
tory cells corresponding to other migratory mesoderm cells. Cells of this
nature invest the nervous system forming its peritoneal coat, but take no
part in the formation of its commisure. The three pairs of thoracic limbs
are conspicuous from their size in all embryos studied.
In the grasshopper both maxillae have two lobes outside of and at the base
of the main axis of the appendage. These recall, though they are probably
not homologous with, the exopodites and epipodites of the crustacean
appendage. Similar lobes have been described by Patten for the maxillae
of Blatta. Tracheal invaginations occur in the maxillary segments of the
grasshopper. In conclusion it remains to mention an interesting stage of
the spider embryo in which an abdominal appendage is being converted by
a process of invagination into a lung book.
Notes on the Embryology of the Gasteropdds. (Pre-
liminary notice.) By J. Playfair McMurrich.
In a number of the Studies from the Biologkal Laboratory, which will
appear during the coming summer, I intend publishing a detailed and
illustrated account of the results of my studies during the past winter upon
86
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
the development of some marine Prosobranch Gasteropoda. In the mean-
time, however, it is desirable that a brief abstract of some of the more
important results should be presented.
The forms studied principal ly were Fulgur earica and Fasciolaria tulipa. The
former furnished material for the earlier stages of the development, while
of the latter I studied only the more advanced embryos. The modes of
segmentation of a few other forms, such as Purpura floridana, Orepidula, and
Eupleura caudata, were also observed.
The first portion of my paper will deal with the ovum and the nutrition
of the embryo, the non-development and employment as nutrition of the
majority of the ova in each capsule of Fasciolaria being described and com-
pared with other phenomena of a similar kind. In Purpura floridana a
certain number of the ova, after segmenting regularly for some time, break
down, and are employed as food by the survivors ; in Orepidula we see the
same process, but in a much less marked degree ; while in Neritina it is
carried to a greater extent, only one egg, out of a great number which, in
each capsule, undergo segmentation, coming to maturity. In Fasciolaria
six or eight eggs develop in each capsule, the remaining ova showing not
the slightest trace of segmentation, the polar globules even remaining
unformed, although the ova contain a nucleus and a certain amount of
protoplasm and are not simply yolk masses.
The second portion of the forthcoming paper will deal with the segmen-
tation of Fulgur. The eggs are very large, containing much yolk. A single
large polar globule is formed which contains some yolk granules. The
ovum then segments into two and then four equal spherules and from these
are separated four small protoplasmic spherules, the micromeres. These then
divide after four more micromeres have been separated from the macromeres
as in the normal Gasteropod segmentation. In one point, however, Fulgur
differs from other forms which have been studied ; the number of genera-
tions of micromeres which are separated off from the macromeres, is very
large — apparently they continue to be separated off as long as any portion
of the macromeres remains uncovered by the ectoderm. And even after the
blastopore has formed and closed at the nutritive pole of the egg, there can
be seen, in the interior of the yolk mass, which represents the fused macro-
meres, or beneath the ectoderm at the surface of the yolk mass, cells which
resemble, in certain characteristic features, the micromeres which were
separated from the macromeres. These late appearing micromeres, as they
may be termed, I believe, assist in the formation of the mesoderm, this layer
not being formed in its entirety from the primitive mesoderm cell.
When the segmentation has progressed somewhat, but while the micro-
meres are still confined to the formative pole, three of the macromeres show
elongated elevations upon their surfaces. The fourth macromere has no
elevation, but gives rise to the primitive mesoderm cell. What the signifi-
cance of the elevations may be, I cannot imagine, but there can be no doubt
but that their appearance is normal and coincides with the formation of the
first mesoderm cell. This lies below the margin of the ectoderm cell, and
corresponds exactly with the primitive mesoderm cell of Nassa.
At a later stage an invagination of the ectoderm at the formative pole
takes place. A deep depression is formed, which, however, later disappears
and leaves no trace. It apparently corresponds with the similar invagina-
tion described by Blochmann in Neritina and by Sarasin in Bithynia, though
the description given in this latter case is not very clear.
The development of the endoderm I was not successful in observing. The
blastopore is formed at the formative pole of the ovum, and closes, the
mouth being formed at the point of closure by an ectodermal invagination
which also gives rise to the oesophagus.
The general considerations derived from the study of the segmentation of
the Gasteropods will be arranged under three divisions. The first will treat
of the influence of the yolk on the formation of polar globules, the second
on the phylogenetic significance of segmentation, in which it will be held
that the mode of segmentation seen in Fulgur and so many other Gastero-
poda is essentially the same as that which occurs in certain Hirudinea,
Gephyreans, Turbellarians, etc., and that what is to be seen in the Lamel-
libranchs, Annelida, and other aberrant groups can be referred to the same
mode ; or in other words that the Platyhelminths, Annelida, Mollusea, and
Molluscoidea, have been derived from forms which possessed a typical seg-
mentation similar to that now to be seen in the Pulmonates and many other
Gasteropods, many forms in each group, however, having departed from the
original mode by reason of subsequent loss or addition of food yolk. It will
follow, as a consequence of this idea, that the regular equal segmentation,
which occurs in many forms belonging to these groups, is not primitive, but
has been secondarily induced by the conditions under which the eggs seg-
ment. The third division of the theoretical considerations will treat of the
mesoderm.
The third and fourth portions of the paper will treat respectively of the
velum and primitive excretory organs.
The fifth portion will treat of the development of the nervous system. It
will be shown that the Lamellibranchs, Pteropods, and Heteropods agree
in the formation of their supra-cesophageal ganglion with the typical
Trochophore larva of Polygordius. In the marine Prosobranchs however
the supra-oesophageal ganglia arise as independent local ectodermal thick-
enings, which have directly nothing to do with a " Scheitel-platte," and
which become united with each other and with the pedal ganglia later.
Between this arrangement and that of Pteropods, etc., the Pulmonates offer
an intermediate stage. The problematic cells which have been described
by so many authors as lying in the head vesicle, and derived from the ecto-
derm, and which were recognized by Wolfson to be a nervous organ in
process of degeneration, no doubt represent the apical thickening from
which, in the Troehozoon, the Pteropods, etc., the supra-cesophageal ganglia
are formed. In the Pulmonates the ganglia do not form from these prob-
lematic cells, which soon degenerate and disappear, but are formed as in the
marine Prosobranchs from local proliferations of the ectoderm, There has
been an abbreviation of the development in the case of the Pulmonates and
Prosobranchs, and it is interesting to note that the latter group presents wide
differences from the other Molluscan larvae in other respects also, e.g., the
excretory organs. The Prosobranch Veliger seems to be very highly
specialized, and affords an excellent instance of larval specialization inde-
pendent of the specialization of the adult.
The Origin of Metagenesis among the Hydro-
Medusae. By W. K. Brooks.
Most of the recent writers upon the origin of the sexual medusae which
are set free from communities of sessile hydroids, and upon the relation
between them and the hydroids, agree in the opinion that the sessile com-
munity is the primitive form, from which the medusae have been derived
through division of labor, and the gradual specialization of the reproduc-
tive members of a polymorphic hydroid-eormus.
In a monograph which has just been published in the Memoirs of the
Boston Society of Natural History ("The Life-History of the Hydro-
Medusae : A discussion of the origin of the Medusae, and of the significance
of Metagenesis,") I show that the life history of the Narcomedusae and
Trachomedusae is irreconcilable with this view. The accepted view
regarding these groups of Medusae is that they have been evolved from
ancestors with a sessile hydra-stage and an alternation of generations,
and that they have gradually lost the hydra stage, so that they now
develop directly from the egg. I show that there is no reason for this
opinion, but that we have, in Liriope among the Trachomedusae and in
Aeginata and Cunina octonaria among the Narcomedusae, a true planula
stage and a true hydra stage, although the hydra is simply a larva which
develops into a medusa by direct growth and metamorphosis without alter-
nation of generation. The life history of these forms proves conclusively that
the medusa stage is older than the sessile hydroid-eormus, which has arisen
through the power to multiply asexually which is possessed by the hydroid
larva of the medusa.
We have among the existing hydroids the series of stages in the origin
of metagenesis, which are represented in the following diagrams, in which
the sign = denotes direct metamorphosis without multiplication ; the sign
X denotes asexual multiplication, and the sign < denotes sexual multi-
plication.
In jEginopsis, as Metschnikoff shows, the egg gives rise to a ciliated
swimming planula, which acquires a mouth and tentacles and thus becomes
directly and gradually converted into a floating hydra or actinula which is
at first ciliated like the planula. The tentacular zone of the floating hydra
now grows out into a flange or umbrella which carries the tentacles with it;
sense organs and a veil are soon acquired and the hydra becomes a medusa.
The whole process is perfectly simple and direct ; there is nothing like
an alternation of generations and the single egg becomes a single medusa
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
87
with an actinula stage, a floating hydra-like larval stage and a swimming
medusa stage. The life-history is as simple and uninterrupted as that
of any other animal which undergoes a metamorphosis, and it may be
represented by the following simple diagram.
I. jEoinopsis Egg = Planula = Actinula = Medusa = < Eggs.
As the floating hydra stage of Tubularia is well known under the familiar
name Actinula and as it seems desirable to use a special term for the free
hydra stage of medusa; as distinguished from a sessile hydroid, I shall
employ this word for this purpose, designating by it a free or floating hydra
which may or may not be ciliated.
I have shown that we have in Liriope and its allies a life-history which
is very similar to that of ^Eginopsis, with numerous secondary modifications,
most of which are due to the fact that the gelatinous substance of the
umbrella begins to be secreted between the endoderm and the ectoderm at
a very early stage in the life of the embryo. The acceleration of the
formation of the umbrella is exactly paralleled by innumerable similar
phenomena in the lives of nearly all of the higher metazoa, and it therefore
presents no difficulties ; and if we imagine the gelatinous substance absent,
the mouthless, untentaculated, ciliated Liriope larva is obviously a planula
with an outer layer of ectoderm and a central capsule of endoderm. It has
a spacious digestive cavity ; the two layers are separated by a gelatinous
substance ; and in our species, the cilia are restricted to a small part of the
outer surface ; but, in spite of these secondary modifications, it is clearly a
planula. It soon acquires a mouth and four solid tentacles, and becomes
converted into the floating hydra or actinula, with ectoderm, endoderm,
stomach, mouth, lasso-cells, and four tentacles, but with neither sub-
umbrella, sense organs nor veil. This larva becomes converted into an
adult medusa by the growth of the tentacular zone into an umbrella, and by
the acquisition of sense organs, precisely like the ^Eginopsis larva and as
each egg gives rise to only one adult the life-history is simple and direct
with a planula stage, a hydra stage and a final medusa stage, and it may
therefore be represented by the same diagram which was used for ^Eginopsis.
II. Liriope Egg = Planula — Actinula = Medusa < Eggs.
In our common American Narcoinedusa, Ounina octcmaria, the fact that
the larva is a true hydra was long ago pointed out by McCrady. The
planula stage of this species has never been observed, but the resemblance
between the ciliated, bitentaculated hydra and Metschnikoff's account of
the jEginopsis larva at the same stage is so close that we have every reason
for believing that, in this species also, the hydra stage is preceded by a
planula stage without a mouth or tentacles. The hydra scon acquires two
more tentacles and is then fundamentally like the four-tentacled hydra of
Liriope. The number of tentacles soon increases to eight, and the hydra
becomes converted into a medusa by the outgrowth of the tentacular zone
and the acquisition of sense organs. So far, the life-history of our Cunina
is as simple as that of Jiginopsis or Liriope, but it is complicated by the
occurrence of asexual multiplication in the larva and also by parasitism.
The actinula, or floating ciliated hydra, after gaining access to the sub-
umbrella of a Turritopsis, gives rise to buds from the aboral end of its
body, behind the circlet of tentacles; each of these buds is a hydra like
the parent and like it becomes directly converted into a medusa. As these
secondary hydras originate as buds, they are at first sessile, but they become
detached while in the hydra stage, or at least before they are completely
converted into true medusae : the time of detachment is not constant and
although the larva; are at first sessile, and, therefore, not actinulas, they
serve to show that the boundary line between a floating actinula and a
sessile hydra is an extremely faint one.
Owing to the occurrence of asexual multiplication, each Cunina egg may
give rise to an indefinite number of adult medusa;, but as each larva becomes
directly converted, into a medusa by a process of growth, there is no alterna-
tion and the life-history may be represented by the following diagram :
Hydra = Medusa < Eggs.
X
III. Cunina octonari a Egg — Planula = Actinula = Medusa < Eggs.
X
Hydra = Medusa < Eggs.
Here we have asexual multiplication without alternation, but in the
Cuninas which Uljanin and Jletschnikoft' studied there is a true alterna-
tion which is obviously of secondary origin and undoubtedly due to a very
slight modification of such a life-history as the one shown in diagram III.
The planula itself is very peculiar and is furnished with an anomalous
pseudopodial apparatus for clinging to and fastening upon the gastric
process of the Geryonid within which it becomes a parasite; and the
actinula, or primary hydra, into which it becomes converted, never com-
pletes its development into a perfect, free medusa. It remains as a brood-
stock, from which other larva; are budded, and these are set free and
become converted into medusse so that the life-history is represented by the
following diagram, in which for the first time, we find a true alternation:
IV. Cunina (Cunocantha) parasitica t Hydra*- Medusa < Eggs.
Egg = Planula = Actinula < Hydra — Medusa < Eggs.
(Hydra m Medusa < Eggs.
A comparison of Metschnikoff's account of the development of Ounina
(Ounomnllui) parasitica, and that which I have given of Ounina octonaria,
will bring out an interesting and significant difference between them which
I have not yet pointed out. In the American Cunina, the hydra stage is
well marked in the larva; which are produced by budding as well as in the
one which hatches from the egg. In Metschnikoff's species, however, the
characteristics of the adult medusa begin to make their appearance in the
secondary buds, almost as soon as the buds themselves appear, and it would
be difficult to recognize a hydra stage in the life of this species if we were
not acquainted with the simpler life-history of the American Cunina. In
Metschnikoff's species, the primary hydra is also greatly modified as an
adaptation for its parasitic life, but in other respects its life-history is very
similar to that of the ordinary hydroids ; and if the acquisition of the
medusa characteristics by the secondary buds were a little more accelerated
so that their hydra characteristics were entirely, instead of almost, crowded
out, we should have a life-history like this :
r Medusa < Eggs.
V. Egg = Planula = Actinula X ■< Medusa < Eggs.
(Medusa < Eggs.
I know of no hydra which presents this life-history without modification,
but there are many Campanularians and Tubularians in which the only
modification is the acquisition by the actinula or primary hydra of the
power to produce, in addition to the buds which become medusse, other
buds which remain in the hydra condition, and share with their parent,
the primary hydra, the power to produce both kinds of buds. Thus in
Perigonomus (Stomatoca), the egg gives rise to a planula which becomes
the first hydra, and this produces other hydras like itself and builds up a
hydroid cormus ; and ultimately all these hydras give rise to buds which
become directly converted into medusse, the hydra-like stage being com-
pletely suppressed ; and we have a life-history like this :
Hydra
X
Hydra
X
., | Medusa < Eggs.
t Medusa < Eggs.
x. f Medusa < Eggs.
t Medusa < Eggs.
( Medusa < Eggs.
= Actinula or Primary Hydra X <
u
Hydra
X
Hydra
VI. Egg = Planula =
(. Medusa < Eggs.
w f Medusa < Eggs.
I Medusa < Eggs.
y f Medusa < Eggs.
t Medusa < Eggs.
In Turritopsis we have essentially the same life history, except that there
is a secondary alternation between the primary hydra and the others. The
planula does not become a hydra, but a mouthless, untentaculated root
which is undoubtedly a degraded actinula or primary hydra. It does not
give rise to medusa buds, but remains as a brood stock or embryonic hydra
from which fully developed hydras are formed by budding, and all of these
produce medusa-buds, so the life-history is as follows :
Turritopsis Egg = Planula = Root x
Hydra
Hydra
Hydra
*, / Medusa < Eggs.
I Medusa < Eggs.
w f Medusa < Eggs.
I Medusa < Eggs.
*- f Medusa < Eggs.
new
The
' t Medusa < Eggs.
In the ordinary Campanularians, with free Medusae, we have a
element of complexity, owing to the appearance of polymorphism,
ordinary hydras no longer give rise to medusa-buds, and these are produced
only on the reproductive hydras or blastostyles. In Eutima, which I shall
take as an example of this group, we have another complication, which is
very significant.
As in Turritopsis, there is a secondary alternation of generations, for as
I have shown above the planula no longer becomes converted into a hydra
but forms a root from which the primary hydra is budded like those which
appear later.
88
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
As I have shown, this secondary alternation occurs in many hydroids,
such as Hydractinia, Eutima, Turritopsis, Obelia (Merejkowsky) and others,
and it was correctly described by Wright in Hydractinia in 1856 ; but, so
far as I am aware, no one has pointed out that it is a true alternation,
exactly like the alternation between the hydra and the medusa, and that it
is certainly a secondary acquisition, as we may see from the fact that in
Tubularia, Eudendrium and other hydroids, the planula becomes directly
converted into a hydra. So far as this point is concerned, the life-history
of Eutima or Hydractinia, and that of Tubularia or Eudendrium present
the following contrast.
Hydra
X
Tubclabia Egg = Planula = Actinula = Hydra
X
Hydra
with no alternation, while the other forms we have
( Hydra
Eutima Egg = Planula = Boot X \ Hydra
(Hydra
with an alternation.
The complete life-history of Eutima with its double alternation between
the root and the hydranths, between the hydranths and the medusae and its
polymorphism, and division of the hydranths into nutritive persons and
blastostyles, may be represented as follows :
r Medusa<C Eggs.
r Blastostyle. X *s Medusa<Eggs,
VTX Edttma ( Nutritive Hydra X< *-Medusa<Eggs.
Egg — Planula — EootX \
*• Nutritive Hydra
t Nutritive Hydra
{ Nutritive Hydra X<
' Blastostyle
i Medusa-CEggs.
X"\ Medusa<iEggs.
I Medusa < Eggs.
In Podocoryne (Dysmorphosa) we have an extremely complex life-history,
which, however, is readily derivable from one like that of Eutima as just
given. There is a secondary alternation between the root and the hydranths
as in Eutima, and the polymorphism between the hydranths is more spe-
cialized, as we find not only nutritive polyps and blastostyles but defensive
polyps as well, and as each of the medusas in addition to its sexual function,
also possesses the power to produce other medusa? by budding, the number
of sexual animals which may be derived from a single egg is unlimited.
The following diagram represents the life-history of this species, except
that the first generation of medusae, like the second, gives rise to reproduc-
tive elements.
{Nutritive Hydra
Blastostyle X
Defensive Hydra
i Nutritive Hydra
I Nutritive Hydra X -j Blastostyle X
{Defensive Hydra
" Medusa X \ Medusa < Eggs-
I Medusa < Eggs.
Medusax\Medu'a<E99'-
L *- Medusa < Eggs.
Medusax\Meduta<Eggs-
*■ Medusa < Eggs.
Medusa X I M"'wla<
I I Medusa <
Eggs.
Eggs.
VHI. PODOCOBTSE
Egg => Planula ■■
BootX
f MrAiu* v / M'duta < Baa*.
, Nutritive Hydra j Meausa x { Medma < £ggs,
[ Nutritive Hydra X ■< Blastostyle X {
(Defensive Hydra Medusa X { Medma < ES3'-
L t Medusa < Eggs.
i Nutritive Hydra
I Nutritive Hydra x -j Blastostyle X
l Defensive Hydra
f Medusa X { Medma < Egg>-
t. Medusa < Eggs.
Medusa X
f Medusa < Eggs.
<- Medusa < Eggs.
r Nutritive Hydra
\Nutritivt Hydra X \ Blastostyle X
' Defensive Hydra
MedusaxlMa'ma<EggS-
I Medusa < Eggs.
f Medusa < Eggs.
X Medusa < Eggs.
Medusa X
r Nutritive Hydra
Nutritive Hydra X \ Blastostyle X
t Defensive Hydra
Medusax\miwa<Egg'-
t. Medusa < Etuis.
Medusa X
Medusa < Eggs.
( Medusa < Eggs.
I Medusa < Eggs.
It is very probable that future research will show that even this complex
diagram is too simple for some of the Hydromedusae, and that there is, in
some cases, a secondary alternation between the first generation of free
IX. Hydbacttnia
Egg = Planula =Eool X
medusae and those which are produced by budding from this generation.
The life-history of these proliferous medusae has not been studied, as they
are seldom found near laboratories and appliances for research, but there is
reason to suspect that in some of them only the medusae which are budded
from the bodies of the medusae of the first generation become sexually
mature; and if future research should prove this we should have still
another alternation between the asexual proliferous medusae and these
sexual descendants.
In Hydractinia, the cormi of which are so similar to those of Podocoryne
that a drawing of one will correctly represent the other, the life-history
begins to simplify itself by the degradation of the sexual medusae into
sessile buds, or reproductive organs, which, however, still retain traces of
their former independent locomotor existence ; traces which have almost
totally disappeared in Eudendrium and in many of the Campanularians.
The life-history of Hydractinia may be represented as follows :
I Nutritive t Nutritive Hydra r Medusa Bud < Eggs.
Hydra X\ Blastostyle x\
y Defensive Hydra *• Medusa Bud < Eggs.
\ Nutritive f Nutritive Hydra i Medusa Bud < Eggs.
Hydra X \ BUistostyle X"<
t Defensive Hydra *> Medusa Bud<, Eggs.
Nutritive ( Nutritive Hydra r Medusa Bud < Eggs.
Hydra x\ Blastostyle x\
^.Defensive Hydra I Medusa Bud < Eggs.
Now, what is the significance of this remarkable series of life-ristories?
Most of the facts have long been known, but the most conflicting interpreta-
tions of them have been advanced, and the student who seeks in the various
monographs upon the subject an exposition of the relation between the
direct development of a single adult from each egg, which is characteristic
of most animals and the circuitous history which is so remarkably exhibited
by the medusae, will find a speculative literature which is almost unlimited,
but a total lack of agreement as to the true solution of this, the most interesting
of all the problems involved in the life of these most interesting animals.
The view which I believe to be the true one, is that the remote ancestor
of the hydro-medusae was a solitary swimming hydra, or actinula, with no
medusa stage, but probably with the power to multiply by budding. I
believe that this pelagic animal gradually became more and more highly
organized and more perfectly adapted for a swimming life, until it finally
became converted into a medusa with swimming-bell and sense organs, devel-
oping directly from the egg without alternation, but exhibiting during its
growth the stages through which it had passed during its evolution. After
this stage of development had been reached I believe that the larva derived
some advantage from attachment to other bodies, either as a parasite within
other medusae, or as what may perhaps be called a semi-parasite, upon other
floating bodies such as the fronds of algae ; and that it multiplied asexually
in this sessile condition, giving rise to other larvae like itself, all of which
became medusae.
I believe that the sessile or attached mode of life of the larvae proved so
advantageous to the species, that it was perpetuated by natural selection,
and that the primary larva then gradually lost its tendency to become a
medusa, but remained a sessile larva, giving birth by budding to other larvae
which became sexual medusae ; and that the medusa-characteristics of these
secondary larvae were accelerated, and that the primary larva gradually
acquired, at the same time, the power to produce other larvae which
remained permanently, like itself, in the hydra-stage ; that in this way the
sessile hydra-communities with medusa buds and free sexual medusae were
evolved ; and that finally these communities became polymorphic, and that
the sessile habit proved so advantageous that the free medusae became
degraded into medusa-buds, or sexual buds on the bodies of the sessile
hydras.
The Marine Laboratory of the University will be located, this
summer, at Nassau, New Providence. The party and the outfit of the
laboratory will be transported from Beaufort, N. C. to Nassau by a schooner
which will leave Baltimore about May 10th. At Nassau a building will be
rented for use as a laboratory and the work will continue there about two
months. The party will consist of W. K. Brooks, Ph. D., Director, and
Messrs. E. A. Andrews, A. B., P. H. Herrick, A. B., G. B. Haldeman, A. B.,
T. W. Mills, M. D., H. Orr, Ph. D., H. V. Wilson, A. B., and, possibly, two
or three others.
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
89
REPORTS OF RECENT LECTURES AND ADDRESSES.
On Methods of Archaeological Research in America.
By Professor P. W. Putman.
[Abstract of a lecture delivered before the University Archaeological Society, December
16, 1885].
Mr. Putnam first called attention to the importance of understanding the
archaeology of America in arriving at a knowledge of the early conditions of
man and the beginnings of art, as it is here that man can he traced from a
period before the glacial epoch through all his early stages, and from
savagery through barbarism to the beginning of civilization.
During this long period in America man moved onward and developed
comprehensive social organizations, and made great advances in all primi-
tive arts. Here is material in abundance from which to study the develop-
ment of his arts up to a certain point. On making such a study much is
found which leads to an understanding of the natural development of the
arts among other races, and while many phases are found to be common to
humanity, resemblances and identities are observed which have a deep
ethnological significance and can be classed no longer as mere coincidences.
Such a study also leads to conclusions which indicate that the ancient
Americans were not the homogeneous people generally supposed.
After allusions to the importance of thorough work in the field and the
necessity of following perfect scientific methods in a study of the antiquities
of the country, in order that all facts can be properly correlated, he stated
that here, as elsewhere, archa?ology as a science is of late origin ; therefore,
only work accomplished in recent years, except in a few instances, should
be considered in drawing deductions. He said that the day had passed
when a simple collector of relics of the past could be called an archaeologist.
To the general collector of "relics" in this country everything was Indian.
To such a one a piece of pottery was an Indian vessel and nothing more.
From collections made in that spirit nothing can be learned. The time, has
come when we must know the exact conditions under which every object
placed in our museums of archaeology was obtained and its association with
other things, in order to draw conclusions of any scientific value.
He then described the methods which should be followed in explorations,
in order that everything found, from a chip of stone to an elaborate piece
of carving ; from a mass of clay to a perfect vase or a terracotta figure ;
from a splinter of bone to an implement made of that material; from a
shell to a carving on a piece of shell ; from nuggets of copper and other
native metals to beautifully- worked ornaments; together with implements
and ornaments of various materials, broken or whole, remains of charred
fibres, matting and cloth ; and seeds, nuts, corn-cobs and bones of animals,
and one and all shall show their associations and tell their story as a whole.
With these should be preserved all human remains, from fragments of
bones to perfect skeletons. Skulls are unquestionably the most important,
but other parts of the skeleton should be studied as well. All these objects
should be studied comparatively; their associations should never be over-
looked, and individually and collectively, they should be compared with
similar groups of objects from near and remote places. Deductions of
importance can be drawn only from material obtained by such methods.
He then gave an account of the explorations of mounds, burial places,
and village sites in the Ohio valley which had been conducted, with the
assistance of Dr. C. L. Metz, under his personal direction for the Peabody
Museum of American Archieology and Ethnology at Cambridge, illustrating
his remarks by diagrams and photographs. Trenching and slicing, he
said, could be used to express in general terms the method followed in field
work. For instance, in exploring a mound a trench is first dug at the base
of the mound. A slight vertical wall is made thereby showing the contact
of the edge of the mound with the earth upon which it rests. Sometimes
this trench has to be dug to the depth of several feet in order to find the
bottom of the mound, as in cases wdiere t lie mound is erected in an exca-
vated area. This wall is the first section of the exploration, and its outline
should be drawn or photographed and its measurements noted. For the
latter purpose it is best to stretch two strings over the mound, one north
and south and the other east and west, and to take all measurements from
those. After this first section is made, the work is carried on by slicing;
or cutting down about a foot at a time, always keeping a vertical wall in
front, the whole width of the mound. Each slice thus made is a section,
and whenever the slightest change in the structure is noticed or any object
found, that section should be drawn or photographed, and measured as at
first, and the exact position noted of any object, ash bed, or change in the
character of the structure of the mound. This method is continued until
the whole mound has been dug away, and a thorough knowledge of its
structure and contents obtained. Such work of course necessitates great
labor and is expensive in proportion, but only such a method will give full
results; all other methods are partial and consequently of little or no
value. In fact unless such work is to be thoroughly done it should not be
attempted.
In exploring village sites a trench should be dug through the accumu-
lated leaf mould in order to find the outlines of habitations, and obtain the
position of fireplaces, refuse-piles, and other signs of occupation. The
discoveries thus made should be followed by the removal of surface soil
and trenching about the spots. In no case should an excavation be made
from the surface of a mound, site of habitation, burnt space, or refuse-pile.
From the moment this is done all is in confusion, and much is destroyed
by being broken with pick or spade. By trenching and slicing this is
avoided, and the sequence of materials, as well as the outlines of habita-
tion, fire-place or refuse-pile can be determined and correctly drawn to
scale. In exploring a cemetery a similar method should be followed. A
trench should be dug along the edge of the cemetery. Then the area
should be marked off on blocks of fifty feet square in order to facilitate
making a plan drawn to scale. A " block " should then be dug over to the
necessary depth, beginning at the trench and throwing the earth behind,
always keeping a vertical section in front, the full width of the block. As
each skeleton is reached it is seen in the section. Its position and sur-
roundings should be noted. Every object buried with it will be seen in
place, as the earth is removed with a trowel and small hand broom from
over and among the bones and objects. In this way the speaker had caused
to be excavated burial places, acres in extent, in the Ohio valley, from which
most important results had been obtained.
Mr. Putnam concluded his address with an appeal to all archaeologists
to follow the same principles which are followed in other departments of
science and not be satisfied with partial results, but by conscientious and
thorough work to aid in the important undertaking of discovering the
origin and connections of the ancient Americans, and their distribution and
routes of migration over the continent.
On Recent Explorations in Babylonia.
liam Hayes Ward, of New York.
By Dr. Wil-
[Abstract of two lectures delivered in Hopkins Hall, February 18, 19, 1886].
The Wolfe expedition to Babylonia had its origin in the consultations of
a few members of the American Oriental Society, interested in Assyrio-
logical researches. The necessary funds were given by Miss Catharine L.
Wolfe, of New York. I was asked to take charge of the expedition, which
it was hoped would require an absence of not more than six months, of
which three winter months might be spent in Babylonia. This time was
considerably exceeded. Besides myself the party consisted of Dr. J. R. S.
Sterrett, of the American School at Athens, and J. H. Haynes, of Robert
College. Both these gentlemen were acquainted with the Turkish lan-
guage, and both had had experience of archaeological work in Asia Minor,
in search of Greek inscriptions. Our first regions of archaeological interest
were at the Hittite centres of Marash and Jerablus, the latter of which is
the ancient Carchemish. From Marash comes the remarkable lion, cov-
ered with Hittite inscriptions, now in the Museum at Constantinople. The
mate to it is still on the wall of the Turkish castle at Marash, but is unin-
scribed. In the immediate vicinity of Marash are the mounds covering
several old Hittite towns, which ought to be carefully explored. Numbers
of stones with bas-reliefs, of groups of figures and inscriptions, are to be
seen built in the walls of Marash, and elsewdiere in the vicinity, one of
them with the inscription incised instead of raised, as is the case with the
90
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 49.
Hittite bowl from Babylon or the Tyana inscription. The material was,
in the ease of all the stones seen here, or heard of, a black trachyte. We
took photographs of all we could get access to. Jerablus is a fine mound
covering old Carchemish, on a commanding bluff on the Euphrates, the
plain back of which is covered with the thickly scattered ruins of the later
Hierapolis. This mound was opened, under direction of the British Museum,
by the consul at Aleppo. The inscribed stones discovered by George Smith
were sent to the British Museum, but numbers of large sculptures, some of
them of the first importance, were left exposed. This is greatly to be
regretted, as one or two important ones, in gypsum, are being injured by
the atmosphere. Some of them might easily have been transported to
England, and the larger ones are well worth the trouble. They were all
photographed.
The excavations made in Nineveh and vicinity by Botta and Layard
were all visited. At Khorsabad nothing is now exposed to injury, but the
head of a colossal human-headed bull, well protected by the earth above it,
shows how beautifully the sculpture was done. Koyunjik seems to have
been pretty thoroughly explored ; but at Nebby Yunus much is yet to be
discovered, when the opposition of the Moslems shall be overcome. At
Nemrud are long lines of exposed bas relief sculptures, repeating the Stan-
dard Inscription of Assurnazirbal, and much more injured by the exposure
of these few years than by the thousands of years before they were opened.
In Babylonia nearly all the principal mounds were inspected. The
northern, a little above the latitude of Baghdad, includes Akerkuf, with its
conspicuous ancient tower, or ziggural, but not otherwise important ; then,
near the point of outflow of the Sakhlawieh from the Euphrates is Akbar,
a mound of the very first importance, not before visited, and which prob-
ably represents the Accad of Genesis, and the Agade and Sippara of Anunit
of the inscriptions, as well as the Persebora of Zosimus, and the Anbar of
the Mohammedan historians. It has been a city of prime importance from
the earliest to the latest times (Berosus says five of its kings ruled before
the Flood, and here Xisuthrus buried the records of the old world) ; it is
more convenient for excavation, and it is remarkable that it has never
before been visited. I must also mention, a little farther north, and on the
west of the Euphrates, the large walled ruin now called Jobriya, not on the
maps. South of the latitude of Baghdad is Abu-Habba, where Mr. Kassam
hag done admirable work, and where was the Sippara of Shamash. Tel
Ibrahim (Cutha) has been very imperfectly explored. Babylon is so
large that it has discouraged scientific explorations, although it has long
been ransacked by Arabs, who still dig there constantly, and carry its bricks
to Hillah. The northern chief hill called Bab-il, the temple of Bel, does
not offer much spoil for excavation, but Kesr and Jimjimeh are more fruit-
ful, and ought to be carefully worked. To the west of the Euphrates is
Birs-Nimrud, with its high vitrified tower and its immense mounds, in
part opened by Kassam with considerable profit. To the east of Babylon
lies El Ohemir, slightly explored. From here we pass southward through
the middle region of Babylonia, including Zibliyeh, with its fine ziygurat,
then Niffer (ancient Nipur) one of the largest of the ancient ruins, but
quite undisturbed. Near by, to the west, is the fine mound of Delehem,
wbich we could not visit, and which has never been visited by tourist, but
which was a very strong and well-defended city. Farther south are num-
bers of large mounds, whose ancient names await identification, as Bismya,
Dhahar, Hammam, and Fara, all unexplored.
We now reach the southern part of Babylonia, where are Yokha and
Umm-el-Akarib, near together, and never visited before, very ancient and
important. Crossing to the east of the Shatt-el-Hai, we come to de Sarzec's
grand field of exploration at Telloh, where he found the most archaic
remains of Chaldean art. He seems to have pretty thoroughly explored, if
he has not quite exhausted the locality. Further to the southeast is the
equally promising, but unexplored Zerghul. One party now passed down
the Shatt-el-Hai to the Euphrates, and visited, on the west of the latter
river, Mugheir, the ancient town of the Chaldees. Messrs. Loftus and
Taylor did considerable good work here and at Abu-Shahrein, a few hours
to the south, but their work was little more than a beginning. Going
northward, up the Euphrates, one party visited the immense ruins of Warka
(Erech) where the same explorers did just enough to tantalize scholars.
It is second only to Babylon in extent, and hardly equalled by Anbar. No
place offers more promise of fruitfulness in antiquities. Beside these
mounds should be mentioned Senkereh and Tel Sifr, which we were not
able to visit.
The conspicuous objects in such an alluvial country as Babylonia are the
lines of the banks of canals and the tels which mark the sites of old cities.
The cities were, in ancient times, on the banks either of the great rivers,
or of the almost equally large artificial canals. These, like the Shatt-en-NlI,
can be traced, and ought to be carefully located on maps. Thus the ancient
central canal, now looking like an old road, but called the Shatt-en-Nil by
the Arabs, was followed by us south from Zibliyeh to Niffer, and was
reported to us as passing southward, although we did not see it there.
The tels, or mounds, are in part the artificial elevations raised for the
purpose of serving as sites of the principal buildings of the cities upon
them, and in part are the remains of the destruction of the buildings of
unburnt bricks, which have fallen during a history of thousands of years.
The purpose of erecting such artificial hills would be in part to escape
from the discomfort, pestilence, and insects of a periodical marsli, and in
part defense and outlook. In the present decayed state of the country one
end of a id is often selected as the site of a miserable village ; but there
exists one admirable example of the ancient earthen acropolis still occu-
pied exactly as of old. At Erbil, the ancient Arbela, the whole summit of
the large mound is occupied by the compact city, with the mosques as resi-
dences covering the ancient temple of Ishtar of Arbela, surrounded by its
strong wall, up to whose gate rises the "ascent," with its steps and inclined
way, by which alone the inhabitants, or an enemy, can reach it. The
lower city is around the base of the mound.
A considerable trade in Babylonian and other antiquities is still carried
on by some Christians and Jews of Baghdad and Telloh. A number of Arabs
are kept at work constantly at Jimjimeli and Kesr, making diligent search
for tablets, seal-cylinders, and for the later ornaments of gold and other
objects found in graves. Besides the objects carried to the British Museum
from the late diggings at Abu-Habba and Birs-Nimrud, not a few others
were retained, and the British Museum has been compelled to purchase
them. Although all exportation of antiquities is forbidden, a good quantity
are smuggled out every year, and it would not be difficult to obtain a fine
collection by dealing with the men who have charge of this business. Here
the lecturer exhibited and described various kinds of antiquities, such as
inscribed historical barrels ; tablets with contracts, wills, loans, historical
records, geographical lists, bilingual hymns, etc. ; cylinder and cone seals ;
rings, and other gold objects. Photographs of the sites of old cities were
also exhibited.
Babylonian and Assyrian Archaeology. By A. L.
Fkothingham, Jr.
[Abstract of five lectures delivered in Hopkins Hall, February 25-March 11, 1886].
A glance at the state of knowledge about the history, language, and art
of Babylonia and Assyria previous to the last fifty years, shows how modern
is the science, and what immense progress has been made since the time
when Rollin wrote his standard history, in which he ignored both the
existence of an early Babylonian civilization and of Nineveh itself, con-
sidering Babylon to be the capital of Assyria. All the Greek traditions,
from which our previous knowledge was mostly derived, are fables, if we
except the few chronological data derived from Berosus. The only
authentic knowledge was that contained in the Old Testament, and that
related only to the later Assyrian Empire.
The first steps in the decipherment of the Persian cuneiform inscriptions
made by Grotefend and followed up by Lassen and Kawlinson led to the
decipherment of the Assyrian characters, on which light began to be
thrown shortly before the middle of the century. At this same time Botta
and Layard commenced their great excavations in Assyria, that were to
revolutionize our ideas of Asiatic art. It is a peculiar feature of Assyri-
ology that here, as with no other nation, history, philology and archaeology
are inseparable elements that mutually supplement each other. This is
even more the case in the present than in the early stage of the study. In
Layard's time the main object was the discovery of works of art — palaces
and sculptures ; no pains were taken to carry away or even save the
thousands of inscriptions that came to light in the diggings. Now, when
the unparalleled value of these inscriptions is appreciated, they alone are
sought for, and but little interest is manifested in the monuments. George
Smith found most of the precious documents (including the Creation and
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
91
Deluge tablets) with whicli he enriched the JSritish Museum during his
two expeditions, in the same ruins that had been excavated by Layard, at
Kouyunjik. As our arquaintanee with early Babylonian history increases,
the centre of interest is becoming displaced and transferred from Northern
Assyria to the more ancient Southern Empire. Until some twenty years
ago Assyriology remained, in both its philological and its archaeological
aspects the specialty of English and French savants. Italy has not even
yet joined in the race, but Germany has gradually during the last fifteen
years come well to the front in the domain of philology. The school
founded by Professor Delitzsch at Leipzig has sent forth, during the last
six or seven years, a number of talented young Assyriologists, foremost
among whom was Professor Haupt.
The inscriptions have given us the history of Babylonia from a date fixed
at c. 3800 B. c. when Sargon I apparently founded the first general Shemitic
empire at Agade, probably having been preceded by a period of separate
and independent states or cities. Though complete dynastic lists referring
to the early period of Babylonian history have been found, their succession
has not yet been ascertained for the most part, and, up to the time of Ham-
murabi, who founded in 2108 an empire on the ruins of Elamite supremacy,
we are reduced to a few certain landmarks. After this the outline is well
filled and we can follow easily the vicissitudes of the struggle between the
Babylonian Empire and the rising power of Assyria. As a whole, Baby-
lonio-Assyrian history is far more interesting than its only rival in
antiquity, Egypt, for the latter was isolated through the greater part of its
history, while the former empire was always in close contact with the entire
East, and its influence reacted even on Greece and Italy.
Among the many problems that have agitated the students of Assyriology
that of most moment has been one which afiected the entire structure — the
problem of the non-Shemitic civilization and language of Babylonia. The
term Turanian, applied to them quite generally until late years, was meant
to indicate a racial connection with the Ougro-Finnish and Turkish stock ;
with most scholars this opinion is now considered untenable. That there
existed two races in Babylonia, however, from the earliest times is undeni-
able. Proofs of this are abundant, especially in the mythological and
religious writings that have been recovered. The hypothesis of the French
scholar, M. Hal6vy, who contends that the entire civilization of Babylonia
was Shemitic and that there never existed any Sumero-Akkadian language,
seems improbable on the face of it, though his arguments against the
Turanian theory and his strictures on many assumptions of the Sumero-
Akkadists have received much attention, and he has made converts of
several French Assyriologists. Whatever may be the merits of the case,
the share of the Shemites in the early civilization is evidently the
principal one.
Arcliaxilogy. No satisfactory history of Babylonian and Assyrian Art has
yet been written. Perrot's work is not a history but mainly a judicious
classified description of the works of art uncovered by the excavations. He
makes no use of the important help of the inscriptions, and his partial know-
ledge leads him into the mistake of not recognizing any distinction between
the art of Babylonia and Assyria. Until now so few excavations have been
undertaken in Babylonia that the monumental history of the long period
from about 4000 B. c, to which the first known works date back, up to the
ninth century, when Babylonian is absorbed by Assyrian art, cannot be
made out even in outline. Neither can the characteristics of the different
schools that certainly flourished contemporaneously and successively, be
clearly ascertained as yet. We only know that Agade, Ur, Erech, Nippur,
Larsa, and Babylon were great artistic centres, and some slight progress has
been made in attributing to each one some of the many cut gems whose
difterenees in style are so marked. When these attributions shall have been
certified and extended, some light may be thrown on these early schools of
Babylonian sculpture. The monumental sculpture, so far as shown by the
discoveries of Telloh, has great affinities with Egyptian art, and may even
suggest some ethnographical affinities.
As the temple was, in Babylonia, the centre of artistic work, in late
Assyrian history this role was played by the royal palaces with which we
are so familiar. Both in architecture and sculpture the points of dissimi-
larity are great between the two civilizations. The Assyrian made far
greater use of the arch and vault as well as of the column, than his more
Southern neighbor, and in sculpture his exclusive passion was for bas-relief
to the entire exclusion of works in the round, for which the Babylonian
Bculptors showed a marked predilection. The striking contrast both in
tecnique and in conception between the two arts is shown nowhere better
than in the seal cylinders belonging to every period and school of Baby-
lonio-Assyrian art, of which several thousand are scattered in the Museums
and private collections of the Old and the New World. Although we know
of works of Assyrian sculpture that date from the XII cent. B. c, the earliest
works of any consequence that have been recovered are the reliefs from the
palaces of Assurnazir-pal (883-58), which are also the finest from an artistic
standpoint, and show that the Assyrian sculptor was in full possession of
every element of his art. Under succeeding kings this masculine, energetic
style became degenerate, and the figures are meaningless and heavy without
being strong. Then under Sennacherib arose a new style in which the
scenes were treated more pictorially, the figures were smaller and more
numerous, and accessories were introduced ; great skill was attained in the
representation of animal and vegetable life. The perfection of this style
was reached under Assur-bani-pal (068).
The artistic relations of Babylonia and Assyria with other nations of the
East were varied and important, especially during the height of the late
Assyrian Empire, when Nineveh was the great mart of the East and com-
prised a motley population drawn from all lands. By land the Assyrians
traded with Babylonia, Elam, Arabia, and Egypt on the one hand, and with
••Syria, Armenia and Asia Minor on the other. The early reciprocal
influence of Egypt and Babylonia is shown by the remarkable resemblances
in the sculptures of Telloh and those of the ancient and middle Egyptian
dynasties ; then the contact of Assyria with Egypt and the conquest of the
latter led to an artistic relationship especially in small transportable works
of art. These relations were helped by the Phccnicians. The art of the
so-called "Hittites" in Syria and Asia Minor seems to have been strongly
affected by Babylonian and afterwards by Assyrian art. The Assyrian
influence, however, was apparently limited to the Hittite monuments of
Syria proper, where the contact was direct. An inquiry into the influence
of Assyrian art shows that this lasted long after the fall of Nineveh.
Persia, though her architecture was only partly an offshoot from Assyria,
was but her servile imitator in sculpture. The Greek of Asia Minor bor-
rowed much, also ; for example the origin of the Ionic order can be traced
back step by step to the monuments of Nineveh. A study of the origin of
the earliest myths represented in Greek art shows that many of them
originated in some form in Western Asia.
The First "Tabular View" of Harvard College,
1642-3. By H. B. Adams.
[Explained in a lecture on "History at Harvard University," Educational Course, J. H. IT.,
February 6, 1886 ; published in full in Education, May, June, 1886].
The earliest account of the course of study pursued at Harvard College,
which was founded in 1030, is in a tract called "New England's First
Fruits," originally published in 1043, reprinted in parts by the Massachu-
setts Historical Society in the first volume of its Collections and in full for
Joseph Sabin, in 1805. The tract consists of two parts, the first relating to
the progress of missionary work among the Indians, and the second to the
progress of education in New England, with special reference to Harvard
College. The curriculum of study is described in a scholastic way which,
at first reading, is almost as confusing to a modern student as the modern
elective system would be to a Puritan divine. In order to make the
scholastic scheme more easily intelligible, it has been reduced from a
descriptive to a graphical form, which, by historical courtesy, may be
called the F"irst "Tabular View" of Harvard College.
Among the points worthy of attention in this curriculum are : (1) The
course of study was for three years and was arranged for the so-called First,
Second, and Third Classes. The First Classis was of Third-year men. (2)
The attention of each class was concentrated for an entire day upon one or
two studies, with "theory" in the forenoon and "practice" in the after-
noon. (3) Monday and Tuesday were devoted to Philosophy, including
Logic and Physics for the First year ; Ethics and Politics for the Second
year, with Arithmetic, Geometry, and Astronomy for the Third year. All
this work was done in morning hours. In the afternoon came philosophi-
cal disputations for each class in its own field of study ("every one in
his art"). (4) Wednesday was Greek day for all classes. First-year men
studied Etymology and Syntax in the forenoon and practiced the rules of
92
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
Grammar in the afternoon ; the Second Class studied Prosody and Dialects
from 9 to 10 A. M. an i practised "in Poesy'' after dinner; Third-year
men did likewise in the theory and practice of Greek composition, prose
and verse. (5) Thursday was devoted to " the Eastern tongues," with the
theory of Hebrew, Chaldee and Syriac Grammar in the morning and
practice in corresponding Biblical texts in the afternoon. (6) Friday
was given up to Rhetoric. All students were taught the principles of
Rhetoric and all were required to practice English composition, and once
a month to declaim. (7) Saturday, at eight o'clock in the morning, all
the students were taught "Divinity Catecheticall," and, at nine o'clock,
" Common Places." *
(8) The last and least place in this otherwise excellent curriculum was
given to History and Nature. At one o'clock, Saturday afternoon, immedi-
ately after the twelve o'clock dinner, and at the fag end of the week, the
students were taught History in the winter and the Nature of Plants in the
summer. Historia eivilis and Historia naiuralis were close companions in
all early academic courses, and they have remained associated in some
American colleges down to very recent times. At Harvard, History and
Botany were probably consorted upon scholastic grounds, but it is interesting
to note that the summer season was assigned to Botany, thus implying
botanical practice as well as theory. (9) The absence of Latin from the*
entire plan of study is noticeable and is explained by the fact that students
were required to speak Latin in the class-room and in the college-yard.
Latin was the main requirement for admission to Harvard College. The
rule was : " When a schollar is able to understand Tully [Cicero] or such
like classic-all Latine author extempore and make and speake true Latine in
verse and prose, suo vtt aiunt Marte; and decline perfectly the paradigim's
[sic] of nounes and verbes in the Greek tongue : Let him then and not
•These Utter were common topics of scholastic discussion and digests of doctrine, argu-
ment or opinion. In a cyclopaedia of the sciences, published at Lyons in 1649,all branches
of knowledge are treated under the head of Loci Communes, in special chapters, with such
titles as Loci Ethici, Loci Occonomici, Loci Poliiici, Loci Theologici, Loci Jurisprudentiae,
etc., etc. Lord Bacon in the fifth hook (cap. 5) of his Advancement of Learning says " there
can hardly be anything more useful even for the old and popular sciences, than a sound help
for the memory ; that is a good and learned digest of Common Places. I am aware indeed
that the transferring of the things we read and learn into common place books is thought
by some to be detrimental to learning " but says Bacon " I hold diligence and
labour in the entry of common places to be a matter of great use aud support in studying."
Thus we see the connection between the mediaeval idea of a well-ordered digest of know-
ledge and the modern common-place book or note-book.
before be capable of admission into the Colledge." Such classical prepara-
tion was given to boys by the ministers in and about Cambridge, who were
well-educated Englishmen and talked Latin with their pupils. There was
also by the College "a faire Grammar Schoole, for the training up of young
scholhirs, and fitting of them for Academical learning." (10) The relative
importance of the various brandies of academic discipline, as indicated in
this original curriculum of Harvard College, appears to have been as follows :
Firsl, Philosophy (Logic and Physics, two hours; Ethics and Politics, two
hours ; Disputations, six hours) altogether, ten hours a week. Greek came
second, occupying, with New Testament Greek, seven hours. Rhetoric
(the writing and speaking of the mother-tongue) enjoyed the third place
of honor, employing six hours. Oriental languages held the fourth place,
occupying five hours a week. Mathematics stood next in order, with two
hours. The catechism and common places were equally favored with an
allowance of one hour. History and Botany were put on half-allowance,
each with one hour a week for a half-year. (11) Altogether in the scholas-
tic week at Harvard College, in 1642-3, there were thirty-three hours
of theory and practice, averaging eleven hours a week to each class. (12)
Saturday afternoon was a half-holiday, except that the first hour of it was
improved by the college, possibly with the hope that after an introduction
to History in winter and to the Nature of Plants in summer, students
would further improve these fields of study during the remainder of the
afternoon.
The following rules with reference to examinations and the bestowal of
degrees in early Harvard are not without interest :
" The summe of every lecture shall be examined, before the new lecture
be read."
" Every schollar, that on proofe is found able to read the originals of the
Old and New Testament into the Latine tongue, and to resolve them
logically; withall being of godly life and conversation; and at any publick
act hath the approbation of the Overseers and Master of the Colledge, is fit
to be dignified with his first degree."
"Every schollar that giveth up in writing a System, or Synopsis, or
summe of Logick, naturall and morall Philosophy, Arithmetick, Geometry,
and Astronomy : And is ready to defend his Theses or positions: Withall
skilled in the Originalls as abovesaid: And of godly life and conversation:
And so approved by the Overseers and Master of the Colledge, at any
publique act, is fit to be dignified with his 2d degree."
" The times and order of their Studies unlesse experience shall shew cause to alter."
Days of the Weeke.
8th Houre.
9th Houre.
10th Houre.
1st Houre.
2nd Houre.
3rd Houre.
4th Houre.
First Yeare.
Second Yeare.
Third Yeare.
First Yeare.
Second Yeare.
Third Yeare.
2nd Day.
Logick
first three
quarters.
Physicks
last quarter.
Ethicks and
Politicks at con-
venient distances
of time.
Arith. & Geom.
three first quarters.
Astronomy
the last.
Disputes.
Disputes.
Disputes.
3rd Day.
ditto.
ditto.
ditto.
ditto.
ditto.
ditto.
4th Day.
Greeke,
Etymologie
and
Syntax.
Greeke.
Prosodia
and
Dialects.
Greeke.
The 3rd yeare
perfect their
theory before
noon.
Greeke.
Practice the
precepts of
Grammar.
Greeke.
Practice in
Poesy, Nonnus,
Duport, or the
like.
Greeke.
Exercise style,
Composition, Im-
itation both in
prose and verse.
5th Day.
Hebrew
Grammar.
Chaldee.
Sy riack.
Practice in
the Bible.
Ezra and
Daniel.
Trestius'
New Testament.
General Exercises for all Classes.
6th Day.
Rhetorick
to all at the
8th houre.
Declamations.
Every schollar
once a monthe.
Common
Places
to all.
The rest of the day vacat * Rheloricis studiis
7th Day.
Divinity
Catecheticall
to all.
History
in the winter.
The Nature of
Plants in the
summer.
[* Vacat it here used in the
sense of is reserved for rhetori-
cal studies.]
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
93
REPORTS OF RECENT COMMUNICATIONS TO THE UNIVERSITY SOCIETIES.
The Correlation of v
Bloomfield.
and at in the Veda. By M.
[Abstract of a paper read at a meeting of the University Philological Association, Janu-
ary 8, 1886].
Ascoli, in his excellent treatise on the Prakritic change of m to v,
broaches occasionally the question of the existence of a corresponding
change in Sanskrit- — he does not refer to the Vedic dialect — and it seems to
me that his reference to this point does not do justice to the state of the
case. The following remarks are intended to supplement his paper by
pointing out : 1. That there are very distinct traces of a correlation of the
two sounds in the Vedic and classical dialects ; 2. That this correlation is
not restricted to the change of an m to v, but that the converse movement
occasionally takes place.
Vedic urvard, "field of grain" (apovpa), yields later urmild, personified in
the Riimayana as the sister of sitd, " the furrow." In Par. Gr. Su. ii. 17, 9
(Cf. Weber, Ind. Stud, ii, 392; Omina and Portenta, 373, note 2), the
plough ing-festival is described, and accordingly divinities of the field and
the plough are called upon for their aid. First in the list are urvard
and slid. When later, in the Ramiiyana, urmild turns up in the story as the
sister of slid, it seems imperative to regard urmild a development from
urvard, and I would see in it a diminutive formation from urvard, in which the
u has been lengthened secondarily by popular etymology (urmi, wave;
urmild, "the wavy field").
A purely Vedic example is contained in srdma, " snot," if we compare it
with srdva, " rheum." The latter is a common word. The former occurs in
Katy. £r. Su. xx. 3, 13, glossed by two scholiasts with gihhanaka, "snot,"
srdmah, sinhdnaka (!) ucyate and srdmah sihhdnakalf cdliholre prasiddhah. Cf.
Ind. Stud. iv. p. 426.
Another Vedic example is y cmaii<!=\/ cvaOc, " to spread." It occurs in the
Tait. Aranyaka. See Whitney, Roots, Verb-forms, etc., p. 181.
Yaska's disquisition upon cmac ana, Vedic and Sanskrit for " cemetery,"
seem to me to contain by implication a proof for the interchangeableness of
v and m in the time of the composition of the Vedic grammars, i.e., probably
before the time of Panini. Nirukta, 3.5, we have the following etymology
for this word : cmacdnam, cma-cayanam, cma cariram. What can this
cma=cariram be ? Yaska himself seems puzzled by this construction. He
regards it as an n-stem cman, and operates with it further on in explanation
of cmacru, " beard ; " cmacru lama cmani critam. I regard this as a most
interesting case in which Yaska, the oldest etymologist, has inherited and
misunderstood the material of an older etymologist, who either saw what in
fact may be the real state of the case, or at any rate had in mind a much more
sensible explanation of this cma, be it ultimately found acceptable or not.
Qmacdnd is oxytone ; the supposition that short a has fallen out in the first
syllable owing to this accentuation is natural. If we, therefore, substitute
*cva-cdna for cma-cdnA and suppose that an a has fallen out in the first
syllable, we arrive at cava-cayanam, " resting place of a corpse," as an
explanation of the word, which might well have been offered by a Hindu
etymologist. But Yaska misunderstood the intention of his predecessor as
far as the cma was concerned, and mechanically construed the n-stem
cman. I do not quite venture to offer Pali susdna, which presupposes
*svasdna, in support of the actuality of the supposed *gvacSna, as the later ver-
naculars offer instances of a development somewhat similar to that of Sk.
cmacdna: Pali susdna, e.g., Sindi surti = Sk. smrti, etc. Cf. Ascoli loc. cit.
pp. 208, note 22, and 222, note 43.
For vrandin, "making slack" (Rv. i. 54, 4, 5), Yaska, Nirukta, 5. 15, has
the following explanation : vrandi vrandater mrdubhdvakarmamh. Roth, on
p. 60 of his " Erliiuterungen," remarks : " Root vrad, as indicated by Yaska
himself, is without doubt a variant of root mrad, mrd." Even if that be not
absolutely certain, we may at least take it for granted that Yaska had this
derivation in mind, so that there appears at least to have been no doubt in
Yaska's mind about the interchangeableness of the two sounds.
Tait. s. ii. 1, 4, 3 reads : sa yamo devanam indriyiim ayuvata, tad yamasya
yamutvam, and Kauc, 128, 4, we have carat and carma in alliteration with
one another in a verse constructed with special reference to alliteration:
samo raja saritd ca raja bhuvo raja bhuvanam ca raja [ carvo raja carma ca raja
ta u nah carma yachantu devah.
The influence of this similarity of the two sounds is vigorously at play in
Vedic and Sanskrit MSS. My own collection hails largely from the litera-
ture of the Atharva-Veda. No doubt, the critical apparatus of every Vedic
text would yield fresh materials in illustration of this correlation of sounds.
Kauc. 3, 8 and 137, 36 the MSS. read: ya ud udvatah (Var. yad udvatah)
unnimatah ( Var. unnamatah, unnibatah) cakeyam. I have taken into the
text yad ud udvatah un nivatah cakeyam (cf. TS. iii. 2, 4, 4), and expressed
the belief that the MSS. represent collectively a syncretism of the accepted
reading with another version : yad udvatah unnamatah cakeyam. In any
case the writings of the MSS. are explainable only on the ground of the
great similarity of the sounds.
AV. xix. 42, 3, there is sutrdmne as var. of sutrdvne ; Va.it. Su. 13, 16, and
Gop. Br. ii. 2, 3 read cakmane, while VS. v. 5 reads cakvane; Kiiuc. 89, 1,
four of seven MSS. read manvabhih for manmabhih ; Kauc. 65, 15, four of
seven MSS. read devdtvd for devdtmd ; Kauc. 60, 1 9, two MSS. read
manthantdm anumantrayate for manthanidv anu° ; Kauc. 71, 1, there is the
hemistich, arico raja vibhajatl 'mam (! all MSS.) agnl vidharayan, where
sense is obtained by emending to 'mdv agnl ; AV. iii. 10, 10, the MSS. are
divided between the correct reading samrdhe and savrdhe; AV. xii. 1, 2,
many MSS. read madhyatas for badhyatas; xix. 31, 11, the vulgata reads
dvartim for dmrtam of the MSS. ; xix. 35, 5, the edition has mdrlyebhyas for
vabhrtenyds of the MSS. ; Par. Gr. Su. i. 1 6, 24, cydvacabalau occurs as a
variant to cyamacabalau ; (Jalikh. Gr. iii. 10, 2, cravo occurs as var. to cramo.
I have also noted mlksate as var. of viksale from some Vedic text.
From the later language I have at hand in addition to the cases cited
by Ascoli, cravana and cravana, "male and female begging monk," for
cramana and cramand; acvanta in Hemacandra's Anekarthasamgraha as
variant for acmanta ; acvaka and acmaka are variants of the same proper
name ; acmala occurs as a var. for acvaka in Vopadeva ; yamadvipa and
yavadvlpa are varying names of the same island ; yamanikd occurs as var. of
yavanikd. For all these see the Pet. Lex. Inscriptionally the name
Oovinda occurs as Gmninda; see Bfihler Vallabhl grants, xvi. (Indian Anti-
quary) ; the Atharva Veda is now called .4 Merman- Veda in Kashmir (see
Roth, Der AV. in Kaschmir, p. 11). The last two examples are
especially interesting, as they exhibit in an incontrovertible form the
change from v to m, which Ascoli treats with scepticism. The root hmal,
mentioned by Ascoli, is fairly well authenticated as equivalent to root hval. It
occurs in the dhdtupdtha, Panini, Vopadeva, and twice in the schol. to the
Ath. Praticakhya ; both are explained in the dhdtupdtha by gatau, calane.
Cicupalavadha, 9, 24, the reading samavabodhisata is to be emended in
accordance with the explanation of the schol. to samam abodhisata.
The Origin and Settlement of the Pennsylvania
Germans. By M. D. Learned.
[Abstract of a paper read at a meeting of the University Philological Association,
March 5, 1886],
The object of the paper is to ascertain the origin of the German settlers
of Pennsylvania and thus determine the linguistic elements brought by them
to that Province and afterwards developed into the unique speech known
as " Pennsylvania German " (Pennsylvanisch Deutsch). The subject, while
of peculiar interest to the linguist, has for the student of American history
and institutions an importance too often overlooked. No State of the Union,
perhaps, offers more interesting phenomena in social history. Here may be
seen representatives of almost every stage of our national development;
the man of modern culture, and within sight of his dwelling the crude,
honest, industrious Pfiilzer and Swiss wearing the dress of two centu-
ries ago, happily indifferent to the march of science, literature or art,
observing the customs of his forefathers on the banks of the Rhine. It is
in the midst of such a civilization that we are to seek the causes giving
rise to this important speech-Island in the domain of German dialects.
After giving a historical sketch of the early German settlements in other
parts of the country, the writer considers the German colonization of Penn-
sylvania in two periods: (1) that of colonization proper (1682-1750),
94
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
(2) that of migration interspersed with direct colonization (1750-circa
1800).
As causes of the great influx of Germans to America during the first
period, two groups of facts present themselves: (1) the generally unsettled
political condition of Germany, (2) the results of Penn's travels in that
country. Under the first, are to be emphasized the ravages of Louis XIV
in the Rhine-Pfalz and the expulsion of 500,000 Huguenots from his realm
by the revocation of the edict of Nantes. Under the second, are to be
mentioned the acquaintances made by Penn in meeting the Quakers of Hol-
land, Hamburg, Liibeck, the Pfalz, and other parts of Germany at Amster-
dam, the organization of the Frankfurt Land Company, and the inducement
offered to Crefeld merchants to purchase land in Pennsylvania.
The first organized German settlement in Pennsylvania was made by
Crefelders under Franz Daniel Pastorius, at Germantown, 1683. In 1694
came the " Erweckte " (awakened) under Johann Kelpius and settled " Das
weib in der wuste" on the Wissahickon. From 1704-12 settlements were
made in Oley, Berks County, by English Friends, French Huguenots, and
Germans from the Palatinate. In 1712 land was purchased in Eden in the
present Lancaster County and settled by emigrants from the cantons of
Zurich, Bern and Schaffhausen. They had gone to the Rhine country above
Strassburg in 1672, from the Ehineland to England 1708 and thence to
Pennsylvania. Their settlement at Eden (Pequea Thai), Lancaster County,
was soon increased by other Germans (probably mostly Pfalzer) and Swiss.
In 1716 large German settlements were made in the present Berks and
Montgomery Counties. In 1719 Schwartzenau Tilufer (Baptists) under
Peter Becker settled on the Shippack in Oley, Berks County, and on the
Conestoga and Miihlbach, in Lancaster County. In 1723 a company of
Pfalzer from Schoharie, N. Y., settled at Tulpehocken, Berks County. These
last were joined in 1729 by Conrad Weiser with an accession of emigrants
from the Palatinate. In the same year Palatines settled at Quintaphilla
and German Jews at Schafferstown, Lebanon County. In 1730 a Dutch
settlement was made in Pike township, Berks County. In 1734 Hereford
township and adjoining land in Montgomery and Lehigh were settled by
Schwenkfelders. Moravians from Herrnhut, Saxony, having left their settle-
ment made in Georgia in 1734, came to Pennsylvania and began to build
Bethlehem in 1741. Four years later the remaining Georgia Moravians
came to Pennsylvania and settled in the counties around Bethlehem.
Beading was settled 1748 by Wurtemburgers and Palatines.
The second period, that of migration, began before 1730. In the entire
Kittatining Valley the Germans have supplanted to a great extent the
Scotch-Irish. This is especially the case with the Counties of York, Lan-
caster, Franklin, Adams and Cumberland, a fact due in part, doubtless, to
the native antipathy of the two races ; but not a little to the open feud
brought about in the Cressap war in 1736. The line of migration and
settlement follow the march of the advancing Scotch-Irish into the north-
ern and western portions of the State.
By considering the number, distribution, social, political, intellectual
and religious character and aims of the German settlers thus traced in
various parts of the State, we shall find the causes of the dialectic phe-
nomena of these people. At the end of the seventeenth century the Ger-
mans in Pennsylvania were estimated at 200 families; in 1750, at about
90,000 persons; and in 1800, at about 150,000. Many of the Pennsylvania
Germans are to be found to-day in the larger cities, as Philadelphia, Read-
ing, Harrisburg and others, where it is possible to find all shades of dialec-
tic difference ; but the distinctively Pennsylvania German speech is to be
sought in the country districts and towns. From the foregoing historical
examination, we have the following results contributing to the formation of
this speech :
In Germantown the border dialect between Low Frankish and Rhine
Frankish brought in by the Crefelders; the Rhine Pfalzish of the Pala-
tines and the South Frankish near the Alemanic borders ; in Berks County,
Rhine Pfalzish and French peculiarities brought in by Palatines and French
Huguenots ; at Tulpehocken, Rhine Pfalzish introduced by the Schoharie Pala-
tines and their countrymen direct from Germany ; in Bern, Swiss (Alemanic)
elements ; in Brecknock, Caernarvon and Cumru townships, Welsh ; in Union
township, Swedish, English, Welsh ; in Pike township, Dutch ; in Hereford
township and adjoining j>ortions of Montgomery and Lehigh counties, Silesian
peculiarities brought in by Schwenkfelders ; in the neighborhood of Eden,
(Pequea Thai) Lancaster county, Swiss (Alemanic) and the dialectic char-
acteristics of Schwarzenau, Marienborn, Schlechtenboden, as well as of the
leading towns and villages of the Rhine Pfiilz ; about Bethlehem, the
Upper Saxon dialect represented by the Moravians of Herrnhut ; in and
around Reading, the peculiarities of Wiirtemburg and the Palatinate.
These dialectic characteristics were brought over by Germans who were
men from the humbler walks of life, of firm convictions, strongly imbued
with the earnest Pietistic spirit of the time, cherishing the traditions of
the Fatherland, caring little for political distinction, content to till the soil
unmolested in their religious and social life. If to these facts favoring the
retention of the original speech, we add that, besides the printing of German
newspapers in the larger towns at a later date, printing presses were estab-
lished early in the eighteenth century, at Germantown and Ephrata, from
which periodicals of various descriptions were distributed in great numbers
to the reading public, we shall find the development of a peculiar German
speech the necessary result.
By Herbert Weir
The Dialects of North Greece.
Smyth.-
[Abstract of a paper read at a meeting of the University Philological Association,
April 2, 1886.]
This paper aimed at presenting a comprehensive sketch of the tribal
relations of the Greeks occupying the district north of the Corinthian gulf,
with the exception of the Megarians and Athenians, together with a com-
plete summary of the peculiarities of the idiom of each canton, in the
endeavor to establish definite centres of dialect life. The conclusions
reached in reference to the dialect of Western Greece were based upon the
first exhaustive examination of the inscriptions of Epirus, Acarnania,
Aetolia, of the Aenianes and of Phthiotis, that has hitherto been made.
The statement of Strabo — that all the Hellenes nortli of the Isthmus,
except the Megarians, the Athenians and the Dorians settled about Par-
nassus, were in his time called AioAeZc — finds no support in the epigraphical
monuments. The dialects of Thessaly and, with some limitations, that of
Boeotia, alone deserve the epithet " Aeolic" Despite many patent cases of
similarity between the idioms of these two cantons, there exist certain
radical differences, which dialectologists have not satisfactorily explained.
This divergence between these two dialects consists in the greater number
of Doric ingredients in the Boeotian idiom. It has been assumed that
these Dorisms are either survivals of an Aeolo-doric period or of the
speech of the inhabitants of Boeotia prior to the so-called invasion of the
Boeotians from Arne in Thessaly.
This paper, while endeavoring to prove the indefensibility of each of
these theories, maintained that the original inhabitants of Boeotia were of
Aeolic, the invaders of Doric stock and that to the influence of the latter is
due that generous admixture of Dorisms, which constitutes one of the pecu-
liarities of the Boeotian idiom.
The testimony of the ancients offers no cogent support to the theory that
the invaders were of Aeolic blood, the statement of Thucydides, I. 12, be-
ing evidently a make shift to establish an external harmony between his ac-
count and that of Homer, who recognizes Boeotians as inhabitants of Boeotia.
On the other hand, we have no inconsiderable mass of testimony (hitherto
not placed in its proper connection) proving the Aeolic character of the
original settlers. Athamas the son of Aeolos was king of Erchomenos the
city of the Minyai, who were bound by municipal ties to Iolcos in Thessaly,
the yy A'toAic: of the ancients, and who had settlements in Thessaliotis. It
is not beyond the range of probability that the Minyai were originally set-
tlers on the Pagasaean gulf, that they emigrated thence to the Copaeic val-
ley and in fact that Boeotia and Thessaly formed before the Trojan war
one territorial district. The similarity of the ancient worship of the two
cantons, the recurrence of the same geographical designations and many
other elements of resemblance, which cannot be merely incidental, make
for the conclusion that originally Aeolic was the vernacular throughout the
Eastern portion of North Greece.
The Minyai, expatriated by the irruption of the Dorians, fled to Lemnos
and settled eventually in Elis. The conjecture of Fick in reference to the
origin of the admixture of dialects in the Elean speech through Minyean
influence can justly assert a high degree of probability, since it alone
explains satisfactorily the existence of such Aeolic ingredients as the fi?Moi£,
the accus. plur. in -air. and -olq (-aip, -oip), which no sound criticism can
establish either as importations from Arcadia or as the result of isolated
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
95
and spontaneous evolution. The North Greek Dorisms of this dialect are
to be referred to the influence of the Aetolian settlers. The terra A'tofatic
Boturoi, applied to the Boeotians, has been correctly explained as being
equivalent to AioXtlc — the original inhabitants — nal Boiaroi — the later
immigrants.
Thessaly, the home of the Aeolic Achilles, was the abode of a people
destined to give birth to the epopee. Hence this race of vigorous intellect
was better able to resist the encroachment of the speech of the Dorian con-
querors under Thessalus than the weaker, though kindred, Boeotians. In
Thessaly, therefore, we meet with but few Dorisms (h for etc, irori, uparoc,
etc.) ; in Boeotia, however, while frequent Aeolisms indicate the existence
of an Aeolic substratum (inf. in -Ipev, datives in -eoot, etc.), the Dorisms are
more plentiful (lap6c, accus. pi. in -uf, «<<>? by compens. lengthening, cm6
for Aeolic &nb, av for ov, nat etc.)
The dialects of Western Greece disclose a genuine proletariate of speech,
which, with occasional epichoristic variations, is all of one type. The
Phthiotic idiom is so closely allied to that of Aetolia, all powerful at the
period of the supremacy of the Aetolian league, that we cannot doubt but
that the latter has supplanted the vernacular, which was homogeneous with
that of the other provinces of the Thessalian rerpapxia. The following
are a few of the peculiar forms of the Western Greek type: — hi/Kovra,
once in an Oetean inscription, ■Siapdc and deupdc, Aioxt&ric eiav, each once in
the dialect of Epirus, non-contraction of ea, eo, eu, dat. plur. in -oic (cons, decl.)
ev for cif, yev for yt once in Epirus. The inscriptions, which open up this
perspective of dialect life are unfortunately of so late a period, that it is
well-nigh impossible to reestablish the ancient coloring of the native
speech. The oldest Epirotic inscription dates from between 342-326 B. c,
the Acarn. inscriptions date from 200, the oldest Aetolian between 249 and
189; none of the Phthiotic monuments antedate the period of the incor-
poration of Phthiotis in the Aetolian league. A generous wealth of forms
is displayed in the dialect of Locris and Phocis, that of the former espe-
cially preserving the oldest known type of North Doric. It contains
peculiarities, which may be conjectured to have been the common heritage
of all Northern Dorians, since the Aetolians at the time of the return of
the Heracleidae infused into the Elean speech phenomena found later in
the Locrian dialect alone. The Delphic inscriptions represent an older
linguistic stage than those of the rest of Phocis ; F is found three times
(k/U'Foc aifei Ftf) in Delphic territory, once in Phocis (FavaKeiui).
The complete collection of material, which was the substructure of this
paper, affords a survey of the entire development of North Greek speech,
and justifies a division of the entire territory into two linguistic centres.
I. The Eastern, or Aeolic, comprising the dialect of Thessaly and that
of Boeotia, with its stronger intermixture of Dorisms. II. The Western or
pure North Doric division. The interlying cantons, though essentially
North Doric, are colored by the adoption of certain loan-forms from the
East, the extension of which can be traced with great precision. So, for
example, the dat. pi. -eaai has not succeeded in pushing its westward
course beyond the boundary of Phocis and Locris. Other Aeolisms
(Apu/uetif, Ilf/Aex/lrac, evuaXei/ievoc) are to be explained as importations
and not as survivals of an Aeolo-doric period. Those dialectologists have
committed a grave mistake, who regard the use of iv cum accus. and irkp
for n-fpi as Aeolisms. The former is North Doric, the latter, though
sporadic, is not confined to the limits of a single family of dialects.
Finally, the necessity of exact chronology in the investigation of dialect-
ical phenomena was insisted upon and it was shown that the dialectologist
can steer a middle course between the " Stammbaumstheorie " of the Dar-
winist Schleicher and the " Wellentheorie " of Johannes Schmidt or Paul
Meyer. If linguistic phenomena alone be taken as the point of departure
in dialectology the possibility of limited Bpeech-centres is unduly weakened.
Areas of greater or less extent must have existed in which originally
"dialects" held sway; these areas need not be co-extensive with those
resulting from political division, nor are they free from disintegration
through the influence of neighboring speech-areas and of self-generated
forms.
The Malarial "Germ" of Laveran.
Sternberg.
By Geo. M.
[Abstract of a paper read before the University Scientific Association, March 8, 1886].
Laveran, a medical officer of the French army, as a result of extended
researches made in Algeria, announced, in 1881, the discovery of a parasitic
micro-organism in the blood of patients suffering from malarial fever. His
observations led him to the conclusion that the organism in question is
found only in the blood of malarial fever patients, and that it is directly
concerned in the etiology of these fevers. The parasite is described as pre-
senting itself under several different forms and as being sometimes endowed
with active movements, due to the presence of several motile flagella. This,
however, was exceptional, and it was commonly observed as an amoeboid
organism which contains in its interior granules of black pigment.
The organisms were found most abundantly at the outset of a malarial
paroxysm, and were partly free, and partly attached to the red blood cor-
puscles. They disappeared from the blood when quinine was administered
in effective doses. These observations were confirmed by Eichard, in 1882,
in a communication made to the French Academy of Sciences. More
recently, additional confirmatory evidence has been furnished by two Italian
investigators, Marchiafava and Celli, who have made extended researches
in the Santo Spirito hospital of Rome. They find that during a malarial
paroxysm blood drawn from the finger of the patient constantly contains an
amoeboid parasite in considerable numbers. This is found for the most part
in the interior of the red blood corpuscles, and may or may not contain pig-
ment granules.
During a recent visit to Rome Dr. Sternberg accompanied the gentlemen
last referred to, to the Santo Spirito hospital, and a most satisfactory
demonstration was made to him of the presence and amoeboid movements
of this parasite, in blood drawn from the finger of a patient in the first
stage of a malarial paroxysm.
As the result of numerous microscopical examinations made during the
past two years Marchiafava and Celli confirm Laveran as to the constant
presence of this amoeboid organism in the blood of patients suffering from
malarial fever, and as to its disappearance under the administration of
quinine. They have not been able to find the parasite in the blood of
patients suffering from other diseases.
This organism appears to be identical with the " hyaline bodies," usually
containing pigment granules, which are found in the interior of the red
blood corpuscles, in the capillary vessels of the brain and other organs, in
fatal cases of " pernicious fever."
Finally, Marchiafava and Celli have induced typical attacks of intermittent
fever, in previously healthy persons, by injecting into the circulation a
small quantity of blood drawn from a malarial patient during a paroxysm
of fever. The presence of the parasite was demonstrated in the injected
blood, and it was found again in the blood of the persons subjected to the
experiment during the induced intermittent paroxysms. These paroxysms
were arrested and the parasite disappeared from the blood when quinine
was administered.
PUBLICATION AGENCY OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY: NOTICE AS TO RECENT PUBLICATIONS.
Photograph of the Normal Solar Spectrum. Made by Professor H. A. Rowland.
By reason of the prolonged season of unfavorable weather during the months of Feb-
ruary and March, the work of the photographer on the plates of the solar spectrum was
greatly delayed. It is now well advanced and the orders of subscribers will be filled at
an early day. The subscriptions already received exceed the contemplated first edition.
Another edition will, however, be ready by July 1st. Subscription to the set of seven
plates, mounted, is $12; unmounted, $10. A prospectus will be sent on application.
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriac Manuscript with the Antilegomena
Epistles. Edited by Isaac H. Hall.
The issue of this work is limited to 250 copies in all, and half of this number has already
been taken up. Seventeen pages of the MS. have been reproduced by the phototype
process, and an introduction and brief notes have been added by the editor. The price
is fixed at $3. A few copies will be bound iu cloth and sold at $4.50. A prospectus will
be sent on application.
96
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
LIST OF BOOKS AND PAPERS WRITTEN BY PRO-
FESSOR C. D. MORRIS.
Booh.
Principia Latina : an introduction to the Latin Language. New York,
1860.
Principles of Latin Grammar, — by P. Bullions. Revised by Charles D.
Morris. New York, 1867.
A compendious Grammar of Attic Greek. New York, 1869 ; 2d ed.
1870; 3d ed. 1873; 4th ed. 1876.
A compendious Grammar of the Latin Language. New York, 1870;
4th ed. 1876.
Parsing and Reading Lessons adapted to Morris's Latin Grammar. New
York, 1870.
Probatio Latina : a series of questions designed to test the progress of
learners in the Latin Language. New York, 1871.
A Latin Reading-Book, — adapted for use in connection with his Com-
pendious Grammar of the Latin Language. New York, 1873.
Parsing and Reading Lessons adapted to Morris's Attic Greek Grammar.
New York, 1873.
Thucydides, book L (In press).
Articles printed in Magazines and Periodicals.
On the age of Xenophon at the time of the Anabasis. Transactions,
American Philological Association, 1874.
On some forms of Greek conditional sentences. Transactions, American
Philological Association, 1875.
Latin Salutatory. Delivered on the 3d Anniversary of the Johns Hop-
kins University, February 22, 1879, and subsequently printed by the
University in pamphlet form.
Reports of " Mnemosyne," fifteen in number. American Journal of
Philology, Volumes I to VI, 1880-1886.
On Xenophon's Oeconomicus. American Journal of Philology, Vol. I,
No. 2, 1880.
Note on Horace, Carmina I. xv. 14. Johns Hopkins University Cir-
culars, Vol. I, No. 5, 1880.
A new interpretation of iurirlayxvoc in Sophocles, Ajax 472. Johns
Hopkins University Circulars, Vol. I, No. 7, 1880.
Recent attempts to explain the forms attributed to the verb which
appears in our Lexicons as fp£u>. Johns Hopkins University Circulars,
Vol. I, No. 7, 1880.
A note on Sophocles' Antigone, 1102. Johns Hopkins University Cir-
culars, Vol. I, No. 8, 1881.
On an alleged fact in the life of Euripides. Johns Hopkins University
Circulars, Vol. I, No. 11, 1881.
Review of Timayenis" History of Greece. American Journal of Philo-
logy, Vol. II, No. 5, 1881.
Notice of Enthoven de lone Euripidea. American Journal of Philology,
VoL U, No. 5, 1881.
Notice of Smith's " Study of Plutarch's Life of Artaxerxes." American
Journal of Philology, Vol. II, No. 6, 1881.
Note on Demosthenes 34, 25. American Journal of Philology, Vol. Ill,
No. 10, 1882.
On ov jifj with the future in prohibitions. Proceedings, American Philo-
logical Association, 1882.
On an idiom of Demosthenes. Johns Hopkins University Circulars, Vol.
I, No. 13, 1882.
On the beginnings of the Athenian hegemony. Johns Hopkins Univer-
versity Circulars, Vol. I, No. 17, 1882.
On a probable error in Plutarch, Pericles, c. 23. American Journal of
Philology, Vol. Ill, No. 12, 1882 ; Johns Hopkins University Circu-
lars, Vol. II, No. 19, 1882.
A note on the Chalkidians. Johns Hopkins University Circulars, Vol.
II, No. 21, 1883.
Review of Schuckburgh's Lysias. American Journal of Philology, Vol.
IV, No. 13, 1883.
Review of Dunbar's "Concordance to the comedies and fragments of
Aristophanes." American Journal of Philology, Vol. IV, No. 16, 1883.
Review of two papers by Karl Brugmann. American Journal of Phil-
ology, Vol. V, No. 18, 1884.
Reviews of Humphrey's " Observations sur Thucydide, I. XI." Ameri-
can Journal of Philology, Vol. V, No. 18, 1884.
Jurisdiction of the Athenians over their allies. American Journal of
Philology, Vol. V, No. 19, 1884 ; Johns Hopkins University Circulars,
Vol. II, No. 22, 1883.
Relation of a Greek colony to its mother city. American Journal of
Philology, Vol. V, No. 20, 1884.
On the rights of a Greek metropolis over its allies. Johns Hopkins
University Circulars, Vol. Ill, No. 29, 1884.
On K. Brugmann's recent grammatical studies. Johns Hopkins Univer-
sity Circulars, Vol. Ill, No. 32, 1884.
On the financial history of Athens. Johns Hopkins University Circu-
lars, Vol. IV, No. 36, 1885.
On Krueger"s chronology of the so-called "Summary" of Thucydides.
Johns Hopkins University Circulars, Vol. V, No. 45, 1885.
Unpublished MSS.
A popular lecture entitled " Roman Society in Juvenal."
A paper on Lucian's "Ovoc and Apuleius.
A paper discussing Kirchhoff's Herodotus.
An academic lecture on Translations.
Translations in English of the following :
Euripides, Bacchae.
Euripides, Ion.
Persius.
Thucydides II and in..
A book of Homer's Iliad.
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES,
Scientific Association.
April 7.— Seventy-first regular meeting. Professor Remsen In the chair. Forty-five
members present.
Papers read :
Recent Advances in our Knowledge of the Visceral Nerves, by H. N. Martin.
. Measurements of the Absolute Wave Lengths of Light, by Louis Bell.
Chemical Action in a Magnetic Field, by I. Remsen.
May 5.— Seventy-second regular meeting. Professor Remsen in the chair. Thirty-five
members present.
Papers read:
lms, by A. L. Kimball.
A Study of Psychological Time, by G. 8. Hall.
Some Optical Properties of Metal Films, by a
Proof or a Theorem of Eisenstein's, by F. Franklin.
Philological Association.
April 2 Sixty-ninth regular meeting. Professor Gildersleeve in the chair. Thirty-
six members present.
Papers read:
On the Dialects of North Greece, by H. W. Smyth. (Abstract on p. 34.)
Contributions to the Exegesis of the First Book of the Atharva- Veda, by M. Bloom-
field.
May 7.— Seventieth regular meeting. Professor Gildersleeve In the chair. Forty-five
members present.
Papers read: •
On four unpublished White Lecythi from Athens, by Professor J. II. Wright, of
Dartmouth College.
On some points of Intonation and Quantity in English, Norse, and German, by A. E.
Eooe.
Historical and Political Science Association.
March meetings. — Dr. H. B. Adams in the chair.
Papers read:
The Contents of the Bluntscbli MSSL by J. M. Vincent. (Abstract on p. 59.)
The National Bureau of Labor, by E. R. L. Gould.
The Study of American History in our Schools and Colleges, by F. N. Thorpe.
National Aid to Education, by W. H. Gardiner.
April meetings.— Dr. H. B, Adams In the chair.
Willem Uaselinx, Founder of the Dutch an
Papers, by J. F. Jameson.
and Swedish West India Companies, two
The Reform of Railway Abuses, by R. T. Ely.
The Origin of the " Mace," by E. Leyh.
The Nature of the Railway Problem, by R. T. Ely.
The Economic Aspect of Administrative Reform, by Dorman B. Eaton.
Mathematical Society,
April 8.— Professor Newcomb in the chair. Eight members present.
Papers read :
On the Combination of Errors, by S. Newcomb.
An Equation in Finite Differences, by W. E. Story.
Note on Binomial Linear Differential Equations, by T. Craig.
Generalization of Two Theorems, by D. Barcrokt.
A Method of Solving Riccati's Equation, by J. C. Fields.
Jialtimore Naturalists' Pield Club.
The regular monthly meetings of the Field Club have been continued through the past
winter, and papers have been read as follows :
January 20. — Seasonal Dormancy of Animals, by II. H. Donaldson.
List of Molluscs of Baltimore, by (). Lugger.
February 17. — Earthworms, by E. A. Andrews.
Classification by means of Phyllogeny, applied to the Stomatopods, by W. K. Brooks.
March 17.— Recent work on the Physiology of Chlorophyll, by W. H. Howell.
Nutrition of Gasteropod Embryos, by J. P. McMurrich.
April 21. — Mr. Arthur reported on tne field work of the Botanical Section. Upwards
of 50 species of plants had been found in blossom up to date. Symplocarpus foetidus
was found in bloom February 28th, near Catonsville, by Mr. Sollers.
Mr. Sollers described a purple variety of the flower, which he found growing with
the common form. This was figured and described by Barton as a distinct variety
in his Medical Botany, published in the early part of the century, but no recent
notice of it has been found.
Mr. Bayley said that some very good specimens of Haydenite had been recently dis-
covered near Baltimore.
Dr. McMurrich exhibited specimens of two species of Planarians, one of which had
deposited its cocoon of eggs while in captivity.
Dr. Barton described an interesting case of bees visiting the flowers of the Southern
yellow jessamine (Gelsemium sempervirens ait), in bloom in Baltimore. In its
Southern habitat, it is said, that bees do not visit it, The toxic effect of the honey,
whicli was obtained by piercing the corolla-tube, was immediate, producing partial,
and total stupor and finally death. Thus it seems that insects learn to avoid
poisonous plants only by experience.
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
97
RECENT ACCESSIONS TO THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY.
(This list includes the principal bound volumes recently received, but does not comprise
pamphlets or the current numbers of periodicals.)
MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.
Alglave, E. and Boulard, J. The electric light. New York, 1884. O.
Brezina, A. Interferenz-erscheinungen an krystallplatten. Text and plates, (n. p.)
(n. d.) Q. and F.
DiiiiRiNG, E. Geschichte der principien der mechanik. Leipzig, 1877. O.
Forsyth, A. R. Treatise on differential equations. London, 1885. 0.
Grow, J. History of Greek mathematics. Cambridge, 1884. O.
Helmholtz, H. L. F. On the sensations of tone. Tr. A. J. Ellis. London, 1885. Q.
Hoffmann, W. Beschreibung der erde. Vols. 1-5. Stuttgart, 1832-42. O.
Kempe, H. R. Handbook of electrical testing. London, 1884. D.
Mascart, E. and Joubert, J. Treatise on electricity and magnetism. Vol. 1. Tr.
Atkinson. London, 1883. O.
Quarterly Journal of pure and applied mathematics. 14 vols. London, 1857-77. 0.
Ramsay, A. Bibliography, guide and index to climate. London, 1884. O.
Resal, H. TraitC Slementaire de mecanique celeste. 2d ed. Paris, 1884. Q.
Rolleston, G. Scientific papers and addresses. Oxford, 1884. O.
Stokes, G. G. Mathematical and physical papers. 2 vols. Cambridge, 1883. O.
Verdet, E. Vorlesungen fiber die wellentfreorie des lichtes. Braunschweig, 1881. O.
Wullner, A. Lehrbuch der experimental-physik. 2 vols. Leipzig, 1882-4. O.
CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY.
Beck, L. Die geschichte des eisens. I. Braunschweig, 1884. O.
Buch, L. von. Gesammelte schriften. 5 vols. Berlin, 1867. Q.
Gmelin, L. Handbook of chemistry. Tr. H. Watts. 17 vols. London, 1848-66. 0.
Heilprin, A. Contributions to the tertiary geology and palaeontology of the U, S. Phila-
delphia, 1884. Q.
Kekule, A. Lehrbuch der organischen chemie. 3 vols, Erlangen, 1867. Q.
Kerl, B. Metallurgiscbe probirkunst. 2te aufl. Leipzig, 1882. O.
Lehmann, J. Untersuchung fiber die entstehung der alt-krystallinischen schieferge-
steine, mit atlas (28 plates in portfolio). Bonn, 1884. F.
Lepsios, R. Das westlieheSud-Tirol. Berlin, 1878. Q.
Masson, J. The atomic theory of Lucretius. London, 1884. O.
Mojsisovics v. Mojsvar, E. Die dolomit-riffe von Sudtirol und Venetien. 2 vols.
Wien, 1879, Q. and F.
Phillips, J. H. Ore deposits. London, 1884. O.
Thomson, J. Thermochemischeuntersuchungen. Leipzig, 1886. O.
Tschkrmak, G. Mikroskopische beschaffenheit der meteoriten. Stuttgart, 1885. F.
Van Dorp, W. A., et. al. Recueil des travaux chimiques des Pays-Bas. Leide, 1882-3. O,
Wurtz, A. Lea hautes etudes pratiques d. 1. universites d'Allemagne. Paris, 1882. Q.
BIOLOGY.
Balfour, F. M. Works. Memorial Edition. 4 vols. London, 1885. Q.
Brunton, T. L. Text-book of pharmacology, therapeutics, and materia medica. Phila-
delphia, 1885. O.
Charcot, J. M. Lecons sur les maladies du systeme nerveux. 3 vols. Paris, 1884. O.
De Bary, A. Comparative anatomy of phaeneroganis and ferns. Oxford, 1884. O.
Dolan, T. M. Rabies or hydrophobia. London, 1879. D.
Eichhorst, H. Handbucb der speciellen pathologie und therapie. Wien, 1884. O.
Exner, S. Localisation der functionen in der grosshirnrinde des menschen. Wien,
1881. O.
Flechsig, P. Die leitungsbahnen ini gehirn und riickenmark des menschen. Leipzig,
1876. Q.
Forbes, H. 0. A naturalist's wanderings in the Eastern Archipelago. London, 1885. 0.
Fout, G. F. Medical economy during the middle ages. New York, 1883. O.
Guy, W. A. and Ferrier, D. Principles of forensic medicine. London, 1881. D.
Hammond, W. A. Diseases of the nervous system. New York, 1881. O.
Treatise on insanity in its medical relations. New York, 1883. O.
Hehn, V. Wanderings of plants and animals. Ed, J. A. Stallybrass. London, 1885. O.
Howes, G. B. Atlas of practical elementary biology. London, 1885. F.
Jones, C. H. Studies on functional nervous disorders. London, 1870. 0,
Knight, J. Orthopcedia. New York, 1884. 0.
Landois, L. Lehrbuch der physiologic des menschen. 4te auf. Wien, 1884. 0.
Leclerc, L. Histoire de la medicine arabe. 2 vols. Paris, 1876.
Lek, A. B. The microtomist's vade-mecum. Philadelphia, 1885. D.
Merkel, F. "Ueber die endigungen der sensiblen nerven in d. haut der wirbelthiere.
Rostock, 1880. Q.
Milne-Edwards, H. Histoire naturelle des coralliaires. 3 vols. Paris, 1857. O.
Mouat, F. J. and Sn ell, H.S. Hospital construction and management. London, 1883. Q.
Preyer, W. Specielle pbysiologie des embryo. Leipzig, 1885. O.
Quatrefages, A. de. The human species. New York, 1883. D.
Retzius, G. Das gehororgan der wirbelthiere. 2 vols. Stockholm, 1882. F.
Ross, J. Treatise on diseases of the nervous system. 2 vols. London, 1883. O.
Sanket, W. H. O. Lectures on mental disease. London, 1884. O.
Strasburger, K. Das botanische practicum. Jena, 1884. O.
Taylor, A. S. Manual of medical jurisprudence. 8th ed. Philadelphia, 1880. O.
Taylor, A. S. Principles and practice of medical jurisprudence. Philadelphia, 1883. O.
Thanhoffer, L. von. Grundzfige der vergleichenden pbysiologie und histologic Stutt-
gart, 1885. 0.
Weismann,A. Entstchungdersexualzellenbcidenhydromedusen. 2vols. Jena, 1883. F.
Wiedersheim, R. Lehrbuch d. vergleichenden anatomie d. wirbelthiere. I. Jena, 1882.
O.
Wilks, S. Lectures on diseases of the nervous system. London, 1883. O,
PHILOLOGY AND ARCHAEOLOGY.
Greek, Latin, and General Philology.
Apuleius, L. Opera. Ed. G. F. Hildebrand. Llpsiae, 1842. 0.
Aristotle. Ethics. Sir A. Grant. 4th ed. London, 1885. O.
Bernays, J. Gesammelte abhandlungen. Berlin, 1885. O.
Betant, E. A. Lexicon tbucydideum. Genevae, 1841. O.
Carpentier, D. P. Glossarium novum ad scriptores medii aevl. Paris, 1766. F.
Codrington, R. H. Melanesian languages. Oxford, 1885. O.
Cook, F. C. Origins of religion and language. London, 1884. O.
Desiderata du corpus inscriptionum d' l'acad. de Berlin. Par E. Dcsjardins. Paris,
1873. F.
Dunbar, H. A complete concordance to Aristophanes. Oxford, 1883. Q.
Ebeling, H. Lexicon homericum. Leipzig, 1876-80. Q.
Forcellinus, A. Totius latinitatis lexicon. Rec. Furlanettus. 6 vols. Pratl, 1858-60. F.
Griger, W. Civilization of the eastern Iranians in ancient times. London, 1885. O.
Gerber, G. Die sprache als ku nst. 2 vols. Berlin, 1885. O,
Gladstone, W, E. Studies on Homer and the homeric age. 3 vols. Oxford, 1858. 0.
Gunther, G. Grundzfige der tragischen kunst. Leipzig, 1885. 0.
Inscriptions Graecae antiquissimae. Ed. H. Riehl. Berlin, 1882. F.
Kopp, W. F. Palaeographia critica. 4 vols. Mannheim, 1817. Q.
Nettlesiiip, H. Lectures and essays on subjects connected with Latin literature.
Oxford, 1885. D.
Papyrus Grecs du Louvre et de la Bibliotheque Imp£riale. Paris, 1865. F.
Paucker, C. Vorarbeitung zur latein. spracbgeschichte. Berlin, 1883. O.
Perrot, G. L'eloquence politique et judiciare in Athenes. Paris, 1873. O.
Essai sur le droit public d'Athfcnes. Paris, 1869. O.
Plinius, C. S. Naturalis historiae libri XXXVIII. Rec. J. Sillig. Hamburg, 1851. O.
Pokel, W. Philologisches schriftsteller-lexicon. Leipzig, 1882. O.
Reinach, S. Manuel de philologie classique. 2 vols. Paris, 1883. O.
Reuss, E. History of the New Testament. 2 vols. Tr. E. L. Houghton. Boston, 1884. 0.
Schum, W. Exempla codicum amplonianorum erfurtensium. Berlin, 1882. F.
Sestier, J. M. La piraterie dans l'antiquiU*. Paris, 1880. O.
Teaching of the Apostles. Ed. P. Bryennios. Constantinople, 1883. O.
Oriental Languages.
Albiruni. Chronology of ancient nations. London, 1879. Q.
Antilegomena Epistles. Ed. I. II. Hall. Baltimore, 1886. F. -
At-Tabari. Annales ed. J. Barth. 11 vols. Leiden, 1879. 0.
Benjacob, I. A. Ozarha-Sepharim. Thesaurus librorum hebraicorum. Wilna, 1880. 0.
Bibliothkca Rabbinica, v. A. Wtinsche. 6 vols. Leipzig, 1880. 0.
Bocthar, E. Dictiounaire Francais-Arabe. Paris, 1882. Q.
Budge, E. A, Assyrian texts. London, 1880. Q.
The history of Esarhaddon. London, 1880. D.
Corpus scriptorum historiae Byzantinae. 49 vols. Bonn (v. d.) O.
Davidson, B. Concordance of the Hebrew and Chaldee Scriptures. London, 1876. Q.
Davies, B. Hebrew and Chaldee lexicon to the Old Testament. London, 1885. 0.
Delitzsch, F. Assyrische lesestficke. Leipzig, 1885. F.
Die sprache der Koss^er. Leipzig, 1884. Q.
Edrisi. Description de PAfrique et de TEspagne. Ed. R. Dozy and J. de Goby.
El Bekri. Geographiscbes worterbuch. 2 vols. Gottingen, 1876. O.
El Cazwini. Kosmographie. HVg v. F. Wfistenfeld. Gottingen, 1849. Q.
Encyclopedie Arabe. 8 vols. Beyrouth, 1876. Q.
Fleischer. BeitrSge zur arabischen sprachkunde (n. p). 1866. O.
Fuerst, J. Hebrew and Chaldee lexicon. Leipzig, 1885. Q.
Librorum sacrorum Veteris Testamenti concord, hebraicae atque chaldaicae.
Lipsiae, 1840. F.
Gobineau, Le Comte de. TraitGdes gcritures cuneiformes. 2 vols. Paris, 1864. O.
Grunbaum, M. Jfidisch-dcutsche chrestomathie. Leipzig, 1882. O.
Haji-Kiialfa. Lexicon bibliographicura et en cyclopedic urn, 7 vols. Leipzig, 1835. F.
Halevy, J. Recberches sur l'origine de la civilization Babylonienne. Paris, 1876. D.
Hammkr-Purgstall, J. v. Literatur-gescbichte der Araber. 7 vols. Wien, 1850. Q.
Haupt, P. Das Babylonische Niinrodepos. Leipzig. 1884. Q.
Hengstenberg, E. W. Commentar fiber die Psalmen. 4 vols. Berlin, 1849. O.
Howell, M. S. Grammar of the classical Arabic language. I. Allahabad, 1883. 0.
Hughes, T. P. Dictionary of Islam. London, 1885. O.
Iiin Jais. Commentar zu Zamaobsaii's Mufassal. Leipzig, 1882. Q.
Isknberg, C. W. Grammar of the Ambaric language. London, 1842, O.
Johnson, S. Oriental religions; Persia. Boston, 1885. O.
Julianos der Abtruennige. Syrische erzahlungen. HVg v. J. G. E. Hoffman.
Leiden, 1880. Q.
Koskgarten, J. G. L. Chrestomathia arabica. Lipsiae. 1828. P.
Land, J. P. N. Anecdota Syriaca. 4 vols. Lugduui Batav, 1862. Q.
Latz, W. Die inschriften Tiglathpileser's. I. Text und commentar. Leipzig, 1880. 0.
98
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 49.
Lexormant, F. Etudes cuneiformes. Paris, (v. d.) O.
Levy, J Chaldaisches worterbuch fiber die Targumhn. Leipzig, 1881. Q.
Levy, M. A. Phonizische studien. Breslaa, 1856. O.
Massora Magna, die, HVg v. S. Frensdorff. Hannover, 1875. Q.
Mexant, J. Lea ecritures cuneiformes. Paris, 1864. Q.
Mosixgeb, G. Monumenta Syriaca ex Romanis codicibus collecta. CEniponti, 1878. 0.
Neubaubr, A. La geographie de Talmud. Paris, 1863. 0.
Norris, E. Assyrian dictionary. 3 vols. London, 1868-72. Q.
Palmer. E. H. English-Persian dictionary and grammar. London, 1883. D.
Pbteus Hispanus. De lingua arabica, libri duo. Ed. P. de Lagarde. Gottingae, 1883. Q.
Poltglotten Bibel, Bearb. t. R. Stirr. 6 vols. Bielefeld, 1875. 0.
Pbaktobius, F. Die Amharische sprache. Halle, 1879. F.
Reuss, E. Geschichte der Heiligen Schriften, alten Testaments. Braunschweig, 1881. O.
Riehm, E. C. A. Handworterbuch des biblischen alterthums. Bielefeld, 1884. O.
Rittee, C. Die Sinai-halbinael, Palaslina und Syrien. 5 vols. Berlin, 1848. D.
Robert, L de. Elude philologique sur les inscriptions cuneiformes de i'Armene, Paris,
1876. Q.
Ri ckert, F. Grammatik, poetik, und rhetorik der Perser. Gotha, 1874. 0.
S. henkel, D. Bibel-Lexicon. 5 vols. Leipzig, 1869. O.
Scuradeb, E. Cuneiform inscriptions and the Old Testament. London, 1885. O.
Smith, G. Chaldean account of Genesis. London, 1880. O.
Smith, G. Chaldaische Genesis. Tr. Delitzsch. Leipzig, 1876. O.
Socin, A. Die Neu-Aramaischen dbuekte. Tubingen, 1882. Q.
Steingass, F. English-Arabic dictionary. London, 1882. 0.
Strauss, F. A. und O. Die lander und statten der Heiligen Schrift. Leipzig, 1877. Q.
Stbbn, L. Koptische grammatik. Leipzig, 1880. O.
Tyndale's five books of Moses. Ed. J. I. Mombert. New York, (n. d.) Q.
Waurmund, A. Praktische grammatik der Osmanisch-turkischen sprache. 2 vols.
Giessen, 1869. D.
Praktisches handbuch der neu-Persischen sprache. Giessen, 1875. O.
Weber, G. und Holtzmann, H. Geschichte des Volkes-Israel und der eutstehung des
Christemhums. 2 vols. Leipzig, 1867. 0.
Wherry, E. M. A comprehensive commentary on the Quran. London, 1882. O.
Whisu, H. F. Clavis Syriaca. A key to the Syriac version " Peshito " of the four
gospels. London, 1883. O.
Wiedemann, A. Aegyptische geschichte. 2 vols. Gotha, 1884. O.
Zimmeen, H. Babylonische busspsalmen. Leipzig, 1885. Q.
Romance and Teutonic Languages.
(Including English.)
Bbome, R. Dramatic works. 3 vols. London, 1873. D.
Camokns, L. de. Obras, ed. Joromenha. 6 vols. Lisboa, 1860-70. 0.
Os Lusiadas. 2 vols. London, 1884. D.
Chansons de Thibault IV. (orate de Champagne et de Brie. Reims, 1851. 0.
De la Rue. Essais historiques sur les bardes, les jongleurs, et les trouveres. 3 vols.
Caen, 1834. D.
Diefenbach, L. u. Wulker, E. Hoch-und niederdeutsch. worterbuch d. mittleren und
neuern zeit. Basel, 1885. Q.
Douglas, G. Poetical works. 4 vols. Edinburgh, 1874. O.
Dbydex, J. Comedies, tragedies, and operas. 1st ed. 2 vols. London, 1701. F.
Gosse, E. From Shakespeare to Pope. New York, 1885. D.
Seventeenth century studies. London, 1883, O.
Halkett, 8. and Laixg T. Dictionary of the anonymous and pseudonymous literature
of Great Britain. Edinburgh, 1882. Q.
Marlowe, C. Works. Ed. A. H. Bullen. 3 vols. Boston, 1885. O.
Mistral, F. Dictionnaire Provencal-Francais. Aix en Provence, v. I. (n. d.) Q.
Poetes de Champagne. Ed. P. Tarbe. Reims, 1851. O.
Shakespeare jest books. Ed. W. C. Hazlitt. 2 vols. London, 1864. D.
Simpson, R. The school of Shakespeare. 2 vols. London, 1878. O.
Tourneur, C. Plays and poems. London, 1878. D.
Wulck.br, R. Grundriss zur geschichte der angel&Schsischen literatur. Leipzig, 1885. O.
Yobk plays. Ed. L. T. Smith. Oxford, 1885. O.
Art and Archaeology.
Cabapanos, C. Dodone et ses mines. 2 vols. Paris, 1878. F.
Man, E. H. On the aboriginal inhabitants of the Andaman islands. London, n. d. O.
Nadaillac, lb Marquis de. Prehistoric America. New York, 1884. O.
Pebbot, G. and Chipiez, C. History of Art in Phoenicia. Tr. W. Armstrong. 2 vols.
London, 1885. O.
Riemaxx, H. Muslk-Lexlcon. Leipzig, 1884. D.
SculiemaNX, 11. Tiryns. New York, 1885. Q.
Semper, G. Die textile kunst fur sich betrachtet und in beziehung zur baukunst.
MOnchen, 1878. O.
Waldstein, C. Essays on the art of Pheidias. Cambridge, 1885, Q.
HISTORY AND POLITICS.
Ashton, J. Old times. London, 1885. O.
Bagwell, R. Ireland under the Tudors. 2 vols. London, 1885. O.
Baibd, C. W. History of the Huguenot emigration to America. 2 vols. New York.
(n.d.) O.
Baudbillat, H. Hlstoire du luxe. 4 vols. Paris, 1880. O.
Bonar, J. Malthus and his work. London, 1885. O,
Cbeasy, E. Imperial and colonial constitution of the British empire. London, 1872. 0.
Daire, E. Econorolstes Francais du xvin* siecle. Paris, 1843. O.
Dorman, R. M. Origin of primitive superstitions. Philadelphia, 1881. O.
Dowell; S. History of taxation in England. 4 vols. London, 1884. O.
Emmixuhaus, A. Das annenwesen u. d. armengesetzung in Europaischen staaten.
Eri.er, G. Deutsche geschichte. 2 vols. Leipzig, 1884. O.
Franklin, A. Les sources de l'histoire de France. Paris, 1877. Q.
Friedmann, P. Anne Boleyn. 2 vols. London, 1884. O.
Gowkr, Earl. Dispatches from Paris. June, 1790-August, 1792. Cambridge, 1885. 0.
Hall, H. History of the customs revenue in England. London, 1885. O.
Harris, W. History of the radical party in parliament. London, 1885. O.
Hewes, F. W. and Gannett, H. Scribner's statistical atlas of U. S. New York, 1885. F.
Jevons, W. S. Investigations in currency and finance. London, 1884. 0.
Kebbel, T. E. History of toryism, 1783-1881. London, 1886. O.
Lassalle, F. Reden und schriften. 3 vols. New York, (n. d.) D.
Le Play, F. Les ouvriers des deux mondes. 4 vols. Paris. 1857. O.
Les ouvriers EuropeGns. 6 vols. Tours, 1879. O.
Leroy-Beaulieu, A. Das reich der Zaren u. d. Russen. 2 vols. Berlin, 1884. 0.
Lindknschmidt, L. Die alterth timer unserer heidnischen vorzeit. Mainz, 1881. Q.
List, F. The national system of political economy. London, 1885, O.
Loskrth, J. Wicllf and Hus. London, 1884. O.
Lucy, H. W. A diary of two parliaments, 1874-1880. 2 vols. London, 1885-86. 0.
MacLenxan, J. F. The patriarchal theory. London, 1885. O.
MacPherson, D. Annals of commerce. 4 vols. London, 1885. Q.
Maine, H. S. Popular government. New York, 1886. O.
Marlo, K. Untersuchungen fiber die organisation der arbeit. 2 vols. Tubingen, 1885. O.
Michaud, T. F. et Poujoulat, J. J. F. Nouvelle collection des memoires rel. a l'hist.
de France. 34 vols. Paris, 1881. Q.
Mixos Y Rivero, J. Manual de paleografia diplomatica Espanola. Madrid, 1880. D.
Parkmax, F. Montcalm and Wolle. Boston, 1884. O.
Patersox, J. Commentaries on the liberty of the subject. London, 1877. D.
Pfleiderer, O. Lectures on the influence of the Apostle Paul on the development of
Christianity. Loudon, 1885. O.
Recueil de facsimiles a'l'usage de l'ccole des chartes. 3 vols. Paris, 1880. F.
Roby, H. J. Introduction to the study of Justinian's Digest, Cambridge, 1884. 0.
Roberts, E. H. Government revenue. Boston, 1884. D.
Rousset. Recueil historique d'actes, negotiations, etc. 20 vols. Le Haye, 1728-45. D.
Saixt Martix,V. dk. Le nord de 1' Afrique dans l'antiquite grecque, etc. Paris, 1863. Q.
Schxitzler, J. H. Secret history of the court and government of Russia. London,
1847. O.
Societe internationale des etudes d'economie sociale. 8 vols. Paris, 1865-84. O.
Sismondi, J. C. L. De la ricbesse commerciale. 2 vols. Geneve, 1803. 0.
Sismondi, J. C. L. Etudes sur l'economie politique. 2 vols. Paris, 1837. O.
Stein, L. Geschichte der socialen bewegung in Frankreich v. 1789 bis auf unsere tage.
3 vols. Leipzig, 1850. O.
Stevens, J. L. History of Gustavus Adolphus. New York, 1884. O.
Storch, H. Cours d'economie politique. 5 vols. Paris, 1823. O.
Taussig, F. W. History of the present tariff, 1860-83. New York, 1885. O.
Villeneuve-Bargkmont, A. de. Economie politique chretienne. 3 vols. Paris, 1834. O.
Histoirede l'economie politique. 2 vols. Paris, 1841. O.
Wise, A. J: Discoveries of America to the year 1525. New York, 1884. O.
Wise, T. A. History of paganism in Caledonia. London, 1884. 0.
Wright, W. The empire of the Hittites. London, 1884. 0.
PSYCHOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY.
(Including Education; also see Biology, p. 97.)
Baer, A. Der alkoholismus. Berlin, 1878. O.
Bucknill, J. C. and Tuke, D. H. Manual of psychological medicine. London, 1874. O.
Desftne, P. Psychologie naturelle. 2 vols. Paris, 1868. O.
Frauenstadt, J. Schopenhauer-Lexicon. Leipzig, 1871. O.
Green, T. H. Works. Ed. L. Nettleship. Vol. I., II. London, 1885-86. O.
Hartmann, E. von. Philosophy of the unconscious. 3 vols. London, 1884. 0.
Ingram, J. Memorials of Oxford. 3 vols. London, 1837. 0.
Jungmann, J. Aesthetik. Freiburg, 1884. O.
Kink, R. Geschichte der kaiserlichen universitat zu Wien. Wien, 1850. O.
Lotze, H. Logic. Tr. B. Bosanquet. Oxford, 1884. O.
Microcosmus. Tr. E. Hamilton and E. E. C. Jones. Edinburgh, 1885. 0.
Lombroso, C. L'Uomo delinquente. Roma, 1884. 0.
Martineau, J. Types of ethical theory. 2 vols. Oxford, 1885. O.
Moreau, J. La psychologie morbide. Paris, 1859. O.
Obkntraut, A. v. Die Oesterreichischen volksschulgesetze. 4 vols. Wien, 1883. D.
Oberlander, H. Der geograpbischc unterricht. 3te auf. Grimma, 1879. O.
Padagoqische Bibliothek. H'r'g von K. Richter. 13 vols. Leipzig (u. d.) D.
Paedagogium. H'r'g v. F. Dittes. 5 vols. Leipzig, 1879. 0.
Paulsen, F. Geschichte des gelehrten unterrichts auf den doutschen schulen und uni-
versitaten. Leipzig, 1885. 0.
Ploss, H. Das weib in der natur und volkerkunde. 2 vols. Leipzig, 1885. O.
Prantl.C Geschichte der Ludwig-Maximilians universitat. 2 vols. Miinchen,1872. 0.
Raumer, K. von. Geschichte d. psedagogik. 4 vols. Giitersloh, 1877. O.
Keville, A. Prolegomena of the history of religions. London, 1884. O.
Schule, H. Handbuch der geistes-krankheiten. 2te auf. Leipzig, 1880. O.
Taylor, J. E. Sagacity and morality of plants. London, 1884. D.
Veitch, J. Institutes of logic. Edinburgh, 1885. D.
Werner, K. Antonio Rosmini und seine schule. 2 vols. Wien, 1884. O.
Windelbaxd, W. Die blfithezeit der deutschen philosophic 2 vols. Leipzig, 188". O.
Zeller, E. Outlines of the history of Greek philosophy. Tr. by Alleyn and Abbott.
London, 1886. D.; New York, 1886. D.
Zockler,0. Handbuch der theologischen w^senschaften. Vols.2-4. Nordlingen, 1885. Q.
May, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
99
CURRENT INFORMATION.
THE NEW PHYSICAL LABORATORY.
The corner-stone of the new Physical Laboratory was laid on March 29,
1886, by Hon. George W. Dobbin, President of the Board of Trustees of the
University. The following articles were deposited in the stone : —
The last Register and Annual Report of the University ; the last number
of the University Circulars ; copies of the following journals published by
the University : American Journal of Mathematics, the American Chemi-
cal Journal, the American Journal of Philology, Studies in Historical and
Political Science, Studies from the Biological Laboratory ; Excursion Map
of Baltimore ; the Sylvester Medal, in bronze ; a copy, in wax, of the Uni-
versity seal ; coins of the United States ; various scientific pamphlets ;
copies of the Baltimore daily newspapers.
The architects, Messrs. Baldwin and Pennington, of Baltimore, have fur-
nished the following statement as to the building :
* » * « The construction of the Physical Laboratory building for the
Johns Hopkins University, at the north west corner of Monument and
Garden streets, was commenced in September, 1885, according to drawings
and specifications furnished by E. F. Baldwin and Josias Pennington, archi-
tects, and to be subject to their superintendence and approval. The build-
ing fronts 71' 6" on Monument Street, and 116 feet on Garden Street. It
will be four stories in height, besides basement and attic, with an octagon
tower at the south-east corner, surmounted by an observatory with a revolv-
ing dome 21 feet in diameter. The inside walls of the building will be
finished in brick, and the floors will be three thicknesses, resting on heavy
beams about six feet apart, and dressed on the underside, forming the ceiling
below, no joists being used, — now termed slow-burning construction, and
being the first of the kind used in this city.
"The contract for the building was signed September 21, 1885, by Mr. J.
Hall Pleasants, chairman of the Building Committee, for the University,
and by Messrs. Wm. Ferguson & Brother, contractors for the building, which
is to be of brick, with Dauphin County brown sand-stone trimmings. The
brick work is being done by Mr. Wesley Hall ; the sand-stone by Messrs.
Hamilton & Mann; the plumbing and gas-fitting by Mr. John F. McCon-
nell; the heating and ventilation by Messrs. Bartlett, Hayward & Co.,
under the direction of Mr. C. W. Newton. The boilers for supplying the
same will be located about 120 feet off and the warm air blown under
Monument Street through brick ducts into the building and distributed to
flues at points under the basement floor, this mode of heating being the
first of the kind done in this city. In the centre of the building and under
the basement floor are located sub-cellars or vaults, built with air spaces on
the sides and brick arches above, where an even temperature can be
obtained. The halls of the basement are arched in brick, with stone steps
to the first floor, to which point the work has now reached."
Professor Rodolfo Lanciani, of Rome, will give a course of lectures
on Roman Archaeology during the next academic year. He has been for
some years professor of archaeology at the Roman university, and inspector
of excavations for the city ; and is also one of the leading members of the
archaeological commission of Rome, and of the Pontifical Archaeological
Society. Though still quite young, he is one of the first authorities on
Roman archaeology, and has followed with greater care than any other
archaeologist, the important excavations that have laid bare, from 1871 to
1886, so considerable a part of the ancient city. In 1880 he published "I
comentarii di Frontino intorno le aeque e gli aquedotti. Sylloge epigrafica
aquaria," a learned work crowned by the Academy of the Lincei. This is
but a small part of a great work to which he has been "devoting years of
research, a complete topography of the ancient city of Rome, critical and
historical. Prof. Lanciani has contributed important papers to the Bull,
della Omm. Archeologica, to the Notizie degli Scavi, and other archaeological
periodicals, besides separate works, such as: "Iscrizioni deH'Anfiteatro
Flavio" (1880).
DEATH OF PROFESSOR CHARLES D. MORRIS.
Resolutions of the University Philological Association,
March 5, 1886.
Resolved, that while the various tributes of respect heretofore paid to the
memory of Professor Morris have most fittingly held up to view his services
to this University, to his colleagues at large, and to his students, we
as an Association owe him a peculiar debt which it is our privilege to
acknowledge.
Professor Charles D. Morris was intimately connected with the Philo-
logical Association of the Johns Hopkins University from its beginning.
He was in entire sympathy with its aims, and for nearly ten years furthered
them, by the prompt performance of every duty, by his readiness in con-
tributing his own generous share to our proceedings, and by sustained
interest in all good work. To this he added a rare discrimination, which
bestowed where possible a full measure of praise ; while he did not abate a
jot of his own firm judgment. He scarcely ever missed a meeting of this
Association, and his influence on the proceedings was marked, in many ways.
Even as a listener his presence was always felt. His brief and forcible
remarks of discriminating criticism, of fruitful inquiry, or of approval,
were always highly prized. He welcomed a good thing enthusiastically,
from whatever quarter it came, in whatever subject it appeared. He was
quick to discern interesting applications of theory or fact, and thus con-
tributed towards making the speaker feel at his ease, outside of his own
subject.
Especially to be commemorated is the kindly sympathy he extended to
younger men, who appeared for the first time before the Association and
his appreciation of what was new and good in their articles. More than
one young scholar owes his first feeling of confidence in his own indepen-
dent work to the appreciation and encouragement received from Professor
Morris.
His own contributions were models of clear thought, and of skilful
presentation, in choice English. However far his theme might be from
the studies of his listener, the latter was under the spell of his personality
from the first, and his personality was an inspiration.
He made his associates love scholarship more, while loving science none
the less; and he himself made scholarship lovely, so that others felt more
proud of belonging to the guild of scholars, because he adorned it.
Resolved, that this minute be entered on the records of this Association,
and a copy of it be sent to Professor Morris's relatives.
Henry Wood,
Maurice Bloomfield,
Minton Warren,
Committee.
A course of lectures, on Selected Problems in Morphology, was
given in the Biological Laboratory, as follows :
H. V. Wilson. On the Affinity and Phylogeny of the Cubo-medusae as
illustrated by the Anatomy and Histology of Cheiropsalamus.
G. B. Haldeman. On the Inversion of the Germ Layers of Rodents.
A. T. Bruce. On the Embryology of Insects. (Two lectures).
E. A. Andrews. Asexual Multiplication of Annelids.
H. Orr. Asexual Multiplication of Tunicata.
W. K. Brooks. On Asexual Multiplication.
F. H. Herrick. On the Development of the Crustacea.
J. Nelson. Methods of Reproduction in relation to the problem of
Sex. (Several lectures).
J. P. McMurrich. The Embryology of Gasteropods.
H. H. Donaldson (Ph. D., J. H. U., 1885) has been appointed Associate
in Psychology, and Louis Duncan (Ph. D., J. H. U, 1885) has been
appointed Associate in Electricity.
100
JOHN'S HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
[No. 49.
TENTH ANNIVERSARY.
The tenth anniversary of the University was celebrated on Monday,
April 26. The applications for cards of admission to the public exercises
greatly exceeded the capacity of any of the halls of the University, and
the Trustees of the Mt. Vernon Place Methodist Episcopal Church kindly
acceded to a request for the use of their edifice.
The trustees, faculty, graduates, and students, with invited guests, assem-
bled at the University buildings and went in procession to the church,
where the exercises were held at 12 m.
After prayer by the Rev. Dr. Longacre, addresses were made as follows :
On some of the Humane Aspects of Medical Science, by W. H. Welch,
M. D., Professor of Pathology.
On the Purposes of a Physical Laboratory, by H. A. Rowland, Ph. D.,
Professor of Physics.
On the Present Aspects of Classical Study, by B. L. Gildersleeve, Ph. D.,
Professor of Greek.
An address, with reference to the work of the last ten years, was then
made on behalf of the Trustees by James Carey Thomas, M. D.
An ode written for the occasion by Richard E. Burton, A. B., a graduate
student of the University, was then read. The exercises closed with the
bestowal of diplomas by the President.
The trustees, faculty, graduates, and a few invited guests met at luncheon
in the gymnasium at 2.30 p. m. Addresses were made by the President of
the University, Hon. George W. Dobbin, Hon. George William Brown,
Rev. Dr. George E. Ellis, of Boston, Professor S. E. Baldwin, of Yale Col-
lege, Professor Johnston, of Princeton, and others.
On motion of Professor T. Craig, seconded by Professor E. B. Wilson, of
Bryn Mawr College, it was resolved to form an association of the graduates
of the University, and by further resolution a committee of ten, consisting
of Drs. T. Craig, E. M. Hartwell, F. G. Allinson, W. H. Howell, and H. A.
Todd, Messrs. H. J. Bowdoin, Allan McLane, John Glenn, Jr., Edgar Good-
man, and Edward Ingle, were designated to take the matter in hand.
A resolution was also adopted for the appointment of a committee of
seven to secure a memorial of Professor C. D. Morris. Professors Gilder-
sleeve and Warren, Drs. Allinson, Marquand, and Spieker, Messrs. John
Glenn, Jr. and Allan McLane were designated as such committee.
In the afternoon, the buildings of the Johns Hopkins Hospital were
thrown open to visitors.
In the evening, a reception was given in the University buildings by the
President and Faculty to the graduates and students and their friends. It
was estimated that a thousand persons were present.
Dr. E. M. Hartwell acted as chief marshal, with the following aids:
Messrs. H. B. Adams, L. Bell, W. B. Canfield, J. Cummings, D. R. Dewey,
W. C. Ferguson, J. A. Fisher, H. B. Gardner, R. C. Gildersleeve, J. S.
Hodges, W. A. Jones, W. R. Molinard, A. T. Murray, G. H. F. Nuttall,
B. T. Roberts, Jr., C. B. Stetson, M. P. Stevens, R. M. Tarleton, J. W.
Williams, and L. Williams.
Messrs. H. M. Brune, A. R. L. Dohme, D. M. Reese, H. O. Thompson,
A. C. Woods, and W. K. Williams acted as ushers at the public exercises.
The general Committee of Reception consisted of Messrs. M. Warren,
H. B. Adams, M. Bloomfield, W. K. Brooks, T. Craig, A. M. Elliott, H. N.
Morse, W. E. Story, G. H. Williams, and H. Wood, and special committees
were present in the evening in Hopkins Hall, the libraries, and labora-
tories.
The committee on Decorations consisted of Messrs. E. M. Hartwell, A. L.
Frothingham, Jr., and H. W. Smyth.
In the next number of the American Journal of Mathematics (Vol.
VIII, No. 3) will be commenced the publication of a course of lectures on
the Theory of Reciprocants, now being delivered at the University of Ox-
ford, by Professor Sylvester. The lectures will present in a simple form the
elements of Professor Sylvester's newest investigation.
UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS OF UNDERGRADUATE
CLASSES, MAY 27--JUNE 8, 1886.
The Morning Sessions will be from 9 a. m. to 12 m., and the After-
noon Sessions from 3 to 6 p. m.
Tlmrsday, May 27.
MORNING.
General Physics. (First Session).
Physics : Major. (First Session).
Biology : Major. (First Session).
AFTERNOON.
Greek : Major. (First Session).
Phys. Geog., Hist, and English. (P.H.E.)
Mathematics: Major. (First Session.)
Friday, May 28.
MORNING.
General Physics. (Second Session.)
Physics : Major. (Second Session.)
Latin : Major. (First Session.)
AFTERNOON.
Greek : Minor. (First Session.)
Greek : Major. (Second Session.)
Polit. Econ. : Minor. (First Session.)
Monday, May 31.
MORNING.
Chemistry: Minor (including Miner-
alogy.) (First Session.)
Chemistry : Major. (First Session.)
Greek : Minor. (Second Session.)
AFTERNOON.
Mathematics : Minor. ( First Session.)
Latin : Major. (Second Session.)
Tuesday, June 1.
MORNING.
Chemistry : Minor. (Second Session.)
Chemistry : Major. (Second Session.)
AFTERNOON.
Mathematics : Major. (Second Session.)
Mathematics : Minor. (Second Session.)
Biology : Minor. (First Session.)
Wednesday, June 2.
MORNING.
German : Minor. (First Session.)
German : Major. (First Session.)
AFTERNOON.
Latin: Minor. (First Session.)
Tlmrsday, June 3.
MORNING.
German : Minor. (Second Session.)
German : Major. (Second Session.)
AFTERNOON.
Logic, Ethics and Psychol. (L. E. P.)
Latin : Minor. (Second Session.)
Friday, June 4.
MORNING.
French : Minor. (First Session.)
French : Major. (First Session.)
International Law.
AFTERNOON.
History: Major.
Biology : Major.
(First Session.)
(Second Session.)
Monday, June 7.
MORNING.
English : Minor. (First Session.)
English : Major. (First Session.)
Biology : Minor. (Second Session.)
AFTERNOON.
History : Major. (Second Session.)
Tuesday, June 8.
MORNING.
English : Major. (Second Session.)
English : Minor. (Second Session.)
Polit. Econ. : Minor. (Second Session.)
AFTERNOON.
French : Minor. (Second Session.)
French : Major. (Second Session.)
Constitutional History.
Matriculation Examinations, June and October, 1886.
Examinations for admission and matriculation will be held on the fol-
lowing dates :
Wednesday, June 9, and Friday, October 1.
9 a. m. — Preliminary examination.
10 a. m. — History (for matriculation and preliminary medical course).
11 a. m. — English (for matriculation and preliminary medical course).
12 m. — Science (for matriculation and preliminary medical course).
3 p. m. — German (for matriculation in place of Greek, for admission to
the lowest classes, and to absolve the requirements of a minor course) .
4.30 p. m. — French (for matriculation in place of Greek, for admission to
the lowest classes, and to absolve the requirements of a minor course).
Thursday, June 10, and Saturday, October 2.
9 a. m. — Latin (for matriculation and preliminary medical course).
3 p. m. — Greek (for matriculation).
Friday, June 11, and Monday, October 4.
9 a. m. — Mathematics (for matriculation and preliminary medical course).
Degrees will be conferred Monday, June 14, at 6 p. m.
The next academic year begins Friday, October 1, 1886.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., No. 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 262 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore, subscription, $1.00 a year.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 50.]
BALTIMORE, JUNE, 1886.
[Price, 10 Cents.
TENTH ANNIVERSARY OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY, APRIL 26, 1886.
ADDEESSE8 -A.ND ODE.
[An account of the exercises at the Tenth Anniversary is given in Circular No. 49, May, 1886.]
ON SOME OF THE HUMANE ASPECTS OF MEDICAL
SCIENCE.
By William H. Welch, M. D., Professor of Pathology.
Your attention will be called with just pride to-day to the
achievements of this university during the first decade of its
existence. Its contributions to letters and to science, its high stan-
dard of education and its usefulness in many directions are themes
which are appropriate to the occasion. But in celebrating the
past and the present we look forward with courage and enthu-
siasm to the future. For this future the subject which is now
uppermost in the plans and the councils of the university is the
establishment and the development of the medical department, in
accordance with the conception of the munificent founder of the
university and of the hospital. As the past ten years have wit-
nessed the development of the philosophical department to its
present position of high achievement and active usefulness, so it
is hoped that the close of another decade will look back upon
a similar record of good work and of progress in the medical
department.
The higher purposes of medical education can be attained only
by the establishment of well equipped laboratories and by the
foundation of hospitals. Por these, in a country where advanced
education is dependent upon private benevolence, endowments are
necessary. It is not a little remarkable that the first considerable
bequest for the beneficent purposes of medical education in this
country was made by the far-sighted founder of this university,
whose example in this respect has already been an inspiration for
others to follow.
It is a wise provision that the medical department has been
placed in organic connection with the other departments of the
university ; that it is coordinate with these. The relation which
universities and medical schools should bear to each other has
given rise to no little discussion in several of the universities of
Europe, and the conclusion has been reached that for many reas-
ons the interests of each are best subserved by making the medi-
cal school a department of the university, rather than by the
foundation of independent schools of medicine. Besides the fact
that certain branches of study belong equally to the philosophical
and to the medical faculty, or are upon the border line between
these, experience has shown that this connection conduces to
greater solidity, to a more elevated tone, and to a broader and
more enlightened system of medical education.
At the outset of this undertaking in this university it may
serve a useful purpose to call to mind that the objects which are
to be kept in view in the foundation of the medical department
are humane, that their ultimate design is the relief of human suf-
fering and the advancement of human welfare.
It cannot be doubted that the training of intelligent, com-
petent, and faithful physicians, whose life-work is devoted to
the treatment of disease, is a benefaction to mankind. The
means to be employed for this training have become much more
elaborate than formerly was the case, and it is not impossible
that the question might arise in the minds of some, whether,
with all of these modern laboratories and appliances, and objects
of study, the great aims of medical teaching, the knowledge and
the treatment of disease, are not lost sight of. Such a doubt, if
it exists, is without reasonable basis, as I shall attempt to show;
the motive which suggests it, however, is to be respected, for it
is true that the great objects of medical teaching are and always
should remain the diagnosis, the prevention, and the treatment
of disease.
102
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 50.
The changes which have come about in the requirements of
medical education. -are due, in great part, to the advancements in
medical science. These advances have been all along the line. In
anatomy and physiology, subjects which are the foundation of
medical study, our knowledge of the structure and of the functions
of the body in health has been widened, and in no small part as
the result of work done in the biological laboratory of this uni-
versity. Clinical medicine has profited by the introduction of
more precise means for the discrimination of diseases, and by the
addition of new remedies which are derived, in part, from the
resources of synthetic chemistry. The finer changes of tissue and
of function in disease have been the subject of much fruitful
investigation during recent years. Of all modern discoveries in
medical science, however, none have awakened greater interest or
are of further reaching importance than those relating to the
causation of disease. We have learned to recognize, in certain
minute organisms, the specific causes of many of the most devas-
tating diseases. These discoveries, which belong alike to the
department of pathology, and to that of hygiene, have already
had an important influence upon the management of disease,
particularly in surgical practice. But it is in the prevention of
diseases, especially of epidemic diseases, that this increasing
knowledge of their causation is destined to do the most good.
Although the prevention of disease is the highest aim of medical
science, the cultivation of this branch of medicine is of compara-
tively recent date. The large medical schools of Europe have
awakened only within the last few years to the importance of
establishing hygienic laboratories, in which are investigated the
causation of diseases, the laws governing the origin and the spread
' of epidemics, the principles of ventilation, of heating, of sewerage,
the influence of the air, of the ground, of the water in the produc-
tion of certain diseases, in a word, all that pertains to the preser-
vation of the health of communities and the warding off of pre-
ventable diseases. Investigations in these directions have already
accomplished much toward the' preservation of public health. A
notable instance of this is the great improvement in the healthful-
ness of the city of Munich, which has resulted from the introduc-
tion of important sanitary measures based upon investigations
carried on in the magnificent Institute of Hygiene of the Univer-
sity. Munich, in which formerly typhoid fever was present almost
constantly in an epidemic form, has been freed from this scourge.
It would not be difficult to show that in many other ways the
advancements in medical science have contributed to the relief of
disease, and have promoted the health and consequently the
happiness of mankind. Here, however, is not the time nor the
occasion to enter into details concerning the progress of medicine,
or to discuss the practical applications of recent medical discov-
eries. My purpose is to emphasize the fact that the researches
which are carried on in all of the different departments of medi-
cine tend toward one common object, and this is a better under-
standing of diseases, as regards their nature, their causation, their
discrimination from each other, and above all, as regards their
prevention and treatment.
In order to attain this object it is necessary that the labor of
investigation should be divided. The time has gone by when one
mind can compass all which has been ascertained in the medical
sciences. The division of labor has led to most fruitful results,
and at the same time a superficial observer might come to the
conclusion that the work in certain departments has little or no
relation to the great practical objects of medical study. This,
however, would be an error. He who studies the ultimate struc-
ture of a nerve fibre, or the law of contraction of a muscle
is contributing just as truly to the furtherance of our knowledge
of the diseases of nerve and of muscle as is he whose studies are
directed more immediately to these latter subjects. The former,
investigator often furnishes the only solid basis upon which the
latter can build his superstructure.
By this division of labor it has come about that there are those
who cultivate each special subdivision in the medical sciences as
an end in itself. There will be found those who are ready to devote
years of patient study and of research to some one subject, no
matter how narrow the field for investigation may seem or how
remote the bearing of the subject upon practical medicine may
at first glance appear. It is only by this concentration of energy
that the best results can be obtained and the true interests of
medical science most effectually advanced. The good work done
in one department does not stand alone ; it aids progress in other
departments, often in ways which cannot be foreseen. The phy-
sician who ministers to disease at the bedside, and the sanitarian
who institutes measures for the preservation of public health turn
to advantage results obtained in laboratories by work which, in
some of its stages, may seem to have been without direct applica-
tion to practical medicine. There is, therefore, a community of
interests and of ulterior purpose among all the workers in the
field of medicine, among those who, relieved from the duties of
practice, give their time to investigations in the laboratory and
those who are actively engaged in the relief of disease.
The attractions of the study and the pursuit of medicine have
been greatly increased by the progress which has been made in
the development of the different subdivisions of medical science.
Many departments of medicine now possess the interest and the
attractions of a natural science. Here will be found problems of
absorbing interest, some of which call into requisition powers of
acute observation, some demand for their solution ingenuity in the
device of new methods and of apparatus, others require a pro-
found knowledge of physics, or of chemistry, or of mathematics,
and others call especially for well developed faculties of logical
inference and of wide generalization. The rewards are great and
of these the greatest is the consciousness that the work is for the
advancement of the welfare of humanity in the preservation of
health, the relief of suffering, and the promotion of happiness.
What wonder, then, that a larger and larger number of those
who have enjoyed the benefits of a liberal education are attracted
to the study of medicine ?
Experiment and observation of nature have taken the place, in
the medical as well as in other sciences, of deductive reasoning
and appeal to authority. In former times medical teaching con-
sisted chiefly in didactic lectures which originally were for the
most part commentaries on the great medical writers of antiquity.
Useful as didactic lectures may have been in mediaeval medical
instruction, their value for the present time has been greatly
lessened by the multiplication of good text-books in every depart-
ment of medicine. With the decadence of the purely didactic
lecture as the main feature in the system of medical education,
the importance of laboratory instruction, of clinical teaching, and
in general of demonstrative and objective methods of imparting
knowledge has become better recognized.
There is no more striking illustration of the beneficent side of
medicine than in the application of medical science to hospital work.
In the construction of a properly planned hospital, application is
June, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
103
made of the results of investigation in hygiene. It is believed
that an unsurpassed example of the application of the most
approved principles of sanitary science to hospital construction
will be found in the Johns Hopkins Hospital, which is destined to
become an ornament and a splendid benefaction to this city. It
is not necessary to dwell upon the benevolent uses of such a hos-
pital, pertinent as the subject is to my theme. It needs no state-
ment to prove the inestimable boon which those who seek relief
in well-managed hospitals find in the best medical and surgical
attendance, in the trained nursing, in the provision of suitable
diet, and in cleanly and health-bringing surroundings. Not the
least of the blessings which may be expected from the Johns
Hopkins Hospital is the education of trained nurses, whose minis-
trations will greatly increase the efficiency of the hospital. The
occupation of a trained nurse has become a noble profession for
women. The benefits to be derived from their services can ba
fully appreciated only by those who have had practical experience
in their employment.
It may not be inappropriate in this connection to allude to the
relations between medical teaching and the interests of patients in
hospitals. I believe that considerable misconception exists con-
cerning this subject. While if is generally admitted that in any
course of medical education opportunity should be given for the
study of disease in hospitals, nevertheless some believe that this
must be a misfortune for the patient. I can state as a matter of
observation and experience that by every right-minded physician
the interests of patients in hospitals are placed foremost. The late
Dr. Austin Flint, one of the greatest clinical teachers which this
country has produced, expressed sentiments, from which there can
be no dissent, in his advice to medical students, when he said,
" Manifestations of indifference or harshness toward patients in
charitable institutions deserve to be stigmatized as brutal. These
patients have claims of poverty added to those arising from their
diseases. Brutality is less reprehensible when manifested toward
those whose influence is valuable, from whom fees are expected,
and who can terminate at any moment professional relations with
their medical advisers." These precepts embody the practice of
one who made the fullest use for all legitimate purposes of abun-
dant opportunities of clinical study and observation in hospitals.
They are the precepts which govern the action of the great body
of physicians who give their time and skill to needy patients in
hospitals. Did time permit it could be shown that the benign
uses of hospitals for purposes of medical teaching are of reciprocal
benefit, and that the interests of patients, instead of being sacri-
ficed, are thereby promoted.
But I have already reached the limit of time allotted to these
remarks. There are many other phases of medical science in
which its humane aspects might be dwelt upon. My purpose has
been to call to your attention only to those beneficent aims which
suggest themselves most prominently in connection with the
organization of a medical school and hospital. The various
departments of medical science require no defence, for they are
in themselves legitimate objects of pursuit; but they acquire a
higher interest and appeal more strongly to the co-operation of
the public when it is made apparent that their aims are to serve
the higher interests of humanity. When a great medical founda-
tion rests upon private benevolence, it is particularly appropriate
that these humane and noble purposes should be emphasized.
THE PHYSICAL LABORATORY IN MODERN
EDUCATION.
By Henry A. Rowland, Ph. D., Professor of Physics.
From the moment we are born into this world down to the day
when we leave it, we are called upon every moment to exercise
our judgment with respect to matters pertaining to our welfare.
While nature has supplied us with instincts which take the place
of reason in our infancy, and which form the basis of action in
very many persons through life, yet, more and more as the world
progresses and as we depart from the age of childhood, we are
forced to discriminate between right and wrong, between truth
and falsehood. No longer can we shelter ourselves behind those
in authority over us, but we must come to the front and each one
decide for himself what to believe and how to act in the daily
routine and the emergencies of life. This is not given to us as a
duty which we can neglect, if we please, but it is that which
every man or wonan, consciously or unconsciously, must go
through with.
Most persons cut this gordian knot, which they cannot
untangle, by accepting the opinions which have been taught
them and which appear correct to their particular circle of
friends and associates : others take the opposite extreme and, with
intellectual arrogance, seek to build up their opinions and beliefs
from the very foundation, individually and alone, without help
from others. Intermediate between these two extremes comes
the man with full respect for the opinions of those around him,
and yet with such discrimination that he sees a chance of error in
all and most of all in himself. He has a longing for the truth
and is willing to test himself, to test others and to test nature
until he finds it. He has the courage of his opinions when thus
carefully formed and is then, but not till then, willing to stand
before the world and proclaim what he considers the truth. Like
Galileo and Copernicus he inaugurates a new era in science, or
like Luther, in the religious belief of mankind. He neither
shrinks within himself at the thought of having an opinion of his
own, nor yet believes it to be the only one worth considering in
the world ; he is neither crushed with intellectual humility, nor
yet exalted with intellectual pride ; he sees that the problems of
nature and society can be solved, and yet he knows that this can
only come about by the combined intellect of the world acting
through ages of time and that he, though his intellect were that
of Newton, can, at best, do very little toward it. Knowing this
he seeks all the aids in his power to ascertain the truth and if he,
through either ambition or love of truth, wishes to impress his
opinions on the world, he first takes care to have them correct.
Above all he is willing to abstain from having opinions on sub-
jects of which he knows nothing.
It is the province of modern education to form such a mind
while at the same time giving to it enough knowledge to have a
broad outlook over the world of science, art and letters. Time
will not permit me to discuss the subject of education in general,
and, indeed, I would be transgressing the principles above laid
down if I should attempt it. I shall only call attention at this
present time to the place of the laboratory in modern education.
I have often had a great desire to know the state of mind of the
more eminent of mankind before modern science changed the
world to its present condition and exercised its influence on all
departments of knowledge and speculation. But I have failed
to picture to myself clearly such a mind while, at the same time,
104
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 50.
the study of human nature, as it exists at present, shows me much
that I suppose to he in common with it. As far as I can see,
the unscientific mind differs from the scientific in this, that it is
willing to accept and make statements of which it has no clear
conception to begin with and of whose truth it is not assured. It
is an irresponsible state of mind without clearness of conception,
where the connection between the thought and its object is of the
vaguest description. It is the state of mind where opinions are
given and accepted without ever being subjected to rigid tests,
and it may have some connection with that state of mind where
everything has a personal aspect and we are guided by feelings
rather than reason.
When, by education, we attempt to correct these faults it is
necessary that we have some standard of absolute truth : that we
bring the mind in direct contact with it and let it be convinced
of its errors again and again. We may state, like the philoso-
phers who lived before Galileo, that large bodies fall faster than
small ones, but when we see them strike the ground together we
know that our previous opinion was false and we learn that even
the intellect of an Aristotle may be mistaken. Thus we are taught
care in the formation of our opinions and find that the unguided
human mind goes astray almost without fail. We must correct
it constantly and convince it of error over and over again until
it discovers the proper method of reasoning, which will surely
accord with the truth in whatever conclusions it may reach.
There is, however, danger in this process that the mind may
become over cautious and thus present a weakness when brought
in contact with an unscrupulous person who cares little for truth
and a great deal for effect. But if we believe in the maxim that
truth will prevail and consider it the duty of all educated men to
aid its progress, the kind of mind which I describe is the proper
one to foster by education. Let the student be brought face to
face with nature : let him exercise his reason with respect to the
simplest physical phenomenon and then, in the laboratory, put
his opinions to the test; the result is invariably humility, for
he finds that nature has laws which must be discovered by labor
and toil and not by wild flights of the imagination and scintilla-
tions of so-called genius.
Those who have studied the present state of education in the
schools and colleges tell us that most subjects, including the
sciences, are taught as an exercise to the memory. I myself have
witnessed the melancholy sight in a fashionable school for young
ladies of those who were born to be intellectual beings reciting
page after page from memory, without any effort being made to
discover whether they understood the subject or not. There are
even many schools, so-called, where the subject of physics or nat-
ural philosophy itself is taught, without even a class experiment
to illustrate the subject and connect the words with ideas. Words,
mere words are taught and a state of mind far different from that
above described is produced. If one were required to find a sys-
tem of education which would the most surely and certainly dis-
gust the student with any subject, I can conceive of none which
would do this more quickly than this method, where he is forced
to learn what he does not understand. It is said of the great
Faraday that he never could understand any scientific experiment
thoroughly until he had not only seen it performed by others, but
had performed it himself. Shall we then expect children and
youth to do what Faraday could not do? A thousand times
better never teach the subject at all.
Tastes differ, but we may safely say that every subject of study
which is thoroughly understood is a pleasure to the student. The
healthy mind as well as the healthy body craves exercise, and the
school room or the lecture room should be a source of positive
enjoyment to those who enter it. Above all, the study of nature,
from the magnificent universe, across which light itself, at the
rate of 186,000 miles per second, cannot go in less than hundreds
of years, down to the atom of which millions are required to
build up the smallest microscopic object, should be the most inter-
esting subject brought to the notice of the student.
Some are born blind to the beauties of the world around them,
some have their tastes better developed in other directions, and
some have minds incapable of ever understanding the simplest
natural phenomenon ; but there is also a large class of students
who have at least ordinary powers and ordinary tastes for scien-
tific pursuits : to train the powers of observation and classification
let them study natural history, not only from books, but from pre-
pared specimens or directly from nature : to give care in experi-
ment and convince them that nature forgives no error, let them
enter the chemical laboratory : to train them in exact and logical
powers of reasoning, let them study mathematics : but to combine
all this training in one and exhibit to their minds the most per-
fect and systematic method of discovering the exact laws of
nature, let them study physics and astronomy, where observation,
common sense and mathematics go hand in hand. The object of
education is not only to produce a man who knows, but one who
does; who makes his mark in the struggle of life and succeeds
well in whatever he undertakes : who can solve the problems of
nature and of humanity as they arise and who, when he knows
he is right, can boldly convince the world of the fact. Men of
action are needed as well as men of thought.
There is no doubt in my mind that this is the point in which
much of our modern education fails. Why is it ? I answer that
the memory alone is trained and the reason and judgment are used
merely to refer matters to some authority who is considered final,
and worse than all they are not trained to apjily their knowledge
constantly. To produce men of action they must be trained in
action. If the languages be studied, they must be made to trans-
late from one language to the other until they have perfect facility
in the process. If mathematics be studied, they must work prob-
lems, more problems, and problems again, until they have the use
of what they know. If they study the sciences, they must enter
the laboratory and stand face to face with nature ; they must
learn to test their knowledge constantly and thus see for them-
selves the sad results of vague speculation ; they must learn by
direct experiment that there is such a thing in the world as truth
and that their own mind is most liable to error. They must try
experiment after experiment and work problem after problem
until they become men of action and not of theory.
This, then, is the use of the laboratory in general education, to
train the mind in right modes of thought by constantly bringing
it in contact with absolute truth and to give it a pleasant and
profitable method of exercise which will call all its powers of
reason and imagination into play. Its use in the special training
of scientists needs no remark, for it is well known that it is abso-
lutely essential. The only question is whether the- education of
specialists in science is worth undertaking at all, and of these I
have only to consider natural philosophers or physicists. I might
point to the world around me, to the steam engine, to labor-saving
June, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
105
machinery, to the telegraph, to all those inventions which make
the present age the "Age of Electricity" and let that be my
answer. Nobody could gainsay that the answer would be com-
plete for all are benefitted by these applications of science, and he
would be considered absurd who did not recognize their value.
These follow in the train of physics but they are not physics ; the
cultivation of physics brings them and always will bring them,
for the selfishness of mankind can always be relied upon to turn
all things to profit. But in the education pertaining to a uni-
versity we look for other results. The special physicist trained
there must be taught to cultivate his science for its own sake.
He must go forth into the world with enthusiasm for it and try
to draw others into an appreciation of it, doing his part to con-
vince the world that the study of nature is one of the most noble
of pursuits, that there are other things worthy of the attention of
mankind besides the pursuit of wealth. He must push forward
and do what he can, according to his ability, to further the
progress of his science.
Thus does the university, from its physical laboratory, send
forth into the world the trained physicist to advance his science
and to carry to other colleges and technical schools his enthusiasm
and knowledge. Thus the whole country is educated in the sub-
ject and others are taught to devote their lives to its pursuit,
while some make the applications to the ordinary pursuits of life
that are appreciated by all.
But for myself I value in a scientific mind most of all that
love of truth, that care in its pursuit and that humility of mind
which makes the possibility of error always present more than
any other quality. This is the mind which has built up modern
science to its present perfection, which has laid one stone upon
the other with such care that it to-day offers to the world the
most complete monument to human reason. This is the mind
which is destined to govern the world in the future and to solve
problems pertaining to politics and humanity as well as to inani-
mate nature.
It is the only mind which appreciates the imperfections of the
human reason and is thus careful to guard against them. It is
the only mind that values the truth as it should be valued and
ignores all personal feeling in its pursuit. And this is the mind
the physical laboratory is built to cultivate.
ON THE PRESENT ASPECT OF CLASSICAL STUDY.
By B. L. Gildeesleeve, Ph. D., Professor of Greek.
The chance that made me the first professor appointed to a
chair in this university has made it my duty to represent the
school of letters on this festal day, which has been chosen for the
commemoration of the first completed decennium of our existence
as an institution. The work of the university, so far as it can be
expressed by lectures and by publications, by the number of
teachers and of students, by the hours spent in laboratory and
seminary, is all of record. Judged even by the census standard
of facts and figures, it will be granted that what has been done
here in the last ten years does not fall short of the standard which
was set up in 1876. Less measurable, but not less certain are the
indications of our influence on the whole circle of university work
in America, and whatever we may have failed to do, we have
assuredly not failed in rousing to greater vigilance and stimu-
lating to a more intense energy in other parts of the wide field,
and whether in the way of approval or in the way of protest, our
example has made for life and growth and progress. This life
and growth and progress have found a material expression in the
erection and equipment of model laboratories for biology, chem-
istry, physics. Departments that are less tangible in their mate-
rial and in their methods have little to show the visitor except a
few books and a goodly number of men — ardent students, who
are busy with old problems and new, enriching themselves w ith
the spoils of the past, laying up store for those who are to come
after them, in the present neither envious nor afraid. As to
this whole department of letters, then, that department which
has naturally fallen most under my own observation, I can
truly say that the healthy increase in the schools of language
and literature is something that has transcended my most
sanguine expectation. In numbers we outrank many of the
minor German universities, and in the more abstruse and recon-
dite studies, such as Assyrian and Sanskrit, we hold our own
with some of the leading schools of Europe. As for our
American sisters, it is not so easy to separate graduate work
from undergraduate work in other American universities as
it is here, and hence the comparison of numbers might not be
fair, and might be misinterpreted, and instead of emphasizing too
much our large number of graduate students, it may be better to
say in regard to all the schools of the country in which higher
work is done, that we count their success as our success, for we
■ are all helpers one of another. And here I would take occasion to
echo the wish — which I have often heard expressed of late, — that
the university departments in all American institutions of learning
might be so organized that students could pass from one to the
other in the prosecution of a line of study just as they do in Ger-
many, much to the advantage of their breadth of vision, their
freedom from local or personal influence. For my own part, I
have always congratulated myself that I was brought under the
influence of three distinct and markedly distinct philological
schools, Berlin, Gottingen, and Bonn, and I have no doubt that
when the time comes, there will be a university exchange that
will help us even more than the measure of it that we have thus
far enjoyed. We then of the department of letters have our suc-
cess to speak of on this day when a little "self-esteem grounded on
just and right " may be pardonable, if not, as Milton says, profit-
able. But it is a success that carries with it the gravest responsi-
bilities. The ark we bear contains more sacred vessels than it
held when we set out, and on an occasion like this it becomes us
not only to exchange hearty congratulations that we have been
helped thus far on our way, but to renew our hold with greater
vigor, and to plant our feet more firmly, with a clearer view of the
path to be trod and the burden to be borne.
To some, I do not know to how many, certainly to some of those
whom I am addressing, the special line of work to which my own
life has been devoted may seem to have had its day, and to plan
for the future of Greek is to plan for an elaborate structure on
the foundation of some Table Rock, destined at no distant time to
fall and disappear on the restless current of modern life. A mon-
ument was erected some years since to the memory of the last old
woman that spoke Cornish, and it would require no great stretch
of imagination on the part of some of our friends to fancy that
some youth may be present here to-day who shall live to see the
cremation of the last successor of Sir John Cheke on this side of
106
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 50.
the Atlantic, of the last old woman, trousered or untrousered, that
shall have discharged the office of a Professor of Greek in an
American university. People who have reached a certain age
and have become somewhat reflective and prophetic generally .
console themselves with Hezekiah's words. But I cannot content
myself with the thought that there will be peace and truth in my
days. There has not been much of either of these commodities in
my first half-century, and I do not expect the market to be
glutted with them in my second. Surely there is no sign that
there will be any peace about Greek or truth about Greek in any
period that I can reasonably hope to reach. But the peace and
the truth that may be denied me from without are vouchsafed me
abundantly from within, and while many of my fellow-workers
are in woe for the silver shrines of Diana, and mourn for the
abandonment of Greek, and sorrow that the trade in text-books
languishes, I am serenely standing where I stood many, many
years ago, when I published my first article on the " Necessity
of the Classics," a title not to be confounded with the " Neces-
sities of the Classics" about which one hears far too much.
I live in the abiding assurance that what is inwrought in the
structure of our history and our literature must survive so long as
the history of our race and the history of our language shall sur-
vive. To disentwine the warp of the classics from the woof of our
life is simply impossible. One mediaeval writer every one must
know, and measured by modern standards Dante was not a classi-
cal scholar of the first rank; his perspective of antiquity was
false, his estimate of the poets of the past was far from being just, '
and yet what is Dante if you loosen his hold on the classic time ?
I will not speak of Milton, steeped in classic lore ; I will speak of
Shakespeare. None but those who have read Shakespeare with
the eye of the classical scholar know how much the understanding
of Shakespeare is dependent on training in the classics, and
more than once when I have hesitated as to whether it was ped-
antry or not to use a Greek word in my English discourse, I have
turned to Shakespeare.
Is this the judgment of a man who can see only through his
own narrow casement? Scarcely had I set down those words
when the following passage fell under my eye. It is to be found
in the recent introductory lecture of the professor of poetry in
the University of Oxford. " The thorough study of English lit-
erature, as such — literature, I mean as an art, indeed the finest of
the fine arts, is hopeless unless based on an equally thorough
study of the literatures of Greece and Rome. When so based
adequate study will not be found exacting either of time or
of labor. To know Shakespeare and Milton is the pleasant
and crowning consummation of knowing Homer and Aeschy-
lus, Catullus and Virgil. And upon no other terms can we
obtain it."*
To be sure we have promise of mountains and marvels if we
break with the past. What satisfied us in our boyhood no longer
suits the fastidious taste of the present, and the Phoebus Apollo
of our youth, clad as to his dazzling shoulders with a classic
cloud, is shown up as nothing better than a padded dandy. Our
adored Thackeray is no longer faultlessly attired in a garb of
perfect English, he is simply a stylistic old beau ; the plots in
which we once took delight are nothing but vulgar tricks, and
the lifting of a tea-kettle lid and the setting down of the same are
intrigue enough for the conduct of a two-year-long novel. All
this new literature has nothing to do with the classics. Far from
it. And yet I am not at all shaken by the self-satisfied edicts of
those who rule so large 'a portion of the reading world, and I
maintain with unwavering confidence that all healthy literature
must be kept in communion, direct or indirect, with the high-
est exemplars of our Indo-European stock ; and if anything
could prove the necessity of a return to healthy human nature,
with its compassed form, its fair red and white, it would be the
utter wearisomeness of so much recent fine writing, in which there
is no blood, no sap, nothing but division and subdivision of nerve
tissue. " A pagan suckled in a creed outworn " is a joy and
delight in comparison with the languid, invertebrate children of
the great goddess Anaemia.
I have watched with much interest the development of the
study of artistic composition in English during the last few years.
Indeed, it would have been necessary to stop one's ears to keep
out the shrilling cicada-sound of " art for art's sake," and all the
theoretical buzz of aesthetic criticism. The interest has not been
unmingle4 with amusement because the apostles of progress are
preaching very old doctrine- — a doctrine which I shall be glad to
reinforce so far as I can, before I acquit myself of this function.
Art for art's sake involves the very hardest, the very driest
study, the very kind of study for which we philologians and gram-
marians are contemned. The accomplished master in the Art of
Dipping, who delighted the world a few weeks since by his Letters
to Dead Authors, made his swallow-wing strong on the Elysian
fields of the classics, and those who should hold him up as an
example of the kind of classical scholar we ought to have, little
know to what severe studies is due that easy grace. It is so
cheap to talk about gerund-grinding and root-grubbing, as if
gerund-grinding did not lead to the music of the spheres and root-
grubbing to the discovery of the magic moly that guards against
the spells of Circe, of" euphrasy and rue," that purge " the visual
nerve." He who neglects the elements lacks the first conditions of
the artistic life. In the old times great artists did not disdain to
prepare their own varnishes and the old paintings stand fresh
to this day, while many of their modern rivals, scarce a generation
old, are falling into decay beyond the hope of recognition. The
fair dream was embodied in machine pigments and the machine
pigments flake off and with them the fair dream vanishes. If
grammatical research is pressed with regard to truth, to that
which is, then the gerund-grinding as the color-grinding not
only has its warrant in itself as a useful exercise but it is sure to
be available for higher purposes, and if it is not given to everyone
to make use of grammatical results for artistic ends, still no
organic fact is without its value, none will fail of its appropriate
place in the completed system of art as of science. To me, as an
ardent lover of literature, as one who was led through literature
to grammar and not through grammar to literature, the fairest
results of a long life of study have been the visions of that cosmic
beauty, which reveals itself when the infinitely little fills up the
wavering outline and the features stand out pure and perfect
against the sky of God's truth. Now for the study of literature
as an art we have everything to learn from the old critics and
what our own Sylvester, our own Lanier have re-discovered as to
the science of verse is a chapter from antique rhetoric. Mr.
Lowell has recently pointed out the great secret of Gray's abiding
popularity. That consummate master did not disdain the close
*F. T. Palgrave, Province and Study of Poetry.
June, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
307
analysis of the sensuous effect of sound, and the melody of
Coleridge is due in a measure to a conscious though fitful study
in the same line. Of late an author, whose charm of style was
first appreciated in this country, has written an essay in which
he applies phonetic analysis to the works of our great prose
writers, and strikes the dominant chord of what seems uncon-
scious music. The essay might have been written in the begin-
ning of the first century as well as the end of the nineteenth, and
have been signed Dionysius of Halicarnassus as well as Robert
Louis Stevenson.
Whether then it be for the historical unity of the race, whether
it be for the human sanity of classical literature, whether it be for
the influence on form either as example or precept, there is no
danger that the ancient classics will be displaced from the list of
studies necessary for the highest and truest culture. Nor do I
think that the so-called hard and dry and minute research in this
and cognate provinces of study will ever be abandoned in favor
of a mere bellettristic phrasemongery about half-understood
beauties. What is hard, what is dry, what is minute depends
very much on the spirit in which it is approached. Some years
since I attended a lecture by a great master. The theme was the
vanishing of weak vowels in Latin. Candor compels me to state
that although I pride myself on being interested in the most
uninteresting things, I should have chosen another subject for
a specimen-lecture. Candor compels me to state also that I
very much question whether the illustrious teacher would accept
all his own teachings to-day, such progress do grammarians
make in devouring themselves as well as one another. I was
much struck with the tone in which he announced his subject.
It was the tone of a man who had seen the elements melt with
fervent heat, and the weak vowels vanish at the sound of the
last trump. The tone, indeed, seemed entirely too pathetic for
the occasion, but as he went on and marshalled the facts, and
set in order the long lines that connected the disappearance of the
vowel with the downfall of a nationality, and great linguistic,
great moral, great historical laws marched in stately procession
before the vision of the student, the airy vowels that had flitted
into the Nowhere seemed to be the lost soul of Roman life, and the
Latin language, Roman literature, and Roman history were
clothed with a new meaning. And so we of the language depart-
ments do not intend to be disturbed in our work by criticism on
the arid details of our courses ; nor on the other hand are we
unmindful of the larger and more popular aspects of the wide
field of culture which we occupy. There is no form of art, no
phase of philosophy, of ethics, no development of physical science,
that is alien to the student of language, and the student of physi-
cal science in his turn needs the human interest of our study to
save his life from an austere and merciless quest of fact and prin-
ciple in a domain where man enters only as a factor like any
other factor. But first and last, the scientific standard must be
upheld for the university man, be he a student of letters, be he a
physicist ; and that standard is the absolute truth, the ultimate
truth. " Nothing imperfect is the measure of anything," says the
prince of idealists.*
*areUt yap ovdev ovievd; fiirpov. Plato, Rpb. VI., 504 C.
A BRIEF REVIEW OF THE TEN YEARS' WORK OF
THE UNIVERSITY.
By James Carey Thomas, M. D., one of the Trustees.
The foundation and growth of a University is an event of the
greatest interest.
Its functions and use have been elaborately discussed by many
modern thinkers and scholars. I shall call your attention to three
statements of men of differing schools of thought.
Goldwin Smith, discussing Oxford University organization, says,
"Experience seems to show that the best way in which the
University can promote learning and advance science is
"(1) by allowing its teachers, and especially the holders of its
great Professorial chairs, a liberal margin for private study ;
"(2) by keeping its libraries and scientific apparatus in full
efficiency and opening them as liberally as possible ;
" (3) by assisting through its press in the publication of learned
works which an ordinary publisher would not undertake ;
" (4) by making the best use of its power of conferring literary
and scientific honors."
_ Matthew Arnold says, the university " ought to provide facili-
ties, after the general education is finished, for the young man to
go on in the line where his special aptitudes lead him, be it that of
languages and literature, of mathematics, of the natural sciences,
of the application of these sciences, or any other line, and follow
the studies of this line systematically, under first-rate teaching."
Again, " The idea of a university is, as I have already said, that
of an institution not only offering to young men facilities for
graduating in that line of study to which their aptitudes direct
them, but offering to them, also, facilities for following that line of
study systematically under first-rate instruction. This second
function is of incalculable importance, of far greater importance
even than the first. It is impossible to over-value the importance
to a young man of being brought in contact with a first-rate teacher
of his matter of study, and of getting from him a clear notion of
what the systematic study of it means."
John Henry Newman says, " It is a great point then to enlarge
the range of studies which a university professes, even for the sake
of the students ; and though they cannot pursue every study which
is open to them, they will be gainers by living among those and
under those who represent the whole circle. This I conceive to be
the advantage of a seat of universal learning, considered as a place
of education. An assemblage of learned men, zealous for their
own sciences and rivals of each other, are brought by familiar in-
tercourse and for the sake of intellectual peace to adjust together
the claims and relations of their respective subjects of investigation.
They learn to respect, to consult, to aid each other. Thus is created
a pure and clear atmosphere of thought, which the student also
breathes, though in his own case he only pursues a few sciences out
of the multitude. He apprehends the great outlines of knowledge,
the principles on which it rests, the scale of its parts, its lights and
its shades, its great and its little, as he otherwise cannot appre-
hend them.
" Hence it is that his education is called ' Liberal.' A habit of
mind is formed which lasts through life, of which the attributes
are freedom, equitableness, calmness, moderation and wisdom.
This then I would assign as the special fruit of the education fur-
nished at a university. . . . This is the main purpose of a uni-
versity in the treatment of its students."
108
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 50.
And a great thinker of another generation, George Fox, advised
the setting up of schools for instructing " in whatsoever things were
civil and useful in the creation."
We may then conclude that a university, wisely planned and
faithfully administered, should be able to gather together a com-
pany of teachers, distinguished in character and learning; to
present courses of study, important and thorough ; and to attract
scholars mature in age and competent by reason of previous
training to pursue special lines of study, in order to fit themselves
in a worthy manner for their chosen vocation. It should be wide
in its scope and able to supplement the College, and aid students
to perfect themselves in many departments of learning. It should
provide liberally all the apparatus for this study. It should be
rich in laboratories, in books, in instruments. It should endow
research and stimulate investigation and discovery. It should be
prepared to give results of work done within its halls speedy and
wide publicity amongst scholars engaged in kindred pursuits. It
should give its contribution to society by training men who are
fitted to help in the solution of the problems of the age — scientific,
social, political, moral and religious, both by stimulating the
production of books, and by contributions to the journals and
literature of the day. It should encourage all noble aspirations,
conserve all good inheritances of the past, and create an atmos-
phere of enthusiasm for hard work. It should be able to bestow
honors worthy of the name in reward for faithful devotion and
for the successful fulfillment of its courses of study. Its work
should be known and recognized where learning is known and
recognized, and its name should carry weight in other univer-
sities and centres of research in the world of letters.
Such thoughts as these, I am sure, Judge Dobbin, were in
your mind and in the minds of the other trustees to whom was
entrusted by our late towns-man Johns Hopkins, the foundation
and guidance of this university which was to bear his name.
On the completion of the first decade of its existence, in the
presence of the trustees and the President and faculty of the
university, before the graduates, the present fellows, and students
of the university, and in the presence of this company of our
friends and fellow-citizens, it has seemed fitting to allude to these
sentiments, as we proceed to consider the progress of this uni-
versity.
I am glad to take this opportunity of replying in public to
questions such as were asked me by a young Baltimorean, who
the other day said : " Why do Baltimoreans have to go to New
Haven or somewhere abroad to learn about the Johns Hopkins ?
©i^tfey d° vou n°t tell us what is being done ? " In order to do
and crowniflt, Baltimore audience, I have supposed my friend to
lu8 Catullus afoJlowmg questions, to which I shall briefly reply :
obtain it."* '"""■" ^f;en ^"""W to the university?
To be sure we have promise of mountains and marv
break with the past. What satisfied us in our boyhood r
suits the fastidious taste of the present, and the Phoebufon ?
of our youth, clad as to his dazzling shoulders with rf'is, etc.,
cloud, is shown up as nothing better than a padded dandy,
adored Thackeray is no longer faultlessly attired in a gai urn-
perfect English, he is simply a stylistic old beau ; the plots
which we once took delight are nothing but vulgar tricks, an
the lifting of a tea-kettle lid and the setting down of the same are'
intrigue enough for the conduct of a two-year-long novel. All
this new literature has nothing to do with the classics. Far from
The Board of Trustees was incorporated in August, 1869, at
the instance of Johns Hopkins and during his lifetime. About
a year after the death of the founder in December, 1873, the
Board was put in possession of the endowment provided by his
beneficence, and organized for work. The President of the
Board, the late Galloway Cheston, took an active part in the
enterprise, and by his advice greatly aided in laying the founda-
tion of the University, and his name will always be honorably
associated with its history. The other members of the Board,
all of whom had been named by Johns Hopkins, were Reverdy
Johnson, Jr., the first chairman of the Executive Committee,
Francis T. King, Lewis N. Hopkins, Thomas M. Smith, William
Hopkins, John W. Garrett, Francis White, Charles J. M. Gwinn,
George W. Dobbin, George Wm. Brown, and James Carey
Thomas.
What great teachers have been attracted f
It was soon apparent that the wise and untrammelled directions
of Johns Hopkins to his trustees to found a university would
attract the attention of those interested in the cause of education,
especially in the United States.
The opportunity of developing an institution suited to the needs
of the country was sufficient to draw to Baltimore from across
the continent the then President of the University of California,
Daniel C. Gilman, who was named to the trustees as the man best
fitted by previous training and devotion to the study of educa-
tional methods, to advise and direct the establishment of the new
foundation, by his former colleagues of Yale College — by Presi-
dent Eliot, of Harvard University, at once the most renowned
and the most venerable institution of learning in the country —
by President White, of Cornell University, then in the early days
of its growing importance and usefulness — by President Angell,
of the University of Michigan, the crowning institution of learn-
ing of the well-organized system of public instruction in that
great and strong western State — and by numerous other leading
educators. At the request of the trustees Mr. Gilman came to
Baltimore, and after consultation with them accepted the Presi-
dency of the Johns Hopkins University. Under his thoughtful
care and constant and laborious effort the plan originally con-
templated has been gradually and harmoniously developed.
Besides President Gilman the University also drew7 from across
the ocean, from Woolwich, England, Professor Sylvester, one of
the two greatest English mathematicians, and indeed one of the
greatest of the world ; and from Virginia, in our own land, Pro-
fessor Gildersleeve, second to none in his attainments in and
devotion to Greek and other classical study — besides younger
men whose subsequent career has justified the bright promise
of their early years. I shall not mention further by name the
present distinguished staff of Professors and teachers, whose work
I have alluded to and who form the permanent renown and
attraction of the University.
I will give a list in chronological order of those gentlemen,
not now connected with the University, who, for a longer or
shorter period, have lectured here during the past ten years :
In Language and Literature, Professors F. J. Child, James Rus-
sell Lowell, W. D. Whitney, C. R. Lanman, Thomas C. Murray,
H. C. G. Brandt, Sidney Lanier, too early lost, Professors W. W.
Goodwin, J. A. Harrison, J. Rendel Harris, Hiram Corson, A. S.
Cook, Messrs. George W. Cable, Edmund Gosse, Justin Winsor,
June, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
109
A. Melville Bell, Drs. Isaac H. Hall and W. Hayes Ward ; in
History and Political Science, Professors T. M. Cooley, F. A.
Walker, W. F. Allen, the lamented J. L. Diman, H. Von Hoist,
Austin Scott, James Bryce, E. A. Freeman, who gave six lectures
and imparted a decided impulse to historical study here, K. M.
Venable, Messrs. J. J. Knox and Eugene Schuyler ; in Archaeol-
ogy and Art, Messrs. W. W. Story, F. Seymour Haden, J. Thacher
Clarke, "VV. J. Stillman, Dr. Charles Waldstcin, and Mr. Fred-
erick Wedmore ; in Philosophy and Logic, Professors William
James, G. S. Morris, Mr. C. S. Pierce, and Dr. Josiah Royce ; in
Physical and Mathematical Science, Professors J. E. Hilgard, J.
Willard Gibbs, John Trowbridge, A. Graham Bell, S. P. Langley,
Arthur Cayley, C. S. Hastings, and Sir William Thomson ; in
Chemistry and Biology, Professors J. W. Mallet, W. G. Farlow,
J. McCrady, W. T. Sedgwick, H. Sewall, and W. Trelease.
At our Commencements, Anniversaries, and other gatherings,
we have heard from Presidents Eliot and White, from Dean
Stanley, Dean Howson, Professor Huxley, Archdeacon Farrar,
Chief Justice Waite, Hon. W. M. Evarts, Dr. W. A. P. Martin,
Dr. W. B. Carpenter, Hon. S. T. Wallis, J. B. Braithwaite and
others.
Many of these have been listened to by those not members of
the university who were specially interested in their subjects, and
it may be fairly said that many eminent and great teachers have
been both for long and short periods attracted to the university.
What university courses are here offered, and what graduate
students have been attracted f
The courses of university studies that have been pursued have
been so often and so fully referred to in the Reports and Circulars
of the University, that I can only enumerate those : in higher
Mathematics, in Physics, in Chemistry, in Mineralogy and
Petrography, in Biology; in Greek, in Latin, in Sanskrit, in
Hebrew, in Aramrcan, in Arabic, in Assyrian, and in Sumero-
Akkadian; in English, in German, in the Romance group of
languages, including French, old and modern, Wallachian,
Italian, Spanish, Catalan, old Provencal, modern Provencal,
and Portuguese ; in History, ancient and modern, in Political
Economy, Physical and Historical Geography ; in Psychology,
Pedagogics and Philosophy, in Mental Hygiene and Ethics. In
these studies advanced instruction has been given by all avail-
able means such as lectures, laboratory practice, seminary work,
books, models and plates, in order to fit those who are preparing
for teaching or special research.
That these courses have succeeded in attracting students of
mature age is evident from the fact that out of the total number
of students (923) enrolled during the decade, 590 have pursued
graduate courses, and these 590 came from more than 100 different
universities and colleges as widely separated as Russia and Japan.
What apparatus and appliances have been gathered together f
To aid in the instruction given, the trustees have from the first
had in view securing the most convenient and free access to the
most modern means of promoting research. They were greatly
aided by the existence in Baltimore of a library of unusual value
to students — the gift of the late George Peabody, and brought
together with much care and diligence by the trustees, the
provost, and the librarian of the Peabody Institute — and which has
been liberally opened to members of the university. As a supple-
ment to the Peabody collections the university has placed within
its own walls twenty-nine thousand volumes — a portion of which
arc standard reference books needed by all the teachers and
students, the remainder are special and often costly books which
have been called for by the specialists here engaged in work.
The plans of the university being at first, from the nature of
the case, tentative, the work was begun in two dwelling houses
purchased in 1875, on Howard street near Monument street, and
in a hall erected at the time and named after the founder, which
contained an assembly room and accommodations for the library
and for the biological laboratory, and in a chemical laboratory
built at the same time, and this was for some time the modest seat
of the university. The location was found more convenient than
had been foreseen, both for students who lived in the city and for
those that came from elsewhere, who readily found accommodation
in lodgings suited to their taste and means. Easy access was had
to the Peabody and other collections of books, as those of the His-
torical Society, and later of the Pratt Library, and there have
gradually grown around the present site complete and well
equipped laboratories. The chemical laboratory has been greatly
enlarged and perfected. The biological laboratory adjoining
has been erected after plans suggested by years of work and by
comparison with foreign institutions of a similar kind, and there
is now building near by the physical laboratory, of which Pro-
fessor Rowland has been speaking to you to-day. Laboratory
work in pathology has been begun in one of the buildings of the
Johns Hopkins Hospital, and it is intended to erect the Medical
School on a lot now owned by the university, adjacent to the
hospital.
Into these various buildings have been gathered, at the sug-
gestion and under the careful personal supervision of various
experts, about $70,000 worth of apparatus of the most approved
modern make, thus placing within the reach of investigators the
means of pursuing advanced research as well as enabling students
to become familiar by personal use with the newest methods of
study and experiment.
What research is carried on — and what has been published t
The researches which have been made have been many and
varied. I cannot refer to the more technical, such as those in
mathematics and inorganic chemistry, &c, but briefly to the more
easily stated.
Our knowledge of the nature of the sun, as perceived through
the solar spectrum, has received accessions from the beautiful
image, thrown from the gratings first made here by the agency
of a wonderful dividing engine, the invention of the Professor
of Physics. From this image a map of the spectrum has been
published, very much more minute than any before made.
Researches in electricity and magnetism have been made under
the auspices of the United States Government, with the coopera-
tion of other nations; the mechanical equivalent of heat has been
re-determined ; investigations have been conducted in physiology,
especially of the heart's action ; lower animal life has been studied,
especially that of the oyster in connection with the State of Mary-
land ; both here and in Boston the cause of water pollution in
great reservoirs has been discovered ; the curious geological forma-
tion of our own neighborhood has been brought to notice and has
attracted wide attention. The philologians and grammarians
have been engaged in the investigation of Greek and Latin
110
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 50.
syntax; in editing ancient writings, such as Pindar, the newly
discovered Greek MSS. of the Teaching of the Twelve Apostles,
and part of an old Syriac MS. of the New Testament. Baltimore
is now one of the centres for the interpretation of Sanskrit texts
and of Assyrian inscriptions. A great contribution has been made
to the study of American Institutions, and new methods of his-
torical research and of publication have been initiated.
It is with satisfaction that I state that these researches have
been widely recognized at home and abroad, not as promises for
the future, but as successful experiments recorded, and con-
clusions reached which have passed into the history of science.
By means of them the fame of the university has been carried
into every seat of learning in the world, from Oxford and Cam-
bridge in England, to Tokio, Japan ; from the northern and more
modern universities of Sweden and Russia to the ancient seats of
learning in Italy and Southern Europe. The exchanges on the
shelves of our library, received with almost every foreign mail in
return for the six scientific journals published by the university*
attest both its importance and its estimation outside its own walls.
Besides this, personal and unsolicited testimonials from eminent
men are on file in the office which have been received from many
quarters.
These researches, delicate, prolonged, and important, and others
not now mentioned, have been made by Professors, Fellows, and
advanced students. Indeed the whole plan of fellowships has in
reality been a most practical and efficient endowment of research
and has richly repaid the university and the community in the
importance and value of the results obtained.
Twenty young men who have not quite completed their work,
as students following masters, but who have gone far enough to
indicate that they are possessed of unusual ability, are annually
chosen by the Academic Council and are encouraged by a gener-
ous stipend to devote all their time to study which is not of a dis-
tinctively professional character. They are chosen because of the
hope they give of future achievements, or are selected on the evi-
dence they submit of their previous intellectual attainments. The
system here adopted has elsewhere been followed.
What has been the value of this training f
Has the training here been of value to the men that have sub-
mitted to the severe ordeal of discipline and who have often
surrendered honorable and lucrative positions to avail themselves
of the advantages offered for research and study ? Or in other
words are the diplomas to be given to-day as testimonials of the
University to the attainments of those to whom they are so
worthily awarded, of real value to their possessors ?
Of the 69 persons who in these ten years have been admitted to
the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, denoting proficiency in var-
ious lines of special graduate study, either in letters or in science,
56 have obtained honorable positions as professors and teachers in
32 universities and colleges ; and of the 90 to whom the degree of
•J. The American Journal of Mathematics, commenced in 1878, now in
its eighth volume ; 2. The American Chemical Journal, commenced in 1879,
now in itseighth volume ; 3. The American Journal of Philology, commenced
in 1880, now in its seventh volume ; 4. Studies from the Biological Labora-
tory, commenced in 1879, now in its third volume; 5. Studies in Histori-
cal and Political Science, begun in 1882, of which the fourth series is in
progress; 6. The Johns Hopkins University Circulars, begun in 1879, of
which forty-nine numbers have been issued.
Bachelor of Arts has been given, 20 have engaged in teaching in
16 colleges and high schools.
I will conclude this part of my subject by quoting the reply
made by a graduate student from North Carolina, when asked
what he had found here of most use, he replied : " The freedom
of access to able teachers and the stimulant of studying in com-
pany with men of maturer minds than one meets elsewhere."
But what has the university done for this community t
Besides the incidental advantages which must accrue to any
community from the presence of a great seat of learning, the trus-
tees have had in mind from the first the special needs of this city
and state. At the conclusion of the late war fewer boys were at
college than at former periods. Many young men here and
further south had foregone college training, and circumstances
forbade the sending of others who were growing up. It was
manifest that the need of our own people was first a college in
order to train for life, or for further university instruction. So
side by side with the university has developed the college depart-
ment of the Johns Hopkins University. This was begun when
the discussion of a fixed, a free or wholly or partly elective col-
lege course had not been so warmly debated as at the present
time, but it was evident that the wide range which the develop-
ment of various branches of knowledge has taken since the old
arrangement of college studies was effected, and the limited time
which can ordinarily be devoted by students to preparation for
their life work, made a readjustment of the college course desirable.
This was accomplished here by arranging, after a fixed matricula-
tion, the studies in groups rather than years, and demanding in
each group a certain required amount of training in other than
the main study of the course. Thus classical students are required
to study some science, scientific students some classics, and all to
receive a fixed amount of general English training in literature,
ethics, philosophy, and modern languages.
The seven groups, for which, in accordance with these princi-
ples, arrangements are now made, are these : —
1. Classical, — corresponding closely with what has been hitherto
known in this country as the usual college course ;
2. Mathematical-Physical, — which meets the wants of those who
are expecting to enter upon the modern vocations in which rigid
mathematical discipline is indispensable ;
3. Chemical-Biological, — which is adapted to those, among
others, who expect to enter upon the subsequent study of
medicine ;
4. Physical-Chemical, — which is most likely to be followed by
students preparing for those scientific pursuits which are neither
chiefly mathematical nor chiefly biological ;
5. Latin-Mathematical, — which affords a good fundamental
training, without prolonged attention to the study of Greek ;
6. Historical-Political, — which furnishes a basis for the subse-
quent study of law ;
7. Modern Language, — where French, German, English, and
in exceptional cases, other modern languages, take the place of
Latin and Greek in the traditional classical course.
It cannot be said that this arrangement is perfect, but it has
worked well and great effort is made to have it at once liberal and
adapted to the exigencies of active life. I should like all the
time at my disposal to expand more fully this slight sketch of the
college course which lies near my own heart, but must content
June, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
Ill
myself with stating that it has from the first attracted our own
boys to whom great inducement has been held out, and who have
proved some of our most enthusiastic and successful students, have
won for themselves many of our own fellowships, and have gone
out to positions of importance and emolument. Their number is
rapidly increasing and the university is constantly endeavoring to
make closer the connection between the high schools, whether
private or public, and the collegiate department of the Johns
Hopkins University.
Various free scholarships are annually offered to students
coming from Maryland, Virginia, and North Carolina, and have
been held by 150 students from these States. The existence
in our midst of such advantages is stimulating our young men to
avail themselves of them, and is increasing the number and effi-
ciency of preliminary schools. We have now in the collegiate
department one hundred and thirty students.
I have thus, in the briefest and most prosaic manner endeavored
to summarize the work of ten years into the space of twice as
many minutes. It has been impossible ; although I have not even
glanced at the various literary and scientific societies formed for
themselves by the members of the university, nor alluded to the
common college life, nor spoken of the work of the Christian
Association of the University which has served an excellent pur-
pose, but yet I think that I have shown that something has been
done to bring together great teachers, to start liberal courses of
study, to attract students, to collect libraries and apparatus, to
stimulate research, to publish results, and have stated in what
manner this work has been recognized, and how the needs of this
community have been considered. '
But I am sure that in reaching these conclusions you must feel
how little has been done in comparison with what is practicable
with longer time and greater resources. The perpetuation and
enlargement of the university on a broad and liberal foundation
should be the pride of every citizen. It is a great trust to be
handed down to those who shall succeed us. Let us be careful to
see that no detriment happen to it.
Amidst the jarring of contending factions and classes there
needs must be thoughtful men, trained to habits of patient inves-
tigation and quiet study — amidst the rush of business and compe-
tition, men who in secluded laboratories pass hours and days in
subtile experiments — amidst the selfishness of politicians and
placemen, historians and philosophers and teachers who can recall
the lessons of past ages and vindicate the great moral principles
which underlie all true progress.
For these and other great purposes universities should exist
and be richly endowed. They should be few, but strong.
A president of a growing western college, last week in Balti-
more, emphasized most strongly the importance of adding efficiency
to existing universities in order to make them great centres for
training and research. The possessors of great wealth, most fre-
quently in this country accumulated in the course of a single life,
have often felt their responsibility in its ultimate destination.
They have in many instances, amongst which the course of Johns
Hopkins is conspicuous, returned their accumulated gains to the
community in noble gifts, founding great institutions of learning
and great charities, for the training of the future citizen and for
the alleviation of human suffering. These should be fostered and
enlarged, as has been done at Harvard and at Cornell, in order
that the greatest good may be accomplished.
The training of men is after all the most important end of all
educational effort. It is to you, young men, the sons of this new
foundation, that your teachers and friends look as the best evidence
of the success of their endeavor. Your learning, your usefulness,
your accomplishments, your high aims and noble character, your
achievements, whether in the pulpit or the forum, the college or
the laboratory, at home and abroad will afford a continual and
living reminder of this, the place of your training.
To a State founded on the beneficent precepts of Christianity,
the walls of its defense must be not the physical strength of
its citizens but their moral character. In vain will science
harness the powers of the universe unless they are yoked to
the chariot of peace and good will. In vain will learning and
training give efficiency to individual influence and native genius,
unless the purposes of the man are noble and far-reaching. The
truth which sets free, is the truth which warms the heart and
expands the sympathies, as well as enlightens the intellect, which
is of Him who is the truth Himself. Let us have confidence in
the supremacy of truth. Such has hitherto been the guiding
lamp of the Johns Hopkins University. May it ever be the
beacon of the future.
AN ODE TO THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY.
By Richard E. Bueton, A. B.
(A graduate student of the University.)
Fair hopes and many beat beneath the breast
So young, so blest,
Of our America, this sweet young Warrior-Knight
With front set starward underneath his crest,
With breast-plate blazoned with a legend bright
That reads : Truth, Liberty and Right.
Fair valiance erst was his in jousts of old,
And now, with lance at rest, but blithe and bold
He rides him straight to gain the guerdon great
That Peace his lady-love, or soon or late,
Will guerdon him withal
As glad years fall.
Unhelmeted he rides, and wide his gaze
Sweeps all the lists, and all the peopled ways.
n.
Our land is guarded in her plenteous peace
By firm-set fortresses, that quick increase
To ward away the wars that Error breeds,
The mighty train of man's misdeeds
That fall alone before the touch of Truth,
Whereto Sweet Science leans and leads, in sooth.
Science sits on these battlements
And cries abroad her gracious good intents ;
Until her foes without
Grow faint and fling no battle-shout
Against her ramparts ; and as time
Sweeps on, the peace-bells ring a broader chime,
And lo ! each battle-plain
Is cleansed of carnage and the sight of slain, -
112
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
[No. 50.
For dim-eyed Sin and sister Sloth are ta'en.
From sea to sea the victory is won,
And Love is Lord from Sun to Sun.
in.
Our hearts would hail a bulwark bold
Late-builded, stout to stem all wrong of old ;
Two lustrums gone beheld its birth,
To-day how wide of girth !
Its turrets stars of heaven greet,
Its walls hem in all Hopes and Healments meet,
At base fair earth-flowers swing their chalice-censers sweet.
Here flock the souls that hate such filmy ken
As fails to sight the plight of brother men ;
Who long to rid them of mere greed for gain,
To sink the pride of place, that world-wide bane,
In deep desire to flash the crystal-clear
Broad light of God on races far and near ;
A light no creed may clasp, no ritual phrase,
That shineth steadfast down the eternal days ;
Whose fundament is Truth, Beauty its shrine,
Its capital robed Love, half-human, all divine.
IV.
From palm-fringed shores beset of southern seas,
From sundown lands of tilth and mighty trees,
From northern meadow-slopes of bloom and breeze,
From olden countries set across the main
We come, a train
Of morning pilgrims manifold of kin
But one in wish for service, set to win
From out the close-locked casket of the age,
Sans stain, sans petty rage,
The touchstone that may test the Heart of things
And prove it golden, graced with golden wings.
With purpose such, what tongue can set a bound
To dreams that may be ours, what song may sound
With music meet for signalling the fame
Enfolding fast these walls we love to name.
Then hail foundation young ! and two-fold tender hail
To them that manned the helm in early gale,
The ship a thing of straining sail !
Theirs be the glad fruition of this day
That looks upon a summer sea
Calm-stretching utterly ;
With storm-stress dying to the east away,
And westward, whither beck the blessed Isles,
Smooth course and splendor of the sunset-smiles.
All hail each mariner! though humbler be his place,
Who fain would trim the ship and see her sail apace.
Ye farers all on life's unfathomed sea,
Keep watch to westward where your harbors be,
And gather treasures for your argosy.
VI.
What though we chant her praises under guise
Of fortress sturdy, or of sea-emprise
Ventured by white-winged ship, our hearts are all for thee,
Thou University,
Set midst this stately town of storied deeds
And twin with her in sowing vital seeds
For nourishment of needs :
Until ye twain shall cry,
As swift the years soft-sandaled fare and fly,
To myriad men : " Here living waters flow,
Here all bright blooms of Thought shall bud and blow."
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are published at conve-
nient intervals during the academic year for the purpose of communicating
intelligence to the various members of the university in respect to work
which is here in progress, as well as for the purpose of promulgating official
announcements from the governing and teaching bodies. During the cur-
rent academic year, ten circulars will be issued in successive months, to be
followed at the close of the year by an index.
Although these circulars are designed for the members of the university,
they have frequently been called for by institutions and libraries at a dis-
tance, and also by individuals who are interested in the literary and scien-
tific activity of this university. Subscriptions and exchanges are therefore
received.
TERMS OF SUBSCRIPTION.
For the current year, 1885-6, $1.
For the year 1884-5 (134 pp. in cloth covers), $1.50.
For the year 1883-4 (140 pp. in cloth covers), $1.50.
For the year 1882-3 [l68 pp. in cloth covers), $3.
For the years 1879-82 (260 pp. in cloth covers), $5.
Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the Annual Register and
Report of the University.
All subscriptions should be addressed to the "Publication Agency of the
Johns Hopkins I'niver-itv.''
Communications for the Circulars should be sent in prior to the first day
of the month in which they are expected to appear.
UNIVERSITY CALENDAR.
Examinations for Admission begin Wednesday, June 9, at 9 a. m.
Degrees will be conferred Monday, June 14, at 6 p. m.
The present academic year closes Tuesday, June 15.
The eleventh academic year begins Friday, October 1.
The autumn Examinations for Admisssion will begin October 1, at 9 a. m.
University Circular 51, containing the announcements of the courses of
instruction offered for the next academic year, will be ready at the close of
June and will be sent on application.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
On Some of the Humane Aspects of Medical Science. By W. H.
Welch, 101
The Physical Laboratory in Modern Education. By H. A. Row-
land, .... - 103
On the Present Aspect of Classical Study. By B. L. Gildersleeve, 105
A Brief Review of the Ten Years' Work of the University. By J« C.
Thomas, 107
An Ode to the Johns Hopkins University. By R. E. Burton, - 111
The John* Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., No. 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom tingle n,j/ies may be obtained. Tliey may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 2G2 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore.
JOHNS HOPKINS
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS
Published with the approbation of the Board of Trustees
Vol. V.— No. 51.]
BALTIMORE, JULY, 1886.
[Price, 10 Cents.
PROGRAMMES FOR 1886-87.
The following courses in literature and science are offered for the academic year which begins October 1, 1886. They
are open to properly qualified young men according to conditions varying somewhat in each department. Detailed state-
ments as to the different subjects are given in the programmes of the departments of instruction on subsequent pages. The
Annual Eegister giving full statements as to the regulations and work of the University will be sent on application.
B. L. GILDERSLEEVE, Professor of Greek
(a) will direct the Greek Seminary. Twice weekly.
(b) will conduct a course of Practical Exercises in Greek.
Twice iveekly, from October to January.
(c) will give a general Introduction to Hermeneutics and Criti-
cism. Weekly, after January 1.
(d) will give a series of Readings in Aischylos, Sophokles, and
Euripides. Twice weekly, after January 1.
(e) will hold a series of Conferences on Greek Syntax. Weekly,
last three months.
G. STANLEY HALL, Professor of Psychology and Pedagogics.
(a) General Systematic Psychology. Semi-weekly lectures and
weekly conferences.
(b) Pedagogics. Weekly lecture and conference.
(c) History of Philosophy.
PAUL HAUPT, Professor of Shemitic Languages.
(a) Hebrew. Twice weekly.
(b) Biblical Aramaean Grammar ; Elements of Assyrian Gram-
mar ; Assyriological Exercises. Each weekly.
(c) Assyrian Language and Literature. Twenty-four lectures.
(d) Assyriological Winter School. Daily, during January.
H. N. MARTIN, Professor of Biology.
(a) will direct the Laboratory Work in Biology. Daily.
(b) will lecture on General Biology (till April) and the
Embryology of the Chick and Mammal (from April till close
of session). Three times weekly.
(c) will lecture on selected topics in Physiology. Weekly.
SIMON NEWCOMB, Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy.
(a) Mathematical Seminary. Weekly.
(b) Practical and Theoretical Astronomy. Twice weekly.
IRA REMSEN, Professor of Chemistry.
(a) will direct the Laboratory Work in Chemistry. Daily.
(b) Advanced Organic Chemistry ; Theories of Chemistry.
Twice weekly.
(c) General Chemistry. Daily.
(d) Compounds of Carbon. Three times weekly.
H. A. ROWLAND, Professor of Physics.
(a) will direct a course of advanced work in the Physical
Laboratory. Daily.
(b) Electricity and Magnetism. Four times weekly.
WILLIAM H. WELCH, Professor of Pathology.
(a) will direct the work of the Pathological Laboratory.
(b) will lecture on Pathological Histology, Bacteriology, and
General Pathology.
JOHN H. WRIGHT, Professor of Classical Philology.
(a) Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Survey of the Greek Drama (first
half-year), Demosthenes and Survey of Greek Oratory (second
half-year). Four times weekly.
(b) Greek Prose Composition ; Classical Archaeology and Anti-
quities. Each weekly.
(c) other courses to be hereafter announced.
H. B. ADAMS, Associate Professor of History.
(a) Seminary of History and Economics. Weekly.
(b) History of Politics. Twice weekly.
(c) Elements of International Law. Twice weekly.
(d) will direct the Undergraduate Courses in History, with
assistance.
M. BLOOMFIELD, Associate Professor of Sanskrit.
(a) Sanskrit, Elementary and Advanced. Each twice weekly.
(b) Vedic Sanskrit (first half-year) ; Seminary ; General Prin-
ciples of Comparative Philology ; Comparative Greek Gram-
mar. Each weekly.
W. K. BROOKS, Associate Professor of Moiphology.
(a) will direct the work of the Marine Laboratory.
(b) will lecture on the Elements of Zoology. Twice weekly, from
the Christmas recess until the end of the session.
(c) will conduct a course in Animal Morphology.
114
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
T. CRAIG, Associate Professor of Applied Mathematics.
(a) Seminary. Weekly.
(6) Hydrodynamics ; Theory of Functions (first half-year),
Elasticity and Abelian Functions (second half-year). Each
three times weekly.
(c) Linear Differential Equations, and Differential Invariants.
Twice weekly.
(d) Differential Equations. Twice weekly.
A. M. ELLIOTT, Associate Professor of Romance Languages.
will give advanced courses in the Romance Languages, includ-
ing Modern French Phonetics, Old French Philology, Com-
parative Romance Phonology, Italian Dialects, Seminary
Work, etc.
GEORGE H. EMMOTT, Associate Professor of Logic and Ethics, and
Lecturer on Roman Law.
(a) Deductive and Inductive Logic, and Ethics.
(b) Roman Law.
H. N. MORSE, Associate Professor of Chemistry.
(a) will assist in directing the Laboratory Work.
(6) will lecture on Stoichiometry and Inorganic Chemistry.
Each twice weekly.
W. E. STORY, Associate Professor of Mathematics.
(a) Mathematical Seminary. Weekly.
(b) Introductory course for Graduates. Daily.
(c) Advanced course in Analytical Geometry. Twice weekly.
(d) Quaternions. Three times weekly.
(e) Analytical Geometry and Conic Sections. Twice weekly.
M. WARREN, Associate Professor, of Latin.
(a) will conduct the Latin Seminary (Vergil). Twice weekly.
(b) Vergil and Roman Epic Poetry. First half-year.
(c) Macrobius (first half-year), Latin Palaeography (second half-
year).
(d) Conferences on Latin Syntax. Weekly, second half-year.
(e) Cicero and Survey of Roman Oratory (first half-year),
Terence, Plautus, and Survey of Roman Drama (second half-
year). Three times weekly.
(/) Reading Latin at Sight and Latin Prose Composition.
G. H. WILLIAMS. Associate Professor of Mineralogy.
(a) will lecture on Mineralogy and Geology. Three times
weekly.
(b) will direct the Laboratory Work in Crystallography, Physical
Mineralogy and Microscopical Petrography.
H. WOOD, Associate Professor of Oerman.
(a) will have charge of the instruction in German.
(b) will conduct the advanced courses in German, including the
Teutonic Seminary, Gothic, Old Norse, etc.
(c) Beowulf. Twice weekly, first half-year.
W. HAND BROWNE, Associate in English.
(a) Elizabethan, Fourteenth and Eighteenth Century Writers,
and early Scottish Literature. Four times weekly.
(b) Synoptical Study of English Literature. Twice weekly.
WILLIAM T. COUNCILMAN, Associate in Pathology.
(a) will assist in the Laboratory Work in Pathology.
(b) will give courses in Post-mortem Examinations and Patho-
logical Demonstrations.
L. DUNCAN, Associate in Electricity.
will direct the special course in Electricity and Magnetism.
R. T. ELY, Associate in Political Economy.
(a) Finance and Taxation ; Elements of Political Economy.
Each subject three times weekly.
(b) Studies in Administration. Weekly.
(c) Modern Financial and Social Topics. Twice weekly.
F. FRANKLIN, Associate in Mathematics.
(a) Problems in Mechanics. Twice weekly.
(b) Differential and Integral Calculus. Three times weekly.
(c) Advanced Algebra and Preparation for Calculus. Three
times weekly, first half-year.
(d) Theory of Equations (first half-year), Solid Analytic
Geometry (second half-year). Three times weekly.
(e) Preparation for Matriculation in Trigonometry and Ana-
lytical Geometry. Three times weekly.
E. M. HARTWELL, Associate in Physical Training.
will have charge of the Gymnasium and will direct the courses
in Physical Culture.
WILLIAM H. HOWELL, Associate in Biology.
(a) will assist in the Laboratory Work in Biology.
(b) Animal Physiology and Histology. Three times weekly.
J. F. JAMESON, Associate in History.
(a) Elements of Historical Criticism. Weekly.
(b) will teach undergraduate classes in History and Political
Science.
A. L. KIMBALL, Associate in Physics.
(a) will direct the course of instruction for undergraduates in
General Physics. Daily.
(b) will give courses of lectures to the major course students.
Daily.
E. RENOUF, Associate in Chemistry.
will assist in the Laboratory Work in Chemistry.
E. H. SPIEKER, Associate in Latin and Greek.
Undergraduate Courses in Latin and Greek.
H. A. TODD, Associate in Romance Languages.
(a) Undergraduate Courses in French.
(b) Special courses in Italian, Spanish, etc.
J. W. BRIGHT, Instructor in English.
(a) Anglo-Saxon Poetry, Early English Dialects, Historical
English Grammar, West Saxon and Middle English Prose
Texts, and the English Seminary.
(b) Elements of Phonetics, History of the English Language,
Anglo-Saxon, etc. Four times weekly.
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTORS AND ASSISTANTS.
In Drawing : Hugh Newell.
In French : F. M. Warren.
In German : J. Goebel and M. D. Learned.
In Physics : C. A. Perkins.
In Vocal Culture : C. L. Woodworth, Jr.
Professor R. Lanciani, of the University of Rome, will give
a course of six or more lectures (probably in January, 1887) on
Roman Archaeology.
M. Rabillon will give courses of public lectures (in French)
on topics in French Literature.
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
115
MATHEMATICS.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
I. Graduate Courses.
Professor Newcomb.
Seminary.
Weekly, through the year.
Practical and Theoretical Astronomy.
Twice weekly, through the year.
This course is intended to include the theory of planetary perturbations.
Dr. Story.
Seminary.
Weekly, through the year.
The object of the Seminary is the guidance of graduate students in sys-
tematic original investigation, and for this purpose the Director sug-
gests topics for consideration and methods of work, and the results
obtained are discussed in the weekly meetings.
Introductory Course for Graduates (including Mechanics, Theory
of Numbers, Modern Algebra, Higher Plane Curves, Surfaces
and Twisted Curves, Quaternions, Finite Differences, Proba-
bilities, and Elliptic Functions).
Five times weekly, through the year.
This course is preparatory to all the advanced mathematical courses, and
those who intend to become candidates for the Doctor's degree in mathe-
matics are expected to take it in the first year of their residence here
as graduate students, unless they give evidence that they have already
a knowledge of the several branches of the course equivalent to that
here acquired. Candidates for the Doctor's degree in other depart-
ments taking mathematics as a subsidiary subject will attend three
lectures a week of this course (omitting Theory of Numbers, Modern
Algebra, Surfaces and Twisted Curves).
Advanced Course in Analytic Geometry.
Twice weekly, through the year.
In 1886-87 special attention will be given to the metrical properties of
Curves and Surfaces, non-Euclidean Geometry, Curvature, &c.
Quaternions.
Three times weekly, through the year.
Dr. Craig.
Seminary.
Weekly, through the year.
During the first half of the year attention will be directed mainly to the
subject of the essential singular points of a function, and during the
second half year to linear differential equations, some of whose inte-
grals are irregular, and also to the singular solutions of partial differ-
ential equations.
Hydrodynamics.
Three times weekly, first half-year.
Elasticity.
Three times weekly, second half-year.
Theory of Functions.
Three times weekly, first half-year.
Linear Differential Equations [Fuchs].
Twice weekly, first half-year.
Abelian Functions.
Three times weekly, second half-year.
Linear Differential Equations and Differential Invariants
[Halphen].
Twice weekly, second half-year.
Dr. Franklin.
Problems in Mechanics.
Twice weekly, through the year.
The Mathematical Society.
The Mathematical Society, composed of instructors and ad-
vanced students, will meet monthly as heretofore for the presen-
tation and discussion of papers and oral communications.
II. Undergraduate Courses.
FIRST YEAR:
Advanced Algebra and Preparation for Calculus.
Three times weekly, first half-year. Dr. Franklin.
Differential and Integral Calculus (elementary course).
Three times weekly, second half-year. Dr. Franklin.
Analytic Geometry and Conic Sections.
Twice weekly, through the year. Dr. Story.
SECOND YEAR* (after 1887).
Differential and Integral Calculus (advanced course).
Three times weekly, first half-year. Dr. Franklin.
Differential Equations.
Three times weekly, second half-year. Dr. Craig.
Solid Analytic Geometry.
Twice weekly, through the year. Dr. Franklin.
•In 1886-87 the work of the second year will he the same as In 1885-86, i. e., Theory of
Equations, three times weekly, first half-year ; Solid Analytic Geometry, three times
weekly, second half-year ; Differential Equations, twice weekly, through the year.
Preparation for Matriculation in Trigonometry and Analytic
Geometry.
Three times weekly, through the year. Dr. Franklin.
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
Professor Newcomb :
Practical and Theoretical Astronomy. Twice weekly, through the year.
Seminary. Weekly, through the year.
Dr. Story :
Seminary. Weekly, through the year.
Introductory Course for Graduates. Daily, through the year.
Finite Differences and Interpolation. Twice weekly, first half-year.
Theory of Probabilities. Twice weekly, second half year.
Advanced Analytic Geometry, with special reference to curves and sur-
faces of the third and fourth orders. Three times weekly, through the
year.
Conic Sections. Twice weekly, through the year.
Dr. Craig:
Seminary. Weekly, through the year.
Hydrodynamics. Three times weekly, first half-year.
Theory of Functions. Three limes weekly, first half-year.
Elasticity. Three times weekly, second half-year.
Elliptic and Abelian Functions. Three limes weekly, second half-year.
Differential Equations. Twice weekly, through the year.
Linear Differential Equations. Twiee weekly, through the year.
116
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
Dr. Franklin.
Problems in Mechanics. Twice weekly, through the year.
Theory of Equations. Three times weekly, first half-year.
Solid Analytic Geometry. Three times weekly, second half-year.
Differential and Integral Calculus. Three times weekly, through the year.
Trigonometry. Three times weekly, first half-year.
Analytic Geometry (Elementary). Three times weekly, second half-year.
The Mathematical Society has met monthly. Papers have
been read by :
D. Barcroft. — Note on Partitions ; Generalization of Two Theorems.
T. Craig. — Note on Binomial Linear Differential Equations; on the
Integral of the Adjoint Equation.
J. C. Fields. — On Forms reducible to (a, o, c), (a, Ja, c), (and a, b, a) ; a
Proof of Elliptic Function Addition Theorem ; new Proof of Theorem :
Every Equation has a Root ; a Method of Solving Riccati's Equation ; Solu-
tions analogous to Riccati's of Equation - =izmy.
F. Franklin. — On the Sum of the Squares of the Binomial Coefficients.
S. Newcomb. — Remarks on Complex Anharmonic Ratio; on the Combi-
nation of Errors.
W. E. Story. — On the Parametric Representation of any Point on a
Conic through Five given Points ; Proof of the Theorem : The Deficiency
of every Unicursal Curve is 0 ; a Note on Unicursal Curves ; an Equation
in Finite Differences ; on some Quartic Scrolls not mentioned by Salmon.
PHYSICS.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
The construction of a large and commodious building to be
used as the Physical Laboratory of this University is now so far
advanced that the Trustees look forward to its completion in the
early Autumn. Better facilities will accordingly be offered for
the prosecution of studies in Physics.
The Physical Laboratory.
The new laboratory is to be of red brick, with brown stone
trimmings; it is 115 feet long by 70 feet wide, and will have
four stories besides the basement. In the center of the building,
and below the basement are constant temperature vaults. In the
basement will be the mechanical workshop, furnaces, and rooms
with piers for instruments requiring great stability. The first
floor will include the main lecture room which will accommodate
150 persons, and rooms for investigations in heat and electricity
by advanced students.
The second floor will contain mathematical lecture rooms,
studies for instructors, and a room for the mathematical and
physical library of the university. The elementary laboratory
will be on the third floor, which will also have a number of small
rooms for the work of advanced students.
The fourth floor will be fully equipped for photographic work
on the spectrum or on other physical phenomena, and will con-
tain rooms for special investigations in light. In the tower there
will be two rooms above the fourth floor, the upper of which will
be provided with a telescope and dome, and will be a convenient
observatory when great steadiness is not required. There will be
power in the building for driving the machinery in the work-
shop and for running the dynamo-machines. A large section of
the building set apart for the electrical laboratories will be
entirely free from iron ; the sash weights being of lead and the
gas pipes of brass. Steadiness will be obtained for galvanometers
and cathetometers by placing them on brackets attached to the
walls, or on tables supported on beams independent of the floors.
In some rooms there will also be piers for these instruments.
The laboratory is furnished with apparatus purchased from the
best European and American makers, selected with special refer-
ence to investigations, and especially valuable for researches in
electricity, magnetism, light, and heat. The electrical apparatus
in particular includes one of the most complete collections of
instruments in the country and will be further increased; the
standards are especially valuable and accurate, and the means of
reproducing them unsurpassed. The room for the dynamos,
mechanical dynamometer, etc., will be at some distance from the
laboratories.
The Physical Laboratory will be open for work from 9 a. m.
till 5 p. m. daily throughout the year.
Statements as to Physical Courses.
The courses in Physics are arranged to meet the wants of the
following classes of students :
(a) Those who are prepared for advanced work and wish to
make Physics a specialty ; (b) Special students in Electricity and
Magnetism ; (c) The regular undergraduates.
Graduates and others who wish to take the advanced courses
and who have not already pursued the equivalent of the under-
graduate course will be required to take so much of it as may
seem desirable.
It is of great importance that every one who expects to take
up advanced work of any kind in Physics should have a thor-
ough mathematical foundation. Too much stress cannot be laid
upon this point. The first requisite for all who expect to take
more than the elementary course is that they shall acquire a good
working knowledge of analytic geometry and differential and
integral calculus; not the mere ability to follow a particular text-
book, but the power to state and solve problems. Any deficiency
in this respect will seriously impair the student's success, and
therefore students are cautioned against entering upon special
physical courses without havingsome natural aptitude for mathe-
matical as well as experimental work.
It is recommended that all candidates for the degree of Doctor
of Philosophy, taking Physics as their principal subject, pursue
the following course :
During the first year's residence they should devote themselves to mathe-
matics and chemistry, giving all the time they can spare to work in the
Physical Laboratory. The mathematical work of this first year should be
analytic mechanics and total differential equations; in chemistry at least
six hours a week laboratory work besides lectures will be required.
The second and third years should be given to the regular advanced
courses in physics, together with some mathematical courses, such as par-
tial differential equations, spherical harmonics, calculus of variations, theory
July, 188C]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
117
of elasticity, hydrodynamics, or theory of sound. During these two years
the student is expected to work Constantly in the Physical Laboratory.
The above statement is made to aid the student in properly
planning his course of study ; variations may be made to suit
individual cases.
I. Advanced Work.
For students who desire to make a special study of Physics and
have already pursued an elementary course, an advanced course
is provided, consisting of lectures and laboratory work.
1. Lectures.
Professor Rowland :
Electricity and Magnetism.
Four lectures weekly, through the year.
These lectures constitute one-half of a complete course which extends
over two years. The other half of the course will he given during the
Benion of 1887-88, and will embrace the subjects of Thermodynamics,
Seat Conduction and Physical Optics. The lectures develop fully the
mathematical treatment of the subjects mentioned, and the students
who follow them should have sufficient mathematical knowledge to
read such authors as Maxwell, Thomson, Briot, Fourier, Green, and
Stokes.
Dr. Craig :
Hydrodynamics.
Three limes weekly, first half-year.
Elasticity.
Three times weekly, second half-year.
Dr. Story :
Mechanics (In the introductory course in Mathematics for
graduates).
Three times weekly, during the first part of the year.
Dr. Franklix :
Problems in Mechanics.
Twice weekly, through the year.
(All special students in Physics are expected to take both the above
courses in Mechanics).
2. Laboratory Work.
Advanced students are expected to give as much of their time
as possible to laboratory work. The work consists at first in car-
rying out experiments which familiarize them with the use of
instruments for exact measurement, and with experimental
methods. When sufficient experience of this kind has been
acquired the student undertakes, under the guidance of the
instructors, some research designed to be of permanent value.
3. Journal Meeting.
All advanced students are expected to meet with the instructors
once a week for the reading and discussion of the current physical
journals. To each student is assigned one of these upon which to
report during the year, giving a synopsis of the most important
articles.
II. Special Course in Electricity and Magnetism.
With the erection of the new Physical Laboratory it becomes
possible to offer a course in Electricity and Magnetism, including
lectures and laboratory work extending through two years. It is
intended for graduates of colleges and others who have the
adequate knowledge of Mathematics, in addition to the other
requirements of a good high school education. For the first
year's work a knowledge of Mathematics through the differential
and integral calculus, as given in the ordinary college text-books,
will be required, and the instructor must be satisfied that the
student is otherwise in a condition to benefit by the course.
This course will be under the immediate supervision of Dr. Louis
Duncan (U. S. Naval Academy, 1880, Ph. D., Johns Hopkins
University, 1885).
1st Year. — The lectures for the first year are intended to give the student
clear physical ideas of general principles, with such mathematical
interpretation as is necessary to enforce and apply them. Besides the
lectures there will be a weekly meeting for the purpose of discussing
articles of interest appearing in the different electrical journals.
The laboratory work will include measurements of resistance, current,
potential, capacity, etc., with voltameter and calorimeter work, and the
student will be familiarized with the instruments for electrical meas-
urements, galvanometers, dynamometers, resistance coils, wheatstone
bridges, condensers, etc. Toward the last of the year each member of
the class will be given some experiment, bringing in the use of the
methods he has already studied.
Besides the special course in electricity, the student will take the lec-
tures in Mathematics required to fit him for the second year's work,
with such other subjects as he may select — chemistry, drawing, modern
languages, etc.
2d Year. — In the second year those parts of the theory more directly
involved in the practical application of electricity will be further
treated, and the theory of dynamos, motors, storage batteries, the
transmission and distribution of energy, the telegraph, telephone, etc.,
will be given. As in the first year's course, there will be weekly meet-
ings for the discussion of the newest developments of the subject.
The laboratory work will include the tests and running of dynamos and
motors, the efficiency and practical working of storage batteries, photo-
meter work, testing of telegraph lines, laying wires underground,
experiments on the electrical transmission of energy, telephone work,
etc. Sufficient time will be given for selected courses outside of the
special work sketched above.
Besides the course in Electricity the student will be required to take the
regular second year's undergraduate course in general physics or its
equivalent.
At the end of the course, on passing the necessary examinations, the stu-
dent will be given a certificate, stating that he has taken the special -
course in Electricity at the Johns Hopkins University, and passed the
required examinations.
III. Undergraduate Courses.
The undergraduate course in Physics extends over a period of
two years, both years being required of those taking it as one of
their elective studies, while only the first year is necessary for
those who take it as a subsidiary subject for the B. A. degree.
Laboratory work accompanies the lectures and recitations
throughout the course, the design of this work being to illustrate
the subject as it is studied, to impress its principles, and to give
clear ideas, rather than to be merely an exercise in manipulation.
But some knowledge of methods is also attained, so that in the
second year problems requiring more experimental skill are given.
For admission to the first year's course in Physics, a knowledge
of Plane Trigonometry and the use of Logarithms is necessary ;
while for the second year the student must possess a working
knowledge of Analytic Geometry and Calculus.
First Year {Minor) Course.
This course does not assume that the student has had any
previous acquaintance with Physics, but a knowledge of Plane
Trigonometry and the use of Logarithms is required.
1. Elementary Mechanics, Heat, Electricity and Magnetism,
Sound, and Light.
Lectures and recitations daily, through the year. Db. Kimball.
118
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
2. Laboratory work, consisting of simple experimental problems
supplementing the class-room work.
Three hours vxekly, through the year. Dr. Perkins.
Second Year (Major) Course.
This course is designed to meet the wants of both graduates
and undergraduates who have already taken either the first year's
course or its equivalent, and who wish to pursue further their
physical studies. A working knowledge of Analytic Geometry
and Calculus is required for admission to this course. The year's
work consists of:
1. Lectures and recitations on the following subjects :
Dynamics, beginning with the study of the particle and extending to
some of the simpler problems in the motion of a rigid body.
Elementary Thermodynamics based on Maxwell's Theory of Heat.
Electricity and Magnetism based on Cummings' Theory of Electricity.
Some lectures on Sound.
The Wave Theory of Light, as treated in Glazebrook's Physical Optics.
Daily, through the year. Dr. Kimball.
2. Laboratory Work.
Four hours weekly, through the year. Dr. Perkins.
The laboratory work includes problems that present more experimental difficulties
than those undertaken during the first year, or that involve more mathematical
knowledge for their complete discussion; written reports are required as in the first
year's course. During the year special problems are assigned to the students which they
are expected to work out in a complete manner, taking necessarily more time than is
required for the ordinary problems of the course.
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
The rooms devoted to the Physical Laboratory have been open
daily for the prosecution of study and research, under the direc-
tion of Professor Rowland, assisted by Drs. Kimball and Perkins.
A photographic map of the solar spectrum has been completed and is
now being published. The map is issued in a series of seven plates
(each three feet long by one foot wide), covering the region from wave-
length 3100 to 5790.
The relative wave-lengths of all the lines of the solar spectrum below 6
have been carefully measured with the view of drawing a map of that
region.
The absolute wave lengths of some lines in the spectrum have been
measured with great accuracy.
The wave-lengths of the lines in the cadmium spectrum have been
determined.
A study of conductivity in hot air has been entered upon and is still
being prosecuted.
A new dividing engine for ruling gratings has been designed and is par-
tially constructed.
The following courses have been carried on during the year.
Professor Rowland :
Lectures on Thermodynamics, Heat Conduction, and Physical Optics.
Four times weekly, through the year.
Dr. Kimball :
First year's course in General Physics. Daily, through the year.
Second year'6 course, consisting of lectures on Mechanics, Elementary
Thermodynamics, Electricity and Magnetism, Sound, and the Wave
Theory of Light. Daily, through the year.
Dr. Perkins:
Laboratory work of the undergraduate students through the year.
Advanced students have taken part with the instructors in
weekly meetings for the discussion of the current physical jour-
nals.
CHEMISTRY.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
The courses in Chemistry are intended to meet the wants (1) of
graduates who make Chemistry their specialty, or who select it as
one of their subordinate subjects for the degree of Doctor of
Philosophy ; (2) of undergraduate students who study Chemistry
for general training ; (3) of special students who for good reasons
have neither received a bachelor's degree nor matriculated at this
University. The first and second years' courses cover the ground
of General Chemistry, as far as it is possible to do so in the time
occupied. Together they form the full course designed for under-
graduates. Graduates and special students who have not done an
equivalent amount of work will follow such parts of these courses
as may seem desirable.
I. Advanced Work.
1. Laboratory Work.
Most of the work of advanced students is carried on in the
laboratory, which is open to them daily, except Saturday, from
9 a. m. until 5 p. m. The work will consist in a thorough study
of analytical processes, making difficult and typical preparations,
and in carrying out investigations on assigned topics. This work
is under the direction of Professor Remsen and Dr. Morse.
2. Professor Remsen will lecture twice weekly on (1) Advanced
Organic Chemistry and (2) The Theories of Chemistry.
3. Dr. Morse will lecture twice weekly on Stoichiometry.
4. Special Lectures :
During the second half-year there will be a course of about
twenty lectures on special topics, selected and assigned by Pro-
fessor Remsen to Fellows and other advanced workers in the
Chemical Laboratory.
This work, while serving to familiarize students with chemical literature,
is intended also to aid them in acquiring the art of presenting subjects in
the form of lectures before audiences. All those who look forward to the
career of teachers of chemistry are expected to take active part in the
exercises.
5. Journal Meetings.
The instructors and advanced students will meet once or twice
a week for the purpose of hearing reports on the articles contained
in the current journals of Chemistry.
The reports are furnished in turn by all who attend the meetings. The
journals read and regularly reported upon are: Berichte der dentschen
ehemischen Gesellschaft ; Annaleti der Chemie ; Journal of the Chemi-
cal Society (Loudon) ; Journal fur praklische Chemie; Zeitschrift fiir
analytische Chemie ; Monatshefte fiir Chemie ; Journal of the Society
for Chemical Industry; Bulletin de la Societe Chimique; Comptes
Fundus; Annales de Chimie et de Physique and occasionally others.
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
119
II. First Year's Course.
This consists of laboratory work and lectures or recitations.
Introduction to General Chemistry.
Lectures and examinations five times weekly through the year (by Professor
Beniscn, Dr. Morse, and Dr. Kenouf).
Laboratory Work.
Five hours weekly through the year (under the direction of Professor Bem-
sen, Dr. Morse, and Dr. Renouf ).
III. Second Year's Course.
The second year's course is a continuation of that just described.
Chemistry of the Compounds of Carbon.
Lectures and examinations three times weekly (by Professor Eemsen).
Supplementary course in Inorganic Chemistry.
Twice weekly through the year (by Dr. Morse).
Laboratory work.
Five to six hours weekly through the year (under the direction of Professor
Eemsen, Dr. Morse, and Dr. Eenouf ).
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
The Chemical Laboratory covers an area of about 50 by 100
feet and has three full stories and a basement. In the basement
are the necessary conveniences for assaying and other furnace
operations. On the next floor there are large rooms, devoted
mainly to qualitative and quantitative analysis. On the second
floor, are the rooms foi research work, those of the director, the
library, and a lecture-room for General Chemistry. On the third
floor, are rooms for the chemical and mineralogical collections, a
working and lecture-room for mineralogy, and a second lecture-
room for chemistry. The laboratory will conveniently accommo-
date about ninety working students.
Advanced students have been engaged daily in the laboratory
in prosecuting such work as seemed best adapted to the purposes
of each. Those who have completed the full courses in General
Chemistry, including from two to three years' work in qualitative
and quantitative analysis and about a year's work in making
difficult and instructive preparations, were encouraged to under-
take the solution of original problems.
The following investigations have been completed djiring the
year. Others are in progress.
Chemical action in the magnetic field.
Oxidation of aromatic substitution-products in alkaline solution.
- Benzoyl-toluenesulphon-amide and its derivatives.
Determination of the atomic weight of zinc.
The results of these investigations will soon appear in the
American Chemical Journal. Some of them have been brought
before the Johns Hopkins Scientific Association at its regular
meetings.
The fellows and other advanced students have met the instruc-
tors twice a week during the year for the pul-pose of keeping
abreast of the current chemical literature. The important
journals have been carefully read, and full reports of the various
articles have been made.
These students have been often called upon to treat important chemical
(jiKstions in a broad way, going to the original sources and presenting the
results in a complete form. In most cases the topics so investigated have
been connected with the experimental work going on at the time ; but
other questions also have been elaborated in this way which bore less
directly on the current studies. In several cases carefully written reports
of the results obtained have been prepared. The excellent library of chem-
ical books and journals which is accessible to the students in the laboratory,
at all reasonable hours, has greatly facilitated the execution of this very
desirable literary work.
Early in the year subjects were assigned to the Fellows and
others for the preparation of lectures on various chemical topics
treated historically ; and fourteen such lectures were the result.
These were prepared from a careful study of the original articles
in the journals, and were not borrowed from books on the history
of chemistry. Full abstracts of most of these lectures, furnished
with complete references to the articles consulted, are to be pre-
pared and preserved in the chemical library. The lectures given
were as follows :
Three by Professor Eemsen on " Baeyer's Investigations on the Phthal-
eins " ;
One by Mr. W. H. Emerson on "Investigations on the Oxidation of
Ketones" ;
One by Mr. J. II. Kastle on "Thiophene and its Derivatives" ;
One by Mr. C. W. Hayes on " Fittig's Investigations on the Aromatic
Hydrocarbons " ;
One by Mr. C. S. Palmer on " The earlier History of the Chemistry of
Indigo " ;
One by Dr. J. E. Duggan on " Hydroxylamine " ;
One by Mr. J. F. Woodhull on "Nitrification";
One by Mr. W. E. Orndorff on " Eosaniline " ;
One by Dr. E. Eenouf on "The Hydrazines" ;
One by Mr. E. N. Brackett on " V. Meyer's Investigations on the Nitro-
paraffins " ;
One by Mr. C. J. Bell on " Syntheses by means of Aluminium Chloride " ;
One by Mr. W. H. Hobbs on " The Specific Gravity of Chlorine, Bromine,
and Iodine at High Temperatures " ;
One by Dr. E. A. Schneider on " Cinnamic Acid."
In addition, the work of the year has consisted of the courses
below mentioned :
Laboratory work through the year, conducted by Professor Eemsen, Dr.
Morse, and Dr. Eenouf.
Lectures by Professor Eemsen :
General Chemistry, three times weekly through the year.
Chemistry of the Compounds of Carbon, twice weekly, first half-year, and
three times weekly, second half-year.
Courses by Dr. Morse :
Physical Chemistry, twice weekly, first half-year, and once weekly, second
half-year.
Eeviews in the Chemistry of the Compounds of Carbon, once weekly.
Eeviews in General Inorganic Chemistry, once weekly.
Courses by Dr. Renouf:
Eeviews in General Inorganic Chemistry for elementary and for
advanced students, twice weekly.
Courses by Dr. Williams:
Elementary Mineralogy, once weekly.
Seven numbers of the American Chemical Journal have
appeared within the year. These are Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6 of Vol. VII.,
and Nos. 1, 2 and 3 of Vol. VIII.
120
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
MINERALOGY AND GEOLOGY.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
1. Lectures on Mineralogy and Geology will be given by Dr.
G. H. "Williams three times weekly throughout the year. These
will be a continuation of the course on General Mineralogy, begun
in February of the present year, and will include a consideration
of the sulphates, carbonates, phosphates, and silicates.
The species of the latter group will be treated in considerable detail,
with special reference to their geological importance. These lectures
will be succeeded by others on Petrography (both macroscopic and
microscopic), to which the mineralogy of the silicates is regarded as
introductory. The course will be concluded by lectures on Inorganic
Geology, in which especial attention will be devoted to Vulcanology,
Metamorphism, and the Origin of Eocks.
The advanced course in Mineralogy will not commence again until the
fall of 1887.
These lectures will be supplemented by practical work in Mineralogy
and Petrography on Saturdays and, between Easter and Thanksgiving,
by excursions into the surrounding country when the weather permits.
2. Laboratory work in Crystallography, Physical Mineralogy,
and Microscopical Petrography, daily except Saturday, will be
under the personal direction of Dr. Williams.
3. Journal Meetings will be held weekly, at which the most
advanced students are expected to report on important articles
relating to Mineralogy and Inorganic Geology.
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
Courses of lectures have been given by Dr. G. H. Williams on :
Mineralogy of the Silicates and Petrography. Three times weekly, first
lialf-year.
General Mineralogy. Three times weekly, second half-year.
General Inorganic Geology. Three public lectures.
The History of the Taconic Controversy. One lecture.
The rooms of the laboratory have been open for work from 9
a. m. to 5 p. m. daily. The following investigations have been
carried on in microscopical petrography :
A study of the massive and associated schistose greenstones, exposed on
the Menominee Eiver in Michigan and Wisconsin.
A study of the contact metamorphism produced by the eruptive rocks in
the Animikee Slates at Pigeon Point, Minnesota.
A study of the rocks of the " Cortlandt Series," occurring near Peeks-
kill, N. Y.
On the regular field excursions much additional information has been
gathered relative to the distribution of the crystalline rocks about
Baltimore, and a large number of carefully catalogued mineralogical
and petrographical specimens, illustrative of the geology of the imme-
diate neighborhood, has been added to the University collection.
Journal Meetings, at which the more advanced students have
reported upon the contents of all the leading mineralogical and
geological journals, have been held weekly during the last half-
year.
BIOLOGY.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
I. Collegiate Instruction.
This is designed especially for undergraduate students ; gradu-
ate students who have not bad a thorough preliminary training
will be required to follow the instruction in those subjects of the
college course in which they may be deficient, before they will be
permitted to undertake advanced biological studies or engage in
research.
The regular course of undergraduate biological instruction
extends over two years ; those who take Biology as a subsidiary
subject for the B. A. degree are not required to do more than the
first year's work.
First Year {Minor) Course.
This has been planned to meet the needs (1) of those who
intend ultimately to take up some one branch of Biology (Zoology,
Physiology, or Botany) for special study ; (2) of students, graduate
or undergraduate, who expect later to study medicine, but mean-
while desire, as a valuable preparation, to obtain some general
knowledge of the phenomena, laws, and conditions of life ; (3) of
those who desire, as a part of their general college training, some
acquaintance with the methods of modern experimental and
observational science, and select Biology as a subject of study with
that end in view.
The course consists of five lectures or recitations weekly
throughout the academic year, with laboratory work. The labor-
atory work takes the place of the greater part of the outside
reading required in connection with most other undergraduate
courses in the university. The following subjects are included in
the year's work.
1. General Biology.
Three lessons or recitations weekly from the commencement of the session until
the end of March.
Attention is directed to the broad characteristic phenomena of life and
living things rather than to the minutise of descriptive Botany or
Zoology, or to the characters of orders, genera, and species. In the
laboratory the student learns how to observe, how to verify and describe
what he observes, how to dissect, and how to use a microscope ; he
examines selected vegetable and animal types from unicellular organ-
isms, such as the yeast-plant and Amreha, to the fern and the flowering-
plant on one side and the crayfish and a mammal on the other. In the
lecture room attention is mainly given to the fundamental biological
facts and laws which the particular plant or animal under consideration
is fitted to illustrate, the object being rather to give the student an idea
of what is meant by the terms living thing, plant, animal, tissue differ-
entiation, life history, organ, function, etc., than to teach him the
elements of Botany and Comparative Anatomy as commonly under-
stood. The organisms studied are Toruhi, Protocoocos, Amceba, Micro-
coccus, Bacterium, Bacillus, Spirillum, Penicillium, Mucor, Spirogyra,
Nit.lla, a moss, a fern, a flowering-plant, Infusoria, Hydra, starfish,
earthworm, crayfish, clam, cartilaginous fish, frog, terrapin, pigeon, and
rat; so that at the close of the course the student has a practical
knowledge of the structure and life conditions of a typical example
/
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
121
from each of the main divisions of plants and animals, on which to base
his reading and later studies.
2. The Embryology of the Chick and Mammal.
Three lectures or recitations weekly from the beginning of April until the close
of the session, with practical study of the development of a bird.
In this course the student, who has already in his General Biology
observed the natural arrangement of animals and plants in diverging
series advancing from a simple bit of living matter to highly compli-
cated organisms, studies the individual development of one of the
higher animals, from its start as an almost formless bit of protoplasm
to its final highly complex structure. The increasing differentiation
of tissues and organs which he has noted as higher and higher plants
and animals were dissected, he now sees exemplified by the chick
embryo in different stages of development. At the same time a good
foundation is laid for subsequent advanced study in Vertebrate Mor-
phology.
3. Osteology, Human and Comparative.
Two lectures or recitations weekly until the end of March, with practical study
on selected skeletons.
The student begins with the human skeleton, which, as the most minutely
and accurately described of all conveniently accessible animal struc-
tures, is well fitted to train him to observe closely and accurately. He
then studies a skeleton from each of the chief orders of the Mam-
malia and two or three from each of the remaining main groups of
Vertebrata.
4. Plant Analysis and the elements of Systematic Botany.
Practical instruction twice weekly from the beginning of April until the close of
the session.
The student is taught how to collect and preserve plants; and by the
analysis of a number of flowering plants under the direction of his
teacher, gets a good introduction to the terminology of descriptive
botany, and learns how to use a botanical key for the recognition of
species.
Second Year (Major) Course.
This is designed for those who, having completed the above
minor course, desire to proceed farther with biological studies.
Ultimately the second year's work in biology will be, at the
choice of the student, one of three courses ; in the first of these
Animal Physiology will be the dominant study ; in the second,
Animal Morphology ; in the third, Botany ; for the present a
choice is offered only between the first and second of the three.
[To complete a major course a student must, after finishing his minor, take either 1, 2,
and 3, of the subjects below named, or 2, 3, and 4. The former combination is recom-
mended to those who intend afterwards to study medicine].
1. Mammalian Anatomy.
Twice weekly, until Christmas.
In connection with this course the student dissects thoroughly one of the
higher mammals. He thus acquires a knowledge of the names, gen-
eral distribution and structure of nearly all the muscles, nerves, vessels
and viscera, and becomes fitted to take up profitably the study of mam-
malian physiology and is prepared for professional study of the details
of descriptive and regional Human Anatomy; and so saves much time
if he subsequently enters a medical school.
2. Animal Physiology and Histology.
Three lectures or recitations weekly during the year.
This course is designed to give the student a good knowledge of the prop-
erties and mode of working in health of the various tissues and organs
of the higher animals, man included ; also to give him a good knowl-
edge of their microscopic structure. It thus prepares the student for
subsequent study of Pathology and Pathological Histology. In the
laboratory each student examines for himself the histology of each
organ and tissue, and thus learns the use of reagents and embedding
materials, the methods of cutting and mounting sections, etc. ; he also
studies practically the composition of the more important organs and
tissues, the chemistry of digestion, the fundamental properties of living
muscles and nerves, the beat of the heart, the phenomena of reflex
action, etc. Important physic ilogicaj facts, which require special skill
for their exhibition or the employment of especially delicate instru-
ments, are demonstrated to the class. There will be, as a rule1, two
such demonstrations weekly. No painful experiments are performed
in connection with this course.
The physiological apparatus belonging to the University is unusually
good and complete ; students have, accordingly, not only the opportu-
nity to acquire a knowledge of the methods of modern histological
investigation, but also of the mode of using all the chief instruments
employed in physiological, pathological, and pharmacological research.
3. Elements of Zoology.
Two lectures or recitations weekly from the Christmas recess until the end of the
academic year.
A systematic course of lectures on the structure, relationships, and classi-
fication of animals. In the laboratory the student will dissect a num-
ber of forms selected to supplement the types studied in the General
Biology course of the first year in Biology.
These forms are —
Calcareous sponge ; tubularian hydroid ; hydro-medusa ; actinia ; sea
urchin and its developement ; holothurian: polychaetous annelid;
leech ; distoma ; copepod ; barnacle ; crab and its metamorphosis ;
limulus, scorpion; grasshopper; gasteropod; cephalopod; lingula ;
ascidian; amphioxus; teleost; lizard.
4. Marine Laboratory.
At least two months' study at the marine laboratory of the University between
June 1st and August 31st.
This may be taken in one year or a month may be taken in each of two
consecutive years.
II. University Instruction and Opportunities.
This is designed for graduates who have already such knowledge
of Biology as might be obtained by following the collegiate major
course in that subject, and for others who, although not graduates,
satisfy the university authorities that they are competent to under-
take advanced work. In the university courses but little of the
teaching is given by formal lectures ; the instructors come into
close daily contact with the students, supervise their work, direct
their researches, and advise as to their reading.
1. Animal Physiology.
The biological laboratory has been especially constructed with reference
to providing opportunity for advanced work in experimental physio-
logy. The collection of physiological instruments belonging to the
University is unusually large and complete and is yearly added to, —
the trustees providing an annual sum for the purchase of instruments
wanted for any particular investigation, or which for other reasons it
is desirable to have in the laboratory. There is also a workshop in
the laboratory in which a skilled mechanic is kept employed repairing
and constructing instruments. The laboratory contains two large
rooms for general advanced work in animal physiology, in addition to
others specially designed for work with the spectroscope, with the
myograph, for electro-physiological researches, and for chemical phy-
siology.
2. Animal Histology.
The laboratory contains a special room constructed for advanced histo-
logical work, and well supplied with apparatus and reagents. There
is also a room and apparatus for micro-photography.
3. Animal Morphology.
Booms for advanced work in this subject are contained in the laboratory
and a course of advanced lectures is given by Dr. Brooks. The chief
advanced study in animal morphology is however carried on at the
Marine Laboratory, open at the sea-side from the beginning of June
until the end of August, under the direction of Dr. Brooks. The
Marine Laboratory possesses a steam launch and a large sloop, and is
supplied with dredges, boats, aquaria, microscopes, etc.
122
JOHNS HOPKINS
No. 51.
4. Physiological Psychology.
During the academic year a course of lectures, combined with laboratory
work, will be given by Dr. G. Stanley Hall, in connection with the
psychological courses of instruction in the university.
5. Lectures.
Professor Martin will lecture weekly to advanced students on selected
topics in Physiology. Dr. Brooks will conduct a class for advanced
students in Animal Morphology. Short courses of lectures will be
given from time to time on other selected physiological and morpho-
logical subjects.
6. Journal Club.
A Journal Club, composed of the instructors and advanced students, meets
weekly for the reading and discussion of recent biological publications.
7. Reading Clubs, in Animal Morphology and Physiology, for the study
and discussion of classical biological works, meet weekly during the
greater part of the session.
8. Library Facilities.
The laboratory contains a library supplied with standard biological works
and complete sets of the more important journals. There is also a
special collection of books which have been brought together in connec-
tion with researches carried on in the laboratory. An effort is always
made to procure for anyone engaged in a particular investigation all
publications bearing on his work but not easily accessible, as graduation
theses, occasional publications from laboratories in Europe and else-
where, etc. The biological library receives regularly about forty bio-
logical periodicals, including all the important physiological and
morphological journals in English, French, German, and Italian.
The general library of the university receives all the chief journals of
general science, and the transactions of all the leading learned societies
of the world.
The library of the Peabody Institute, within five minutes' walk of the
university, contains complete sets of many of the chief biological jour-
nals, of the proceedings of learned societies, and other works of
reference.
In the library of the Medical and Chirurgical Faculty of Maryland, a
very large number of medical periodicals is accessible to members of
the university.
The proximity of Washington is of special value to advanced students of
physiology. The library of the Army Medical Museum in that city
contains an almost unrivalled store of physiological works, which are
available under conditions favorable to study.
9. Publication.
In connection with the biological laboratory there is published a journal
(Studies from the Biological Laboratory) which contains the results of
most of the researches carried out in the laboratory ; a ready means of
publication for original work is thus secured. The University Circulars,
which appear at short intervals throughout the year, are available for
preliminary statements, securing priority for discoveries while more
detailed accounts are in course of publication.
III. Naturalists' Field Club.
This was organized by members of the University, but includes
in its list of members other residents of Baltimore interested in
Natural History. The club works in three sections — Geology
and Mineralogy, Zoology, Botany. Each section elects its own
officers and arranges for its own field excursions and its own
meetings. There are also monthly meetings of the whole club,
when the chairmen of the different sections report progress and
an address on some topic of Natural History is given by one of
the members.
The mineralogical collections of the club are preserved in the
Chemical Laboratory ; the botanical and zoological in the Museum
of the Biological Laboratory.
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
I. Laboratory Work.
The Biological Laboratory was open for eight hours, five
days weekly, during the academic year, for the prosecution of
advanced study and research and for practical instruction in
connection with class lectures.
During the year original investigations have been made in
regard to the following subjects :
The mode of action of pepton and Leech extract in checking blood coagu-
lation. The so-called new "element" of the blood, and its relation to
coagulation. The influence of the " pneumatic cabinet," on circulation and
respiration. The action upon the mammalian heart of the following drugs
of the " atropin group," viz. : Hyoscyamine, Hyoscine, Coniine, Daturine,
Homatropine, Atropine; also of the following members of the "digitalis
group," viz.: Sparteine, Evonymin, Adonidine, Erythrophlaeine. The com-
parative action upon the mammalian heart of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl,
and amyl alcohols. The transformation of sugar in the liver. The mor-
phology and embryology of the Stomatopoda collected by the Challenger
expedition. Origin of alternation of generations in Hydro medusae. Mor-
phology and embryology of the Annelida of Beaufort, N. C. Embryology
of Insecta and Arachnida. The budding of the Tunicata. Germinal layers
of the mouse embryo. Morphology of Cheiropsalamus. Embryology of the
Decapod Crustacea. Embryology of the marine Prosobranch Gasteropods.
Morphology of the Actiniae found at Beaufort, Jf. C.
The results of some of the above researches have already been published.
Preliminary notices of the results of many of the remainder have been
printed in the University Circulars, in the Znologischer Anzeiger, and else-
where. Fuller accounts will shortly be published.
In connection with the regular class instruction, first year
students studied a number of typical fungi, green plants, and
animals ; the skeletons of about twenty selected vertebrates ; and
the development of the chick in the egg. In the spring there
were fifteen practical lessons in the elements of Systematic and
Descriptive Botany.
Second year students worked at the histology of the tissues and
organs of the higher vertebrata (especially man) ; the physiologi-
cal properties and functions of the tissues and organs ; the physi-
ology of digestion ; the chemistry of bile, urine, etc. The cat was
thoroughly dissected by the second year students, and about twenty-
five selected invertebrate and vertebrate types examined.
II. Advanced Instruction.
Dr. W. K. Brooks lectured twice weekly through the year on
Advanced Morphology.
A course of fifteen lectures on Morphological Problems was
given during April and May, as follows :
H. V. Wilson. On the Affinity and Phylogeny of the Cubo-medusae as
illustrated by the Anatomy and Histology of Cheiropsalamus.
G. B. Haldeman. On the Inversion of the Germ Layers of Bodents.
A. T. Bruce. On the Embryology of Insects. (Two lectures).
E. A. Andrews. Asexual Multiplication of Annelids.
H. Orr. Asexual Multiplication of Tunicata.
W. K. Brooks. On Asexual Multiplication.
F. H. Herrick. On the Development of the Crustacea.
J. Nelson. Methods of Reproduction in relation to the problem of Sex.
(Several lectures).
J. P. McMurrich. The Embryology of Gasteropods.
Dr. W. H. Howell gave twenty-five advanced lectures on the
Physiology of Respiration.
Most of the advanced work was carried on individually, and
not in class ; each worker taking up some special topic for study
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
123
under the immediate direction of some one of the instructors. In
addition to the original researches already enumerated, certain
graduate students have in thi.s manner carried on advanced study
in various directions.
Students engaged in this kind of study (which forms a stepping-
stone between class-work and original research) are usually given
some important original article, and shown how to repeat and
verify for themselves (and criticise) the experiments and results
described in it. By studying and repeating the original work of
others they learn the methods of biological investigation, and are
thus trained to plan and carry out researches themselves. In
connection with this work, students are also taught how to hunt
up and utilize the bibliography of a subject.
III. Class Instruction.
Courses of lectures for undergraduates were given as follows :
Osteology, twice weekly, until the end of March.
Mammalian Anatomy, twice weekly, until Christmas.
Animal Physiology and Histology, three times weekly through the year.
General Biology, three times weekly, until the end of March.
Embryology of the Chick and Mammal, three times weekly, from the first of
April until the close of the session.
Plant Analysis, twice weekly, in April and May.
IV. Marine Laboratory.
During the summer of 1885, the seaside Zoological Laboratory
for the study of forms of marine life, was open at Beaufort, N. C,
for fifteen weeks.
The advanced work included original investigations on the
following subjects :
The metamorphosis of Limnlus polvphemus. Embryology of Limulus
polyphemus. Chemical composition and coagulation of the blood of Limu-
lus polyphemns, Callinectes hastatus, and Thyonella gemmata. The post-
oral cilia of Gasteropod veligers. The rhythm and innervation of the
heart of the sea turtle. The physiology of the heart of the alligator. The
cardiac rhythm of fishes and the action on the game of various drugs and
poisons. Origin of the endoderm in Lepidoptera. The propagation and
cultivation of oysters in floats.
The results of many of these investigations have been already published ;
others will be shortly.
The Marine Laboratory is located, during the summer of 1886,
at the Island of Abaco in the Bahamas.
V. Publications.
Numbers 5, 6 and 7 of the third volume of " Studies from the
Biological Laboratory" have been published during the year.
They contain :
Development of the Gill in Fasciolaria, with one Plate. By Henry Les-
lie Osborn, Ph. D.
A Study of the Structure of Lingula (Glottidia) Pyramidata, Stim, (Dall),
with four Plates. By H. G. Beyer, M. D., M. R. C. S.
Observations upon the Blood of Limulus Polyphemus, Callinectes Has-
tatus, and a species of Holothurian, with one Plate. By W. H. Howell,
Ph.D.
Note on the Presence of Haemoglobin in the Echinoderms. By W. H.
Howell, Ph. D.
On the So-called "New Element" of the Blood and its Relation to
Coagulation, with one Plate. By Geo. T. Kemp, A. B.
The Life History of Thalassema, with four Plates. By H. W. Conn, Ph. D.
PATHOLOGY.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
The Trustees of the Johns Hopkins Hospital have allowed the
use of the Pathological building, on the Hospital grounds, for the
prosecution of pathological studies. It has ample accommoda-
tions and will be thoroughly equipped at the beginning of the next
academic year.
Systematic instruction in Pathology will be given in this Labor-
atory during the academic year 1886-87. No one will be admitted
to the courses in Pathology who has not a fair knowledge of the
normal anatomy, histology, and physiology of man. The follow-
ing courses of instruction will be given :
1. Pathological Histology by Professor Welch and Dr. Coun-
cilman.
This course begins November 1, 1886, and continues three days weekly for four
months.
The course includes the preparation and the stud}' of diseased tissues and
organs. Attention will be given to the subjects both of General and of
Special Pathology. The laboratory is furnished with a rich collection
of pathological specimens for purposes of microscopical study.
2. Demonstrations in Pathological Anatomy by Dr. Councilman.
This course begins November 1, 1886, and consists in weekly demonstra-
tions of fresh pathological specimens.
3. Method of making Post-mortem Examinations by Dr. Coun-
cilman.
Instruction in this subject will be given at the Bay View Hospital.
4. Bacteriology by Professor "Welch.
Daily during March and April, 1887.
The methods of isolating and of cultivating micro-organisms and the
morphological and the biological properties of the most important
species, particularly of the pathogenic forms, will be taught. The
laboratory is supplied with a complete set of apparatus for bacterio-
logical work.
5. Lectures on the General Pathology of Fever by Professor
Welch.
Once a week during February, March, and April, 1887, in Hopkins Hall.
The Pathological Laboratory is ready for the reception of
physicians or of advanced students who, after suitable preliminary
training, wish to undertake special research in any branch of
General or of Special Pathology, including Experimental Patho-
logy and Bacteriology.
A Fellowship in Pathology yielding five hundred dollars in
addition to free tuition will be granted in October 1886, if a suit-
able candidate applies.
The application must be made prior to October 1. The candidate must
give evidence of a liberal education (including especially physics, chemis-
try, biology, and modern languages) and of special aptitude for pathological
study, such as that afforded by some previous scientific work. The holder
of the fellowship will be expected to devote his time to some special line of
investigation (not strictly professional) under the direction of the Ptofemot
of Pathology. Further information concerning the purposes and the regu-
lations of University fellowships is contained in the Annual Register.
124
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
ANCIENT AND MODERN LANGUAGES.
PROGRAMMES FOR 1886-87.
CREEK.
I. Greek Seminary.
Professor Gildersleeve will conduct the Greek Seminary,
the plan of which is based on the continuous study of some lead-
ing author or some special department of literature.
The Seminary consists of the director, fellows, and scholars, and
such advanced students as shall satisfy the director of their fitness
for an active participation in the work by an essay, a critical
exercise, or some similar test of attainments and capacity. All
graduate students, however, may have the privilege of attending
the course.
During the next academic year the study of Aristophanes and
the Old Attic Comedy will constitute the chief occupation of the
members. There will be two meetings a week during the entire
session, one for the criticism and interpretation of the author, one
for auxiliary studies in the literary and political history of the
period.
In connection with the Seminary the director will give a course
of twelve lectures on the Metres of Aristophanes.
II. Advanced and Graduate Courses.
1. Professor Gildersleeve will also conduct a course of
Practical Exercises in Greek, consisting chiefly in translation at
dictation from Greek into English, and English into Greek, two
meetings a week from the beginning of the session to the first of
January.
2. He will give a series of readings in Aischylos, Sophokles,
and Euripides with special reference to theories of tragic art twice
a week after January 1.
3. Further, a general introduction to Hermeneutics and Criti-
cism once a week after January 1.
The student should be provided with Bergk's or Meineke's complete text,
von Velsen's critical edition so far as issued, and Kock's editions of the
Knights, Clouds (tr. by Humphreys), Birds, and Frogs.
The student should also possess Kock's Fragmenta Comicorum Graeeorum
or Meineke's smaller edition of the Fragments, and for the study of the
period Thukydides, Xenophon's Memorabilia and Hellenika, and Plutarch's
Lives of Perikles and Alkibiades.
4. Notice as to other courses is reserved.
III. Undergraduate Courses.
1. Lysias, Select Orations.
Four times weekly, first half-year. Dr. Spieker.
Private Reading : Xenophon, Hellenica, books i and ii.
2. Homer, Odyssey, three books; Euripides, Hippolytus.
Four times weekly, second half-year. Dr. Spieker.
Private Reading : Herodotus, Merry's Selections.
3. Aeschylus, Prometheus Vinctus; Sophocles, Antigone; Survey
of the Greek Drama.
Four limes weekly, first half-year. Professor Wright.
Private Reading: Euripides, Medea; Aristophanes, Clouds.
4. Demosthenes, De Corona ; Survey of Greek Oratory.
Four times weekly, second half-year. Professor Wright.
Private Reading: Aeschines, De Corona; Lycurgus, in Leo-
cratem.
5. Prose Composition.
Weekly exercises in connection with each of the above courses.
6. Topics in Classical Archaeology and Antiquities.
A series of conferences once a week throughout the year. Professor Wright.
7. Conferences on Greek Syntax.
A series of conferences once a week for the last three months. Professor
Gildersleeve.
LATIN.
I. Latin Seminary.
Dr. Warren will conduct the Latin Seminary. Vergil has
been chosen as the centre of work for the next academic year.
There will be two meetings a week during the entire session, devo-
ted to critical interpretation, to auxiliary studies and to the pres-
entation of papers by the members of the Seminary.
Students are advised to provide themselves in advance with a text edition
of Vergil including the Carmina Minora (either Ribbeck, Haupt, or Palda-
mns), with Eyssenhardt's edition of Macrobius, and Lion's edition of the
Commentary of Servius to Vergil.
II. Advanced and Graduate Courses.
1. During the first half-year, Dr. Warren will give a course of
lectures on topics connected with Vergil and Roman epic poetry.
2. During the first half-year, he will read Macrobius with a
class once weekly.
3. During the second half-year, he will give a course of lectures
on Latin Palaeography, with practical exercises in reading fac-
similes of manuscripts.
4. During the second half-year he will hold a series of weekly
conferences on Latin Syntax.
III. Undergraduate Courses.
1. Livy, two books.
Four times weekly, first half-year. Dr. Spieker.
Private Reading: Csesar, Bellum Civile, books i and ii; Cicero,
de Amieitia.
2. Horace, Select Odes, Satires, and Epistles.
Four times weekly, second half-year. Dr. Spieker.
Private Reading : Horace, Epodes ; Ovid, Tristia, Book i.
3. Cicero, Orator, Oratio pro Plancio ; Survey of Roman Oratory.
Three times weekly, first half-year. Dr. Warren.
Reading at sight.
One hour weekly.
Private Reading : Cicero, Brutus.
4. Terence, Andria; Plautus, Trinummus; Survey of the Roman
Drama.
Three times weekly, second luilf-year. Dr. Warren.
Reading at sight.
One hour weekly.
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
125
Private Reading: Terence, Hautontimorumenos ; Plautus, Cap-
i!ri.
5. Tacitus, Germania, Annates, books ii and Hi.
Four times weekly, teeond half-year.
Private Reading: Tacitus, Ayricola, Histories book i.
6. Prose Composition.
Weekly exercises in connection with each of the above courses.
SHEM3T5C LANGUAGES.
Professor Haupt will give the following courses :
1. Critical Interpretation of selected Psalms.
Wednesday, 3 p. m.
Lib'/- Piabnorvm ed. Baerand Delitzsch, Lipsiae 1SS0 (Tauchnitu).
2. Hebrew Exercises : Reading unpointed texts at sight.
Wednesday, 4 p. in.
Liber Oenetti ttiu ptmeMf txtortptut, cur. Muehlau &. Kautzsch, editio altera,
Lipsiae 1885.
3. Biblical Aramcan Grammar for beginners and Interpretation
of the Chaldee portions of the book of Daniel.
Thursday, 10 a. m.
XAbri VanicUs, Ezrae el Nehemiae ed. Baer, Lipsiae 1882 ; Kautzsch, Grammatik
des BiblUvh Aramaischrn, Lipsiae 1884.
4. Assyrian for beginners : Elements of Assyrian Grammar and
exercises in deciphering cuneiform texts.
Thursday, 3-5 p. m.
Delitzsch Assyrische Lesestucke, 3d. ed. Leipzig 1885.
5. Assyriological Exercises for advanced students.
Thursday, 12 m.
Should a sufficient number of applicants send in their names
there will be given a Hebrew course especially intended for
clergymen to which other students will not be admitted.
In addition to the above-mentioned courses elementary instruc-
tion in Hebrew, Syriac, Arabic, and Ethiopic, should there be any
demand, will be given by the Fellows in Shemitic Languages
under the supervision of Professor Haupt.
For the month of January, 1887, it is proposed to interrupt
the regular course and devote all the time exclusively to Assyri-
ology. Professor Haupt will give twenty-four lectures on Assyrian
language and literature, interf>reting the cuneiform texts in the
third edition of Delitzsch's Assyrische Lesestucke (Leipzig, 1885).
There will be also two hours daily by the Fellows in Shemitic
Languages to assist those who are pursuing the course. A special
programme of this proposed Assyriological Winter School will be
mailed to applicants at the beginning of next session, October,
1886.
SANSKRIT AND THE COMPARATIVE GRAM-
MAR OF THE COGNATE LANGUAGES.
Dr. Bloomfield will give the following courses :
1. Sanskrit. (First year).
Perry's Primer (translations from Sanskrit into English, and English into
Sanskrit). — Whitney's grammar and the selections from the Xala and
the Hitopadeca in Lanman's reader. Twice weekly, through the year.
2. Sanskrit. (Second year).
a. Selections from the Kathd-saritsdgara and the Mdnava-dharma-i;dstra.
b. Introduction into the Rig-Veda.
Twice weekly, through the year.
3. Vedic Sanskrit. ( Third course, supplementary to the first hvo
years).
Continuation of the course in the Rig-Veda, and selections from the Brilh-
manas and Sutras. Weekly, first half-year.
4. Vedic Sanskrit. (Seminary).
The fourth book of the Atharra- Veda, accompanied by the corresponding
ii the Kthieikti-.-iutnt, along with its commentary by Dirila, and
Other liturgical literature in the original MSS. Weekly, through the year.
5. General Principles of Comparative Philology.
a. Lectures on phonetic law and analogy, agglutination, the questions alUv
themselves to the relationships of languages, etc.
6. Whitney's " Language and the Study of Language."
Weekly, through the year.
6. Comparative Greek Grammar.
a. Twelve lectures on the present position of the theory of agglutination.
b. Greek Inflections on the basis of Karl lirngmann's Griechische Gram-
matik.
Weekly, through the year.
GERMAN.
I. Advanced Courses.
Dr. Wood will give the following courses :
1. Teutonic Seminary.
The work in Low German, begun last year, will be continued during the
first half-year. Lauremberg's Niederdeutsche Scherzgediehle (1062), will
be read, and a number of selected texts from Franck's Mittelnieder-
landische Grammatik mil Lesestiicken, Leipzig, 1883. During the second
half-year the study of the Allemannic dialect will be begun, and will
centre in Thomas Platter's Selbstbiographie (xvi. cent.). Leipzig, 1878.
2. Gothic.
Braune's Grammar, Bernhardt's Wulfila. Halle 1884.
Twice weekly, first half-year ; weekly, second half-year.
3. Old Norse.
The Edda. Twice weekly, second half-year.
4. German Comparative Grammar.
Twice weekly, through the year.
5. Middle High German.
Nibelungen Lied. Twice weekly, second half-year.
6. Beowulf.
[See English Courses, p. 126].
There will be a weekly meeting of all the students following courses in
the Teutonic Languages, for discussions and reports on the contents of jour-
nals, and for the presentation of original papers, notes, etc.
II. Undergraduate Courses.
Collegiate courses will be conducted as follows :
Minor (First Year) Class A.
1. Classics.
Three times weekly.
Goethe, Egmont; Schiller, Maria Stuart; Leasing, Minna von Barnhelm.
2. Historical Readings.
Twice weekly.
Frevtag, Bilder aus der deutschen Vergangenheit III (Aus dem Jahrhundcri
des grossen Krieges); Bielil, Kvlturgetehichl Jen.
There will be a course of parallel readings, centering in the Thirty
Years' War.
3. Scientific Readings.
Twice weekly.
126
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
4. Prose Composition.
1 1 ",<•%.
5. Oral Practice.
Weddy.
Based upon readings and exercises,
"students may choose the chases making up the Minor Own*, under the direction of
the instructor. Thus a complete course may consist of Nos. 1, 4, 5 ; or 2, 4, 5, and one
hour of 1 ; or of 3, 4, 5, and one hour of 1.
Minor (First Year) Class B.
This class is in place of the regular German Minor Course for students
who have passed the matriculation examination in Greek. It is also recom-
mended for graduates beginning German.
1. Otis : Elementary German.
Daily, first six weeks.
After the completion of the above, the work for the remainder of the
year is divided as follows :
2. Lessing, Minna von Barnhelm ; Schiller, Wilhelm Tell.
Twice weekly.
3. Miscellaneous Selections in Prose.
Trice weekly.
4. Prose Composition.
Weekly.
Major (Second Year) Course.
1. Classics.
Twice weekly.
Goethe, Hermann and Dorothea, Iphigenia, Faust I; Schiller, WaUenstein.
2. Middle High German.
Weekly.
Selections from the Sibelungen Lied, Gudrun, etc. ; lectures on the chief
Teutonic epic cycles, with illustrations.
3. Selected Readings.
Nanus's Lesebuch IIL- Weekly.
The selections are made from historical, scientific, and miscellaneous
prose. Students may, with the advice of the instructor, choose between
this course and the preceding.
4. Prose Composition.
Weekly.
5. German Literature.
Weekly,
Lectures and Readings with Kluge's Geschichle der deutschen Literatur.
6. Exercises in German Style and Syntax.
Montltly.
Classes in German Conversation meet daily through the year.
Supplementary Class.
Otis's Elementary German ; Buchheim's Modern German Reader I ; Schil-
ler's Lied ton der Glocke ed. Otis. Twice, and three times in alternate
weeks. This class prepares undergraduates for entering the Minor
Course.
ENGLISH LANCUACE AND LITERATURE.
I. Advanced Courses.
Dk. Bright will conduct advanced courses as follows :
1. Anglo-Saxon Poetry.
Lectures and the reading of texts. Twice weekly.
2. Early Dialects.
Lectures and the interpretation of Sweet's "Oldest English Texts."
Twice weekly.
3. HistoricaJ English Grammar.
Lectures. Weekly.
4. West Saxon and Middle English Prose Texts.
Weekly.
5. The English Seminary.
Advanced students will be brought together in bi-weekly sessions of two
hours, for the presentation anil discussion of the results of their own
research in literary and philological subjects, and for reports on the
current journals pertaining to English.
Dr. Wood will conduct a course in Beowulf, twice weekly, first
half-year.
II. Undergraduate Courses.
Minor (First Year) Course.
1. Elizabethan Writers.
Tiviee weekly, first half-year. Dr. Browne.
2. Fourteenth Century Writers.
Twice weekly, second half-year. Dr. Browne.
3. Eighteenth Century Writers.
Once weekly, through the year. Dr. Browne.
4. Elements of Phonetics.
Once weekly, first half-year. Dr. Bright.
5. History of the English Language.
Once weekly, second half-year. Dr. Bright.
6. Elementary Anglo-Saxon.
Once weekly, throughout the year. Dr. Bright.
7. Essays by Students.
Major (Second Year) Course.
1. Anglo-Saxon.
Once weekly, throughout the year. Dr. Bright.
2. First English Literature (Ninth to Eleventh Centuries).
Once weekly, throughout the year. Dr. Bright.
3. Early English (Twelfth and Thirteenth Centuries).
Twice weekly, throughout the year.
4. Early Scottish Literature.
Once weekly, throughout the year. Dr. Browne.
5. Essays by Students.
English required of all undergraduates.
Synoptical study of English Literature (in P. H. E. Course).
Twice weekly, through the year. Dr. Browne.
Summary of English Courses.
Advanced Courses. These courses are intended to meet the requirements of
those who are aiming at special scholarship in English. Methods are
employed by which the labors of past and contemporary scholars are
made available, and by which the student may be led to individual
research.
Anglo-Saxon and Middle English. The student will at once begin the gram-
matical study of the oldest period of English, and in the first year will
be required to do the work represented by Sweet's Anglo-Saxon Reader.
The next year he will pass to the more exact study of the leading Anglo-
Saxon dialect (West-Saxon), using Sievers' Old English Grammar, edited
by Prof. Cook, and reading a good portion of the best West-Saxon prose
(such as Sweet's ed. of Alfred's Orosius) ; some of the minor poems
(Wiilker's Kleinere Angelsachs. Dichtungen) ; and later Anglo-Saxon mis-
cellaneous prose (Homilies, etc.). The Grammar will be supplemented by
constant regard to the subsequent development of the language in forms
and syntax. The course in English of the twelfth and thirteenth centu-
ries, carried on simultaneously, will connect organically with Anglo-Saxon
on the one side, and with the language of Chaucer on the other.
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
127
Elements of Phonetic*. In accordance with the doctrine tliat growth and
changes in language rest upon the two-fold bad* of physical and psychi-
cal laws, and that mental analogies only occasion phonetic possibilities,
the elements of the science of the physical production of Speech arc intro-
duced at the beginning of this course, where the student's own vernacular
can he employed in direct practical application of the principles involved.
The student will be taught to realize in practice the phonetic categories
of language, and thus to arrive at a living definition of the terminology
of the grammarian. Observation in this field will be restricted, pri-
marily, to his own pronunciation, and to the various phases of his own
language, and secondarily, to the next best known phenomena of German
and French. A foundation will thus be laid for the more exact methods
in the subsequent work of the course in Modern Languages.
History of the English Language. The outlines of this subject are imparted
by means of text-books, supplementary lectures, and " private readings."
The aim is to enforce in a clear and orderly manner a sense of the his-
toric continuity of the English Language.
First English Literature. The literature of the Anglo-Saxon period will be
studied upon the basis of the treatise of ten Brink, amplified by the
results of modern investigation and criticism.
English Literature. It will be seen that in the literary part of these courses
the same idea of continuity prevails that is emphasized in the linguistic
part. The student is first given a synoptical view of the whole field. In
the major and minor courses the most important periods of literary pro-
duction are studied, from the ninth century to the nineteenth. From
the fourteenth century down, the history, manners, political and religious
conditions, etc., of the people, are explained sufficiently to indicate the
position of the chief writers of each period, and the influences under
which they wrote.
For the fourteenth century, the central work will be in Chaucer and
Langland ; for the Elizabethan period, in Shakespeare ; for the eigh-
teenth, in Pope and the Essayists.
The essays required of students are intended to promote the attainment
of a good English style. The instructor is thus enabled to see the defects
of each writer, and to give him the help and counsel that he needs,
instead of laying down general principles from the lecturer's desk.
P. H. E. Course. The object of the English portion of the required course
in Physical Geography, History, and English, is to present a view of
English Literature as a whole, preparatory to more critical study.
Stopford Brooke's Primer of English Literature is recommended for refer-
ence. The books necessary for reading in class will be announced by the
instructor.
ROMANCE LANCUACES.
I. Advanced Courses in Romance Philology.
The work in Romance Philology for properly qualified students extends
through three years. It is intended primarily for Graduate Students and
is specially adapted to the training of teachers and specialists. Students
who enter for the later years of the course must show that they are ac-
quainted with the subjects previously studied, and those who begin the
course must give evidence of familiarity with Latin, Modern French, and
German.
Mr. Elliott will give the following courses :
1. With first year graduate students.
First Half- Year:
(a) Lectures on Modern French Phonetics.
Weehbj.
(6) The History of Romance Studies in Europe.
Weekly.
Second Half- Year:
(c) Introduction to Old French Philology.
Aucassin et Nicolite (Suchier's edition). Weekly.
2. With second and third year graduate students.
(a) Seminary work.
This will centre here in the earliest Old French Monuments (Serments
de Strasbourg, Oantilenede Sainte Eulalie, I '•: Valenciennes).
Two hours weekly.
(b) Comparative Romance Phonology.
Weekly.
(c) Old French Syntax.
Weekly.
(d) Italian Dialects.
Weekly.
(e) Pro-Seminary.
Weekhj.
(J) Old French Paleography.
Weekly, second half-year.
II. Special Courses in Italian, Spanish, etc.
(These courses are planned to meet the wants of graduate students in Romance Lan-
guages in their first academic year.)
1. Italian.
The class in Italian will begin with the Italian Principia, Parts I. and
II., and will read later Leopardi ( Versi e Prose); Roraussi (Storia
(Tltalia) and Goldoni {La Sposa sagace). Dr. Todd will interpret
Dante's Paradiso one hour weekly through the year.
2. Spanish.
The class in Spanish will begin with Knapp's Grammar and Readings
and will continue with El Poema del Oid (xil. century) and Don
Quijote.
3. Portuguese.
In Portuguese the class will begin with Leneastre's Nouvelle Methode
Portugaise, and will read later Herculano (O Monge de Cister) and
Camoens (Os Lusiadas).
4. Raetian, Catalan and Old Provencal.
In Raetian the text-books used will be Ulrica's Rhatoromanische Chresto-
mathie and Andeer's Rhatoromanische Elementargrammalik (with Gart-
ner's Grammatik for reference). The text-book in Catalan will be
Cardona's DelF antica Letteratura Catalana. Bartsch's Chrestomathie
proveneale will be used in the study of Old Provencal.
5. Wallachian.
Cionca's Practische Grammatik.
III. Undergraduate Courses in French.
I. (il/wior, First Year, Course).
1. Literary.
Sainte Beuve, Causeries du Lundi ; Selections from Daudet, Dumas, fils,
Theophile Gautier and Guizot; Victor Hugo, Ruy Bias. Tv:icc ?
2. Historical.
Voltaire, Steele de Louis Quatorze. Weekly.
3." Scientific.
Luquiens, Course in Scientific French. Weekly.
4. Prose Composition.
Chardenal's Advanced Course. Weekly.
II. (3fajor, Second Year, Course").
1. Lectures on French Literature.
(Mediaeval and Classical). Weekly.
2. Classical French (xvn century).
Comeille, Hoi-ace; Racine, Athalie; Moliere, Le Bourgeois Genlilhomm*
and Les Precieuses Ridicules. Weekly.
3. Old French.
Bartsch's Chrestomathie. Twice weekly, first half-year.
4. Middle French.
Darmesteter and Hatzfeld, Morceaux Choisis. Twice weekly, second half-year.
128
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
5. French Oompoeitioa.
<o's Prose Composition, Weekly, first half-year. Original essays, Weekly,
teetmd half-year.
Opportunity for training in French pronunciation and conver-
sation will be given, a special class meeting for this purpose three
hours weekly throughout the year.
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
Greek.
Under the direction of Professor Gildersleeve the advanced
students of Greek have been organized into a Greek Seminary.
According to the plan of the seminary the work of the year is
concentrated on some leading author or some special department
of literature, chiefly with reference to the literary form. During
the past year the centre of work was Plato.
In the seminary proper, which met onee a week during the academic
year, the Euthydemos, the Theaitctos, and the Phaidros were interpreted by
the members in turn. Papers were presented, read, and discussed on the
unity of Plato's Republic, on Dionysios' criticism of Plato's style, on the
myth in Plato, on Plato's use of comparisons, on the peculiarities of the
Timaios.
One of the members has been engaged in an elaborate study of the aira^
7jy6fieva in Plato, which will be carried to completion; another has been
working at the literary use of the oath in the classic and in the Hellen-
istic period.
With special reference to the work of the seminary, the direc-
tor lectured once a week during the term on the Symposion of
Plato, and a short course of lectures on the Platonic canon, begin-
ning January 15, was followed by weekly readings in the Repub-
lic. The History of Greek Philosophy was not touched in this
department, as being elsewhere provided for in the lectures of
Professor Hall. Professor Gildersleeve also delivered about forty
lectures on the Syntax of the Hypotactic Sentence and conducted
twenty -two exercises in translating Greek into English and English
into Greek at dictation. He also held a short series of conferences
in Greek Literature for undergraduates.
Dr. Bloomfield's courses are given under the head of Sanskrit
(on p. 129.)
Dr. Herbert Weir Smyth gave a course of lectures, weekly
through the year, on Dialectology, illustrated by Inscriptions.
The course was devoted to an investigation of the Doric and Aiolic Dia-
lect*. Stress was laid on original research into the phenomena of dialect-
life and on the methods of acquiring facility in the explanation of forms
varying from the Attic standard. Each member of the class presented the
result of an investigation of one or more dialects, and interpreted inscrip-
tion- representing a cantonal idiom. Attention was directed chiefly to the
dialects of Sparta, Ileraclea, Crete, Melos, Thera, Corinth, Rhodes Delphi,
Locris, Boeotia, Theeaaly, and Lesbos. Portions of the text of Alcnian,
Timocreon, Stc-i. li ,rus, Corinna, Alcaeus, Sappho, and Theocritus were
diwilMwd with a view to illustrate their dialect from the epigraphical mon-
uments.
Additional courses were conducted by :
Professor C. D. Morris, in
Demoethi iona,four limes weekly, first half-year.
Reading at sight.
Dr. Spieker, in
Xenophon's Oteommaau, finer times weekly, first half-year.
Homer, Iliad, IX, xi ; Euripides, Alcestis, four timesweekly, second half-year.
Mr. Christie, in
Sophocles, Antigone, four times weekly, second half-year.
Classes in Prose Composition were also conducted by each of the instruc-
tors in connection with the courses above named.
Students have read privately for examination the following
books :
Aeschylus, Prometheus, (7).
Lysias, vn, IX, XII, xm, xxiv, (4).
Plato, Protagoras, (7).
Herodotus, Keep's Stories, (4) ; Merry's Selections, (2).
Latin.
The Latin Seminary, under the direction of Dr. Warren, held
two sessions a week throughout the year, the centre of work being
the Roman Historians, especially Livy and Tacitus.
Select portions of Livy and Tacitus were made the subject of critical
interpretation by the members of the Seminary, and papers were read by
them embodying the results of special studies. Among the subjects thus
treated may be noted : The use of ob and propter in the historians ; the use
of frustra and ncquiquam in Livy; the use of the future active participle in
Livy; chiasmus in Sallust; the constructions first found in Livy; the
constructions first found in Sallust; the Carthaginian treaties; the author-
ship of the Bellum Hispaniense ; also of the Eighth Book of the Belltim
Gallicum, and the Bellum Alexandrinum; the style of the Bellum Afri-
canum ; the use in the Historians of non modo — sed etiam, non solum . .
sed etiam; non lanlum and similar expressions; the genuineness of the Lives
ascribed to Nepos: Hannibal's passage of the Alps; Vergil's influence upon
Tacitus.
In connection with the work of the Seminary, Dr. Warren
gave a course of twenty lectures on the Roman historians from
Fabius Pictor to Livy. In the first half of the year he conducted
weekly meetings for the reading at sight of various Latin authors.
In the second half of the year he conducted a weekly course of
Practical Exercises in Latin, and gave weekly lectures on Latin
Phonetics.
Additional courses have been conducted during the year by :
Dr. Warren in
Plautus, Miles Gloriosns, and Terence, Andria, three times weekly, first half-
year.
Pliny, Select Letters; Juvenal, Select Satires, three times weekly, second half-
year.
Reading at sight, weekly throughout the year.
Prof. Morris in
Cicero, de Nalura Deorum, bk. i; Lucretius, bks. i, Hi, three times weekly, first
half-year.
Reading at sight, weekly, first half-year.
Dr. Spieker in
Livy, bks. v, vi,four times weekly, first half year.
Horace, Select Odes, Satires, Epistles, four times weekly, second half-year.
Mr. Moore in
Tacitus, four times weekly, second half-year.
Classes in Latin I'rose Composition, meeting weekly, were also conducted
by each of the instructors in connection with the courses above named.
Students have privately read for examination the following
books :
Csesar, Helium Civile, (1).
Cicero, pro Jloscio Amerino, de Senectute, de Amicitia, (12) ; de Natura Deo-
rum, in, (4) ; Select Letters, (5).
Horace, Epodes, Carmen Saeeulare, (8).
Lucretius, v, (4).
Plautus, Mostellaria, (6).
Tacitus, Annals, in, iv, (2), III, (1).
Terence, Phormio, (5).
Vergil, Aeneid, xn, (8).
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
129
Sanskrit and the Comparative Grammar of the
Cognate Languages.
During the session the following courses were conducted by Dr.
Bloomfield :
1. Elementary Sanskrit. The most essential elements of the grammar of
the classical language were acquired in as short a time as possible, and then
the students were brought face to face with the language, learning its struc-
ture and laws not in the abstract, but in its living body. This course
served especially, as was found by practical experience, to furnish the stu-
dents with a knowledge of grammatical analysis, clearer and more exact
than that which they bring with them from other philological pursuits.
This is due partly to the unrivalled transparence of the structure of the
language, and partly to the tradition, which has kept alive a close bond
between Sanskrit and Comparative and Historical Grammar. Five books
of the Nala and several selections from the Hitopadeca were read and tho-
roughly analyzed.
2. A second class in Sanskrit was conducted through a rapid course of
reading in the Hitopadeca and Kathasaritsagara during the first half-year.
During the second half-year the same class was introduced into the study
of the Rig-Veda, in which careful analysis of the forms and a constant com-
parison of the facts of the Vedic language with those of the classical Sanskrit
were made most prominent.
3. The advanced work in Vedic Sanskrit was devoted to the study of the
first book of the Athanm-Vcda, under circumstances especially noteworthy.
A considerable amount of manuscript material hitherto unpublished, which
the lecturer had collected for his edition of the Kaucika-sutra, the ritualistic
treatise of the Atharva-Veda (now going through the press), was brought to
bear upon the exegesis of this book, not infrequently in such a manner
as to yield results very different from those previously attained by other
scholars (cf. Proceedings of the American Oriental Society for May, 1885,
and 1886). The class was made acquainted with the advanced methods of
textual and hennenenticaj criticism, so as to be led to independent methods
of dealing with Vedic texts.
4. A course in the general principles of Comparative Philology was carried
on throughout t he year. It was introduced by twelve lectures on the promi-
nent questions of Indo-European philology (phonetic law and analogy, the
doctrine if agglutination, the questions attaching themselves to the relationships of
languages, etc.). During the remainder of the year Professor Whitney's
"Language and the Study of Language" was made the basis of instruction,
and the book was constantly supplemented by lectures, which aimed to
advance the subjects treated in the book up to the present day.
5. A course in Comparative Grammar of Greek. This was introduced by
a short course of lectures in which the relation of General Comparative
Grammar to Greek Grammar was delineated; the reasons were pointed
out, which make it incumbent upon students of the classical languages
to become acquainted with the general results of Comparative Grammar.
Most of the year was devoted to the detailed study of Greek Grammar upon
the basis of Brugmann's Griechische Grammatik. This was carried on as
in a seminary, each- student taking his turn in handling the materials under
discussion week by week. The compendious paragraphs of Brugmann were
constantly supplemented by lectures.
Shemitic Languages.
The courses conducted by Professor Haupt during the past year
principally aimed at giving the students of the two previous
sessions a certain finish in their academic Shemitic studies. Special
stress was laid upon reading select texts in the different Shemitic
languages, the grammatical phenomena in the various idioms being
constantly studied from the standpoint of Comparative Shemitic
Philology. To Hebrew, Assyro-Babylonian, Sumero-Akkadian,
Arabic, Ethiopic, and Biblical Aramean, Syriac was added. The
centre of the work was the Assyro-Babylonian Cuneiform texts
to which for some time ten hours weekly were devoted.
Professor Haupt conducted five advanced Assyriological courses: (1) Assy-
rian Historical texts, (2) Nimrod Epic, (3) Sumero-Akkadian, (4) Introduc-
tion to the Study of Babylonian Texts, (5) Aaayriologica] exercise*.
Of historical Assyrian texts there were read the Annals of Sennacherib
(706-681 n. c.) on the hexagonal Taylor Clay Priam, the account
king's building operations and of his tirst ci-ht campaigns with the excep-
tion of the often-treated third campaign against King llezekiah of Judah
(701 B. a).
Of the Ximrod Epic the whole sixth tablet was read in Haupt's edition
(Leipzig, 1884).
In Sumero-Akkadian at first the grammatical texts in the second part of
Haunt's Kcilschrifttexte (Leipzig, 1881) were studied, after which the inter-
pretation of select dialectical bilingual Penitential Psalms in the third part
of Haupt's texts was proceeded with. finally a number of hvnms and
incantations in the fourth volume of Sir Henry Kawlinson's Cuneiform
Inscriptions (London, 1875) were read at sight.
In the Babylonian course selected inscriptions of Nebuchadnezzar, Neri-
glissar, and Nabonidus were read (IR., 51 and 52; 67 and 68) and also at
sight some of the early inscriptions from Chaldea (I K., pi. 1-4).
In the Assyriologiml Exercises held during the month of January the
whole cylinder inscription of Esarhaddon (681-668 B.C.) I R., pi. 45-47,
was read.
In addition to these advanced courses a beginners' course in Assyrian was
was given by the Fellow in Shemitic Languages, Mr. Cyrus Adler. The
elements of the cuneiform writing and grammar were studied and then the
great three column syllabary was read in the first part of Haupt's texts,
together with occasional illustrations from historical texts, especially the
Annals of Sardanapalus (668-626 B. c).
To the study of Hebrew four hours a week through the year were devoted,
two hours to a beginners' course, one hour to mastering the paradigms, &c.,
and finally one hour to a more advanced course. In the latter the history
of Joseph as given in Genesis, xxxvn-xiv, was explained, and in the ele-
mentary course, Genesis xi. and following. The grammar used was Dr.
Mitchell's translation of Gesenius-Kautzsch.
In the latter part of the session the elementary instruction in Hebrew-
was given by Mr. Huizinga, Fellow in Shemitic Languages, under the
supervision of Professor Haupt.
In Biblical Aramean, a critical interpretation of the Book of Ezra was
given, not only of the Aramean portions, Ezra IV, 8, vi, 18 and vir, Li
but also of the Hebrew chapters with constant reference to the Version of
the 133 as well as the apocryphal book of Ezra ('EaSpac a).
In Ethiopic the Sententiae e Iibro philosophorum excerptae in Dill-
mann's Chrestomathia Aethiopica were reail and previous to this some of
the Narratiunculae de Viris Sanctis, viz: (No. c.) De Dionysio M. Patri-
archa Alexandriae, (No. D.) De Macario M. and (No. G.) De Tacla Haimanot.
In Arabic there was read at first the second voyage of Sindbad the sailor
from the Arabian Nights, and then some thirty selected extracts from the Ara-
bian geographers Edrisi, Abulfeda, Ibn Batutah, Qazwint, Ibn Hauqal, Ibn
Sa'id, el-Bekrl, oca, containing descriptions of the " country of the Franks,"
Brittany, Valencia, Genoa, Jaen, Rome, Sicily, Toulouse, Toledo, Constan-
tinople, Lerida, Damietta, Morocco, Jaffa, Hamadan, Herat, Xisibis, Mosul,
Cyprus, Gaza, Ascalon, Tiberias, China, Sidon, Tyre, Shirts, Sinjar, Rhodes
and Edcssu. Cf. Nos. 316, 427-437, 441, 442, 444, 446, 447, 421-420, 414,
413, 411-407, 403, 399, 396 and 395 in the first volume of the Beyrut Arabic
Cbrestoniathy Majani-el-adab (Beyrut, 1883, Imprimerie Catholique).
In the Syriac course for beginners, the elementary difficulties having been
overcome, the first chapter of Genesis as given in E. Nestle's Brevis Linguae
Syriacae Grammatics &C, (Carolsruhae et Lipsiae, 1881) was thoroughly
explained with constant reference to Noldeke's Kurzgefasste Svrische
Grammatik (Leipzig, 1880). At the same time there were from the first
exercises in reading the Estrangelo writing. The pronunciation constantly
followed, even in Western Syriac texts, was the Nestorian. After the
principal grammatical phenomena in the first chapter of Genesis had been
thoroughly mastered, select portions in Roediger's Chrestomathia Svriaca
(Halls Saxonum, 1868) were read, chiefly extracts from the Syriac chron-
icles of Gregory Bar Ebhrtyi: No. iv, De 133 Veteris Testament! inter-
prctibus; No. v, De epistularum commercio, quod Christus com Aligarorege
iuisse traditur; No. vn, De bellorum cruciatorum initio; No. vm, Sala-
huddinns Hierosolyma capit, Tyrum frusta oppugnat ; No. xi, DeTheophilo
Humeri interprete, and finally some pans of the Syriac Version (Peahita)
of the New Testament, especially Matthew xxvi-xxvm, as given in the
beginning of Roediger's Cbrestoniathy ; No. I, De passione, morte et resur-
rectione .lesu Cbriati.
130
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
German.
Dr. Wood conducted the following advanced courses :
German Seminary. The study of Low German formed the centre of the
work of the Seminary for the year. During the first half-year the
sjv< ial subject was Old Saxon. Lectures were given on the grammar
of the dialect, and on the development of forms into Middle Low Ger-
man. The Hfliand was then read. During the second half-year the
grammar of Low German was studied from Liibben and Nerger, and
the following selections from the Middle Low German chrestomathy
of the former were read: Nos. 2, 3, 6, 7, 11, 12, 13, 18, 19, 20, 24.
Twice weekly, through the year.
Gothic. The selections in Braune's grammar were read, and the gram-
matical forms thoroughly learned. No systematic attempt was made
to deduce forms in other dialects by the comparative method, but the
simpler correspondences were pointed out and explained. Twice weekly,
first half-year.
Old Xorse. Brenner's Handbuch, but more especially Noreen's Altis-
landische Grammatik, were used for the grammar, and all the selec-
tions in Brenner were critically read. Rafn's Antiquitates Americanae
was specially studied in connection with the sagas relating to Green-
land and America. Twice weekly, first half-year; weekly, second half-year.
Middle High German. Parts of the first and third books of Parzival,
and the whole of the fifth book were read and explained. Weekly,
second half-year.
Lectures on Old Teutonic Life. The attempt was made in these weekly
lectures extending through the year to present in a connected way
the life and environment of the individual in early Teutonic times.
About one-third of the lectures were devoted to Mythology, and the
remainder to Law, Landholding, Domestic Life, Ships and the Sea,
War and Weapons. As far as possible, the earliest literary monu-
ments were made to contribute directly to the subject.
The following undergraduate courses were conducted by Drs.
Goebel and Wood, and Mr. Hempl :
Major Course:
German Literature. Lectures. Weekly. Dr. Goebel.
Middle High German. Weekly, first half-year. Dr. Wood.
' Selected Readings. Masius's Lesebuch III. Weekly. Dr. Goebel.
Goethe : Hermann and Dorothea; Faust I. Twice weekly. Dr. Goebel.
Prose Composition. Weekly. Mr. Hempl.
Exercises in German Style. Monthly. Dr. Goebel.
Minor Course:
Lessing: Minna von Barnhelm. (Two sections). One, weekly, through
year ; one, twice weekly, second half-year. Mr. Hempl.
Goethe : Egmont. Twice weekly. Dr. Goebel.
Historical Readings. Twice weekly. Dr. Goebel.
Scientific Readings. First half-year, twice weekly ; second half-year, two
sections, each twice weekly. Mr. Hempl.
Prose Composition. First half-year, weekly; second half year, two sections,
each weekly. Mr. Hempl.
Oral Practice. Weekly. Mr. Hempl.
A class in German conversation was conducted by Dr. Goebel daily,
through the year.
Supplementary classes were conducted by Mr. Hempl, as follows :
Section 1. Three limes weekly.
Section 2. Daily, first half-year.
Dr. Goebel also gave a series of twelve lectures, in German, on
German Literature from Klopstock to the death of Goethe.
English.
Advanced courses were conducted as follows :
Dr. Wood met a class of advanced students twice weekly during the
second half year, for the study of Beowulf. The apparatus for critical
study was used, and all the more important variant readings were exam-
ined, but the special aim of the course was to translate the poem, nearly
all the members of the class having construed the text in a previous
course. Particular attention was paid to matters of expression, and to
the vocabulary of English translation. The first 1,900 verses were
translated. •
In a course of lectures by Dr. Bright (twice weekly throughout the
year), the principles of Early English Grammar were discussed from
the earliest period to Chaucer. Anglo-Saxon was scientifically treated
in its relation to the cognate Germanic dialects, and to its more remote
Indogermanic antecedents; upon the basis thus secured the further
development of the language towards the English of to-day was fol-
lowed through the Earliest and Middle English periods in the man-
ner of an expository study of Sievers' Anglo-Saxon Grammar, and ten
Brink's Chaucer's Sprache und Verskunst. Parallel to this course, texts
of the corresponding periods were interpreted (twice and three times
weekly). For clearness of dialect on the one hand, and for the purpose
of laying a basis for an historical study of English syntax, prose monu-
ments of the West-Saxon dialects were selected. The entire Orosius
of Alfred (Sweet's ed.) was read, then a large body of the Homilies of
Aelfric and of Wulfstan, and finally a portion of the Ancren Riwle. As
an introduction to the specific literary products of the Middle Period,
and as more nearly bringing the language to that form from which
Modern English ultimately proceeded, the romance of Octavian (Sarra-
zin's ed.) was also read.
All the advanced students of the department were organized into an
English Seminary which was conducted by Dr. Bright. The stu-
dent is trained to present written communications involving original
research, the orderly presentation of theories and of problems in liter-
ature and in grammar, the employment of the principles of scientific
and literary criticism, etc. Such papers were read and freely discussed
at the regular (bi-weekly) meetings. Of topics so treated during the
year may be named : The life and works of Congreve ; The Apollonius
saga in literature, and the authorship of Pericles (Shak.) ; Double
Consonants in the Ormulum ; The Anglo-Saxon Genesis and its rela-
tion to the Heliand; Certain of the Riddles of Cynewulf; On the
development of the definite article in English ; The Anglo-Saxon
Waldere and the Saga in literature.
Additional courses, including the first and second years' courses
for undergraduates, were conducted as follows :
The minor (first year's) course was directed by Drs. Browne and Bright.
In the first half-year the class studied with Dr. Browne, the writers of
the Elizabethan period. Both the prose-writers and poets of that period
were examined, but especial attention was given to the development of
the drama. The Shakespearian drama was carefully studied in King
Lear; while the drama preceding Shakespeare was represented by
Sackville's Gorboduc and Marlowe's Edward II, and that immediately
following by Massinger's New Way to Pay Old Debts.
In the second half-year the literature of the fourteenth century was taken
up. The texts studied were Chaucer's Nonne Prestes Tale and Prioresses
Tale (Morris and Skeat) and portions of Piers the Plowman (Skeat).
The literature of the period was further illustrated by readings from
Wyclif, Maundevile, and William of Palerne. Dr. Browne also lectured
once weekly to this class on the literature of the eighteenth century.
For those beginning the study of Anglo Saxon, a class was conducted, by
Dr. Bright, in Sweet's Anglo-Saxon Reader. The beginners in Middle
English formed a class, conducted by Mr. Egge, in Morris's Specimens,
I, and in 2'he Tale of Gamelyn (Skeat's Edition).
The elements of Phonetics were taught (once weekly, first half year) by
Dr. Bright. Thejfundamental principles of the science were inculcated
with the help of the best modern authorities, and by practical applica-
tion to the students' vernacular, and to French and German. Sweet's
Handbook was used.
The major, or second year's course, was conducted by Drs. Bright and
Browne.
The study of Early English Literature (Dr. Bright, once weekly through-
out the year) was carried on with the use of ten Brink's Manual. The
text was liberally supplemented by lectures, and by readings from the
literature itself.
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
131
A portion of the class met Dr. Browne once weekly to study the literature
of the nineteenth century.
The English work in the P. II. E. course (required of all undergraduates)
covered the whole Held of English Literature from the earliest period
to the opening of the present century. The historical development of
the literature, as coordinated with that of the people, was steadily kept
in view, and its continuity insisted on. Chaucer's Prologue and Knightes
Tale, Shakespeare's Richard III, and part of Milton's Paradise Lost
were read aloud hy the class, under the guidance of the instructor.
Essays hy the undergraduates were submitted to the instructor, who, in
his comments, did not merely correct errors, but aimed at inculcating
the principles of good writing.
Romance Languages.
Advanced Courses were conducted as follows :
The Romance Seminary, under the direction of Mr. Elliott. Two hours
a week through the year.
This work was confined to the domain of the Norman Dialect. For the
first term, it centred in the Vie de Saint Alexis, for which the MS.
facsimile was used. For the second term, extracts from the Roman
de Ron were examined with the view of continuing the student on the
same line of study, and, finally, a brief introduction was given to the
language of Chardry's Josaphaz (Koch's edition).
For the first of those texts, the mixed dialect character was especially
considered and, for all of them, phonological and morphological rela-
tions to the Classic and Low Latin, to the oldest products of the other
Romance Languages, to the later Old French documents and to the
modern language, formed the bulk of material with which the Semi-
nary was occupied. This course was followed by the most advanced
students only. In addition to it, a pro-seminary meeting, of two hours,
was held once a fortnight, in which all special students of this depart-
ment took part. The exercises here consisted in the reading of
original papers, bearing, as it happened, in great measure upon
phonetics and linguistic pedagogical subjects, of extracts of important
articles in Romance journals, of general reports on the journals
themselves, of reports on recent publications received and on any
suggestive correspondence, of a professional nature, that might be
presented. By this means, students in the early part of their univer-
sity studies have the benefit of direct and active association with their
more experienced co-workers in the field.
Introduction to Old French Philology. This course is intended for first
year students and regularly follows the series of lectures on Modern
French Phonetics, as given below. A few pages of Aucassin el Nicolile
(Stiehier's edition) were critically examined with special reference to
the phonology and morphology of the language. For the former, the
constant application of the principles of French phonology was
required, while, for the latter, the student was thoroughly drilled in
the grammar of the Old French as compared with the Latin on the
one hand, and with the Modern French on the other. The leading
characteristic forms of the dialect here represented were contrasted
with corresponding ones in the Isle-de-France species. Weekly, second
half-year.
Lectures: — (o) On the Langue d'OVl Dialects. The object of this course
(ran t<> give the leading characteristics of the chief dialect groups (Wal-
lonian, Picard, Norman, Maine, Paris, Ix>rraine, Burgundian, Poitevin)
that constitute the North French. The system followed in carrying out
this idea was, first, to give a series of eight lectures on the most strik-
ing peculiarities and geographical distribution of these dialects as a
group, then, to follow these with special lectures on the phonetics and
morphology of each individual idiom and, as soon as a given dialect
was thus represented, select texts were translated and their dialectic
peculiarities pointed out by the student himself. Weekly.
(b) On the North Italian Dialects. This course was given to third year
students and the same plan was followed as with first year students
in (a). The idioms covered were: Venetian, Milanese, Piemontese,
Bolognese, Genoese, and one South Italian dialect, the Neapolitan.
Weekly.
(c) Modern French Phonetics. This course was intended for first year
students who wished to become specialists in the Romance Languages.
An introduction was given to the different systems of phonetic repre-
sentation as proposed for French in particular, and, after a survey of
the general principles underlying sound and sign < -hange in this lan-
guage, the various phonetic categories were taken up and severally
dealt with in their historic development out of the Classic and the
Low Latin products. The student was held here to modern forms
exclusively and taught to make use of scientific methods. Weekly,
first half-year.
(rf) Comparative Romance Morphology. This course, arranged for second
year students, is intended to place them abreast of the present move-
ment in Romance Morphological Science. To this end, as a convenient
and accessible point of departure, Die/.' ' der Romanischen
Sprachen was taken and attention given particularly to the advance-
ment of this science since his time. Weekly.
(e) Old French Syntax. An attempt was made here to present the more
important features of word-arrangement for the earliest prose and for
the thirteenth century poetry of Old French, in their agreement with
the Latin on the one hand and variation from modern usage on the
other.
(/) The History of Romance Studies in Europe. The history of the
various theories, from the fifteenth century down, with reference to
the origin and growth of the Romance Languages was succinctly
given, the writings of individual scholars that have worked in the
field were characterized, and the chief treatises, monographs, and
articles of those now engaged in Romance studies, their official stand-
ing, the universities with which they are connected and their special
lines of work were noted, and critical remarks made on the general
bearing and worth of their productions for the subjects which they
treat. This course was intended to put the student abreast of the
present scientific production in this field. Weekly.
In addition to the above, special courses in Italian, Spanish, Portuguese,
and Old Provencal were conducted for graduate students by Dr.
Todd : — The class in Italian have read numerous selections from the
Italian Principia, Part II ; Massimo d'Azeglio's Niecolb de Lapi (five
chapters) ; Macchiavelli's Principe; and twenty-nine cantos of Dante's
Purgatorio. Exercises in grammar were given twice weekly in con-
nection with the above through the first half-year.
The class in Spanish have read one hundred and forty pages of Knapp's
Spanish Readings ; El Barometro (comedia) ; and eleven chapters of
Don Quijote. Exercises in grammar were given twice weekly.
In Portuguese the class have read five chapters of Herculano's Eurico
and two cantos of Camoens' Lusiads. The course was begun with" a
brief study of the grammar.
In Old Provencal were studied the Poeme sur Boice; selections from
Girart de Rossilho, from the poetry of Marcabrun, Bernart de Ycnta-
dorn, Peire d'Alvernhe and Arnaut de Maroill; and nearly all the
prose of Bartsch's Chrestomathie.
A short course was also given in Cionca's Practische Grammaiik der
romanischen Sprache (Wallachian).
The Undergraduate Courses were as follows :
The students of the French Major Course read with Dr. Todd:
In Bartsch's Chrestomathie, the selections from Les plus ancient monu-
nxiiis, St. Alivis, Chanson de Roland, Amu M Amilet, MytBSrt d' Adam,
Roman de Ron, Conies del Graal, Roman de Renarl, Arteassm <1 A
Roman de la Rose, and the leading prose writers of the XIII, XIV, and
XV centuries. Twice weekly, first half-year.
In Darmesteter and Ilatzfeld's Moreeaux choisis des principaux ecrivains
du xvie slide, selections from all the leading writers. Twice weekly,
second half-year.
In the French of the XVII century the class have read Corneille's Cinna;
Racine's Andromaquc; and Moliere's Femmcs Sarants. Weekly.
The study of French style has been carried on under Mr. Fontaine, with
the translation of numerous extracts from Case's French Prose Com-
position. Weekly.
Lectures on Old and Middle French literature were given weekly through
the year by Dr. Todd.
The students of the French Minor Course read with Dr. Todd : Ourika
by Madame de Duras, La Dot de Suzette by Fierce, Le Siige de Berlin,
L'Fufant cspiun and Les Emotions d'un Fa-dmiu rouge by Alphonse
132
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
Daudet, Les Vices du Oapiiaine by Francis Coppee, La Saint-Nicolas
by Andre Theuriet, La Fille du Chanoine by Edmond About, Le
Chevalier double by Theophile Gautier, Croisilhv by Alfred de Muaset,
and Hernani by Victor Hugo; in connection with the above, twenty
minutes' talks on Modern French Literature have been given, on the
basis of Bougeault's Precis de la LitUrature Franeaise.
"With Mr. Bowen the class have read the greater part of Crane and
Brun's Tableaux de la Resolution francnisc and Luquiens' Course in
Scientific French, and in connection with this studied 150 pp. of Brey-
mann's French Grammar ; with Mr. Fontaine they studied and pre-
pared written exercises on the whole of Part I. and a portion of Part
II. in Chardenal's Exercises for Advanced Pupils.
Mr. Fontaine met the students three times weekly for French conversa-
tion, with systematic instruction and drill in pronunciation.
Courses of lectures in French Literature were given (in French) by M.
Babillon.
The Johns Hopkins Philological Association has met
monthly as heretofore. Papers have been read during the
session by:
C. Adler. — On the Hebrew words in the Codex Sangallensis 912.
M. Bloomfield. — Contributions to the Exegesis of the First Book of the
Atharva-Veda.
M. Bloomfield and E. H. Spieker. — The Old-Indian Sibilants : 1. Pre-
liminary remarks on the correlation of m and v in the Yedas ; 2. Intro-
duction to the study of the sibilants and the influence of sibilants upon one
another.
J. W. Bright. — On silent t in Modern English.
A. E. Egge. — On some points of Intonation and Quantity in English,
Norse, and German.
A. M. Elliott. — French Speech-mixture in Canada: External Influ-
ences.
M. D. Learned. — The Origin and Settlement of the Pennsylvania
Germans.
C. W. E. Miller. — On the Participle in Pindar.
C. D. Morris. — On Kriiger's Chronology of the Pentecontaetia of Thu-
cydides.
H. W. Smyth. — On the Reduction of « to i, in Homer ; on the Dialects
of North Greece.
E. H. Spieker. — Notes on Isaeus.
H. Wood. — On GilJc as Adverb in Old Saxon and related forms, and on
the Relation of the forms Grornon and Gornon in Old Saxon.
J. II. Wright.— On four unpublished White Lecythi from Athens.
The sixth volume of the American Journal of Philology
was completed during the year and the first number of the sev-
enth volume issued. An edition of 250 copies of a Syriac MS.
with the Antilegomena Epistles was reproduced in phototype
and published by the Publication Agency in April, 1886.
Lectures on Archaeology were given by Dr. W. Hayes Ward,
Dr. A. L. Frothingham, and Professor F. W. Putnam. A course
of eighteen lectures on the History of the Printed New Testament
and of two lectures on the Syrian Antilegomena Epistles was
given by Dr. Isaac H. Hall.
HISTORICAL AND POLITICAL SCIENCE.
PROGRAMME FOR 1886-87.
I. Graduate and Advanced Courses.
1 . Seminary of American History and Economics.
Weekly meetings, through the year, with Dr. H. B. Adams.
Only graduate students connected with the University are
received as members of the Seminary. The work of this co-op-
erative organization of teachers and instructors in the department
of History and Politics is chiefly devoted to original research in
the fields of American Institutions and American Economics.
The exercises of the Seminary, which occupy two hours each
week, consist of oral and written reports of progress, discussions
of papers, and reviews of current historical and economic litera-
ture.
During the coming year Seminary researches will be more especially in
the fields of American Institutional, Administrative, and Economic
IIL-tory. The completed scientific work of members of the Seminary
finds its way into the University Studies in Historical and Political
Science, or into magazines. Three books will be, published during the
year 1886-87 by members of the Seminary: (1) History of Economic
Thought in the United States, by Dr. Ely and Messrs. Davis R. Dewey
and Woodrow Wilson ; (2) Co-operation in America, in preparation
by Dr. Ely, Dr. Shaw, and Messrs. Dewey, Lcvermore, Randall, and
Warner; and (3) The Republic of New Haven and its Town Colonies,
by Mr. Charles H. Levermore.
2. History of Politics.
Two hours weekly, through ike year, with Dr. H. B. Adams.
This course of instruction in institutional history and in the
theory of politics is designed to occupy three years of class-work,
two hours a week. It is intended that each year there shall be
two courses of lectures, one representing some field of ancient
politics, and another some field of modern politics.
The first year, one part of the work is devoted to theories of ancient
society and to the early history of institutions, to Greek political phil-
osophy and Greek institutions. The second part of the year's work is
an exposition of Bluntschli's Theory of the Modern State, together
with lectures on the Rise of Prussia and its Relation to Modern Ger-
man Politics. The second year comprises a study of Cicero's Republic,
with lectures on Roman institutions of government, municipal and
provincial, as representative of ancient politics, and of French political
philosophy and of French revolutions as illustrative of modern poli-
tics. The third year opens with a study of Teutonic institutions, as
described by Tacitus and as revealed in early codes of law. The course
continues with the development of those institutions into the English
and American constitutional forms of government During the com-
ing year, the graduate work will be in the Germanic, especially in the
Anglo American field. The class is examined orally upon the lectures,
from day to day ; and, once a month, a written examination is held
upon assigned periods of political history, read privately, so that the
lectures on institutional history may be properly supplemented.
3. Elements of Historical Criticism.
Once weekly, through the year, by Dr. J. F. Jameson.
The object of this course will be to expose systematically and with due
illustration the elementary principles of modern historical criticism, in
order to afford the graduate students of history a fuller knowledge of the
best methods now employed in critical investigation. It is intended
that the instruction given in lectures shall be accompanied by practical
exercises on the part of the class.
4. Historical Writing in America.
Dr. J. F. Jameson will give a course of four public lectures in Hopkins
Hall, on the history of historical writing in America from the period
of colonization to the present time.
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
133
5. Finance and Taxation.
Three hours weekly, through the year, irilh Dr. II. T. Ely.
This course for graduates, three times weekly, MCOnd year, is adapted to
students of law aad to others who have followed the preliminary in-
struction in Political Economy. It comprises lectures on the general
principles and history of money, banking and finance. Special atten-
tion will be given during the coming year to the subject of taxation in
the cities and States of the American Onion, and the course will con-
clude with a sketch of the financial history of the United States. It
includes a series of class lectures by the students on the various topics
of the course, and occasionally debates are encouraged on such subjects
as monometallism and bimetallism.
(i. Studies in Administration.
Weekly, through the year, with Dr. Ely.
A general view of French administration will be treated and special atten-
tion will Be given to charities and sanitary administration.
7. Roman Law.
Iwo hours weekly through the year, with Mr. G. H. Emmott.
The topics treated of will be :
The history and sources of the Roman law; the law of the family; the
law of things; the law of wills; the law of contract ; forms of contract ;
the law of procedure. The course will be taught in part by lectures,
and, in addition to the authorities named below, the results of the
investigations of Austin, Clark, Markby, Holland, and Maine, as well
as of the most recent French and German scholarship will be placed
before the class. Subjects will be given out from time to time upon
which essays and oral reports will be expected.
Books of Reference. — Abdy and Walker's or Poste's Institutes of Gaius, Moyle's Institutes
of Justinian, Hunter's Roman Law, Ortolan's Explication Historiquedes Institute.
Ante: — Historical Courses in French, German, and Italian. Graduate students are
required to obtain a sufficient knowledge of the modern languages to read at least
French and German at sight. To this end special advantages are offered by the
courses of historical readings in the Romance and German departments (French and
Italian each for one hour, and German for two hours a week through the year).
II. Undergraduate Courses.
History.
Introductory.
1. History and Physical Geography.
Three hours weekly, through the. year, with Dr. H. B. Adams and Dr. J. F.
Jameson.
This is part of the son-ailed " P. II. E." course, which includes English
with Physical Geography and History, and is required of all under-
graduates during the first year of their college work. It is practically
a continuation of the English studies required for matriculation, but it
lays a broader and deeper basis. Fifteen introductory lectures are
given by Dr. H. B. Adams upon the Origin of Civilization, Egypt,
Mesopotamia, India, Palestine, and Phoenicia, with oral and written
examinations upon the same, and upon Keary's Dawn of History.
Physical Geography is taught by Dr. J. F. Jameson who gives fifteen
class lectures on its relations to History, upon which the students are
examined. Students who have presented classical history for matricu-
lation may take a modern course of two hours a week through the year
in European history; but those who present the modern course for
matriculation are required to pursue classical history (Fyfie's Greece
and Leighton's Rome) two hours a week throughout the year, with Dr.
Jameson. For the instruction given in English literature and English
prose style, see English courses.
First Year.
2. Classical Course in History.
Fire hours weekly, through the year, with Dr. Warren, Dr. Spieker, and
Dr. Jameson.
Students who elect History and Politics for their principal subjects are
required to lay classical foundations for their future work by attending
four exercises weekly in the classical department, during the first year
of their college course, for the reading of Livy and Tacitus in the
original texts. A fifth hour is devoted to examinations by Dr. Jame-
son upon Herodotus and Thucydides, which arc read privately by the
ilis iii English translations.
This course is quite distinct from the text-book course with Dr. Jameson in Greek tnd
EUhdm History (see note under course 1) although parallel with it. An acquaintance
with the sources of davlca] history, Greek politics, and the Latin language is
regarded as essential for all students of ecclesiastical and inedtfoval history, as well as
of Roman law and institutions.
Second Year.
3. Modern Course in History.
Five hours weekly, through tlie year, with Dr. II. B. Adams and Dr. J. F.
Jameson.
This forms the second year's course in History for matriculated students
and cannot be taken until after the " P. H. E." and the Classical course
in History have been completed, except in the case of special students
of marked ability. Two hours a week through the year are devoted to
the History of the Church in its relations to the Roman Empire, the
Germanic kingdoms and the German Empire, to the study of ecclesi-
astical and political institutions, the rise of the Italian Republics, the
Italian Renaissance and its influence upon the German Reformation.
Three hours a week throughout the year are given to a 'course in the
parallel study of the mediaeval and modern history of England and
France, with Dr. J. F. Jameson. Lectures will be given, and essays
ami reports required.
Besides class lectures, upon which the students are examined, the following text-books
are employed : liryce's Holy Roman Empire, Green's Short History of the English
People, and the Student's France. Students are also examined upon select chapters
of one of the following courses of private reading: (1) Mihnan's Latin Chrisiianity,
(2) Gibbon's Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, (:t) Symonds' Renaissani *• in
Italy, (4) Motley's Rise of the Dutch Republic and History of the United Netherlands.
Five historical essays and numerous oral reports upon assigned topics are also
required before the completion of the historical course.
Political Science.
4. Elements of Political Economy.
Three hours weekly through the year, with Dr. R. T. Ely.
This subject is taken up in the second year of the college course parallel
with the course in European History. The instruction consists of text-
book exercises (John Stuart Mill and Walker, with occasional refer-
ences to other works).
The members of the class are examined on assigned lessons and difficult
points are carefully explained by the instructor. Essays and discus-
sions by the class upon topics suggested by these exercises constitute an
important feature of the course. The aim is to familiarize the students
with the general principles of economics and with their application.
Reference-lists are given to the members of the class by the instructor,
to aid them in the preparation of essays.
5. Modern Financial and Social Topics.
Two hours a week through the second year, with Dr. Ely.
This class-work is taken conjointly with the course described above. It
consists of familiar talks by Dr. Ely on questions of the day, which are
treated historically and critically.
The course embraces also exercises and problems in economics, which are
designed to teach the members of the class to apply general principles
to practical affairs and to train them in habits of correct reasoning.
The genera] aim of both courses is to familiarize the students with the
historical development of modern social theories and the main results
of economic research, and to enable them to discuss economic affairs
intelligently.
6. Elements of International Law.
Two hours a week, through the third year, with Dr. H. B. Adams.
This course is taken conjointly with the class course, three hours a week,
in the English and American Constitutions. Introductory lectures are
given on the History of International Law and Politics, after which,
Bltnitschli's Moderue Voelkerreeht der < 'irilixirt. n Staten is expounded.
The study, as here pursued, requires a reading acquaintance with French and German,
which languages must be acquired before the end of the second year of the college
course. Members of the class are required to report on assigned topics of diplomatic
history and contemporary international questions.
134
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
7. The English and American Constitutions.
Three times weekly, through the year, with Dr. Jameson.
A course in the study of the development and present forms of constitu-
tional government in England and the United States.
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
I. Seminary Work.
The Seminary of History and Politics, under the guidance of
Dr. H. B. Adams, with twenty regular members (three instructors
and seventeen graduate students), has met Friday evenings for a
session of two hours, throughout the academic year. The work
of the Seminary, as in former years, has been chiefly in the field of
American Governmental Institutions and of Historical Economics.
Special attention has been given to colonial beginnings, municipal
development, agrarian history, the railway problem, the origin
and growth of historical and political studies in this country.
Practical inquiries into methods of federal administration have been
encouraged, particularly in regard to the Land Office, the Bureau of
Labor, the Bureau of Education, the Office of the President, and of
the Civil Service Commission. Valuable aid has been given by indi-
vidual representatives of these federal institutions, notably by Hon.
Dorman B. Eaton.
The following contributions to the Seminary Proceedings are soon to be
published: (1) The Study of History in American Colleges and Uni-
versities, historically considered, — a series of papers by Dr. H. B.
Adams, to be published, first, in "Education" (May, June, July, etc.,
1886) and, second, by the Bureau of Education. (2) A series of three
articles on American Railways and one on American Socialism, by
Dr. B. T. Ely, the former to be published in Harper's Magazine,
July, August, and September, 1886, and the latter in the North
American Review. (3) Willem Usselinx, Founder of the Dutch and
Swedish West India Companies, a monograph based upon new mate-
rials from foreign archives, by Dr. J. F. Jameson, to be published
by the American Historical Association. (4) American Political Econ-
omy before the time of Henry C. Carey, by Davis R. Dewey, Fellow of
History, a contribution to the joint History of Economic Thought in
the United States by Messrs. Ely, Wilson, and Dewey. (5) The Repub-
lic of New Haven (a History of Municipal Evolution) by Charles H.
Levermore, Fellow in History, 1885-6. (6) History of the Land Ques-
tion in the United States, or the Formation and Administration of the
Public Domain (to be published in the Studies, July, August, and Sep-
tember, 1886), by Shosuke Sato, Fellow by Courtesy, J. H. U., and a
recent appointee in the colonial department of Japan.
II. Publications.
The publication of the Johns Hopkins University Studies in
Historical and Political Science began in 1882, under the edi-
torial direction of Dr. H. B. Adams. This monthly series of
monographs, devoted to American Institutions of Government
and Historical Economics, is the main means of publication for
seminary work, although but one of the works above mentioned
will take this channel. Three volumes of the Studies have hitherto
been published, averaging about 600 pages each. The fourth vol-
ume is half completed.
The first volume is devoted to " Local Institutions." The second volume
includes " Institutions anil Economics." The third is entitled "Mary-
land, Virginia, and Washington." It comprises a new and revised
edition of H. B. Adams' study of " Maryland's Influence upon Land
Cessions to the United States," which was introductory to more recent
seminary studies in the agrarian history of the United States; the
Local Institutions of Maryland and Virginia, by Dr. L. W. Wilhelm,
sometime Fellow of History, and Edward Ingle, A. B., embracing
studies of colonial land systems, hundreds, parishes, counties, towns;
Influence of the Proprietors in founding the State of New Jersey, by
Professor Austin Scott, formerly of this University; American Consti-
tutions, by Horace Davis, A. B. Harvard, with comparisons between
State and federal government ; and the Origin and Administration of
the City of Washington, by John Addison Porter, A. B. Yale.
III. Class Courses.
Dr. H. B. Adams has been in charge of the department of
Historical and Political Science and has conducted the following
courses :
1. The Seminary, two hours a week, as above described.
2. A class of eighteen graduate students, two hours a week
throughout the year, — the first half-year, in the History of Roman
Politics, and the second half-year, in the History of French Politics.
This was a course of class-lectures, with a brief oral examination before
each lecture upon the substance of the preceding lecture. The course
began with an account of the renaissance of Roman History and Roman
Politics since Niebuhr's lectures in Berlin, 1811, and the discovery of
Cicero's Republic in 1822. The lecturer reviewed the institutions of
the royal period as described by Livy, and then treated, in the light
of modern authorities, the methods of Roman government by the sen-
ate, popular assemblies, and magistrates throughout the republican
period, showing the degeneration of politics under the empire. Par-
ticular attention was given to the agrarian laws ; the colonial, muni-
cipal, and provincial systems of Koine ; and to the extension of Roman
citizenship. The course on French Politics dealt chiefly with the rise
of absolute monarchy, the reproduction of Roman ideas of sovereignty
and administration, the decay of French nobility, and the rise of the
Third Estate.
3. Monthly written examinations of the graduate students upon
stated periods of general history, beginning with that of Greece.
This exercise has been found exceedingly profitable and highly satisfac-
tory to the graduate students, who have thus been required to read, or
review, general history in a systematic way, without interfering unduly
with more special work.
4. A class of four graduate and thirteen undergraduate stu-
dents two hours a week throughout the year ; the first half-year,
in the History of the Church in its relations to the Roman and
German Empires ; second half-year, in the Rise of the Italian
Republics, the Renaissance, and the Beginnings of the Refor-
mation.
This class forms one portion of the Major History, or second year's course
(the first being in classical historians, — Herodotus, Thucydides, Livy,
and Tacitus). The other portion is Dr. Jameson's course in French
and English History, described under the head of his work. Dr.
Adams' class work has been, first, by lectures; second, by oral exam-
inations upon the lectures and assigned topics in the Student's Ecclesi-
astical History and in Bryce's Holy Roman Empire ; and, third, by
student essays upon appointed themes, reported orally in class, with
a black-board analysis which aided students to take notes. Written
examinations upon every portion of the work were required.
5. A class of ten undergraduate and five graduate students in
the History and Elements of International Law, two hours a week
throughout the year.
This work is associated with that of Dr. Jameson in the English and
American Constitutions. It is one factor in the Political Science Major
(second year, the first year of Political Science being Political Econ-
omy). Dr. Adams gave a course of lectures on the History of inter-
tribal, intermunicipal, and international relations, introductory to the
study of the elements of international law, which was pursued by means
of the text-book of Dr. Woolsey. The class made a special study of
the history of treatises. Various essays on the Diplomatic History of
July, 1886.]
UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
135
the United States were reported orally, after the manner described
under course 4.
6. A class of forty-two undergraduates in Ante-classic History,
one hour a week, first half-year.
The idea of this course is to give an historical introduction to the so-
called "P. H. E." course, which consists of Physical Geography, Clas-
sical or Modern European History, and English. The introductory
lectures by Dr. Adams related to the early history of society, the more
interesting aspects of such ancient peoples as the Egyptians, the Baby-
lonians, the Assyrians, and other oriental nations. The lectures were
illustrated by objects from the historical museum, e. jr. by the Ellinger
collection of stone and bronze relies and by the Cohen collection of
Egyptian antiquities. One lecture was given to the class by Mr. Adler,
Fellow in the Shemitic Languages, on ancient Babylonia.
Dr. R. T. Ely has given the following courses :
1. Lectures in Advanced Political Economy, to graduate stu-
dents, two hours weekly, first half-year, and three hours weekly
throughout the second half-year.
This course opened with a discussion of the fundamental principles of
political economy, including the logical method of the sciences. The
nature and proper application of the inductive, deductive, and statistical
methods were treated at length. This was followed by a brief review of
the history of political economy. The course closed with lectures on
the historical development of trades and manufactures. Members of
the class prepared ami presented student-lectures. Among the subjects
treated were, Luxury, Economic Laws, Ethics and Economics, the
State and Economics, and Charles Perin.
2. Comparative Studies in Administration, once weekly through
the year.
This course consisted of lectures on the administration of the interior in
England, France, and Prussia, and included a treatment of administra-
tive courts.
3. A course of class instruction to undergraduate students in the
Elements of Political Economy and in Modern Social Problems,
live hours a week through the year.
The instruction was based on the text-books of John Stuart Mill and
Francis A. Walker, with references to works by Cossa, Laveleye, and
others. Occasional written exercises, in addition to oral and written
examinations, formed a feature of the course. Two essays upon assigned
topics were required from each member of the class. Among the sub-
jects of essays were the following: Hanking in England, the National
Banking System in the United States, the Wage Fund Theory, Paper
Money, Robert Owen, the Sub-Treasury System, Wages.
Dr. J. F. Jameson has conducted class courses as follows :
1. History of Greece, of Rome, and of the Roman Empire
down to the fifth century a.d., twice weekly throughout the year.
Fyffe's Greece and Leighton's Rome were used, and lectures were given.
This work formed part of the " P. J I. E." course.
2. Study of the Relations of Physical Geography to History,
once weekly during the second half-year.
This also formed an element of the " P. H. E." course.
3. Thucydides in English translation, once a week during the
second half-year, in continuation of the work done in Herodotus
with Professor C. D. Morris.
4. History of England and France, three times weekly through-
out the year.
Green's Short History of the English People and the Student's History
of France were used as text books, and supplemented by informal lec-
tures. Essays and reports were required. This course, with that of
Dr. Adams' on the Church, the Empire, and the Renaissance, consti-
tuted the second year of history.
5. The Constitutions of England and the United States, three
times weekly through the year.
This formed, in connection with Dr. Adams' course in international law, the
second year of political science. During the first half-year Walpole's
Electorate and Legislature, Traill's Central Government, and Bage-
hot's English Constitution were used as text-books, and lectures were
given. During the second half-year the Constitution of 1789, the
present forms of government, and the course of constitutional develop-
ment in the intervening period were studied without text-book.
Mr. W. P. Holcomb gave a course of class instruction, two
hours a week throughout the year, in the Outlines of European
History.
This was in the " P. H. E." course and was offered as a substitute for
Greek and Roman History to those who presented Classical History
for matriculation.
PSYCHOLOGY AND PEDAGOGICS; LOGIC AND ETHICS.
PROGRAMMES FOR 1886-87.
Psychology and Pedagogics.
Professor G. Stanley Hall will conduct the following
courses for advanced students : —
1. General Systematic Psychology. Semi-weekly lectures and
weekly conferences through the year.
The lectures will begin with a few special problems in physiological
optics to make connexion with the course of the preceding year, which
was entirely devoted to the senses. The work of the coming year
includes such topics as compound reflex action and instinct in animals,
memory, association of ideas, attention, volition, and aesthetic and
general feeling and emotion. The contributions of psycho and neuro-
pathology to the understanding of normal function and histology of
the cerebrospinal nervous system will receive special attention. The
psychology and pathology of speech and writing will be illustrated.
Much attention will also be given to the psychical parts of anthro-
pology and its present problems, methods, and results, including recent
studies on the evolution of the psychic faculties in children and the
race. This will introduce the psychology of national and other com-
prehensive systems of opinion and thought and, in short, the endeavor
will be to give as briefly as possible, with the many demonstrations,
experiments, and illustrations involved in parts of the course, a brief
survey of the vast field of modern scientific psychology, which, while
leaving out nothing essential in the old philosophical disciplines, vivi-
fies them by bringing to them a new standpoint, a new method, and a
vast body of pregnant and experimentally demonstrated facts.
This course is intended for special students of psychology, and they should
have at least such an acquaintance with elementary Logic, Ethics, and
Psychology, as maybe acquired in the undergraduate courses of this
and other collegiate institutions. Students of biology and of medicine
who desire to study the psychic functions of animals, and especially of
man, may attend this course. A limited number of qualified students
will be encouraged to investigate certain themes in the rooms devoted
to psycho-physical research, where suitable instruments are provided.
The apparatus for the study of dermal sensations and for fine chrono-
graphic work is quite complete. Arrangements have been made by
which the results of investigations may be published in Mind.
136
JOHNS HOPKINS
[No. 51.
2. Pedagogics. A weekly lecture and conference through the year.
This course embraces two years' work. That of the past year on the his-
tory of educational institutions and theories is the first year of this
course. The second, which is to begin next year, is on select chap-
ters and problems in education, and will comprise a survey of various
grades and topics of teaching, special institutions, etc., including the
present questions pertaining to industrial, moral, professional, female,
gymnasial education &c. This course, and especially next year's work, is
designed to be helpful to all who are fitting themselves to teach special-
ties in higher educational institutions, and if found feasible a practical
seminary will be conducted.
3. History of Philosophy. Continuing from the history of Greek
philosophy given during the past year, the next year's work will
be devoted both in seminary and lectures to the general field of
the history of modern philosophy. This course is intended not
only for special students of philosophy, but also for students of
literature, science, and especially history.
Logic and Ethics.
Preliminary Announcement.
The courses in Logic and Ethics will be given by Mr. G. H.
Emmott, Associate Professor (elect) of Logic and Ethics (A. B.
and B. L., University of Cambridge (Eng.), 1879, and A. M.,
1882, and recently Associate and Lecturer in Owens College,
Manchester). Mr. Emmott will reach Baltimore before the open-
ing of the academic year, when more detailed announcements
will be made.
Undergraduate courses will be given in :
1. Deductive and Inductive Logic.
(a) Province and Definition of Logic ; (6) The Terms of Thought :
Notion, Judgment, Keasoning; (c) Methods of Scientific Investigation
and Proof; (d) Fallacies. The work in this class will consist of lec-
tures, recitations, themes, epitomes, etc.
Tcxi-Bookt: Thomson's Outlines ot the Laws of Thought, Fowler's Elements of Induc-
tive Logic, with selected passages from the works of Mill, Jevons, and other recent
writers.
2. Ethics.
In this class the fundamental problems of Moral Philosophy, and their
application to the guidance of conduct, will be considered with special
reference to the Christian theory of morals. The subject will be taught
in part by lectures and, whilst keeping to a scientific basis, the aim
throughout will be to make the instruction of a directly practical nature.
Books of Reference : Porter's Elements of Moral Science, Martensen's Christian Ethics,
Maurice's .Social Morality, Wuttke's History of Christian Kthics. Selected passages
from other staudard writers will also be recommended, from time to time.
Mr. Emmott will also give' a course in Roman Law (see
announcement under History and Political Science, on p. 133.)
WORK OF THE PAST YEAR, 1885-86.
Professor Hall lectured once weekly the first half-year and
twice weekly through the last half-year on the senses, beginning
witli touch. Demonstration exercises were held, conducted by
Dr. Donaldson and others in connection with this work.
Three advanced students were engaged in original psycho-
physic research, the results of which will be made public in due
time.
A weekly conference in psycho-physics was held on morbid psy-
chology, and on the finer anatomy of the brain and spinal cord.
Dr. H. H. Donaldson lectured weekly on the relation between
psychology and general biology, and conducted, twice weekly,
demonstrations in the practical histology of the central nervous
system.
Professor Hall lectured once weekly through the year on the
history of education, beginning with Greece, and covering topics
of which a classified, descriptive bibliography now in press will
serve as a syllabus.
A course of educational lectures by various members of the
Academic Faculty was given Saturday mornings to graduate stu-
dents and was largely attended.
Professor Hall lectured weekly through the year on the history
of Greek philosophy and especially psychology.
In connection with this course a conference was held weekly
for the more careful study and discussion of selected themes in
Greek Philosophy.
The daily work of the undergraduate courses, designated as the
L. E. P. course, was conducted as follows :
Professor Morris taught Logic, both inductive and deductive,
during the first term. Professor Hall taught Ethics with Mayor's
Greek Philosophy, and Psychology with Ladd's translation of
Lotze's dictation as a basis during the remainder of the year.
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are published at con-
venient intervals during the academic year for the purpose of communica-
ting intelligence to the various members of the University in respect to
work which is here in progress, as well as for the purpose of promulgating
official announcements from the governing and teaching bodies. During
the current academic year, ten circulars will be issued in successive months,
to be followed at the close of the year by an index.
Although these circulars are designed for the members of the University,
they have frequently been called for by institutions and libraries at a dis-
tance, and also by individuals who arc interested in the literary and scien-
tific activity of this University. Subscriptions and exchanges are therefore
received.
TERMS OF SUBSCRIPTION,
for the current year 1885-8'i, $1.
Foe the year 1884-85 (134 pp. in cloth covers), $1.50.
For the year 1883-84 (140 pp. in cloth covers), $1.50.
For the year 1882-83 (156 pp. in cloth covers), $3.00.
For the years 1879-82 (250 pp. in cloth covers), $5.00.
Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the Annual Register and
Report of the University.
All subscriptions should be addressed to the Publication Agency of the
Johns Hopkins University.
Communications for the Circulars should be sent in prior to the first day
of the month in which they are expected to appear.
UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1886-87.
The tenth academic year closed Tuesday, June 15, 1886.
The eleventh academic year begins on Friday, October 1, 1886, and con-
tinues till June 15, 1887.
The Autumn Examinations for Admission will begin Friday, October 1,
at 9 a. m.
There will be a Christmas Recess, beginning on Friday, December 24,
and ending on Monday, January 3 ; — also a Spring Recess, beginning on
Friday, April 8.
July, 1886.] UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS. 137
INFORMATION FOR APPLICANTS FOR ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY.
Printed in response to Letters.
GENERAL STATEMENTS.
How was the University founded?
The Johns Hopkins University was instituted by the munificence of a citizen of Baltimore, Johns Hopkins, who
bequeathed the most of his large estate for the establishment of a University and a Hospital. The foundation of the
University is a capital, in land and stocks, estimated in value at more than three million dollars ; the capital of
the Hospital is not less in amount. The University was incorporated under the laws of the State of Maryland,
August 24, 1867, and it was opened for instruction in September, 1876. The Philosophical Faculty (of Letters and
Science) is now organized. The organization of the medical department has been begun.
In what is instruction given?
Systematic instruction is offered in English, Anglo-Saxon, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Latin, Greek, Sanskrit,
Hebrew, Arabic, and in other languages and literatures ; in Pure and Applied Mathematics ; in Chemistry, (Inorganic and
Organic) with laboratory work; in Physics, (including Mechanics, Light, Heat, Sound, Electricity, Magnetism, etc.) with
laboratory work; in Biology, (including Physiology and Morphology) with laboratory work; in Pathology; in Mineralogy
and Geology ; in Ancient and Modern History ; in Physical Geography ; in Political Economy and in the elements of
International Law; in Logic, Ethics, Psychology, Pedagogics, etc. Occasional courses of lectures are also given upon
special themes in Literature, Science, History, Archaeology, Art, etc.
To whom is this instruction offered?
To all young men who are prepared to profit by it and who will conform to the simple regulations which are
established by the authorities. Graduate, Undergraduate, and Special Students are received.
Those who have not already received an academic degree, should aim to secure one by pursuing a liberal and pro-
longed course of study, at the close of which the degree of Bachelor of Arts will be conferred. Those who may be
prevented from seeking this degree, will nevertheless be welcomed to the University, provided that they are in earnest and
are mature enough in years, attainments, and character to profit by the advantages which are here afforded. Others who
have already taken their first degree are encouraged to go forward in advanced lines of work, and for them unusual
facilities are provided. Young men who are to pursue the study of Law, Medicine, or Theology, or who have entered
upon professional lives, and others who expect to become teachers, if they desire to increase their knowledge of literature
and science, have easy access to the class-rooms and laboratories. The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be
obtained, after three years of advanced study, by those who have met the required conditions.
How is this instruction given ?
By all the methods which experience has shown to be useful, — varying according to the preferences of the teachers,
the subjects taught, and the number of scholars. There are recitations, lectures, conferences, prolonged courses in
laboratories, exercises in special libraries, personal counsel, study of nature out-of-doors. The usual four-year classes
are not maintained, but in all the principal subjects taught, there are beginners, intermediate students, and advanced
workers ; so that every scholar is assigned to that position in each section of the university which will yield him the
greatest advantages. He may be far advanced in one subject and only a beginner in another. This result is only secured
by the engagement of a large staff" of teachers.
What are the Laboratory and Library Facilities?
The scientific laboratories are three in number. They are open throughout the day and are fully equipped. For
Chemistry, there is a special building arranged for about ninety workers, and well adapted to all kinds of chemical and
mineralogical work. A large building has been constructed for a Biological Laboratory, with complete arrangements
for physiological and morphological work. The Physical Department is furnished with apparatus selected both for
demonstration and investigation, and especially valuable for researches in electricity, magnetism, light, and heat. The
construction of a new building for the Physical Laboratory is now in progress.
138 JOHNS HOPKINS [No. 51.
The Library includes over twenty-nine thousand bound volumes, and eight hundred serials are regularly received.
It is open thirteen hours daily. The Library of the Peabody Institute, with eighty-six thousand volumes, and the
other Baltimore libraries are of easy access. Washington is so near that the Library of Congress, the National
Museum, and the other libraries and museums of the capital may be readily visited.
What are the necessary expenses of a Student?
The charge for tuition in all departments, (including the use of the library, and without any extra charges except
twenty dollars for materials consumed in the laboratories), is one hundred dollars per annum, payable one-half October 1,
and the other half February 1.
Young men living in any part of Baltimore, or in the immediate vicinity, can lodge at home, as the first lessons
are given at nine a. m. daily, and there is rarely any required exercise as late as five p. m. Young men from a distance
can readily find rooms and good board either in private dwellings or in boarding houses. It is possible to secure
accommodations (room and board) for five or six dollars per week, and for a sum between six and ten dollars per
week it is still easier to be suited. The other necessary expenses of life are moderate.
Are there any scholarships?
In accordance with the request of the founder of the University, twenty Hopkins Scholarships, giving free tuition,
are open to matriculated undergraduate students from Maryland, Virginia, and North Carolina. In addition to these,
there are eighteen Honorary Hopkins Scholarships, yielding two hundred and fifty dollars and free tuition, also open
to matriculated undergraduate students from the three States named. Of these thirty-eight scholarships, ten are open
to students at the beginning of the college course; fourteen (of which nine are Honorary) at the close of the first
year; and fourteen again (of which nine are Honorary) at the close of the second year, tenable in all cases for the
year subsequent to the appointment. For further information, consult the Eegister where the conditions of appointment
are fully stated.
GRADUATE COURSES.
What special opportunities are offered to University Students?
Advanced and graduate students are received with or without reference to their being candidates for a degree, and
they are permitted to attend such lectures and exercises as they may select. They are not examined for admission to
the University, but each instructor satisfies himself of the attainments of all who wish to follow his guidance
before admitting them to his classes.
Systematic courses of instruction, varying every year, are announced in the annual programme. The professors
are free to give personal counsel and instruction to those who seek it; books and instruments adapted to investigation
and advanced work have been liberally provided ; the system of Fellowships secures the presence of twenty special students
imbued with the university spirit, most of them looking forward to academic careers ; seminaries limited to a few advanced
students under the guidance of a director have been organized in various subjects ; societies devoted to Philology, to Mathe-
matical, Physical, and Natural Science, to Metaphysics, to History and Political Science, and to Archaeology, afford oppor-
tunities for the presentation of memoirs and original communications, and there are also clubs for the reading and discussion
of biological, physical, and chemical papers ; during the year, courses of lectures are given by resident and non-resident pro-
fessors on topics to which they have given special attention; the libraries of the Peabody Institute and Maryland His-
torical Society, founded for the advantage of scholars, are easily accessible ; the issuing under the auspices of the Trustees,
of publications devoted to Mathematics, Chemistry, Philology, Biology, and History, brings the University into advan-
tageous connection with other foundations; special libraries connected with the seminaries bring the most important
works within easy reach of the student, and the University reading-room, which is constantly open, is liberally supplied
with new and with standard books and with the literary and scientific journals of this and other lands.
On What conditions is the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy conferred ?
The degree of Doctor of Philosophy and Master of Arts is conferred upon candidates who (after having
taken their first degree) have pursued university studies, for three years, under approved conditions, have passed the
required examinations and presented a satisfactory thesis. At least the last year of study must be spent in this
University.
July, 1886.] UTflVEJiSITY CIBCULARS. 139
How are the Fellowships awarded ?
Twenty fellowships are annually open to competition, each yielding five hundred dollars and exempting the holder
from all charges for tuition. A statement of the rules governing the awards will be sent if requested. Applications
for the next year must reach the University before May 1, 1887.
COLLEGE COURSES.
Is there what is commonly known as a college course ?
There are seven parallel courses, by following any one of which a matriculated student may attain the
degree of Bachelor of Arts. This plan combines the advantages of choice and restriction. From the variety of
courses laid down, the scholar elects that which he prefers; having made his choice he finds a definite sequence of
studies provided for him. The University marks out for those who elect a classical course, such a plan for
the reading of Latin and Greek authors, sometimes with a teacher and sometimes privately, as will enable all
who follow it to excel in these studies, while it requires that they should also learn to read French and German,
and pursue during one year a course in science. It likewise provides a training which is mainly scientific, enabling
the student to concentrate his attention chiefly on Chemistry, or Biology, or Mathematics, or Physics; but with
these studies he must combine the study of Languages, History, and Philosophy.
Every matriculated student is expected to follow, under the guidance of an adviser to whom he is specially
assigned, one of these prescribed courses which are fully described in the Register. Some elect the classical course.
Others may concentrate their main attention upon the ' higher branches of Mathematics. Courses are arranged
also for those who wish to devote themselves chiefly to Chemistry and Physics. For those who expect at
a later day to take up the study of medicine, there is a special course marked out, in which Biology is the
dominant subject. Arrangements are also made in other courses for the study of History and Political Science
and of the Modern Languages and Literatures.
What is required for admission to the College Courses ?
Undergraduates who wish to enter, either as matriculates, candidates for matriculation, students in tl\£ preliminary
medical course, or as special students, must begin by satisfying the University that they have been thoroughly taught the
English studies which are usual in good high schools, academies, and private schools, including a knowledge of Arithmetic
(with the metric system); Geography, physical and political; the outlines of the History of the United States; English
grammar and composition. The candidate for matriculation must also pass an examination in : —
1, Latin; 2, Greek, (or French and German); 3, Mathematics (Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry, Analytical
Geometry) ; 4, English ; 5, History ; 6, Natural Science. Those who do not intend to follow the classical course may offer
French and German instead of Greek.
Can a student be aided in completing his studies for matriculation?
If a student at his admission passes in a considerable part of the matriculation requirements, he may post-
pone the remainder for a time. If he is well up in Algebra and Geometry, he may join the university classes in
Trigonometry and Analytical Geometry ; if he is a good scholar in Latin and Greek but has not read all the authors
requisite for matriculation, he may receive instruction in these authors from the University ; if he has not already
acquired the elements of French and German, he will be aided in doing so, in order that he may enter the courses
here provided.
A. student may also pass a part of the matriculation examination one year before his admission to the Univer-
sity and receive, under certain conditions-, credit for the same.
When will the next examinations be held ?
Examinations for admission will begin Friday, October 1, at nine a. m. Those who pass the preliminary examina-
tion in English studies acceptably will be subsequently examined in such of the other studies as they are ready to offer.
For further information consult the Annual Register of the University for 1885-86.
140
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY CIRCULARS.
[No. 51.
PUBLICATIONS ISSUED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE UNIVERSITY.
I. American Journal of Mathematics.
The publication of this journal commenced in 1878, under the
editorial direction of Professor Sylvester. It is now conducted
by Professor Simon Newcomb, as Editor, and Dr. T. Craig, as
Associate Editor. Seven volumes of about 400 pages each have
been issued and the eighth is in progress. It appears quarterly,
in the quarto form. Subscription $5 per year. Single numbers
$1.50.
II. American Chemical Journal.
This journal was commenced in 1879, with Professor Kemsen
as Editor. Seven volumes of about 450 pages each have been
issued and the eighth is in progress. It appears bi-monthly. Sub-
scription $3 per year. Single numbers 50 cents.
III. American Journal of Philology.
The publication of this journal commenced in 1880, under the
editorial direction of Professor Gildersleeve. Six volumes of
about 570 pages each have been issued, and the seventh is in pro-
gress. It appears four times yearly. Subscription $3 per volume.
Single numbers 81.00.
IV. Studies from the Biological Laboratory.
(Including the Chesapeake Zoological Laboratory.)
The publication of these papers commenced in 1879, under the
direction of Professor Martin, with the assistance of Dr. W. K.
Brooks. Two volumes of about 500 pages octavo, and 40 plates
each, have been issued, and the third is in progress. Subscription
$5.00 per volume.
V. Studies in Historical and Political Science.
The publication of these papers was begun in 1882, under the
editorial direction of Dr. H. B. Adams. A first series of 470
pages, a second of 630 pages and a third series of 595 pages are
now completed, and a fourth series is in progress. Subscription
$3 per volume.
VI. Johns Hopkins University Circulars.
The publication of the Circulars began in December, 1879, and
fifty numbers have since been issued. Subscription $1 per year.
Subscribers to the Circulars will also receive the Annual Register
and the Annual Report of the University.
VII. Annual Report.
Presented by the President to the Board of Trustees, reviewing
the operations of the University during the past academic year.
VIII. Annual Register.
Giving the list of the officers and students, and containing detailed
statements as to the regulations and work of the University.
Announcements of proposed lectures, courses of instruction,
etc., appear in the University Circulars, or are separately issued
as Programmes from time to time.
During the year 188-5-86, in addition to the current journals
named above, there have been issued by the University :
Photograph of the Normal Solar Spectrum. Made by Professor
H. A. Rowland. Set of seven plates unmounted $10, mounted
$12; single plates unmounted $2, mounted $2.25.
Reproduction in Phototype of a Syriac MS. with the Antilegomena
Epistles. (Including seventeen phototype pages, each on a separate
leaf, besides additional pages containing descriptive and explana-
tory matter.) Edited by Dr. I. H. Hall. 250 copies. $3.
Communications in respect to exchanges and remit-
tances may be sent to the Johns Hopkins University {Pub-
lication agency,) Baltimore, Maryland.
CONTENTS.
General Programme for 1886-87,
Mathematics :
PAGE
113-114
Programme for 1886-87,
Work of the Past Year,
Physics :
Programme for lg86-87,
Work of the Past Year,
Chemistry :
Programme for 1886-87,
Work of the Past Year,
Mineralogy and Geology :
Programme for 1886-87,
Work of the Past Year,
Biology:
Programme for 1886-87,
Work of the Past Year,
Pathology :
Programme for 1886-87,
Ancient and Modern Languages :
Greek
Latin
Shemitic Languages, .
Sanskrit, etc., ....
{Programmes for 1886-87) : •
115
115
116
118
118
119
120
120
120
122
123
124
124
125
125
German
English
Romance Languages,
Ancient and Modern Languages: ( Work of the Past Year):
Greek
Latin
Shemitic Languages, .
Sanskrit, etc
German, . .
English
Romance Languages,
History and Politics :
Programme for 1886-87,
Work of the Past Year,
Psychology and Pedagogics :
Programme for 1886-87, ........
Work of the Past Year
Logic and Ethics :
Preliminary Announcement, .......
University Calendar,
Information for Applicants for Admission :
General Statements, '
Graduate Courses, . . . . - . . . .
College Courses,
PAGE
125
126
127
128
128
129
129
130
130
131
132
134
135
136
136
136
137
138
139
The Johns Hopkins University Circulars are printed by Messrs. JOHN MURPHY & CO., No. 182 West Baltimore Street, Baltimore,
from whom single copies may be obtained. They may also be procured from Messrs. CUSHINGS & BAILEY, No. 202 West
Baltimore Street, Baltimore.
.»>!
■
YiWy.
\it\
ml
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11